Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Colaw Stores accepts both its own and national credit cards. During the year, the following selected summary transactions occurred.
|
Jan. 15
|
Made Colaw credit card sales totaling $18,000. (There were no balances prior to January 15.)
|
|
20
|
Made Visa credit card sales (service charge fee 2%) totaling $4,500.
|
|
Feb. 10
|
Collected $10,000 on Colaw credit card sales.
|
|
15
|
Added finance charges of 1.5% to Colaw credit card account balances.
|
Instructions
(a)Journalize the transactions for Colaw Stores.
(b)Indicate the statement presentation of the financing charges and the credit card service charge expense for Colaw Stores.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vandiver Company had the following select transactions.
|
Apr.1, 2014
|
Accepted Goodwin Company”s 12-month, 12% note in settlement of a $30,000 account receivable.
|
|
July1, 2014
|
Loaned $25,000 cash to Thomas Slocombe on a 9-month, 10% note.
|
|
Dec. 31, 2014
|
Accrued interest on all notes receivable.
|
|
Apr.1, 2015
|
Received principal plus interest on the Goodwin note.
|
|
Apr.1, 2015
|
Thomas Slocombe dishonored its note; Vandiver expects it will eventually collect.
|
Instructions
Prepare journal entries to record the transactions. Vandiver prepares adjusting entries once a year on December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At December 31, 2013, House Co. reported the following information on its balance sheet.
|
Accounts receivable
|
$960,000
|
|
Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
80,000
|
During 2014, the company had the following transactions related to receivables.
- Sales on account
|
$3,700,000
|
- Sales returns and allowances
|
50,000
|
- Collections of accounts receivable
|
2,810,000
|
- Write-offs of accounts receivable deemed uncollectible
|
90,000
|
- Recovery of bad debts previously written off as uncollectible
|
29,000
|
Instructions
(a)Prepare the journal entries to record each of these five transactions. Assume that no cash discounts were taken on the collections of accounts receivable.
(b)Enter the January 1, 2014, balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, post the entries to the two accounts (use T-accounts), and determine the balances.
(c)Prepare the journal entry to record bad debt expense for 2014, assuming that an aging of accounts receivable indicates that expected bad debts are $115,000.
(d)Compute the accounts receivable turnover for 2014 assuming the expected bad debt information provided in (c).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Information related to Mingenback Company for 2014 is summarized below.
|
Total credit sales
|
$2,500,000
|
|
Accounts receivable at December 31
|
875,000
|
|
Bad debts written off
|
33,000
|
Instructions
(a)What amount of bad debt expense will Mingenback Company report if it uses the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts?
(b)Assume that Mingenback Company estimates its bad debt expense to be 2% of credit sales. What amount of bad debt expense will Mingenback record if it has an Allowance for Doubtful Accounts credit balance of $4,000?
(c)Assume that Mingenback Company estimates its bad debt expense based on 6% of accounts receivable. What amount of bad debt expense will Mingenback record if it has an Allowance for Doubtful Accounts credit balance of $3,000?
(d)Assume the same facts as in (c), except that there is a $3,000 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. What amount of bad debt expense will Mingenback record?
(e)What is the weakness of the direct write-off method of reporting bad debt expense?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
|
|
Number of Days Past Due
|
|
Customer
|
Total
|
Not Yet Due
|
1-30
|
31-60
|
61-90
|
Over 90
|
|
Anders
|
$22000
|
|
$10,00
|
$12,000
|
|
|
|
Blake
|
40000
|
$ 40,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Coulson
|
57000
|
16,000
|
6,000
|
|
$35,000
|
|
|
Deleon
|
34000
|
|
|
|
|
$34,000
|
|
Others
|
1,32,000
|
96,000
|
16,000
|
14,000
|
|
6,000
|
|
$285000
|
$ 152,000
|
$32,000
|
$26,000
|
$35,000
|
$40,000
|
|
Estimated Percentage Un Collectible
|
|
3%
|
6%
|
13%
|
25%
|
50%
|
|
Total Estimated Bad Debts
|
$38,610
|
$4,560
|
$1,920
|
$3,380
|
$8,750
|
$20,000
|
At December 31, 2014, the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a credit of $12,000.
Instructions
(a)Journalize and post the adjusting entry for bad debts at December 31, 2014.
(b)Journalize and post to the allowance account the following events and transactions in the year 2015.
(1)On March 31, a $1,000 customer balance originating in 2014 is judged uncollectible.
(2)On May 31, a check for $1,000 is received from the customer whose account was written off as uncollectible on March 31.
(c)Journalize the adjusting entry for bad debts on December 31, 2015, assuming that the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a debit of $800 and the aging schedule indicates that total estimated bad debts will be $31,600.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rigney Inc. uses the allowance method to estimate uncollectible accounts receivable. The company produced the following aging of the accounts receivable at year-end.
|
|
Number of Days Outstanding
|
|
|
Total
|
0-30
|
31-60
|
61-90
|
91-120
|
Over 120
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
200,000
|
77,000
|
46,000
|
39,000
|
23,000
|
$15,000
|
|
% Un Collectible
|
|
1%
|
4%
|
5%
|
8%
|
20%
|
|
Estimated bad debts
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(a)Calculate the total estimated bad debts based on the above information.
(b)Prepare the year-end adjusting journal entry to record the bad debts using the aged uncollectible accounts receivable determined in (a). Assume the current balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $8,000 debit.
(c)Of the above accounts, $5,000 is determined to be specifically uncollectible. Prepare the journal entry to write off the uncollectible account.
(d)The company collects $5,000 subsequently on a specific account that had previously been determined to be uncollectible in (c). Prepare the journal entry necessary to restore the account and record the cash collection.
(e)Comment on how your answers to (a)–(d) would change if Rigney Inc. used 4% oftotalaccounts receivable rather than aging the accounts receivable. What are the advantages to the company of aging the accounts receivable rather than applying a percentage to total accounts receivable?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At December 31, 2014, the trial balance of Darby Company contained the following amounts before adjustment.
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
$385,000
|
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
$1,000
|
|
|
970,000
|
Instructions
(a)Based on the information given, which method of accounting for bad debts is Darby Company using—the direct write-off method or the allowance method? How can you tell?
(b)Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2014, for bad debt expense under each of the following independent assumptions.
(1)An aging schedule indicates that $11,750 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.
(2)The company estimates that 1% of sales will be uncollectible.
(c)Repeat part (b) assuming that instead of a credit balance there is an $1,000 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
(d)During the next month, January 2015, a $3,000 account receivable is written off as uncollectible. Prepare the journal entry to record the write-off.
(e)Repeat part (d) assuming that Darby uses the direct write-off method instead of the allowance method in accounting for uncollectible accounts receivable.
(f)What type of account is Allowance for Doubtful Accounts? How does it affect how accounts receivable is reported on the balance sheet at the end of the accounting period?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Farwell Company closes its books monthly. On September 30, selected ledger account balances are:
|
Notes Receivable
|
$37,000
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
183
|
Notes Receivable include the following.
|
Date
|
Maker
|
Face
|
Term
|
Interest
|
- 16
|
K Goza Inc.
|
$12,000
|
60 days
|
8%
|
|
Aug. 25
|
Holt Co.
|
9,000
|
60 days
|
7%
|
|
Sept. 30
|
Noblitt Corp.
|
16,000
|
6 months
|
9%
|
Interest is computed using a 360-day year. During October, the following transactions were completed.
|
Oct. 7
|
Made sales of $6,900 on Farwell credit cards.
|
|
12
|
Made sales of $900 on MasterCard credit cards. The credit card service charge is 3%.
|
|
15
|
Added $460 to Farwell customer balances for finance charges on unpaid balances.
|
|
15
|
Received payment in full from K. Goza Inc. on the amount due.
|
|
24
|
Received notice that the Holt note has been dishonored. (Assume that Holt is expected to pay in the future.)
|
Instructions
(a)Journalize the October transactions and the October 31 adjusting entry for accrued interest receivable.
(b)Enter the balances at October 1 in the receivable accounts. Post the entries to all of the receivable accounts.
(c)Show the balance sheet presentation of the receivable accounts at October 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2014, Harter Company had Accounts Receivable $139,000, Notes Receivable $25,000, and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $13,200. The note receivable is from Willingham Company. It is a 4-month, 9% note dated December 31, 2013. Harter Company prepares financial statements annually at December 31. During the year, the following selected transactions occurred.
|
Jan.5
|
Sold $20,000 of merchandise to Sheldon Company, terms n/15.
|
|
20
|
Accepted Sheldon Company”s $20,000, 3-month, 8% note for balance due.
|
|
Feb. 18
|
Sold $8,000 of merchandise to Patwary Company and accepted Patwary”s $8,000, 6-month, 9% note for the amount due.
|
|
Apr. 20
|
Collected Sheldon Company note in full.
|
|
30
|
Received payment in full from Willingham Company on the amount due.
|
|
May 25
|
Accepted Potter Inc.”s $6,000, 3-month, 7% note in settlement of a past-due balance on account.
|
|
Aug. 18
|
Received payment in full from Patwary Company on note due.
|
|
25
|
The Potter Inc. note was dishonored. Potter Inc. is not bankrupt; future payment is anticipated.
|
|
Sept. 1
|
Sold $12,000 of merchandise to Stanbrough Company and accepted a $12,000, 6-month, 10% note for the amount due.
|
Instructions
Journalize the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At December 31, 2013, Obermeyer Imports reported the following information on its balance sheet.
|
Accounts receivable
|
$250,000
|
|
Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
15,000
|
During 2014, the company had the following transactions related to receivables.
- Sales on account
|
$2,600,000
|
- Sales returns and allowances
|
45,000
|
- Collections of accounts receivable
|
2,250,000
|
- Write-offs of accounts receivable deemed uncollectible
|
10,000
|
- Recovery of bad debts previously written off as uncollectible
|
3,000
|
Instructions
(a)Prepare the journal entries to record each of these five transactions. Assume that no cash discounts were taken on the collections of accounts receivable.
(b)Enter the January 1, 2014, balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. Post the entries to the two accounts (use T-accounts), and determine the balances.
(c)Prepare the journal entry to record bad debt expense for 2014, assuming that an aging of accounts receivable indicates that estimated bad debts are $22,000.
(d)Compute the accounts receivable turnover for the year 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Information related to Miracle Company for 2014 is summarized below.
|
Total credit sales
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Accounts receivable at December 31
|
369,000
|
|
Bad debts written off
|
22,150
|
Instructions
(a)What amount of bad debt expense will Miracle Company report if it uses the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts?
(b)Assume that Miracle Company decides to estimate its bad debt expense to be 2% of credit sales. What amount of bad debt expense will Miracle record if Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $3,000?
(c)Assume that Miracle Company decides to estimate its bad debt expense based on 5% of accounts receivable. What amount of bad debt expense will Miracle Company record if Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $4,000?
(d)Assume the same facts as in (c), except that there is a $2,000 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. What amount of bad debt expense will Miracle record?
(e)What is the weakness of the direct write-off method of reporting bad debt expense?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mead, CPA, had substantial doubt about Tech Co.’s ability to continue as a going concern when reporting on Tech’s audited financial statements for the year ended June 30, 2001. That doubt has been removed in 2002. What is Mead’s reporting responsibility if Tech is presenting its financial statements for the year ended June 30, 2002, on a comparative basis with those of 2002?
- The explanatory paragraph included in the 2002 auditor’s report should not be repeated.
- The explanatory paragraph included in the 2002 auditor’s report should be repeated in its entirety.
- A different explanatory paragraph describing Mead’s reasons for the removal of doubt should be included.
- A different explanatory paragraph describing Tech’s plans for financial recovery should be included.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When an auditor concludes there is substantial doubt about a continuing audit client’s ability to continue as a going concern for a reasonable period of time, the auditor’s responsibility is to
- Issue a qualified or adverse opinion, depending upon materiality, due to the possible effects on the financial statements.
- Consider the adequacy of disclosure about the client’s possible inability to continue as a going concern.
- Report to the client’s audit committee that management’s accounting estimates may need to be adjusted.
- Reissue the prior year’s auditor’s report and add an explanatory paragraph that specifically refers to “substantial doubt” and “going concern.”
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Green, CPA, concludes that there is substantial doubt about JKL Co.’s ability to continue as a going concern. If JKL’s financial statements adequately disclose its financial difficulties, Green’s auditor’s report should
|
|
Include an explanatory paragraph following the opinion paragraph
|
Specifically use the words “going concern”
|
Specifically use the words “substantial doubt”
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In which of the following circumstances would an auditor most likely add an explanatory paragraph to the standard report while not affecting the auditor’s unqualified opinion?
- The auditor is asked to report on the balance sheet, but not on the other basic financial statements.
- There is substantial doubt about the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern.
- Management’s estimates of the effects of future events are unreasonable.
- Certain transactions cannot be tested because of management’s records retention policy.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An auditor would express an unqualified opinion with an explanatory paragraph added to the auditor’s report for
|
|
An unjustified accounting change
|
A material weakness in the internal control
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When management does not provide reasonable justification that a change in accounting principle is preferable and it presents comparative financial statements, the auditor should express a qualified opinion
- Only in the year of the accounting principle change.
- Each year that the financial statements initially reflecting the change are presented.
- Each year until management changes back to the accounting principle formerly used.
- Only if the change is to an accounting principle that is not generally accepted.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When an entity changes its method of accounting for income taxes, which has a material effect on comparability, the auditor should refer to the change in an explanatory paragraph added to the auditor’s report. This paragraph should identify the nature of the change and
- Explain why the change is justified under generally accepted accounting principles.
- Describe the cumulative effect of the change on the audited financial statements.
- State the auditor’s explicit concurrence with or opposition to the change.
- Refer to the financial statement note that discusses the change in detail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When reporting on comparative financial statements, an auditor ordinarily should change the previously issued opinion on the prior year’s financial statements if the
- Prior year’s financial statements are restated to conform with generally accepted accounting principles.
- Auditor is a predecessor auditor who has been requested by a former client to reissue the previously issued report.
- Prior year’s opinion was unqualified and the opinion on the current year’s financial statements is modified due to a lack of consistency.
- Prior year’s financial statements are restated following a pooling of interests in the current year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Before reissuing the prior year’s auditor’s report on the financial statements of a former client, the predecessor auditor should obtain a letter of representations from the
|
|
Former client’s management
|
Successor auditor
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When single-year financial statements are presented, an auditor ordinarily would express an unqualified opinion in an unmodified report if the
- Auditor is unable to obtain audited financial statements supporting the entity’s investment in a foreign affiliate.
- Entity declines to present a statement of cash flows with its balance sheet and related statements of income and retained earnings.
- Auditor wishes to emphasize an accounting matter affecting the comparability of the financial statements with those of the prior year.
- Prior year’s financial statements were audited by another CPA whose report, which expressed an unqualified opinion, is not presented.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Unaudited financial statements for the prior year presented in comparative form with audited financial statements for the current year should be clearly marked to indicate their status and
- I. The report on the prior period should be reissued to accompany the current period report.
- II. The report on the current period should include as a separate paragraph a description of the responsibility assumed for the prior period’s financial statements.
- a. I only.
- b. II only.
- c. Both I and II.
- d. Either I or II.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If information accompanying the basic financial statements in an auditor-submitted document has been subjected to auditing procedures, the auditor may include in the auditor’s report on the financial statements an opinion that the accompanying information is fairly stated in
- Accordance with US generally accepted auditing standards.
- Conformity with US generally accepted accounting principles.
- All material respects in relation to the basic financial statements taken as a whole.
- Accordance with attestation standards expressing a conclusion about management’s assertions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following phrases should be included in the opinion paragraph when an auditor expresses a qualified opinion?
|
|
When read in conjunction with Note X
|
With the foregoing explanation
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
How does an auditor make the following representations when issuing the standard auditor’s report on comparative financial statements?
|
|
Examination of evidence on a test basis
|
Consistent application of accounting principles
|
|
a.
|
Explicitly
|
Explicitly
|
|
b.
|
Implicitly
|
Implicitly
|
|
c.
|
Implicitly
|
Explicitly
|
|
d.
|
Explicitly
|
Implicitly
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The fourth standard of reporting requires the auditor’s report to contain either an expression of opinion regarding the financial statements taken as a whole or an assertion to the effect that an opinion cannot be expressed. The objective of the fourth standard is to prevent
- An auditor from expressing different opinions on each of the basic financial statements.
- Restrictions on the scope of the audit, whether imposed by the client or by the inability to obtain evidence.
- Misinterpretations regarding the degree of responsibility the auditor is assuming.
- An auditor from reporting on one basic financial statement and not the others.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is not correct concerning information included in an audit report of financial statements issued under the requirements of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board?
- The report should include the title “Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm.”
- The report should refer to the standards of the PCAOB.
- The report should include a paragraph referring to the auditor’s report on compliance with laws and regulations.
- The report should contain the city and state or country of the office that issued the report.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A principal auditor decides not to refer to the audit of another CPA who audited a subsidiary of the principal auditor’s client. After making inquiries about the other CPA’s professional reputation and independence, the principal auditor most likely would
- Add an explanatory paragraph to the auditor’s report indicating that the subsidiary’s financial statements are not material to the consolidated financial statements.
- Document in the engagement letter that the principal auditor assumes no responsibility for the other CPA’s work and opinion.
- Obtain written permission from the other CPA to omit the reference in the principal auditor’s report.
- Contact the other CPA and review the audit programs and working papers pertaining to the subsidiary.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The introductory paragraph of an auditor’s report contains the following sentences:
We did not audit the financial statements of EZ Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary, which statements reflect total assets and revenues constituting 27% and 29%, respectively, of the related consolidated totals. Those statements were audited by other auditors whose report has been furnished to us, and our opinion, insofar as it relates to the amounts included for EZ Inc., is based solely on the report of the other auditors.
These sentences
- Indicate a division of responsibility.
- Assume responsibility for the other auditor.
- Require a departure from an unqualified opinion.
- Are an improper form of reporting.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the auditor’s report, the principal auditor decides not to make reference to another CPA who audited a client’s subsidiary. The principal auditor could justify this decision if, among other requirements, the principal auditor
- Issues an unqualified opinion on the consolidated financial statements.
- Learns that the other CPA issued an unqualified opinion on the subsidiary’s financial statements.
- Is unable to review the audit programs and working papers of the other CPA.
- Is satisfied as to the independence and professional reputation of the other CPA.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An auditor concludes that there is substantial doubt about an entity’s ability to continue as a going concern for a reasonable period of time. If the entity’s financial statements adequately disclose its financial difficulties, the auditor’s report is required to include an explanatory paragraph that specifically uses the phrase(s)
|
|
“Reasonable period of time, not to exceed 1 year”
|
“Going concern”
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
_____ is the document used for recording the time spent by various workers on each job _____.
When workers perform work in their own premises with their own tools are called _____.
For outworkers raw materials are provided by the _____
Work study involves motion study, _____ and _____.
_____ is the study of body motions used in performing an operation.
_____ involves a proper appraisal of all jobs in an organization.
_____ is a technique that equitably measures the relative worth of a job in a firm.
_____ is an important technique used for determining the worker’s wages on the basis of performance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are selected transactions of Molina Company. Molina sells in large quantities to other companies and also sells its product in a small retail outlet.
|
March 1
|
Sold merchandise on account to Dodson Company for $5,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
3
|
Dodson Company returned merchandise worth $500 to Molina.
|
|
9
|
Molina collected the amount due from Dodson Company from the March 1 sale.
|
|
15
|
Molina sold merchandise for $400 in its retail outlet. The customer used his Molina credit card.
|
|
31
|
Molina added 1.5% monthly interest to the customer”s credit card balance.
|
Instructions
Prepare journal entries for the transactions above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are two independent situations.
(a)On January 6, Brumbaugh Co. sells merchandise on account to Pryor Inc. for $7,000, terms 2/10, n/30. On January 16, Pryor Inc. pays the amount due. Prepare the entries on Brumbaugh”s books to record the sale and related collection.
(b)On January 10, Andrew Farley uses his Paltrow Co. credit card to purchase merchandise from Paltrow Co. for $9,000. On February 10, Farley is billed for the amount due of $9,000. On February 12, Farley pays $5,000 on the balance due. On March 10, Farley is billed for the amount due, including interest at 1% per month on the unpaid balance as of February 12. Prepare the entries on Paltrow Co.”s books related to the transactions that occurred on January 10, February 12, and March 10.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Costello Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $110,000, Sales Revenue $840,000, and Sales Returns and Allowances $20,000.
Instructions
(a)If Costello uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Costello determines that L. Dole”s $1,400 balance is uncollectible.
(b)If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,100 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 1% of net sales, and (2) 10% of accounts receivable.
(c)If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $200 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 0.75% of net sales and (2) 6% of accounts receivable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Menge Company has accounts receivable of $93,100 at March 31. An analysis of the accounts shows the following information.
|
Month of Sale
|
Balance, March 31
|
|
March
|
$60,000
|
|
February
|
17,600
|
|
January
|
8,500
|
|
Prior to January
|
7,000
|
|
$93,100
|
Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $1,200 prior to adjustment. The company uses the percentage-of-receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts. The company”s estimate of bad debts is shown below.
|
Age of Accounts
|
Estimated Percentage Uncollectible
|
|
1-30 days
|
2.0%
|
|
31-60 days
|
5.0%
|
|
61-90 days
|
20.0%
|
|
Over 90 days
|
50.0%
|
Instructions
(a)Determine the total estimated un collectibles.
(b)Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31 to record bad debt expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are two independent situations.
(a)On March 3, Kitselman Appliances sells $650,000 of its receivables to Ervay Factors Inc. Ervay Factors assesses a finance charge of 3% of the amount of receivables sold. Prepare the entry on Kitselman Appliances’ books to record the sale of the receivables.
(b)On May 10, Fillmore Company sold merchandise for $3,000 and accepted the customer”s America Bank MasterCard. America Bank charges a 4% service charge for credit card sales. Prepare the entry on Fillmore Company”s books to record the sale of merchandise.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lisowski Laptops is examining the possibility of manufacturing and selling a notebook computer that is compatible with both PCs and Macintosh systems and that can receive television signals. Its estimated selling price is $2,500. Variable costs (supplies and labor) will equal $1,500 per unit, and fixed costs per year would approximate $200,000. Up-front investments in plant and equipment will total $270,000, which will be straight-line depreciated over three years. The initial working capital investment will be $100,000 and will rise proportionately with sales. Bill, the CEO, forecasts sales of the laptop will be 50,000 units the first year, 60,000 units the second, and 45,000 units the third year, at which time product life cycles would require closing down production of the model. At that time, the market value of the project”s assets will be about $70,000. LL”s tax rate is 40 percent and its required return on projects such as this one is 17 percent. Should Lisowski Laptops offer the new computer?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bart and Morticia, owners of the prestigious Gomez-Addams Office Towers, are concerned about high heating and cooling costs and client complaints of temperature variation within the building. They commissioned an engineering study by Frasco-Prew Associates to identify the cause of the problems and suggest corrective action. Frasco-Prew”s basic recommendation is that a new HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) system, featuring electronic climate control, be installed in the Towers. Over the next four years, the engineers estimate a new system will reduce heating and cooling costs by $125,000 a year. Cost of the new system will be $500,000 and can be depreciated over four years. Using a 25 percent tax rate and a 14 percent required return, should Bart and Morticia change the HVAC system? Use a four-year time horizon.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst gathered the following information about a company:
|
Number of shares outstanding
|
10 million
|
|
Earnings per share
|
$2.00
|
|
P/E
|
20
|
|
Book value per share
|
$30
|
If the company repurchases 1 million shares at the prevailing market price, the resulting book value per share will be closest to:
A. $26.
B. $27.
C. $29.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the phrases in Column A with the corresponding dividend theory in Column B. Note that you may use the answers in Column B more than once.
|
Column A
|
Column B
|
|
1. Bird in the hand
|
a) dividend policy matters
|
|
2. Homemade dividends
|
b) dividend policy is irrelevant
|
|
3. High tax rates on dividends
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Janet Wu is treasurer of Wilson Paper Company, a manufacturer of paper products for the office and school markets. Wilson Paper is selling one of its divisions for $70 million cash. Wu is considering whether to recommend a special dividend of $70 million or a repurchase of 2 million shares of Wilson common stock in the open market. She is reviewing some possible effects of the buyback with the company’s financial analyst. Wilson has a long-term record of gradually increasing earnings and dividends. Wilson’s board has also approved capital spending of $15 million to be entirely funded out of this year’s earnings.
|
Book value of equity
|
$750 million ($30 a share)
|
|
Shares outstanding
|
25 million
|
|
12-month trading range
|
$25–$35
|
|
Current share price
|
$35
|
|
After-tax cost of borrowing
|
7%
|
|
Estimated full year earnings
|
$25 million
|
|
Last year’s dividends
|
$9 million
|
|
Target debt/equity (market value)
|
35/65
|
In investors’ minds, Wilson’s share buyback could be a signal that the company:
A. is decreasing its financial leverage.
B. views its shares as undervalued in the marketplace.
C. has more investment opportunities than it could fund internally.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Janet Wu is treasurer of Wilson Paper Company, a manufacturer of paper products for the office and school markets. Wilson Paper is selling one of its divisions for $70 million cash. Wu is considering whether to recommend a special dividend of $70 million or a repurchase of 2 million shares of Wilson common stock in the open market. She is reviewing some possible effects of the buyback with the company’s financial analyst. Wilson has a long-term record of gradually increasing earnings and dividends. Wilson’s board has also approved capital spending of $15 million to be entirely funded out of this year’s earnings.
|
Book value of equity
|
$750 million ($30 a share)
|
|
Shares outstanding
|
25 million
|
|
12-month trading range
|
$25–$35
|
|
Current share price
|
$35
|
|
After-tax cost of borrowing
|
7%
|
|
Estimated full year earnings
|
$25 million
|
|
Last year’s dividends
|
$9 million
|
|
Target debt/equity (market value)
|
35/65
|
Assume that Wilson Paper funds its capital spending out of its estimated full year earnings. If Wilson uses a residual dividend policy, determine Wilson’s implied dividend payout ratio.
A. 36%.
B. 40%.
C. 60%.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Janet Wu is treasurer of Wilson Paper Company, a manufacturer of paper products for the office and school markets. Wilson Paper is selling one of its divisions for $70 million cash. Wu is considering whether to recommend a special dividend of $70 million or a repurchase of 2 million shares of Wilson common stock in the open market. She is reviewing some possible effects of the buyback with the company’s financial analyst. Wilson has a long-term record of gradually increasing earnings and dividends. Wilson’s board has also approved capital spending of $15 million to be entirely funded out of this year’s earnings.
|
Book value of equity
|
$750 million ($30 a share)
|
|
Shares outstanding
|
25 million
|
|
12-month trading range
|
$25–$35
|
|
Current share price
|
$35
|
|
After-tax cost of borrowing
|
7%
|
|
Estimated full year earnings
|
$25 million
|
|
Last year’s dividends
|
$9 million
|
|
Target debt/equity (market value)
|
35/65
|
The most likelytax environment in which Wilson Paper’s shareholders would prefer that Wilson repurchase its shares (share buybacks) instead of paying dividends is one in which:
A. the tax rate on capital gains and dividends is the same.
B. capital gains tax rates are higher than dividend income tax rates.
C. capital gains tax rates are lower than dividend income tax rates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
May an accountant accept an engagement to compile or review the financial statements of a not-for-profit entity if the accountant is unfamiliar with the specialized industry accounting principles, but plans to obtain the required level of knowledge before compiling or reviewing the financial statements?
align=”left”>
|
|
Compilation
|
Review
|
|
a.
|
No
|
No
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
One of the conditions required for an accountant to submit a written personal financial plan containing unaudited financial statements to a client without complying with the requirements of SSARS 1, Compilation and Review of Financial Statements, is that the
- Client agrees that the financial statements will not be used to obtain credit.
- Accountant compiled or reviewed the client’s financial statements for the immediate prior year.
- Engagement letter acknowledges that the financial statements will contain departures from generally accepted accounting principles.
- Accountant expresses limited assurance that the financial statements are free of any material misstatements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When providing limited assurance that the financial statements of a nonpublic entity require no material modifications to be in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, the accountant should
- Assess the risk that a material misstatement could occur in a financial statement assertion.
- Confirm with the entity’s lawyer that material loss contingencies are disclosed.
- Understand the accounting principles of the industry in which the entity operates.
- Develop audit programs to determine whether the entity’s financial statements are fairly presented.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Smith, CPA, has been asked to issue a review report on the balance sheet of Cone Company, a nonpublic entity, and not on the other related financial statements. Smith may do so only if
- Smith compiles and reports on the related statements of income, retained earnings, and cash flows.
- Smith is not aware of any material modifications needed for the balance sheet to conform with GAAP.
- The scope of Smith’s inquiry and analytical procedures is not restricted.
- Cone is a new client and Smith accepts the engagement after the end of Cone’s fiscal year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An accountant should perform analytical procedures during an engagement to
align=”left”>
|
|
Compile a nonpublic entity’s financial statements
|
Review a nonpublic entity’s financial statements
|
|
a.
|
No
|
No
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The existence of audit risk is recognized by the statement in the auditor’s standard report that the auditor
- Obtains reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement.
- Assesses the accounting principles used and also evaluates the overall financial statement presentation.
- Realizes some matters, either individually or in the aggregate, are important while other matters are not important.
- Is responsible for expressing an opinion on the financial statements, which are the responsibility of management.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following statements is correct concerning an auditor’s responsibility for controlling the distribution by the client of a restricted-use report?
- An auditor must inform the client that a restricted-use report is not intended for distribution to non-specified parties.
- When an auditor is aware that a client has distributed a restricted-use report to inappropriate third parties, the auditor should immediately inform the client to cease and desist.
- An auditor controls distribution through insisting that the client not duplicate the restricted-use report for any purposes.
- An auditor is not responsible for controlling the distribution of such reports.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are presented with the following information relating to the first week of a month. The transactions in connection with the materials are as follows:
|
1st day
|
Purchased 40 units @ Rs. 15 per unit
|
|
2nd day
|
Purchased 20 units @ Rs. 16.50 per unit
|
|
3rd day
|
Issued 30 units
|
|
4th day
|
Purchased 50 units @ Rs. 17.10 per unit
|
|
5th day
|
Issued 20 units
|
|
6th day
|
Issued 40 units
|
Calculate the cost of materials under (1) FIFO (2) LIFO and (3) Weighted average method of issue of material and the value of closing stock under the aforesaid materials
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A consignment consisted of two chemicals A and B. The invoices gave the following data:
Chemical A – 4,000 kg @ Rs. 2.50 per kg Rs. 10,000
Chemical B – 3,200 kg @ Rs. 3.25 per kg Rs. 10,400
|
Sales tax
|
Rs. 816
|
|
Railway freight
|
Rs. 384
|
|
Total cost
|
Rs. 21,600
|
A shortage of 200 kg in A and 128 kg in B was noticed due to breakage. What stock rate would you adopt for pricing issues assuming a provision of 5% towards further deterioration?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Cash needed for wage payment
From the following particulars, find the amount required for cash payment of wages in a factory for a particular month:
|
|
Rs.
|
|
Wages for normal hours worked
|
3,00,000
|
|
Wages for overtime worked
|
10,000
|
|
Leave wages
|
8,000
|
|
Deduction for ESI
|
6,000
|
|
Employee’s contribution to PF
|
30,000
|
House rent to be recovered from 50 employees at Rs.100 per month. Employer also contributes an equal amount towards PF and ESIC.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Computation of normal and overtime wages
Calculate the normal wages and overtime wages payable to a workman from the following data:
|
Days
|
Hours Worked
|
|
Monday
|
12
|
|
Tuesday
|
10
|
|
Wednesday
|
10
|
|
Thursday
|
9
|
|
Friday
|
8
|
|
Saturday
|
4
|
|
|
53
|
Normal working hours: 8 hours per day.
On Saturday: 4 hours per day.
Normal rate: Rs. 2 per hour.
Overtime rate: Up to 9 hours in a day at single rate and over 9 hours a day at double rate
(or)
Up to 48 hours in a week at single rate and over 48 hours at double rate whichever is more beneficial to the workers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Allocation of wages
Rajeev, a worker in a manufacturing unit, is paid at the rate of Rs. 20 per hour. His working hours constitute 48 hours over 6 days a week. Time allowed per day as approved absence for personal needs and so on is 20 minutes.
Rajeev’s card for the week ended in a particular month shows that his time during the week is chargeable as follows:
Job No. X: 25 hours
Job No. Y: 15 hours
Job No. Z: 3 hours
The time unaccounted for is due to a power failure. You are required to show Rajeev’s wages for the week and how they would be dealt with in Cost Accounts?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Worker’s earnings – Labour cost and its allocation to jobs
Calculate the earnings of worker P and Q for a month and allocate the earnings of each to job X, Y and Z.
|
|
P
|
Q
|
|
(i) Basic wages
|
Rs. 400
|
600
|
|
(ii) DA
|
50%
|
50%
|
|
(iii) PF (on basic wages)
|
10%
|
10%
|
|
(iv) ESI (on basic wages)
|
2%
|
2%
|
|
(v) Overtime
|
10 hrs
|
–
|
|
(vi) Idle time and leave
|
–
|
16 hrs
|
The normal working hours for the month are 200 hrs. Overtime is paid at double the normal rate of wages plus DA. Employer’s contribution to ESIC and PF are at equal rate with an employee’s contribution.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Three workers A, B and C work in a factory. The following particulars apply to them:
|
Normal rate per hour
|
= Re. 0.90.
|
|
Piece rate
|
= Re. 0.60 per unit.
|
|
Standard
|
= 4 units per hour.
|
In a 40-hour week, the production of workers is as follows:
A: 100 units
B: 160 units
C: 240 units
You are required to calculate earning of workers as follows:
- Taylor’s differential piece-rate system
- Merrick’s differential piece-rate system.
`
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Ltd is engaged in the manufacture of a particular product. The guaranteed daily wage rate is Rs. 12. The standard output fixed for the month is 600 units which represents 100% efficiency. Workers whose efficiency is belowwill not be paid any bonus. Bonus is payable in a graded scale after this level of efficiency as follows:
|
Efficiency
|
Bonus
|
|
90%
|
10%
|
|
100%
|
20%
|
There are two workers X and Y who have worked for 25 days in a month, and their output is 360 units and 600 units, respectively. You are required to compute the earnings of workers under Emerson’s plan.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data relating to a firm, you are required to calculate (a) labour-turnover ratio and (b) profit foregone due to labour turnover:
|
|
Rs.
|
|
(a) Sales value
|
1,00,000
|
|
(b) Variable costs:
|
|
|
Direct material
|
40,000
|
|
Direct wages
|
21,000
|
|
Variable overheads
|
20.000
|
|
(a) – (b): Contribution
|
19,000
|
|
Less: Factory overhead
|
10,000
|
|
Profit before tax
|
9,000
|
The direct labour hours worked during the period were 3,500. This included 1,500 hours for newly recruited workers, who were undergoing training and whose productive time was only66 2/3% There was some delay in finding new employees to replace the workers who had left and the time lost was 500 hours. Costs incurred to replace the leavers were as follows:
|
|
Rs.
|
|
Cost of recruitment
|
1,500
|
|
Cost of selection
|
2,500
|
|
Cost of training
|
3,000
|
|
Cost of separation
|
2,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Group-Piece Rate
In an assembly shop of a factory, 4 workers P, Q, R and S work together as a team and are paid on group-piece rate. They also work individually on day-rate jobs. In a 48-hour week, the following hours have been spent by them om group-piece work:
P – 40 hours
Q – 25 hours
R – 20 hours
S – 15 hours
The balance of the time has been booked by each worker on day-work jobs. Their hourly rates are:
P – Re. 0.50
Q – Re. 0.80
R – Rs. 1.50
S – Rs. 2.00
The group-piece rate is Rs. 2 per unit and the team has produced 100 units. Calculate the gross-weekly earning of each workman taking into consideration that each one is entitled to a DA of Rs. 35 per week.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Balance of debt system
From the following data, calculate the amount of wages payable to Mr Alex for each of the two days of week under “Balance of Debt system”.
|
Standard rate per hour
|
Rs. 5.
|
|
Standard rate per piece
|
Rs. 7.
|
|
Hours of work in a day:
|
8 hr.
|
Mr. Alex produces 5 pieces on the first and 6 pieces on the second day.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Labour-turnover rate
The following information relates to the personnel department of a factory for the month of June 2009:
|
No. of workers on 1 June 2009
|
900
|
|
No. of workers on 30 June 2009
|
1,100
|
|
No. of workers who quit the factory in June
|
20
|
|
No. of workers discharged in June
|
30
|
|
No. of workers engaged in June (including 100 on account of expansion scheme)
|
150
|
You are required to calculate the labour-turnover rate and the equal annual rate under the different methods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Profit foregone due to labour turnover
The management of a company wants to have an idea of the profit lost/foregone as a result of labour turnover last year.
Last year, the sales accounted to Rs. 3,30,000 and theProfit/VolumeRatio was 20%. The total number of actual hours worked by the direct labour was 17,250. As a result of the delays by the personnel department in filling the vacancies due to labour turnover, 3,750 potential productive hours were lost. The actual direct labour hours included were 1,500 hours attributable to training new recruits, out of which half of the hours were productive. The costs incurred consequent upon labour turnover revealed on analysis the following:
|
|
Rs.
|
|
Settlement cost due to leaving
|
2,500
|
|
Recruitment costs
|
1,150
|
|
Selection costs
|
950
|
|
Training costs
|
1,400
|
Assuming that the potential production lost due to labour turnover could have been sold at the prevailing prices, ascertain the profit foregone last year on account of labour turnover.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Overtime wages
You are required to calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a workman from the following data
|
Days
|
Hours Worked
|
|
Monday
|
10 hrs
|
|
Tuesday
|
8 hrs
|
|
Wednesday
|
10 hrs
|
|
Thursday
|
9 hrs
|
|
Friday
|
11 hrs
|
|
Saturday
|
4 hrs
|
|
Normal working hours
|
8 hrs per day
|
|
Normal rate
|
Rs. 1.50 per hour
|
|
Overtime rate
|
Up to 9 hours in a day at single rate and over 9 hrs a day at double rate.
|
|
|
(or)
|
|
|
Up to 48 hours at single rate and over 48 hours at double rate, whichever is more beneficial to the workman.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Wages for financial books and department labour-hour cost
A factory department has 90 workers who are paid on an average of Rs. 35 per week (48 hours), DA per month (208 hours) of Rs. 260, PF deduction is @ 8% on gross, of whichis for family pension fund and half the number of workers with ESI being at Rs. 2.50 each. The employer contributes an equivalent amount. The company gives only the minimum bonus ofand allows a statutory leave of 2 weeks per year with pay. You are required to show the weekly-wage summary for the financial books and the department labour hour costs for job costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Cost of conversion and Computation of saving
A factory undertakes production to customer’s satisfaction. Worker A was entrusted with the production of 200 units of product AA’ in 100 hours and worker B was asked to produce 100 units of product BB’ in 200 hours. The ruling rate of wages is Rs. 5 per hour which is guaranteed irrespective of the standard of efficiency. If the work given is finished within the time allotted, the worker gets Rs. 6 per hour for the time taken. Time saved is rewarded by an incentive bonus of 50% of wages earned per hour. A completes the job in 80 hours and B in 120 hours.
Assuming that the prevailing overhead rate is Rs. 10 per labour hour, indicate the impact of the system of wages coupled with the incentive scheme on the profits of the company when compared to a straight piece rate at Rs. 6 per hour. The fixation of hourly rates is understood to provide for a saving of 20% of the time fixed when the work is carried out by an efficient worker under normal conditions.
Pass your comments on the basis of rate fixation in the circumstances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Piece-work premium and Selling price
2 fitters, one labourer and one boy undertake a job on piece for a rate of Rs.1,890. The time spent by each of them is 110 ordinary working hours. The rates of pay on time-rate basis are Rs. 3.00 per hour for each of the two fitters, Rs. 2 per hour for the labourer and Re 1.00 per hour for the boy.
You are required to calculate as follows:
- The amount of piece-work premium and the share of each worker when the piece-work premium is divided proportionately to the wages paid.
- The selling price of the above job on the basis of the following additional data:
Cost of direct materials = Rs. 3,110.
Work overhead at 20% of prime cost.
Selling overhead at 10% of works cost.
Profit at 20% on the cost of sales
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Computation of standard time and Computation of time allowed
The time taken for the operator “A” in the process of a manufacturing concern on three different counts was 23, 21 and 25 minutes while that of the operator “B” was 20, 24 and 22 minutes. It has been ascertained that the rating of A is 65/60and that of B is 50/60 Allowance for fatigue and personal needs are assumed at 12%. Calculate on the basis of the above information as a base:
- The standard time
- The time allowed under an incentive allowance of 25% of the standard time.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Incentive bonus + Total earnings
A company employs its workers for a single shift of 8 hours for 25 days in a week. The company has recently fixed the standard output for a mass production item and introduced an incentive scheme to boost the output. The details of wages payable to the workers are as follows:
- Basic wages/piece-work wages @ Rs. 2 per unit subject to a guaranteed minimum wages of Rs. 50 per day.
- DA at Rs. 50 per day.
- Incentive bonus:
Standard output per day per worker = 40 units.
Incentive bonus up to 80% efficiency = Nil.
Incentive bonus for efficiency above 80% = Rs. 80 for every 1% increase above 80%.
The details of performance of four workers for the month of June 2009 are as follows:
|
Worker
|
No. of Days Worked
|
Output (Units)
|
|
A
|
25
|
810
|
|
B
|
19
|
450
|
|
C
|
25
|
900
|
|
D
|
21
|
720
|
You are required to calculate the total earnings of each of the workers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Net saving in the production cost to offset losses from labour turnover
A manufacturer introduces new machinery into his factory with the result that the production per worker is increased. The workers are paid by results, and it is agreed that for every 2% increase in the average individual output, an increase of 1% on the rate of wages will be paid. At the time the machinery is installed, the selling price of the products falls by.
You are required to show the net saving in the production costs which would be required to offset the losses expected form the reduced turnover and bonus paid to workers.
Additional data:
|
|
First period
|
Second period
|
|
No. of workers
|
350
|
250
|
|
No. of articles produced
|
16,800
|
14,000
|
|
Wages paid
|
Rs. 33,600
|
|
|
Total sales
|
Rs. 75,600
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following particulars, write up the stores ledger card:
|
January
|
1. Opening stock
|
2,000 units at Rs. 5 each
|
|
|
5. Purchased
|
1,800 units at Rs. 6 each
|
|
|
10. Issued
|
2,400 units
|
|
|
12. Purchased
|
1,600 units at Rs. 6.20 each
|
|
|
15. Purchased
|
600 units at Rs. 6.40 each
|
|
|
19. Issued
|
800 units
|
|
|
22. Issued
|
1,200 units
|
|
|
27. Purchased
|
400 units at Rs. 6.50 each
|
|
|
31. Issued
|
1,200 units
|
Adopt base stock method with FIFO. Base stock is 500 units out of opening stock.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following particulars write up the stores ledger card:
|
January
|
1. Purchased
|
500 units at Rs. 2 per unit
|
|
|
10. Purchased
|
300 units at Rs. 2.10 per unit
|
|
|
13. Issued
|
500 units
|
|
|
20. Purchased
|
400 units at Rs. 2.20 per unit
|
|
|
25. Issued
|
300 units
|
|
|
27. Purchased
|
500 units at Rs. 2.10 per unit
|
|
|
31. Issued
|
200 units
|
Adopt base stock method with LIFO. Base stock is 200 units of January 1 purchase.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following transactions, prepare stores ledger account using simple average price method:
|
January
|
1. Opening balance 100 units at Rs. 5 each
|
|
|
5. Received 500 units at Rs. 6 each
|
|
|
20. Issued 300 units
|
|
February
|
5. Issued 200 units
|
|
|
6. Received 500 units at Rs. 5 each
|
|
March
|
10. Issued 300 units
|
|
|
12. Issued 250 units
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following details, write up stores ledger account using simple average method:
|
December
|
1. Opening balance
|
100 kg @ 5.00
|
|
|
Received
|
50 kg @ 5.20
|
|
|
8. Issued
|
120 kg
|
|
|
10. Issued
|
10 kg
|
|
|
15. Received
|
80 kg @ Rs. 5.40
|
|
|
18. Issued
|
50 kg
|
|
|
20. Received
|
100 kg @ Rs. 5.60
|
|
|
25. Issued
|
40 kg
|
|
|
29. Issued
|
60 kg
|
The stock verifier found a shortage of 10 kg on 16 December and another shortage of 10 kg on 26 December.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare the stores ledger account based on the weighted average method of pricing issues:
|
September
|
24,000 kg @ Rs. 7,500 per tonne
|
|
1. Opening balance
|
|
|
1. Purchased
|
44,000 kg @ 7,600 per tonne
|
|
1. Issued
|
10,000 kg
|
|
5. Issued
|
16,000 kg
|
|
12. Issued
|
24,000 kg
|
|
13. Purchased
|
10,000 kg @ 7,800 per tonne
|
|
18. Issued
|
20,000 kg
|
|
22. Purchases
|
50,000 kg @ 8,000 per tonne
|
|
28. Issued
|
30,000 kg
|
|
30.Issued
|
22,000 kg
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a stores ledger account by adopting the weighted average method of pricing:
|
September
|
1. Opening balance
|
50 units @ Rs. 3 per unit
|
|
|
4. Issued
|
2 units
|
|
|
8. Purchased
|
48 units @ Rs. 4 per unit
|
|
|
9. Issued
|
20 units
|
|
|
15. Purchased
|
76 units @ Rs. 3 per unit
|
|
|
22. Received back into stores
|
19 units out of 20 units issued on 9 September
|
|
|
30. Issued to production:
|
10 units
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following receipts and issues were made of material during the month of May. Prepare stores ledger account on the basis of
- simple average method and
- weighted average method
|
Receipts:
|
|
|
|
May 1.
|
Opening balance of stock
|
300 units at Rs. 4.50 per unit
|
|
Purchases
|
400 units at Rs. 5.00 per unit
|
|
Purchases
|
1,000 units at Rs. 5.50 per unit
|
|
Purchases
|
700 units at Rs. 4.80 per unit
|
|
Issues:
|
|
|
|
May 3.
|
Issues
|
300 units
|
|
Issues
|
100 units
|
|
Issues
|
700 units
|
|
Issues
|
700 units
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following particulars relate to the receipts and issues of a material during the month of March:
|
March 4.
|
Received
|
500 units at Rs. 2.00 each
|
|
Received
|
350 units at Rs. 2.10 each
|
|
Issued
|
600 units
|
|
Received
|
600 units at Rs. 2.20 each
|
|
Issued
|
450 units
|
|
Received
|
500 units @ Rs. 2.30 each
|
|
Issued
|
510 units
|
|
Issued
|
100 units
|
Prepare stores ledger account using (a) LIFO and (b) weighted average method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is extracted from the stores ledger:
|
Purchases:
|
|
|
January
|
|
100 units at Rs. 1 per unit
|
|
|
|
100 units at Rs. 2 per unit
|
|
Issues:
|
|
|
|
January
|
|
60 units for Job W16
|
|
|
|
60 units for Job W17
|
Complete the receipts and issues by adopting the (1) FIFO (2) LIFO and (3) weighted average methods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following information, calculate maximum, minimum and average stock levels.
|
Normal consumption
|
500 kg
|
|
Minimum consumption per day
|
200 kg
|
|
Maximum consumption per day
|
800 kg
|
|
Lead time
|
10 to 16 days
|
|
Reorder quantity
|
3,000 kg
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the material turnover ratio for year 2009 from the following details:
|
|
Material A Rs.
|
Material B Rs.
|
|
Opening stock
|
25,000
|
87,500
|
|
Closing stock
|
15,000
|
62,500
|
|
Purchases
|
1,90,000
|
1,25,000
|
Calculate:
- Material turnover ratio
- Fast-moving materials
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following information, calculate
- Material turnover ratio
- Material turnover period in days and also months
- Faster moving material
|
|
Material X (units)
|
Material Y (units)
|
|
Opening stock
|
75,000
|
25,000
|
|
Purchases
|
2,00,000
|
4,00,000
|
|
Closing stock
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following relates to inventory costs for ABC Ltd
- Orders must be placed in multiples of 200 units.
- Requirements for the year are 4,00,000 units.
- The purchase price per unit is Rs. 4.
- The carrying cost is 20% of the purchase price of goods.
- Cost per order placed is Rs. 25.
- Desired safety stock is 20,000 units. This quantity is on hand initially.
- Three days are required for delivery.
Calculate:
- EOQ
- How many orders the company place each year?
- At what inventory level should an order be placed?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A firm is able to obtain quantity discount on its order of material as follows:
|
Price per tonne
|
Tonne
|
|
Rs. 6.00
|
Less than 250
|
|
Rs. 5.90
|
more than 250 and less than 800
|
|
Rs. 5.80
|
more than 800 and less than 2,000
|
|
Rs. 5.70
|
more than 2,000 and less than 4,000
|
|
Rs. 5.60
|
4,000 and over
|
The annual demand for the material is 4,000 tonne. Stock holding costs are 20% of material cost per annum. The delivery cost per order is Rs. 6. You are required to calculate the best quantity to order.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The purchase department of your organization has received an offer of quantity discounts on its order of materials as under:
|
Price per tonne
|
|
|
tonne
|
|
1,400
|
Less than 500
|
|
1,380
|
more than 500 and less than 1,000
|
|
1,360
|
more than 1,000 and less than 2,000
|
|
1,340
|
more than 2,000 and less than 3,000
|
|
1,320
|
3,000 and above
|
The annual requirement of the material is 5,000 tonne. The delivery cost per order is Rs. 1,200 and the annual stock holding cost is estimated at 20% of the average inventory.
The purchase department wants you to consider the following purchase options and advise which among them will be the most economical ordering quantity, presenting the relevant information in a tabular form.
The purchase quantity orders to be considered are 400, 500, 1,000, 2,000 and 3,000 tonne.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
X Ltd is committed to supply 24,000 bearings per annum to Y Ltd on a steady basis. It is estimated that it costs 10 paise as inventory–holding cost per bearing per month and that the setup cost per run of bearing manufacture is Rs. 324.
- What would be the optimum run size for bearing manufacture
- Assuming that the company has a policy of manufacturing 6,000 bearings per run, how much extra costs the company would be incurring as compared to the optimum run suggested in (a) above?
- What is the minimum inventory holding cost?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The complete Gardener is deciding on the economic order quantity for two brands of lawn fertilizer: “Super–Grow” and “Natives Own”. The following information is collected:
|
|
Fertilizer
|
|
|
Super–Grow
|
Natives Own
|
|
Annual demand
|
2,000 bags
|
1,280 bags
|
|
Relevant ordering cost per purchase order
|
Rs. 1,200
|
Rs. 1,400
|
|
Annual relevant carrying cost per bag
|
Rs. 480
|
Rs. 560
|
Required:
- EOQ for Super Grow and Natives Own.
- For the EOQ, what is the sum of the total annual relevant ordering costs and the annual relevant carrying costs for Super Grow and Natives Own?
- For the EOQ compute the number of deliveries per year for Super Grow and Natives Own.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
M/S Tubes Ltd is the manufactures of picture tubes for T.V. The following are the details of their operations:
|
Average monthly market demand:
|
2,000 tubes
|
|
Ordering cost
|
Rs. 100 per order
|
|
Inventory–carrying cost
|
20% p.a.
|
|
Cost of tubes
|
Rs. 500 per tube
|
|
Normal usage
|
100 tubes per week
|
|
Maximum usage
|
200 tubes per week
|
|
Minimum usage
|
50 tubes per week
|
|
Lead time to supply
|
6 to 8 weeks
|
Compute from the above
- EOQ. If the supplier is willing to supply quarterly 1,500 units at a discount of 5% is it worth accepting?
- Maximum level of stock
- Minimum level of stock
- Reorder level
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the details given below, calculate:
- Reordering level
- Maximum level
- Minimum level
- Danger level
Reordering quantity is to be calculated based on following information:
Cost of placing a purchase order is Rs. 20.
Number of units to be purchased during the year is 5,000.
Purchase price per unit inclusive of transportation cost is Rs. 50.
Annual cost of storage per unit is Rs. 5.
|
Details of lead time: Average
|
10 days
|
|
Maximum
|
15 days
|
|
Minimum
|
6 days
|
|
For emergency
|
4 days
|
|
Rate of consumption average
|
15 units per day
|
|
Maximum: 20 units
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available in respect of component 20:
|
Maximum stock level
|
8000 units
|
|
Budget consumption
|
Maximum: 1500 units per month
|
|
|
Minimum: 800 units per month
|
|
Estimated delivery period:
|
Maximum = 4 months
|
|
|
Minimum = 2 months
|
You are required to calculate:
(a) Re–order level (b) Reorder quantity
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deferred tax assets and the valuation allowance: the case of Ford Motor Company
Describe the differences between defined benefit and defined contribution plans.
Many companies are closing down their defined benefit plans and replacing them with defined contribution plans. Why?
Interest rates have sharply declined in most economies over the past 10 years. What effects would you expect this trend to have had on pension liabilities and pension expenses?
As a prospective employee, which type of plan (defined benefit or defined contribution) do you prefer, and why?
Define “underfunded” and “overfunded.”
What is the difference between “service cost” and “interest cost?”
Describe the effects on pension expense of changing expected returns on pension plan investments. What happens if we increase the expected returns? What happens if we decrease them? provides the income statements and balance sheets from Ford’s 2011 Annual Report. Excerpts from the note on deferred income taxes are provided in The statements of cash flow for Ford reveal cash flows provided by operations of $9.784 billion, $11.477 billion, and $15.477 billion in 2011, 2010, and 2009, respectively. In 2011, Ford reported its highest net income ever (over $20 billion), an improvement of nearly $14 billion from the previous year. But did Ford’s profitability really improve that much?
Ford Motor Company and subsidiaries income statements for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010, and 2009 (in millions, except per share amounts)
|
|
2011
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
AUTOMOTIVE
|
|
|
|
|
Revenues
|
$128,168
|
$119,280
|
$103,868
|
|
Costs and expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of sales
|
113,345
|
104,451
|
98,866
|
|
Selling administrative and other expenses
|
9,060
|
9,040
|
8,354
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
122,405
|
113,491
|
107,220
|
|
Operating income/(loss)
|
5,763
|
5,789
|
(3,352
|
|
Interest expense
|
817
|
1,807
|
1,477
|
|
Interest income and other nonoperating income/ [expense), net (Note 19)
|
825
|
(362)
|
5,284
|
|
Equity in net income/(loss) of affiliated companies
|
479
|
526
|
330
|
|
Income/(Loss) before income taxes – Automotive
|
6,250
|
4,146
|
785
|
|
FINANCIAL SERVICES
|
|
|
|
|
Revenues
|
8,096
|
9,674
|
12,415
|
|
Costs and expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
3,614
|
4,345
|
5,313
|
|
Depreciation
|
1,843
|
2,024
|
3,937
|
|
Operating and other expenses
|
675
|
845
|
738
|
|
Provision for credit and insurance losses
|
(33)
|
(216)
|
1,030
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
6,099
|
6,998
|
11,018
|
|
Other income/(loss), net (Note 19)
|
413
|
315
|
552
|
|
Equity in net income/(loss) of affiliated companies
|
21
|
12
|
(135
|
|
Income/(Loss) before income taxes – Financial Services
|
2,431
|
3,003
|
1,814
|
|
TOTAL COMPANY
|
|
|
|
|
Income/(Loss) before income taxes
|
8,681
|
7,149
|
2,599
|
|
Provision for/(Benefit from) income taxes [Note 22)
|
(11,541)
|
592
|
(113
|
|
Income/(Loss) from continuing operations
|
20,222
|
6,557
|
2,712
|
|
Income/(Loss) from discontinued operations
|
|
–
|
5
|
|
Net income/(loss)
|
20,222
|
6,557
|
2,717
|
|
Less: Income/(Loss) attributable to noncontrolling interests
|
9
|
(4)
|
|
|
Net income/(loss) attributable to Ford Motor Company
|
$20,213
|
$6,561
|
$2,717
|
|
NET INCOME/(LOSS) ATTRIBUTABLE TO FORD
|
|
|
|
|
MOTOR COMPANY
|
|
|
|
|
Income/(Loss) from continuing operations
|
$20,213
|
$6,561
|
$2,712
|
|
Income/(Loss) from discontinued operations
|
|
|
5
|
|
Net income/(loss) attributable to Ford Motor Company
|
$20,213
|
$6,561
|
$2,717
|
|
Balance sheets (in millions)
|
|
|
|
|
December
|
December
|
|
|
31,2011
|
31, 2010
|
|
ASSETS
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$17,148
|
514,805
|
|
Marketable securities [Note 6)
|
18,618
|
20,765
|
|
Finance receivables, net (Note 7)
|
69,976
|
70,070
|
|
Dther receivables, net
|
8,565
|
8,381
|
|
Net investment in operating leases (Note 8)
|
12,838
|
11,675
|
|
Inventories [Note 10)
|
5,901
|
5,917
|
|
Equity in net assets of affiliated companies [Note 11)
|
2,936
|
2,569
|
|
Net property [Note 14)
|
22,371
|
23,179
|
|
Deferred income taxes [Note 22)
|
15,125
|
2,003
|
|
Net intangible assets (Note 15)
|
100
|
102
|
|
Dther assets
|
4,770
|
5,221
|
|
Total assets
|
$178,348
|
$164,687
|
|
LIABILITIES
|
|
|
|
Payables
|
$17,724
|
$16,362
|
|
Accrued liabilities and deferred revenue [Note 16)
|
45,369
|
43,844
|
|
Debt (Note 18)
|
99,488
|
103,988
|
|
Deferred income taxes (Note 22)
|
696
|
1,135
|
|
Total liabilities
|
163,277
|
165,329
|
|
EQUITY
|
|
|
|
Capital stock [Note 24)
|
|
|
|
Common stock, par value $.01 per share [3745 million shares issued)
|
37
|
37
|
|
Class B stock, par value $.01 per share
|
1
|
1
|
|
[71 million shares issued)
|
|
|
|
Capital in excess of par value of stock
|
20,905
|
20,803
|
|
Retained earnings/(Accumulated deficit)
|
12,985
|
(7,038)
|
|
Accumulated other comprehensive income/(loss)
|
(18,734)
|
[14,313)
|
|
Treasury stock
|
[166)
|
(163)
|
|
Total equity/(deficit) attributable to Ford Motor Company
|
15,028
|
[673)
|
|
Equity/(Deficit) attributable to noncontrolling interests
|
43
|
31
|
|
Total equity/(deficit)
|
15,071
|
[642)
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$178,348
|
$164,687
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ford Motor Company and Subsidiaries Excerpts from Note 22 2011 Annual Report
Valuation of deferred tax assets and liabilities
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized based on the future tax consequences attributable to temporary differences that exist between the financial statement carrying value of assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases, and operating loss and tax credit carryforwards on a taxing jurisdiction basis. We measure deferred tax assets and liabilities using enacted tax rates that will apply in the years in which we expect the temporary differences to be recovered or paid.
Our accounting for deferred tax consequences represents our best estimate of the likely future tax consequences of events that have been recognized in our financial statements or tax returns and their future probability. In assessing the need for a valuation allowance, we consider both positive and negative evidence related to the likelihood of realization of the deferred tax assets. If, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not that the deferred tax assets will not be realized, we record a valuation allowance.
|
|
2011
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Reconciliation of effective tax rate
|
|
|
|
|
US statutory rate
|
35.0%
|
35.0%
|
35.0%
|
|
Non•US tax rates under US rates
|
(1.5)
|
(0.1)
|
(0.6)
|
|
State and local income taxes
|
1.1
|
1.5
|
(1.9)
|
|
General business credits
|
(19)
|
(1.8)
|
(6.2)
|
|
Dispositions and restructurings
|
6.8
|
(9.5)
|
(4.3)
|
|
US tax on non•US earnings
|
(0.8)
|
0.1
|
0.6
|
|
Prior year settlements and claims
|
(0.2)
|
(10.0)
|
10.4
|
|
Tax•related interest
|
(0.9)
|
(0.7)
|
(1.5)
|
|
Tax-exempt income
|
(3.9)
|
(4.7)
|
(10.4)
|
|
Other
|
(2.5)
|
0.2
|
0.2
|
|
Valuation allowances
|
(1723)
|
(1.0)
|
(26.0)
|
|
Effective rate
|
(141.1)%
|
9.0%
|
(4.7)%
|
|
|
|
|
At the end of 2011, our US operations had returned to a position of cumulative profits for the most recent three-year period. We concluded that this record of cumulative profitability in recent years, our 10 consecutive quarters of pretax operating profits, our successful completion of labor negotiations with the UAW, and our business plan showing continued profitability, provide assurance that our future tax benefits more likely than not will be realized. Accordingly, at year-end 2011, we released almost all of our valuation allowance against net deferred tax assets for entities in the United States, Canada, and Spain.
At December 31, 2011, we have retained a valuation allowance against approximately $500 million in North America related to various state and local operating loss carryforwards that are subject to restrictive rules for future utilization, and a valuation allowance totaling $1 billion primarily against deferred tax assets for our South American operations.
Components of deferred tax assets and liabilities
The components of deferred tax assets and liabilities at 31 December were as follows (in millions):
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Deferred tax assets
|
|
|
|
Employee benefit plans
|
$8,189
|
$6,332
|
|
Net operating loss carryforwards
|
3,163
|
4,124
|
|
Tax credit carryforwards
|
4,534
|
4,546
|
|
Research expenditures
|
2,297
|
2,336
|
|
Dealer and customer allowances and claims
|
1,731
|
1,428
|
|
Other foreign deferred tax assets
|
694
|
1,513
|
|
Allowance for credit losses
|
194
|
252
|
|
All other
|
1,483
|
2,839
|
|
Total gross deferred tax assets
|
22,285
|
23,370
|
|
Less: valuation allowances
|
(1,545)
|
(15,664)
|
|
Total net deferred tax assets
|
20,740
|
7,706
|
|
Deferred tax liabilities
|
|
|
|
Leasing transactions
|
932
|
928
|
|
Deferred income
|
2,098
|
2,101
|
|
Depreciation and amortization (excluding leasing transactions)
|
1,659
|
1,146
|
|
Finance receivables
|
551
|
716
|
|
Other foreign deferred tax liabilities
|
360
|
334
|
|
All other
|
711
|
1,613
|
|
Total deferred tax liabilities
|
6,311
|
6,838
|
|
Net deferred tax assets/(liabilities)
|
$14,429
|
$868
|
Operating loss carryforwards for tax purposes were $8.5 billion at 31 December 2011, resulting in a deferred tax asset of $3.2 billion. A substantial portion of these losses begin to expire in 2029; the remaining losses will begin to expire in 2018. Tax credits available to offset future tax liabilities are $4.5 billion. A substantial portion of these credits have a remaining carryforward period of 10 years or more. Tax benefits of operating loss and tax credit carryforwards are evaluated on an ongoing basis, including a review of historical and projected future operating results, the eligible carryforward period, and other circumstances.
Required
(a) What are “net operating loss carry forwards,” and why did they give rise to deferred tax assets? Answer the same question for “tax credit carry forwards.”
(b) Why do depreciation and amortization give rise to deferred tax liabilities?
(c) What are the “valuation allowances” referred to in the financial statements and the notes?
(d) What happened to the valuation allowances in 2011? Give the appropriate summary journal entry. What was the effect on earnings for the year?
(e) What would Ford have reported as net income for 2011 if there had been no change in the valuation allowance?
(f) Describe, in detail, what happened in 2011 to allow Ford Motor Company to sharply reduce the allowance account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Share buybacks
The following note comes from the 2007 annual report for The Walt Disney Company:
As of the filing date of this report, the Board of Directors had not yet declared a dividend related to fiscal 2007. The Company paid a $637 million dividend ($0.31 per share) during the second quarter of fiscal 2007 related to fiscal 2006.
During fiscal 2007, the Company repurchased 202 million shares of Disney common stock for $6.9 billion. During fiscal 2006, the Company repurchased 243 million shares of Disney common stock for $6.9 billion. On May 1, 2007, the Board of Directors of the Company increased the share repurchase authorization to a total of 400 million shares. As of September 29, 2007, the Company had remaining authorization in place to repurchase approximately 323 million additional shares. The repurchase program does not have an expiration date.
The par value of the Company’s outstanding common stock totaled approximately $26 million.
Required
(a) What reasons can you give for why Disney bought back so many of its shares (a total of nearly $14 billion in 2006 and 2007 combined)?
(b) Disney’s normal policy regarding buybacks is to retain the shares in treasury (instead of cancelling them). Why is treasury stock a contra-equity account and not an asset?
(c) Based on the above note, what do you think must have happened to Disney’s share price from 2006 to 2007? Did it go up, go down, or stay the same?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial statement effects of dividend payments and buybacks
The following note is taken from The Walt Disney Company’s 2004 Annual Report:
The Company declared an annual dividend of $0.24 per share on December 1, 2004 related to fiscal 2004. The dividend is payable on January 6, 2005 to shareholders of record on December 10, 2004. The Company paid a $430 million dividend ($0.21 per share) during the first quarter of fiscal 2004.
During the fourth quarter of fiscal 2004, the Company repurchased 14.9 million shares of Disney common stock for approximately $335 million. As of September 30, 2004, the Company had authorization in place to repurchase approximately 315 million additional shares.
Based on the above note, answer the following:
(a) Explain what would be recorded on each of the dates relating to the $0.24/share dividend (i.e., provide the necessary journal entries).
(b) How would the $430 million dividend payment affect each of the three principal financial statements?
(c) How would the $335 million repurchase of Disney common stock affect each of the three principal financial statements?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stock options, stock dividends, and stock splits
Diodes Inc. is a manufacturer and supplier of semiconductor products, primarily to the communications, computing, industrial, consumer electronics, and automotive markets. The company is headquartered in southern California, but most of its production facilities are in Asia (China, Taiwan, and Hong Kong). Revenues and net income in 2004 were $185.7 million and $25.6 million, respectively.
In 2004, employees exercised stock options on 1 135 982 shares, with a par value of 662/3 cents per share. The average exercise price was $5. In addition, Diodes received a tax benefit from the exercise of the stock options of $8 514 000. The tax benefit resulted from a US tax law that gives companies a tax deduction equal to the difference between the market price of their stock and the exercise price of the stock options on the date the options are exercised. The tax benefit reflects this difference, multiplied by the company’s marginal tax rate. Diodes’ accounting policy, in accordance with US GAAP, is to lump together the tax benefit and the cash proceeds received from the employees who exercise their options.
In November 2005, Diodes declared a 50% stock dividend, payable on 30 November 2005, to stockholders of record on 18 November 2005. Under the terms of the stock dividend, Diodes’ stockholders received one additional share for every two shares held on the record date. The company expected the number of outstanding shares of common stock after the dividend to increase from 16.8 million to 25.2 million shares. The par value of the company’s stock was not affected by the dividend and remained at 662/3 cents per share. At the end of November 2005, Diodes’ share price was $38.40.
Required
(a) Why do companies issue stock options to employees? What are the potential drawbacks? Why not just issue shares of stock instead of stock options?
(b) Why is the average exercise price of the stock options so low relative to the current share price?
(c) Give the summary journal entry to record the exercise of stock options in 2004.
(d) What’s the difference between a stock dividend and a stock split? Why do companies issue stock dividends? What motive might they have for a stock split?
(e) Given the journal entry to record Diodes’ stock dividends, how would the accounting change if the transaction was considered a stock split?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Share buybacks: economic rationale and financial reporting effects
Groupe Danone is the world’s #1 producer of fresh dairy products. The company is also among the world leaders in bottled water and several other food and beverage categories. Based in France, its net revenues in 2004 were €13.7 billion.
In 2004, the following transactions affecting shareholders equity took place:
- Dividends of €308 million were declared and paid.
- 2.6 million shares of common stock were bought back at an average price of €60.40. The shares were cancelled immediately after purchase.
- 750 000 shares of common stock (par value = €0.50) were reissued from corporate treasury at an average price of €51. The average price paid by Danone for the reissued shares was €74.67.
Required
1. Why do companies buy back their own shares?
2. Why does Danone keep some of the repurchased shares in corporate treasury, and not cancel them?
3. Give the summary journal entries to record all of the above events.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounting for convertible bonds
Milacron Inc. is a leading supplier of plastics-processing technologies and industrial fluids. Headquartered in Cincinnati, Ohio, the company employs 3500 people and operates major manufacturing facilities in North America, Europe, and Asia. Milacron’s financial performance has been poor in recent years, including net losses of $191.1 million in 2003 (on sales of $740 million).
In March 2004, Milacron announced the issuance of bonds to Glencore Finance AG and Mizuho International. The proceeds were used to repay outstanding notes that were about to come due. Glencore and Mizuho purchased $100 million of debt in total, $30 million of which would be convertible into Milacron common stock (par value = $1) at the option of the holders.
Required
1. Why would Milacron use a “hybrid” instrument like convertible bonds, instead of issuing debt and equity securities separately?
2. Milacron raised $30 million from the issuance of the convertible bonds. Assume that a similar straight bond (a nonconvertible bond with the same coupon payments and maturity value) would have raised $26 million. Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the convertible bonds in accordance with IFRS.
3. Assume that early in 2005, Glencore and Mizuho exercised their option and converted the bonds into 9 million shares of Milacron common stock. The stock price on the date of the conversion was $3.75, and the net book value of bonds payable was $24 million. Prepare the journal entry to record the conversion of Milacron bonds into common stock, assuming that no gain or loss is recognized on the transaction.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following is the information relating to a type of material:
|
Annual demand
|
2,400 units
|
|
Unit price
|
Rs. 2.40
|
|
Ordering cost per order
|
Rs. 4.00
|
|
Storage cost
|
2% p.a.
|
|
Interest rate
|
10% p.a.
|
|
Lead time
|
Half month
|
Calculate EOQ and total annual inventory cost
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is extracted from the stores ledger of Anu Ltd:
|
September 1.
|
Opening balance
|
500 units at Rs. 10
|
|
Purchases
|
100 units at Rs. 11
|
|
Purchases
|
700 units at Rs. 12
|
|
Purchases
|
400 units at Rs. 13
|
|
October 13.
|
Purchases
|
1,000 units at Rs. 14
|
|
Purchases
|
500 units at Rs. 15
|
|
November 17.
|
Purchases
|
400 units at Rs. 16
|
Issue of materials:
|
September
|
9
|
500 units
|
|
|
22
|
500 units
|
|
|
30
|
500 units
|
|
October
|
15
|
500 units
|
|
|
22
|
500 units
|
|
November
|
11
|
500 units
|
Issues are to be priced on the principle of FIFO. Write the stores ledger account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the record of receipts and issues of a certain material for the month of December:
|
December 3.
|
Opening balance 200 kg at Rs. 20 per kg
|
|
Issue 100 kg
|
|
Issue 50 kg
|
|
Purchases 300 kg at Rs. 18 per kg
|
|
Issue 300 kg
|
|
Purchases 50 kg at Rs. 15 per kg
|
|
Issue 100 kg
|
|
Received back from completed job 5 kg
|
|
|
(previously issued at Rs. 20 per kg)
|
Prepare a stores ledger account based on FIFO Method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is extracted from the stores ledger:
|
January 1.
|
Opening balance 500 units at Rs. 4
|
|
Purchases 200 units at Rs. 4.25
|
|
Purchases 150 units at Rs. 4.10
|
|
Purchases 300 units at Rs. 4.50
|
|
Purchases 400 units at Rs. 4
|
Issue of materials were as follows:
|
January 4.
|
200 units
|
|
400 units
|
|
100 units
|
|
100 units
|
|
200 units
|
|
250 units
|
Issue are to be priced on the principle of FIFO method. Write up the stores ledger account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a stores ledger account from the following information adopting FIFO method of pricing of issues of materials:
|
March 1.
|
Opening balance
|
500 tonne at Rs. 200
|
|
Issue
|
70 tonne
|
|
Issue
|
100 tonne
|
|
Issue
|
80 tonne
|
|
Received from
|
200 tonne at
|
|
|
supplier
|
Rs. 190
|
|
Returned from Dept A
|
15 tonne
|
|
Issue
|
180 tonne
|
|
Received from
|
240 tonne at
|
|
|
supplier
|
Rs. 195.
|
|
Issue
|
300 tonne
|
|
Received from
|
320 tonne at
|
|
|
supplier
|
Rs. 200
|
|
Issue
|
115 tonne
|
|
Returned from Dept B
|
35 tonne
|
|
Received from
|
100 tonne at
|
|
|
supplier
|
Rs. 200.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The records of receipts and issues of carbon chemicals of Hexa factory during December 2008 are as follows:
December 4. Opening balance 100 tonne @ Rs. 200
8. Issued 50 tonne
14. Received from supplier 40 tonne @ Rs. 190
17. Issued 36 tonne
21. Received from supplier 48 tonne @ Rs. 180
24. Issued 60 tonne
25. Returned to suppliers 10 tonne out of goods received on 21 December.
26. Received from supplier 64 tonne @ Rs. 190
29. Issued 40 tonne
30. Returned from department 6 tonne @ Rs. 190
While verifying stock, a shortage of 2 tonne on 23 December was noticed and left a note accordingly. Prepare stores ledger account under FIFO Method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Hindustan Heavy Electrical closes its account at the end of each month. The following information is available for the month of April:
|
|
|
Sales
|
5,00,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
40,000
|
Inventory (1 April) :
100 tonne at Rs. 1,000 per tonne 1,00,000
Purchases:
10 April 200 tonne at Rs. 900 per tonne : 1,80,000
20 April 200 tonne at Rs. 800 per tonne : 1,60,000
Inventory (30 April): 100 tonne
Compute the following under FIFO method.
- Inventory valuation on 30 April
- Cost of goods sold for April
- Profit/loss for April
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following information, show the stores ledger account on LIFO method:
June 1. Opening stock 800 kg @ Rs. 10 each
4. Purchased 250 kg @ Rs. 9 each
12. Purchased 400 kg @ Rs. 10 each
16. Purchased 600 kg @ Rs. 10.50 each
23. Purchased 300 kg @ Rs. 11. each
Issued to manufacturing department as follows:
On 15 June stock verification received a shortage of 8kg. The maximum level is 1,400 kg. Minimum level is 650 kg. At the end of the month, stock verification revealed that there is a surplus of 2 kg.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
X company has purchased and issued materials as follows:
|
June 1. Stock of materials
|
200 units at Rs. 2.50 per unit
|
|
3. Purchased
|
300 units at Rs. 3 per unit
|
|
7. Purchased
|
500 units at Rs. 4 per unit
|
|
10. Issued
|
600 units
|
|
12. Purchased
|
400 units at Rs. 4 per unit
|
|
18. Issued
|
500 units
|
|
24. Purchased
|
400 units at Rs. 5 per unit
|
|
28. Issued
|
200 units
|
Prepare the stores ledger account under FIFO method and LIFO method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Enter the following transactions in the stores ledger of Y material using (i) FIFO and (ii) LIFO methods:
|
May 1.
|
Balance:
|
250 units at Rs.1 per unit
|
|
Issued:
|
50 units on material requisition No. 61.
|
|
Received:
|
800 units vide Goods Received Note No. 13 at Rs.1.10 per unit
|
|
Issued: No. 63
|
300 units on Material Requisition
|
|
Returned to stores:
|
20 units issued on Material Requisition No. 61.
|
|
Received:
|
300 units as per GRN No.15 at Rs. 1.20 per unit
|
|
Issued:
|
320 units [M.R. No. 83] 18. Received: 100 units (GRN No.77) at Rs. 1.20 per unit
|
|
Issued:
|
80 units (M. R. No. 102)
|
|
Returned to vendors 20 units from goods received Note No. 77 received on 18 May
|
|
|
Received:
|
200 units on GRN No. 96 at Rs. 1 per unit
|
|
|
Freight paid on purchase (GRN No. 96): Rs. 50
|
|
|
Issued: 250 units on M.R. No. 113
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following transactions, prepare separately the stores ledger account using (1) FIFO and (2) LIFO.
|
January
|
1. Opening balance
|
100 units @ Rs. 5 each
|
|
|
5. Received
|
500 units @ Rs. 6 each
|
|
|
20. Issued
|
300 units
|
|
February
|
5 Issued
|
200 units
|
|
February
|
6 Received back from Work order issued on 5 Feb
|
10 units
|
|
|
7. Received
|
600 units @ Rs. 5 each
|
|
|
20. Issued
|
300 units
|
|
|
25. Returned to supplier
|
50 units purchased on 7 February
|
|
|
26. Issued
|
200 units
|
|
March
|
10. Received
|
500 units at Rs. 7 per unit
|
|
|
15. Issued
|
300 units
|
Stock verification on 15 March revealed a shortage of 10 units.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following information, prepare a stores ledger account under specific pricing with FIFO:
|
April 1.
|
Opening balance
|
50 kg @ Rs. 10
|
|
Issued
|
30 kg
|
|
Purchased
|
60 kg @ Rs. 11
|
|
Purchased
|
50 kg @ Rs. 12
|
|
|
|
for a specific job to be issued on 15 April
|
|
Issued
|
25 kg
|
|
Purchased
|
50 kg @ Rs. 10
|
|
Issued
|
60 kg
|
|
Purchased
|
25 kg @ Rs. 12
|
|
Issued
|
35 kg
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lords Co. Ltd has purchased and issued material Z as follows:
|
April
|
1. Opening stock
|
3,000 units at Rs. 6 per unit
|
|
|
3. Purchased
|
750 units at Rs. 7 per unit
|
|
|
6. Purchased
|
1,050 units at Rs. 7.50 per unit
|
|
|
9. Issued
|
1,100 units
|
|
|
12. Purchased
|
450 units at Rs. 9 per unit
|
|
|
14. Purchased
|
300 units at Rs. 8 per unit
|
|
|
15. Issued
|
500 units
|
|
|
17. Purchased
|
300 units at Rs. 10 per unit
|
|
|
25. Purchased
|
250 units at Rs. 9.50 per unit
|
|
|
30. Issued
|
300 units
|
Ascertain the value of closing stock under HIFO method of pricing issues.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Redemption by cancellation X Ltd. had 6% Rs.10,00,000 debentures outstanding in its books. On 1 April 2010 it had Rs.4,00,000 balance in sinking fund A/c exactly represented by 8% investment (nominal values) (Rs. 5,00,000). On 31 December .2010, it sold Rs.1,00,000, 9% investments at Rs.90,000 and with the amount on the same date purchased Rs.1,00,000 own debentures for immediate cancellation. On 31 March 2011, it sold Rs.50,000 8% investments for Rs.38,000 and with that amount purchased Rs.40,000 own debentures and cancelled them immediately. Interest date is 31 March 2011 for own debentures as well as for investments. Ignore tax. Annual appropriation entries for 31 March 2011 need not be passed. Prepare the necessary ledger accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
false or true
1.A fixed deposit receipt may also be treated as a debenture.
2.Interest on debenture is paid only when the company earns profit.
3.Debentures carry no voting rights.
4.Debentures lying idle in the company known as debentures stock.
5.Fully convertible debentures (FCD) have highly favourable debt equity ratio.
6.DRR must be created in respect of fully convertible debentures.
7.Dividend is a charge against profit.
8.There is no restriction on the purchase of is own debentures by a company.
9.A floating charge is a mortgage of property.
10.In case a trust deed is executed, then there will be no direct relationship between the shareholder and the company.
11.Technically, debentures A/c is different from that of debentures capital A/c.
12.Discount allowed on issue of debentures A/c is to be shown on the assets side of the balance sheet.
13.Convertible debentures can be issued as a discount.
14.In case of debentures redeemed as premium, then it should be treated as capital profit.
15.TDS, until it is actually paid to the government, should be treated as a liability and shown in the balance sheet of the company.
16.A company can redeem debentures and re-issue then with a different redemption date.
17.When a sinking fund A/c is created, then there is no need for creation of DRR.
18.The annual instalment for sinking fund the redeem of debentures is an appropriation of profit.
19.When a company retains its own debentures as an investment, then interest on them need not be calculated.
20.Profit on conversion of debentures is generally transferred to P&L A/c.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fill in the blanks
1. A debenture means a document which creates a _____.
2._____ rate of interest will be paid on debentures periodically.
3.Interest is a charge on profit whereas dividend is _____ of profit.
4.A fixed charge is created on _____.
5.Debentures of a series with Pari Passu clause have to be paid _____.
6.A trust deed is a contract between a company and the _____ for the debenture holders.
7.In accordance with the SEBI Guidelines, a trust deed is to be executed by the issuing company within _____ of the closure of the issue.
8.Securities premium A/c will be shown under the head “ _____ ” in the balance sheet.
9.Discount allowed on issue of debentures is to be treated as _____.
10.Where the value of debentures issued is more than the value of the assets acquired, the difference is to be debited to _____ A/c.
11.As a company cannot issue debentures in fraction, any fractional payment has to be made in _____ .
12.Premium or redemption is to be shown under the head “ _____ ”.
13.Interest on debentures is always calculated on the _____ value of debentures.
14.In case the debentures are tax free, interest payable on debentures has to be _____.
15.Net effective rate of interest is based on the _____ received on debentures and not on the nominal value.
16.DRR is created out of the _____ of the company.
17.A company should create DRR equivalent to _____ of the amount of debenture issue before redemption.
18.No DRR is required for issue of debentures with a maturity period of _____ or less.
19.The terms sinking fund, _____ , debentures sinking fund or debenture redemption sinking fund are synonymous.
20.Where no sinking fund exists, an amount equal to the nominal value of debentures redeemed should be transferred out of divisible profits to _____.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
One parcel containing two vital components was received by a factory and the invoice relating to the same discloses the following:
|
|
Rs. – Paise
|
|
|
I
|
Material 500 kg at Rs. 2 per kg
|
1,000 – 00
|
|
II
|
Material 600 kg at Rs. 1.60 per kg
|
960 – 00
|
|
|
Insurance
|
39 – 20
|
|
|
Sales tax
|
98 – 00
|
|
|
Freight etc.
|
55 – 00
|
Transit loss of 10 units of material I and 6 units of material II was noted. However, no insurance claim could be made. Find the issue rate per unit of each material. If a provision for obsolescence of 10% is to be made, find the revised issue rates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturer buys certain equipment from outside suppliers at Rs. 30 per unit. Total annual needs are 80,000 units. The following further data are available:
|
Annual return on investment
|
10%
|
|
Rent, insurance, taxes per unit per year
|
Rs. 13
|
|
Cost of placing an order
|
Rs. 100
|
|
Determine the EOQ
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Find out the EOQ and order schedule for raw materials and packing materials units using the following data given to you:
|
(1) Cost of ordering:
|
|
|
Raw materials:
|
Rs. 1,000 per order
|
|
Packing materials:
|
Rs. 5,000 per order
|
|
(2) Cost of holding inventory:
|
|
|
Raw materials:
|
1 ps. per unit per month
|
|
Packing materials:
|
5 ps. per unit per month
|
|
(3) Production rate:
|
2,00,000 units per month
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial reporting effects of selling receivables
The following note appears in Daimler’s 2011 Annual Report:
Based on market conditions and liquidity needs, Daimler may sell portfolios of retail and wholesale receivables to third parties. At the time of the sale, Daimler determines whether the legally transferred receivables meet the criteria for derecognition in conformity with the appropriate provisions. If the criteria are not met, the receivables continue to be recognized in the Group’s statement of financial position.
As of 31 December 2011, the carrying amount of receivables from financial services sold but not derecognized for accounting purposes amounted to €3496 million (2010: €1254 million). The associated risk and rewards are similar to those with respect to receivables from financial services that have not been transferred.
Required
(a) Why does Daimler sell receivables from its financial services arm?
(b) What does Daimler mean by “derecognition” from the sale of receivables? What entry does the company make to record the sale of receivables when the sales are derecognized?
(c) What is meant by receivables “sold but not derecognized”? What entry is made in this case?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lease accounting at Metro AG
Metro AG is one of the world’s largest discount retailers. Headquartered in Germany, its activities are segmented as follows:
- Cash and carry (47%): Food and nonfood products at wholesale prices, primarily to business customers, under the Metro and Makro store brands.
- Hypermarkets and supermarkets (21%): Food products under the Extra store brand and, in hypermarkets, food and nonfood products under the Real store brand.
- Specialty stores (25%): Two chains in this group, Media Markt and Saturn, offer electronic products, and the other, Praktiker, specializes in the home improvement market.
- Department stores (7%): A variety of household and clothing products in more upscale shopping environments under the Kauflof store brand.
Metro generates about 53% of its sales within Germany, 45% from the rest of Europe, and 2% from elsewhere. Revenues were €53.5 billion in 2004.
Most of its nearly 4000 stores worldwide are leased. Some of these leases are capitalized (i.e., the present value of future lease payments appear on the balance sheet), but most are not.
Metro’s 2004 annual report reveals the following information:
- Capital leases at the end of 2004 had a present value of €2090 million. Minimum payments required in 2005 are €280 million. The weighted-average interest rate for these leases was 6.1%.
- As of the end of 2004, minimum payments required under operating leases were €1182 million for 2005, €4234 million in total payments over the next four years (2006–2009), and €5548 million in total payments for 2010 and beyond.
- shareholders equity at the end of 2004 was €4739 million, debt was €9506 million, and invested capital was €14 245 million.
Metro reported the following results in 2005:
- Revenues were €55.7 billion.
- Net operating profit after tax (NOPAT) was €1368 million, based on a tax rate of 30%.
- Net income was €649 million.
- Cash flow from operations was €2.2 billion in 2005, down from €2.9 billion in 2004 and €3.1 billion in 2003.
Required
Note: Round all euro amounts to the nearest million.
(a) What reasons can you give for why Metro relies so extensively on leasing?
(b) Prepare the journal entry to record cash payments under capital leases for 2005.
(c) Prepare the journal entry to record cash payments under operating leases for 2005.
(d) Using the year-end 2004 figure for invested capital, estimate ROIC for 2005.
(e) Calculate the present value of Metro’s operating leases as of the end of 2004. For your calculations, assume that (1) the lease payments are made at the end of each year, (2) the implicit weighted-average interest rate for the leases is 6%, (3) payments for 2006 through 2009 are made evenly throughout the period (i.e., lease payments are the same in each year), and (4) payments in 2010 and beyond are made evenly over the next 10 years.
(f) Give the journal entries to convert the operating leases into capital leases as of the end of 2004, and account for them as capital leases in 2005. Assume an amortization period of 15 years.
(g) Reestimate NOPAT for 2005 after accounting for the operating leases as capital leases.
(h) Reestimate ROIC, after accounting for the operating leases as capital leases.
(i) What effect will capitalization of the operating leases have on cash flow from operations?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for warranties
The following note comes from a recent annual report for Sony Corporation:
Sony provides for the estimated cost of product warranties at the time revenue is recognized by either product category group or individual product. The product warranty is calculated based upon product sales, estimated probability of failure and estimated cost per claim. The variables used in the calculation of the provision are reviewed on a periodic basis.
Certain subsidiaries in the Electronics business offer extended warranty programs. The consideration received through extended warranty service is deferred and amortized on a straight-line basis over the term of the extended warranty.
Required
Based on this note, answer the following:
(a) How does Sony account for the product warranties? What would be the impact of the estimated cost of product warranties on each of the three principal financial statements?
(b) If Sony underestimates product warranties expense, how would it correct the error?
(c) How does Sony treat the extended warranty program at (a) time of sale, and (b) in subsequent periods? How would the accounting affect each of the three principal financial statements?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for contingent assets: the case of Cardinal Health
In a complaint dated 26 July 2007, and after a four-year investigation, the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) accused Cardinal Health, the world’s second largest distributor of pharmaceutical products, of violating generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) by prematurely recognizing gains from a provisional settlement of a lawsuit filed against several vitamin manufacturers. Weeks earlier, the company agreed to pay $600 million to settle a lawsuit filed by shareholders who bought stock between 2000 and 2004, accusing Cardinal of accounting irregularities and inflated earnings.The recovery from the vitamin companies should have been an unqualified positive for Cardinal Health. What happened?
Background
The story begins in 1999 when Cardinal Health joined a class action to recover overcharges from vitamin manufacturers. The vitamin makers had just pled guilty to charges of price-fixing from 1988 to 1998. In March 2000, the defendants in that action reached a provisional settlement with the plaintiffs under which Cardinal could have received $22 million. But Cardinal opted out of the settlement, choosing instead to file its own claims in the hopes of getting a bigger payout.
The accounting troubles started in October 2000 when senior managers at Cardinal began to consider recording a portion of the expected proceeds from a future settlement as a litigation gain. The purpose was to close a gap in Cardinal’s budgeted earnings for the second quarter of FY 2001, which ended 31 December 2000. According to the SEC, in a November 2000 e-mail a senior executive at Cardinal Health explained why Cardinal should use the vitamin gain, rather than other earnings initiatives, to report the desired level of earnings: “We do not need much to get over the hump, although the preference would be the vitamin case so that we do not steal from Q3.”
On 31 December 2000, the last day of the second quarter of FY 2001, Cardinal recorded a $10 million contingent vitamin litigation gain as a reduction to cost of sales. In its complaint, the SEC alleged that Cardinal’s classification of the gain as a reduction to cost of sales violated GAAP. It is worth noting that had the gain not been recognized, Cardinal would have missed analysts’ average consensus EPS estimate for the quarter by $.02.
Later in FY 2001, Cardinal considered recording a similar gain, but its auditor at the time, PricewaterhouseCoopers (hereafter PwC), was opposed to the idea. Accordingly, no litigation gains were recorded in the third or fourth quarters of FY 2001. Moreover, PwC advised Cardinal that the $10 million recognized in the second quarter of FY 2001 as a reduction to cost of sales should be reclassified “below the line” as nonoperating income. Cardinal management ignored the auditor’s advice, and the $10 million gain was not reclassified.
The urge to report an additional gain resurfaced during the first quarter of FY 2002, and for the same reason as in the prior year: to cover an expected shortfall in earnings. On 30 September 2001, the last day of the first quarter of FY 2002, Cardinal recorded a $12 million gain, bringing the total gains from litigation to $22 million. As in the previous year, Cardinal classified the gain as a reduction to cost of sales, allowing the company to boost operating earnings. However, PwC disagreed with Cardinal’s classification. The auditor advised Cardinal that the amount should have been recorded as nonoperating income on the grounds that the estimated vitamin recovery arose from litigation, was nonrecurring, and stemmed from claims against third parties that originated nearly 13 years earlier.
By May 2002, PwC had been replaced as Cardinal’s auditor by Arthur Andersen. Andersen was responsible for auditing Cardinal’s financial statements for the whole of FY 2002, ended 30 June 2002, and thus, it reviewed Cardinal’s classification of the $12 million vitamin gain. The Andersen auditors agreed with PwC that Cardinal had misclassified the gain. After Cardinal’s persistent refusal to reclassify the gains, Andersen advised the company that it disagreed but would treat the $12 million as a “passed adjustment” and include the issue in its Summary of Audit Differences.
In spring 2002 Cardinal Health reached a $35.3 million settlement with several vitamin manufacturers. The $13.3 million not yet recognized was recorded as a gain in the final quarter of FY 2002. But while management thought its accounting policies had been vindicated by the settlement, the issue wouldn’t go away.
On 2 April 2003, an article in the “Heard on the Street” column in The Wall Street Journal sharply criticized Cardinal Health for its handling of the litigation gains.It’s a CARDINAL rule of accounting:” the article begins, pun intended. “Don’t count your chickens before they hatch. Yet new disclosures in Cardinal Health Inc.’s latest annual report suggests that is what the drug wholesaler has done not just once, but twice.” Nevertheless, management continued to defend its accounting practices, partly on the grounds that the amounts later received from the vitamin companies exceeded the amount of the contingent gains recognized in FY 2001 and FY 2002. Moreover, after the initial settlement, Cardinal Health received an additional $92.8 million in vitamin-related litigation settlements, bringing the total proceeds to over $128 million.
The outcome
Cardinal management finally succumbed to reality in the following year, and in the Form 10-K (annual report) filed with the SEC for FY 2004, Cardinal restated its financial results to reverse both gains, restating operating income from the two affected quarters. But the damage had already been done. The article in The Wall Street Journal triggered the SEC investigation alluded to earlier. A broad range of issues, going far beyond the treatment of the litigation gains, were brought under the agency’s scrutiny, culminating in the SEC complaint. Two weeks after the complaint was filed, Cardinal Health settled with the SEC, agreeing to pay a $35 million fine.
Required
(a) What justification could be given for deducting the expected litigation gain from cost of goods sold? Why did Cardinal Health choose this alternative instead of reporting it as a nonoperating item?
(b) What did the senior Cardinal executive mean when he said, “We do not need much to get over the hump, although the preference would be the vitamin case so that we do not steal from Q3”? And more specifically, what is meant by the phrase, “not steal from Q3”?
(c) What specifically did Cardinal Health do wrong that got it into trouble with the SEC?
(d) What might Cardinal Health’s senior managers say in their own defense? How might they justify the timing of the $10 million and the $12 million gains?
(e) Cardinal Health ended up receiving a lot more than $22 million from the litigation settlement. Were their actions so wrong as to justify the actions of the SEC? On a scale of 1 to 10, with 1 being “relatively harmless” and 10 being “downright fraudulent,” where would you classify Cardinal’s behavior, and why?
Cardinal Health Settles shareholders Suit,” The Associated Press, 1 June 2007.
Arthur Andersen ceased operating months later in the aftermath of the Enron scandal. The Cardinal Health audit was then taken over by Ernst & Young.
A Summary of Audit Differences is a nonpublic document that lists the errors and adjustments identified by the auditor. It serves as the basis for the audit opinion. If the net effect of the errors exceeds the materiality threshold established for the client, the auditor will require an adjustment to the financial statements. “Passed adjustment” means that the error in question was waived; that is, no adjustment was demanded by the auditor.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Firestone Tire and Rubber Company (A)
Throughout most of the twentieth century, Firestone Tire and Rubber Company was one of the world’s leading manufacturers of tires for passenger cars and trucks. In 1978 the company was forced to recall some of its radial tires for alleged defects. The following pages provide excerpts from Firestone’s 1979 annual report, detailing the provisions and contingencies involved in the tire recall and related issues. The report of the company’s auditors is also provided.
Required
(a) Reconstruct summary journal entries for all of the activity in the “accrued liability for tire recall” account since it was established in 1978 (see Note 15). Assume that settlements with customers take the form of both cash refunds and tire replacements. Ignore tax effects.
(b) Explain why the company has provided for potential losses on the tire recall, but not for the lawsuits relating to the defective tires.
(c) What key messages are the auditors trying to convey with the auditors’ report?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Provision for tire recall and related costs
In October 1978, a provision for tire recall of $234.0 million ($147.4 million after income taxes) was charged against income. The provision represented management’s estimate of the cost of fulfilling the company’s obligations under the agreement with the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and the Company’s program of cash refunds to those customers who had received an adjustment on tires that would otherwise have been subject to recall and free replacement.
In October 1979, based on experience to date and anticipated future charges, the 1978 provision was reduced. Management also determined that the provision should be broadened to include $30.8 million of other related costs which were not considered for inclusion in the original provision. The net effect of the above was to reduce the provision by $46.9 million, for which no provision for income taxes was required because of the use of 1978 foreign tax credits of $20.8 million.
It should be recognized that the number of tires still to be returned and the other costs yet to be incurred may vary from management’s estimates. Any additional adjustments required by such variance will be reflected in income in the future.
The activity in the accrued liability for tire recall and related costs for 1979 and 1978 follows:
|
1979
|
1978
|
|
Accrued liability at beginning of year
|
$227.2
|
$—
|
|
Amount accrued (reversed) during the year
|
(46.9)
|
234.0
|
|
Amounts charged thereto
|
(123.9)
|
(6.8)
|
|
Accrued liability at end of year
|
$ 56.4
|
$227.2
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Contingent liabilities
Twelve purported consumer commercial class actions (one of which consolidates five previous actions) are presently pending against the Company in various state and federal courts. . . In the purported class actions, the named plaintiffs are requesting. . . various forms of monetary relief, including punitive damages, as a result of the Company’s having manufactured and sold allegedly defective Steel Belted Radial 500 and other steel belted radial passenger tires.
. . . In addition to the class actions, there are several thousand individual claims pending against the Company for damages allegedly connected with steel belted radial passenger tires. . .
. . . The Company is a defendant in a purported class action which seeks, among other things, recovery for losses by stockholders who purchased the Company’s common stock between December 1975 and July 1978 by reason of the decline in market price for such stock alleged to result from the Company’s alleged failure to make proper disclosure of, among other things, the steel belted radial passenger tire situation.
In March 1979, the United States brought an action seeking recovery against the Company in the amount of approximately $62 million by reason of alleged illegal gold trading activity in Switzerland.
Following a federal grand jury investigation into the Company’s incomes taxes, the Company entered into a plea agreement in July 1979 under which the Company pleaded guilty to two counts charging the inclusion in its taxable income for 1972 and 1973 amounts that had been generated in prior years: the courts imposed a total fine of ten thousand dollars on the Company by reason of its plea. A civil tax audit by the Internal Revenue Service is currently in progress covering some of the same matters investigated by the grand jury as well as other matters. The government may assess substantial tax, interest and penalties in connection with the matters under investigation.
The Securities and Exchange Commission is conducting an investigation of the adequacy of the Company’s disclosures in earlier years concerning the Steel Belted Radial 500 tire. . .
. . . The Company has various other contingent liabilities, some of which are for substantial amounts, arising out of suits, investigations and claims related to other aspects of the conduct of its business. . .
. . . Increased uncertainties have developed during the past year with regard to some of the contingencies identified in this note. Because of the existing uncertainties, the eventual outcome of these contingencies cannot be predicted, and the ultimate liability with respect to them cannot be reasonably estimated. Since the minimum potential liability for a substantial portion of the claims and suits described in this note cannot be reasonably estimated, no liability for them has been recorded in the financial statements. Management believes, however, that the disposition of these contingencies could well be very costly. Although the Company’s management, including its General Counsel, believes it is unlikely that the ultimate outcome of these contingencies will have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial position, such a consequence is possible if substantial punitive or other damages are awarded in one or more of the cases involved.
Report of independent certified public accountants
To the Stockholders and Board of Directors,
The Firestone Tire & Rubber Company:
We have examined the balance sheets of The Firestone Tire & Rubber Company and consolidated subsidiaries at October 31, 1979 and 1978, and the related statements of income, stockholders’ equity, and changes in financial position for the years then ended. Our examinations were made in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards and, accordingly, included such tests of the accounting records and such other auditing procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances.
As set forth in Note 16 to the financial statements, the Company is a party to various legal and other actions. These actions claim substantial amounts as a result of alleged tire defects and other matters. The ultimate liability resulting from these matters cannot be reasonably estimated. In our report dated December 18, 1978, our opinion on the financial statements for the year ended October 31, 1978, was unqualified. However, due to the increased uncertainties that developed during the year ended October 31, 1979, with respect to these matters, our present opinion on the financial statements for the year ended October 31, 1978, as presented herein, is different from that expressed in our previous report.
In our opinion, subject to the effects on the financial statements of adjustments that might have been required had the outcome of the matters referred to in the preceding paragraph been known, the financial statements referred to above present fairly the financial position of The Firestone Tire & Rubber Company and consolidated subsidiaries at October 31, 1979 and 1978, and the results of their operations and the changes in their financial position for the years then ended, in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles applied on a consistent basis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Firestone Tire and Rubber Company (B)
Late in 1979, to save the company from pending collapse, Firestone brought in John Nevin as CEO. He closed several of the company’s manufacturing plants, and spun off nontire-related businesses, including the famous Firestone Country Club. In 1988, after the company had been restored to some measure of profitability, Nevin negotiated the sale of Firestone to the Japanese company Bridgestone. The North American division, headquartered in Nashville, became known as Bridgestone-Firestone (BFS).
It’s déjà vu all over again
But just as memories were fading of the tire recall from the late 1970s, rumours began to circulate regarding new quality concerns at BFS. The trouble started in 1996 as customers began to allege that Firestone tires on their Ford Explorers were faulty. As the complaints grew louder, BFS decided to conduct an internal investigation. The conclusion: the tires had either been misused or underinflated.
But the problem wouldn’t go away. The tires were linked to several road deaths in Venezuela, and a nasty argument ensued between BFS and Ford, with each blaming the other for the fiasco.
In May 2000, the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration in the US began an investigation of several brands of tires produced by BFS. In August 2000, BFS responded by announcing a “voluntary” recall of the Firestone Radial ATX, ATX II, and Wilderness AT tires produced at their factory in Decatur, Illinois. The recall was substantially complete by August of the following year. Meanwhile, BFS became the target of many lawsuits.
Financial statement effects
The financial statement consequences of the recall were documented in the notes to Bridgestone’s financial statements. According to Bridgestone’s 2001 Annual Report,
For the fiscal years 2001 and 2000, BFS has recorded $661 million and $754 million provisions, respectively, presented as loss on voluntary tire recall in the. . . statements of income, for the direct costs of voluntary tire recall and for product liability suits and claims. . ., net of anticipated proceeds from product liability insurance recoveries, and BFS has paid $479 million and $406 million, respectively.
From the 2002 Annual Report,
In fiscal years 2002 and 2001, [Bridgestone] has paid $245 million and $479 million, respectively, for the direct costs of voluntary tire recall and for product liability suits and claims. . . As a result of the payments, as of December 31, 2002 and 2001, [Bridgestone] has recorded liabilities for matters related to the voluntary tire recall and resulting litigation amounting to $285 million and $530 million, respectively.
And from the 2003 Annual Report,
In fiscal years 2003 and 2002, [Bridgestone] has paid $96 million and $245 million, respectively, for the direct cost of voluntary tire recall and for product liability suits and claims, class actions. . . As a result of the payments, as of December 31, 2003 and 2002, [Bridgestone] has recorded liabilities for matters related to the voluntary tires recall and resulting litigation amounting to $140 million and $285 million, respectively.
Bridgestone reported net income of $132 million in 2001, $378 million in 2002, and $828 million in 2003.
Required
(a) Based on the notes from the 2001, 2002, and 2003 annual reports, make whatever summary journals are needed to reconcile the ending balances in the liability account ($530 million in 2001, $285 million in 2002, and $140 million in 2003).
(b) Did Bridgestone create hidden reserves when they established the provisions for voluntary tire recall? How would you know?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive pension review problem: Cathay Pacific
Headquartered in Hong Kong, Cathay Pacific is one of the world’s leading airlines. The disclosures shown below are taken from Note 19 in the Company’s 2010 annual report.
Required
(a) Describe what is meant by service cost and interest cost.
(b) How much pension expense does Cathay Pacific report in 2009 and 2010 for its defined benefit plans?
(c) Cathay Pacific reports a HK$518 million expected return on plan assets as an offset to 2010 pension expense. How was this amount determined? What is the actual gain or loss realized on its 2010 plan assets? What is the purpose of using this estimated amount instead of the actual gain or loss?
(d) What factors affected Cathay Pacific’s 2010 pension liability? What factors affected its 2010 plan assets?
(e) What does the term “funded status” mean? What is the funded status of the pension plans over the previous five years, from 2006 until 2010?
(f) The company reduced its discount rate from 4.8% in 2009 to 4.4% in 2010. What effect(s) did this change have on the balance sheet and the income statement?
(g) Assume that Cathay Pacific decreased its estimate of expected annual wage increases used to determine its defined benefit obligations in 2010. What effect(s) does this decrease have on its financial statements? In general, how does such a decrease affect income?
(h) What journal entry was needed to record pension plan expense in 2010 for Cathay’s defined contribution plans?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Retirement benefits
The Group operates various defined benefit and defined contribution retirement schemes for its employees in Hong Kong and in certain overseas locations. The assets of these schemes are held in funds administered by independent trustees. The retirement schemes in Hong Kong are registered under and comply with the Occupational Retirement Schemes Ordinance and the Mandatory Provident Fund Schemes Ordinance (“MPFSO”). Most of the employees engaged outside Hong Kong are covered by appropriate local arrangements.
The Group operates the following principal schemes:
(a) Defined benefit retirement schemes
The Swire Group Retirement Benefit Scheme (“SGRBS”) in Hong Kong, in which the Company and Cathay Pacific Catering Services (H.K.) Limited (“CPCS”) are participating employers, provides resignation and retirement benefits to its members, which include the Company’s cabin attendants who joined before September 1996 and other locally engaged employees who joined before June 1997, upon their cessation of service. The Company and CPCS meet the full cost of all benefits due by SGRBS to their employee members who are not required to contribute to the scheme.
Staff employed by the Company in Hong Kong on expatriate terms before April 1993 were eligible to join another scheme, the Cathay Pacific Airways Limited Retirement Scheme (“CPALRS”). Both members and the Company contribute to CPALRS.
The latest actuarial valuation of CPALRS and the portion of SGRBS funds specifically designated for the Company’s employees were completed by a qualified actuary, Watson Wyatt Hong Kong Limited, as at 31st December 2009 using the projected unit credit method. The figures for SGRBS and CPALRS disclosed as at 31st December 2010 were provided by Cannon Trustees Limited, the administration manager.
|
2010
|
|
2009
|
|
|
|
SGRBS
|
CPALS
|
SGRBS
|
CPALS
|
|
ale principal actuarial assumptions are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Discount rate used
|
4.40%
|
4.40%
|
4.80%
|
4.80%
|
|
Expected return on plan assets
|
8.%
|
650%
|
8.%
|
7.%
|
|
Future salary increases
|
2-6%
|
1-5%
|
2-5%
|
1-5%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Group’s obligations are 106% (2009: 97%) covered by the plan assets held by the trustees as at 31st December 2010.
|
2010 HK$M
|
2009 HK$M
|
|
Net expenses recognized in the Group profit and loss:
|
|
|
|
Current service cost
|
324
|
316
|
|
Interest on obligations
|
311
|
342
|
|
Expected return on plan assets
|
(518)
|
(371)
|
|
Actuarial loss recognized
|
1
|
30
|
|
Total included in staff costs
|
118
|
317
|
|
Actual return on plan assets
|
820
|
1,578
|
|
Group
|
|
2010 HK$M
|
2009 HK$M
|
|
Net (asset)/liability recognized in the statement of financial position:
|
|
|
|
Present value of funded obligations
|
7,615
|
7,460
|
|
Fair value of plan assets
|
(8,077)
|
(7,217)
|
|
(462)
|
243
|
|
Group
|
|
2010 HK$M
|
2009 HK$M
|
|
Movements in present value of funded obligations comprise:
|
|
|
|
At 1st January
|
7,460
|
7,108
|
|
Movements for the year
|
|
|
|
– current service cost
|
324
|
316
|
|
– interest cost
|
311
|
342
|
|
– employee contributions
|
12
|
14
|
|
– benefits paid
|
(524)
|
(681)
|
|
– actuarial losses
|
32
|
361
|
|
At 31st December
|
7,615
|
7,460
|
|
Group
|
|
2010 HK$M
|
2009 HK$M
|
|
Movements in fair value of plan assets comprise:
|
|
|
|
At 1st January
|
7,217
|
5,924
|
|
Movements for the year
|
|
|
|
– expected return on plan assets
|
518
|
371
|
|
– employee contributions
|
12
|
14
|
|
– employer contributions
|
552
|
382
|
|
– benefits paid
|
(524)
|
(681)
|
|
– actuarial gain
|
302
|
1,207
|
|
At 31st December
|
8,077
|
7,217
|
|
Group
|
|
2010 HK$M
|
2009 HK$M
|
|
Fair value of plan assets comprises:
|
|
|
|
Equities
|
5,318
|
4,297
|
|
Debt instruments
|
1,919
|
1,725
|
|
Deposits and cash
|
840
|
526
|
|
Others
|
—
|
669
|
|
8,077
|
7,217
|
The overall expected rate of return on plan assets is determined based on the average rate of return of major categories of assets that constitute the total plan assets.
|
|
|
|
Group
|
|
|
|
2010 HK$M
|
2009 HK$M
|
2008 HK$M
|
2007 HK$M
|
2006 HK$M
|
|
Present value of funded obligations
|
7,615
|
7,460
|
7,108
|
8,223
|
7,844
|
|
Fair value of plan assets
|
(8,077)
|
(7,217)
|
(5,924)
|
(9,131)
|
(8,065)
|
|
Surplus)/deficit
|
(462)
|
243
|
1,184
|
[908)
|
[221)
|
The difference between the fair value of the schemes’ assets and the present value of the accrued past services liabilities at the date of an actuarial valuation is taken into consideration when determining future funding levels in order to ensure that the schemes will be able to meet liabilities as they become due. The contributions are calculated based upon funding recommendations arising from actuarial valuations. The Group expects to make contributions of HK$378 million to the schemes in 2011.
(b) Defined contribution retirement schemes
Staff employed by the company in Hong Kong are eligible to join a defined contribution retirement scheme, the CPA Provident Fund.
Under the terms of the schemes, other than the Company contribution, staff may elect to contribute from 0% to 10% of their monthly salary. During the year, the benefits forfeited in accordance with the schemes’ rules amounted to HK$18 million (2009: HK$ 19 million) which have been applied toward the contributions payable by the Company.
A mandatory provident fund (“MPF”) scheme was established under the MPFSO in December 2000. Where staff elect to join the MPF scheme, the Company and staff are required to contribute 5% of the employee’s relevant income (capped at HK$20 000). Staff may elect to contribute more than the minimum as a voluntary contribution.
Contributions to defined contribution retirement schemes charged to the Group profit and loss are HK$756 million (2009: HK$677 million).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating temporary and permanent differences
Hernan Company reports the following information for the year:
|
Book income before income taxes
|
€636,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
€312,000
|
|
Income taxes payable for the year
|
€96,000
|
|
Income tax rate on taxable income
|
40%
|
The company has both permanent and temporary differences between book income and taxable income.
Required
(a) What is the amount of temporary differences for the year? Indicate whether the effect is to make book income larger or smaller than taxable income.
(b) What is the amount of permanent differences for the year? Indicate whether the effect is to make book income larger or smaller than taxable income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interpreting income tax disclosures
The following note was taken from the 2011 Annual Report of Tesco, a global UK-based grocery and discount retailing chain.
Required
(a) Based on this disclosure, which figure do you think was higher: taxable income reported under tax law, or pretax income reported under IFRS? How would you know? Does the magnitude and direction of this difference imply “conservative” accounting or “aggressive” accounting on the part of Tesco?
(b) What is meant by the term “origination and reversal of temporary differences?” What effect did the change in the UK corporate tax rate have on deferred income tax, and why?
(c) What would you expect to be the largest source of Tesco’s deferred income tax liability?
Recognized in the Group income statement
|
2011 £m
|
2010 £m
|
|
Current tax expense
|
|
|
|
UK corporation tax
|
694
|
566
|
|
Foreign tax
|
181
|
128
|
|
Adjustments in respect of prior years
|
(114)
|
(91)
|
|
761
|
603
|
|
Deferred income tax
|
|
|
|
Origination and reversal of temporary differences
|
148
|
110
|
|
Adjustments in respect of prior years
|
12
|
124
|
|
Change in tax rate
|
(57)
|
3
|
|
103
|
237
|
|
Total income tax expense
|
864
|
840
|
A number of changes to the UK corporation tax system were announced in the June 2010 Budget Statement. The Finance (No.2) Act 2010 included legislation to reduce the main rate of corporation tax from 28 to 27% from 1 April 2011. The proposed reduction from 28 to 27% was substantively enacted at the balance sheet date and has therefore been reflected in these Group financial statements.
In addition to the changes in rates of corporation tax disclosed above, a number of further changes to the UK corporation tax system were announced in the March 2011 UK Budget Statement. A resolution passed by Parliament on March 29, 2011 reduced the main rate of corporation tax to 26% from April 1, 2011. Legislation to reduce the main rate of corporation tax from 26 to 25% from April 1, 2012 is expected to be included in the Finance Act 2011. Further reductions to the main rate are proposed to reduce the rate by 1% per annum to 23% by April 1, 2014. None of these expected rate reductions had been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date and, therefore, are not reflected in these Group financial statements.
The effect of the changes enacted by Parliament on March 29, 2011 to reduce the corporation tax rate to 26%, with effect from April 1, 2011, is to reduce the deferred tax liability provided at the balance sheet date by £32m (£46m increase in profit and £14m decrease in the Group Statement of Comprehensive Income).
The effect of the changes expected to be enacted in the Finance Act 2011 to reduce the corporation tax rate from 26 to 25%, with effect from April 1, 2012, would be to reduce the deferred tax liability provided at the balance sheet date by a further £32m (£46m increase in profit and £14m decrease in the Group Statement of Comprehensive Income).
The proposed reductions of the main rate of corporation tax by 1% per year to 23% by April 1, 2014 are expected to be enacted separately each year. The overall effect of the further changes from 25 to 23%, if these applied to the deferred tax balance at the balance sheet date, would be to reduce the deferred tax liability by £66m (being £33m recognized in 2013 and £33m recognized in 2014).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deferred income taxes and the statement of cash flows
The operating activities section from recent statements of cash flows for Group Air France-KLM is shown below. A note from the Group’s fiscal year 2011 Annual Report is also provided.
Required
(a) Deferred taxes are a negative adjustment to net income in both years. What do these adjustments signify?
(b) What events or circumstances gave rise to the adjustments?
|
in € million, period from April 1 to March 31
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Net income for the period – Equity holders for Air France-KLM
|
613
|
(1 559)
|
|
Noncontrolling interests
|
(1)
|
(1)
|
|
Amortization, depreciation, and operating provisions
|
1,676
|
1,675
|
|
Financial provisions
|
(3)
|
7
|
|
Gain on disposals of tangible and intangible assets
|
(11)
|
61
|
|
Loss/(gain) on disposals of subsidiaries and associates
|
(13)
|
—
|
|
Gain on WAM (ex Amadeus) operation
|
(1,030)
|
—
|
|
Derivatives – nonmonetary result
|
(25)
|
(8)
|
|
Unrealized foreign exchange gains and losses, net
|
33
|
13
|
|
Share of (profits)/losses of associates
|
21
|
17
|
|
Deferred taxes
|
(215)
|
(591)
|
|
Other nonmonetary items
|
(209)
|
143
|
|
Subtotal
|
836
|
(243)
|
|
(Increase)/decrease in inventories
|
(10)
|
(28)
|
|
(Increase)/decrease in trade receivables
|
171
|
(89)
|
|
Increase/(decrease) in trade payables
|
245
|
126
|
|
Change in other receivables and payables
|
108
|
(564)
|
|
Net cash flow from operating activities
|
1,350
|
(798)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Penben Corporation has a defined benefit pension plan. At 31 December, its pension obligation is €10 million and pension assets are €9 million. If Penben chooses to report under a method consistent with both IFRS and U.S. GAAP, the reporting on the balance sheet would be closest to which of the following?
A. €10 million is shown as a liability, and €9 million appears as an asset.
B. €1 million is shown as a net pension obligation.
C. There is no choice that reports pension assets and obligations on the balance sheet consistently under IFRS and U.S. GAAP.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bad debts on loans receivable
Excerpts from the 2008 Annual Report for J.P. Morgan Chase & Co. (“JPMC”) are provided in
Note that the balance in the allowance for loan losses account at the end of JPMC’s fiscal 2006 was $7279 million and the balance in their loan asset account was $483 127 million at the same date.
Required
(a) Calculate JPMC’s allowance for loan losses as a percentage of gross loans outstanding for each of the three years for which information has been provided.
(b) What is the dollar value of JPMC’s loan write-offs in 2007 and 2008?
(c) Comment upon JPMC’s loan loss provisioning over the periods shown. Do they appear to have used the provision to create hidden reserves? Are they sitting on a “cookie jar” reserve or are you expecting a big hit to the income statement in future periods as a result of past underprovisioning for bad loans?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining bad debt expense from an aging schedule
Hilary Company’s year-end accounts receivable show the following balances by age:
|
Age of accounts
|
Balance
|
|
Not due yet
|
€600,000
|
|
0–30 days
|
200,000
|
|
31–60 days
|
45,000
|
|
61–120 days
|
20,000
|
|
More than 120 days
|
10,000
|
The credit balance in the allowance for doubtful accounts is now €8600. Hilary Company’s prior collection experience suggests that Hilary should use the following percentages to compute the total uncollectible amount of receivables: 0–30 days, 0.5% 31–60 days, 1.0% 61–120, 10%, and more than 120 days, 70%.
Required
Prepare the journal entry to record Hilary’s bad debt expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing receivables and the allowance for doubtful accounts
Vermeulen Company of Ghent, a producer of custom-made furniture, was founded in 2010. Revenues in its first year were €3.5 million, all on account. The balance in the receivables account at the end of the year was €1 million. The company estimated uncollectible receivables at 2% of sales. Based on an aging schedule and other information about customer accounts, €40 000 of receivables were written off on 31 December 2010.
One year later, on 31 December 2011, the balances in selected accounts were as follows:
|
Sales
|
€4.0 million
|
|
Accounts receivable (gross)
|
€1.5 million
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
€50,000
|
On 31 December 2011, Vermeulen Company estimated that its accounts receivable balance contained €55 000 of likely uncollectibles. An adjusting entry was made to the allowance account to reflect this estimate. As in the previous year, all sales were on account.
Required
1. What was the balance in accounts receivable (gross) at the end of 2010?
2. What was the balance in the allowance for doubtful accounts account at the end of 2011?
3. What was the bad debt expense for 2011?
4. What was the amount, in euro, of the specific accounts receivable written off during 2011?
5. How much cash was collected in 2011 from customers?
6. What is the balance of accounts receivable (net) on the statement of financial position (i.e., balance sheet) dated 31 December 2011?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Citigroup Inc.: accounting for loan loss reserves∗
Anne Yang, a buy-side† analyst working for a prominent asset management firm in Hong Kong, was considering whether or not to diversify her portfolio by taking a position in a financial institution such as Citigroup Inc., J.P. Morgan Chase & Co., or some other global bank.
Anne was impressed to learn that Citigroup’s reported earnings for the fourth quarter of 2004 had once again surpassed the analysts’ consensus estimates; this time by a penny. While she was encouraged by the earnings performance, she was confused by a comment in a recent BusinessWeek article which indicated that Citigroup achieved its numbers by some “cookie jar” accounting technique.
The technique discussed in the article referred to a bank’s accounting for loan loss reserves. After carefully examining Citigroup’s financial statements and reading the notes company’s in the most recent annual report, she discovered that Citigroup reduced its loan loss reserve allowance in 2004 from $13.243 billion to $11.869 billion, and that this reduction helped boost the earnings figures. Unsure of what that meant, Anne decided to examine the issue further before making her investment decision.
Citigroup Inc.
Citigroup Inc. was formed in 1998 when Citicorp Inc. agreed to a $70 billion merger with Travelers Group Inc. At that time, Citicorp was both a consumer and commercial bank that spanned the globe, while Travelers was a large US-based financial services and insurance provider. The merged entity, Citigroup Inc., became a diversified global financial services holding company whose businesses provided a broad range of financial services to consumer and corporate customers. By the end of 2004, the company had more than 200 million customer accounts and was doing business in more than 100 countries. It employed approximately 148 000 employees in the United States and roughly 146 000 employees outside the United States.
Controversy
Loan loss reserves are reserves that banks record to cover bad debt, and they represent the amount of money that management believes the bank will not be able to collect from the currently outstanding loans it has made to borrowers. The allowance (or loan loss reserves) is established through a provision for loan losses which is charged to earnings. Allowance for loan losses appears on a bank’s balance sheet as a contra-asset, and the amount recorded is a deduction from the outstanding loans receivables. When bad loans are eventually written off, they are charged against the loan loss reserves account.
When the economy slows down, the provision for loan losses of banks usually increases in anticipation of higher debt defaults. This results in a decrease in net income. As a result, the largest determinant of a bank’s profit fluctuations is often its provision for loan losses. These higher reserves magnify the negative impact of the economic cycle on the income and capital of banks. As might be expected, the size and timing of loan loss provisions tend to improve with higher levels of economic activity.
Academic research has found that most banks around the world delayed provisioning for bad loans until it is too late – when the cyclical downturn had already set in – possibly exacerbating the negative impact of the economic cycle on the income and capital of banks.
Because loan loss provisions are based on managerial discretion, they are subject to income smoothing as management can overprovision when earnings are high and under provision, or even release reserves, when earnings are low. Income smoothing goes against accounting regulations, as within these regulations, banks cannot shift funds around at will.
Thus, the controversy surrounding loan loss reserves revolved around whether banks with generous loan loss reserves were manipulating earnings or merely practicing conservative accounting.
Citigroup loan loss reserves footnotes
In its financial footnotes for 2004, Citigroup reported the following with regard to its loan loss reserves:
During the past two years, the worldwide credit environment has continuously improved, as evidenced by declining cash-basis loan balances and lower delinquency rates. Accordingly, the company has reduced its Allowance for Credit Losses.
During 2004, the company released $2.004 billion of reserves, consisting of $900 million from [Global Corporate Investment Bank’s (GCIB)] reserves and $1.104 billion from Global Consumer’s reserves. . . At December 31, 2004, the Company’s total allowance for loans, leases, and commitments was $11.869 billion.
During 2003, the Company released $508 million of reserves, consisting of $300 million in GCIB and $208 million in Global Consumer. At December 31, 2003, the Company’s total allowance for loans, leases and commitments was $13.243 billion.
Management evaluates the adequacy of loan loss reserves by analyzing probable loss scenarios and economic and geopolitical factors that impact the portfolios. . .
The allowance for credit losses represents management’s estimate of probable losses inherent in the lending portfolio. This evaluation process is subject to numerous estimates and judgments. The frequency of default, risk ratings, and the loss recovery rates, among other things, are considered in making this evaluation, as are the size and diversity of individual large credits. Changes in these estimates could have a direct impact on the credit costs in any quarter and could result in a change in the allowance.
At December 31, 2004 and 2003, respectively, the total allowance for credit losses, which includes reserves for unfunded lending commitments and letters of credit, totalled $3.490 billion and $4.155 billion for the Corporate loan portfolio and $8.379 billion and $9.088 billion for the Consumer loan portfolio. Attribution of the allowance is made for analytic purposes only, and the entire allowance of $11.869 billion and $13.243 billion at December 31, 2004 and 2003, respectively, is available to absorb probable credit losses inherent in the portfolio, including letters of credit and unfunded commitments. . .
In an interview with CNBC, Citigroup CFO Todd Thomson explained how loan loss reserves were used:
We put up reserves for the bad loans we think we’re going to have. If it turns out [that] we were wrong, [and] things [get] much better than we expected, then we don’t need those reserves. And in fact, according to the accounting rules, we have to release those reserves. . . We have an extremely analytical process internally. We don’t have that much judgment around it. We have to release the reserves as credit continues to get better.
He then said:
I think credit quality is going to continue to be very good. All of our forward-looking indicators continue to tell us that on the consumer side and the corporate side we’re going to have a very benign credit environment for the foreseeable future. So that’s good news. What we’re not going to see in the future is the massive improvement we’ve seen in credit quality, which allowed us to release these reserves. I don’t anticipate that going forward we’re going to be releasing reserves to this extent, unless I’m wrong and things get much better than they are today.
Conclusion
By now, Anne Yang felt more confident in her understanding of loan loss reserves accounting and was considering her possible investment in Citigroup. For 2004, Citigroup beat the analysts’ consensus EPS estimates of $4.03 by a penny, coming in at $4.04. The company had reduced its loan loss reserves during the year citing improved credit quality. Ms Yang understood that the problem with decreasing the reserves was that as banks issued new loans, they would have to replenish the reserves. Furthermore, if credit conditions worsened, banks would have to set aside even a larger amount to cover bad debts, which would further negatively impact profits.
For Anne, it was now time to weigh whether Citigroup’s accounting for loan loss was truly capturing the economic reality of the credit markets or whether it was a technique used by the bank to beat the analysts’ earnings per share numbers. She wondered, was it prudent for Citigroup to reduce its allowance? After all, many people predicted that the US economy could suffer a recession in 2007 owing to falling housing prices due to Federal Reserve Bank tightening of interest rates. If that was to happen, what would be the impact on banks’ performance and their loan loss reserves? Lastly, Anne was curious, had Citigroup maintained the same ratio of allowance for credit losses to loans in 2004, as it had in 2003, by how much would it have missed the consensus analysts’ earnings estimates?
Required
(a) Based on the financial statements for Citibank, describe the primary differences between the financial statements of banks and those of companies not in financial services.
(b) Banks are said to be in the business of “borrowing short and lending long.” What does that mean?
(c) How can banks create the “cookie jar reserves” referred to in the case?
(d) What are loan loss reserves? Using journal entries, show how the reserves are: (a) set up, (b) used, (c) written off, and (d) reversed/released.
(e) Do you agree with the following statement: “In the banking sector, conservative accounting is good accounting.” Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deere and CNH Global: performance effects of inventory accounting choice*
Deere and CNH Global compete against each other as manufacturers in the global market for agricultural and construction equipment. Both companies operate finance subsidiaries in order to extend credit to their dealer networks and end-customers. Deere is the larger of the two companies (1.6X greater in sales, 1.4X in assets, and 1.9X in employees). CNH is headquartered in the Netherlands, but like Deere it follows US GAAP and is traded on the New York Stock Exchange.
Despite the obvious similarities between the two companies, they have chosen different cost-flow assumptions for inventory, as revealed in the disclosures shown below.
Required
(a) What is CNH’s policy regarding inventory valuation and cost-flow assumptions?
(b) What is the balance in CNH’s inventory account at the end of 2010, both in dollars and as a percentage of total assets?
(c) What is Deere’s policy regarding inventory valuation and cost-flow assumptions?
(d) What is the balance in Deere’s inventory account at the end of 2010, both in dollars and as a percentage of total assets?
(e) What would the year-end inventory amounts be for Deere if they used the FIFO cost assumption for 100% of its inventories?
(f) Calculate inventory turnover for CNH.
(g) Calculate inventory turnover for Deere using the financial data as reported.
(h) Calculate inventory turnover for Deere, assuming that it used FIFO on 100% of its inventories.
(i) Review the figures above. How does Deere compare to CNH on this measure when you use the data as originally reported? How do they compare when you recast Deere’s financial data on the basis of FIFO?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Correcting inventory errors
An internal audit at Parker Corporation discovered the following inventory valuation errors:
- The 2010 year-end inventory was overstated by $34 000.
- The 2011 year-end inventory was understated by $70 000.
- The 2012 year-end inventory was understated by $23 000.
The reported income before tax for Parker was:
|
2010
|
$142,000
|
|
2011
|
$273,000
|
|
2012
|
$170,000
|
Required
Determine what income before taxes for 2010, 2011, and 2012 should have been after correcting for the errors.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The lower of cost or market rule
Segal Company, a retailer of Nokia mobile phones, uses FIFO for costing its inventory. A physical count of inventory at the end of the year revealed the following:
|
Model 3720
|
60 units at a per unit cost of €90
|
|
Model 6700
|
150 units at a per unit cost of €85
|
|
Model 6303
|
100 units at a per unit cost of €75
|
The net realizable value per unit at year-end was €72, €130, and €105 for the Models 3720, 6700, and 6303, respectively.
Required
Determine the amount of ending inventory that should appear on the balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating cost of goods sold under FIFO and specific identification
It is 10 December and Fraser Home Goods has four high-end microwave ovens in stock. All are identical, and each is priced at £200. The four ovens were purchased on different dates and at different cost: Oven #1 was purchased on 15 June at a cost of £80; oven #2 on 3 August for £75; oven #3 on 5 September for £70; and oven #4 on 2 October for £65.
Required
(a) Calculate the cost of goods sold using FIFO, assuming that three of the four ovens were sold before the end of the year.
(b) If Fraser uses the specific identification method instead, how could it maximize earnings from the sale of the three ovens? How could it minimize earnings?
(c) Which of these two methods is better, and why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparing the effects of depreciation choice on financial ratios
Dieter Loch AG is about to purchase two new assets – a machine for €75 000 and a state-of-the art forklift truck for €40 000. The assets would be acquired at the beginning of 2013. The company’s 2012 income statement and other information are shown below:
|
Sales
|
€550,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
310,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
240,000
|
|
SG&A expenses
|
140,000
|
|
Income before tax
|
100,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
30,000
|
|
NOPAT
|
€70,000
|
Additional information:
- Dieter Loch management expects the addition of the two assets to generate a 20% annual growth rate in sales.
- Depreciation on the new machine will be included as part of cost of goods sold. Depreciation on the new forklift will be classified under other operating expenses.
- Excluding the new machine’s depreciation, cost of goods sold is expected to increase at an annual rate of 7%.
- Excluding the new forklift’s depreciation, selling, general, and administrative (SG&A) expenses are expected to grow at an annual rate of 5%.
- Dieter Loch’s invested capital, not counting the new machine and forklift, is expected to increase at a rate of 15% per year. Average invested capital at the end of 2012 was €500 000.
- Both the machine and the forklift have an estimated useful life of five years, and zero residual value.
- The tax rate is 30%.
Required
(a) Can you explain why depreciation charges on the two assets are classified differently – COGS for the machine and SG&A for the forklift?
(b) Prepare forecasted income statements for 2013 and 2014, assuming that Dieter Loch AG elects to use straight-line depreciation for both assets.
(c) Calculate the firm’s gross profit percentage, NOPAT margin, and return on invested capital.
(d) Repeat (b), assuming that the company elects to use the double-declining balance method instead for both assets.
(e) Repeat (c). How does the choice of different depreciation methods affect the behavior of the ratios in 2013 and 2014?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing depreciation on PP&E
The following note is taken from the 2004 Annual Report of ExxonMobil Corporation:
|
Dec. 31, 2004
|
Dec. 31, 2003
|
|
|
Historical cost
|
Accumulated depredation
|
Historical cost
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
millions of dollars)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Upstream
|
$148,024
|
$62,013
|
$138,701
|
$58,727
|
|
Downstream
|
62,014
|
29,810
|
59,939
|
29,566
|
|
Chemical
|
21,777
|
10,049
|
20,623
|
10,115
|
|
Dther
|
10,607
|
6,767
|
10,052
|
6,557
|
|
Total
|
$242,422
|
$108,639
|
$229,315
|
$104,965
|
In the upstream segment, depreciation is on a unit-of-production basis, so depreciable life will vary by field. In the downstream segment, investments in refinery and. . . manufacturing facilities are generally depreciated on a straight-line basis over a 25-year life and service station buildings and fixed improvements over a 20-year life. In the chemical segment, investments in process equipment are depreciated on a straight-line basis over a 20-year life. Accumulated depreciation and depletion totaled $133 783 million at the end of 2004 and $124 350 million at the end of 2003.
Required
Based on the above note, answer the following:
(a) By 2004, what percentage of the upstream segment costs have been depreciated? Assume no salvage value and assume that in 2005, no upstream acquisitions or divestitures take place. If the upstream PP&E are used to produce 10% of their capabilities, what would be the depreciation expense and net book value at the end of 2005?
(b) By 31 December 2003, assuming a 20% salvage (residual) value, on average, what is the age of the chemical PP&E?
(c) Assuming no divestiture or retirement of assets, what was the depreciation expense for all PP&E in 2004?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capitalizing or expensing costs
Air France, a subsidiary of the Air France-KLM Group, is one of the world’s largest airlines. It operates a mixed fleet of Airbus and Boeing wide-bodied jets on long-haul routes and relies mainly on the Airbus A320 family of aircraft for shorter flights. Assume that Air France made the following expenditures related to these aircraft in the current year:
(a) Routine maintenance and repairs on various aircraft costing €1.1 billion.
(b) The jet engines on several of the airline’s A321s received a major overhaul at a cost of €18 million. The intent of the overhaul was to improve fuel efficiency and reduce carbon emissions.
(c) The avionics were replaced on the fleet of Boeing 747s. This is expected to extend the useful life of the planes by 3 years.
(d) Noise abatement kits were installed on some of the older A320s in accordance with EU regulations on maximum allowable noise levels on takeoff. The equipment and installation cost €14 million.
(e) The airline painted several of its aircraft as part of a campaign to promote new routes to Asia. The painting cost €1.2 million.
(f) The existing seats on several A320s were replaced with more comfortable seats costing €3.5 million.
(g) New jet engines were installed on several A318s. The total cost was €42 million.
Required
Which of the above expenditures should be capitalized and which should be expensed? Explain your answers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entries for depreciation and amortization expense
Prepare journal entries for each of the following transactions or events for Liu Cybersystems:
(a) Acquired computers costing $800 000 and software costing $80 000 on 1 January 2011. Liu expects the computers to have a service life of 10 years and $80 000 residual value. The software is expected to have a service life of four years and zero residual value.
(b) Paid $40 000 to install the computers at Liu’s office. Paid $20 000 to test the software.
(c) Liu records depreciation and amortization expense for the computers and the computer software using the straight-line method for 2011 and 2012.
(d) On 1 January 2013, new software on the market makes the software acquired in 2011 obsolete.
(e) On 2 January 2013, Liu revised the depreciable life of the computers to a total of 14 years and the salvage value to $112 000. Give the entry to record depreciation expense for 2013.
(f) On 31 December 2014, Liu sells the computers for $520 000. Give the required journal entries for 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interpreting disclosures for property, plant and equipment
Petrobras, which operates in the energy sector, is Brazil’s largest company. Its shares trade on several of the world’s leading stock exchanges. A portion of Petrobras’ balance sheet, its income statement, and extracts from a note on PP&E are presented in.
Required
Based on the information provided, answer the following questions:
(a) What portion of Petrobras’ “Equipment and other assets” had been “used up” by the end of fiscal 2008?
(b) How many years are left in the lives of Petrobras’ “Equipment and other assets,” on average? State clearly any assumptions that you make in arriving at your estimate.
(c) Suppose that Petrobras assumes a zero salvage value for their “Equipment and other assets.” For each $100 in new asset investments, what is the annual amount of depreciation expense charged to the income statement?
(d) Suppose that other leading energy companies charge $12 in depreciation expense for each $100 invested in new equipment. Are Petrobras’ depreciation policy assumptions materially different from those of their competitors? Support your answer.
(e) What line item on Petrobras’ income statement is most affected by their depreciation policy? Explain why.
(f) Aside from comparing Petrobras’ depreciation policy assumptions to those of their competitors, what other “red flags” might one look for in order to assess whether Petrobras is overly conservative or overly aggressive in taking depreciation expenses? Is there any evidence of these issues on Petrobras’ financial statements?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Purchase of debenture in open market Kamal Ltd. issued on 1 April 2007, 40,000 12% debenture of Rs.100 each redeemable at the option of the company after the second year as Rs.104 upon giving two months notice to the debenture holders. The company purchased the following debenture in the open market:
- On 12 June 2009, Rs.8,000 nominal value as cum-interest cost Rs.8,050
- On 24 August, 2009 Rs.14,000 nominal value as ex-interest cost Rs.13,830
These debentures were retained as investments till 30 September 2010, on which date they were cancelled. Show the necessary ledger accounts as they would appear in the books of the company for 2009–10 and for 2010–11 assuming that the company closes its book of accounts every on 31 March. Interest is payable half-yearly on 30 September and 31 March. Ignore income tax.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
X Ltd. had issued 4,000 6% debenture of Rs.100 each on 18 January 2006. Interest was payable half-yearly on 30 June and 31 December each year. They were repayable at par after 10 years with the option to redeem them at any time after 31 December 2010 as Rs.103. On 1 January 2011, the balance in the debenture redemption fund A/c stood at Rs.2,14,000 which was invested outside. On 30th June 2011, a notice was given for redemption of the above debenture with the option to receive one new 9% debenture of Rs.100 each as Rs.98 and Rs.5 in cash for each 6% debenture in place of Rs.103 in cash.
The holders of 3,600 debentures exercised this option and the remaining were paid cash. The company sold investments costing Rs.1,44,000 for Rs.1,74,800. The company completed the redemption. Give necessary ledger accounts offered by the above transactions. Ignore the tax.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Redemption by conversion The summarized balance sheet of XY as on 31 March 2011 stood as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
Rs.in Lakhs
|
Assets
|
Rs. in Lakhs
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
|
|
|
20,00,000 Equity Shares of 10 Each, Fully Paid
|
200
|
Fixed Assets (as Cost Less Depreciation)
|
640
|
|
General Reserve
|
300
|
Debenture Redemption Fund
|
160
|
|
Debentures Redemption Fund
|
200
|
Investment
|
|
|
12.5% Convertible Debentures
|
400
|
Cash and Bank Balance
|
200
|
|
4,00000 Debentures of 100 Each
|
|
Other Current Assets
|
800
|
|
Other Loans
|
200
|
|
|
|
Current Liabilities and Provisions
|
500
|
|
|
|
|
1,800
|
|
1,800
|
The debentures are due for redemption on 1 April 2011. The terms of issue of debentures provided they were redeemable at a premium of 5% and also conferred option to the debenture holders to convent 20% of their holding into equity shares as a pre-determined price of Rs.15.75 per share and the payment in cash. Assuming that:
- Except for 1,000 debenture holders holding 1,00,000 debentures in all, the rest of them exercised the option for maximum conversion
- The investments realize Rs.176 lakh on sale
- All the transactions are put though, without any lag, on 1 April 2011.
Redraft the balance sheet of the company as on 1 April 2011, after giving effect to the redemption. Show your calculation in respect of the number of equity shares to be allotted and the cash payment necessary.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Redemption by conversion—Redemption of preferecne shares combined The summarized balance sheet of Sri Vasudev Ltd. on 30 September 2010 was as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Fixed Assets
|
30,00,000
|
|
Issued and Fully Paid:
|
|
Investments
|
|
|
10,000 Equity Share of 100 Each Fully
|
10,00,000
|
Own Debentures of Nominal Value of
|
1,90,000
|
|
Paid
|
|
2,00,000
|
|
|
6% Redeemable Preference Share of
|
9,90,000
|
Other Securities
|
2,00,000
|
|
100 Each (Less Calls in Arrears on 400
|
|
Current Assets:
|
|
|
Shares )
|
|
|
|
|
Reserves & Surplus:
|
|
|
|
|
Securities Premium
|
2,00,000
|
Stock
|
4,00,000
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
2,00,000
|
Debtors
|
2,00,000
|
|
General Reserve
|
4,00,000
|
Cash at Bank
|
12,00,000
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
6,00,000
|
|
|
|
10% Debentures
|
4,00,000
|
|
|
|
Creditors
|
14,00,000
|
|
|
|
|
51,90,000
|
|
51,90,000
|
On 30 September 2010, the following were due for redemption:
- 10,000 6% Redeemable preference shares at a premium of Rs.25 per share.
- 4,000 10% Redeemable debentures shares at a premium of 10% the redemption was made on that date or subsequently this:
- For half the year ending 30 September 2010, the debentures interest and preference dividend was paid out of profits of the company
- On an offer made to the 10% debenture, the outsiders agreed to take new 12% debentures at par in exchange of old debentures ; the company also decided to assume the new debentures
- A fresh issue of 2,000 equity shares of Rs.100 each was made at a premium of Rs.50 per shares and subscribed in full. All moneys due were received forthwith
- Redemption of all preference shares was made on 10 October 2010You are required to show all journal entries for the above transactions to give the company’s opening balance sheet after giving effect to them.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Redemption of debentures Shree Ltd. had 9,00,000 14% debentures outstanding on 1 April 2010 redeemable on 31 March 2011. On 1 April 2010, the debentures redemption fund stood at Rs.7,49,000 represented by own debentures of the face value of Rs.1,00,000 purchased at an average price of Rs.99 per debenture and 10% stock acquired at par for Rs.6,50,000. The annual instalment of transfer to the fund was Rs.71,000. In March 2011, investments were sold for Rs.6,46,800 and the debentures were redeemed. Show 14% debentures A/c; debentures redemption fund A/c and debentures redemption fund investments A/c.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Purchase and cancellation of debentures On 31 March 2010, Gemini Ltd.”s balance sheet showed 5,00,000 12% fully paid debentures of Rs.100 each. Interest on debentures is payable on 30 September and 31 March every year. On 1 August 2010, the company purchased 1,00,000 of its own debentures as investment ex-interest Rs.98. However, on 31 March 2011, the company cancelled all these debentures. The company had a balance of Rs.30 lakh in its debentures redemption reserve A/c on that date. Pass journal entries for all the transactions during the year ended 31 March 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are a bank FX dealer. You look at your Reuters screen and see the following rates quoted:
|
|
EUR/USD
|
spot:
|
1.2012
|
/
|
22
|
|
|
USD/JPY
|
spot:
|
127.30
|
/
|
35
|
|
|
USD/JPY
|
6-month swap:
|
266
|
/
|
260
|
|
|
USD
|
6-month interest rates:
|
5.25
|
/
|
5.375%
|
|
|
JPY
|
6-month interest rates:
|
1.00
|
/
|
1.25%
|
The 6-month value date is 182 days after spot value date.
- Your customer needs to convert his JPY receivables into USD in six months’ time. What two-way forward outright price would you quote for this? Is the JPY at a discount or a premium to the USD? On which side of the price would you deal?
- He is not necessarily in a hurry to do this transaction, because he thinks that the spot exchange rate will get better for him. He expects the EUR/USD to move to 1.1900 over the next two days, but believes that the JPY is likely to move from its present level of 153 against the EUR to 151.
He also believes that USD interest rates will fall tomorrow by 0.5% but that JPY rates will probably rise 1.0% at the same time.
Should he sell the JPY forward now, or wait two days?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Market rates now are as follows for USD and NOK:
|
|
|
USD/NOK
|
USD%
|
NOK%
|
|
|
Spot:
|
6.0000
|
/
|
10
|
|
|
|
|
3 months (91 days):
|
590
|
/
|
605
|
5.87/6.00
|
9.87/10.00
|
|
|
6 months (182 days):
|
1274
|
/
|
1304
|
5.75/5.87
|
10.12/10.25
|
|
|
9 months (273 days):
|
1832
|
/
|
1872
|
5.75/5.87
|
10.00/10.12
|
|
|
FRA 3 v 9:
|
|
|
|
5.70/5.75
|
|
Market rates three months later are as follows:
|
|
|
USD/NOK
|
USD%
|
NOK%
|
|
|
Spot:
|
6.2060
|
/
|
65
|
|
|
|
|
3 months (91 days):
|
649
|
/
|
664
|
6.00/6.12
|
10.25/10.37
|
|
|
6 months (182 days):
|
1394
|
/
|
1424
|
5.87/6.00
|
10.50/10.62
|
|
|
9 months (274 days):
|
2014
|
/
|
2054
|
5.87/6.00
|
10.37/10.50
|
What would be the effective synthetic forward-forward 3 v 9 cost for NOK for a borrower, created from an FRA 3 v 9 for USD, and all necessary forward foreign exchange deals, taking into account all the relevant bid/offer spreads? Show all the deals necessary based on an amount of NOK 1 million and assume that you are a price-taker.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are EUR-based and have the following transactions on your books:
- A 6-month (182 days) forward purchase of USD 10 million.
- A 12-month (365 days) forward sale of USD 10 million.
- A borrowing from a counterparty of USD 10 million at 7% for 12 months (365 days; all the interest paid at maturity).
- A deposit placed with a counterparty of USD 10 million at 6.5% for 3 months (91 days).
Rates are currently as follows:
|
|
|
EUR/USD
|
EUR%
|
USD%
|
|
|
Spot:
|
1.2000
|
|
|
|
|
3 months:
|
1.2027
|
6.5
|
7.4
|
|
|
6 months:
|
1.2059
|
6.5
|
7.5
|
|
|
12 months:
|
1.2114
|
7.0
|
8.0
|
- Suppose that the spot exchange rate moves to 1.3000 but interest rates are unchanged. What is the effect on the profit and loss account, not considering discounting?
b. What is the effect considering discounting, and what spot EUR/USD deal would provide a hedge against this risk?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have a USD 10 million borrowing on which you are paying 8.9% fixed (annual money market basis) and which has exactly 5 years left to run. All the principal will be repaid at maturity. The current 5-year dollar interest rate swap spread is quoted to you as 80/90 over treasuries. The current 5-year treasury yield is 9.0%. (US treasuries are quoted on a semi-annual bond basis.) You believe that interest rates are going to fall and wish to swap the borrowing from fixed to floating. Without discounting all the cashflows precisely, what will the resulting net LIBOR-related cost of the swapped borrowing be approximately?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The 3-month USD cash rate and the futures prices for USD are as follows. The first futures contract period begins exactly 3 months after spot.
|
3-month cash:
|
(91 days)
|
6.25%
|
|
futures 3 v 6:
|
(91 days)
|
93.41
|
|
6 v 9:
|
(91 days)
|
92.84
|
|
9 v 12:
|
(92 days)
|
92.63
|
|
12 v 15:
|
(91 days)
|
92.38
|
|
15 v 18:
|
(91 days)
|
92.10
|
- What are the zero-coupon swap rates (annual equivalent, bond basis) for each quarterly maturity from 3 months up to 18 months, based on these prices?
b. What should the 18-month par swap rate be on a quarterly money market basis?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have previously entered a currency swap to receive fixed-rate US dollars at 8% (annually, 30/360 basis) based on USD 10 million (with USD 10 million received at maturity) and pay floating-rate Swedish kronor at LIBOR (semi-annually, ACT/360 basis) based on SEK 75 million (with SEK 75 million paid at maturity). The swap terminates on 24 May 2011. It is now February 2010 and the spot USD/SEK exchange rate is 7.6500. The last krona LIBOR fixing was 5.3% for 24 November 2009. The discount factors to the remaining payment dates are as follows. What is the mark-to-market value of the swap now in dollars?
|
|
USD
|
SEK
|
|
24 May 2010:
|
0.9850
|
0.9880
|
|
24 November 2010:
|
0.9580
|
0.9650
|
|
24 May 2011:
|
0.9300
|
0.9400
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You issue a 3-year fixed-rate US dollar bond at 7% (annual) with a bullet maturity. After all costs, you receive 99.00 from the issue. You swap the bond to floating-rate dollars. You arrange the swap so that your net cashflows from the swapped bond issue give you a par amount at the beginning, a regular LIBOR-related cost based on this par amount for 3 years, and the same par amount to be repaid at maturity. The current par swap rate for 3 years is 7.5% (annual, 30/360 basis) against LIBOR (semi-annual, ACT/360). Assuming that this same rate of 7.5% (annual) can be used as a rate of discount throughout, what all-in floating-rate cost can you achieve above or below LIBOR?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the estimated annualised volatility of the GBP/USD exchange rate, based on the following daily data, assuming the usual lognormal probability distribution for relative price changes and 252 days in a year?
|
Day 1
|
1.6320
|
|
Day 2
|
1.6410
|
|
Day 3
|
1.6350
|
|
Day 4
|
1.6390
|
|
Day 5
|
1.6280
|
|
Day 6
|
1.6300
|
|
Day 7
|
1.6250
|
|
Day 8
|
1.6200
|
|
Day 9
|
1.6280
|
|
Day 10
|
1.6200
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Build a spreadsheet model for the interest and principal cash flows of a mortgage and then reimplement in VBA. Extend these models to include prepayments, based on a prepayment rate, say as percentage of remaining balance. A prepayment rate curve (because rates can change every period) is given as an input to the model. Convert this into a Mortgage class, similar to that described in this chapter. Note that class methods cannot be directly invoked from spreadsheet cells. Instead, a macro must be written in a “code” module that instantiates the class object and invokes the method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Modify the Tranche class in Exercise 4.1 to accommodate NAS bonds. Non-Accelerating Senior (NAS) bonds have a fixed principal payment schedule. Usually, this schedule has no principal payments for the first few years. The bonds pay interest on their balance as do standard bonds. NAS bonds are a type of senior bond and thus their principal payment has higher priority than subordinate bonds. Among the senior bonds, principal is distributed to the NAS bonds first according to their schedules. This mechanism lowers the investor”s risk of having excessive prepayments shorten the life of the bond and decreasing its value.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Modify the Tranche class in Exercise 4.1 to accommodate IO and PO bonds. An interest-only (IO) bond pays interest but not principal. Generally, an IO is linked to one or more other bonds from which it derives its “balance.” The IO pays interest on this effective balance. A principal-only (PO) bond pays no interest, but does pay principal on its balance. A popular combination of these is an “IO/PO split”—an IO linked to a PO. IOs and POs speculate on prepayments. If prepayments are low, then outstanding balances remain high, and interest flows into an IO increasing its value. Thus IO value increases when interest rates increase. If prepayments are high, then principal flows early into a PO increasing its value.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A cash cap table shows the effective interest rates for each tranche, for each period, under a given set of assumptions. Thus the table has two dimensions: time (usually in years) vs. tranche. Each entry in the table is an annualized effective interest rate: interest paid plus the BRCFA paid divided by the previous period balance for that tranche. This rate must be adjusted by the appropriate day count. Make the same assumptions as for decrement tables except that market rates are 20% flat. This places severe stress on the structure because the WAC caps all trigger and limit interest payouts to bonds. The BRCFA accounts fill up and there isn”t enough cash to pay them down. As a result many nuances of the liability waterfall get exercised. Unless the rules are modeled correctly, this table cannot be generated precisely. Extend your model to generate this table.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An example of a price/yield table is shown in Table 5.12. For a given tranche, a price, and a set of loss and prepay speed assumptions, the table shows the yields and other various statistics. The table can be extended/shrunk by specifying different losses and speeds. The PSA collateral cash flow model is used. An additional way to generate the table is to specify the yield and generate the prices. Extend your model to generate this type of table.
TABLE 5.12 Typical Price/Yield Table (Loss vs. Prepayment Rate)
|
|
|
100% CPR
|
120% CPR
|
|
0% Loss
|
Avga Life
|
4.31
|
3.35
|
|
|
First Pay
|
25-Mar-08
|
25-May-07
|
|
|
Last Pay
|
25-Mar-09
|
25-Feb-08
|
|
|
Window
|
46-58
|
36-45
|
|
|
Yield
|
1.637%
|
1.637%
|
|
|
Price
|
100
|
100
|
|
5% Loss
|
Avg Life
|
4.05
|
3.2
|
|
|
First Pay
|
25-Jan-08
|
25-Apr-07
|
|
|
Last Pay
|
25-Nov-08
|
25-Dec-07
|
|
|
Window
|
44-54
|
35-43
|
|
|
Yield
|
1.637%
|
1.637%
|
|
|
Price
|
100.00
|
100.00
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A price/yield table can be reconfigured by specifying different inputs and outputs. For example, Table 5.13 has two inputs: tranches vs. losses, and three outputs: WAL, yield, and price. Generalize your previous implementation to allow rearranging these parameters. Out of the three inputs (tranches, losses, CPR), one must be held constant and the others varied.
TABLE 5.13 Price/Yield Table (Tranche vs. Loss Rate)
|
|
|
0% Loss
|
5% Loss
|
10% Loss
|
|
Al
|
Avg Life
|
1.67
|
1.64
|
1.61
|
|
|
Yield
|
1.336%
|
1.336%
|
1.336%
|
|
|
Price
|
100.00
|
100.00
|
100.00
|
|
Ml
|
Avg Life
|
4.31
|
4.05
|
3.95
|
|
|
Yield
|
1.637%
|
1.637%
|
1.637%
|
|
|
Price
|
100.00
|
100.00
|
100.00
|
|
BI
|
Avg Life
|
7.06
|
6.50
|
7.23
|
|
|
Yield
|
3.336%
|
3.324%
|
3.452%
|
|
|
Price
|
100.00
|
100.00
|
100.00
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compare two stochastic models for synthetic credit indexes. In the first model, a random variable represents a default of an asset (section 7.2.2). Assume annual periods, constant recovery rate, and constant equal correlation among assets. In the second model, a random variable represents the time to default of an asset (section 7.2.3). In both models use the initial asset rating to derive an effective annual default rate. Implement both models with Monte Carlo simulation. Assume a portfolio of 100 credits: 5 AAA, 10 AA, 30 A, 45 BBB, 5 BB, and 5 B. Assume the liability structure has attachment points at 0%, 3%, 7%, 10%, 20%, and 30%. Estimate the probability distributions of losses after one and five years. Compare the means and standard deviations of these two distributions. Compare the percentage of mass in the tail beyond 3% loss. Explain why the distributions differ.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given a set of n random variables, a covariance matrix M is an n × n matrix where M(i, j) = cov(Zi, Zj). Recall that cov(Zi, Zj) = titj?ij, where ti is the standard deviation of asset i and ?ij is the correlation coefficient of assets i and j. Consider the set of n assets, with defaults modeled by n random variables with binomial distributions. Recall that for a binomial process with probability P, the variance is P × (1 – P). For example, flipping a fair coin a number of times constitutes a binomial process with P = 50%. Suppose every asset shares the same correlation coefficient ?. Build the covariance matrix. The sum of all elements of this matrix is the variance of the total number of defaults. Derive an expression for, and plot, the standard deviation of the total number of defaults as a function of different correlation coefficients (from 0% to 100%) for different numbers of assets (1, 10, 100, 1000). What conclusions can you draw?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Boomwichers NV, a Dutch company financed by shareholders” equity only, decides, during the course of year n, to finance an investment project worth €200m using shareholders” equity (50%) and debt (50%). The loan it takes out (€100m) will be paid off in full in n+5, and the company will pay 5% interest per year over the period. At the end of the period, you are asked to complete the following simplified table (no further investments are to be made):
|
Period
|
n
|
n+1
|
n+2
|
n+3
|
n+4
|
n+5
|
|
Operating inflows
|
165
|
200
|
240
|
280
|
320
|
36o
|
|
Operating outflows
|
165
|
175
|
i8o
|
185
|
180
|
190
|
|
Operating cash flows
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Investments
|
-200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Free cash flows
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Flows …
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
… to creditors
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
. . to shareholders
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
What do you conclude from the above?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ellingham plc opens a Spanish subsidiary, which starts operating on 2 January 2011. On 2 January 2011 it has to buy a machine costing €30m, partly financed by a €20m bank loan repayable in instalments of €2m every 15 July and 15 January over 5 years. Financial expenses, payable on a half-yearly basis, are as follows:
|
2011
|
2012
|
2013
|
2014
|
2015
|
|
June
|
Dec
|
June
|
Dec
|
June
|
Dec
|
June
|
Dec
|
June
|
Dec
|
|
1
|
0.9
|
0.8
|
0.7
|
o.6
|
0.5
|
0.4
|
0.3
|
0.2
|
0.1
|
Profits are tax free. Sales will be €12m per month. A month”s inventory of finished products will have to be built up. Customers pay at 90 days.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
MARU S.A. de C.V., a Mexican corporation that follows IFRS, has elected to use the revaluation model for its property, plant, and equipment. One of MARU’s machines was purchased for 2,500,000 Mexican pesos (MXN) at the beginning of the fiscal year ended 31 March 2010. As of 31 March 2010, the machine has a fair value of MXN 3,000,000. Should MARU show a profit for the revaluation of the machine?
A. Yes.
B. No, because this revaluation is recorded directly in equity.
C. No, because value increases resulting from revaluation can never be recognized as a profit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A financial analyst at BETTO S.A. is analyzing the result of the sale of a vehicle for 85,000 Argentine pesos (ARP) on 31 December 2009. The analyst compiles the following information about the vehicle:
|
Acquisition cost of the vehicle
|
ARP 100,000
|
|
Acquisition date
|
1 January 2007
|
|
Estimated residual value at acquisition date
|
ARP 10,000
|
|
Expected useful life
|
9 years
|
|
Depreciation method
|
Straight-line
|
The result of the sale of the vehicle is most likely:
A. a loss of ARP 15,000.
B. a gain of ARP 15,000.
C. a gain of ARP 18,333.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Sinking fund method ABC Ltd. issued 4,000, 12% debentures of Rs.100 each at par on 1 April 2008. These debentures are redeemable at the end of 5th year at 10% premium. It was resolved that sinking fund should be formed and invested in 10% development bonds of Rs.100 each. Interest on bonds is payable on 31 March every year. Reference to Sinking Fund Table 3 shows that Rs.0.1638 invested at the end of every year at 10% compound interest will produce Rs.1 at the end of 5th year.
10% Development bonds of the required amount were purchased on different dates at the following prices:
|
On March 2009
|
Rs.80
|
|
On March 2011
|
Rs.90
|
|
On March 2010
|
Rs.100
|
You are required to show debenture redemption fund A/c and debenture redemption fund investment A/c for the first 3 years in the books of ABC Ltd. Accounting year of this company ends on 31 March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In obtaining an understanding of an entity’s internal control, an auditor is required to obtain knowledge about the
align=”left”>
|
|
Operating effectiveness of controls
|
Design of controls
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the NPV of the following cashflows using an effective annual interest rate of 10% per annum?
|
Now:
|
–$105
|
|
6 months:
|
–$47
|
|
12 months:
|
–$47
|
|
18 months:
|
–$47
|
|
24 months:
|
–$93
|
|
36 months:
|
+$450
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Place the following instruments in descending order of yield, working from the rates quoted:
|
30-day UK T-bill
|
|
|
30-day UK CP (£)
|
|
|
30-day ECP (£)
|
|
|
30-day US T-bill
|
|
|
30-day interbank deposit (£)
|
|
|
30-day US CP
|
|
|
30-day US$ CD
|
|
|
30-day French T-bill
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You borrow €5 million at 7.00% for 6 months (183 days) and deposit €5 million for 3 months (91 days) at 6.75%. You wish to hedge the mismatched position, based on the following FRA prices quoted to you:
3 v 6: 7.10%/7.15%
6 v 9: 7.20%/7.25%
- Do you buy or sell the FRA?
- At what price?
- For a complete hedge, what amount do you deal?
When it comes to fixing the FRA, the 3-month rate is 6.85%/6.90%:
- What is the settlement amount? Who pays whom?
What is the overall profit or loss of the book at the end of six months, assuming that your borrowings are always at LIBOR and your deposits at LIBID?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You buy the following bond for settlement on a coupon-payment date. What is the cost of the bond? Make the calculation without using the built-in bond function or time value of money function on a calculator.
|
Amount:
|
€100,000,000.00
|
|
Remaining maturity:
|
3 years
|
|
Coupon:
|
8.0%
|
|
Yield:
|
7.0%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the price of the following bond?
|
Coupon:
|
4.5% in the first year of issue, increasing by 0.25% each year to 5.75% in the final year. All coupons paid annually
|
|
Issue date:
|
2 March 2009
|
|
Maturity date:
|
2 March 2015
|
|
Settlement date:
|
10 November 2009
|
|
Yield:
|
5.24%
|
|
Price/yield calculation basis:
|
30/360 (annual)
|
|
Accrued interest calculation basis:
|
30/360
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the yield of the following bond?
|
Coupon:
|
3.3% (annual)
|
|
Maturity date:
|
19 September 2019
|
|
Settlement date:
|
7 December 2009
|
|
Redemption amount:
|
110 per 100 face value
|
|
Price:
|
98.00 per 100 face value
|
|
Price/yield calculation basis:
|
30/360 (annual)
|
|
Accrued interest calculation basis:
|
30/360
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What is the accrued coupon on 27 July 2009 on the following bonds?
- 7.5% gilt
|
Maturity 6 December 2017
|
- 5.625% US treasury bond
|
Maturity 14 August 2017
|
- 6.25% bond (30/360 annual coupons)
|
Maturity 25 October 2017
|
- 7.25% OAT
|
Maturity 24 October 2017
|
- 3.00% JGB
|
Maturity 19 September 2017
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Would the following bond futures contract trade at a discount or a premium to 100?
|
Date:
|
27 March 2009
|
|
Futures maturity:
|
December 2009
|
|
CTD bond:
|
clean price 100 coupon 7% annual
|
|
CTD conversion factor:
|
1.0000
|
|
9-month money market interest rate:
|
5% p.a.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given the following information, there is a cash-and-carry arbitrage opportunity. What trades are necessary to exploit it and how much profit can be made?
|
CTD Bund 8 7/8% 20/12/2011 price:
|
102.71
|
|
Accrued coupon:
|
3.599 per 100
|
|
Bund futures price:
|
85.31
|
|
Conversion factor for CTD:
|
1.2030
|
|
Repo rate:
|
6.80%
|
|
Days to futures delivery date:
|
24
|
|
Futures contract amount:
|
€100,000
|
|
Accrued coupon on CTD at futures delivery date:
|
4.182 per 100
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You own the following portfolio on 7 August 2009:
|
|
Face value
|
Price
|
Coupon
|
Maturity
|
Duration
|
|
Bond A
|
10 million
|
88.50
|
5.0% (annual)
|
1/7/2014
|
4.41 years
|
|
Bond B
|
5 million
|
111.00
|
12.0% (annual)
|
13/3/2012
|
2.31 years
|
|
Bond C
|
15 million
|
94.70
|
6.0% (annual)
|
7/10/2013
|
3.61 years
|
What is the approximate modified duration of the portfolio? How do you expect the value of the portfolio to change if yields all rise by 10 basis points? Assume that all the bond calculations are on an ACT/ACT basis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A treasurer wants to borrow USD for 2 months, using his holding of CHF 20 million bonds in a cross-currency repo as follows:
|
Term:
|
5 July (spot) to 5 September
|
|
2-month USD repo rate:
|
4.80%
|
|
Haircut:
|
5%
|
|
Clean price of bond:
|
98.00
|
|
Coupon rate on bond:
|
5%
|
|
Previous coupon date:
|
21 March
|
|
Accrual basis:
|
30/360
|
|
Spot USD/CHF:
|
1.4735
|
- How many USD does the treasurer receive on 5 July?
b. How many USD does he repay on 5 September?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A dealer does the following buy/sell-back. What is the forward price (to six decimal places)?
|
Start date:
|
18 April 2009
|
|
Maturity date:
|
18 July 2009
|
|
Repo rate:
|
5.52%
|
|
Security:
|
€200 million 8% BTAN
|
|
Previous coupon date:
|
6 June 2008
|
|
Clean price of bond at start:
|
103.42
|
|
Haircut:
|
2.5%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You borrow a Bono (nominal €50 million) in a securities borrowing deal from 16 June 2009 to 23 June 2009. You provide an OLO as collateral. There is a 1% haircut. The lending fee is 35 basis points.
|
Bono lent:
|
5.45% of 21/3/2013
|
|
Price:
|
98.73
|
|
OLO collateral:
|
5.85% of 9/10/2029
|
|
Price:
|
100.34
|
- What is the minimum face value of collateral required?
b. What is the amount of the lending fee?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the 2-year, 3-year and 4-year zero-coupon yields and discount factors consistent with the following bonds. The 1-year yield is 10.00%.
|
Maturity
|
Coupon
|
|
Price
|
|
2 years
|
9.0%
|
(annual)
|
97.70
|
|
3 years
|
7.0%
|
(annual)
|
90.90
|
|
4 years
|
11.0%
|
(annual)
|
99.40
|
What are the 1-year v 2-year, 2-year v 3-year and 3-year v 4-year forward-forward yields?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What would you expect the GBP/CHF swap price to be for one year forward? (Ignore the buy–sell spread and calculate the middle price only.)
|
|
Spot
|
3-month forward swap
|
|
USD/CHF
|
1.5140/45
|
29/32
|
|
|
USD/NOK
|
7.1020/40
|
246/259
|
|
|
GBP/USD
|
1.6490/00
|
268/265
|
|
Based on the prices above, what are the two-way prices for:
- CHF/NOK spot? Which side does the customer buy NOK?
- GBP/NOK spot? Which side does the customer sell GBP?
- USD/NOK 3 months forward outright?
- GBP/USD 3 months forward outright?
- GBP/NOK 3 months forward outright? Which currency has higher interest rates?
- CHF/NOK 3 months forward outright? Which currency has higher interest rates?
g. CHF/NOK 3 months forward swap?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
|
Spot
|
O/N
|
T/N
|
S/W
|
1 month
|
|
USD/NOK
|
7.1020/40
|
2.0/2.5
|
2.3/2.9
|
18/20
|
|
|
EUR/USD
|
1.2490/00
|
10.6/10.1
|
3.5/3.3
|
23/22
|
96/94
|
Based on the prices above, what are the two-way prices for:
- USD/NOK forward outright value one week after spot?
- USD/NOK forward outright value tomorrow?
- USD/NOK forward outright value today? Which side does the customer buy NOK?
- EUR/USD forward outright value today? Which side does the customer buy EUR?
- EUR/USD forward-forward swap from one week after spot to one month after spot? Which side does the customer buy and sell EUR (in that order)?
- EUR/USD forward-forward swap from tomorrow to one month after spot? Which side does the customer buy and sell EUR (in that order)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are a bank FX dealer. Looking at the Reuters screen, you see the following rates:
|
|
USD/JPY spot:
|
126.95
|
/
|
15
|
|
|
T/N:
|
2.5
|
/
|
1.5
|
|
|
3 months:
|
310
|
/
|
290
|
|
|
6 months:
|
550
|
/
|
510
|
|
|
USD/NOK spot:
|
6.7620
|
/
|
40
|
|
|
T/N:
|
0.2
|
/
|
0.5
|
|
|
3 months:
|
15
|
/
|
15 A/P
|
|
|
6 months:
|
50
|
/
|
100
|
- Some time ago, your customer sold NOK receivables forward into JPY, and that deal matures on the date which is now the 3-month forward date. However he now discovers that these receivables will be delayed by three months because of late delivery of the goods. He therefore needs to adjust the forward deal. What forward-forward swap price do you quote him? He asks for a two-way price and prefers to have it quoted in terms of number of JPY per 1 NOK. Which side of the price do you deal on?
Your customer has another deal to sell NOK and buy JPY, also previously undertaken, also maturing on the 3-month forward date. He discovers first thing in the morning that he needs the JPY by tomorrow and that he will have enough NOK in his account tomorrow to cover this. He therefore uses another forward-forward deal to adjust this second deal in order to take delivery of it tomorrow. Again, what two-way price do you quote, and on which side do you deal?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Today is Friday 19 April. You are a bank FX dealer. You look at your Reuters screen and see the following rates quoted:
|
|
USD/NOK
|
Spot:
|
7.2580
|
/
|
00
|
|
|
|
S/W:
|
25
|
/
|
23
|
|
|
|
1 month:
|
100
|
/
|
90
|
|
|
|
2 months:
|
195
|
/
|
175
|
|
|
GBP/USD
|
Spot:
|
1.6157
|
/
|
67
|
|
|
|
O/N:
|
– 0.4
|
/
|
+0.1
|
|
|
|
T/N:
|
1.5
|
/
|
1
|
|
|
|
S/W:
|
11
|
/
|
9
|
|
|
|
1 month:
|
50
|
/
|
45
|
|
|
|
2 months:
|
105
|
/
|
95
|
- Some time ago, your customer sold GBP forward against NOK for delivery on 3 June. He now discovers that he will need the NOK on 30 April instead. He therefore asks you for a swap price to adjust the deal’s maturity date. What price do you quote (in terms of NOK per 1 GBP)?
- Some time ago, you bought GBP from your customer against USD, and the deal matures today. He discovers (early enough) that he does not have the GBP in his account, and will not have them until 30 April. He asks you for a two-way price to swap the deal from today until 30 April. What price do you quote? On which side of the price do you deal?
He has discovered that he is not in fact going to receive the GBP in (b) at all, and decides to reverse the contract he made some time ago. He therefore asks you for a two-way outright value today price. What price do you quote? On which side of the price do you deal?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An auditor is required to establish an understanding with a client regarding the services to be performed for each engagement. This understanding generally includes
a. Management’s responsibility for errors and the illegal activities of employees that may cause material misstatement.
b. The auditor’s responsibility for ensuring that the audit committee is aware of any significant deficiencies in internal control that come to the auditor’s attention.
c. Management’s responsibility for providing the auditor with an assessment of the risk of material misstatement due to fraud.
d. The auditor’s responsibility for determining preliminary judgments about materiality and audit risk factors.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following statements would least likely appear in an auditor’s engagement letter?
a. Fees for our services are based on our regular per diem rates, plus travel and other out-of-pocket expenses.
b. During the course of our audit we may observe opportunities for economy in, or improved controls over, your operations.
c. Our engagement is subject to the risk that material misstatements or fraud, if they exist, will not be detected.
d. After performing our preliminary analytical procedures we will discuss with you the other procedures we consider necessary to complete the engagement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An engagement letter should ordinarily include information on the objectives of the engagement and
|
|
CPA responsibilities
|
Client responsibilities
|
Limitation of engagement
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ordinarily, the predecessor auditor permits the successor auditor to review the predecessor’s working paper analyses relating to
|
|
Contingencies
|
Balance sheet accounts
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A successor auditor should request the new client to authorize the predecessor auditor to allow a review of the predecessor’s
|
|
Engagement letter
|
Working papers
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following are considered further audit procedures that may be designed after assessing the risks of material misstatement?
|
|
Substantive tests of details
|
Risk assessment procedures
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following statements is correct concerning an auditor’s responsibilities regarding financial statements?
a. Making suggestions that are adopted about the form and content of an entity’s financial statements impairs an auditor’s independence.
b. An auditor may draft an entity’s financial statements based on information from management’s accounting system.
c. The fair presentation of audited financial statements in conformity with GAAP is an implicit part of the auditor’s responsibilities.
d. An auditor’s responsibilities for audited financial statements are not confined to the expression of the auditor’s opinion.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The auditor with final responsibility for an engagement and one of the assistants have a difference of opinion about the results of an auditing procedure. If the assistant believes it is necessary to be disassociated from the matter’s resolution, the CPA firm’s procedures should enable the assistant to
a. Refer the disagreement to the AICPA’s Quality Review Committee.
b. Document the details of the disagreement with the conclusion reached.
c. Discuss the disagreement with the entity’s management or its audit committee.
d. Report the disagreement to an impartial peer review monitoring team.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kell engaged March, CPA, to submit to Kell a written personal financial plan containing unaudited personal financial statements. March anticipates omitting certain disclosures required by GAAP because the engagement’s sole purpose is to assist Kell in developing a personal financial plan. For March to be exempt from complying with the requirements of SSARS 1, Compilation and Review of Financial Statements, Kell is required to agree that the
a. Financial statements will not be presented in comparative form with those of the prior period.
b. Omitted disclosures required by GAAP are not material.
c. Financial statements will not be disclosed to a non-CPA financial planner.
d. Financial statements will not be used to obtain credit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An accountant has been engaged to review a nonpublic entity’s financial statements that contain several departures from GAAP. If the financial statements are not revised and modification of the standard review report is not adequate to indicate the deficiencies, the accountant should
a. Withdraw from the engagement and provide no further services concerning these financial statements.
b. Inform management that the engagement can proceed only if distribution of the accountant’s report is restricted to internal use.
c. Determine the effects of the departures from GAAP and issue a special report on the financial statements.
d. Issue a modified review report provided the entity agrees that the financial statements will not be used to obtain credit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The nature and extent of a CPA firm’s quality control policies and procedures depend on
|
|
The CPA firm’s size
|
The nature of the CPA firm’s practice
|
Cost-benefit considerations
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Would the following factors ordinarily be considered in planning an audit engagement’s personnel requirements?
|
|
Opportunities for on-the-job training
|
Continuity and periodic rotation of personnel
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When considering internal control, an auditor should be aware of the concept of reasonable assurance, which recognizes that
- Internal control may be ineffective due to mistakes in judgment and personal carelessness.
- Adequate safeguards over access to assets and records should permit an entity to maintain proper accountability.
- Establishing and maintaining internal control is an important responsibility of management.
- The cost of an entity’s internal control should not exceed the benefits expected to be derived.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following factors are included in an entity’s control environment?
align=”left”>
|
|
Audit committee
|
Integrity and ethical values
|
Organizational
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is a provision of the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act?
- It is a criminal offense for an auditor to fail to detect and report a bribe paid by an American business entity to a foreign official for the purpose of obtaining business.
- The auditor’s detection of illegal acts committed by officials of the auditor’s publicly held client in conjunction with foreign officials should be reported to the Enforcement Division of the Securities and Exchange Commission.
- If the auditor of a publicly held company concludes that the effects on the financial statements of a bribe given to a foreign official are not susceptible of reasonable estimation, the auditor’s report should be modified.
- Every publicly held company must devise, document, and maintain internal control sufficient to provide reasonable assurances that internal control objectives are met.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An auditor suspects that certain client employees are ordering merchandise for themselves over the Internet without recording the purchase or receipt of the merchandise. When vendors’ invoices arrive, one of the employees approves the invoices for payment. After the invoices are paid, the employee destroys the invoices and the related vouchers. In gathering evidence regarding the fraud, the auditor most likely would select items for testing from the file of all
- Cash disbursements.
- Approved vouchers.
- Receiving reports.
- Vendors’ invoices.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which statement is correct concerning the relevance of various types of controls to a financial audit?
- An auditor may ordinarily ignore a consideration of controls when a substantive audit approach is taken.
- Controls over the reliability of financial reporting are ordinarily most directly relevant to an audit, but other controls may also be relevant.
- Controls over safeguarding of assets and liabilities are of primary importance, while controls over the reliability of financial reporting may also be relevant.
- All controls are ordinarily relevant to an audit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Sinking fund method Rajas Ltd. issued Rs.20,00,000, 10% debentures on 1 January 2008. They were to be redeemed on 31 December 2010. For this purpose, the company established a sinking fund. Investments were expected to earn 5% interest p.a. Sinking Fund Table show that 0.317208 invested annually at 5% amount to Rs.1 in 3 years. On 31 December 2010, the bank balance was Rs.8,40,000 before receipt of interest on sinking fund investments. On that date, the investments were sold for Rs.13,12,000. Interest is payable annually. Calculate the interest to the nearest of a rupee and investments are made in multiples of Rs.100. Ignore tax on debenture interest. Give journal entries. Also prepare the following accounts. (i) 10% debentures A/c; (ii) sinking fund A/c; (iii) sinking fund investments A/c and (iv) bank A/c in the books of the company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Preparation of ledger accounts straightaway The following balances appeared in the books of Star Ltd. as on 1 April 2010:
|
|
|
|
12% Debentures
|
3,00,000
|
|
Debentures Redemption Reserve
|
2,50,000
|
|
Debentures Redemption Fund Investments
|
2,50,000
|
The debentures redemption fund investment was represented by Rs.2,60,000 9% government securities. The annual instalment amount added to the fund was Rs.41,200. On 31 March 2011, the bank balance before the receipt of interest on investments was Rs.80,000. On the date, the investments were sold at 84% and debentures were duly redeemed. You are required to prepare (i) debentures A/c; (ii) debentures redemption reserve A/c; (iii) debenture redemption fund investment A/c and (iv) the bank A/c for 2010–11. The company closes its books on 31 March every year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Redemption out of fresh issue The following is the balance sheet of Vishal Ltd. as on 31 March 2011:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
1,00,000 Equity Shares of ? 10 Each
|
10,00,000
|
Land & Buildings
|
2,50,000
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
1,00,000
|
Plant & Machinery
|
7,50,000
|
|
General Reserve
|
1,50,000
|
Furniture & Fixtures
|
1,00,000
|
|
3,500, 10% Debentures of ? 100 Each
|
3,50,000
|
Stock
|
4,00,000
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
1,50,000
|
Debtors
|
1,00,000
|
|
|
|
Bills Receivable
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
Cash at Bank
|
1,10,000
|
|
|
|
Preliminary Expenses
|
30,000
|
|
|
17,50,000
|
|
17,50,000
|
The debenture trust deed provides that the company may redeem the debentures at a premium of 5% at any time before maturity. The directors decided to exercise this option and issued 25,000 shares of Rs.10 each at Rs.12 per share and 1,000 12% debentures of Rs.100 each for the purpose of redemption. Show the journal entries and post-redemption balance sheet in the prescribed form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Challenge Problem Using the financial statements below,
- Compute common-size financial statements.
- Put together a statement of cash flows of the firm. Where did the firm invest funds during the year? How did it finance these purchases?
Income Statements for Global Manufacturing, Inc.
|
YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Net revenues or sales
|
$700,000
|
$600,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
450,000
|
375,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
250,000
|
225,000
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
General and administrative
|
95,000
|
95,000
|
|
Selling and marketing
|
56,000
|
50,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
25,000
|
20,000
|
|
Operating income
|
74,000
|
60,000
|
|
Interest
|
14,000
|
10,000
|
|
Income before taxes
|
60,000
|
50,000
|
|
Income taxes (40%)
|
24,000
|
20,000
|
|
Net income
|
$36,000
|
$30,000
|
|
Number of shares outstanding
|
50,000
|
50,000
|
|
Earnings per share
|
$0.72
|
$0.60
|
Balance Sheets for Global Manufacturing, Inc.
|
YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31 ASSETS
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Cash and marketable securities
|
$25,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
100,000
|
80,000
|
|
Inventories
|
125,000
|
100,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
250,000
|
200,000
|
|
Gross plant and equipment
|
300,000
|
225,000
|
|
Less: accumulated depreciation
|
–100,000
|
–75,000
|
|
Net plant and equipment
|
200,000
|
150,000
|
|
Land
|
50,000
|
50,000
|
|
Total fixed assets
|
250,000
|
200,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$500,000
|
$400,000
|
|
LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$78,000
|
$65,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
34,000
|
10,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
30,000
|
25,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
142,000
|
100,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
140,000
|
100,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$282,000
|
$200,000
|
|
Common stock ($1 par, 50,000 shares)
|
$50,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Paid-in capital
|
100,000
|
100,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
68,000
|
50,000
|
|
Total stockholders” equity
|
218,000
|
200,000
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$500,000
|
$400,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compare and contrast the two common–size balance sheets below. Which one do you think may belong to an auto manufacturer? To a computer manufacturer? Common–Size Balance Sheets
|
ASSETS
|
FIRM A
|
FIRM B
|
|
Cash
|
26.7%
|
10.6%
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
18.8%
|
0.9%
|
|
Inventory
|
1.7%
|
2.9%
|
|
Other current assets
|
7.9%
|
5.0%
|
|
Total current assets
|
55.1%
|
19.4%
|
|
Net plant and equipment
|
7.9%
|
13.3%
|
|
Other long-term assets
|
37.1%
|
67.3%
|
|
Total assets
|
100.0%
|
100.0%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compare and contrast the two common–size balance sheets below. Which one do you think may belong to a supermarket? To a jeweler?
Common–Size Balance Sheets
|
ASSETS
|
FIRM A
|
FIRM B
|
|
Cash
|
5.3%
|
2.7%
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
4.1%
|
0.0%
|
|
Inventory
|
37.5%
|
61.7%
|
|
Other current assets
|
5.9%
|
4.1%
|
|
Total current assets
|
52.8%
|
68.5%
|
|
Net plant and equipment
|
35.1%
|
20.6%
|
|
Other long-term assets
|
12.4%
|
11.0%
|
|
Total assets
|
100.0%
|
100.0%
|
|
LIABILITIES
|
FIRM A
|
FIRM B
|
|
Accounts payable
|
19.6%
|
23.8%
|
|
Notes payable
|
0.1%
|
0.0%
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
16.8%
|
3.6%
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
36.5%
|
27.4%
|
|
Long-term debt
|
11.9%
|
14.2%
|
|
Other liabilities
|
14.7%
|
8.0%
|
|
Total liabilities
|
63.1%
|
49.6%
|
|
Common equity
|
4.9%
|
4.9%
|
|
Retained earnings
|
32.0%
|
45.5%
|
|
Total stockholders” equity
|
36.9%
|
50.4%
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
100.0%
|
100.0%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income Statement—Yearly Data ($ in millions)
|
|
2010
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Revenue
|
24,623.0
|
21,206.9
|
17,838.8
|
15,307.0
|
13,363.0
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
17,779.7
|
15,235.8
|
12,768.5
|
10,951.0
|
9,518.0
|
|
Selling, General and Admin.
|
5,175.8
|
4,516.9
|
3,844.8
|
3,332.0
|
2,973.0
|
|
Depreciation and Amort.
|
269.2
|
230.1
|
210.1
|
189.0
|
164.0
|
|
Research and Development
|
0.0
|
0.0
|
0.0
|
0.0
|
0.0
|
|
OPERATING INCOME
|
1,398.3
|
1,224.1
|
1,015.4
|
835.0
|
708.0
|
|
Interest Expense
|
3.1
|
0.4
|
0.4
|
1.0
|
2.0
|
|
Other Expenses (Income)
|
(27.5)
|
(39.6)
|
(12.3)
|
(43.0)
|
(6.0)
|
|
INCOME BEFORE TAXES
|
1,422.27
|
1,263.3
|
1,027.3
|
877.0
|
712.0
|
|
Income Taxes
|
537.1
|
486.4
|
403.2
|
340.0
|
276.0
|
|
INCOME AFTER TAXES
|
885.6
|
776.9
|
624.1
|
537.0
|
436.0
|
|
EPS (as reported)
|
0.86
|
0.76
|
0.62
|
0.54
|
0.44
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
We consider a reference portfolio of three investment grade names with the following one-year CDS rates:
a(1) = 15
a(2) = 11
a(3) = 330
The recovery rate is the same for all names at R = 40.The notional amount invested in every CDO tranche is $1.50. Consider the questions:
(a) What are the corresponding default probabilities?
(b) How would you use this information in predicting actual defaults?
(c) Suppose the defaults are uncorrelated. What is the distribution of the number of defaults during one year?
(d) How much would a 0-66% tranche lose under these conditions?
(e) Suppose there are two tranches: 0–50% and 50–100%. How much would each tranche pay over a year if you sell protection?
(f) Suppose all CDS rates are now equal and that we have c(1) = c(2) = c(3) = 100. Also, all defaults are correlated with a correlation of one. What is the loss distribution? What is the spread of the 0–50% tranche?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statement assertions are established for account balances,
align=”left”>
|
|
Classes of transactions
|
Disclosures
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following audit risk components may be assessed in nonquantitative terms?
|
|
Control risk
|
Detection risk
|
Inherent risk
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following statements is not correct about materiality?
- The concept of materiality recognizes that some matters are important for fair presentation of financial statements in conformity with GAAP, while other matters are not important.
- An auditor considers materiality for planning purposes in terms of the largest aggregate level of misstatements that could be material to any one of the financial statements.
- Materiality judgments are made in light of surrounding circumstances and necessarily involve both quantitative and qualitative judgments.
- An auditor’s consideration of materiality is influenced by the auditor’s perception of the needs of a reasonable person who will rely on the financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is an example of fraudulent financial reporting?
a. Company management changes inventory count tags and overstates ending inventory, while understating cost of goods sold.
b. The treasurer diverts customer payments to his personal due, concealing his actions by debiting an expense account, thus overstating expenses.
c. An employee steals inventory and the “shrinkage” is recorded in cost of goods sold.
d. An employee steals small tools from the company and neglects to return them; the cost is reported as a miscellaneous operating expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is correct concerning requirements about auditor communications about fraud?
a. Fraud that involves senior management should be reported directly to the audit committee regardless of the amount involved.
b. Fraud with a material effect on the financial statements should be reported directly by the auditor to the Securities and Exchange Commission.
c. Fraud with a material effect on the financial statements should ordinarily be disclosed by the auditor through use of an “emphasis of a matter” paragraph added to the audit report.
d. The auditor has no responsibility to disclose fraud outside the entity under any circumstances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following statements reflects an auditor’s responsibility for detecting misstatements due to errors and fraud?
a. An auditor is responsible for detecting employee errors and simple fraud, but not for discovering fraud involving employee collusion or management override.
b. An auditor should plan the audit to detect misstatements due to errors and fraud that are caused by departures from GAAP.
c. An auditor is not responsible for detecting misstatements due to errors and fraud unless the application of GAAS would result in such detection.
d. An auditor should design the audit to provide reasonable assurance of detecting misstatements due to errors and fraud that are material to the financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Disclosure of fraud to parties other than a client’s senior management and its audit committee or board of directors ordinarily is not part of an auditor’s responsibility. However, to which of the following outside parties may a duty to disclose fraud exist?
|
|
To the SEC when the client reports an auditor change
|
To a successor auditor when the successor makes appropriate Inquiries
|
To a government funding agency from which the client receives financial assistance
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What assurance does the auditor provide that misstatements due to errors, fraud, and direct effect illegal acts that are material to the financial statements will be detected?
|
|
Errors
|
Fraud
|
Direct effect illegal acts
|
|
a.
|
Limited
|
Negative
|
Limited
|
|
b.
|
Limited
|
Limited
|
Reasonable
|
|
c.
|
Reasonable
|
Limited
|
Limited
|
|
d.
|
Reasonable
|
Reasonable
|
Reasonable
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At which stage(s) of the audit may fraud risk factors be identified?
|
|
Planning
|
Obtaining understanding
|
Conducting fieldwork
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
Yes
|
No
|
No
|
|
d.
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Individuals who commit fraud are ordinarily able to rationalize the act and also have an
|
|
Incentive
|
Opportunity
|
|
a.
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
b.
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
c.
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
d.
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the annual audit of Ajax Corp., a publicly held company, Jones, CPA, a continuing auditor, determined that illegal political contributions had been made during each of the past seven years, including the year under audit. Jones notified the board of directors about the illegal contributions, but they refused to take any action because the amounts involved were immaterial to the financial statements. Jones should reconsider the intended degree of reliance to be placed on the
a. Letter of audit inquiry to the client’s attorney.
b. Prior years’ audit programs.
c. Management representation letter.
d. Preliminary judgment about materiality levels.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The most likely explanation why the auditor’s examination cannot reasonably be expected to bring all illegal acts by the client to the auditor’s attention is that
a. Illegal acts are perpetrated by management override of internal control.
b. Illegal acts by clients often relate to operating aspects rather than accounting aspects.
c. The client’s internal control may be so strong that the auditor performs only minimal substantive testing.
d. Illegal acts may be perpetrated by the only person in the client’s organization with access to both assets and the accounting records.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If specific information comes to an auditor’s attention that implies the existence of possible illegal acts that could have a material, but indirect effect on the financial statements, the auditor should next
a. Apply audit procedures specifically directed to ascertaining whether an illegal act has occurred.
b. Seek the advice of an informed expert qualified to practice law as to possible contingent liabilities.
c. Report the matter to an appropriate level of management at least one level above those involved.
d. Discuss the evidence with the client’s audit committee, or others with equivalent authority and responsibility.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Under the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, Baker, CPA, reported certain uncorrected illegal acts to Supermart’s board of directors. Baker believed that failure to take remedial action would warrant a qualified audit opinion because the illegal acts had a material effect on Supermart’s financial statements. Supermart failed to take appropriate remedial action and the board of directors refused to inform the SEC that it had received such notification from Baker. Under these circumstances, Baker is required to
a. Resign from the audit engagement within ten business days.
b. Deliver a report concerning the illegal acts to the SEC within one business day.
c. Notify the stockholders that the financial statements are materially misstated.
d. Withhold an audit opinion until Supermart takes appropriate remedial action.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following factors would most likely cause a CPA to decide not to accept a new audit engagement?
a. The CPA’s lack of understanding of the prospective client’s internal auditor’s computer-assisted audit techniques.
b. Management’s disregard of its responsibility to maintain an adequate internal control environment.
c. The CPA’s inability to determine whether related-party transactions were consummated on terms equivalent to arm’s-length transactions.
d. Management’s refusal to permit the CPA to perform substantive tests before the year-end.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following balances were extracted from the books of Fortune Ltd. as on 31 March 2011:
|
Particulars
|
|
|
10,000 9% Redeemable Preference Shares of
|
10,00,000
|
|
100 Each, Fully Called Up}:
|
30,000
|
|
Less: Calls-in-Arrear @ Rs.20 Per Share On 1,500 Shares}:
|
9,70,000
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
50,000
|
|
General Reserve
|
2,50,000
|
The preference shares were redeemed on 1 April 2011 at a premium of Rs.5 per share. The company issued 65,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each at par, for the purpose of redeeming the preference shares, which were fully subscribed and duly allotted.
You are required to show the journal entries showing the transactions relating to the redemption of shares and the relevant extracts on the liabilities side of the balance sheet after such redemption.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Ltd. has the following balance sheet as on 31 March 2011:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Fixed Assets
|
11,00,000
|
|
Issued,
|
|
Current Assets
|
4,00,000
|
|
Subscribed &
|
|
|
|
|
Fully Paid Up
|
|
|
|
|
5,000 Equity
|
5,00,000
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 100
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
2,500 Pref. Shares of Rs.100 Each
|
2,50,000
|
|
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
Securities
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
Premium A/c
|
|
|
|
|
General Reserve
|
1,00,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
5,00,000
|
|
|
|
|
15,00,000
|
|
15,00,000
|
The preference shares are to be redeemed at 10% premium. Fresh issue of equity shares is to be made to the extent it is required under the Companies Act for the purpose of this redemption. The shortfall in funds for the purpose of the redemption after utilizing the proceeds of the fresh issue are to be met by taking a bank loan. Show the journal entries.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sun Rise Ltd. issued share capital of 30,000 12% redeemable preference shares of Rs.20 each and 2,00,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each. The preference shares are redeemable at a premium of 5% on 1 January 2011. As at 31 December 2011, the company’s balance sheet stood at as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
Rs
|
|
Issued Share
|
|
Plant &
|
|
|
Capital:
|
6,00,000
|
Machinery
|
12,50,000
|
|
30,00012%
|
|
Furniture &
|
|
|
Redeemable
|
|
Fixtures
|
4,50,000
|
|
Pref. Shares of
|
|
Investments
|
1,75,000
|
|
Rs20 Each Fully
|
|
Stock
|
7,50,000
|
|
Paid
|
|
Debtors
|
7,00,000
|
|
2,00,000 Equity
|
20,00,000
|
Bank
|
1,75,000
|
|
Shares of Rs 10
|
|
|
|
|
Each Fully Paid
|
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
3,50,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
5,50,000
|
|
|
|
|
35,00,000
|
|
35,00,000
|
In order to facilitate the redemption of preference shares, it was decided
- To sell the investments for Rs.,1,50,000
- To finance part of the redemption from the company funds subject to leaving of balance in P&L A/c Rs.1,00,000.
- To issue sufficient equity shares of Rs.10 each at a premium of Rs.2 per share to raise the balance of funds required
All the above-mentioned decisions were fully carried out and the preference shares were duly redeemed.
You are required to prepare:
- Journal entries to record the above transactionsA memorandum balance sheet as on completion of redemption
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following is the balance sheet of Crescent Ltd. as on 30 June 2011:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Preference Share
|
|
Fixed Assets
|
36,00,000
|
|
capital
|
|
Investments
|
3,00,000
|
|
15,000 Shares of
|
15,00,000
|
Bank
|
5,40,000
|
|
Rs.100 Each, Fully
|
|
|
|
|
Called Up
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Final Call of Z 20 Per Share
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
Unpaid
|
|
|
|
|
|
14,88,000
|
|
|
|
Equity Share capital:
|
|
|
|
|
1,80,000 Shares of Rs. 10 Each,
|
18,00,000
|
|
|
|
Fully Paid Up
|
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
9,00,000
|
|
|
|
Securities
|
|
|
|
|
Premium A/c
|
90,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
1,62,000
|
|
|
|
|
44,40,000
|
|
44,40,000
|
On that date, the Board of Directors decided to redeem the preference shares at a premium of 10% and to sell investments at its market price of Rs.2,40,000. All payments were made except to shareholders holding 300 shares who could not be traceable.
They also decided to issue sufficient number of equity shares of Rs.10 each at a premium of Re 1 per share, required after utilizing the P&L A/c leaving a balance of Rs.3,00,000. Premium on redemption is required to be set off against security premium account. You are required to show the journal entries and the balance sheet of the company after redemption.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the balance sheet of Seven Stars Ltd. as at 31 December 2011:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Preference Share
|
|
Fixed Assets
|
18,00,000
|
|
Capital:
|
|
Investments
|
1,50,000
|
|
7,500 Shares of
|
7,50,000
|
Bank
|
2,70,000
|
|
Rs. 100 Each Fully
|
|
|
|
|
Called Up
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Final Call of Rs. 20 Per Share
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
Unpaid
|
|
|
|
|
|
7,44,000
|
|
|
|
Equity Share
|
|
|
|
|
Capital:
|
|
|
|
|
90,000 Shares of
|
9,00,000
|
|
|
|
Z 10 Each Fully
|
|
|
|
|
Paid Up
|
|
|
|
|
Securities premium
|
45,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
4,50,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry Csreditors
|
81,000
|
|
|
|
|
22,20,000
|
|
22,20,000
|
On 30 May 2011, the Board of Directors decided to redeem the preference shares at a premium of 10% and to sell the investments at its market price of Rs.1,20,000. They also decided to issue sufficient number of equity shares of Rs.10 each at a premium of Rs.1 per share, required after utilizing the P&L A/c leaving a balance of Rs.1,50,000. Premium on redemption is required to set off against securities premium account.
Repayments on redemption were made in full except one shareholder holding 150 shares due to his leaving India for good. Assume that calls-in-arrears were received in full. You are required to show the journal entries and the balance sheet of the company after redemption.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the balance sheet of Jyothi Ltd. as at 31 March 2010:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Fixed Assets:
|
|
|
Authorized
|
|
Gross Block
|
8,00,000
|
|
20,0009%
|
2,00,000
|
Less:
|
|
|
Redeemable
|
|
Depreciation
|
2,00,000
|
|
Pref. Shares of
|
|
|
|
|
Rs.10 Each
|
|
|
6,00,000
|
|
1,80,000 Equity
|
18,00,000
|
|
|
|
Shares ofRs. 10
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
|
20,00,000
|
|
2,00,000
|
|
Issued, Subscribed & Paid up:
|
|
Investments Current Assets, Loans &
|
|
|
20,0009%
|
|
Advances:
|
|
|
Redeemable
|
|
Inventory
|
2,50,000
|
|
Pref. Shares of
|
|
Debtors
|
2,50,000
|
|
Z10 Each
|
|
Cash & Bank
|
3,00,000
|
|
1,00,000 Equity
|
|
Balances
|
|
|
Shares of 10
|
|
|
8,00,000
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
(A)
|
12,00,000
|
|
|
|
Reserve &
|
2,40,000
|
Miscellaneous
|
40,000
|
|
Surplus:
|
|
Expenditure (to
|
|
|
General Reserve
|
1,40,000
|
the Extent Not
|
|
|
Securities
|
|
Written off)
|
|
|
|
37,000
|
|
|
|
Premium
|
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
|
|
|
|
(B)
|
4,17,000
|
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
23,000
|
|
|
|
& Provisions: (C)
|
|
|
|
|
Total (A+ B+ C)
|
16,40,000
|
Total
|
16,40,000
|
For the year ended 31 March 2011, the Company made a net profit of Rs.30,000 after providing Rs.40,000 depreciation and writing off the miscellaneous expenditure amounting to Rs.40,000.
The following additional information is available with regard to Company’s operation:
- (The preference dividend for the year ended 31 March 2011 was paid before 31 March 2011.
- Except cash and bank balances, other current assets and current liabilities as on 31 March 2011was the same as on 31 March 2010.
- The Company redeemed the preference shares at a premium of 10%.
- The Company issued bonus shares in the ratio of one share for every five equity shares held as on 31 March 2011.
- To meet the requirements of redemption, the Company sold a portion of the investments, so as to leave a minimum balance of Rs.60,000 after such redemption.
- Investments were sold at 90% of cost on 31 March 2011.
You are required to:
- Prepare necessary journal entries to record redemption and issue of bonus shares
- Prepare the cash and bank account
- Prepare the balance sheet as at 31 March 2011 incorporating the above transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The relevant section of the balance sheet of OKAY Ltd. as on 31 March 2011 is as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
24,00,000
|
|
Authorized:
|
|
|
Issued & Subscribed:
|
|
|
1,20,000 Equity Shares of Rs.10 Each, Fully Paid Up}
|
12,00,000
|
|
4,500 8% Redeemable Preference Shares of Rs.100 Each, Fully Paid Up}
|
4,50,000
|
|
Reserve & Surplus:
|
|
|
Profit Prior to Incorporation
|
60,000
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
22,500
|
|
Securities Premium
|
15,000
|
|
General Reserve
|
1,20,000
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
90,000
|
The pref. shares were due to be redeemed at a premium of 5 %. As the divisible profits were inadequate, the company after completing the legal formalities issued the minimum amount of equity shares of Rs.10 each at a discount of 10%.
All the preference shares were then redeemed. You are required to pass journal entries for all the above transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The capital structure of Suncity Ltd. consists of 50,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each and 2,000 8% redeemable preference shares of Rs.100 each fully paid up. Undistributed reserves and surplus stood as follows:
Cash and Bank amounted to Rs.1,96,000. Preference shares are to be redeemed at a premium of 10% and for the purpose of redemption, the directors are empowered to make a fresh issue of equity shares at par after utilizing the undistributed reserves and surplus, subject to the condition that a sum of Rs.40,000 shall be retained in general reserve.
Pass journal entries to give effect to the above arrangements assuming that the company could not trace the holders of 100 preference shares.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Debenture issued at a premium BXY Ltd. issued 4,000 14% debenture of Rs.100 each payable as:
|
On Application
|
Rs.20
|
|
On Allotment
|
Rs.50
|
|
On First & Final Call
|
Rs.30 (After 3 months Allotment)
|
The public applied for 6,000 debentures. Applications for 3,500 debentures were accepted in full. Applicants for 1,000 debentures were allotted 500 debentures and the remaining was rejected. Pass required journal entries.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Over-subscription—Issue of debentures at a premium Govil & Co. Ltd. issued 10,000, 10% debentures of Rs.50 each at a premium of 20% payable as:
|
On Application
|
:
|
Rs.15
|
|
On Allotment
|
:
|
30 (Including Premium)
|
|
On First & Final Call
|
:
|
Rs.15
|
Applications were received for 20,000 debentures. All allotment was made proportionately, oversubscription being applied to the amount due on allotment. All money was duly received.
Pass necessary journal entries. Also pass the entry if the whole amount of debenture is collected in one installment only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
How to calculate the tax base of assets and liabilities, respectively. Based on the information provided.The following information pertains to Entiguan Sports, a hypothetical developer of products used to treat sports-related injuries. (The treatment of items for accounting and tax purposes is based on fictitious accounting and tax standards and is not specific to a particular jurisdiction.)
- 1. Dividends receivable: On its balance sheet, Entiguan Sports reports dividends of €1 million receivable from a subsidiary. Assume that dividends are not taxable.
- 2. Development costs: Entiguan Sports capitalized development costs of €3 million during the year. Entiguan amortized €500,000 of this amount during the year. For tax purposes amortization of 25 percent per year is allowed.
- 3. Research costs: Entiguan incurred €500,000 in research costs, which were all expensed in the current fiscal year for financial reporting purposes. Assume that applicable tax legislation requires research costs to be expensed over a four-year period rather than all in one year.
- 4. Accounts receivable: Included on the income statement of Entiguan Sports is a provision for doubtful debt of €125,000. The accounts receivable amount reflected on the balance sheet, after taking the provision into account, amounts to €1,500,000. The tax authorities allow a deduction of 25 percent of the gross amount for doubtful debt.
- The following information pertains to Entiguan Sports for the 2006 year-end. The treatment of items for accounting and tax purposes is based on fictitious accounting and tax standards and is not specific to a particular jurisdiction.
- 1. Donations: Entiguan Sports made donations of €100,000 in the current fiscal year. The donations were expensed for financial reporting purposes, but are not tax deductible based on applicable tax legislation.
- 2. Interest received in advance: Entiguan Sports received in advance interest of €300,000. The interest is taxed because tax authorities recognize the interest to accrue to the company (part of taxable income) on the date of receipt.
- 3. Rent received in advance: Entiguan recognized €10 million for rent received in advance from a lessee for an unused warehouse building. Rent received in advance is deferred for accounting purposes but taxed on a cash basis.
- 4. Loan: Entiguan Sports secured a long-term loan for €550,000 in the current fiscal year. Interest is charged at 13.5 percent per annum and is payable at the end of each fiscal year.
Indicate whether the difference in the tax base and carrying amount of the assets and liabilities are temporary or permanent differences and whether a deferred tax asset or liability will be recognized based on the difference identified.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The components of earnings before income taxes are as follows ($ thousands):
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
Earnings before income taxes:
|
|
|
|
|
United States
|
$88,157
|
$75,658
|
$59,973
|
|
Foreign
|
116,704
|
113,509
|
94,760
|
|
Total
|
$204,861
|
$189,167
|
$154,733
|
The components of the provision for income taxes are as follows ($ thousands):
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
Income taxes Current:
|
|
|
|
|
Federal
|
$30,632
|
$22,031
|
$18,959
|
|
Foreign
|
28,140
|
27,961
|
22,263
|
|
|
$58,772
|
$49,992
|
$41,222
|
|
Deferred:
|
|
|
|
|
Federal
|
($4,752)
|
$5,138
|
$2,336
|
|
Foreign
|
124
|
1,730
|
621
|
|
|
(4,628)
|
6,868
|
2,957
|
|
Total
|
$54,144
|
$56,860
|
$44,179
|
In 2007, the company’s U.S. GAAP income statement recorded a provision for income taxes closest to:
A. $30,632.
B. $54,144.
C. $58,772.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The components of earnings before income taxes are as follows ($ thousands):
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
Earnings before income taxes:
|
|
|
|
|
United States
|
$88,157
|
$75,658
|
$59,973
|
|
Foreign
|
116,704
|
113,509
|
94,760
|
|
Total
|
$204,861
|
$189,167
|
$154,733
|
The components of the provision for income taxes are as follows ($ thousands):
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
Income taxes Current:
|
|
|
|
|
Federal
|
$30,632
|
$22,031
|
$18,959
|
|
Foreign
|
28,140
|
27,961
|
22,263
|
|
|
$58,772
|
$49,992
|
$41,222
|
|
Deferred:
|
|
|
|
|
Federal
|
($4,752)
|
$5,138
|
$2,336
|
|
Foreign
|
124
|
1,730
|
621
|
|
|
(4,628)
|
6,868
|
2,957
|
|
Total
|
$54,144
|
$56,860
|
$44,179
|
Compared to the company’s effective tax rate on U.S. income, its effective tax rate on foreign income was:
A. lower in each year presented.
B. higher in each year presented.
C. higher in some periods and lower in others.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The tax effects of temporary differences that give rise to deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows ($ thousands):
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Deferred tax assets:
|
|
|
|
Accrued expenses
|
$8,613
|
$7,927
|
|
Tax credit and net operating loss carry-forwards
|
2,288
|
2,554
|
|
LIFO and inventory reserves
|
5,286
|
4,327
|
|
Other
|
2,664
|
2,109
|
|
Deferred tax assets
|
18,851
|
16,917
|
|
Valuation allowance
|
(1,245)
|
(1,360)
|
|
Net deferred tax assets
|
$17,606
|
$15,557
|
|
Deferred tax liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
$(27,338)
|
$(29,313)
|
|
Compensation and retirement plans
|
(3,831)
|
(8,963)
|
|
Other
|
(1,470)
|
(764)
|
|
Deferred tax liabilities
|
(32,639)
|
(39,040)
|
|
Net deferred tax liability
|
($15,033)
|
($23,483)
|
A reduction in the statutory tax rate would most likely benefit the company’s:
A. income statement and balance sheet.
B. income statement but not the balance sheet.
C. balance sheet but not the income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use your knowledge of balance sheets to fill in the missing amounts:
|
ASSETS
|
|
|
Cash
|
$50,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
80,000
|
|
Inventory
|
100,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
______
|
|
Gross plant and equipment
|
______
|
|
Less: accumulated depreciation
|
130,000
|
|
Net plant and equipment
|
600,000
|
|
Total assets
|
______
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use your knowledge of balance sheets and common-size statements to fill in the missing dollar amounts:
|
ASSETS
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$25,000
|
3.4%
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$125,000
|
_____
|
|
Inventory
|
_____
|
27.1%
|
|
Total current assets
|
$350,000
|
_____
|
|
Gross plant and equipment
|
_____
|
95.0%
|
|
Less: accumulated depreciation
|
$313,000
|
42.5%
|
|
Net plant and equipment
|
______
|
______
|
|
Total assets
|
$737,000
|
100.0%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use your knowledge of income statements to fill in the missing items:
|
Sales
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$575,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
1,600,000
|
|
General and administrative expense
|
200,000
|
|
Selling and marketing expense
|
_____
|
|
Depreciation
|
50,000
|
|
Operating income
|
_____
|
|
Interest
|
100,000
|
|
Income before taxes
|
______
|
|
Income taxes (30%)
|
_____
|
|
Net income
|
$700,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following information to construct an income statement:
|
Interest
|
$25,000
|
|
Sales
|
$950,000
|
|
Income tax rate
|
25%
|
|
Selling and marketing expenses
|
$160,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
$200,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$550,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
$30,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$400,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following information to construct an income statement:
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$684,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$546,000
|
|
General and administrative expense
|
$159,000
|
|
Selling and marketing expense
|
$134,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$228,000
|
|
Income before taxes
|
$87,000
|
|
Income tax rate
|
27%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use your knowledge of income statements and common-size statements to fill in the missing dollar amounts:
|
Sales
|
$2,876,200
|
100.0%
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
______
|
74.7%
|
|
Gross profit
|
______
|
25.3%
|
|
General and administrative expense
|
$250,000
|
8.7%
|
|
Selling and marketing expense
|
$140,000
|
4.9%
|
|
Depreciation
|
______
|
3.8%
|
|
Operating income
|
$229,000
|
8.0%
|
|
Interest
|
______
|
4.6%
|
|
Income before taxes
|
$97,000
|
3.4%
|
|
Income taxes (25%)
|
$24,250
|
0.8%
|
|
Net income
|
______
|
2.5%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A financial analyst at BETTO, S.A. is analyzing the result of the sale of a vehicle for 85,000 Argentine pesos (ARP) on 31 December 2009. The analyst compiles the following information about the vehicle:
|
Acquisition cost of the vehicle
|
ARP 100,000
|
|
Acquisition date
|
1 January 2007
|
|
Estimated residual value at acquisition date
|
ARP 10,000
|
|
Expected useful life
|
9 years
|
|
Depreciation method
|
Straight-line
|
The result of the sale of the vehicle is most likely:
A. a loss of ARP 15,000.
B. a gain of ARP 15,000.
C. a gain of ARP 18,333.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Melanie Hart, CFA, is a transportation analyst. Hart has been asked to write a research report on Altai Mountain Rail Company (AMRC). Like other companies in the railroad industry, AMRC’s operations are capital intensive, with significant investments in such long-lived tangible assets as property, plant, and equipment. In November of 2008, AMRC’s board of directors hired a new team to manage the company. In reviewing the company’s 2009 annual report, Hart is concerned about some of the accounting choices that the new management has made. These choices differ from those of the previous management and from common industry practice. Hart has highlighted the following statements from the company’s annual report:
|
Statement 1:
|
“In 2009, AMRC spent significant amounts on track replacement and similar improvements. AMRC expensed rather than capitalized a significant proportion of these expenditures.”
|
|
Statement 2:
|
“AMRC uses the straight-line method of depreciation for both financial and tax reporting purposes to account for plant and equipment.”
|
|
Statement 3:
|
“In 2009, AMRC recognized an impairment loss of €50 million on a fleet of locomotives. The impairment loss was reported as ‘other income’ in the income statement and reduced the carrying amount of the assets on the balance sheet.”
|
|
Statement 4:
|
“AMRC acquires the use of many of its assets, including a large portion of its fleet of rail cars, under long-term lease contracts. In 2009, AMRC acquired the use of equipment with a fair value of €200 million under 20-year lease contracts. These leases were classified as operating leases. Prior to 2009, most of these lease contracts were classified as finance leases.”
|
Exhibits A and B contain AMRC’s 2009 consolidated income statement and balance sheet. AMRC prepares its financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards.
EXHIBIT A Consolidated Statement of Income
|
For the Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
|
2008
|
|
|
E in millions
|
% Revenues
|
E in millions
|
% Revenues
|
|
Operating revenues
|
2,600
|
100.0%
|
2,300
|
100.0%
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
(200)
|
(7.7%)
|
(190)
|
(8.3%)
|
|
Lease payments
|
(210)
|
(8.1%)
|
(195)
|
(8.5%)
|
|
Other operating expense
|
(1,590)
|
(61.1%)
|
(1,515)
|
(65.9%)
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
(2,000)
|
(76.9%)
|
(1,900)
|
(82.6%)
|
|
Operating income
|
600
|
23.1%
|
400
|
17.4%
|
|
Other income
|
(50)
|
(1.9%)
|
—
|
0.0%
|
|
Interest expense
|
(73)
|
(2.8%)
|
(69)
|
(3.0%)
|
|
Income before taxes
|
477
|
18.4%
|
331
|
14.4%
|
|
Income taxes
|
(189)
|
(7.3%)
|
(125)
|
(5.4%)
|
|
Net income
|
288
|
11.1%
|
206
|
9.0%
|
Consolidated Balance Sheet
|
As of 31 December
|
2009
|
|
2008
|
|
|
E in millions
|
% Assets
|
E in millions
|
% Assets
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
500
|
9.4%
|
450
|
8.5%
|
|
Property & equipment:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
700
|
13.1%
|
700
|
13.2%
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
6,000
|
112.1%
|
5,800
|
109.4%
|
|
Total property & equipment
|
6,700
|
125.2%
|
6,500
|
122.6%
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(1,850)
|
(34.6%)
|
(1,650)
|
(31.1%)
|
|
Net property & equipment
|
4,850
|
90.6%
|
4,850
|
91.5%
|
|
Total assets
|
5,350
|
100.0%
|
5,300
|
100.0%
|
|
liabilities and shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
480
|
9.0%
|
430
|
8.1%
|
|
Long-term debt
|
1,030
|
19.3%
|
1,080
|
20.4%
|
|
Other long-term provisions and liabilities
|
1,240
|
23.1%
|
1,440
|
27.2%
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,750
|
51.4%
|
2,950
|
55.7%
|
|
shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock and paid-in-surplus
|
760
|
14.2%
|
760
|
14.3%
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,888
|
35.3%
|
1,600
|
30.2%
|
|
Other comprehensive losses
|
(48)
|
(0.9%)
|
(10)
|
(0.2%)
|
With respect to Statement 1, which of the following is the most likely effect of management’s decision to expense rather than capitalize these expenditures?
A. 2009 net profit margin is higher than if the expenditures had been capitalized.
B. 2009 total asset turnover is lower than if the expenditures had been capitalized.
C. Future profit growth will be higher than if the expenditures had been capitalized.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Melanie Hart, CFA, is a transportation analyst. Hart has been asked to write a research report on Altai Mountain Rail Company (AMRC). Like other companies in the railroad industry, AMRC’s operations are capital intensive, with significant investments in such long-lived tangible assets as property, plant, and equipment. In November of 2008, AMRC’s board of directors hired a new team to manage the company. In reviewing the company’s 2009 annual report, Hart is concerned about some of the accounting choices that the new management has made. These choices differ from those of the previous management and from common industry practice. Hart has highlighted the following statements from the company’s annual report:
|
Statement 1:
|
“In 2009, AMRC spent significant amounts on track replacement and similar improvements. AMRC expensed rather than capitalized a significant proportion of these expenditures.”
|
|
Statement 2:
|
“AMRC uses the straight-line method of depreciation for both financial and tax reporting purposes to account for plant and equipment.”
|
|
Statement 3:
|
“In 2009, AMRC recognized an impairment loss of €50 million on a fleet of locomotives. The impairment loss was reported as ‘other income’ in the income statement and reduced the carrying amount of the assets on the balance sheet.”
|
|
Statement 4:
|
“AMRC acquires the use of many of its assets, including a large portion of its fleet of rail cars, under long-term lease contracts. In 2009, AMRC acquired the use of equipment with a fair value of €200 million under 20-year lease contracts. These leases were classified as operating leases. Prior to 2009, most of these lease contracts were classified as finance leases.”
|
Exhibits A and B contain AMRC’s 2009 consolidated income statement and balance sheet. AMRC prepares its financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards.
EXHIBIT A Consolidated Statement of Income
|
For the Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
|
2008
|
|
|
E in millions
|
% Revenues
|
E in millions
|
% Revenues
|
|
Operating revenues
|
2,600
|
100.0%
|
2,300
|
100.0%
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
(200)
|
(7.7%)
|
(190)
|
(8.3%)
|
|
Lease payments
|
(210)
|
(8.1%)
|
(195)
|
(8.5%)
|
|
Other operating expense
|
(1,590)
|
(61.1%)
|
(1,515)
|
(65.9%)
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
(2,000)
|
(76.9%)
|
(1,900)
|
(82.6%)
|
|
Operating income
|
600
|
23.1%
|
400
|
17.4%
|
|
Other income
|
(50)
|
(1.9%)
|
—
|
0.0%
|
|
Interest expense
|
(73)
|
(2.8%)
|
(69)
|
(3.0%)
|
|
Income before taxes
|
477
|
18.4%
|
331
|
14.4%
|
|
Income taxes
|
(189)
|
(7.3%)
|
(125)
|
(5.4%)
|
|
Net income
|
288
|
11.1%
|
206
|
9.0%
|
Consolidated Balance Sheet
|
As of 31 December
|
2009
|
|
2008
|
|
|
E in millions
|
% Assets
|
E in millions
|
% Assets
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
500
|
9.4%
|
450
|
8.5%
|
|
Property & equipment:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
700
|
13.1%
|
700
|
13.2%
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
6,000
|
112.1%
|
5,800
|
109.4%
|
|
Total property & equipment
|
6,700
|
125.2%
|
6,500
|
122.6%
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(1,850)
|
(34.6%)
|
(1,650)
|
(31.1%)
|
|
Net property & equipment
|
4,850
|
90.6%
|
4,850
|
91.5%
|
|
Total assets
|
5,350
|
100.0%
|
5,300
|
100.0%
|
|
liabilities and shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
480
|
9.0%
|
430
|
8.1%
|
|
Long-term debt
|
1,030
|
19.3%
|
1,080
|
20.4%
|
|
Other long-term provisions and liabilities
|
1,240
|
23.1%
|
1,440
|
27.2%
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,750
|
51.4%
|
2,950
|
55.7%
|
|
shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock and paid-in-surplus
|
760
|
14.2%
|
760
|
14.3%
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,888
|
35.3%
|
1,600
|
30.2%
|
|
Other comprehensive losses
|
(48)
|
(0.9%)
|
(10)
|
(0.2%)
|
With respect to Statement 2, what would be the most likely effect in 2010 if AMRC were to switch to an accelerated depreciation method for both financial and tax reporting?
A. Net profit margin would decrease.
B. Total asset turnover would increase.
C. Cash flow from operating activities would increase.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Melanie Hart, CFA, is a transportation analyst. Hart has been asked to write a research report on Altai Mountain Rail Company (AMRC). Like other companies in the railroad industry, AMRC’s operations are capital intensive, with significant investments in such long-lived tangible assets as property, plant, and equipment. In November of 2008, AMRC’s board of directors hired a new team to manage the company. In reviewing the company’s 2009 annual report, Hart is concerned about some of the accounting choices that the new management has made. These choices differ from those of the previous management and from common industry practice. Hart has highlighted the following statements from the company’s annual report:
|
Statement 1:
|
“In 2009, AMRC spent significant amounts on track replacement and similar improvements. AMRC expensed rather than capitalized a significant proportion of these expenditures.”
|
|
Statement 2:
|
“AMRC uses the straight-line method of depreciation for both financial and tax reporting purposes to account for plant and equipment.”
|
|
Statement 3:
|
“In 2009, AMRC recognized an impairment loss of €50 million on a fleet of locomotives. The impairment loss was reported as ‘other income’ in the income statement and reduced the carrying amount of the assets on the balance sheet.”
|
|
Statement 4:
|
“AMRC acquires the use of many of its assets, including a large portion of its fleet of rail cars, under long-term lease contracts. In 2009, AMRC acquired the use of equipment with a fair value of €200 million under 20-year lease contracts. These leases were classified as operating leases. Prior to 2009, most of these lease contracts were classified as finance leases.”
|
Exhibits A and B contain AMRC’s 2009 consolidated income statement and balance sheet. AMRC prepares its financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards.
EXHIBIT A Consolidated Statement of Income
|
For the Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
|
2008
|
|
|
E in millions
|
% Revenues
|
E in millions
|
% Revenues
|
|
Operating revenues
|
2,600
|
100.0%
|
2,300
|
100.0%
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
(200)
|
(7.7%)
|
(190)
|
(8.3%)
|
|
Lease payments
|
(210)
|
(8.1%)
|
(195)
|
(8.5%)
|
|
Other operating expense
|
(1,590)
|
(61.1%)
|
(1,515)
|
(65.9%)
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
(2,000)
|
(76.9%)
|
(1,900)
|
(82.6%)
|
|
Operating income
|
600
|
23.1%
|
400
|
17.4%
|
|
Other income
|
(50)
|
(1.9%)
|
—
|
0.0%
|
|
Interest expense
|
(73)
|
(2.8%)
|
(69)
|
(3.0%)
|
|
Income before taxes
|
477
|
18.4%
|
331
|
14.4%
|
|
Income taxes
|
(189)
|
(7.3%)
|
(125)
|
(5.4%)
|
|
Net income
|
288
|
11.1%
|
206
|
9.0%
|
Consolidated Balance Sheet
|
As of 31 December
|
2009
|
|
2008
|
|
|
E in millions
|
% Assets
|
E in millions
|
% Assets
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
500
|
9.4%
|
450
|
8.5%
|
|
Property & equipment:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
700
|
13.1%
|
700
|
13.2%
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
6,000
|
112.1%
|
5,800
|
109.4%
|
|
Total property & equipment
|
6,700
|
125.2%
|
6,500
|
122.6%
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(1,850)
|
(34.6%)
|
(1,650)
|
(31.1%)
|
|
Net property & equipment
|
4,850
|
90.6%
|
4,850
|
91.5%
|
|
Total assets
|
5,350
|
100.0%
|
5,300
|
100.0%
|
|
liabilities and shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
480
|
9.0%
|
430
|
8.1%
|
|
Long-term debt
|
1,030
|
19.3%
|
1,080
|
20.4%
|
|
Other long-term provisions and liabilities
|
1,240
|
23.1%
|
1,440
|
27.2%
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,750
|
51.4%
|
2,950
|
55.7%
|
|
shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock and paid-in-surplus
|
760
|
14.2%
|
760
|
14.3%
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,888
|
35.3%
|
1,600
|
30.2%
|
|
Other comprehensive losses
|
(48)
|
(0.9%)
|
(10)
|
(0.2%)
|
With respect to Statement 3, what is the most likely effect of the impairment loss?
A. Net income in years prior to 2009 was likely understated.
B. Net profit margins in years after 2009 will likely exceed the 2009 net profit margin.
C. Cash flow from operating activities in 2009 was likely lower due to the impairment loss.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Melanie Hart, CFA, is a transportation analyst. Hart has been asked to write a research report on Altai Mountain Rail Company (AMRC). Like other companies in the railroad industry, AMRC’s operations are capital intensive, with significant investments in such long-lived tangible assets as property, plant, and equipment. In November of 2008, AMRC’s board of directors hired a new team to manage the company. In reviewing the company’s 2009 annual report, Hart is concerned about some of the accounting choices that the new management has made. These choices differ from those of the previous management and from common industry practice. Hart has highlighted the following statements from the company’s annual report:
|
Statement 1:
|
“In 2009, AMRC spent significant amounts on track replacement and similar improvements. AMRC expensed rather than capitalized a significant proportion of these expenditures.”
|
|
Statement 2:
|
“AMRC uses the straight-line method of depreciation for both financial and tax reporting purposes to account for plant and equipment.”
|
|
Statement 3:
|
“In 2009, AMRC recognized an impairment loss of €50 million on a fleet of locomotives. The impairment loss was reported as ‘other income’ in the income statement and reduced the carrying amount of the assets on the balance sheet.”
|
|
Statement 4:
|
“AMRC acquires the use of many of its assets, including a large portion of its fleet of rail cars, under long-term lease contracts. In 2009, AMRC acquired the use of equipment with a fair value of €200 million under 20-year lease contracts. These leases were classified as operating leases. Prior to 2009, most of these lease contracts were classified as finance leases.”
|
Exhibits A and B contain AMRC’s 2009 consolidated income statement and balance sheet. AMRC prepares its financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards.
EXHIBIT A Consolidated Statement of Income
|
For the Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
|
2008
|
|
|
E in millions
|
% Revenues
|
E in millions
|
% Revenues
|
|
Operating revenues
|
2,600
|
100.0%
|
2,300
|
100.0%
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
(200)
|
(7.7%)
|
(190)
|
(8.3%)
|
|
Lease payments
|
(210)
|
(8.1%)
|
(195)
|
(8.5%)
|
|
Other operating expense
|
(1,590)
|
(61.1%)
|
(1,515)
|
(65.9%)
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
(2,000)
|
(76.9%)
|
(1,900)
|
(82.6%)
|
|
Operating income
|
600
|
23.1%
|
400
|
17.4%
|
|
Other income
|
(50)
|
(1.9%)
|
—
|
0.0%
|
|
Interest expense
|
(73)
|
(2.8%)
|
(69)
|
(3.0%)
|
|
Income before taxes
|
477
|
18.4%
|
331
|
14.4%
|
|
Income taxes
|
(189)
|
(7.3%)
|
(125)
|
(5.4%)
|
|
Net income
|
288
|
11.1%
|
206
|
9.0%
|
Consolidated Balance Sheet
|
As of 31 December
|
2009
|
|
2008
|
|
|
E in millions
|
% Assets
|
E in millions
|
% Assets
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
500
|
9.4%
|
450
|
8.5%
|
|
Property & equipment:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
700
|
13.1%
|
700
|
13.2%
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
6,000
|
112.1%
|
5,800
|
109.4%
|
|
Total property & equipment
|
6,700
|
125.2%
|
6,500
|
122.6%
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(1,850)
|
(34.6%)
|
(1,650)
|
(31.1%)
|
|
Net property & equipment
|
4,850
|
90.6%
|
4,850
|
91.5%
|
|
Total assets
|
5,350
|
100.0%
|
5,300
|
100.0%
|
|
liabilities and shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
480
|
9.0%
|
430
|
8.1%
|
|
Long-term debt
|
1,030
|
19.3%
|
1,080
|
20.4%
|
|
Other long-term provisions and liabilities
|
1,240
|
23.1%
|
1,440
|
27.2%
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,750
|
51.4%
|
2,950
|
55.7%
|
|
shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock and paid-in-surplus
|
760
|
14.2%
|
760
|
14.3%
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,888
|
35.3%
|
1,600
|
30.2%
|
|
Other comprehensive losses
|
(48)
|
(0.9%)
|
(10)
|
(0.2%)
|
Based on Exhibits A and B, the best estimate of the average remaining useful life of the company’s plant and equipment at the end of 2009 is:
A. 20.75 years.
B. 24.25 years.
C. 30.00 years.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Melanie Hart, CFA, is a transportation analyst. Hart has been asked to write a research report on Altai Mountain Rail Company (AMRC). Like other companies in the railroad industry, AMRC’s operations are capital intensive, with significant investments in such long-lived tangible assets as property, plant, and equipment. In November of 2008, AMRC’s board of directors hired a new team to manage the company. In reviewing the company’s 2009 annual report, Hart is concerned about some of the accounting choices that the new management has made. These choices differ from those of the previous management and from common industry practice. Hart has highlighted the following statements from the company’s annual report:
|
Statement 1:
|
“In 2009, AMRC spent significant amounts on track replacement and similar improvements. AMRC expensed rather than capitalized a significant proportion of these expenditures.”
|
|
Statement 2:
|
“AMRC uses the straight-line method of depreciation for both financial and tax reporting purposes to account for plant and equipment.”
|
|
Statement 3:
|
“In 2009, AMRC recognized an impairment loss of €50 million on a fleet of locomotives. The impairment loss was reported as ‘other income’ in the income statement and reduced the carrying amount of the assets on the balance sheet.”
|
|
Statement 4:
|
“AMRC acquires the use of many of its assets, including a large portion of its fleet of rail cars, under long-term lease contracts. In 2009, AMRC acquired the use of equipment with a fair value of €200 million under 20-year lease contracts. These leases were classified as operating leases. Prior to 2009, most of these lease contracts were classified as finance leases.”
|
Exhibits A and B contain AMRC’s 2009 consolidated income statement and balance sheet. AMRC prepares its financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards.
EXHIBIT A Consolidated Statement of Income
|
For the Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
|
2008
|
|
|
E in millions
|
% Revenues
|
E in millions
|
% Revenues
|
|
Operating revenues
|
2,600
|
100.0%
|
2,300
|
100.0%
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
(200)
|
(7.7%)
|
(190)
|
(8.3%)
|
|
Lease payments
|
(210)
|
(8.1%)
|
(195)
|
(8.5%)
|
|
Other operating expense
|
(1,590)
|
(61.1%)
|
(1,515)
|
(65.9%)
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
(2,000)
|
(76.9%)
|
(1,900)
|
(82.6%)
|
|
Operating income
|
600
|
23.1%
|
400
|
17.4%
|
|
Other income
|
(50)
|
(1.9%)
|
—
|
0.0%
|
|
Interest expense
|
(73)
|
(2.8%)
|
(69)
|
(3.0%)
|
|
Income before taxes
|
477
|
18.4%
|
331
|
14.4%
|
|
Income taxes
|
(189)
|
(7.3%)
|
(125)
|
(5.4%)
|
|
Net income
|
288
|
11.1%
|
206
|
9.0%
|
Consolidated Balance Sheet
|
As of 31 December
|
2009
|
|
2008
|
|
|
E in millions
|
% Assets
|
E in millions
|
% Assets
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
500
|
9.4%
|
450
|
8.5%
|
|
Property & equipment:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
700
|
13.1%
|
700
|
13.2%
|
|
Plant & equipment
|
6,000
|
112.1%
|
5,800
|
109.4%
|
|
Total property & equipment
|
6,700
|
125.2%
|
6,500
|
122.6%
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(1,850)
|
(34.6%)
|
(1,650)
|
(31.1%)
|
|
Net property & equipment
|
4,850
|
90.6%
|
4,850
|
91.5%
|
|
Total assets
|
5,350
|
100.0%
|
5,300
|
100.0%
|
|
liabilities and shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
480
|
9.0%
|
430
|
8.1%
|
|
Long-term debt
|
1,030
|
19.3%
|
1,080
|
20.4%
|
|
Other long-term provisions and liabilities
|
1,240
|
23.1%
|
1,440
|
27.2%
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,750
|
51.4%
|
2,950
|
55.7%
|
|
shareholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock and paid-in-surplus
|
760
|
14.2%
|
760
|
14.3%
|
|
Retained earnings
|
1,888
|
35.3%
|
1,600
|
30.2%
|
|
Other comprehensive losses
|
(48)
|
(0.9%)
|
(10)
|
(0.2%)
|
With respect to Statement 4, if AMRC had used its old classification method for its leases instead of its new classification method, its 2009 total asset turnover ratio would most likely be:
A. lower.
B. higher.
C. the same.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- The following information pertains to Entiguan Sports, a hypothetical developer of products used to treat sports-related injuries. (The treatment of items for accounting and tax purposes is based on fictitious accounting and tax standards and is not specific to a particular jurisdiction.) Calculate the tax base and carrying amount for each item.
- 1. Dividends receivable: On its balance sheet, Entiguan Sports reports dividends of €1 million receivable from a subsidiary. Assume that dividends are not taxable.
- 2. Development costs: Entiguan Sports capitalized development costs of €3 million during the year. Entiguan amortized €500,000 of this amount during the year. For tax purposes amortization of 25 percent per year is allowed.
- 3. Research costs: Entiguan incurred €500,000 in research costs, which were all expensed in the current fiscal year for financial reporting purposes. Assume that applicable tax legislation requires research costs to be expensed over a four-year period rather than all in one year.
- 4. Accounts receivable: Included on the income statement of Entiguan Sports is a provision for doubtful debt of €125,000. The accounts receivable amount reflected on the balance sheet, after taking the provision into account, amounts to €1,500,000. The tax authorities allow a deduction of 25 percent of the gross amount for doubtful debt.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Entiguan Sports for the 2006 year-end. The treatment of items for accounting and tax purposes is based on fictitious accounting and tax standards and is not specific to a particular jurisdiction. Calculate the tax base and carrying amount for each item.
1. Donations: Entiguan Sports made donations of €100,000 in the current fiscal year. The donations were expensed for financial reporting purposes, but are not tax deductible based on applicable tax legislation.
2. Interest received in advance: Entiguan Sports received in advance interest of €300,000. The interest is taxed because tax authorities recognize the interest to accrue to the company (part of taxable income) on the date of receipt.
3. Rent received in advance: Entiguan recognized €10 million for rent received in advance from a lessee for an unused warehouse building. Rent received in advance is deferred for accounting purposes but taxed on a cash basis.
4. Loan: Entiguan Sports secured a long-term loan for €550,000 in the current fiscal year. Interest is charged at 13.5 percent per annum and is payable at the end of each fiscal year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the summarized balance sheet of X Ltd. as on 31 March 2011:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Equity Share
|
15,00,000
|
Sundry Assets
|
21,00,000
|
|
Capital
|
6,00,000
|
Bank
|
7,50,000
|
|
Redeemable Pref.
|
4,50,000
|
|
|
|
Share Capital
|
3,00,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
|
|
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
|
|
|
|
|
28,50,000
|
|
28,50,000
|
On that date, the preference shares had to be redeemed. For this purpose 30,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each were issued as Rs.11. The company also issued 9% debentures totaling Rs.4,50,000. The shares and debentures were immediately subscribed and paid for. The preference shares were duly redeemed. You are required to pass journal entries in the books of X Ltd. and prepare the balance sheet after redemption.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Ltd. has an authorized capital of Rs.40,00,000 comprising 10,000 8% redeemable preference shares of Rs.100 each and 3,00,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each. The preference shares are redeemable on 15 April 2011 at a premium of 10%. The summarized balance sheet of the company as on 31 March 2011 was as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Sundry assets
|
17,50,000
|
|
Authorized:
|
30,00,000
|
Investment
|
2,00,000
|
|
3,00,000 Equity
|
|
Bank
|
3,60,000
|
|
Shares of Rs. 10
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
10,0008%
|
|
|
|
|
Redeemable pref. Shares of
|
10,00,000
|
|
|
|
Rs.100 Each
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-Up Capital:
|
|
|
|
|
1,25,000 Equity
|
12,50,000
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 10
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
5,0008%
|
5,00,000
|
|
|
|
Redeemable
|
|
|
|
|
Pref. Shares of
|
|
|
|
|
Rs. 100 Each
|
|
|
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
General Reserve
|
1,50,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
1,60,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
2,00,00
|
|
|
|
|
23,10,000
|
|
23,10,000
|
The necessary resolutions were duly passed and the following transactions were carried through:
- To provide cash for repayment of redeemable pref. shares, the investments were sold for Rs.2,50,000 and 25,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each were issued to existing shareholders at 20% premium. All moneys were duly received.
- The preference shares were duly redeemed. You are required to pass necessary journal entries in the books of ABC Ltd. and prepare the amended balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vijay Ltd. had issued 8,00,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each fully paid and 48,000 redeemable preference shares of Rs.100 each fully paid. On 31 March 2011, the profit and loss account showed an undistributed profit of Rs.8,00,000 and the general reserve account stood at Rs.22,40,000. On 1 April 2011, the directors decided to issue 24,000 6% preference shares of Rs.100 each and to redeem the existing preference shares at Rs.110 each utilizing as less profits as possible for the purpose. You are required to pass necessary journal entries in the books of Vijay Ltd.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Rock Fort Ltd. issued 4,000 8% redeemable preference shares of Rs.100 each at par on 1 January 2004, redeemable at the option of the company on or after 31 December 2010,partly or fully.
Redemptions were made out of profits as follows:
- 600 shares on 31 December 2010 at par
- 800 shares on 31 March 2011 at 10% premium
- Remaining shares on 30 June 2011 at a premium of 5% by making a fresh issue of 2,000 equity shares of Rs.100 each at a premium of 10%On 30 June 2011, the company also decided to capitalize 50% of its CRR by issuing bonus shares ofRs.100 each fully paid at a premium of Rs.25 per share. You are required to pass the necessary journal entries in the books of The Rock Fort Ltd.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Krishan Ltd. has an authorized capital of Rs.5,00,000 comprising 1,00,000 9% redeemable cumulative preference shares of Rs.1 each and 4,00,000 ordinary shares of Rs.1 each. The preference shares are redeemable on 1 April 2011 at Rs.1.05 per share. The summarized balance sheet of the company as on 31 December 2010 was as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Sundry assets
|
3,93,400
|
|
Issued and Fully
|
|
Investments
|
28,000
|
|
Paid Up
|
|
Bank Balance
|
56,000
|
|
Preference
|
1,00,000
|
|
|
|
Shares
|
|
|
|
|
Ordinary shares
|
2,00,000
|
|
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
19,000
|
|
|
|
General Reserve
|
40,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
85,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry
|
|
|
|
|
Creditors
|
33,400
|
|
|
|
|
4,77,400
|
|
4,77400
|
The necessary resolutions were duly passed and the following transactions carried through on the dates stated:
- All the investments were sold for Rs.36,000 ,40,000 ordinary shares of Rs.1 each were issued to the existing shareholders at Rs.1.25 per share payable in full forthwith and duly paid
On 1 April 2011, in order to provide cash towards the redemption of preference shares, the above two took place. On 30 June 2011, the preference shares were duly redeemed and on 31 August 2011, a bonus issue of ordinary shares was made at the rate of one new share for every ten shares held. You are required to pass necessary journal entries and prepare balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the summarized balance sheet of a company as on 31 March 2011:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Fixed assets
|
34,00,000
|
|
4,00,000 Equity
|
|
Investments
|
3,50,000
|
|
Shares of Rs.10
|
|
Cash at Bank
|
3,50,000
|
|
Each Fully Paid
|
40,00,000
|
Other Current
|
29,00,000
|
|
60,0008%
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Redeemable
|
|
|
|
|
Preference
|
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 20
|
|
|
|
|
Each, Fully Paid
|
12,00,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
7,00,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
11,00,000
|
|
|
|
|
70,00,000
|
|
70,00.000
|
On 1 April 2011, the company decided to redeem preference shares at a premium of 5%. In order to facilitate the redemption of preference shares, it was decided:
- To sell the investments for Rs.3,00,000
- To finance part of the redemption from the company’s funds subject to leaving balance of P&L A/c of Rs.2,00,000
- To issue sufficient equity shares of Rs.10 each at a premium of Rs.2 per share to raise the balance of funds required
The preference shares were redeemed on due date and equity shares were fully subscribed. You are required to pass necessary journal entries and prepare the balance sheet after redemption.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the summarized balance sheet of a company as on 31 December 2010:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Fixed assets
|
2,60,000
|
|
Authorized:
|
|
Current assets
|
1,61,000
|
|
3,500 Equity
|
3,50,000
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 100
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
1,0009%
|
1,00,000
|
|
|
|
Redeemable
|
|
|
|
|
Preference Shares of Z 100 Each
|
|
|
|
|
Issued &
|
|
|
|
|
Subscribed: 1,950
|
1,95,000
|
|
|
|
Equity Shares of
|
|
|
|
|
Z 100 Each Fully
|
|
|
|
|
Paid
|
|
|
|
|
8009%
|
80,000
|
|
|
|
Redeemable Pref.
|
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 100
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
Reserves &
|
|
|
|
|
Surplus:
|
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
1,00,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
46,000
|
|
|
|
|
4,21,000
|
|
4,21,000
|
The preference shares were redeemed on 1 January 2011 at a premium of Rs.20 per share, the whereabouts of the holders of 60 such shares not being known. At the same time, a bonus issue of equity shares was made at par, one share being issued for every three shares held out of the capital redemption reserve A/c.
You are required to pass the journal entries to record the above transactions and prepare the balance sheet after redemption:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance sheet of M/s Joshi Ltd. as on 31 March 2011 is as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Fixed assets
|
66,00,000
|
|
issued, subscribed and
|
|
Current Assets
|
24,00,000
|
|
Fully Paid Up
|
|
|
|
|
30,000 Ordinary
|
30,00,000
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 100
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
15,000
|
15,00,000
|
|
|
|
Preference
|
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 100
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
3,00,000
|
|
|
|
Securities premium A/c
|
3,00,000
|
|
|
|
General Reserve
|
6,00,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
3,00,000
|
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
30,00,000
|
|
|
|
|
90,00,000
|
|
90,00,000
|
The preference shares are to be redeemed at 10% premium. Fresh issue of equity shares is to be made to the extent required under the Company’s Act for the purpose of this redemption. The shortfall in funds for the purpose of redemption after utilizing the proceeds of the fresh issue are to be met by taking a bank loan. Show journal entries.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the summarized balance sheet ofAZ Ltd.
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Paid-Up Capital:
|
|
Sundry assets
|
12,80,000
|
|
3,0009% Pref.
|
3,00,000
|
Cash at bank
|
1,42,500
|
|
Shares of Rs. 100
|
|
|
|
|
Each Fully Paid
|
|
|
|
|
1,500 7% Pref.
|
1,12,500
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 100
|
|
|
|
|
Each,Rs.75 Paid
|
|
|
|
|
Up
|
|
|
|
|
7,500 Equity
|
7,50,000
|
|
|
|
Shares of 100
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
Securities
|
|
|
|
|
Premium
|
30,000
|
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
1,80,000
|
|
|
|
|
14,22,500
|
|
14,22,500
|
It was decided to redeem both the classes of preference shares at a premium of 5%. The company issued equity shares of Rs.100 each at a premium of 10% as were necessary to provide cash for redemption. The issue was fully subscribed and all the moneys were received. You are required to give journal entries and prepare the balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the summarized balance sheet of Sri Sai Ltd. as on 31 December 2010:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Sundry Assets
|
49,60,000
|
|
Authorized
|
|
|
|
|
1,20,0009%
|
12,00,000
|
Bank
|
16,80,000
|
|
Redeemable
|
|
|
|
|
Preference
|
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 10 each
|
|
|
|
|
4,00,000 Equity
|
40,00,000
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 10
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-Up Capital:
|
|
|
|
|
88,0009%
|
8,80,000
|
|
|
|
Redeemable
|
|
|
|
|
Preference
|
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 10
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
2,40,000 Equity
|
24,00,000
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 10
|
|
|
|
|
Each Fully Paid
|
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
16,00,000
|
|
|
|
Reserve Fund
|
16,00,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
1,60,000
|
|
|
|
|
66,40,000
|
|
66,40,000
|
On 7 January 2011, the preference shares were redeemed at a premium of Rs.4 per share. The Company could not trace the holders of 9,600 preference shares. On 10 January 2011, a bonus issue of one fully paid equity share for four shares held was made. Show the journal entries to record the above transactions and also prepare balance sheet, after redemption.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is extracted from the balance sheet of Full Moon Ltd as on 30 December 2010
|
Particulars
|
|
|
Authorized Share Capital:
|
|
|
20,000 9% Redeemable Preference
|
20,00,000
|
|
Shares of Rs.100 Each
|
|
|
4,00,000 Equity Shares of Rs.10 Each
|
40,00,000
|
|
Paid-Up Capital:
|
|
|
10,000 9% Redeemable Preference Shares of Rs.100 Each
|
10,00,000
|
|
3,20,000 Equity Shares of Rs.10 Each, Rs.7.50 Paid Up
|
24,00,000
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
4,00,000
|
|
General Reserve
|
14,00,000
|
|
Securities Premium
|
48,000
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
5,00,000
|
On 6 January 2011, the preference shares were redeemed at a premium of 5% for the purpose of redemption, the company decided to:
Issue 16,000 6% debentures of Rs.100 each
- Convert the partly paid up equity shares into fully paid up without requiring the shareholders to pay for the same
- Issue of fully paid rights shares of Rs.10 each at a premium of Rs.2 per share in proportion of one share for every four shares held
Give necessary journal entries to record the above transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is an extract from the balance sheet of a company as on 31 March 2011:
|
Particulars
|
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
20,00,000
|
|
40,000 9% Preference Shares of Rs.50
|
|
|
|
Fully Paid
|
|
|
|
2,00,000 Equity Shares of Rs.10 Each
|
15,00,000
|
|
|
Rs.7.50 Per Share
|
|
|
|
Called Up
|
|
|
|
Less: Calls Unpaid
|
15,000
|
14,85,000
|
|
Securities Premium Account
|
|
1,00,000
|
|
General Reserve
|
|
12,00,000
|
|
Calls in Advance (Final Call On Equity Shares)
|
|
5,000
|
On 1 April 2011, the Board of Directors decide the following:
- The fully paid preference shares are to be redeemed at a premium of 5% in May 2011, and for the purpose, 1,00,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each are to be issued at par to be paid for in full on application in April 2011
- The final call of Rs.2.50 per share is to be made in July 2011
- The 2,000 equity shares owned by X, an existing shareholder, who failed to pay the allotment money of Rs.2.50 per call, were forfeited in the month of June 2011
The above decisions were duly complied with according to the time schedule laid down. The amount due on the issue of fresh equity shares and on final call were duly received except from Y, who has failed to pay the final call money also. Those shares of Y were forfeited in the month of August 2011. Of the total shares forfeited, 3,000 were issued to Z in September 2011, credited as fully paid at Rs.9 per share, the whole of X’s shares being included.
You are required to pass journal entries in the books of the company to record these transactions and show the relevant items on the liabilities side of the balance sheet (necessary extracts) according to the form prescribed by the Companies Act, 1956. Assume that the resources required for payment are available.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A financial analyst is studying the income statement effect of two alternative depreciation methods for a recently acquired piece of equipment. She gathers the following information about the equipment’s expected production life and use:
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
Year 3
|
Year 4
|
Year 5
|
Total
|
|
Units of production
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
10,500
|
Compared with the units-of-production method of depreciation, if the company uses the straight-line method to depreciate the equipment, its net income in Year 1 will most likely be:
A. lower.
B. higher.
C. the same.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Juan Martinez, CFO of VIRMIN, S.A., is selecting the depreciation method to use for a new machine. The machine has an expected useful life of six years. Production is expected to be relatively low initially but to increase over time. The method chosen for tax reporting must be the same as the method used for financial reporting. If Martinez wants to minimize tax payments in the first year of the machine’s life, which of the following depreciation methods is Martinez most likely to use?
A. Straight-line method
B. Units-of-production method
C. Double-declining balance method
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Miguel Rodriguez of MARIO, S.A., an Uruguayan corporation, is computing the depreciation expense of a piece of manufacturing equipment for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2009. The equipment was acquired on 1 January 2009. Rodriguez gathers the following information (currency in Uruguayan pesos, UYP):
|
Cost of the equipment
|
UYP 1,200,000
|
|
Estimated residual value
|
UYP 200,000
|
|
Expected useful life
|
8 years
|
|
Total productive capacity
|
800,000 units
|
|
Production in FY 2009
|
135,000 units
|
|
Expected production for the next 7 years
|
95,000 units each yea
|
If MARIO uses the straight-line method, the amount of depreciation expense on MARIO’s income statement related to the manufacturing equipment is closest to:
A. 125,000.
B. 150,000.
C. 168,750.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Miguel Rodriguez of MARIO, S.A., an Uruguayan corporation, is computing the depreciation expense of a piece of manufacturing equipment for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2009. The equipment was acquired on 1 January 2009. Rodriguez gathers the following information (currency in Uruguayan pesos, UYP):
|
Cost of the equipment
|
UYP 1,200,000
|
|
Estimated residual value
|
UYP 200,000
|
|
Expected useful life
|
8 years
|
|
Total productive capacity
|
800,000 units
|
|
Production in FY 2009
|
135,000 units
|
|
Expected production for the next 7 years
|
95,000 units each yea
|
If MARIO uses the units-of-production method, the amount of depreciation expense (in UYP) on MARIO’s income statement related to the manufacturing equipment is closest to:
A. 118,750.
B. 168,750.
C. 202,500.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst in the finance department of BOOLDO, S.A., a French corporation, is computing the amortization of a customer list, an intangible asset, for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2009. She gathers the following information about the asset:
|
Acquisition cost
|
€2,300,000
|
|
Acquisition date
|
1 January 2008
|
|
Expected residual value at time of acquisition
|
€500,000
|
|
The customer list is expected to result in extra sales for three years after acquisition. The present value of these expected extra sales exceeds the cost of the list.
|
If the analyst uses the straight-line method, the amount of accumulated amortization related to the customer list as of 31 December 2009 is closest to:
A. €600,000.
B. €1,200,000.
C. €1,533,333.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A financial analyst is analyzing the amortization of a product patent acquired by MAKETTI S.p.A., an Italian corporation. He gathers the following information about the patent:
|
Acquisition cost
|
€5,800,000
|
|
Acquisition date
|
1 January 2009
|
|
Patent expiration date
|
31 December 2015
|
|
Total plant capacity of patented product
|
40,000 units per year
|
|
Production of patented product in fiscal year ended 31 December 2009
|
20,000 units
|
|
Expected production of patented product during life of the patent
|
175,000 units
|
If the analyst uses the units-of-production method, the amortization expense on the patent for fiscal year 2009 is closest to:
A. €414,286.
B. €662,857.
C. €828,571.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
MARU S.A. de C.V., a Mexican corporation that follows IFRS, has elected to use the revaluation model for its property, plant, and equipment. One of MARU’s machines was purchased for 2,500,000 Mexican pesos (MXN) at the beginning of the fiscal year ended 31 March 2010. As of 31 March 2010, the machine has a fair value of MXN 3,000,000. Should MARU show a profit for the revaluation of the machine?
A. Yes.
B. No, because this revaluation is recorded directly in equity.
C. No, because value increases resulting from revaluation can never be recognized as a profit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst is studying the impairment of the manufacturing equipment of WLP Corp., a U.K.-based corporation that follows IFRS. He gathers the following information about the equipment:
|
Fair value
|
£16,800,000
|
|
Costs to sell
|
£800,000
|
|
Value in use
|
£14,500,000
|
|
Net carrying amount
|
£19,100,000
|
The amount of the impairment loss on WLP Corp.’s income statement related to its manufacturing equipment is closest to:
A. £2,300,000.
B. £3,100,000.
C. £4,600,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Minimum fresh issue of shares at a discount The balance sheet of M/s Laxmi Ltd. as on 31 March 2010 was as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
2,0008%Redeemable Preference Shares
|
|
Sundry Assets
|
9,00,000
|
|
of 100 Each Fully Paid
|
2,00,000
|
Cash at Bank
|
2,00,000
|
|
4,0006%Redeemable Preference Shares of 50 Each, 25 Per Share Paid up
|
1,00,000
|
|
|
|
40,000 Equity Shares of Rs.10 Each
|
4,00,000
|
|
|
|
Reserves & Surplus:
|
|
|
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
1,20,000
|
|
|
|
Securities Premium
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
Dividend Equalization Reserve
|
1,10,000
|
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
1,50,000
|
|
|
|
|
11,00,000
|
|
11,00,000
|
The company decided to redeem the preference shares at a premium of 5%. To enable the redemption to be carried out, the company decided to issue after carrying out, the necessary formalities required under law, sufficient number of new equity shares at a discount of 10%. You are required to give the necessary journal entries and prepare the balance sheet soon after the redemption
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Forfeiture and re-issue of redeemable preference shares Following is the balance sheet of M/s Thomas Co. Ltd. as on 31 March 2011 in a summarized form:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share capital:
|
|
Bank
|
1,20,000
|
|
Paid-Up Share Capital 4,000 Equity
|
4,00,000
|
Other Assets
|
8,25,000
|
|
Shares of Rs. 100 Each Fully Paid
|
|
|
|
|
2,000 8%Redeemable Preference Shares of Rs. 100 Each: 2,00,000
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Calls in Arrears of 100 Shares) 5.000
|
1,95,000
|
|
|
|
Reserves & Surplus:
|
|
|
|
|
General Reserve
|
2,50,000
|
|
|
|
Development Rebate Reserve
|
40,000
|
|
|
|
Other Liabilities
|
60,000
|
|
|
|
|
9,45,000
|
|
9,45,000
|
The redeemable preference shares were redeemed on the following basis:
- Further 1,500 equity shares were issued at a premium of 10%.
- Expenses of fresh issue of shares Rs.4000.
- Out of 100 preference shares, holders of 80 shares paid the call money before the date of redemption. The balance of 20 shares were forfeited and they were re-issued as fully paid shares on receipt ofRs.1,500 before redemption.
- Preference shares were redeemed at a premium of 10% and share premium was utilized in full for this purpose. You are required to pass journal entries and prepare summarized balance sheet after redemption.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Redemption of preference shares rights issue The balance sheet of Veera & Co. Ltd. as on 31 March 2011 disclosed the following data:
|
Authorized Share Capital:
|
|
|
3,000 9% Redeemable Preference Share of Rs.100 Each
|
3,00,000
|
|
10,000 Equity Shares of Rs.100 Each
|
10,00,000
|
|
Paid-Up Capital:
|
|
|
1,500 9% Redeemable Preference Shares of Rs.100 Each
|
1,50,000
|
|
7,500 Equity Shares of Rs.100 Each, Rs.80 Paid Up
|
6,00,000
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
70,000
|
|
General Reserve
|
1,80,000
|
|
Securities Premium
|
10,000
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
75,000
|
On 6 April 2011, the preference shares were to be redeemed at a premium of 10% for the purpose of redemption, the company decided to:
- Issue 2,500 10% Debentures of Rs.100 each
- Convert the partly paid-up equity shares into fully paid up without requiring the shareholders to pay for the same
- Issue fully paid rights shares of Rs.100 each at a premium of 20 % per share in the proportion of one share for every five shares held You are required to give necessary journal entries to record the above transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.A company cannot return its share capital to the shareholders according to Section 100 of the Companies Act.
2.Redeemable preference shares can be redeemed if such shares are partly paid.
3.Redeemable preference shares can be redeemed out of capital reserve.
4.Premium on redemption of preference shares can be provided out of securities premium A/c.
5.Creation of, or transfer of, amount to capital redemption reserve need not be necessary for redemption.
6.CRR can be utilized to issue fully paid bonus shares to equity shareholders.
7.Redemption of preference shares will reduce the authorized capital.
8.A company cannot issue preference shares which can be redeemed beyond a period of 20 years.
9.Profits available for dividend relate to revenue profits of a company.
10.The term “proceeds” represents the amount received including the amount of share premium on the new issueof shares.
11.Premium on redemption is a capital loss.
12.Bonus shares involve cash flow immediately.
13.Depreciation reserve is a capital profit.
14.Dividend equalization reserve is a capital profit.
15.Companies exhaust all the permissible reserves before launching new issue of shares for redemption.
16.The proceeds of fresh issue of debentures can be utilized for redemption of redeemable preference shares.
17.The amount due to “untraceable shareholders” should be first recorded in the books of journal.
18.Premium on issue of debentures can be utilized to pay premium on redemption of preference shares.
19.Workmen’s compensation fund can be transferred to CRR at the time of redemption.
20.CRR, already existing in the books, can be to utilized as profits available for dividend.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.A company limited by shares, can issue redeemable preference shares, only if it is authorized by its_______.
2.Redeemable preference shares cannot be redeemed unless they are_______.
3.Redeemable preference shares can be redeemed either out of the of _______ the company or out of proceeds of _______.
4.Premium on redemption of preference has to be provided either out of the _______ of the company or out of the _______.
5.An amount equal to the face value of the preference shares to be redeemed must be transferred to _______.
6.Capital redemption reserve can be utilized to issue fully paid _______ to equity shareholders.
7.Redemption of preference shares will not _______ the authorized.
8.U/s 80-5 (A) of the Companies Act, a company cannot issue irredeemable preference shares or shares which can be redeemed beyond a period of _______ years.
9.All the _______ profits are not included for the purpose of redemption.
10.After redemption, CRR will take the place of _______ share capital.
11.Bonus shares will not involve any _______ immediately.
12.Dividend equalization reserve is _______ profit.
13.Profit prior to incorporation is _______ profit.
14.Workmen’s compensation fund is _______ profit.
15.Securities premium A/c is _______ profit.
16.At times, “current assets” include (presumption) _______.
17.In case of calls-in-arrears, redeemable preference shares cannot be _______.
18.ABC Ltd. has issued 5,000 equity shares of Rs.100 each at a premium of Rs.20 each. For redemption, the amount that would be taken as “proceeds of fresh issue” is _______.
19.XYZ Ltd. has issued 5,000 8% preference shares of Rs.100 at a discount of 20% the amount for “proceeds of fresh issue” would be _______.
20.At times, reserve fund is also allowed to be transferred to _______.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The balance sheet of “YE” Ltd. on 31 March 2011 was as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Sundry Assets
|
39,20,000
|
|
8,0006%
|
8,00,000
|
Cash At Banks
|
16,80,00
|
|
Redeemable pref. Shares of
|
|
|
|
|
Rs. 100 Each Fully
|
|
|
|
|
Paid
|
|
|
|
|
3,20,000 Equity
|
32,00,000
|
|
|
|
Shares of Rs. 10
|
|
|
|
|
Each Fully Paid
|
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
10,40,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
5,60,000
|
|
|
|
|
56,00,000
|
|
56,00,00
|
On that date, the preference shares were redeemed at a premium of 10%. You are required to pass journal entries and give the amended balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following exhibit presents an excerpt from the annual report for the year ended 31 March 2009 of Daejan Holdings PLC (London: DJAN), a property company headquartered in the United Kingdom.
EXHIBIT 10-11 Excerpt from the Consolidated Income Statements at 31 March (Currency in £ thousands)
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Gross rental income
|
83,918
|
73,590
|
|
Service charge income
|
12,055
|
13,362
|
|
Total Rental and Related Income from Investment Properties
|
95,973
|
86,952
|
|
Property operating expenses
|
(53,470)
|
(46,464)
|
|
Net Rental and Related Income from Investment Properties
|
42,503
|
40,488
|
|
Profit on Disposal of Investment Properties
|
6,758
|
6,578
|
|
Valuation gains on investment properties
|
6,646
|
46,646
|
|
Valuation losses on investment properties
|
(268,249)
|
(25,982)
|
|
Net Valuation (Losses)/Gains on Investment Properties
|
(261,603)
|
20,664
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
(12,039)
|
(8,629)
|
|
Net Operating (Loss)/Profit before Net Financing Costs
|
(224,381)
|
59,101
|
1. What was the primary cause of the company’s £224,381 thousand net operating loss before net financing costs for the year ended 31 March 2009?
2. What was the primary cause of the company’s £59,101 thousand net operating profit before financing costs for the year ended 31 March 2008?
3. What was the primary cause of the change from a £59,101 thousand net operating profit in 2008 to a £224,381 thousand net operating loss in 2009?
4. Do the valuation gains and losses on investment properties indicate that the properties have been sold?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CEC Entertainment, Inc. (NYSE: CEC) has significant commitments under capital (finance) and operating leases. Following is selected financial statement information and note disclosure to the financial statements for the company.
Commitments and Contingencies Footnote from CEC’s Financial Statements:
8. Commitments and contingencies:
The company leases certain restaurants and related property and equipment under operating and capital leases. All leases require the company to pay property taxes, insurance, and maintenance of the leased assets. The leases generally have initial terms of 10 to 20 years with various renewal options.
Scheduled annual maturities of the obligations for capital and operating leases as of 28 December 2008 are as follows (US$ thousands):
|
Years
|
Capital
|
Operating
|
|
2009
|
$1,683
|
$66,849
|
|
2010
|
1,683
|
66,396
|
|
2011
|
1,683
|
66,558
|
|
2012
|
1,600
|
65,478
|
|
2013
|
1,586
|
63,872
|
|
Thereafter
|
9,970
|
474,754
|
|
Minimum future lease payments
|
18,205
|
$803,907
|
|
Less amounts representing interest
|
(5,997)
|
|
|
Present value of future minimum lease payments
|
12,208
|
|
|
Less current portion
|
(806)
|
|
|
Long-term finance lease obligation
|
$11,402
|
|
Selected Financial Statement Information for CEC:
|
28 December 2008
|
30 December 2007
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$608,854
|
$519,900
|
|
shareholders equity
|
$128,586
|
$217,993
|
1. A. Calculate the implicit interest rate used to discount the “scheduled annual maturities” under capital leases to obtain the “present value of future minimum lease payments” of $12,208 disclosed in the Commitments and Contingencies footnote. To simplify the calculation, assume that future minimum lease payments on the company’s capital leases for the “thereafter” lump sum are as follows: $1,586 on 31 December of each year from 2014 to 2019, and $454 in 2020. Assume annual lease payments are made at the end of each year.
B. Why is the implicit interest rate estimate in Part A important in assessing a company’s leases?
2. If the operating lease agreements had been treated as capital leases, what additional amount would be reported as a lease obligation on the balance sheet at 28 December 2008? To simplify the calculation, assume that future minimum lease payments on the company’s operating leases for the “thereafter” lump sum are as follows: $63,872 on 31 December each year from 2014 to 2020, and $27,650 in 2021. Based on the implicit interest rate obtained in Part 1A, use 7.245 percent to discount future cash flows on the operating leases.
3. What would be the effect on the debt-to-equity ratio of treating all operating leases as finance leases (i.e., the ratio of total liabilities to equity) at 28 December 2008?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume two similar (hypothetical) companies, DIRFIN Inc. and LOPER Inc., own a similar piece of machinery and make similar agreements to lease the machinery on 1 January Year 1. In the lease contract, each company requires four annual payments of €28,679 starting on 1 January Year 1. The useful life of the machine is four years and its salvage value is zero. DIRFIN Inc. accounts for the lease as a direct financing lease while LOPER has determined the lease is an operating lease. (For simplicity, this example assumes that the accounting rules governing these hypothetical companies do not mandate either type of lease.) The present value of lease payments and fair value of the equipment is €100,000.
At the beginning of Year 1, before entering into the lease agreement, both companies reported liabilities of €100,000 and equity of €200,000. Assets on hand include the asset about to be leased. Each year the companies receive total revenues of €50,000 cash, apart from any revenue earned on the lease. Assume the companies have a tax rate of 30 percent, and use the same accounting for financial and tax purposes. Both companies’ discount rate is 10 percent. In order to focus only on the differences in the type of lease, assume that neither company incurs revenues or expenses other than those associated with the lease and that neither invests excess cash.
1. Which company reports higher expenses/net income in Year 1? Over the four years?
2. Which company reports higher total cash flow over the four years? Cash flow from operations?
3. Based on ROE, how do the two companies’ profitability measures compare?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
JOOVI Inc. has recently purchased and installed a new machine for its manufacturing plant. The company incurred the following costs:
|
Purchase price
|
$12,980
|
|
Freight and insurance
|
$1,200
|
|
Installation
|
$700
|
|
Testing
|
$100
|
|
Maintenance staff training costs
|
$500
|
The total cost of the machine to be shown on JOOVI’s balance sheet is closest to:
A. $14,180.
B. $14,980.
C. $15,480.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BAURU, S.A., a Brazilian corporation, borrows capital from a local bank to finance the construction of its manufacturing plant. The loan has the following conditions:
|
Borrowing date
|
1 January 2009
|
|
Amount borrowed
|
500 million Brazilian real (BRL)
|
|
Annual interest rate
|
14 percent
|
|
Term of the loan
|
3 years
|
|
Payment method
|
Annual payment of interest only. Principal amortization is due at the end of the loan term.
|
The construction of the plant takes two years, during which time BAURU earned BRL 10 million by temporarily investing the loan proceeds. Which of the following is the amount of interest related to the plant construction (in BRL million) that can be capitalized in BAURU’s balance sheet?
A. 130
B. 140
C. 210
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
After reading the financial statements and footnotes of a company that follows IFRS, an analyst identified the following intangible assets:
- product patent expiring in 40 years
- copyright with no expiration date
- goodwill acquired 2 years ago in a business combination
Which of these assets is an intangible asset with a finite useful life?
|
|
Product Patent
|
Copyright
|
Goodwill
|
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
Yes
|
No
|
No
|
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In an integrated audit, which of the following lead(s) to an adverse opinion on internal control?
|
Material weaknesses
|
Significant deficiencies
|
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which is correct concerning the external auditors’ use of the work of others in an audit of internal control performed for a public company?
a. It is not allowed.
b. The work of internal auditors may be used, but only when those internal auditors report directly to the audit committee.
c. Ordinarily the work of internal auditors and others is used primarily in low-risk areas.
d. There is no limitation and is likely to reduce auditor liability since the auditors will then share legal responsibility with those who have performed the service.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is correct when applying a top-down approach to identify controls to test in an integrated audit?
a. For certain assertions, strong entity-level controls may allow the auditor to omit additional testing beyond those controls.
b. Starting at the top—controls over specific assertions—the auditor should link to major accounts and reporting items.
c. The goal is to focus on details of accounting controls, while avoiding consideration of overall entity-level controls.
d. The goal is to focus on all controls related to assertions, omitting consideration of controls related to the financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following is not included in a standard unqualified opinion on internal control over financial reporting performed under PCAOB requirements?
a. Because of inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements.
b. In our opinion, [company name] maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting.
c. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting.
d. The [company name] management and audit committee is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An auditor suspects that a client’s cashier is misappropriating cash receipts for personal use by lapping customer checks received in the mail. In attempting to uncover this embezzlement scheme, the auditor most likely would compare the
a. Dates checks are deposited per bank statements with the dates remittance credits are recorded.
b. Daily cash summaries with the sums of the cash receipts journal entries.
c. Individual bank deposit slips with the details of the monthly bank statements.
d. Dates uncollectible accounts are authorized to be written off with the dates the write-offs are actually recorded.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following audit procedures would an auditor most likely perform to test controls relating to management’s assertion concerning the completeness of sales transactions?
a. Verify that extensions and footings on the entity’s sales invoices and monthly customer statements have been recomputed.
b. Inspect the entity’s reports of prenumbered shipping documents that have not been recorded in the sales journal.
c. Compare the invoiced prices on prenumbered sales invoices to the entity’s authorized price list.
d. Inquire about the entity’s credit granting policies and the consistent application of credit checks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following controls most likely would help ensure that all credit sales transactions of an entity are recorded?
a. The billing department supervisor sends copies of approved sales orders to the credit department for comparison to authorized credit limits and current customer account balances.
b. The accounting department supervisor independently reconciles the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger to the accounts receivable control account monthly.
c. The accounting department supervisor controls the mailing of monthly statements to customers and investigates any differences reported by customers.
d. The billing department supervisor matches prenumbered shipping documents with entries in the sales journal.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following controls most likely would be effective in offsetting the tendency of sales personnel to maximize sales volume at the expense of high bad debt write-offs?
a. Employees responsible for authorizing sales and bad debt write-offs are denied access to cash.
b. Shipping documents and sales invoices are matched by an employee who does not have authority to write off bad debts.
c. Employees involved in the credit-granting function are separated from the sales function.
d. Subsidiary accounts receivable records are reconciled to the control account by an employee independent of the authorization of credit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Five Stars Ltd. comes out with a public issue of share capital on 1 April 2011 of 1,00,000 equity shares of Rs.100 each at a premium of 5%. Rs.25 is payable on application (on or before 30 April 2011) and Rs.30 on allotment (30 June 2011) including premium. The issue is underwritten by two underwriters—Vijay and Ajay—the commission being 5% of the issue price. Each of the underwriters underwrites 2,000 shares firm. Subscriptions totalled 96,000 shares, the distribution of forms being:
Vijay: 52,000 shares; Ajay: 36,000 and unmarked forms 8,000.
One of the allotees (using forms marked with the name of Vijay) for 200 shares failed to pay the amount due on allotment, all other moneys due being received in all including any due from the shares devolving upon the underwriters. The commission due is paid as per agreement. The shares of different allottees are finally forfeited on 30 September 2001 and re-allotted for payment in cash of Rs.40 per share.
You are required to pass summary journal entries to record the above events and transactions including cash.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
M/s Reddy Ltd. has authorized capital of Rs.50,00,000 divided into 1,00,000 equity shares of $4 50 each. The company issued for subscription 25,000 shares at a premium of Rs.5 each. The entire issue was underwritten as follows:
Amar: 15,000 shares (Firm underwriting 2,500 shares)
Akbar: 7,500 shares (Firm underwriting 1,000 shares)
Antony: 2,500 shares (Firm underwriting 500 shares)
Out of total issue, 22,500 shares including firm underwriting were subscribed.
The following were the marked forms:
Amar: 8,000 shares
Akbar: 5,000 shares
Antony: 2,000 shares
Determine the liability of each underwriter.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Global (Indian) Ltd. Issued 4,00,000 equity shares which were underwritten as follows:
|
Underwriter
|
Shares underwritten
|
|
X Ltd.
|
2,40,000
|
|
Y Ltd.
|
1,00,000
|
|
Z Ltd.
|
60,000
|
The above-mentioned underwriters made application for firm underwriting as follows:
|
X Ltd.
|
32,000 shares
|
|
Y Ltd.
|
40,000 shares
|
|
Z Ltd.
|
12,000 shares
|
The total applications excluding firm underwriting but including marked applications were for 2,00,000 shares. The marked applications were as under:
|
X Ltd.
|
40,000 shares
|
|
Y Ltd.
|
50,000 shares
|
|
Z Ltd.
|
20,000 shares
|
The underwriting contracts provide that underwriters be given credit for firm applications and that credit for unmarked applications be given in proportion to the shares underwritten. You are required to show the allocation of liability.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Himalaya Mount Ltd. issued 3,60,000 shares which were underwritten as:
A: 2,16,000 shares;
B: 90,000 shares;
C; 54,000 shares
The underwriters made applications for firm underwriting as follows:
A: 28,800 shares;
B: 10,800 shares;
C: 36,000 shares the total subscription excluding firm underwriting (including marked applications) were 1,80,000 shares.
The marked applications were:
A: 36,000 shares;
B: 72,000 shares;
C: 18,000 shares.
You are required to prepare a statement showing the net liability of underwriters.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Redemption of preference shares—At Par and out of profits The following is the extract of balance sheet of Shiva Co. Ltd. as on 31 December 2010:
|
Share Capital
|
|
|
1,00,00 Equity shares of Rs.10 each
|
10,00,000
|
|
20,000 redeemable preference shares of Rs.100 each}
|
20,00,000
|
|
Capital reserve
|
8,00,000
|
|
General reserve
|
7,50,000
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
20,00,000
|
The Company exercises its option to redeem preference shares on 1 January 2011. The Company has sufficient cash. You are required to pass journal entries relating to redemption.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Redemption of preference shares—At premium and out of profits The balance sheet of Krishna Ltd. as on 31 March 2011 was as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
1,00,000 Equity Shares ofl 10 Each, Fully
|
10,00,000
|
Sundry Assets
|
15,00,000
|
|
Paid
|
|
Bank Balance
|
9,50,000
|
|
5,000 Redeemable Preference Shares of 100 Each, Fully Paid
|
5,00,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
8,00,000
|
|
|
|
Creditors
|
1,50,000
|
|
|
|
|
24,50,000
|
|
24,50,000
|
On the above date, the preference shares were redeemed at a premium of 10%.
You are required to:
- Pass journal entries
- Construct the amended balance sheet
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Redemption at a premium—Partly out of profits and partly out of fresh issue of shares at par Srinivas Ltd. have part of their share capital in 4,000 10% redeemable preference shares of Rs.100 each. The Company decided to redeem the preference shares at premium of 10%. The general reserve of the company stood at Rs.5,00,000. The directors decided to utilize 50% of the reserve in redeeming the preference shares and the balance is to be met from the proceeds of fresh issue of sufficient number of equity shares of Rs.10 each. The premium on redemption is to be met from the year’s profit and loss appropriation account. Give journal entries to record the above transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Redemption of preference shares at premium—Partly out of fresh issue of shares and partly out of profits. Raj Gopal Ltd. has an authorized capital of Rs.10,00,000 comprising 3,000 8% redeemable preference shares ofRs.100 each and 70,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each. The preference shares are redeemable on 31 March 2011 at a premium of 10%. The summarized balance sheet was as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Sundry assets
|
5,00,000
|
|
Authorized:
|
|
Investments
|
30000
|
|
70,000 Equity Shares of Rs. 10 Each
|
7,00,000
|
Bank
|
1,20,000
|
|
3,000 8% Preference Shares of Rs.100
|
|
|
|
|
Each
|
3,00,000
|
|
|
|
Paid-up Capital:
|
|
|
|
|
30,000 Equity Shares of Rs. 10 Each
|
3,00,000
|
|
|
|
2,000 8% Preferences Shares of Rs. 100
|
100,000
|
|
|
|
Each
|
|
|
|
|
Capital Reserve
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
General Reserve
|
30,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
40,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
60,000
|
|
|
|
|
6,50,000
|
|
6,50,000
|
he Board has passed necessary resolutions duly and the following transactions took place:
- To provide cash for redemption of preference shares, the investments were sold for 50,000 and 15,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each were issued to the existing shareholders at Rs.12 per share payable in full. All moneys were duly redeemed.
- The redeemable preference shares were duly redeemed.
You are required to give necessary journal entries and the amended balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Issue of bonus shares Sunderraj Ltd. issued 10,000 8% redeemable preference shares of Rs.100 each at par on 1 July 2003, redeemable at the option of the company on or after 30 June 2009 partly or fully.
Redemptions were made out of profits as follows:
- 2,000 Shares on 30 June 2009 at par
- 2,500 Shares on 31 December 2009 at 10% premium
- Remaining shares on 30 June 2010 at a premium of 5% making a fresh issue of 4,000 equity shares of Rs.100 each at a premium of 10% On 30 June 2010,the company also decided to capitalize 50% of its capital redemption reserve by issuing bonus shares of Rs.10 each fully paid at a premium of Rs.2 per share.
Pass necessary journal entries to record the above transactions in the books of the company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Utilization of profit and loss A/c balance for redemption—Restricted use Rajabather Ltd. has an issued share capital of 1,300 9% redeemable preference shares of Rs.100 each and 45,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each.
The preference shares are redeemable at a premium of 10% on 1 April 2011. The Company’s balance sheet as on 31 March 2011 was as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital:
|
|
Fixed Assets
|
6,50,000
|
|
1,3009%Redeemable Preference Shares
|
|
Investments
|
37,000
|
|
of 100 Each Fully Paid
|
130,000
|
Bank
|
63,000
|
|
45,000 Equity Shares of fl0 Each Fully
|
|
|
|
|
Paid
|
4,50,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
80,000
|
|
|
|
Sundry Creditors
|
90,000
|
|
|
|
|
150,000
|
|
7,50,000
|
To carry out the redemption of preference shares, the Company decided:
- To sell all investments at Rs.30,000
- To finance part of the company from company funds, subject to leaving a balance of Rs.23,000 in the P&L A/c
- To issue sufficient equity shares of Rs.10 each at a premium of 20% per share to raise the balance of funds required
The preference shares were redeemed on due date and the issue of equity shares was fully subscribed. You are required to pass the necessary journal entries to record the above transactions and prepare the balance sheet of the company soon after the redemption is completed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Untraceable shareholders The following is the summarized balance sheet of Jaya Ltd. as on 31 March 2011:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Share Capital: Authorized:
|
|
Fixed Assets
|
4,00,000
|
|
1,0006% Redeemable Preference Shares of 100 Each Fully Paid
|
1,00,000
|
Current Assets
|
2,50,000
|
|
50,000 Equity Shares of Z10 Each Fully
|
5,00,000
|
|
|
|
Paid up
|
|
|
|
|
Issued & Subscribed:
|
|
|
|
|
900 6% Redeemable Preference Shares of 100 Each Fully Paid
|
90,000
|
|
|
|
40,000 Equity Shares of 10 Each Fully
|
4,00,000
|
|
|
|
Paid up
|
|
|
|
|
Securities Premium A/c
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
1,00,000
|
|
|
|
Creditors
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
|
6,50,000
|
|
6,50,000
|
The preference shares were redeemed on 7 April 2011 at a premium of 10%. A bonus issue of one equity share for every five shares held was made on the same date. No trace could be found of the holders of 25 preference shares. You are required to give the necessary journal entries and construct the resultant balance sheet in a summarized form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Minimum fresh issue of shares at premium The balance sheet of Manu as on 31 March 2011 is as follows:
|
Liabilities
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
4,000 Equity Shares of Z 100 Each Fully
|
4,00,000
|
Fixed Assets
|
4,50,000
|
|
Paid up
|
|
Investments
|
30,000
|
|
2,000 — 8% Redeemable Preference
|
2,00,000
|
Current Assets
|
2,20,000
|
|
Shares of Z100 Each Fully Paid
|
|
Miscellaneous Expenditure (not yet
|
80,000
|
|
Securities Premium
|
9,700
|
Written off)
|
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
1,20,000
|
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
50,300
|
|
|
|
|
7,80,000
|
|
7,80,000
|
On the above date, it was decided to redeem the preference shares at a premium of 10%. The directors has decided that only the minimum number of fresh equity shares of Rs.100 each at a premium of 5% be issued to provide for redemption of such preference shares as could not otherwise be redeemed. You are required to give the necessary journal entries and prepare the balance sheet soon after redemption.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ZP Corporation is a (hypothetical) multinational corporation headquartered in Japan that trades on numerous stock exchanges. ZP prepares its consolidated financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Excerpts from ZP’s 2009 annual report are shown.
Consolidated Balance Sheets (¥ millions)
|
Year Ended 31 December
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
¥542,849
|
¥814,760
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Inventories
|
608,572
|
486,465
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current assets
|
4,028,742
|
3,766,309
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total assets
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
¥3,980,247
|
¥3,529,765
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total long-term liabilities
|
2,663,795
|
2,624,002
|
|
Minority interest in consolidated subsidiaries
|
218,889
|
179,843
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
3,956,509
|
3,353,736
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
Selected Disclosures in the 2009 Annual Report
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
“Cost reduction efforts were offset by increased prices of raw materials, other production materials and parts.”. . .“Inventories decreased during fiscal 2009 by ¥122.1 billion, or 20.1%, to ¥486.5 billion. This reflects the impacts of decreased sales volumes and fluctuations in foreign currency translation rates.”
Management and Corporate Information Risk Factors
Industry and Business Risks
The worldwide market for our products is highly competitive. ZP faces intense competition from other manufacturers in the respective markets in which it operates. Competition has intensified due to the worldwide deterioration in economic conditions. In addition, competition is likely to further intensify because of continuing globalization, possibly resulting in industry reorganization. Factors affecting competition include product quality and features, the amount of time required for innovation and development, pricing, reliability, safety, economy in use, customer service, and financing terms. Increased competition may lead to lower unit sales and excess production capacity and excess inventory. This may result in a further downward price pressure.
ZP’s ability to adequately respond to the recent rapid changes in the industry and to maintain its competitiveness will be fundamental to its future success in maintaining and expanding its market share in existing and new markets.
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
2. Summary of significant accounting policies: Inventories.
Inventories are valued at cost, not in excess of market. Cost is determined on the “average-cost” basis, except for the cost of finished products carried by certain subsidiary companies which is determined “last-in, first-out” (“LIFO”) basis. Inventories valued on the LIFO basis totaled ¥94,578 million and ¥50,037 million at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively. Had the “first-in, first-out” basis been used for those companies using the LIFO basis, inventories would have been ¥10,120 million and ¥19,660 million higher than reported at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively.
If ZP had prepared its financial statement in accordance with IFRS, the inventory turnover ratio (using average inventory) for 2009 would be:
A. lower.
B. higher.
C. the same.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ZP Corporation is a (hypothetical) multinational corporation headquartered in Japan that trades on numerous stock exchanges. ZP prepares its consolidated financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Excerpts from ZP’s 2009 annual report are shown.
Consolidated Balance Sheets (¥ millions)
|
Year Ended 31 December
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
¥542,849
|
¥814,760
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Inventories
|
608,572
|
486,465
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current assets
|
4,028,742
|
3,766,309
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total assets
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
¥3,980,247
|
¥3,529,765
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total long-term liabilities
|
2,663,795
|
2,624,002
|
|
Minority interest in consolidated subsidiaries
|
218,889
|
179,843
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
3,956,509
|
3,353,736
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
Selected Disclosures in the 2009 Annual Report
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
“Cost reduction efforts were offset by increased prices of raw materials, other production materials and parts.”. . .“Inventories decreased during fiscal 2009 by ¥122.1 billion, or 20.1%, to ¥486.5 billion. This reflects the impacts of decreased sales volumes and fluctuations in foreign currency translation rates.”
Management and Corporate Information Risk Factors
Industry and Business Risks
The worldwide market for our products is highly competitive. ZP faces intense competition from other manufacturers in the respective markets in which it operates. Competition has intensified due to the worldwide deterioration in economic conditions. In addition, competition is likely to further intensify because of continuing globalization, possibly resulting in industry reorganization. Factors affecting competition include product quality and features, the amount of time required for innovation and development, pricing, reliability, safety, economy in use, customer service, and financing terms. Increased competition may lead to lower unit sales and excess production capacity and excess inventory. This may result in a further downward price pressure.
ZP’s ability to adequately respond to the recent rapid changes in the industry and to maintain its competitiveness will be fundamental to its future success in maintaining and expanding its market share in existing and new markets.
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
2. Summary of significant accounting policies: Inventories.
Inventories are valued at cost, not in excess of market. Cost is determined on the “average-cost” basis, except for the cost of finished products carried by certain subsidiary companies which is determined “last-in, first-out” (“LIFO”) basis. Inventories valued on the LIFO basis totaled ¥94,578 million and ¥50,037 million at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively. Had the “first-in, first-out” basis been used for those companies using the LIFO basis, inventories would have been ¥10,120 million and ¥19,660 million higher than reported at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively.
Inventory levels decreased from 2008 to 2009 for all of the following reasons except:
A. LIFO liquidation.
B. sales volume decreased.
C. fluctuations in foreign currency translation rates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ZP Corporation is a (hypothetical) multinational corporation headquartered in Japan that trades on numerous stock exchanges. ZP prepares its consolidated financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Excerpts from ZP’s 2009 annual report are shown.
Consolidated Balance Sheets (¥ millions)
|
Year Ended 31 December
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
¥542,849
|
¥814,760
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Inventories
|
608,572
|
486,465
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current assets
|
4,028,742
|
3,766,309
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total assets
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
¥3,980,247
|
¥3,529,765
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total long-term liabilities
|
2,663,795
|
2,624,002
|
|
Minority interest in consolidated subsidiaries
|
218,889
|
179,843
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
3,956,509
|
3,353,736
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
Selected Disclosures in the 2009 Annual Report
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
“Cost reduction efforts were offset by increased prices of raw materials, other production materials and parts.”. . .“Inventories decreased during fiscal 2009 by ¥122.1 billion, or 20.1%, to ¥486.5 billion. This reflects the impacts of decreased sales volumes and fluctuations in foreign currency translation rates.”
Management and Corporate Information Risk Factors
Industry and Business Risks
The worldwide market for our products is highly competitive. ZP faces intense competition from other manufacturers in the respective markets in which it operates. Competition has intensified due to the worldwide deterioration in economic conditions. In addition, competition is likely to further intensify because of continuing globalization, possibly resulting in industry reorganization. Factors affecting competition include product quality and features, the amount of time required for innovation and development, pricing, reliability, safety, economy in use, customer service, and financing terms. Increased competition may lead to lower unit sales and excess production capacity and excess inventory. This may result in a further downward price pressure.
ZP’s ability to adequately respond to the recent rapid changes in the industry and to maintain its competitiveness will be fundamental to its future success in maintaining and expanding its market share in existing and new markets.
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
2. Summary of significant accounting policies: Inventories.
Inventories are valued at cost, not in excess of market. Cost is determined on the “average-cost” basis, except for the cost of finished products carried by certain subsidiary companies which is determined “last-in, first-out” (“LIFO”) basis. Inventories valued on the LIFO basis totaled ¥94,578 million and ¥50,037 million at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively. Had the “first-in, first-out” basis been used for those companies using the LIFO basis, inventories would have been ¥10,120 million and ¥19,660 million higher than reported at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively.
Note 2 indicates that, “Inventories valued on the LIFO basis totaled ¥94,578 million and ¥50,037 million at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively.” Based on this, the LIFO reserve should most likely:
A. increase.
B. decrease.
C. remain the same.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ZP Corporation is a (hypothetical) multinational corporation headquartered in Japan that trades on numerous stock exchanges. ZP prepares its consolidated financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Excerpts from ZP’s 2009 annual report are shown.
Consolidated Balance Sheets (¥ millions)
|
Year Ended 31 December
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
¥542,849
|
¥814,760
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Inventories
|
608,572
|
486,465
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current assets
|
4,028,742
|
3,766,309
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total assets
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
¥3,980,247
|
¥3,529,765
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total long-term liabilities
|
2,663,795
|
2,624,002
|
|
Minority interest in consolidated subsidiaries
|
218,889
|
179,843
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
3,956,509
|
3,353,736
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
Selected Disclosures in the 2009 Annual Report
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
“Cost reduction efforts were offset by increased prices of raw materials, other production materials and parts.”. . .“Inventories decreased during fiscal 2009 by ¥122.1 billion, or 20.1%, to ¥486.5 billion. This reflects the impacts of decreased sales volumes and fluctuations in foreign currency translation rates.”
Management and Corporate Information Risk Factors
Industry and Business Risks
The worldwide market for our products is highly competitive. ZP faces intense competition from other manufacturers in the respective markets in which it operates. Competition has intensified due to the worldwide deterioration in economic conditions. In addition, competition is likely to further intensify because of continuing globalization, possibly resulting in industry reorganization. Factors affecting competition include product quality and features, the amount of time required for innovation and development, pricing, reliability, safety, economy in use, customer service, and financing terms. Increased competition may lead to lower unit sales and excess production capacity and excess inventory. This may result in a further downward price pressure.
ZP’s ability to adequately respond to the recent rapid changes in the industry and to maintain its competitiveness will be fundamental to its future success in maintaining and expanding its market share in existing and new markets.
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
2. Summary of significant accounting policies: Inventories.
Inventories are valued at cost, not in excess of market. Cost is determined on the “average-cost” basis, except for the cost of finished products carried by certain subsidiary companies which is determined “last-in, first-out” (“LIFO”) basis. Inventories valued on the LIFO basis totaled ¥94,578 million and ¥50,037 million at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively. Had the “first-in, first-out” basis been used for those companies using the LIFO basis, inventories would have been ¥10,120 million and ¥19,660 million higher than reported at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively.
The Industry and Business Risk excerpt states that, “Increased competition may lead to lower unit sales and excess production capacity and excess inventory. This may result in a further downward price pressure.” The downward price pressure could lead to inventory that is valued above current market prices or net realizable value. Any write-downs of inventory are least likely to have a significant effect on the inventory valued using:
A. weighted average cost.
B. first-in, first-out (FIFO).
C. last-in, first-out (LIFO).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume a (hypothetical) company, Trofferini S. A., incurred the following expenditures to purchase a towel and tissue roll machine: €10,900 purchase price including taxes, €200 for delivery of the machine, €300 for installation and testing of the machine, and €100 to train staff on maintaining the machine. In addition, the company paid a construction team €350 to reinforce the factory floor and ceiling joists to accommodate the machine’s weight. The company also paid €1,500 to repair the factory roof (a repair expected to extend the useful life of the factory by five years) and €1,000 to have the exterior of the factory and adjoining offices repainted for maintenance reasons. The repainting neither extends the life of factory and offices nor improves their usability.
1. Which of these expenditures will be capitalized and which will be expensed?
2. How will the treatment of these expenditures affect the company’s financial statements?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BILDA S. A., a hypothetical company, borrows €1,000,000 at an interest rate of 10 percent per year on 1 January 2010 to finance the construction of a factory that will have a useful life of 40 years. Construction is completed after two years, during which time the company earns €20,000 by temporarily investing the loan proceeds.
1. What is the amount of interest that will be capitalized under IFRS, and how would that amount differ from the amount that would be capitalized under U.S. GAAP?
2. Where will the capitalized borrowing cost appear on the company’s financial statements?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume REH AG, a hypothetical company, incurs expenditures of €1,000 per month during the fiscal year ended 31 December 2009 to develop software for internal use. Under IFRS, the company must treat the expenditures as an expense until the software meets the criteria for recognition as an intangible asset, after which time the expenditures can be capitalized as an intangible asset.
1. What is the accounting impact of the company being able to demonstrate that the software met the criteria for recognition as an intangible asset on 1 February versus 1 December?
2. How would the treatment of expenditures differ if the company reported under U.S. GAAP and it had established in 2008 that the project was likely to be completed?
EXAMPLE 10-5 Impact of Capitalizing versus Expensing for Ongoing Purchases
A company buys a £300 computer in Year 1 and capitalizes the expenditure. The computer has a useful life of three years and an expected salvage value of £0, so the annual depreciation expense using the straight-line method is £100 per year. Compared to expensing the entire £300 immediately, the company’s pretax profit in Year 1 is £200 greater.
1. Assume that the company continues to buy an identical computer each year at the same price. If the company uses the same accounting treatment for each of the computers, when does the profit-enhancing effect of capitalizing versus expensing end?
2. If the company buys another identical computer in Year 4, using the same accounting treatment as the prior years, what is the effect on Year 4 profits of capitalizing versus expensing these expenditures?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
MTR Gaming Group, Inc. (NasdaqGS: MNTG) disclosed the following information in one of the footnotes to its financial statements: “Interest is allocated and capitalized to construction in progress by applying our cost of borrowing rate to qualifying assets. Interest capitalized in 2007 and 2006 was $2.2 million and $6.0 million, respectively. There was no interest capitalized during 2008.”(Form 10-K filed 13 March 2009).
EXHIBIT 10-3 MTR Gaming Group Selected Data, as Reported (dollars in thousands)
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
BIT (from income statement)
|
432,686
|
389,268
|
268,800
|
|
Interest expense (from income statement)
|
40,764
|
34,774
|
17,047
|
|
Interest capitalized (from foomote)
|
0
|
2,200
|
6,000
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
14,693
|
14,980
|
42,206
|
|
Net cash from (used) in investing activities
|
41,620
|
(144,824)
|
(162,415)
|
1. Calculate and interpret MTR’s interest coverage ratio with and without capitalized interest. Assume that capitalized interest increases depreciation expense by $475 thousand in 2008 and 2007, and by $365 thousand in 2006.
2. Calculate MTR’s percentage change in operating cash flow from 2006 to 2007 and from 2007 to 2008. Assuming the financial reporting does not affect reporting for income taxes, what were the effects of capitalized interest on operating and investing cash flows?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are working on a project involving the analysis of JHH Software, a (hypothetical) software development company that established technical feasibility for its first product in 2007. Part of your analysis involves computing certain market-based ratios, which you will use to compare JHH to another company that expenses all of its software development expenditures. Relevant data and excerpts from the company’s annual report are included in
|
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF EARNINGS—Abbreviated
|
|
For Year Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Total revenue
|
$91,424
|
$91,134
|
$96,293
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
78,107
|
78,908
|
85,624
|
|
Operating income
|
13,317
|
12,226
|
10,669
|
|
Provision for income taxes
|
3,825
|
4,232
|
3,172
|
|
Net income
|
$9,492
|
$7,934
|
57A79
|
|
Earnings per share (EPS)
|
$1.40
|
$0.81
|
$0.68
|
|
STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS—Abbreviated
|
|
For Year Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
$15,007
|
$14,874
|
$15,266
|
|
Net cash used in investing activities”
|
(11,549)
|
(4,423)
|
(5,346)
|
|
Net cash used in financing activities
|
(8,003)
|
(7,936)
|
(7,157)
|
|
Net change in cash and cash equivalents
|
($4,545)
|
$2515
|
$2,763
|
|
Includes software development °pours of
|
($4000)
|
($4,000)
|
($2,000)
|
|
and includes capital expenditures of
|
($2,000)
|
($1,600)
|
($1,200)
|
|
Additional information:
|
|
For Year Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Market value of outstanding debt
|
0
|
0
|
0
|
|
Amortization of capitalized software devdopment expenses
|
($2,000)
|
($667)
|
0
|
|
Depredation expense
|
($2,200)
|
($1,440)
|
($1,320)
|
|
Market price per share of common stock
|
$42
|
$26
|
$17
|
|
Shares of common stock outstanding (thousands)
|
6,780
|
9,765
|
10,999
|
1. Compute the following ratios for JHH based on the reported financial statements for fiscal year ended 31 December 2009, with no adjustments. Next, determine the approximate impact on these ratios if the company had expensed rather than capitalized its investments in software. (Assume the financial reporting does not affect reporting for income taxes. There would be no change in the effective tax rate.)
A. P/E: Price/Earnings per share
B. P/CFO: Price/Operating cash flow per share
C. EV/EBITDA: Enterprise value/EBITDA, where enterprise value is defined as the total market value of all sources of a company’s financing, including equity and debt, and EBITDA is earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization.
2. Interpret the changes in the ratios.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CUTITUP Co., a hypothetical company, purchases a milling machine, a type of machine used for shaping metal, at a total cost of $10,000. $2,000 was estimated to represent the cost of the rotating cutter, a significant component of the machine. The company expects the machine to have a useful life of eight years and a residual value of $3,000 and that the rotating cutter will need to be replaced every two years. Assume the entire residual value is attributable to the milling machine itself, and assume the company uses straight-line depreciation for all assets.
1. How much depreciation expense would the company report in Year 1 if it uses the component method of depreciation, and how much depreciation expense would the company report in Year 1 if it does not use the component method?
2. Assuming a new cutter with an estimated two-year useful life is purchased at the end of Year 2 for $2,000, what depreciation expenses would the company report in Year 3 if it uses the component method and if it does not use the component method?
3. Assuming replacement of the cutter every two years at a price of $2,000, what is the total depreciation expense over the eight years if the company uses the component method compared with the total depreciation expense if the company does not use the component method?
4. How many different items must the company estimate in the first year to compute depreciation expense for the milling machine if it uses the component method, and how does this compare with what would be required if it does not use the component method?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Intangible Assets provides illustrative examples regarding the accounting for intangible assets, including the following:
A direct-mail marketing company acquires a customer list and expects that it will be able to derive benefit from the information on the list for at least one year, but no more than three years. The customer list would be amortized over management’s best estimate of its useful life, say 18 months. Although the direct-mail marketing company may intend to add customer names and other information to the list in the future, the expected benefits of the acquired customer list relate only to the customers on that list at the date it was acquired.
In this example, in what ways would management’s decisions and estimates affect the company’s financial statements?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In accordance with the independence standards of the GAO for performing audits in accordance with generally accepted government auditing standards, which of the following is not an example of an external impairment of independence?
a. Reducing the extent of audit work due to pressure from management to reduce audit fees.
b. Selecting audit items based on the wishes of an employee of the organization being audited.
c. Bias in the items the auditors decide to select for testing.
d. Influence by management on the personnel assigned to the audit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Under the independence standards of the GAO for performing audits in accordance with generally accepted government auditing standards, which of the following are overreaching principles for determining whether a nonaudit service impairs independence?
I. Auditors must not perform nonaudit services that involve performing management functions or making management decisions.
II. Auditors must not audit their own work or provide nonaudit services in situations in which the nonaudit services are significant or material to the subject matter of the audit.
III. Auditors must not perform nonaudit services which require independence.
a. I only.
b. I and II only.
c. I, II and III.
d. II and III only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following factors are included in an entity’s control environment?
|
Audit committee
|
Integrity and ethical values
|
Organizational
|
|
a
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
b
|
Yes
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
c
|
No
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
d
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An auditor suspects that certain client employees are ordering merchandise for themselves over the Internet without recording the purchase or receipt of the merchandise. When vendors’ invoices arrive, one of the employees approves the invoices for payment. After the invoices are paid, the employee destroys the invoices and the related vouchers. In gathering evidence regarding the fraud, the auditor most likely would select items for testing from the file of all
a. Cash disbursements.
b. Approved vouchers.
c. Receiving reports.
d. Vendors’ invoices.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In obtaining an understanding of an entity’s internal control, an auditor is required to obtain knowledge about the
|
Operating effectiveness of controls
|
Design of controls
|
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
After obtaining an understanding of internal control and assessing the risk of material misstatement, an auditor decided to perform tests of controls. The auditor most likely decided that
a. It would be efficient to perform tests of controls that would result in a reduction in planned substantive tests.
b. Additional evidence to support a further reduction in the risk of material misstatement is not available.
c. An increase in the assessed level of the risk of material misstatement is justified for certain financial statement assertions.
d. There were many internal control weaknesses that could allow misstatements to enter the accounting system.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following procedures concerning accounts receivable would an auditor most likely perform to obtain evidence in support of an assessed level of control risk below the maximum?
a. Observing an entity’s employee prepare the schedule of past due accounts receivable.
b. Sending confirmation requests to an entity’s principal customers to verify the existence of accounts receivable.
c. Inspecting an entity’s analysis of accounts receivable for unusual balances.
d. Comparing an entity’s uncollectible accounts expense to actual uncollectible accounts receivable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following best describes a CPA’s engagement to report on an entity’s internal control over financial reporting?
a. An attestation engagement to form an opinion on the effectiveness of its internal control.
b. An audit engagement to provide negative assurance on the entity’s internal control.
c. A prospective engagement to project, for a period of time not to exceed one year, and report on the expected benefits of the entity’s internal control.
d. A consulting engagement to provide constructive advice to the entity on its internal control.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider an issuer (public) company whose purchases are made through the Internet and by telephone. Which of the following is correct?
a. These types of purchases represent control objectives for the audit of internal control.
b. These purchases are the assertions related to the purchase class of transactions.
c. These types of purchases represent two major classes of transactions within the purchases process.
d. These two types of transactions represent routine transactions that must always be investigated in extreme detail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
According to the ethical standards of the profession, which of the following acts is generally prohibited?
a. Issuing a modified report explaining a failure to follow a governmental regulatory agency’s standards when conducting an attest service for a client.
b. Revealing confidential client information during a quality review of a professional practice by a team from the state CPA society.
c. Accepting a contingent fee for representing a client in an examination of the client’s federal tax return by an IRS agent.
d. Retaining client records after an engagement is terminated prior to completion and the client has demanded their return.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
According to the profession’s ethical standards, which of the following events may justify a departure from a Statement of the Governmental Accounting Standards Board?
|
New legislation
|
Evolution of a new form of business transaction
|
|
No
|
Yes
|
|
Yes
|
No
|
|
Yes
|
Yes
|
|
No
|
No
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
May a CPA hire for the CPA’s public accounting firm a non-CPA systems analyst who specializes in developing computer systems?
a. Yes, provided the CPA is qualified to perform each of the specialist’s tasks.
b. Yes, provided the CPA is able to supervise the specialist and evaluate the specialist’s end product.
c. No, because non-CPA professionals are not permitted to be associated with CPA firms in public practice.
d. No, because developing computer systems is not recognized as a service performed by public accountants.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hans Annan, CFA, a food and beverage analyst, is reviewing Century Chocolate’s inventory policies as part of his evaluation of the company. Century Chocolate, based in Switzerland, manufactures chocolate products and purchases and resells other confectionery products to complement its chocolate line. Annan visited Century Chocolate’s manufacturing facility last year. He learned that cacao beans, imported from Brazil, represent the most significant raw material and that the work-in-progress inventory consists primarily of three items: roasted cacao beans, a thick paste produced from the beans (called chocolate liquor), and a sweetened mixture that needs to be “conched” to produce chocolate. On the tour, Annan learned that the conching process ranges from a few hours for lower-quality products to six days for the highest-quality chocolates. While there, Annan saw the facility’s climate-controlled area where manufactured finished products (cocoa and chocolate) and purchased finished goods are stored prior to shipment to customers. After touring the facility, Annan had a discussion with Century Chocolate’s CFO regarding the types of costs that were included in each inventory category.
Annan has asked his assistant, Joanna Kern, to gather some preliminary information regarding Century Chocolate’s financial statements and inventories. He also asked Kern to calculate the inventory turnover ratios for Century Chocolate and another chocolate manufacturer for the most recent five years. Annan does not know Century Chocolate’s most direct competitor, so he asks Kern to do some research and select the most appropriate company for the ratio comparison.
Kern reports back that Century Chocolate prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. She tells Annan that the policy footnote states that raw materials and purchased finished goods are valued at purchase cost whereas work in progress and manufactured finished goods are valued at production cost. Raw material inventories and purchased finished goods are accounted for using the FIFO (first-in, first-out) method, and the weighted average cost method is used for other inventories. An allowance is established when the net realizable value of any inventory item is lower than the value calculated.
Kern provides Annan with the selected financial statements and inventory data for Century Chocolate shown in Exhibits A through E. The ratio exhibit Kern prepared compares Century Chocolate’s inventory turnover ratios to those of Gordon’s Goodies, a U.S.-based company. Annan returns the exhibit and tells Kern to select a different competitor that reports using IFRS rather than U.S. GAAP. During this initial review, Annan asks Kern why she has not indicated whether Century Chocolate uses a perpetual or a periodic inventory system. Kern replies that she learned that Century Chocolate uses a perpetual system but did not include this information in her report because inventory values would be the same under either a perpetual or periodic inventory system. Annan tells Kern she is wrong and directs her to research the matter.
Century Chocolate Income Statements (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Sales
|
95,290
|
93,248
|
|
Cost of sales
|
-41,043
|
-39,047
|
|
Marketing, administration, and other expenses
|
-35,318
|
-42,481
|
|
Profit before taxes
|
18,929
|
11,720
|
|
Taxes
|
-3,283
|
-2,962
|
|
Profit for the period
|
15,646
|
8,758
|
Century Chocolate Balance Sheets (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash, cash equivalents, and short-term investments
|
6,190
|
8,252
|
|
Trade receivables and related accounts, net
|
11,654
|
12,910
|
|
Inventories, net
|
8,100
|
7,039
|
|
Other current assets
|
2,709
|
2,812
|
|
Total current assets
|
28,653
|
31,013
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment, net
|
18,291
|
19,130
|
|
Other noncurrent assets
|
45,144
|
49,875
|
|
Total assets
|
92,088
|
100,018
|
|
Trade and other payables
|
10,931
|
12,299
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
17,873
|
25,265
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
28,804
|
37,564
|
|
Noncurrent liabilities
|
15,672
|
14,963
|
|
Total liabilities
|
44,476
|
52,527
|
|
Equity
|
|
|
|
Share capital
|
332
|
341
|
|
Retained earnings and other reserves
|
47,280
|
47,150
|
|
Total equity
|
47,612
|
47,491
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
92,088
|
100,018
|
Century Chocolate Supplementary Footnote Disclosures: Inventories (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Raw Materials
|
2,154
|
1,585
|
|
Work in Progress
|
1,061
|
1,027
|
|
Finished Goods
|
5,116
|
4,665
|
|
Total inventories before allowance
|
8,331
|
7,277
|
|
Allowance for write-downs to net realizable value
|
-231
|
-238
|
|
Total inventories net of allowance
|
8,100
|
7,039
|
Century Chocolate Inventory Record for Purchased Lemon Drops
|
|
Nokia (6 in millions)
|
Ericsson (SEK in millions)
|
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Short-term borrowings
|
3,578
|
714
|
1,639
|
2,831
|
|
Current portion of long-term interest bearing debt
|
13
|
173
|
3,903
|
3,068
|
|
Long-term interest bearing debt
|
861
|
203
|
24,939
|
21,320
|
|
Total shareholders’ equity
|
14,208
|
14,773
|
140,823
|
134,112
|
|
Total assets
|
39,582
|
37,599
|
285,684
|
245,117
|
|
SIT
|
4,966
|
7,985
|
16,252
|
30,646
|
|
Interest payments
|
155
|
59
|
1,689
|
1,513
|
Century Chocolate Net Realizable Value Information for Black Licorice Jelly Beans
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
FIFO cost of inventory at 31 December (CHF)
|
314,890
|
374,870
|
|
Ending inventory at 31 December (kilograms)
|
77,750
|
92,560
|
|
Cost per kilogram (CHF)
|
4.05
|
4.05
|
|
Net realizable value (CHF per kilogram)
|
4.20
|
3.95
|
While Kern is revising her analysis, Annan reviews the most recent month’s Cocoa Market Review from the International Cocoa Organization. He is drawn to the statement that “the ICCO daily price, averaging prices in both futures markets, reached a 29-year high in US$ terms and a 23-year high in SDRs terms (the SDR unit comprises a basket of major currencies used in international trade: US$, Euro, Pound Sterling and Yen).” Annan makes a note that he will need to factor the potential continuation of this trend into his analysis.
The costs least likely to be included by the CFO as inventory are:
A. storage costs for the chocolate liquor.
B. excise taxes paid to the government of Brazil for the cacao beans.
C. storage costs for chocolate and purchased finished goods awaiting shipment to customers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hans Annan, CFA, a food and beverage analyst, is reviewing Century Chocolate’s inventory policies as part of his evaluation of the company. Century Chocolate, based in Switzerland, manufactures chocolate products and purchases and resells other confectionery products to complement its chocolate line. Annan visited Century Chocolate’s manufacturing facility last year. He learned that cacao beans, imported from Brazil, represent the most significant raw material and that the work-in-progress inventory consists primarily of three items: roasted cacao beans, a thick paste produced from the beans (called chocolate liquor), and a sweetened mixture that needs to be “conched” to produce chocolate. On the tour, Annan learned that the conching process ranges from a few hours for lower-quality products to six days for the highest-quality chocolates. While there, Annan saw the facility’s climate-controlled area where manufactured finished products (cocoa and chocolate) and purchased finished goods are stored prior to shipment to customers. After touring the facility, Annan had a discussion with Century Chocolate’s CFO regarding the types of costs that were included in each inventory category.
Annan has asked his assistant, Joanna Kern, to gather some preliminary information regarding Century Chocolate’s financial statements and inventories. He also asked Kern to calculate the inventory turnover ratios for Century Chocolate and another chocolate manufacturer for the most recent five years. Annan does not know Century Chocolate’s most direct competitor, so he asks Kern to do some research and select the most appropriate company for the ratio comparison.
Kern reports back that Century Chocolate prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. She tells Annan that the policy footnote states that raw materials and purchased finished goods are valued at purchase cost whereas work in progress and manufactured finished goods are valued at production cost. Raw material inventories and purchased finished goods are accounted for using the FIFO (first-in, first-out) method, and the weighted average cost method is used for other inventories. An allowance is established when the net realizable value of any inventory item is lower than the value calculated.
Kern provides Annan with the selected financial statements and inventory data for Century Chocolate shown in Exhibits A through E. The ratio exhibit Kern prepared compares Century Chocolate’s inventory turnover ratios to those of Gordon’s Goodies, a U.S.-based company. Annan returns the exhibit and tells Kern to select a different competitor that reports using IFRS rather than U.S. GAAP. During this initial review, Annan asks Kern why she has not indicated whether Century Chocolate uses a perpetual or a periodic inventory system. Kern replies that she learned that Century Chocolate uses a perpetual system but did not include this information in her report because inventory values would be the same under either a perpetual or periodic inventory system. Annan tells Kern she is wrong and directs her to research the matter.
Century Chocolate Income Statements (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Sales
|
95,290
|
93,248
|
|
Cost of sales
|
-41,043
|
-39,047
|
|
Marketing, administration, and other expenses
|
-35,318
|
-42,481
|
|
Profit before taxes
|
18,929
|
11,720
|
|
Taxes
|
-3,283
|
-2,962
|
|
Profit for the period
|
15,646
|
8,758
|
Century Chocolate Balance Sheets (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash, cash equivalents, and short-term investments
|
6,190
|
8,252
|
|
Trade receivables and related accounts, net
|
11,654
|
12,910
|
|
Inventories, net
|
8,100
|
7,039
|
|
Other current assets
|
2,709
|
2,812
|
|
Total current assets
|
28,653
|
31,013
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment, net
|
18,291
|
19,130
|
|
Other noncurrent assets
|
45,144
|
49,875
|
|
Total assets
|
92,088
|
100,018
|
|
Trade and other payables
|
10,931
|
12,299
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
17,873
|
25,265
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
28,804
|
37,564
|
|
Noncurrent liabilities
|
15,672
|
14,963
|
|
Total liabilities
|
44,476
|
52,527
|
|
Equity
|
|
|
|
Share capital
|
332
|
341
|
|
Retained earnings and other reserves
|
47,280
|
47,150
|
|
Total equity
|
47,612
|
47,491
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
92,088
|
100,018
|
Century Chocolate Supplementary Footnote Disclosures: Inventories (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Raw Materials
|
2,154
|
1,585
|
|
Work in Progress
|
1,061
|
1,027
|
|
Finished Goods
|
5,116
|
4,665
|
|
Total inventories before allowance
|
8,331
|
7,277
|
|
Allowance for write-downs to net realizable value
|
-231
|
-238
|
|
Total inventories net of allowance
|
8,100
|
7,039
|
Century Chocolate Inventory Record for Purchased Lemon Drops
|
|
Nokia (6 in millions)
|
Ericsson (SEK in millions)
|
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Short-term borrowings
|
3,578
|
714
|
1,639
|
2,831
|
|
Current portion of long-term interest bearing debt
|
13
|
173
|
3,903
|
3,068
|
|
Long-term interest bearing debt
|
861
|
203
|
24,939
|
21,320
|
|
Total shareholders’ equity
|
14,208
|
14,773
|
140,823
|
134,112
|
|
Total assets
|
39,582
|
37,599
|
285,684
|
245,117
|
|
SIT
|
4,966
|
7,985
|
16,252
|
30,646
|
|
Interest payments
|
155
|
59
|
1,689
|
1,513
|
Century Chocolate Net Realizable Value Information for Black Licorice Jelly Beans
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
FIFO cost of inventory at 31 December (CHF)
|
314,890
|
374,870
|
|
Ending inventory at 31 December (kilograms)
|
77,750
|
92,560
|
|
Cost per kilogram (CHF)
|
4.05
|
4.05
|
|
Net realizable value (CHF per kilogram)
|
4.20
|
3.95
|
While Kern is revising her analysis, Annan reviews the most recent month’s Cocoa Market Review from the International Cocoa Organization. He is drawn to the statement that “the ICCO daily price, averaging prices in both futures markets, reached a 29-year high in US$ terms and a 23-year high in SDRs terms (the SDR unit comprises a basket of major currencies used in international trade: US$, Euro, Pound Sterling and Yen).” Annan makes a note that he will need to factor the potential continuation of this trend into his analysis.
What is the most likely justification for Century Chocolate’s choice of inventory valuation method for its finished goods?
A. It is the preferred method under IFRS.
B. It allocates the same per unit cost to both cost of sales and inventory.
C. Ending inventory reflects the cost of goods purchased most recently.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hans Annan, CFA, a food and beverage analyst, is reviewing Century Chocolate’s inventory policies as part of his evaluation of the company. Century Chocolate, based in Switzerland, manufactures chocolate products and purchases and resells other confectionery products to complement its chocolate line. Annan visited Century Chocolate’s manufacturing facility last year. He learned that cacao beans, imported from Brazil, represent the most significant raw material and that the work-in-progress inventory consists primarily of three items: roasted cacao beans, a thick paste produced from the beans (called chocolate liquor), and a sweetened mixture that needs to be “conched” to produce chocolate. On the tour, Annan learned that the conching process ranges from a few hours for lower-quality products to six days for the highest-quality chocolates. While there, Annan saw the facility’s climate-controlled area where manufactured finished products (cocoa and chocolate) and purchased finished goods are stored prior to shipment to customers. After touring the facility, Annan had a discussion with Century Chocolate’s CFO regarding the types of costs that were included in each inventory category.
Annan has asked his assistant, Joanna Kern, to gather some preliminary information regarding Century Chocolate’s financial statements and inventories. He also asked Kern to calculate the inventory turnover ratios for Century Chocolate and another chocolate manufacturer for the most recent five years. Annan does not know Century Chocolate’s most direct competitor, so he asks Kern to do some research and select the most appropriate company for the ratio comparison.
Kern reports back that Century Chocolate prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. She tells Annan that the policy footnote states that raw materials and purchased finished goods are valued at purchase cost whereas work in progress and manufactured finished goods are valued at production cost. Raw material inventories and purchased finished goods are accounted for using the FIFO (first-in, first-out) method, and the weighted average cost method is used for other inventories. An allowance is established when the net realizable value of any inventory item is lower than the value calculated.
Kern provides Annan with the selected financial statements and inventory data for Century Chocolate shown in Exhibits A through E. The ratio exhibit Kern prepared compares Century Chocolate’s inventory turnover ratios to those of Gordon’s Goodies, a U.S.-based company. Annan returns the exhibit and tells Kern to select a different competitor that reports using IFRS rather than U.S. GAAP. During this initial review, Annan asks Kern why she has not indicated whether Century Chocolate uses a perpetual or a periodic inventory system. Kern replies that she learned that Century Chocolate uses a perpetual system but did not include this information in her report because inventory values would be the same under either a perpetual or periodic inventory system. Annan tells Kern she is wrong and directs her to research the matter.
Century Chocolate Income Statements (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Sales
|
95,290
|
93,248
|
|
Cost of sales
|
-41,043
|
-39,047
|
|
Marketing, administration, and other expenses
|
-35,318
|
-42,481
|
|
Profit before taxes
|
18,929
|
11,720
|
|
Taxes
|
-3,283
|
-2,962
|
|
Profit for the period
|
15,646
|
8,758
|
Century Chocolate Balance Sheets (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash, cash equivalents, and short-term investments
|
6,190
|
8,252
|
|
Trade receivables and related accounts, net
|
11,654
|
12,910
|
|
Inventories, net
|
8,100
|
7,039
|
|
Other current assets
|
2,709
|
2,812
|
|
Total current assets
|
28,653
|
31,013
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment, net
|
18,291
|
19,130
|
|
Other noncurrent assets
|
45,144
|
49,875
|
|
Total assets
|
92,088
|
100,018
|
|
Trade and other payables
|
10,931
|
12,299
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
17,873
|
25,265
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
28,804
|
37,564
|
|
Noncurrent liabilities
|
15,672
|
14,963
|
|
Total liabilities
|
44,476
|
52,527
|
|
Equity
|
|
|
|
Share capital
|
332
|
341
|
|
Retained earnings and other reserves
|
47,280
|
47,150
|
|
Total equity
|
47,612
|
47,491
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
92,088
|
100,018
|
Century Chocolate Supplementary Footnote Disclosures: Inventories (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Raw Materials
|
2,154
|
1,585
|
|
Work in Progress
|
1,061
|
1,027
|
|
Finished Goods
|
5,116
|
4,665
|
|
Total inventories before allowance
|
8,331
|
7,277
|
|
Allowance for write-downs to net realizable value
|
-231
|
-238
|
|
Total inventories net of allowance
|
8,100
|
7,039
|
Century Chocolate Inventory Record for Purchased Lemon Drops
|
|
Nokia (6 in millions)
|
Ericsson (SEK in millions)
|
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Short-term borrowings
|
3,578
|
714
|
1,639
|
2,831
|
|
Current portion of long-term interest bearing debt
|
13
|
173
|
3,903
|
3,068
|
|
Long-term interest bearing debt
|
861
|
203
|
24,939
|
21,320
|
|
Total shareholders’ equity
|
14,208
|
14,773
|
140,823
|
134,112
|
|
Total assets
|
39,582
|
37,599
|
285,684
|
245,117
|
|
SIT
|
4,966
|
7,985
|
16,252
|
30,646
|
|
Interest payments
|
155
|
59
|
1,689
|
1,513
|
Century Chocolate Net Realizable Value Information for Black Licorice Jelly Beans
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
FIFO cost of inventory at 31 December (CHF)
|
314,890
|
374,870
|
|
Ending inventory at 31 December (kilograms)
|
77,750
|
92,560
|
|
Cost per kilogram (CHF)
|
4.05
|
4.05
|
|
Net realizable value (CHF per kilogram)
|
4.20
|
3.95
|
While Kern is revising her analysis, Annan reviews the most recent month’s Cocoa Market Review from the International Cocoa Organization. He is drawn to the statement that “the ICCO daily price, averaging prices in both futures markets, reached a 29-year high in US$ terms and a 23-year high in SDRs terms (the SDR unit comprises a basket of major currencies used in international trade: US$, Euro, Pound Sterling and Yen).” Annan makes a note that he will need to factor the potential continuation of this trend into his analysis.
The most accurate statement regarding Annan’s reasoning for requiring Kern to select a competitor that reports under IFRS for comparative purposes is that under U.S. GAAP:
A. fair values are used to value inventory.
B. the LIFO method is permitted to value inventory.
C. the specific identification method is permitted to value inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hans Annan, CFA, a food and beverage analyst, is reviewing Century Chocolate’s inventory policies as part of his evaluation of the company. Century Chocolate, based in Switzerland, manufactures chocolate products and purchases and resells other confectionery products to complement its chocolate line. Annan visited Century Chocolate’s manufacturing facility last year. He learned that cacao beans, imported from Brazil, represent the most significant raw material and that the work-in-progress inventory consists primarily of three items: roasted cacao beans, a thick paste produced from the beans (called chocolate liquor), and a sweetened mixture that needs to be “conched” to produce chocolate. On the tour, Annan learned that the conching process ranges from a few hours for lower-quality products to six days for the highest-quality chocolates. While there, Annan saw the facility’s climate-controlled area where manufactured finished products (cocoa and chocolate) and purchased finished goods are stored prior to shipment to customers. After touring the facility, Annan had a discussion with Century Chocolate’s CFO regarding the types of costs that were included in each inventory category.
Annan has asked his assistant, Joanna Kern, to gather some preliminary information regarding Century Chocolate’s financial statements and inventories. He also asked Kern to calculate the inventory turnover ratios for Century Chocolate and another chocolate manufacturer for the most recent five years. Annan does not know Century Chocolate’s most direct competitor, so he asks Kern to do some research and select the most appropriate company for the ratio comparison.
Kern reports back that Century Chocolate prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. She tells Annan that the policy footnote states that raw materials and purchased finished goods are valued at purchase cost whereas work in progress and manufactured finished goods are valued at production cost. Raw material inventories and purchased finished goods are accounted for using the FIFO (first-in, first-out) method, and the weighted average cost method is used for other inventories. An allowance is established when the net realizable value of any inventory item is lower than the value calculated.
Kern provides Annan with the selected financial statements and inventory data for Century Chocolate shown in Exhibits A through E. The ratio exhibit Kern prepared compares Century Chocolate’s inventory turnover ratios to those of Gordon’s Goodies, a U.S.-based company. Annan returns the exhibit and tells Kern to select a different competitor that reports using IFRS rather than U.S. GAAP. During this initial review, Annan asks Kern why she has not indicated whether Century Chocolate uses a perpetual or a periodic inventory system. Kern replies that she learned that Century Chocolate uses a perpetual system but did not include this information in her report because inventory values would be the same under either a perpetual or periodic inventory system. Annan tells Kern she is wrong and directs her to research the matter.
Century Chocolate Income Statements (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Sales
|
95,290
|
93,248
|
|
Cost of sales
|
-41,043
|
-39,047
|
|
Marketing, administration, and other expenses
|
-35,318
|
-42,481
|
|
Profit before taxes
|
18,929
|
11,720
|
|
Taxes
|
-3,283
|
-2,962
|
|
Profit for the period
|
15,646
|
8,758
|
Century Chocolate Balance Sheets (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash, cash equivalents, and short-term investments
|
6,190
|
8,252
|
|
Trade receivables and related accounts, net
|
11,654
|
12,910
|
|
Inventories, net
|
8,100
|
7,039
|
|
Other current assets
|
2,709
|
2,812
|
|
Total current assets
|
28,653
|
31,013
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment, net
|
18,291
|
19,130
|
|
Other noncurrent assets
|
45,144
|
49,875
|
|
Total assets
|
92,088
|
100,018
|
|
Trade and other payables
|
10,931
|
12,299
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
17,873
|
25,265
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
28,804
|
37,564
|
|
Noncurrent liabilities
|
15,672
|
14,963
|
|
Total liabilities
|
44,476
|
52,527
|
|
Equity
|
|
|
|
Share capital
|
332
|
341
|
|
Retained earnings and other reserves
|
47,280
|
47,150
|
|
Total equity
|
47,612
|
47,491
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
92,088
|
100,018
|
Century Chocolate Supplementary Footnote Disclosures: Inventories (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Raw Materials
|
2,154
|
1,585
|
|
Work in Progress
|
1,061
|
1,027
|
|
Finished Goods
|
5,116
|
4,665
|
|
Total inventories before allowance
|
8,331
|
7,277
|
|
Allowance for write-downs to net realizable value
|
-231
|
-238
|
|
Total inventories net of allowance
|
8,100
|
7,039
|
Century Chocolate Inventory Record for Purchased Lemon Drops
|
|
Nokia (6 in millions)
|
Ericsson (SEK in millions)
|
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Short-term borrowings
|
3,578
|
714
|
1,639
|
2,831
|
|
Current portion of long-term interest bearing debt
|
13
|
173
|
3,903
|
3,068
|
|
Long-term interest bearing debt
|
861
|
203
|
24,939
|
21,320
|
|
Total shareholders’ equity
|
14,208
|
14,773
|
140,823
|
134,112
|
|
Total assets
|
39,582
|
37,599
|
285,684
|
245,117
|
|
SIT
|
4,966
|
7,985
|
16,252
|
30,646
|
|
Interest payments
|
155
|
59
|
1,689
|
1,513
|
Century Chocolate Net Realizable Value Information for Black Licorice Jelly Beans
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
FIFO cost of inventory at 31 December (CHF)
|
314,890
|
374,870
|
|
Ending inventory at 31 December (kilograms)
|
77,750
|
92,560
|
|
Cost per kilogram (CHF)
|
4.05
|
4.05
|
|
Net realizable value (CHF per kilogram)
|
4.20
|
3.95
|
While Kern is revising her analysis, Annan reviews the most recent month’s Cocoa Market Review from the International Cocoa Organization. He is drawn to the statement that “the ICCO daily price, averaging prices in both futures markets, reached a 29-year high in US$ terms and a 23-year high in SDRs terms (the SDR unit comprises a basket of major currencies used in international trade: US$, Euro, Pound Sterling and Yen).” Annan makes a note that he will need to factor the potential continuation of this trend into his analysis.
Ignoring any tax effect, the 2009 net realizable value reassessment for the black licorice jelly beans will most likely result in:
A. an increase in gross profit of CHF 9,256.
B. an increase in gross profit of CHF 11,670.
C. no impact on cost of sales because under IFRS, write-downs cannot be reversed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hans Annan, CFA, a food and beverage analyst, is reviewing Century Chocolate’s inventory policies as part of his evaluation of the company. Century Chocolate, based in Switzerland, manufactures chocolate products and purchases and resells other confectionery products to complement its chocolate line. Annan visited Century Chocolate’s manufacturing facility last year. He learned that cacao beans, imported from Brazil, represent the most significant raw material and that the work-in-progress inventory consists primarily of three items: roasted cacao beans, a thick paste produced from the beans (called chocolate liquor), and a sweetened mixture that needs to be “conched” to produce chocolate. On the tour, Annan learned that the conching process ranges from a few hours for lower-quality products to six days for the highest-quality chocolates. While there, Annan saw the facility’s climate-controlled area where manufactured finished products (cocoa and chocolate) and purchased finished goods are stored prior to shipment to customers. After touring the facility, Annan had a discussion with Century Chocolate’s CFO regarding the types of costs that were included in each inventory category.
Annan has asked his assistant, Joanna Kern, to gather some preliminary information regarding Century Chocolate’s financial statements and inventories. He also asked Kern to calculate the inventory turnover ratios for Century Chocolate and another chocolate manufacturer for the most recent five years. Annan does not know Century Chocolate’s most direct competitor, so he asks Kern to do some research and select the most appropriate company for the ratio comparison.
Kern reports back that Century Chocolate prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. She tells Annan that the policy footnote states that raw materials and purchased finished goods are valued at purchase cost whereas work in progress and manufactured finished goods are valued at production cost. Raw material inventories and purchased finished goods are accounted for using the FIFO (first-in, first-out) method, and the weighted average cost method is used for other inventories. An allowance is established when the net realizable value of any inventory item is lower than the value calculated.
Kern provides Annan with the selected financial statements and inventory data for Century Chocolate shown in Exhibits A through E. The ratio exhibit Kern prepared compares Century Chocolate’s inventory turnover ratios to those of Gordon’s Goodies, a U.S.-based company. Annan returns the exhibit and tells Kern to select a different competitor that reports using IFRS rather than U.S. GAAP. During this initial review, Annan asks Kern why she has not indicated whether Century Chocolate uses a perpetual or a periodic inventory system. Kern replies that she learned that Century Chocolate uses a perpetual system but did not include this information in her report because inventory values would be the same under either a perpetual or periodic inventory system. Annan tells Kern she is wrong and directs her to research the matter.
Century Chocolate Income Statements (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Sales
|
95,290
|
93,248
|
|
Cost of sales
|
-41,043
|
-39,047
|
|
Marketing, administration, and other expenses
|
-35,318
|
-42,481
|
|
Profit before taxes
|
18,929
|
11,720
|
|
Taxes
|
-3,283
|
-2,962
|
|
Profit for the period
|
15,646
|
8,758
|
Century Chocolate Balance Sheets (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash, cash equivalents, and short-term investments
|
6,190
|
8,252
|
|
Trade receivables and related accounts, net
|
11,654
|
12,910
|
|
Inventories, net
|
8,100
|
7,039
|
|
Other current assets
|
2,709
|
2,812
|
|
Total current assets
|
28,653
|
31,013
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment, net
|
18,291
|
19,130
|
|
Other noncurrent assets
|
45,144
|
49,875
|
|
Total assets
|
92,088
|
100,018
|
|
Trade and other payables
|
10,931
|
12,299
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
17,873
|
25,265
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
28,804
|
37,564
|
|
Noncurrent liabilities
|
15,672
|
14,963
|
|
Total liabilities
|
44,476
|
52,527
|
|
Equity
|
|
|
|
Share capital
|
332
|
341
|
|
Retained earnings and other reserves
|
47,280
|
47,150
|
|
Total equity
|
47,612
|
47,491
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
92,088
|
100,018
|
Century Chocolate Supplementary Footnote Disclosures: Inventories (CHF millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Raw Materials
|
2,154
|
1,585
|
|
Work in Progress
|
1,061
|
1,027
|
|
Finished Goods
|
5,116
|
4,665
|
|
Total inventories before allowance
|
8,331
|
7,277
|
|
Allowance for write-downs to net realizable value
|
-231
|
-238
|
|
Total inventories net of allowance
|
8,100
|
7,039
|
Century Chocolate Inventory Record for Purchased Lemon Drops
|
|
Nokia (6 in millions)
|
Ericsson (SEK in millions)
|
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Short-term borrowings
|
3,578
|
714
|
1,639
|
2,831
|
|
Current portion of long-term interest bearing debt
|
13
|
173
|
3,903
|
3,068
|
|
Long-term interest bearing debt
|
861
|
203
|
24,939
|
21,320
|
|
Total shareholders’ equity
|
14,208
|
14,773
|
140,823
|
134,112
|
|
Total assets
|
39,582
|
37,599
|
285,684
|
245,117
|
|
SIT
|
4,966
|
7,985
|
16,252
|
30,646
|
|
Interest payments
|
155
|
59
|
1,689
|
1,513
|
Century Chocolate Net Realizable Value Information for Black Licorice Jelly Beans
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
FIFO cost of inventory at 31 December (CHF)
|
314,890
|
374,870
|
|
Ending inventory at 31 December (kilograms)
|
77,750
|
92,560
|
|
Cost per kilogram (CHF)
|
4.05
|
4.05
|
|
Net realizable value (CHF per kilogram)
|
4.20
|
3.95
|
While Kern is revising her analysis, Annan reviews the most recent month’s Cocoa Market Review from the International Cocoa Organization. He is drawn to the statement that “the ICCO daily price, averaging prices in both futures markets, reached a 29-year high in US$ terms and a 23-year high in SDRs terms (the SDR unit comprises a basket of major currencies used in international trade: US$, Euro, Pound Sterling and Yen).” Annan makes a note that he will need to factor the potential continuation of this trend into his analysis.
If the trend noted in the ICCO report continues and Century Chocolate plans to maintain constant or increasing inventory quantities, the most likely impact on Century Chocolate’s financial statements related to its raw materials inventory will be:
A. a cost of sales that more closely reflects current replacement values.
B. a higher allocation of the total cost of goods available for sale to cost of sales.
C. a higher allocation of the total cost of goods available for sale to ending inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
John Martinson, CFA, is an equity analyst with a large pension fund. His supervisor, Linda Packard, asks him to write a report on Karp Inc. Karp prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Packard is particularly interested in the effects of the company’s use of the LIFO method to account for its inventory. For this purpose, Martinson collects the financial data presented in Exhibits F and G.
Balance Sheet Information (US$ millions)
|
As of 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
172
|
157
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
626
|
458
|
|
Inventories
|
620
|
539
|
|
Other current assets
|
125
|
65
|
|
Total current assets
|
1,543
|
1,219
|
|
Property and equipment, net
|
3,035
|
2,972
|
|
Total assets
|
4,578
|
4,191
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
1,495
|
1,395
|
|
Long-term debt
|
644
|
604
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,139
|
1,999
|
|
Common stock and paid in capital
|
1,652
|
1,652
|
|
Retained earnings
|
787
|
540
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
2,439
|
2,192
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
4,578
|
4,191
|
Income Statement Information (US$ millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Sales
|
4,346
|
4,161
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2,211
|
2,147
|
|
Depreciation and amortization expense
|
139
|
119
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expense
|
1,656
|
1,637
|
|
Interest expense
|
31
|
18
|
|
Income tax expense
|
62
|
48
|
|
Net income
|
247
|
192
|
Martinson finds the following information in the notes to the financial statements:
- The LIFO reserves as of 31 December 2009 and 2008 are $155 million and $117 million respectively; and
- The effective income tax rate applicable to Karp for 2009 and earlier periods is 20%.
- If Karp had used FIFO instead of LIFO, the amount of inventory reported as of 31 December 2009 would have been closest to:
-
A. $465 million.
B. $658 million.
C. $775 million.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
John Martinson, CFA, is an equity analyst with a large pension fund. His supervisor, Linda Packard, asks him to write a report on Karp Inc. Karp prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Packard is particularly interested in the effects of the company’s use of the LIFO method to account for its inventory. For this purpose, Martinson collects the financial data presented in Exhibits F and G.
Balance Sheet Information (US$ millions)
|
As of 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
172
|
157
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
626
|
458
|
|
Inventories
|
620
|
539
|
|
Other current assets
|
125
|
65
|
|
Total current assets
|
1,543
|
1,219
|
|
Property and equipment, net
|
3,035
|
2,972
|
|
Total assets
|
4,578
|
4,191
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
1,495
|
1,395
|
|
Long-term debt
|
644
|
604
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,139
|
1,999
|
|
Common stock and paid in capital
|
1,652
|
1,652
|
|
Retained earnings
|
787
|
540
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
2,439
|
2,192
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
4,578
|
4,191
|
Income Statement Information (US$ millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Sales
|
4,346
|
4,161
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2,211
|
2,147
|
|
Depreciation and amortization expense
|
139
|
119
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expense
|
1,656
|
1,637
|
|
Interest expense
|
31
|
18
|
|
Income tax expense
|
62
|
48
|
|
Net income
|
247
|
192
|
Martinson finds the following information in the notes to the financial statements:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
John Martinson, CFA, is an equity analyst with a large pension fund. His supervisor, Linda Packard, asks him to write a report on Karp Inc. Karp prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Packard is particularly interested in the effects of the company’s use of the LIFO method to account for its inventory. For this purpose, Martinson collects the financial data presented in Exhibits F and G.
Balance Sheet Information (US$ millions)
|
As of 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
172
|
157
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
626
|
458
|
|
Inventories
|
620
|
539
|
|
Other current assets
|
125
|
65
|
|
Total current assets
|
1,543
|
1,219
|
|
Property and equipment, net
|
3,035
|
2,972
|
|
Total assets
|
4,578
|
4,191
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
1,495
|
1,395
|
|
Long-term debt
|
644
|
604
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,139
|
1,999
|
|
Common stock and paid in capital
|
1,652
|
1,652
|
|
Retained earnings
|
787
|
540
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
2,439
|
2,192
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
4,578
|
4,191
|
Income Statement Information (US$ millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Sales
|
4,346
|
4,161
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2,211
|
2,147
|
|
Depreciation and amortization expense
|
139
|
119
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expense
|
1,656
|
1,637
|
|
Interest expense
|
31
|
18
|
|
Income tax expense
|
62
|
48
|
|
Net income
|
247
|
192
|
Martinson finds the following information in the notes to the financial statements:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
John Martinson, CFA, is an equity analyst with a large pension fund. His supervisor, Linda Packard, asks him to write a report on Karp Inc. Karp prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Packard is particularly interested in the effects of the company’s use of the LIFO method to account for its inventory. For this purpose, Martinson collects the financial data presented in Exhibits F and G.
Balance Sheet Information (US$ millions)
|
As of 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
172
|
157
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
626
|
458
|
|
Inventories
|
620
|
539
|
|
Other current assets
|
125
|
65
|
|
Total current assets
|
1,543
|
1,219
|
|
Property and equipment, net
|
3,035
|
2,972
|
|
Total assets
|
4,578
|
4,191
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
1,495
|
1,395
|
|
Long-term debt
|
644
|
604
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,139
|
1,999
|
|
Common stock and paid in capital
|
1,652
|
1,652
|
|
Retained earnings
|
787
|
540
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
2,439
|
2,192
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
4,578
|
4,191
|
Income Statement Information (US$ millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Sales
|
4,346
|
4,161
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2,211
|
2,147
|
|
Depreciation and amortization expense
|
139
|
119
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expense
|
1,656
|
1,637
|
|
Interest expense
|
31
|
18
|
|
Income tax expense
|
62
|
48
|
|
Net income
|
247
|
192
|
Martinson finds the following information in the notes to the financial statements:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
John Martinson, CFA, is an equity analyst with a large pension fund. His supervisor, Linda Packard, asks him to write a report on Karp Inc. Karp prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Packard is particularly interested in the effects of the company’s use of the LIFO method to account for its inventory. For this purpose, Martinson collects the financial data presented in Exhibits F and G.
Balance Sheet Information (US$ millions)
|
As of 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
172
|
157
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
626
|
458
|
|
Inventories
|
620
|
539
|
|
Other current assets
|
125
|
65
|
|
Total current assets
|
1,543
|
1,219
|
|
Property and equipment, net
|
3,035
|
2,972
|
|
Total assets
|
4,578
|
4,191
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
1,495
|
1,395
|
|
Long-term debt
|
644
|
604
|
|
Total liabilities
|
2,139
|
1,999
|
|
Common stock and paid in capital
|
1,652
|
1,652
|
|
Retained earnings
|
787
|
540
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
2,439
|
2,192
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
4,578
|
4,191
|
Income Statement Information (US$ millions)
|
For Years Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Sales
|
4,346
|
4,161
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2,211
|
2,147
|
|
Depreciation and amortization expense
|
139
|
119
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expense
|
1,656
|
1,637
|
|
Interest expense
|
31
|
18
|
|
Income tax expense
|
62
|
48
|
|
Net income
|
247
|
192
|
Martinson finds the following information in the notes to the financial statements:
If Karp had used FIFO instead of LIFO, its reported net income for the year ended 31 December 2009 would have been higher by an amount closest to:
A. $30 million.
B. $38 million.
C. $155 million.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Robert Groff, an equity analyst, is preparing a report on Crux Corp. As part of his report, Groff makes a comparative financial analysis between Crux and its two main competitors, Rolby Corp. and Mikko Inc. Crux and Mikko report under U.S. GAAP and Rolby reports under IFRS.
Groff gathers information on Crux, Rolby, and Mikko. The relevant financial information he compiles is. Some information on the industry is.
Selected Financial Information (US$ millions)
To compare the financial performance of the three companies, Groff decides to convert LIFO figures into FIFO figures, and adjust figures to assume no valuation allowance is recognized by any company.
After reading Groff’s draft report, his supervisor, Rachel Borghi, asks him the following questions:
Question 1: Which company’s gross profit margin would best reflect current costs of the industry?
Question 2: Would Rolby’s valuation method show a higher gross profit margin than Crux’s under an inflationary, a deflationary, or a stable price scenario?
Question 3: Which group of ratios usually appears more favorable with an inventory write-down?
Crux’s inventory turnover ratio computed as of 31 December 2009, after the adjustments suggested by Groff, is closest to:
A. 5.67.
B. 5.83.
C. 6.13.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Robert Groff, an equity analyst, is preparing a report on Crux Corp. As part of his report, Groff makes a comparative financial analysis between Crux and its two main competitors, Rolby Corp. and Mikko Inc. Crux and Mikko report under U.S. GAAP and Rolby reports under IFRS.
Groff gathers information on Crux, Rolby, and Mikko. The relevant financial information he compiles is. Some information on the industry is.
Selected Financial Information (US$ millions)
To compare the financial performance of the three companies, Groff decides to convert LIFO figures into FIFO figures, and adjust figures to assume no valuation allowance is recognized by any company.
After reading Groff’s draft report, his supervisor, Rachel Borghi, asks him the following questions:
Question 1: Which company’s gross profit margin would best reflect current costs of the industry?
Question 2: Would Rolby’s valuation method show a higher gross profit margin than Crux’s under an inflationary, a deflationary, or a stable price scenario?
Question 3: Which group of ratios usually appears more favorable with an inventory write-down?
Rolby’s net profit margin for the year ended 31 December 2009, after the adjustments suggested by Groff, is closest to:
A. 6.01%.
B. 6.20%.
C. 6.28%.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Robert Groff, an equity analyst, is preparing a report on Crux Corp. As part of his report, Groff makes a comparative financial analysis between Crux and its two main competitors, Rolby Corp. and Mikko Inc. Crux and Mikko report under U.S. GAAP and Rolby reports under IFRS.
Groff gathers information on Crux, Rolby, and Mikko. The relevant financial information he compiles is. Some information on the industry is.
Selected Financial Information (US$ millions)
To compare the financial performance of the three companies, Groff decides to convert LIFO figures into FIFO figures, and adjust figures to assume no valuation allowance is recognized by any company.
After reading Groff’s draft report, his supervisor, Rachel Borghi, asks him the following questions:
Question 1: Which company’s gross profit margin would best reflect current costs of the industry?
Question 2: Would Rolby’s valuation method show a higher gross profit margin than Crux’s under an inflationary, a deflationary, or a stable price scenario?
Question 3: Which group of ratios usually appears more favorable with an inventory write-down?
The best answer to Borghi’s Question 1 is:
A. Crux’s.
B. Rolby’s.
C. Mikko’s.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Robert Groff, an equity analyst, is preparing a report on Crux Corp. As part of his report, Groff makes a comparative financial analysis between Crux and its two main competitors, Rolby Corp. and Mikko Inc. Crux and Mikko report under U.S. GAAP and Rolby reports under IFRS.
Groff gathers information on Crux, Rolby, and Mikko. The relevant financial information he compiles is. Some information on the industry is.
Selected Financial Information (US$ millions)
To compare the financial performance of the three companies, Groff decides to convert LIFO figures into FIFO figures, and adjust figures to assume no valuation allowance is recognized by any company.
After reading Groff’s draft report, his supervisor, Rachel Borghi, asks him the following questions:
Question 1: Which company’s gross profit margin would best reflect current costs of the industry?
Question 2: Would Rolby’s valuation method show a higher gross profit margin than Crux’s under an inflationary, a deflationary, or a stable price scenario?
Question 3: Which group of ratios usually appears more favorable with an inventory write-down?
The best answer to Borghi’s Question 3 is:
A. Activity ratios.
B. Solvency ratios.
C. Profitability ratios.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ZP Corporation is a (hypothetical) multinational corporation headquartered in Japan that trades on numerous stock exchanges. ZP prepares its consolidated financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Excerpts from ZP’s 2009 annual report are shown.
Consolidated Balance Sheets (¥ millions)
|
Year Ended 31 December
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
¥542,849
|
¥814,760
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Inventories
|
608,572
|
486,465
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current assets
|
4,028,742
|
3,766,309
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total assets
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
¥3,980,247
|
¥3,529,765
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total long-term liabilities
|
2,663,795
|
2,624,002
|
|
Minority interest in consolidated subsidiaries
|
218,889
|
179,843
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
3,956,509
|
3,353,736
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
Selected Disclosures in the 2009 Annual Report
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
“Cost reduction efforts were offset by increased prices of raw materials, other production materials and parts.”. . .“Inventories decreased during fiscal 2009 by ¥122.1 billion, or 20.1%, to ¥486.5 billion. This reflects the impacts of decreased sales volumes and fluctuations in foreign currency translation rates.”
Management and Corporate Information Risk Factors
Industry and Business Risks
The worldwide market for our products is highly competitive. ZP faces intense competition from other manufacturers in the respective markets in which it operates. Competition has intensified due to the worldwide deterioration in economic conditions. In addition, competition is likely to further intensify because of continuing globalization, possibly resulting in industry reorganization. Factors affecting competition include product quality and features, the amount of time required for innovation and development, pricing, reliability, safety, economy in use, customer service, and financing terms. Increased competition may lead to lower unit sales and excess production capacity and excess inventory. This may result in a further downward price pressure.
ZP’s ability to adequately respond to the recent rapid changes in the industry and to maintain its competitiveness will be fundamental to its future success in maintaining and expanding its market share in existing and new markets.
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
2. Summary of significant accounting policies: Inventories.
Inventories are valued at cost, not in excess of market. Cost is determined on the “average-cost” basis, except for the cost of finished products carried by certain subsidiary companies which is determined “last-in, first-out” (“LIFO”) basis. Inventories valued on the LIFO basis totaled ¥94,578 million and ¥50,037 million at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively. Had the “first-in, first-out” basis been used for those companies using the LIFO basis, inventories would have been ¥10,120 million and ¥19,660 million higher than reported at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively.
The MD&A indicated that the prices of raw material, other production materials, and parts increased. Based on the inventory valuation methods described in Note 2, which inventory classification would least accurately reflect current prices?
A. Raw materials
B. Finished goods
C. Work in process
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ZP Corporation is a (hypothetical) multinational corporation headquartered in Japan that trades on numerous stock exchanges. ZP prepares its consolidated financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Excerpts from ZP’s 2009 annual report are shown.
Consolidated Balance Sheets (¥ millions)
|
Year Ended 31 December
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
¥542,849
|
¥814,760
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Inventories
|
608,572
|
486,465
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current assets
|
4,028,742
|
3,766,309
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total assets
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
¥3,980,247
|
¥3,529,765
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total long-term liabilities
|
2,663,795
|
2,624,002
|
|
Minority interest in consolidated subsidiaries
|
218,889
|
179,843
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
3,956,509
|
3,353,736
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
Selected Disclosures in the 2009 Annual Report
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
“Cost reduction efforts were offset by increased prices of raw materials, other production materials and parts.”. . .“Inventories decreased during fiscal 2009 by ¥122.1 billion, or 20.1%, to ¥486.5 billion. This reflects the impacts of decreased sales volumes and fluctuations in foreign currency translation rates.”
Management and Corporate Information Risk Factors
Industry and Business Risks
The worldwide market for our products is highly competitive. ZP faces intense competition from other manufacturers in the respective markets in which it operates. Competition has intensified due to the worldwide deterioration in economic conditions. In addition, competition is likely to further intensify because of continuing globalization, possibly resulting in industry reorganization. Factors affecting competition include product quality and features, the amount of time required for innovation and development, pricing, reliability, safety, economy in use, customer service, and financing terms. Increased competition may lead to lower unit sales and excess production capacity and excess inventory. This may result in a further downward price pressure.
ZP’s ability to adequately respond to the recent rapid changes in the industry and to maintain its competitiveness will be fundamental to its future success in maintaining and expanding its market share in existing and new markets.
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
2. Summary of significant accounting policies: Inventories.
Inventories are valued at cost, not in excess of market. Cost is determined on the “average-cost” basis, except for the cost of finished products carried by certain subsidiary companies which is determined “last-in, first-out” (“LIFO”) basis. Inventories valued on the LIFO basis totaled ¥94,578 million and ¥50,037 million at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively. Had the “first-in, first-out” basis been used for those companies using the LIFO basis, inventories would have been ¥10,120 million and ¥19,660 million higher than reported at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively.
The 2008 inventory value as reported on the 2009 consolidated balance sheet if the company had used the FIFO inventory valuation method instead of the LIFO inventory valuation method for a portion of its inventory would be closest to:
A. ¥104,698 million.
B. ¥506,125 million.
C. ¥618,692 million.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ZP Corporation is a (hypothetical) multinational corporation headquartered in Japan that trades on numerous stock exchanges. ZP prepares its consolidated financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP. Excerpts from ZP’s 2009 annual report are shown.
Consolidated Balance Sheets (¥ millions)
|
Year Ended 31 December
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
¥542,849
|
¥814,760
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Inventories
|
608,572
|
486,465
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current assets
|
4,028,742
|
3,766,309
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total assets
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
¥3,980,247
|
¥3,529,765
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total long-term liabilities
|
2,663,795
|
2,624,002
|
|
Minority interest in consolidated subsidiaries
|
218,889
|
179,843
|
|
Total shareholders equity
|
3,956,509
|
3,353,736
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
¥10,819,440
|
¥9,687,346
|
Selected Disclosures in the 2009 Annual Report
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
“Cost reduction efforts were offset by increased prices of raw materials, other production materials and parts.”. . .“Inventories decreased during fiscal 2009 by ¥122.1 billion, or 20.1%, to ¥486.5 billion. This reflects the impacts of decreased sales volumes and fluctuations in foreign currency translation rates.”
Management and Corporate Information Risk Factors
Industry and Business Risks
The worldwide market for our products is highly competitive. ZP faces intense competition from other manufacturers in the respective markets in which it operates. Competition has intensified due to the worldwide deterioration in economic conditions. In addition, competition is likely to further intensify because of continuing globalization, possibly resulting in industry reorganization. Factors affecting competition include product quality and features, the amount of time required for innovation and development, pricing, reliability, safety, economy in use, customer service, and financing terms. Increased competition may lead to lower unit sales and excess production capacity and excess inventory. This may result in a further downward price pressure.
ZP’s ability to adequately respond to the recent rapid changes in the industry and to maintain its competitiveness will be fundamental to its future success in maintaining and expanding its market share in existing and new markets.
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
2. Summary of significant accounting policies: Inventories.
Inventories are valued at cost, not in excess of market. Cost is determined on the “average-cost” basis, except for the cost of finished products carried by certain subsidiary companies which is determined “last-in, first-out” (“LIFO”) basis. Inventories valued on the LIFO basis totaled ¥94,578 million and ¥50,037 million at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively. Had the “first-in, first-out” basis been used for those companies using the LIFO basis, inventories would have been ¥10,120 million and ¥19,660 million higher than reported at 31 December 2008 and 2009, respectively.
What is the least likely reason why ZP may need to change its accounting policies regarding inventory at some point after 2009?
A. The U.S. SEC is likely to require companies to use the same inventory valuation method for all inventories.
B. The U.S. SEC is likely to prohibit the use of one of the methods ZP currently uses for inventory valuation.
C. One of the inventory valuation methods used for U.S. tax purposes may be repealed as an acceptable method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The textbook website has a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet titled payroll_problem.xls. This spreadsheet is used by Naltner Company to calculate its biweekly payroll. Using the information in that spreadsheet, calculate all details for the February 22, 2013, payroll. Hours worked by each employee are contained in the first worksheet. The following four worksheets contain details for each of the three employees and a total for the three employees. The sixth and last worksheet contains federal tax withholding tables to calculate federal tax to withhold. Calculate the gross pay and deductions for all three employees.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Flozner Company is a small manufacturing firm with 60 employees in seven departments. When the need arises for new workers in the plant, the departmental manager interviews applicants and hires on the basis of those interviews. The manager has each new employee complete a withholding form. The manager then writes the rate of pay on the W-4 and forwards it to payroll.
When workers arrive for their shift, they pull their time cards from a holder near the door and keep the time card with them during the day to complete the start and end times of their work day. On Friday, the time cards are removed from the holder and taken to payroll by any employee who is not busy that morning. If there were any pay rate changes for the payroll period due to raises or promotions, the manager calls the payroll department to inform payroll of these rate changes.
Using the rate changes and the time cards, the payroll department prepares the checks from the regular bank account of the Flozner Company. The manager of the payroll department signs the checks, and the checks are then forwarded to each department manager for distribution to employees.
Required:
Describe any improvements you would suggest to strengthen the payroll internal controls at Flozner.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alomna Industries has payroll processes as described in the following paragraphs:
When a new employee is hired, the human resources department completes a personnel action form and forwards it to the payroll department. The form contains information such as pay rate, number of exemptions for tax purposes, and the type and amount of payroll deductions. When an employee is terminated or voluntarily separates from Alomna, the human resources department completes a personnel action form to indicate separation and forwards it to the payroll department.
Each employee in the production department maintains his own time card weekly. Employees fill out their time cards in ink each day, and at the end of the week, the time cards are forwarded to the payroll department. Employees in the payroll department use the time cards and employee records to prepare a weekly paycheck for each employee who has turned in a time card. A copy of the payroll checks is forwarded to the accounts payable department, and the original payroll checks are forwarded to the cash disbursements department to be signed. The payroll department updates the payroll subsidiary ledger. After the paychecks are signed, they are given to department supervisors to distribute. Any unclaimed checks are returned to the payroll department.
Required:
- Prepare a process map of the payroll processes at Alomna.
- Identify both internal control strengths and internal control weaknesses of the payroll processes.
- For any internal control weaknesses, describe suggested improvements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breightner Enterprises is a midsize manufacturing company with 120 employees and approximately 45 million dollars in sales. Management has established a set of processes to purchase fixed assets, described in the following paragraphs:
When a user department determines that it may be necessary to purchase a new fixed asset, the departmental manager prepares an asset request form. When completing the form, the manager must describe the fixed asset, the advantages or efficiencies offered by the asset, and estimates of costs and benefits. The asset request form is forwarded to the director of finance. Personnel in the finance department review estimates of costs and benefits and revise these if necessary. A discounted cash flow analysis is prepared and forwarded to the vice president of operations, who reviews the asset request forms and the discounted cash flow analysis, and then interviews user department managers if she feels it is warranted. After this review, she selects assets to purchase until she has exhausted the funds in the capital budget.
When an asset purchase has been approved by the VP of operations, a buyer looks up prices and completes a purchase order. The purchase order is mailed to the vendor, and a copy is forwarded to accounts payable. The fixed asset is delivered directly to the user department so that it can be installed and used as quickly as possible. The user department completes a receiving report and forwards a copy to accounts payable. If the invoice, purchase order, and receiving report match, payment is approved and cash disbursements prepares and mails a check.
The accounts payable department updates the accounts payable subsidiary ledger and the fixed asset spreadsheet file.
Required:
- Identify any internal control strengths and weaknesses in the fixed asset processes at Breightner. Explain why each is a strength or weakness.
- For each internal control weakness, describe improvement(s) in the processes that you would recommend to address the weakness.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Grundoll Company has the following processes related to fixed assets: When a department manager determines a need for a new fixed asset, he prepares a purchase requisition, which is forwarded to the chief financial officer. If the requested fixed asset purchase will not exceed remaining funds in the capital budget, the CFO approves the purchase and forwards the requisition to the purchasing department.
The purchasing agent assigned to purchase the fixed assets begins phoning vendors until she finds a vendor selling the requested asset. The purchase order is prepared and mailed to the vendor. Vendors are instructed to deliver the fixed asset to the requesting department.
A copy of the invoice is forwarded to the fixed asset department to record the asset details. Personnel determine the estimated life and salvage value by looking up the last similar asset purchase and using the previous estimated life and salvage value.
Required:
Describe any improvements you would suggest to strengthen the fixed asset internal controls at Grundoll.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rophna Co. makes automobile parts for sale to major automobile manufacturers in the United States. The following information is available regarding internal controls over machinery and equipment:
When a departmental supervisor needs a new item of machinery or equipment, he or she must initiate a purchase request. The acquisition proposal must be presented to the plant manager. If the plant manager agrees with the need, he must review the corporate budget allocation for his plant to determine the availability of funds to cover the acquisition. If the allocation is sufficient, the departmental supervisor is notified of the approval and a purchase requisition is prepared and forwarded to the purchasing department.
Upon receipt of a purchase requisition for machinery and equipment, the purchasing department researches the company records in order to locate an appropriate vendor. A purchase order is then completed and mailed to the vendor.
As soon as new machinery or equipment is received from the vendor, it is immediately sent to the department for installation. Bellott”s policy is to place new assets into service as soon as possible so that the company may immediately begin to realize the economic benefits from the acquisition.
The property accounting department is responsible for maintaining property, plant, and equipment ledger control accounts. The ledger is supported by lapsing schedules that are used to compute depreciation. These lapsing schedules are organized by year of acquisition so that depreciation computations can be prepared in units that combine all assets of the same type that were acquired the same year. Standard depreciation methods, rates, and salvage values were determined ten years ago and have been used consistently since that time.
When machinery or equipment is retired or replaced, the plant manager notifies the property accounting department so that the proper adjustments can be made to the ledger and lapsing schedules. No regular reconciliation between the physical assets on hand and the accounting records has been performed.
Required:
Identify any internal control weaknesses and suggest improvements to strengthen the internal controls over machinery and equipment at Rophna.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst is interested in assessing both the efficiency and liquidity of Spherion PLC. The analyst has collected the following data for Spherion:
|
|
FY3
|
FY2
|
FYI
|
|
Days of inventory on hand
|
32
|
34
|
40
|
|
Days sales outstanding
|
28
|
25
|
23
|
|
Number of days of payables
|
40
|
35
|
35
|
Based on this data, what is the analystleast likelyto conclude?
A. Inventory management has contributed to improved liquidity.
B. Management of payables has contributed to improved liquidity.
C. Management of receivables has contributed to improved liquidity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst observes the following data for two companies:
|
Company A
|
Company B
|
|
Revenue
|
$4,500
|
$6,000
|
|
Net income
|
$50
|
$1,000
|
|
Current assets
|
$40,000
|
$60,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$100,000
|
$700,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$10,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Total debt
|
$60,000
|
$150,000
|
|
shareholders equity
|
$30,000
|
$500,000
|
Which of the following choicesbestdescribes reasonable conclusions that the analyst might make about the two companies’ ability to pay their current and long-term obligations?
A. Company A’s current ratio of 4.0 indicates it is more liquid than Company B, whose current ratio is only 1.2, but Company B is more solvent, as indicated by its lower debt-to-equity ratio.
B. Company A’s current ratio of 0.25 indicates it is less liquid than Company B, whose current ratio is 0.83, and Company A is also less solvent, as indicated by a debt-to-equity ratio of 200 percent compared with Company B’s debt-to-equity ratio of only 30 percent.
C. Company A’s current ratio of 4.0 indicates it is more liquid than Company B, whose current ratio is only 1.2, and Company A is also more solvent, as indicated by a debt-to-equity ratio of 200 percent compared with Company B’s debt-to-equity ratio of only 30 percent.
The following information relates to Questions 12 through 15.
The data in Exhibit A appear in the five-year summary of a major international company. A business combination with another major manufacturer took place in FY13.
|
|
FY10
|
FYI 1
|
FY12
|
FY13
|
FY14
|
|
Financial mcmcn ES
Income statements
|
GBP m
|
GBP m
|
GBP m
|
GBP in
|
GBP m
|
|
Revenue
|
4.390
|
3.624
|
3.717
|
8.167
|
11,366
|
|
Profit before interest and taxation (EDIT)
|
844
|
700
|
704
|
933
|
1.579
|
|
Net interest payable
|
—80
|
—54
|
—98
|
—163
|
—188
|
|
Taxation
|
—186
|
—195
|
—208
|
—349
|
—579
|
|
Minorities
|
—94
|
—99
|
—105
|
—125
|
—167
|
|
Profit for the year
|
484
|
352
|
293
|
2%
|
645
|
|
Balance sheets
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fixcd asses
|
3.510
|
3.667
|
4,758
|
10.431
|
11.483
|
|
Current asset investments. cash at bank and in hand
|
316
|
218
|
290
|
561
|
682
|
|
Other current assets
|
558
|
514
|
643
|
1,258
|
1,634
|
|
Total assets
|
4,384
|
4,399
|
5,691
|
12,250
|
13.799
|
|
!mesa bearing debt (long term)
|
—602
|
—1,053
|
—1,535
|
—3,523
|
—3,707
|
|
Other aeditors and provisions (current)
|
—1,223
|
—1,054
|
—1,102
|
—2,377
|
—3,108
|
|
Total liabilities
|
—1,825
|
—2,107
|
—2,637
|
—5,900
|
—6.815
|
|
Net assets
|
2,559
|
2,292
|
3.054
|
6.350
|
6.984
|
|
Shareholders fiends
|
2,161
|
2.006
|
2,309
|
5.572
|
6.165
|
|
Equity minority interests
|
398
|
2%
|
745
|
778
|
819
|
|
Capital employed
|
2,559
|
2,292
|
3,054
|
6,350
|
6,984
|
|
Cash flow
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Working capital movements
|
—53
|
5
|
71
|
85
|
107
|
|
Net cash inflow from operating activities
|
864
|
859
|
975
|
1,568
|
2,292
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The company’s total assets at year-end FY9 were GBP 3,500 million. Which of the following choicesbestdescribes reasonable conclusions an analyst might make about the company’s efficiency?
A. Comparing FY14 with FY10, the company’s efficiency improved, as indicated by a total asset turnover ratio of 0.86 compared with 0.64.
B. Comparing FY14 with FY10, the company’s efficiency deteriorated, as indicated by its current ratio.
C. Comparing FY14 with FY10, the company’s efficiency deteriorated due to asset growth faster than turnover revenue growth.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following choicesbestdescribes reasonable conclusions an analyst might make about the company’s profitability?
A. Comparing FY14 with FY10, the company’s profitability improved, as indicated by an increase in its debt-to-assets ratio from 0.14 to 0.27.
B. Comparing FY14 with FY10, the company’s profitability deteriorated, as indicated by a decrease in its net profit margin from 11.0 percent to 5.7 percent.
C. Comparing FY14 with FY10, the company’s profitability improved, as indicated by the growth in its shareholders equity to GBP 6,165 million.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A decomposition of ROE for Integra SA is as follows:
|
FY12
|
FY11
|
|
ROE
|
18.90%
|
18.90%
|
|
Tax burden
|
0.70
|
0.75
|
|
Interest burden
|
0.90
|
0.90
|
|
EBIT margin
|
10.00%
|
10.00%
|
|
Asset turnover
|
1.50
|
1.40
|
|
Leverage
|
2.00
|
2.00
|
Which of the following choicesbestdescribes reasonable conclusions an analyst might make based on this ROE decomposition?
A. Profitability and the liquidity position both improved in FY12.
B. The higher average tax rate in FY12 offset the improvement in profitability, leaving ROE unchanged.
C. The higher average tax rate in FY12 offset the improvement in efficiency, leaving ROE unchanged.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A decomposition of ROE for Company A and Company B is as follows:
|
|
|
Company A
|
|
Company B
|
|
FY15
|
FY14
|
FY15
|
FY14
|
|
ROE
|
26.46%
|
18.90%
|
26.33%
|
18.90%
|
|
Tax burden
|
0.7
|
0.75
|
0.75
|
0.75
|
|
Interest burden
|
0.9
|
0.9
|
0.9
|
0.9
|
|
EBIT margin
|
7.00%
|
10.00%
|
13.00%
|
10.00%
|
|
Asset turnover
|
1.5
|
1.4
|
1.5
|
1.4
|
|
Leverage
|
4
|
2
|
2
|
2
|
An analyst ismost likelyto conclude that:
A. Company A’s ROE is higher than Company B’s in FY15, and one explanation consistent with the data is that Company A may have purchased new, more efficient equipment.
B. Company A’s ROE is higher than Company B’s in FY15, and one explanation consistent with the data is that Company A has made a strategic shift to a product mix with higher profit margins.
C. The difference between the two companies’ ROE in FY15 is very small and Company A’s ROE remains similar to Company B’s ROE mainly due to Company A increasing its financial leverage.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acme Enterprises, a hypothetical company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS, manufactures tables. In 2009, the factory produced 900,000 finished tables and scrapped 1,000 tables. For the finished tables, raw material costs were €9 million, direct labor conversion costs were €18 million, and production overhead costs were €1.8 million. The 1,000 scrapped tables (attributable to abnormal waste) had a total production cost of €30,000 (€10,000 raw material costs and €20,000 conversion costs; these costs are not included in the €9 million raw material and €19.8 million total conversion costs of the finished tables). During the year, Acme spent €1 million for freight delivery charges on raw materials and €500,000 for storing finished goods inventory. Acme does not have any work-in-progress inventory at the end of the year.
1. What costs should be included in inventory in 2009?
2. What costs should be expensed in 2009?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If GSI (the company in Example 9-2) had used a perpetual inventory system, the timing of purchases and sales would affect the amounts of cost of sales and inventory. Following is a record of the purchases, sales, and quantity of inventory on hand after the transaction in 2009.
|
Date
|
Purchased
|
Sold
|
Inventory on Hand
|
|
5 January
|
100,000 kg at 110 yuan/kg
|
|
100,000 kg
|
|
1 February
|
|
80,000 kg at 240 yuan/kg
|
20,000 kg
|
|
8 March
|
200,000 kg at 100 yuan/kg
|
|
220,000 kg
|
|
6 April
|
|
100,000 kg at 240 yuan/kg
|
120,000 kg
|
|
23 May
|
|
60,000 kg at 240 yuan/kg
|
60,000 kg
|
|
7 July
|
|
40,000 kg at 240 yuan/kg
|
20,000 kg
|
|
2 August
|
300,000 kg at 90 yuan/kg
|
|
320,000 kg
|
|
5 September
|
|
70,000 kg at 240 yuan/kg
|
250,000 kg
|
|
17 November
|
|
90,000 kg at 240 yuan/kg
|
160,000 kg
|
|
8 December
|
|
80,000 kg at 240 yuan/kg
|
80,000 kg
|
|
|
Total goods available for sale = 58,000,000 yuan
|
Total sales = 124,800,000 yuan
|
|
The amounts for total goods available for sale and sales are the same under either the perpetual or periodic system in this first year of operation. The carrying amount of the ending inventory, however, may differ because the perpetual system will apply LIFO continuously throughout the year. Under the periodic system, it was assumed that the ending inventory was composed of 80,000 units of the oldest inventory, which cost 110 yuan/kg.
What are the ending inventory, cost of sales, and gross profit amounts using the perpetual system and the LIFO method? How do these compare with the amounts using the periodic system and the LIFO method?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Company L and Company F are identical in all respects except that Company L uses the LIFO method and Company F uses the FIFO method. Each company has been in business for five years and maintains a base inventory of 2,000 units each year. Each year, except the first year, the number of units purchased equaled the number of units sold. Over the five year period, unit sales increased 10 percent each year and the unit purchase and selling prices increased at the beginning of each year to reflect inflation of 4 percent per year. In the first year, 20,000 units were sold at a price of $15.00 per unit and the unit purchase price was $8.00.
1. What was the end of year inventory, sales, cost of sales, and gross profit for each company for each of the five years?
2. Compare the inventory turnover ratios (based on ending inventory carrying amounts) and gross profit margins over the five year period and between companies.
Note that if the company sold more units than it purchased in a year, inventory would decrease. This is referred to as LIFO liquidation. The cost of sales of the units sold in excess of those purchased would reflect the inventory carrying amount. In this example, each unit sold in excess of those purchased would have a cost of sales of $8 and a higher gross profit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following excerpts are from the 2007 10-K of Sturm Ruger & Co., Inc. (NYSE:RGR):
Item 7—Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
“Reduction in inventory generated positive cash flow for the Company, partially offset by the tax impact of the consequent LIFO liquidation, which generated negative cash flow as it created taxable income, resulting in higher tax payments.”
Balance Sheets
|
Year Ended December 31 (In thousands, except per share data)
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Assets
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Gross inventories: Less LIFO reserve Less excess and obsolescence reserve
|
64,330 (46,890) (4,143)
|
87,477 (57,555) (5,516)
|
|
Net inventories
|
13,297
|
24,406
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
73,512
|
81,785
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total Assets
|
$101,882
|
$117,066
|
Statements of Income
|
Year Ended December 31(In thousands, except per share data)
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total net sales
|
156,485
|
167,620
|
|
Cost of products sold
|
117,186
|
139,610
|
|
Gross profit
|
39,299
|
28,010
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total expenses
|
30,184
|
27,088
|
|
Operating income
|
9,115
|
922
|
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total other income, net
|
7,544
|
921
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
16,659
|
1,843
|
|
Income taxes
|
6,330
|
739
|
|
Net income
|
$10,329
|
$1,104
|
|
Basic and Diluted Earnings Per Share
|
$0.46
|
$0.04
|
|
Cash Dividends Per Share
|
$0.00
|
$0.00
|
Notes to Financial Statements
1. Significant Accounting Policies
?
Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost, principally determined by the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method, or market. If inventories had been valued using the first-in, first-out method, inventory values would have been higher by approximately $46.9 million and $57.6 million at December 31, 2007 and 2006, respectively. During 2007 and 2006, inventory quantities were reduced. This reduction resulted in a liquidation of LIFO inventory quantities carried at lower costs prevailing in prior years as compared with the current cost of purchases, the effect of which decreased costs of products sold by approximately $12.1 million and $7.1 million in 2007 and 2006, respectively. There was no LIFO liquidation in 2005.
1. What is the decrease in the LIFO reserve on the balance sheet? How much less was the cost of products sold in 2007, because of LIFO liquidation, according to the note disclosure?
2. How did the decreased cost of products sold compare to operating income in 2007?
3. How did the LIFO liquidation affect cash flows?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acme Enterprises, a hypothetical company, manufactures computers and prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. In 2008, the cost of ending inventory was €5.2 million but its net realizable value was €4.9 million. The current replacement cost of the inventory is €4.7 million. This figure exceeds the net realizable value less a normal profit margin. In 2009, the net realizable value of Acme’s inventory was €0.5 million greater than the carrying amount.
1. What was the effect of the write-down on Acme’s 2008 financial statements? What was the effect of the recovery on Acme’s 2009 financial statements?
2. Under U.S. GAAP, what would be the effects of the write-down on Acme’s 2008 financial statements and of the recovery on Acme’s 2009 financial statements?
3. What would be the effect of the recovery on Acme’s 2009 financial statements if Acme’s inventory were agricultural products instead of computers?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Using CAT’s LIFO numbers as reported and FIFO adjusted numbers and Volvo’s numbers as reported (Example 9-9), compare the following for 2008: inventory turnover ratio, days of inventory on hand, gross profit margin, net profit margin, return on assets, current ratio, total liabilities-to-equity ratio, and return on equity. For the current ratio, include current provisions as part of current liabilities. For the total liabilities-to-equity ratio, include provisions in total liabilities.
2. How much do inventories represent as a component of total assets for CAT using LIFO numbers as reported and FIFO adjusted numbers, and for Volvo using reported numbers in 2007 and 2008? Discuss any changes that would concern an analyst.
3. Using the reported numbers, compare the 2007 and 2008 growth rates of CAT and Volvo for sales, finished goods inventory, and inventories other than finished goods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following excerpts commenting on inventory management are from the Volvo Group Annual Report, 2008:
From the CEO Comment: “In a declining economy, it is extremely important to act quickly to reduce the Group’s cost level and ensure we do not build inventories, since large inventories generally lead to pressure on prices.”. . .“During the second half of the year, we implemented sharp production cutbacks to lower inventories of new trucks and construction equipment as part of efforts to maintain our product prices, which represent one of the most important factors in securing favorable profitability in the future. We have been successful in these efforts. During the fourth quarter, inventories of new trucks declined 13% and of new construction equipment by 19%. During the beginning of 2009, we have continued to work diligently and focused to reduce inventories to the new, lower levels of demand that prevail in most of our markets, and for most of our products.”
From the Board of Directors’ Report 2008: “Inventory reduction contributed to positive operating cash flow of SEK 1.8 billion in Industrial Operations.”. . .“The value of inventories increased during 2008 by SEK 11.4 billion. Adjusted for currency changes, the increase amounted to SEK 5.8 billion. The increase is mainly related to the truck operations and to construction equipment and is an effect of the rapidly weakening demand during the second half of the year.”. . .“In order to reduce the capital tied-up in inventory, a number of shutdown days in production were carried out during the end of year. Measures aimed at selling primarily trucks and construction equipment in inventory were prioritized. These measures have continued during the beginning of 2009.” and “Overcapacity within the industry can occur if there is a lack of demand, potentially leading to increased price pressure.”
From Business Areas 2008 (Ambitions 2009): “Execute on cost reduction and adjust production to ensure inventory levels in line with demand.”
Assume inventory write-downs are reported as part of cost of sales. Based on the previous excerpts, discuss the anticipated direction of the following for 2009 compared to 2008:
1. Inventory carrying amounts
2. Inventory turnover ratio
3. Sales
4. Gross profit margin
5. Return on assets
6. Current ratio
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If a manufacturing company”s inventory of supplies consists of a large number of small items, which of the following would be considered a weakness in internal controls?
- Supplies of relatively low value are expensed when acquired.
- Supplies are physically counted on a cycle basis, whereby limited counts occur quarterly and each item is counted at least once annually.
- The stores function is responsible for updating perpetual records whenever inventory items are moved.
- Perpetual records are maintained for inventory items only if they are significant in value.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The bank portion of the bank reconciliation for Langer Company at November 30, 2014, was as follows.
|
LANGER COMPANY Bank Reconciliation November 30, 2014
|
|
Cash balance per bank
|
|
$14,367.90
|
|
Add: Deposits in transit
|
|
2,530.20
|
|
|
|
16,898.10
|
|
Less: Outstanding checks
Check Number
|
Check Amount
|
|
|
3451
|
$2,260.40
|
|
|
3470
|
720.10
|
|
|
3471
|
844.50
|
|
|
3472
|
1,426.80
|
|
|
3474
|
1,050.00
|
6,301.80
|
|
Adjusted cash balance per bank
|
|
$10,596.30
|
The adjusted cash balance per bank agreed with the cash balance per books at November 30.
The December bank statement showed the following checks and deposits.
|
Bank Statement
|
|
|
Checks
|
|
|
Deposits
|
|
Date
|
Number
|
Amount
|
Date
|
Amount
|
|
12-1
|
3451
|
$ 2,260.40
|
12-1
|
$ 2,530.20
|
|
12-2
|
3471
|
844.50
|
12-4
|
1,211.60
|
|
12-7
|
3472
|
1,426.80
|
12-8
|
2,365.10
|
|
12-4
|
3475
|
1,640.70
|
12-16
|
2,672.70
|
|
12-8
|
3476
|
1,300.00
|
12-21
|
2,945.00
|
|
12-10
|
3477
|
2,130.00
|
12-26
|
2,567.30
|
|
12-15
|
3479
|
3,080.00
|
12-29
|
2,836.00
|
|
12-27
|
3480
|
600.00
|
12-30
|
1,025.00
|
|
12-30
|
3482
|
475.50
|
Total
|
$18,152.90
|
|
12-29
|
3483
|
1,140.00
|
|
|
|
|
|
12-31
|
3485
|
540.80
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
$15,438.70
|
|
|
The cash records per books for December showed the following.
|
Cash Payments Journal
|
|
Date
|
Number
|
Amount
|
Date
|
Number
|
Amount
|
|
12-1
|
3475
|
$1,640.70
|
12-20
|
3482
|
$ 475.50
|
|
12-2
|
3476
|
1,300.00
|
12-22
|
3483
|
1,140.00
|
|
12-2
|
3477
|
2,130.00
|
12-23
|
3484
|
798.00
|
|
12-4
|
3478
|
621.30
|
12-24
|
3485
|
450.80
|
|
12-8
|
3479
|
3,080.00
|
12-30
|
3486
|
889.50
|
|
12-10
|
3480
|
600.00
|
Total
|
|
$13,933.20
|
|
12-17
|
3481
|
807.40
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash Receipts Journal
|
|
Date
|
Amount
|
|
12-3
|
$1,211.60
|
|
12-7
|
2,365.10
|
|
12-15
|
2,672.70
|
|
12-20
|
2,954.00
|
|
12-25
|
2,567.30
|
|
12-28
|
2,836.00
|
|
12-30
|
1,025.00
|
|
12-31
|
1,690.40
|
|
Total
|
$17,322.10
|
The bank statement contained two memoranda:
- A credit of $5,145 for the collection of a $5,000 note for Langer Company plus interest of $160 and less a collection fee of $15. Langer Company has not accrued any interest on the note.
- A debit of $572.80 for an NSF check written by L. Rees, a customer. At December 31, the check had not been re deposited in the bank.
At December 31, the cash balance per books was $12,485.20, and the cash balance per the bank statement was $20,154.30. The bank did not make any errors, but two errors were made by Langer Company.
Instructions
(a)Using the four steps in the reconciliation procedure, prepare a bank reconciliation at December 31.
(b)Prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation. (Hint:The correction of any errors pertaining to recording checks should be made to Accounts Payable. The correction of any errors relating to recording cash receipts should be made to Accounts Receivable.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rondelli Middle School wants to raise money for a new sound system for its auditorium. The primary fund-raising event is a dance at which the famous disc jockey D.J. Sound will play classic and not-so-classic dance tunes. Matt Ballester, the music and theater instructor, has been given the responsibility for coordinating the fund-raising efforts. This is Matt”s first experience with fund-raising. He decides to put the eighth-grade choir in charge of the event; he will be a relatively passive observer.
Matt had 500 unnumbered tickets printed for the dance. He left the tickets in a box on his desk and told the choir students to take as many tickets as they thought they could sell for $5 each. In order to ensure that no extra tickets would be floating around, he told them to dispose of any unsold tickets. When the students received payment for the tickets, they were to bring the cash back to Matt and he would put it in a locked box in his desk drawer.
Some of the students were responsible for decorating the gymnasium for the dance. Matt gave each of them a key to the money box and told them that if they took money out to purchase materials, they should put a note in the box saying how much they took and what it was used for. After 2 weeks the money box appeared to be getting full, so Matt asked Jeff Kenney to count the money, prepare a deposit slip, and deposit the money in a bank account Matt had opened.
The day of the dance, Matt wrote a check from the account to pay the DJ. D.J. Sound, however, said that he accepted only cash and did not give receipts. So Matt took $200 out of the cash box and gave it to D.J. At the dance, Matt had Sam Copper working at the entrance to the gymnasium, collecting tickets from students, and selling tickets to those who had not pre purchased them. Matt estimated that 400 students attended the dance.
The following day, Matt closed out the bank account, which had $250 in it, and gave that amount plus the $180 in the cash box to Principal Finke. Principal Finke seemed surprised that, after generating roughly $2,000 in sales, the dance netted only $430 in cash. Matt did not know how to respond.
Instructions
Identify as many internal control weaknesses as you can in this scenario, and suggest how each could be addressed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Davaney Genetics Company of Milwaukee, Wisconsin, spreads herbicides and applies liquid fertilizer for local farmers. On May 31, 2014, the company”s Cash account per its general ledger showed the following balance.
|
Cash NO. 101
|
|
Date
|
Explanation
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
31-May
|
Balance
|
|
|
|
13,287
|
The bank statement from Milwaukee State Bank on that date showed the following balance.
|
MILWAUKEE STATE BANK
|
|
Checks and Debits
|
Deposits and Credits
|
Daily Balance
|
|
XXX
|
XXX
|
5/31 13,332
|
A comparison of the details on the bank statement with the details in the Cash account revealed the following facts.
- The statement included a debit memo of $35 for the printing of additional company checks.
- Cash sales of $1,720 on May 12 were deposited in the bank. The cash receipts journal entry and the deposit slip were incorrectly made for $1,820. The bank credited Davaney Genetics Company for the correct amount.
- Outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $1,225, and deposits in transit were $2,600.
- On May 18, the company issued check no. 1181 for $911 to J. Tallgrass on account. The check, which cleared the bank in May, was incorrectly journalized and posted by Davaney Genetics Company for $119.
- A $4,500 note receivable was collected by the bank for Davaney Genetics Company on May 31 plus $80 interest. The bank charged a collection fee of $25. No interest has been accrued on the note.
- Included with the cancelled checks was a check issued by Morray Company to Terry Irvin for $900 that was incorrectly charged to Davaney Genetics Company by the bank.
- On May 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $1,308 for a check issued by Peter Reser, a customer, to Davaney Genetics Company on account.
Instructions
(a)Prepare the bank reconciliation at May 31, 2014.
(b)Prepare the necessary adjusting entries for Davaney Genetics Company at May 31, 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The bank portion of the bank reconciliation for Phillips Company at October 31, 2014, was as follows.
|
Cash balance per bank
|
$6,000
|
|
|
Add: Deposits in transit
|
842
|
|
|
6,842
|
|
|
Less: Outstanding checks
|
|
|
|
Check Number
|
Check Amount
|
|
|
2451
|
$700
|
|
|
2470
|
396
|
|
|
2471
|
464
|
|
|
2472
|
270
|
|
|
2474
|
578
|
|
|
|
2,408
|
|
Adjusted cash balance per bank
|
|
$4,434
|
The adjusted cash balance per bank agreed with the cash balance per books at October 31.
The November bank statement showed the following checks and deposits:
|
Bank Statement
|
|
|
Checks
|
Deposits
|
|
|
Date
|
Number
|
Amount
|
Date
|
Amount
|
|
|
11-1
|
2470
|
$ 396
|
11-1
|
$ 842
|
|
|
11-2
|
2471
|
464
|
11-4
|
666
|
|
|
11-5
|
2474
|
578
|
11-8
|
545
|
|
|
11-4
|
2475
|
903
|
11-13
|
1,416
|
|
|
11-8
|
2476
|
1,556
|
11-18
|
810
|
|
|
11-10
|
2477
|
330
|
11-21
|
1,624
|
|
|
11-15
|
2479
|
980
|
11-25
|
1,412
|
|
|
11-18
|
2480
|
714
|
11-28
|
908
|
|
|
11-27
|
2481
|
382
|
11-30
|
652
|
|
|
11-30
|
2483
|
317
|
Total
|
$8,875
|
|
|
11-29
|
2486
|
495
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
$7,115
|
|
|
|
The cash records per books for November showed the following.
|
|
|
Cash Payments Journal
|
|
|
Cash Receipts Journal
|
|
|
Date
|
Number
|
Amount
|
Date
|
Number
|
Amount
|
Date
|
Amount
|
|
|
11-1
|
2475
|
$ 903
|
11-20
|
2483
|
$317
|
|
11-3
|
$666
|
|
|
11-2
|
2476
|
1,556
|
11-22
|
2484
|
460
|
|
11-7
|
545
|
|
|
11-2
|
2477
|
330
|
11-23
|
2485
|
525
|
|
11-12
|
1,416
|
|
|
11-4
|
2478
|
300
|
11-24
|
2486
|
495
|
|
11-17
|
810
|
|
|
11-8
|
2479
|
890
|
11-29
|
2487
|
210
|
|
11-20
|
1,642
|
|
|
11-10
|
2480
|
714
|
11-30
|
2488
|
635
|
|
11-24
|
1,412
|
|
|
11-15
|
2481
|
382
|
Total
|
|
$8,067
|
|
11-27
|
908
|
|
|
11-18
|
2482
|
350
|
|
|
|
11-29
|
652
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11-30
|
2,541
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
$10,592
|
|
The bank statement contained two bank memoranda:
- A credit of $2,375 for the collection of a $2,300 note for Phillips Company plus interest of $91 and less a collection fee of $16. Phillips Company has not accrued any interest on the note.
- A debit for the printing of additional company checks $34.
At November 30, the cash balance per books was $5,958, and the cash balance per the bank statement was $9,100. The bank did not make any errors, but two errors were made by Phillips Company.
Instructions
(a)Using the four steps in the reconciliation procedure described, prepare a bank reconciliation at November 30.
(b)Prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation. (Hint:The correction of any errors pertaining to recording checks should be made to Accounts Payable. The correction of any errors relating to recording cash receipts should be made to Accounts Receivable.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gamel Company is a very profitable small business. It has not, however, given much consideration to internal control. For example, in an attempt to keep clerical and office expenses to a minimum, the company has combined the jobs of cashier and bookkeeper. As a result, Jan Worthy handles all cash receipts, keeps the accounting records, and prepares the monthly bank reconciliations.
The balance per the bank statement on October 31, 2014, was $15,313. Outstanding checks were: no. 62 for $107.74, no. 183 for $127.50, no. 284 for $215.26, no. 862 for $132.10, no. 863 for $192.78, and no. 864 for $140.49. Included with the statement was a credit memorandum of $460 indicating the collection of a note receivable for Gamel Company by the bank on October 25. This memorandum has not been recorded by Gamel Company.
The company”s ledger showed one cash account with a balance of $18,608.81. The balance included un deposited cash on hand. Because of the lack of internal controls, Jan took for personal use all of the un deposited receipts in excess of $3,226.18. She then prepared the following bank reconciliation in an effort to conceal her theft of cash.
|
BANK RECONCILIATION
|
|
Cash balance per books, October 31 Add: Outstanding checks
|
|
$18,608.81
|
|
No. 862
|
$132.10
|
|
|
No. 863
|
192.78
|
|
|
No. 864
|
140.49
|
390.37
|
|
|
|
18,999.18
|
|
Less: Un deposited receipts
|
|
3,226.18
|
|
Unadjusted balance per bank, October 31
|
|
15,773.00
|
|
Less: Bank credit memorandum
|
|
460.00
|
|
Cash balance per bank statement, October 31
|
|
$15,313.00
|
Instructions
(a)Prepare a correct bank reconciliation.
(b)Indicate the three ways that Jan attempted to conceal the theft and the dollar amount pertaining to each method.
(c)What principles of internal control were violated in this case?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 1, 2014, Fullerton Company had the following account balances.
|
Cash
|
Debit
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
Credit
|
|
$18,200
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
2,200
|
Equipment
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
7,500
|
Accounts Payable
|
6,100
|
|
Inventory
|
16,000
|
Owner”s Capital
|
64,400
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
1,600
|
|
$73,500
|
|
Equipment
|
28,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$73,500
|
|
|
During December, the company completed the following transactions.
|
Dec. 7
|
Received $3,600 cash from customers in payment of account (no discount allowed).
|
|
12
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Vance Co. $12,000, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
17
|
Sold merchandise on account $16,000, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $10,000.
|
|
19
|
Paid salaries $2,200.
|
|
22
|
Paid Vance Co. in full, less discount.
|
|
26
|
Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on December 17.
|
|
31
|
Received $2,700 cash from customers in payment of account (no discount allowed).
|
Adjustment data:
- Depreciation $200 per month.
- Insurance expired $400.
Instructions
(a)Journalize the December transactions. (Assume a perpetual inventory system.)
(b)Enter the December 1 balances in the ledger T-accounts and post the December transactions. Use Cost of Goods Sold, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, Sales Revenue, and Sales Discounts.
(c)The statement from Jackson County Bank on December 31 showed a balance of $26,130. A comparison of the bank statement with the Cash account revealed the following facts.
- The bank collected a note receivable of $2,200 for Fullerton Company on December 15.
- The December 31 receipts were deposited in a night deposit vault on December 31. These deposits were recorded by the bank in January.
- Checks outstanding on December 31 totaled $1,210.
- On December 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $680 for a check received by the company from L. Bryan, a customer, on account.
(d)Journalize the adjusting entries resulting from the bank reconciliation and adjustment data.
(e)Post the adjusting entries to the ledger T-accounts.
(f)Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
(g)Prepare an income statement for December and a classified balance sheet at December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part 1Natalie is struggling to keep up with the recording of her accounting transactions. She is spending a lot of time marketing and selling mixers and giving her cookie classes. Her friend John is an accounting student who runs his own accounting service. He has asked Natalie if she would like to have him do her accounting. John and Natalie meet and discuss her business.
Part 2Natalie decides that she cannot afford to hire John to do her accounting. One way that she can ensure that her cash account does not have any errors and is accurate and up-to-date is to prepare a bank reconciliation at the end of each month. Natalie would like you to help her.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- “s financial statements are presented. Financial statements ofWal-Mart Stores, Inc. are presented. Instructions for accessing and using the complete annual reports of Amazon and Wal-Mart, including the notes to the financial statements, are also provided in Appendices D and E, respectively.
Instructions
(a)Based on the information contained in these financial statements, determine each of the following for each company:
(1)Cash and cash equivalents balance at December 31, 2011, for Amazon and at January 31, 2012, for Wal-Mart.
(2)Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents from 2011 to 2010.
(3)Net cash provided by operating activities during the year ended December 31, 2011, for Amazon and January 31, 2012, for Wal-Mart from statement of cash flows.
(b)What conclusions concerning the management of cash can be drawn from these data?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As a new auditor for the CPA firm of Eaton, Quayle, and Hale, you have been assigned to review the internal controls over mail cash receipts of Pritchard Company. Your review reveals the following. Checks are promptly endorsed “For Deposit Only,” but no list of the checks is prepared by the person opening the mail. The mail is opened either by the cashier or by the employee who maintains the accounts receivable records. Mail receipts are deposited in the bank weekly by the cashier.
Instructions
Write a letter to Danny Peak, owner of Pritchard Company, explaining the weaknesses in internal control and your recommendations for improving the system.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are the assistant controller in charge of general ledger accounting at Linbarger Bottling Company. Your company has a large loan from an insurance company. The loan agreement requires that the company”s cash account balance be maintained at $200,000 or more, as reported monthly.
At June 30, the cash balance is $80,000, which you report to Lisa Infante, the financial vice president. Lisa excitedly instructs you to keep the cash receipts book open for one additional day for purposes of the June 30 report to the insurance company. Lisa says, “If we don”t get that cash balance over $200,000, we”ll default on our loan agreement. They could close us down, put us all out of our jobs!” Lisa continues, “I talked to Oconto Distributors (one of Linbarger”s largest customers) this morning. They said they sent us a check for $150,000 yesterday. We should receive it tomorrow. If we include just that one check in our cash balance, we”ll be in the clear. It”s in the mail!”
Instructions
(a)Who will suffer negative effects if you do not comply with Lisa Infante”s instructions? Who will suffer if you do comply?
(b)What are the ethical considerations in this case?
(c)What alternatives do you have?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brule Co. has been in business five years. The unadjusted trial balance at the end of the current year shows:
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$30,000 Dr.
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
$180,000 Cr.
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
$2,000 Dr.
|
Brule estimates bad debts to be 10% of receivables. Prepare the entry necessary to adjust Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
Report receivables at their cash (net) realizable value.
Estimate the amount the company does not expect to collect.
Consider the existing balance in the allowance account when using the percentage-of-receivables basis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mehl Wholesalers Co. has been expanding faster than it can raise capital. According to its local banker, the company has reached its debt ceiling. Mehl”s suppliers (creditors) are demanding payment within 30 days of the invoice date for goods acquired, but Mehl”s customers are slow in paying (60–90 days). As a result, Mehl has a cash flow problem.
Mehl needs $120,000 in cash to safely cover next Friday”s payroll. Its balance of outstanding accounts receivable totals $750,000. To alleviate this cash crunch, Mehl sells $125,000 of its receivables on September 7, 2014. Record the entry that Mehl would make when it raises the needed cash. (Assume a 1% service charge.)
To speed up the collection of cash, sell receivables to a factor.
Calculate service charge expense as a percentage of the factored receivables.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gambit Stores accepts from Leonard Co. a $3,400, 90-day, 6% note dated May 10 in settlement of Leonard”s overdue account. (a) What is the maturity date of the note? (b) What entry does Gambit make at the maturity date, assuming Leonard pays the note and interest in full at that time?
Count the exact number of days to determine the maturity date. Omit the date the note is issued, but include the due date.
Determine whether interest was accrued.
Compute the accrued interest.
Prepare the entry for payment of the note and interest.
The entry to record interest at maturity in this solution assumes no interest has been previously accrued on this note.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In 2014, Phil Mickelson Company has net credit sales of $923,795 for the year. It had a beginning accounts receivable (net) balance of $38,275 and an ending accounts receivable (net) balance of $35,988. Compute Phil Mickelson Company”s (a) accounts receivable turnover and (b) average collection period in days.
Review the formula to compute the accounts receivable turnover.
Make sure that both the beginning and ending accounts receivable balances are considered in the computation.
Review the formula to compute the average collection period in days.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following selected transactions relate to Dylan Company.
|
Mar. 1
|
Sold $20,000 of merchandise to Potter Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
11
|
Received payment in full from Potter Company for balance due on existing accounts receivable.
|
|
12
|
Accepted Juno Company”s $20,000, 6-month, 12% note for balance due.
|
|
13
|
Made Dylan Company credit card sales for $13,200.
|
|
15
|
Made Visa credit card sales totaling $6,700. A 3% service fee is charged by Visa.
|
|
Apr. 11
|
Sold accounts receivable of $8,000 to Harcot Factor. Harcot Factor assesses a service charge of 2% of the amount of receivables sold.
|
|
13
|
Received collections of $8,200 on Dylan Company credit card sales and added finance charges of 1.5% to the remaining balances.
|
|
May 10
|
Wrote off as uncollectible $16,000 of accounts receivable. Dylan uses the percentage-of-sales basis to estimate bad debts.
|
|
June 30
|
Credit sales recorded during the first 6 months total $2,000,000. The bad debt percentage is 1% of credit sales. At June 30, the balance in the allowance account is $3,500 before adjustment.
|
|
July 16
|
One of the accounts receivable written off in May was from J. Simon, who pays the amount due, $4,000, in full.
|
Instructions
Prepare the journal entries for the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Blinka Retailers accepted $50,000 of Citibank Visa credit card charges for merchandise sold on July 1. Citibank charges 4% for its credit card use. The entry to record this transaction by Blinka Retailers will include a credit to Sales Revenue of $50,000 and a debit(s) to:
|
Cash
|
$48,000
|
|
Service Charge Expense
|
$2,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$48,000
|
|
Service Charge Expense
|
$2,000
|
|
Cash
|
$50,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$50,000
|
One of the following statements about promissory notes is incorrect. Theincorrectstatement is:
(a)The party making the promise to pay is called the maker.
(b)The party to whom payment is to be made is called the payee.
(c)A promissory note is not a negotiable instrument.
(d)A promissory note is often required from high-risk customers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute the missing amounts for each of the following notes.
|
Principal
|
Annual Interest Rate
|
Time
|
Total Interest
|
|
?
|
9%
|
120 days
|
$ 450
|
|
$30,000
|
10%
|
3years
|
?
|
|
$60,000
|
?
|
5 months
|
$1,500
|
|
$45,000
|
8%
|
?
|
$1,200
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute interest and find the maturity date for the following notes.
|
|
Date of Note
|
Principal
|
Interest Rate (%)
|
Terms
|
|
(a)
|
June 10
|
$80,000
|
6%
|
60 days
|
|
(b)
|
July 14
|
$64,000
|
7%
|
90 days
|
|
(c)
|
April 27
|
$12,000
|
8%
|
75 days
|
Determine maturity dates and compute interest and rates on notes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wynn Distributors is a growing company whose ability to raise capital has not been growing as quickly as its expanding assets and sales. Wynn”s local banker has indicated that the company cannot increase its borrowing for the foreseeable future. Wynn”s suppliers are demanding payment for goods acquired within 30 days of the invoice date, but Wynn”s customers are slow in paying for their purchases (60–90 days). As a result, Wynn has a cash flow problem.
Wynn needs $160,000 to cover next Friday”s payroll. Its balance of outstanding accounts receivable totals $1,000,000. To alleviate this cash crunch, Wynn sells $200,000 of its receivables. Record the entry that Wynn would make when it raises the needed cash. (Assume a 3% service charge.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following is a time sheet completed by an hourly wage earner at Halfrid, Inc.:
|
Name: Janice Katteler
|
|
Pay Period Ending: 05/02/07
|
|
SSP 222-55-6666
|
Approval: I0TI3
|
| |
IN
|
8:02
|
M
|
|
|
OUT
|
11:40
|
M
|
|
|
IN
|
12:34
|
M
|
|
|
OUT
|
17:02
|
M
|
| |
IN
|
8:00
|
T
|
|
|
OUT
|
11:45
|
T
|
|
|
IN
|
12:44
|
T
|
|
|
OUT
|
17:01
|
T
|
| |
IN
|
8:11
|
W
|
|
|
OUT
|
11:30
|
W
|
|
|
IN
|
12:15
|
W
|
|
|
OUT
|
17:00
|
W
|
| |
IN
|
7:57
|
Th
|
|
|
OUT
|
11:44
|
Th
|
|
|
IN
|
12:52
|
Th
|
|
|
OUT
|
17:16
|
Th
|
| |
IN
|
12:01
|
F
|
|
|
OUT
|
16:15
|
F
|
|
|
IN
|
17:10
|
F
|
|
|
OUT
|
2105
|
F
|
| |
IN
|
900
|
Sa
|
|
|
OUT
|
12:04
|
Sa
|
|
|
IN
|
|
|
|
|
OUT
|
|
|
| |
IN
|
|
|
|
|
OUT
|
|
|
|
|
IN
|
|
|
|
|
OUT
|
|
|
Use Microsoft Excel to perform the following tasks:
- Design an appropriate format for a data entry screen that could be used in the payroll department to enter information from this time sheet in the company”s payroll software program.
- Prepare a payroll journal with the column headings shown in the next table. Enter the relevant information from the preceding time sheet onto this journal and calculate gross pay, federal withholdings, and net pay. Use two lines for this employee, and assume that the pay rate is $19.75 per hour, with time-and-a-half for overtime. (Overtime applies to any time worked over 40 hours within one week.) Use the following withholding rates: FICA (Social Security)—6.2 percent of gross pay; Medicare—1.45 percent of gross pay; federal income taxes—20 percent. Assume no additional withholdings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Monahan Manufacturing, Inc.: balance sheets for December 31, 2011 and 2012 (in thousands of dollars)
|
December 31
|
|
2011
|
2012
|
|
ASSETS
|
|
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$1,790
|
$1,620
|
|
Accounts Receivables
|
4,730
|
5,260
|
|
Inventories
|
5,020
|
6,040
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
$11,540
|
$12,920
|
|
Noncurrent Assets
|
|
|
|
Land
|
$2,970
|
$3,150
|
|
Buildings and Equipment
|
43,390
|
47,730
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
19,870
|
21,820
|
|
Total Noncurrent Assets
|
$26,490
|
$29,060
|
|
Total Assets
|
$38,030
|
$41,980
|
|
LIABILITIES and shareholders EQUITY
|
|
|
|
Current Liablities
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$2,060
|
$2,790
|
|
Taxes Payable
|
1,370
|
1,450
|
|
Other Short-term Payables
|
2,940
|
3,630
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
$6,370
|
$7,870
|
|
Noncurrent Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Long-term Loans
|
$9,920
|
$9,670
|
|
shareholders Equity
|
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
$8,360
|
$8,520
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
13,380
|
15,920
|
|
Total shareholders Equity
|
$21,740
|
$24,440
|
|
Total Liabilities and shareholders Equity
|
$38,030
|
$41,980
|
- Net income for 2012 was $2840.
- Dividends declared and paid were $300.
- Depreciation expense on buildings and machinery was $2550 for the year.
- The firm sold for $125 machinery originally costing $750 and accumulated depreciation of $600.
- The firm retired bonds during the year at their book value.
Required
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Monahan Manufacturing for 2012 using the indirect method to compute cash flow from operations. Comment on the pattern of cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Apple Inc. (NasdaqGS: AAPL) and Dell Inc. (NasdaqGS: DELL) engage in the design, manufacture, and sale of computer hardware and related products and services. Selected financial data for 2007 through 2009 for these two competitors follow here. Apple’s fiscal year (FY) ends on the final Saturday in September (for example, FY2009 ended on 26 September 2009). Dell’s fiscal year ends on the Friday nearest 31 January (for example, FY2009 ended on 29 January 2010 and FY2007 ended on 1 February 2008).
|
Selected Financial Data for Apple (dollars in millions)
|
|
Fiscal year
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Net silts
|
42,905
|
37,491
|
24,578
|
|
Gross margin
|
17,222
|
13,197
|
8,152
|
|
Operating income
|
11,740
|
8,327
|
4,407
|
|
Selected Financial Data for Dell (dollars in millions)
|
|
|
|
Fiscal year
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Net sales
|
52,902
|
61,101
|
61,133
|
|
Gross margin
|
9,261
|
10,957
|
11,671
|
|
Operating inoame
|
2,172
|
3,19D
|
3,440
|
Apple reported a 53 percent increase in net sales from FY2007 to FY2008 and a further increase in FY2009 of approximately 14 percent. Gross margin increased 62 percent from FY2007 to FY2008 and increased 30 percent from FY2008 to FY2009. From FY2007 to FY2009, the gross margin more than doubled. Also, the company’s operating income almost tripled over the three-year period. From FY2007 to 2009, Dell reported a decrease in sales, gross margin, and operating income.
What caused Apple’s dramatic growth in sales and operating income and Dell’s comparatively sluggish performance? One of the most important factors was the introduction of innovative and stylish products, the linkages with iTunes, and expansion of the distinctive Apple stores. Among the company’s most important and most successful new products was the iPhone. Apple’s 2009 10-K indicates that iPhone unit sales grew 78 percent from 11.6 million units in 2008 to 20.7 million units in 2009. By 2009, the company’s revenues from iPhones and related services had grown to $13.0 billion and were nearly as large as the company’s $13.8 billion revenues from sales of Mac computers. The new products and linkages among the products not only increased demand but also increased the potential for higher pricing. As a result, gross profit margins and operating profit margins increased over the period because costs did not increase at the same pace as sales. Moreover, the company’s products revolutionized the delivery channel for music and video. The financial results reflect a successful execution of the company’s strategy to deliver integrated, innovative products by controlling the design and development of both hardware and software.
Dell continued to concentrate in the personal computer market, which arguably is in the market maturity stage of the product life cycle. Dell’s results are consistent with a market maturity stage where industry sales level off and competition increases so that industry profits decline. With increased competition, some companies cannot compete and drop out of the market.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst is examining the profitability of three Asian companies with large shares of the global personal computer market: Acer Inc. (Taiwan SE: ACER), Lenovo Group Limited (HKSE: 0992), and Toshiba Corporation (Tokyo SE: 6502). Taiwan-based Acer has pursued a strategy of selling its products at affordable prices. In contrast, China-based Lenovo aims to achieve higher selling prices by stressing the high engineering quality of its personal computers for business use. Japan-based Toshiba is a conglomerate with varied product lines in addition to computers. For its personal computer business, one aspect of Toshiba’s strategy has been to focus on laptops only, in contrast with other manufacturers that also make desktops. Acer reports in New Taiwan dollars (TW$), Lenovo reports in U.S. dollars (US$), and Toshiba reports in Japanese yen (JP¥). For Acer, fiscal year end is 31 December. For both Lenovo and Toshiba, fiscal year end is 31 March; thus, for these companies, FY2009 ended 31 March 2010.
The analyst collects the data shown inExhibit 7-2. Use this information to answer the following questions:
1. Which of the three companies is largest based on the amount of revenue, in US$, reported in fiscal year 2009? For FY2009, assume the relevant, average exchange rates were 32.2 TW$/US$ and 92.5 JPY/US$.
2. Which company had the highest revenue growth from FY2005 to FY2009?
3. How do the companies compare, based on profitability?
|
Acer
TWS millions
|
FY20 05
|
FY2006
|
FY2007
|
FY2008
|
FY2009
|
|
Revenue
|
318,088
|
350,816
|
462,066
|
546,274
|
573,983
|
|
Gross profit
|
34,121
|
38,171
|
47,418
|
57,286
|
58,328
|
|
Net income
|
8,478
|
10,218
|
12,959
|
11,742
|
11,353
|
|
Lenovo
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
US$ millions
|
FY2005
|
FY2006
|
FY2007
|
FY2008
|
FY2009
|
|
Revenue
|
13,276
|
14,590
|
16,352
|
14,901
|
16,605
|
|
Gross profit
|
1,858
|
2,037
|
2,450
|
1,834
|
1,790
|
|
Net income (Loss)
|
22
|
161
|
484
|
(226)
|
129
|
|
Toshiba
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
JPi millions
|
FY20 05
|
FY2006
|
FY2007
|
FY2008
|
FY2009
|
|
Revenue
|
6,343,506
|
7,116,350
|
7,665,332
|
6,654,518
|
6,38 1,599
|
|
Gross profit
|
1,683,711
|
1,804,171
|
1,908,729
|
1,288,431
|
1,459,3 62
|
|
Net income (Loss)
|
78,186
|
137,429
|
127,413
|
(343,559)
|
(19,743)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A U.S. insurance company reports that its “combined ratio” is determined by dividing losses and expenses incurred by net premiums earned. It reports the following combined ratios:
|
Fiscal Year 5
|
4
|
3
|
2
|
1
|
|
Combined ratio 90.1%
|
104.00%
|
98.50%
|
104.10%
|
101.10%
|
Explain what this ratio is measuring and compare the results reported for each of the years shown in the chart. What other information might an analyst want to review before making any conclusions on this information?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst has computed the average DSO for Lenovo for fiscal years ended 31 March 2010 and 2009:
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Days of sales outstanding
|
16.5
|
15.2
|
Revenue increased from US$14.901 billion for fiscal year ended 31 March 2009 (FY2008) to US$16.605 billion for fiscal year ended 31 March 2010 (FY2009). The analyst would like to better understand the change in the company’s DSO from FY2008 to FY2009 and whether the increase is indicative of any issues with the customers’ credit quality. The analyst collects accounts receivable aging information from Lenovo’s annual reports and computes the percentage of accounts receivable by days outstanding. This information is presented.
|
|
FY2009
|
FY2008
|
FY2007
|
|
US$000
|
Percent
|
US$000
|
Percent
|
US$000
|
Percent
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0-30 days
|
907,412
|
8739%
|
391,098
|
76.41%
|
691,428
|
8932%
|
|
31-60 days
|
65,335
|
6.29%
|
9,014
|
1.76%
|
0
|
0.00%
|
|
61-90 days
|
32,730
|
3.15%
|
21,515
|
4.20%
|
32,528
|
4.20%
|
|
Over 90 days
|
32,904
|
3.17%
|
90,214
|
17.63%
|
50,168
|
6.48%
|
|
Total
|
1,038,381
|
100.00%
|
511,841
|
100.00%
|
774,124
|
100.00%
|
|
Less: Provision fin impairment
|
—17,319
|
—1.67%
|
—29,755
|
—5.81%
|
—13,885
|
—1.79%
|
|
Trade receivables, net
|
1,021,062
|
98.33%
|
482,086
|
94.19%
|
760,239
|
98.21%
|
|
Total sales
|
16604,815
|
|
14,900,931
|
|
16351,503
|
|
These data indicate that total accounts receivable more than doubled in FY2009 versus FY2008, while total sales increased by only 11.4 percent. This suggests that, overall, the company has been increasing customer financing to drive its sales growth. The significant increase in accounts receivable in total was the primary reason for the increase in DSO. The percentage of receivables older than 61 days has declined significantly which is generally positive. However, the large increase in 0–30 day receivables may be indicative of aggressive accounting policies or sales practices. Perhaps Lenovo offered incentives to generate a large amount of year-end sales. While the data may suggest that the quality of receivables improved in FY2009 versus FY2008, with a much lower percentage of receivables (and a much lower absolute amount) that are more than 90 days outstanding and, similarly, a lower percentage of estimated uncollectible receivables, this should be investigated further by the analyst.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The previous example focused on the cash conversion cycle, which many companies identify as a key performance metric. The less positive the number of days in the cash conversion cycle, typically, the better it is considered to be. However, is this always true?
This example considers the following question: If a larger negative number of days in a cash conversion cycle is considered to be a desirable performance metric, does identifying a company with a large negative cash conversion cycle necessarily imply good performance?
Using the Compustat database, the company identified as the U.S. computer technology company with the most negative number of days in its cash conversion cycle during the 2005 to 2009 period is National Data computer Inc. (OTC: NDCP), which had a negative cash conversion cycle of 275.5 days in 2008.
The reason for the negative cash conversion cycle is that the company’s accounts payable increased substantially over the period. An increase from approximately 66 days in 2005 to 295 days in 2008 to pay trade creditors is clearly a negative signal. In addition, the company’s inventories disappeared, most likely because the company did not have enough cash to purchase new inventory and was unable to get additional credit from its suppliers.
|
Fiscal year
|
2004
|
2005
|
2006
|
2007
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Saks
|
3.248
|
2.672
|
2.045
|
1.761
|
1.820
|
1.723
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1.919
|
1.491
|
0.898
|
1.201
|
1316
|
1.228
|
|
Receivables, Total
|
0.281
|
0.139
|
0.099
|
0.076
|
0.115
|
0.045
|
|
Inventories, Total
|
0.194
|
0.176
|
0.010
|
0.002
|
0.000
|
0.000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
0.223
|
0.317
|
0.366
|
1.423
|
0.704
|
0.674
|
|
DSO
|
|
28.69
|
21.24
|
18.14
|
19.15
|
16.95
|
|
DOH
|
|
45.29
|
37.80
|
1.82
|
0.28
|
0.00
|
|
Las: Number of days of payables*
|
|
66.10
|
138.81
|
271.85
|
294.97
|
204.79
|
|
Equals: Cash conversion cycle
|
|
7.88
|
—79.77
|
—251.89
|
—275.54
|
—187.84
|
Of course, an analyst would have immediately noted the negative trends in these data, as well as additional data throughout the company’s financial statements. In its MD&A, the company clearly reports the risks as follows:
Because we have historically had losses and only a limited amount of cash has been generated from operations, we have funded our operating activities to date primarily from the sale of securities and from the sale of a product line in 2009. In order to continue to fund our operations, we may need to raise additional capital, through the sale of securities. We cannot be certain that any such financing will be available on acceptable terms, or at all. Moreover, additional equity financing, if available, would likely be dilutive to the holders of our common stock, and debt financing, if available, would likely involve restrictive covenants and a security interest in all or substantially all of our assets. If we fail to obtain acceptable financing when needed, we may not have sufficient resources to fund our normal operations which would have a material adverse effect on our business.
IF WE ARE UNABLE TO GENERATE ADEQUATE WORKING CAPITAL FROM OPERATIONS OR RAISE ADDITIONAL CAPITAL THERE IS SUBSTANTIAL DOUBT ABOUT THE COMPANY’S ABILITY TO CONTINUE AS A GOING CONCERN.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following control procedures are used at Torres Company for over-the-counter cash receipts.
- To minimize the risk of robbery, cash in excess of $100 is stored in an unlocked attaché case in the stock room until it is deposited in the bank.
- All over-the-counter receipts are registered by three clerks who use a cash register with a single cash drawer.
- The company accountant makes the bank deposit and then records the day”s receipts.
- At the end of each day, the total receipts are counted by the cashier on duty and reconciled to the cash register total.
- Cashiers are experienced; they are not bonded.
Instructions
(a)For each procedure, explain the weakness in internal control, and identify the control principle that is violated.
(b)For each weakness, suggest a change in procedure that will result in good internal control.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At Danner Company, checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and the treasurer are authorized to issue checks. Each signer has access to unissued checks kept in an unlocked file cabinet. The purchasing agent pays all bills pertaining to goods purchased for resale. Prior to payment, the purchasing agent determines that the goods have been received and verifies the mathematical accuracy of the vendor”s invoice. After payment, the invoice is filed by the vendor name, and the purchasing agent records the payment in the cash disbursements journal. The treasurer pays all other bills following approval by authorized employees. After payment, the treasurer stamps all bills PAID, files them by payment date, and records the checks in the cash disbursements journal. Danner Company maintains one checking account that is reconciled by the treasurer.
Instructions
(a)List the weaknesses in internal control over cash disbursements.
(b)Write a memo to the company treasurer indicating your recommendations for improvement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Listed below are five procedures followed by Eikenberry Company.
- Several individuals operate the cash register using the same register drawer.
- A monthly bank reconciliation is prepared by someone who has no other cash responsibilities.
- Joe Cockrell writes checks and also records cash payment journal entries.
- One individual orders inventory, while a different individual authorizes payments.
- Unnumbered sales invoices from credit sales are forwarded to the accounting department every four weeks for recording.
Instructions
|
Procedure
|
IC Good or Weak?
|
Related Internal Control Principle
|
|
1
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
5
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Listed below are five procedures followed by Gilmore Company.
- Employees are required to take vacations.
- Any member of the sales department can approve credit sales.
- Paul Jaggard ships goods to customers, bills customers, and receives payment from customers.
- Total cash receipts are compared to bank deposits daily by someone who has no other cash responsibilities.
- Time clocks are used for recording time worked by employees.
Instructions
Indicate whether each procedure is an example of good internal control or of weak internal control. If it is an example of good internal control, indicate which internal control principle is being followed. If it is an example of weak internal control, indicate which internal control principle is violated. Use the table below.
|
Procedure
|
IC Good or Weak?
|
Related Internal Control Principle
|
|
1
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
5
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Setterstrom Company established a petty cash fund on May 1, cashing a check for $100. The company reimbursed the fund on June 1 and July 1 with the following results.
June 1: Cash in fund $1.75. Receipts: delivery expense $31.25; postage expense $39.00; and miscellaneous expense $25.00.
July 1: Cash in fund $3.25. Receipts: delivery expense $21.00; entertainment expense $51.00; and miscellaneous expense $24.75.
On July 10, Setterstrom increased the fund from $100 to $130.
Instructions
Prepare journal entries for Setterstrom Company for May 1, June 1, July 1, and July 10.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Horvath Company uses an imprest petty cash system. The fund was established on March 1 with a balance of $100. During March, the following petty cash receipts were found in the petty cash box.
|
Date
|
Receipt No.
|
For
|
Amount
|
|
3/5
|
1
|
Stamp Inventory
|
$39
|
|
7
|
2
|
Freight-Out
|
21
|
|
9
|
3
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
6
|
|
11
|
4
|
navel Expense
|
24
|
|
14
|
5
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
5
|
The fund was replenished on March 15 when the fund contained $2 in cash. On March 20, the amount in the fund was increased to $175.
Instructions
Journalize the entries in March that pertain to the operation of the petty cash fund.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Don Wyatt is unable to reconcile the bank balance at January 31. Don”s reconciliation is as follows.
|
Cash balance per bank
|
$3,560.20
|
|
Add: NSF check
|
490.00
|
|
Less: Bank service charge
|
25.00
|
|
Adjusted balance per bank
|
$4,025.20
|
|
Cash balance per books
|
$3,875.20
|
|
Less: Deposits in transit
|
530.00
|
|
Add: Outstanding checks
|
730.00
|
|
Adjusted balance per books
|
$4,075.20
|
Instructions
(a)Prepare a correct bank reconciliation.
(b)Journalize the entries required by the reconciliation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Crane Video Company.
- Cash balance per bank, July 31, $7,263.
- July bank service charge not recorded by the depositor $28.
- Cash balance per books, July 31, $7,284.
- Deposits in transit, July 31, $1,300.
- Bank collected $700 note for Crane in July, plus interest $36, less fee $20. The collection has not been recorded by Crane, and no interest has been accrued.
- Outstanding checks, July 31, $591.
Instructions
(a)Prepare a bank reconciliation at July 31.
(b)Journalize the adjusting entries at July 31 on the books of Crane Video Company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The information below relates to the Cash account in the ledger of Minton Company.
Balance September 1—$17,150;Cash deposited—$64,000.
Balance September 30—$17,404; Checks written—$63,746.
The September bank statement shows a balance of $16,422 on September 30 and the following memoranda.
|
Credits
|
|
Debits
|
|
|
Collection of $2,500 note plus interest $30
|
$2,530
|
NSF check: Richard Nance
|
$425
|
|
Interest earned on checking account
|
$45
|
Safety deposit box rent
|
$65
|
Instructions
(a)Prepare the bank reconciliation at September 30.
(b)Prepare the adjusting entries at September 30, assuming (1) the NSF check was from a customer on account, and (2) no interest had been accrued on the note.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cash records of Dawes Company show the following four situations.
- The June 30 bank reconciliation indicated that deposits in transit total $920. During July, the general ledger account Cash shows deposits of $15,750, but the bank statement indicates that only $15,600 in deposits were received during the month.
- The June 30 bank reconciliation also reported outstanding checks of $680. During the month of July, Dawes Company”s books show that $17,200 of checks were issued. The bank statement showed that $16,400 of checks cleared the bank in July.
- In September, deposits per the bank statement totaled $26,700, deposits per books were $26,400, and deposits in transit at September 30 were $2,100.
- In September, cash disbursements per books were $23,700, checks clearing the bank were $25,000, and outstanding checks at September 30 were $2,100.
There were no bank debit or credit memoranda. No errors were made by either the bank or Dawes Company.
Instructions
Answer the following questions.
(a)In situation (1), what were the deposits in transit at July 31?
(b)In situation (2), what were the outstanding checks at July 31?
(c)In situation (3), what were the deposits in transit at August 31?
(d)In situation (4), what were the outstanding checks at August 31?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wynn Company has recorded the following items in its financial records.
|
Cash in bank
|
$ 42,000
|
|
Cash in plant expansion fund
|
100,000
|
|
Cash on hand
|
12,000
|
|
Highly liquid investments
|
34,000
|
|
Petty cash
|
500
|
|
Receivables from customers
|
89,000
|
|
Stock investments
|
61,000
|
The highly liquid investments had maturities of 3 months or less when they were purchased. The stock investments will be sold in the next 6 to 12 months. The plant expansion project will begin in 3 years.
Instructions
(a)What amount should Wynn report as “Cash and cash equivalents” on its balance sheet?
(b)Where should the items not included in part (a) be reported on the balance sheet?
(c)What disclosures should Wynn make in its financial statements concerning “cash and cash equivalents”?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bolz Office Supply Company recently changed its system of internal control over cash disbursements. The system includes the following features.
Instead of being unnumbered and manually prepared, all checks must now be pre-numbered and written by using the new check-writing machine purchased by the company. Before a check can be issued, each invoice must have the approval of Kathy Moon, the purchasing agent, and Robin Self, the receiving department supervisor. Checks must be signed by either Jennifer Edwards, the treasurer, or Rich Woodruff, the assistant treasurer. Before signing a check, the signer is expected to compare the amount of the check with the amount on the invoice.
After signing a check, the signer stamps the invoice PAID and inserts within the stamp, the date, check number, and amount of the check. The “paid” invoice is then sent to the accounting department for recording.
Blank checks are stored in a safe in the treasurer”s office. The combination to the safe is known only by the treasurer and assistant treasurer. Each month, the bank statement is reconciled with the bank balance per books by the assistant chief accountant. All employees who handle or account for cash are bonded.
Instructions
Identify the internal control principles and their application to cash disbursements of Bolz Office Supply Company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Forney Company maintains a petty cash fund for small expenditures. The following transactions occurred over a 2-month period.
|
July1
|
Established petty cash fund by writing a check on Scranton Bank for $200.
|
|
15
|
Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $196.00. On this date the fund consisted of $4.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight-out $92.00, postage expense $42.40, entertainment expense $46.60, and miscellaneous expense $11.20.
|
|
31
|
Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $192.00. At this date, the fund consisted of $8.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight-out $82.10, charitable contributions expense $45.00, postage expense $25.50, and miscellaneous expense $39.40.
|
|
Aug. 15
|
Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $187.00. On this date, the fund consisted of $13.00 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: freight-out $77.60, entertainment expense $43.00, postage expense $33.00, and miscellaneous expense $37.00.
|
|
16
|
Increased the amount of the petty cash fund to $300 by writing a check for $100.
|
|
31
|
Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $284.00. On this date, the fund consisted of $16 in cash and the following petty cash receipts: postage expense $140.00, travel expense $95.60, and freight-out $47.10.
|
Instructions
(a)Journalize the petty cash transactions.
(b)Post to the Petty Cash account.
(c)What internal control features exist in a petty cash fund?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 31, 2014, Reber Company had a cash balance per books of $6,781.50. The bank statement from New York State Bank on that date showed a balance of $6,404.60. A comparison of the statement with the Cash account revealed the following facts.
- The statement included a debit memo of $40 for the printing of additional company checks.
- Cash sales of $836.15 on May 12 were deposited in the bank. The cash receipts journal entry and the deposit slip were incorrectly made for $886.15. The bank credited Reber Company for the correct amount.
- Outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $576.25. Deposits in transit were $2,416.15.
- On May 18, the company issued check No. 1181 for $685 to Lynda Carsen on account. The check, which cleared the bank in May, was incorrectly journalized and posted by Reber Company for $658.
- A $3,000 note receivable was collected by the bank for Reber Company on May 31 plus $80 interest. The bank charged a collection fee of $20. No interest has been accrued on the note.
- Included with the cancelled checks was a check issued by Stiner Company to Ted Cress for $800 that was incorrectly charged to Reber Company by the bank.
- On May 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $680 for a check issued by Sue Allison, a customer, to Reber Company on account.
Instructions
(a)Prepare the bank reconciliation at May 31, 2014.
(b)Prepare the necessary adjusting entries for Reber Company at May 31, 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The chart of accounts of Henry Company includes the following selected accounts.
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
401 Sales Revenue
|
|
120 Inventory
|
412 Sales Returns and Allowances
|
|
126 Supplies
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
157 Equipment
|
610 Advertising Expense
|
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
|
In May, the following selected transactions were completed. All purchases and sales were on account except as indicated. The cost of all merchandise sold was 60% of the sales price.
|
May
|
2
|
Purchased merchandise from Berkman Company $5,000.
|
|
3
|
Received freight bill from Fast Freight on Berkman purchase $250.
|
|
5
|
Sales were made to Persinger Company $1,300, Fehr Bros. $2,300, and Mount Company $1,000.
|
|
8
|
Purchased merchandise from Kayser Company $5,400 and Neufeld Company $3,000.
|
|
10
|
Received credit on merchandise returned to Neufeld Company $350.
|
|
15
|
Purchased supplies from Rabel”s Supplies $600.
|
|
16
|
Purchased merchandise from Berkman Company $3,100, and Kayser Company $4,200.
|
|
17
|
Returned supplies to Rabel”s Supplies, receiving credit $70. (Hint: Credit Supplies.)
|
|
18
|
Received freight bills on May 16 purchases from Fast Freight $325.
|
|
20
|
Returned merchandise to Berkman Company receiving credit $200.
|
|
23
|
Made sales to Fehr Bros. $1,600 and to Mount Company $2,500.
|
|
25
|
Received bill for advertising from Mock Advertising $620.
|
|
26
|
Granted allowance to Mount Company for merchandise damaged in shipment $140.
|
|
28
|
Purchased equipment from Rabel”s Supplies $400.
|
Instructions
(a)Journalize the transactions above in a purchases journal, a sales journal, and a general journal. The purchases journal should have the following column headings: Date, Account Credited (Debited), Ref., Accounts Payable Cr., Inventory Dr., and Other Accounts Dr.
(b)Post to both the general and subsidiary ledger accounts. (Assume that all accounts have zero beginning balances.)
(c)Prove the agreement of the control and subsidiary accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected accounts from the chart of accounts of Conley Company are shown below.
|
101 Cash
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
401 Sales Revenue
|
|
120 Inventory
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
126 Supplies
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
140 Land
|
610 Advertising Expense
|
|
145 Building
|
|
The cost of all merchandise sold was 65% of the sales price. During October, Conley Company completed the following transactions.
|
2
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Kent Company $15,000.
|
|
4
|
Sold merchandise on account to Doumit Co. $5,600. Invoice no. 204, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
5
|
Purchased supplies for cash $60.
|
|
7
|
Made cash sales for the week totaling $6,700.
|
|
9
|
Paid in full the amount owed Kent Company less a 2% discount.
|
|
10
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Wrigley Corp. $2,600.
|
|
12
|
Received payment from Doumit Co. for invoice no. 204.
|
|
13
|
Returned $150 worth of damaged goods purchased on account from Wrigley Corp. on October 10.
|
|
14
|
Made cash sales for the week totaling $6,000.
|
|
16
|
Sold a parcel of land for $20,000 cash, the land”s original cost.
|
|
17
|
Sold merchandise on account to JR”s Warehouse $4,900, invoice no. 205, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
18
|
Purchased merchandise for cash $1,600.
|
|
21
|
Made cash sales for the week totaling $6,000.
|
|
23
|
Paid in full the amount owed Wrigley Corp. for the goods kept (no discount).
|
|
25
|
Purchased supplies on account from Francisco Co. $190.
|
|
25
|
Sold merchandise on account to Fryer Corp. $3,800, invoice no. 206, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
25
|
Received payment from JR”s Warehouse for invoice no. 205.
|
|
26
|
Purchased for cash a small parcel of land and a building on the land to use as a storage facility. The total cost of $26,000 was allocated $16,000 to the land and $10,000 to the building.
|
|
27
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Marte Co. $6,200.
|
|
28
|
Made cash sales for the week totaling $5,500.
|
|
30
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Kent Company $10,000.
|
|
30
|
Paid advertising bill for the month from theGazette, $290.
|
|
30
|
Sold merchandise on account to JR”s Warehouse $3,400, invoice no. 207, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
Conley Company uses the following journals.
- Sales journal.
- Single-column purchases journal.
- Cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable Cr., Sales Revenue Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Inventory Cr.
- Cash payments journal with columns for Other Accounts Dr., Accounts Payable Dr., Inventory Cr., and Cash Cr.
- General journal.
Instructions
Using the selected accounts provided:
(a)Record the October transactions in the appropriate journals.
(b)Foot and cross-foot all special journals.
(c)Show how postings would be made by placing ledger account numbers and check marks as needed in the journals. (Actual posting to ledger accounts is not required.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are the sales and cash receipts journals for Lowery Co. for its first month of operations.
|
SALES JOURNAL S1
|
|
Date
|
Account Debited
|
|
Accounts Receivable Dr. Sales Revenue Cr.
|
Cost of Goods Sold Dr. Inventory Cr.
|
|
Feb. 3
|
C. Ogleby
|
|
4,000
|
2,400
|
|
9
|
S. Hauke
|
|
5,000
|
3,000
|
|
12
|
T. Ghosh
|
|
6,500
|
3,900
|
|
26
|
W. Hoy
|
|
5,500
|
3,300
|
|
|
|
|
21,000
|
12,600
|
|
CASH RECEIPTS JOURNAL CR1
|
|
Date
|
Owner”s Account Credited
|
|
Cash Dr.
|
Sales Discounts Dr.
|
Accounts Receivable Cr.
|
Sales Revenue Cr.
|
Other Accounts Cr.
|
Cost of Goods Sold Dr. Inventory Cr.
|
|
Feb. 1
|
Owner”s Capital
|
|
23,000
|
|
|
|
23,000
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
4,500
|
|
|
4,500
|
|
2,700
|
|
13
|
C. Ogleby
|
|
3,960
|
40
|
4.000
|
|
|
|
|
18
|
Inventory
|
|
120
|
|
|
|
120
|
|
|
26
|
S. Hauke
|
|
5,000
|
|
5.000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
36,580
|
40
|
9,000
|
4,500
|
23,120
|
2,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In addition, the following transactions have not been journalized for February 2014.
|
2
|
Purchased merchandise on account from B. Setterstrom for $5,600, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
7
|
Purchased merchandise on account from A. Dambro for $23,000, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
9
|
Paid cash of $980 for purchase of supplies.
|
|
12
|
Paid $5,488 to B. Setterstrom in payment for $5,600 invoice, less 2% discount.
|
|
15
|
Purchased equipment for $4,500 cash.
|
|
16
|
Purchased merchandise on account from D. Budke $1,900, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
17
|
Paid $22,770 to A. Dambro in payment of $23,000 invoice, less 1% discount.
|
|
20
|
S. Lowery withdrew cash of $800 from the business for personal use.
|
|
21
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Eberle Company for $8,000, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
28
|
Paid $1,900 to D. Budke in payment of $1,900 invoice.
|
Instructions
(a)Open the following accounts in the general ledger.
|
101 Cash
|
301 Owner”s Capital
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
306 Owner”s Drawings
|
|
120 Inventory
|
401 Sales Revenue
|
|
126 Supplies
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
157 Equipment
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
158 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
631 Supplies Expense
|
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
711 Depreciation Expense
|
(b)Journalize the transactions that have not been journalized in a one-column purchases journal and the cash payments journal.
(c)Post to the accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers. Follow the sequence of transactions as shown in the problem.
(d)Post the individual entries and totals to the general ledger.
(e)Prepare a trial balance at February 28, 2014.
(f)Determine that the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.
(g)The following adjustments at the end of February are necessary.
(1)A count of supplies indicates that $200 is still on hand.
(2)Depreciation on equipment for February is $150.
Prepare the adjusting entries and then post the adjusting entries to the general ledger.
(h)Prepare an adjusted trial balance at February 28, 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
McBride Company has the following opening account balances in its general and subsidiary ledgers on January 1 and uses the periodic inventory system. All accounts have normal debit and credit balances.
|
GENERAL LEDGER
|
|
Account Number
|
Account Title
|
January 1 Opening Balance
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$33,750
|
|
112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
13,000
|
|
115
|
Notes Receivable
|
39,000
|
|
120
|
Inventory
|
20,000
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
1,000
|
|
130
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,000
|
|
157
|
Equipment
|
6,450
|
|
158
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equip.
|
1,500
|
|
201
|
Accounts Payable
|
35,000
|
|
301
|
Owner”s Capital
|
78,700
|
|
Accounts Receivable Subsidiary Ledger
|
|
Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledger
|
|
|
Customer
|
January 1 Opening Balance
|
Creditor
|
January 1 Opening Balance
|
|
R.Kotsay
|
$1,500
|
S. Otero
|
$9,000
|
|
B. Boxberger
|
7,500
|
R. Rasmus
|
15,000
|
|
S.Andrus
|
4,000
|
D. Baroni
|
11,000
|
In addition, the following transactions have not been journalized for January 2014.
|
3
|
Sell merchandise on account to B. Berg $3,600, invoice no. 510, and J. Lutz $1,800, invoice no. 511.
|
|
5
|
Purchase merchandise on account from S. Colt $5,000 and D. Kahn $2,700.
|
|
7
|
Receive checks for $4,000 from S. Andrus and $2,000 from B. Boxberger.
|
|
8
|
Pay freight on merchandise purchased $180.
|
|
9
|
Send checks to S. Otero for $9,000 and D. Baroni for $11,000.
|
|
9
|
Issue credit of $300 to J. Lutz for merchandise returned.
|
|
10
|
Summary cash sales total $15,500.
|
|
11
|
Sell merchandise on account to R. Kotsay for $2,900, invoice no. 512, and to S. Andrus $900, invoice no. 513.
|
|
|
Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.
|
|
12
|
Pay rent of $1,000 for January.
|
|
13
|
Receive payment in full from B. Berg and J. Lutz.
|
|
15
|
Withdraw $800 cash by I. McBride for personal use.
|
|
16
|
Purchase merchandise on account from D. Baroni for $12,000, from S. Otero for $13,900, and from S. Colt for $1,500.
|
|
17
|
Pay $400 cash for supplies.
|
|
18
|
Return $200 of merchandise to S. Otero and receive credit.
|
|
20
|
Summary cash sales total $17,500.
|
|
21
|
Issue $15,000 note to R. Rasmus in payment of balance due.
|
|
21
|
Receive payment in full from S. Andrus.
|
|
|
Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.
|
|
22
|
Sell merchandise on account to B. Berg for $3,700, invoice no. 514, and to R. Kotsay for $800, invoice no. 515.
|
|
23
|
Send checks to D. Baroni and S. Otero in full payment.
|
|
25
|
Sell merchandise on account to B. Boxberger for $3,500, invoice no. 516, and to J. Lutz for $6,100, invoice no. 517.
|
|
27
|
Purchase merchandise on account from D. Baroni for $12,500, from D. Kahn for $1,200, and from S. Colt for $2,800.
|
|
28
|
Pay $200 cash for office supplies.
|
|
31
|
Summary cash sales total $22,920.
|
|
31
|
Pay sales salaries of $4,300 and office salaries of $3,600.
|
Instructions
(a)Record the January transactions in the appropriate journal—sales, purchases, cash receipts, cash payments, and general.
(b)Post the journals to the general and subsidiary ledgers. Add and number new accounts in an orderly fashion as needed.
(c)Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2014, using a worksheet. Complete the work-sheet using the following additional information.
(1)Supplies at January 31 total $700.
(2)Insurance coverage expires on October 31, 2014.
(3)Annual depreciation on the equipment is $1,500.
(4)Interest of $30 has accrued on the note payable.
(5)Inventory at January 31 is $15,000.
(d)Prepare a multiple-step income statement and an owner”s equity statement for January and a classified balance sheet at the end of January.
(e)Prepare and post the adjusting and closing entries.
(f)Prepare a post-closing trial balance, and determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jeter Co. uses a perpetual inventory system and both an accounts receivable and an accounts payable subsidiary ledger. Balances related to both the general ledger and the subsidiary ledger for Jeter are indicated in the working papers. Presented on the next page are a series of transactions for Jeter Co. for the month of January. Credit sales terms are 2/10, n/30. The cost of all merchandise sold was 60% of the sales price.
|
3
|
Sell merchandise on account to B. Corpas $3,600, invoice no. 510, and to J. Revere $1,800, invoice no. 511.
|
|
5
|
Purchase merchandise from S. Gamel $5,000 and D. Posey $2,200, terms n/30.
|
|
7
|
Receive checks from S. Mahay $4,000 and B. Santos $2,000 after discount period has lapsed.
|
|
8
|
Pay freight on merchandise purchased $235.
|
|
9
|
Send checks to S. Meek for $9,000 less 2% cash discount, and to D. Saito for $11,000 less 1% cash discount.
|
|
9
|
Issue credit of $300 to J. Revere for merchandise returned.
|
|
10
|
Summary daily cash sales total $15,500.
|
|
11
|
Sell merchandise on account to R. Beltre $1,600, invoice no. 512, and to S. Mahay $900, invoice no. 513.
|
|
12
|
Pay rent of $1,000 for January.
|
|
13
|
Receive payment in full from B. Corpas and J. Revere less cash discounts.
|
|
15
|
Withdraw $800 cash by M. Jeter for personal use.
|
|
15
|
Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.
|
|
16
|
Purchase merchandise from D. Saito $15,000, terms 1/10, n/30; S. Meek $14,200, terms 2/10, n/30; and S. Gamel $1,500, terms n/30.
|
|
17
|
Pay $400 cash for office supplies.
|
|
18
|
Return $200 of merchandise to S. Meek and receive credit.
|
|
20
|
Summary daily cash sales total $20,100.
|
|
21
|
Issue $15,000 note, maturing in 90 days, to R. Moses in payment of balance due.
|
|
21
|
Receive payment in full from S. Mahay less cash discount.
|
|
22
|
Sell merchandise on account to B. Corpas $2,700, invoice no. 514, and to R. Beltre $2,300, invoice no. 515.
|
|
22
|
Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.
|
|
23
|
Send checks to D. Saito and S. Meek in full payment less cash discounts.
|
|
25
|
Sell merchandise on account to B. Santos $3,500, invoice no. 516, and to J. Revere $6,100, invoice no. 517.
|
|
27
|
Purchase merchandise from D. Saito $14,500, terms 1/10, n/30; D. Posey $3,200, terms n/30; and S. Gamel $5,400, terms n/30.
|
|
27
|
Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.
|
|
28
|
Pay $200 cash for office supplies.
|
|
31
|
Summary daily cash sales total $21,300.
|
|
31
|
Pay sales salaries $4,300 and office salaries $3,800.
|
Instructions
(a)Record the January transactions in a sales journal, a single-column purchases journal, a cash receipts journal as shown on page 340, a cash payments journal as shown on page 346, and a two-column general journal.
(b)Post the journals to the general ledger.
(c)Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2014, in the trial balance columns of the worksheet. Complete the worksheet using the following additional information.
(1)Office supplies at January 31 total $900.
(2)Insurance coverage expires on October 31, 2014.
(3)Annual depreciation on the equipment is $1,500.
(4)Interest of $50 has accrued on the note payable.
(d)Prepare a multiple-step income statement and an owner”s equity statement for January and a classified balance sheet at the end of January.
(e)Prepare and post adjusting and closing entries.
(f)Prepare a post-closing trial balance, and determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ermler & Trump is a wholesaler of small appliances and parts. Ermler & Trump is operated by two owners, Jack Ermler and Andrea Trump. In addition, the company has one employee, a repair specialist, who is on a fixed salary. Revenues are earned through the sale of appliances to retailers (approximately 75% of total revenues), appliance parts to do-it-yourselfers (10%), and the repair of appliances brought to the store (15%). Appliance sales are made on both a credit and cash basis. Customers are billed on prenumbered sales invoices. Credit terms are always net/30 days. All parts sales and repair work are cash only.
Merchandise is purchased on account from the manufacturers of both the appliances and the parts. Practically all suppliers offer cash discounts for prompt payments, and it is company policy to take all discounts. Most cash payments are made by check. Checks are most frequently issued to suppliers, to trucking companies for freight on merchandise purchases, and to newspapers, radio, and TV stations for advertising. All advertising bills are paid as received. Jack and Andrea each make a monthly drawing in cash for personal living expenses. The salaried repairman is paid twice monthly. Ermler & Trump currently has a manual accounting system.
Instructions
With the class divided into groups, answer the following.
(a)Identify the special journals that Ermler & Trump should have in its manual accounting system. List the column headings appropriate for each of the special journals.
(b)What control and subsidiary accounts should be included in Ermler & Trump”s manual accounting system? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jill Locey, a classmate, has a part-time bookkeeping job. She is concerned about the inefficiencies in journalizing and posting transactions. Ben Newell is the owner of the company where Jill works. In response to numerous complaints from Jill and others, Ben hired two additional bookkeepers a month ago. However, the inefficiencies have continued at an even higher rate. The accounting information system for the company has only a general journal and a general ledger. Ben refuses to install a computerized accounting system.
Instructions
Now that Jill is an expert in manual accounting information systems, she decides to send a letter to Ben Newell explaining (1) why the additional personnel did not help and (2) what changes should be made to improve the efficiency of the accounting department. Write the letter that you think Jill should send.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wiemers Products Company operates three divisions, each with its own manufacturing plant and marketing/sales force. The corporate headquarters and central accounting office are in Wiemers, and the plants are in Freeport, Rockport, and Bayport, all within 50 miles of Wiemers. Corporate management treats each division as an independent profit center and encourages competition among them. They each have similar but different product lines. As a competitive incentive, bonuses are awarded each year to the employees of the fastest-growing and most-profitable division.
Indy Grover is the manager of Wiemers”s centralized computerized accounting operation that enters the sales transactions and maintains the accounts receivable for all three divisions. Indy came up in the accounting ranks from the Bayport division where his wife, several relatives, and many friends still work.
As sales documents are entered into the computer, the originating division is identified by code. Most sales documents (95%) are coded, but some (5%) are not coded or are coded incorrectly. As the manager, Indy has instructed the data-entry personnel to assign the Bayport code to all uncoded and incorrectly coded sales documents. This is done, he says, “in order to expedite processing and to keep the computer files current since they are updated daily.” All receivables and cash collections for all three divisions are handled by Wiemers as one subsidiary accounts receivable ledger.
Instructions
(a)Who are the stakeholders in this situation?
(b)What are the ethical issues in this case?
(c)How might the system be improved to prevent this situation?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In this chapter, you learned about a basic manual accounting information system. Computerized accounting systems range from the very basic and inexpensive to the very elaborate and expensive. However, even the most sophisticated systems are based on the fundamental structures and relationships that you learned in this chapter.
Instructions
Review the demonstration that is provided for the general ledger software package that is used with this textbook. Prepare a brief explanation of how the general ledger system works—that is, how it is used, and what information it provides.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify which control activity is violated in each of the following situations, and explain how the situation creates an opportunity for a fraud.
- The person with primary responsibility for reconciling the bank account and making all bank deposits is also the company”s accountant.
- Wellstone Company”s treasurer received an award for distinguished service because he had not taken a vacation in 30 years.
- In order to save money spent on order slips and to reduce time spent keeping track of order slips, a local bar/restaurant does not buy pre numbered order slips.
Familiarize yourself with each of the control activities summarized.
Understand the nature of the frauds that each control activity is intended to address.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
L. R. Cortez is concerned about the control over cash receipts in his fast-food restaurant, Big Cheese. The restaurant has two cash registers. At no time do more than two employees take customer orders and enter sales. Work shifts for employees range from 4 to 8 hours. Cortez asks your help in installing a good system of internal control over cash receipts.
Differentiate among the internal control principles of (1) establishing responsibility, (2) using physical controls, and (3) independent internal verification.
Design an effective system of internal control over cash receipts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bateer Company established a $50 petty cash fund on July 1. On July 30, the fund had $12 cash remaining and petty cash receipts for postage $14, office supplies $10, and delivery expense $15. Prepare journal entries to establish the fund on July 1 and to replenish the fund on July 30.
To establish the fund, set up a separate general ledger account.
Determine how much cash is needed to replenish the fund: subtract the cash remaining from the petty cash fund balance.
Total the petty cash receipts. Determine any cash over or short—the difference between the cash needed to replenish the fund and the total of the petty cash receipts.
Record the expenses incurred according to the petty cash receipts when replenishing the fund.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Riverside Fertilizer Co. owns the following assets at the balance sheet date.
|
Cash in bank savings account
|
$ 8,000
|
|
Cash on hand
|
850
|
|
Cash refund due from the IRS
|
1,000
|
|
Checking account balance
|
14,000
|
|
Postdated checks
|
500
|
What amount should Riverside report as cash in the balance sheet?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interpreting the statement of cash flows contains three years of cash flow statements from Massa Corporation.
Massa Corporation consolidated statements of cash flows ($millions)
|
|
2011
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Dperating activities
|
|
|
|
|
Loss from continuing operations
|
$(0,378.)
|
$(0,624.)
|
$(0,321.)
|
|
Depreciation
|
168.
|
220.
|
263.
|
|
Amortization of capitalized software
|
41.
|
58.
|
39.
|
|
Gain from sale of investments and other assets
|
[16.6)
|
[119.0)
|
–
|
|
Restructuring and other unusual items, net
|
136.
|
384.
|
1253
|
|
Changes in other accounts affecting operations
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
161.
|
73.
|
(45.)
|
|
Inventory
|
80.
|
101.
|
(3.)
|
|
Other current assets
|
17.0
|
[1.2)
|
(13.)
|
|
Accounts payable and other current liabilities
|
(91.)
|
(21.)
|
41.0
|
|
Other
|
3.
|
14.
|
[10.5)
|
|
Net cash provided by continuing operations
|
120.
|
86.
|
77.
|
|
Net cash provided by (used in) discontinued operations
|
5.
|
4.
|
[29.7)
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
125.
|
89.
|
47.
|
|
Investing activities
|
|
|
|
|
Investment in depreciable assets
|
[129.7)
|
[174.4)
|
(304.)
|
|
Proceeds from disposal of depreciable and other assets
|
157.0
|
242.0
|
94.
|
|
Proceeds from the sale of discontinued operations
|
25.
|
407.
|
–
|
|
Investment in capitalized software
|
(28.)
|
(43.)
|
(60.)
|
|
Other
|
[6.0)
|
[13.0)
|
14.
|
|
Net cash provided by [used in) investing activities
|
19.
|
419.
|
[254.8)
|
|
Financing activities
|
|
|
|
|
Decrease) increase in short-term borrowings
|
[2.6)
|
[222.6)
|
140.
|
|
Proceeds from long-term debt
|
44.
|
168.
|
305.0
|
|
Payments of long-term debt
|
[126.5)
|
(545.)
|
(92.)
|
|
Proceeds from sale of common stock
|
5.0
|
9.
|
18.
|
|
Purchase of treasury stock
|
[0.3)
|
(1.)
|
(19.)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2011
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Dividends paid
|
–
|
(7.)
|
(26.)
|
|
Vet cash provided by [used in) financing activities
|
[80.0)
|
(599.)
|
(326.)
|
|
“affect of changes in foreign exchange rates
|
0.1
|
1.
|
(4.)
|
|
ncrease [decrease) in cash equivalents
|
64.
|
(90.)
|
114.
|
|
:ash and equivalents at beginning of year
|
169.
|
259.
|
145.
|
|
:ash and equivalents at end of year
|
$0,233.
|
$0,169.
|
$0,259.
|
Required
Answer the following questions:
(a) For each year:
1. What were the firm’s major sources of cash? Its major uses of cash?
2. Was cash flow from operations greater or less than net income? Explain in detail the major reasons for the difference between these two figures.
3. Was the firm able to generate enough cash from operations to pay for all of its capital expenditures?
4. Did the cash flow from operations cover both the capital expenditures and the firm’s dividend payments, if any?
5. If it did, how did the firm invest its excess cash?
6. If not, what were the sources of cash the firm used to pay for the capital expenditures and/or dividends?
7. Were the working capital accounts primarily sources of cash, or users of cash?
8. What other major items affected cash flows?
(b) What was the trend over the three years in:
9. Net income?
10. Cash flow from (continuing) operations?
11. Capital expenditures?
12. Dividends?
13. Net borrowing (proceeds less payments of short- and long-term debt)?
14. Working capital accounts?
(c) Based on the evidence in the statement of cash flows alone, what is your assessment of the financial strength of this business? Be as specific as possible in your assessment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjustments on the statement of cash flows The 2003 Annual Report of McDonald’s includes the following note:
In 2003, the $272.1 million of charges consisted of: $237.0 million related to the loss on the sale of Donatos Pizzeria, the closing of Donatos and Boston Market restaurants outside the US and the exit of a domestic joint venture with Fazoli’s; and $35.1 million related to the revitalization plan actions of McDonald’s Japan, including headcount reductions, the closing of Pret A Manger stores in Japan, and the early termination of a long-term management services agreement.
In 2002, the $266.9 million of net charges consisted of: $201.4 million related to the anticipated transfer of ownership in five countries in the Middle East and Latin America to developmental licensees and ceasing operations in two countries in Latin America; $80.5 million primarily related to eliminating approximately 600 positions (about half of which were in the US and half of which were in international markets), reallocating resources and consolidating certain home office facilities to control costs; and a $15.0 million favorable adjustment to the 2001 restructuring charge due to lower employee-related costs than originally anticipated.
Required
(a) McDonald’s reports cash flows from operating activities using the indirect method. How would the $237.0 million loss in 2003 for the sale of Donatos and other be reported on the company’s statement of cash flows? Why?
(b) Explain how the $15.0 million favorable adjustment to the 2001 restructuring charge is accounted on each of the three principal financial statements for 2002.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing and analyzing a statement of cash flows
Allen Company produces roofing supplies and insulation materials for use in home and commercial construction. Although Allen has been growing, recent lack of production capacity has caused production delays, some stockouts of finished goods, and a shift in the inventory mix from finished goods to raw materials and work in process. Allen Company’s comparative balance sheet data and additional information follow (note that 2012 is the year listed first in the presentation):
|
Allen Company comparative balance sheet
|
|
|
| |
2012
|
2011
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$108,000
|
$60,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
320,000
|
235,000
|
|
Inventory
|
450,000
|
510,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
27,000
|
30,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
905,000
|
835,000
|
|
Investments in affiliates
|
200,000
|
100,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
1,100,000
|
950,000
|
|
Less accumulated depreciation
|
(440,000)
|
(370,000)
|
|
Intangible assets
|
35,000
|
45,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$1,800,000
|
$1,560,000
|
|
Liabilities and shareholders equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$554,000
|
$400,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
36,000
|
38,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
590,000
|
438,000
|
|
Long-term notes payable
|
380,000
|
100,000
|
|
Contributed capital
|
710,000
|
750,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
120,000
|
272,000
|
|
Total liabilities and shareholders equity
|
$1,800,000
|
$1,560,000
|
The following additional information is available:
- The company’s stock has no par or stated value. Contributed capital is shown as one amount (i.e., no distinction between common stock and capital in excess of par).
- Net loss for the year was $110 000.
- The intangible assets have limited lives and were amortized by $10 000 during the year.
- Investment in affiliates represents equity method investments. The income statement reported $80 000 income from equity method investments. $10 000 dividends were received from affiliates. Remaining changes in the account relate to additional investments.
- Less efficient equipment with an original cost of $200 000 was sold during the year for $40 000. The accumulated depreciation on that equipment was $130 000.
- Cash dividends of $12 000 were declared and paid during the year. The company also declared and distributed a $30 000 stock dividend during the year.
- The company repurchased the stock of a dissident shareholder during the year and retired the shares. The company paid $70 000 (which was the original issue price of the shares).
- No long-term notes were retired during the year.
Required
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012.
(b) Discuss the relationship between net income and cash flow from operations and the relationship among cash flow from operating, investing, and financing activities during the two years. Be as specific as the data allow.
(c) Identify two conditions in the operating section of the statement which point to the possibility that cash flow from operations might decline next year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interpreting the role of accounts payable in cash flow from operations
AB InBev is the world’s largest brewer. An abbreviated version of the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows appears below:
|
Cash flows from operating activities (million US dollars)
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Profit
|
7,959
|
5,762
|
|
Interest, taxes and noncash items included in profit
|
7,420
|
8,503
|
|
Cash flow from operating activities before changes in working capital and use of provisions
|
15,379
|
14,265
|
|
Change in working capital
|
1,409
|
226
|
|
Pension contributions and use of provisions
|
(710)
|
(519)
|
|
Interest and taxes (paid)/received
|
(3,998)
|
(4,450)
|
|
Dividends received
|
406
|
383
|
|
Cash flow from operating activities
|
12,486
|
9,905
|
Elsewhere in the annual report, management reveals that trade payables increased in 2011 because of higher capital expenditures. Also, these payables have, on average, longer payment terms than payables from previous years.
Required
Explain why the increase in payables and the change in payment terms contributed to the increased in cash flow from operations in 2011. What other factors contributed to the increase?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manipulating the statement of cash flows
You are the company’s chief financial officer. It is early December, and your accountants have produced financial statements showing provisional results for the year. (Your company’s fiscal year ends on 31 December.) You show these to the CEO who then expresses concern about several figures. One figure in particular, cash flow from operations (CFFO), appears low. The CEO wonders if anything can be done before the end of the year to increase it.
Which of the following actions will increase CFFO this year? Which of these actions do you consider appropriate, which are inappropriate, and why?
(a) The company sells €2 million of accounts receivable for 97% of face value to a bank. The receivables are sold “with recourse,” which means that the company must reimburse the bank for any amount not collected beyond 3% of total receivables.
(b) Social charges are due on employees’ wages at the end of the year. The firm can delay these payments by a few days so that they are made at the beginning of the following year.
(c) The company can work out a deal with some of its customers in which the customers buy goods now, for cash, but they can receive a full refund after the beginning of the next year.
(d) A training program is moved from the final month of the current year to the first month of the following year.
(e) Routine maintenance is delayed on machinery and equipment until early next year.
(f) The company delays the purchase of a new forklift until the beginning of next year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash flow and credit risk
Taipei-based Tang Manufacturing has a $1.45 million bank loan that starts coming due in a year, and the loan officer at the local bank has asked for cash budgets to be reassured that the company can repay the debt on schedule. Management has prepared quarterly cash flow forecasts for each of the next six quarters, excerpts of which are produced in the table below. Also worth noting is that much of Tang’s equipment and machinery is dated, and therefore long overdue for replacement.
|
|
Q1
|
Q2
|
Q3
|
Q4
|
Q5
|
Q4
|
|
Scheduled loan payments
|
|
|
|
|
$725,000
|
$725,000
|
|
forecasted cash flows
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash flow from operations
|
$290,000
|
$362,500
|
$435,000
|
$348,000
|
$290,000
|
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
217,500
|
|
217,500
|
|
253,750
|
$319,000
|
|
Dividends
|
|
|
|
|
72,500
|
|
Required
(a) Why might Tang’s loan officer be concerned about the company’s ability to repay the loan?
(b) What steps can Tang management take to reduce the bank’s risk on the loan?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing and interpreting the statement of cash flows
The annual reports from Year 7 and Year 8 of The GAP, a global clothing retailer, indicate the following changes in its balance sheet accounts (amounts in millions):
|
Year 7
|
Year 8
|
|
Cash
|
$ 2 decrease
|
$428 increase
|
|
Marketable securities (current asset)
|
46 decrease
|
46 decrease
|
|
Merchandise inventories
|
96 increase
|
154 increase
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
1 increase
|
56 increase
|
|
Property, plant and equipment (at cost)
|
372 increase
|
466 increase
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
215 increase
|
270 increase
|
|
Other noncurrent assets
|
51 increase
|
15 increase
|
|
Accounts payable
|
114 increase
|
134 increase
|
|
Notes payable to banks (current liability)
|
18 increase
|
45 increase
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
26 increase
|
7 decrease
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
90 increase
|
123 increase
|
|
Bonds payable
|
––
|
577 increase
|
|
Common stock
|
360 decrease
|
524 decrease
|
|
Retained earnings
|
369 increase
|
455 increase
|
Abbreviated income statements for The GAP appear below:
|
Year 7
|
Year 8
|
|
Sales
|
$5,284
|
$6,508
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
-3,285
|
-4,022
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
-1,250
|
-1,632
|
|
Income tax expense
|
-296
|
-320
|
|
Net income
|
$453
|
$534
|
Additional data:
- The cash balance was $486 at the end of Year 7 and $914 at the end of Year 8.
- The firm did not sell property, plant and equipment in either year.
- Changes in other noncurrent assets resulted from investing activities.
Required
(a) Prepare statements of cash flows for Year 7 and Year 8.
(b) Comment on the relationship between net income and cash flow from operations, and on the relationship between operating, investing, and financing cash flows. Compare Year 7 with Year 8.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Inventory turnover ratio
From the following data compute inventory turnover:
|
|
Material A
|
Material B
|
|
|
|
|
|
Opening stock
|
1,000
|
1,500
|
|
Purchases made during the year
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
|
Closing stock
|
500
|
1,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following is the record of receipt of materials:
|
2 June
|
Received 500 units for Job No. 15 @ Rs. 10 per unit
|
|
8 June
|
Received 400 units for Job No. 16 @ Rs. 12 per unit
|
|
15 June
|
Received 200 units for Job No. 17 @ Rs. 13 per unit
|
|
28 June
|
Received 300 units for Job No. 18 @ Rs. 15 per unit
|
During the same month, following issues of materials are made:
|
9 June
|
Issued 250 units for Job No. 15
|
|
17 June
|
Issued 200 units for Job No. 16
|
|
18 June
|
Issued 250 units for Job No. 15
|
|
20 June
|
Issued 200 units for Job No. 17
|
|
22 June
|
Issued 100 units for Job No. 16
|
|
29 June
|
Issued 150 units for Job No. 18
|
You are required to show how these transactions will appear in the stores ledger.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: LIFO method
A firm maintains the stores ledger on the LIFO method. During the month of July 2009, the following receipts and issues of materials were made. You are required to record these transactions in the stores ledger:
Receipts:
|
1 July
|
Balance 100 units @ Rs. 10 per unit
|
|
5 July
|
Purchase Order No. 15, 80 units @ Rs. 8/unit
|
|
8 July
|
Purchase Order No. 16, 60 units @ Rs. 9/unit
|
|
15 July
|
Purchase Order No. 17, 40 units @ Rs. 10/unit
|
|
28 July
|
Purchase Order No. 18, 80 units @ Rs. 6/unit
|
Issues:
|
10 July
|
Materials Requisition No. 11, 140 units
|
|
12 July
|
Materials Requisition No. 12, 20 units
|
|
20 July
|
Materials Requisition No. 13, 40 units
|
|
25 July
|
Materials Requisition No. 14, 20 units
|
|
31July
|
Shortage 10 units
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are required to compute the simple moving average rates in a chocolate company purchasing raw materials at different monthly rates as shown below. Six months moving average is to be shown from September 2009. How shall the material issued in the months of September, October and November 2009 be priced according to Moving simple average price method?
|
|
Price per kg
|
|
Month
|
(Rs.)
|
|
April
|
12.00
|
|
May
|
11.50
|
|
June
|
12.50
|
|
July
|
12.00
|
|
August
|
11.50
|
|
September
|
12.50
|
|
October
|
11.00
|
|
November
|
12.00
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
X Ltd takes a periodic inventory of the stocks of material AA’ at the end of each month. The physical inventory taken on 31 December shows a balance of 2000 kg of material AA’ in hand @ Rs. 5.50 per kg.
The following purchases were made during January:
|
2 January
|
28,000 kg @ Rs. 5.75
|
|
9 January
|
25,000 kg @ Rs. 5.80
|
|
16 January
|
35,000 kg @ Rs. 5.85
|
|
23 January
|
10,000 kg @ Rs. 5.90
|
A physical inventory on 31 January discloses that there is a stock of 15,000 kg.
You are required to compute the inventory value on 31 January, by each of the following methods alternatively:
- FIFO method
- LIFO method
- Average cost method
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1000 kg of art board valued at Rs. 5,000 were issued for the manufacture of medium-sized cartons. The details are as follows:
- 1000 Nos medium-sized cartons weighing 0.50 kg each were manufactured.
- 250 kg of off-cuts were used for the manufacture of small-sized carton. This would have amounted to Rs. 500.
- 150 medium-sized cartons were damaged and rectification costs came up to Rs. 100.
- 50 kg of off-cuts were sold as scrap for Rs. 10.
You are required to calculate the cost of one medium-sized carton, assuming that there are no opening and closing stocks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pumpkin Pump Co. uses about 1,50,000 valves per year and the usage is fairly constant at 12,500 valves per month. The valves cost about Rs. 3 per unit when bought in quantities and the carrying cost is estimated to be 20% of average inventory investment on annual basis. The cost to place an order and process the delivery is Rs. 36. It takes 45 days to receive delivery from the date of an order and a safety stock of 6,400 valves is desired.
You are required to determine:
- the most economical order quantity
- frequency of orders and
- the order point
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data for the year ended 31 December 2009, calculate the inventory turnover ratio of two items, and put forward your comments on them:
|
|
Material X
|
Material Y
|
|
Opening stock (1 January 2009)
|
20,000
|
18,000
|
|
Purchasing during the year
|
1,04,000
|
54,000
|
|
Closing stock (31 December 2009)
|
12,000
|
22,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A factory uses 8,000 varieties of inventory. In terms of inventory holding and inventory usage, the following information is compiled:
|
No. of Varieties of Inventory (1)
|
% to Total No. of Varieties (2)
|
%Value of Inventory Holding Average (3)
|
% of Inventory Usage (in End Product) (4)
|
|
7,750
|
96.875
|
20
|
5
|
|
220
|
2.750
|
30
|
10
|
|
30
|
0.375
|
50
|
85
|
|
8,000
|
100
|
100
|
100
|
You are required to classify the items of inventory as per ABC analysis with reasons.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company used raw material AA’ as the basic material. The cost of the material is Rs.50 per kg and the input—output ratio is 110%. Due to a sudden shortage in the market the material becomes non-available, and the unit is considering the use of one of the following substitutes available:
|
Material
|
IO Ratio
|
Rs. per kg.
|
|
BB’
|
130%
|
|
|
CC’
|
105%
|
|
You are required to recommend which of the above substitutes is to be used. Also indicate additional cost to be incurred.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Raw material is also termed as ______ material.
The purchasing function is an important function performed by ______ department.
Firms generally float ______ to obtain prices from prospective suppliers of goods and services.
Raw materials may be defined as “goods purchased for ______ for sale”.
Material that is directly identifiable with the product and can be conveniently traced to cost units is known as ______.
Cost of direct materials is charged directly to the specified ______, ______ or ______.
The classification of material into direct and indirect facilitates ______.
Normal storage and issue losses are recovered by inflating ______ per unit.
The system of imprest stores is based on the imprest system of______.
______is a document that shows the quantity of specified materials available at any point of time.
______ is a document which shows the materials received from suppliers.
The stores ledger is maintained by the ______ department.
When materials are transferred from one department to another department, the transferrer department raises a______.
The economic order quantity is computed using the formula______.
Re-order level = …… × Maximum lead time.
Maximum level = ……+ Re-order quantity – (Minimum lead time × Maximum usage).
Minimum stock level = Re-order level – (Normal average lead time × ………).
ABC analysis is analytical tool which is used in ______.
Pareto analysis is also known as ______ rule.
A process whereby all stock items are physically counted and valued is known as ______.
Recording of receipts, issues, returns of materials in either quantity or quantity and valuing is known as ______.
Two levels of material control are______ and ______.
Stock adjustment account is ______ with shortage of stock and ______ with surplus of stock.
Inventory turnover ratio shows the relationship between the cost of goods sold (or cost of inventory consumed) and ______.
Optimal safety stock is the quantity at which the total of ______ and stock-out cost is the minimum.
Inventory is dealt with in detail in accounting standard ______.
When prices are rising, ______ method of pricing issue of materials is suitable.
______ method is not recognized as per AS (2).
Sale proceeds from scrap are ______ to the job or process and any loss on sale of scrap is ______ to costing profit and loss account.
In case the departments responsible for defective units cannot be identified, the cost incurred in rectification are to be debited to ______.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The general ledger of Hensley Company contained the following Accounts Payable control account (in T-account form). Also shown is the related subsidiary ledger.
|
GENERAL LEDGER Accounts Payable
|
|
Feb.15
|
General o*rnal
|
1,400
|
Feb. 1
|
Balance
|
26,025
|
|
28
|
|
|
5
|
General journal
|
265
|
|
|
|
|
11
|
General journal
|
550
|
|
|
|
|
28
|
Purchases
|
13,400
|
|
|
|
|
Feb.28
|
Balance
|
10,500
|
|
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE LEDGER
|
|
Benton
|
|
Feb. 28
|
|
4,600
|
|
Dooley
|
|
Feb. 28
|
|
2,300
|
|
Parks
|
|
Feb. 28
|
|
Instructions
(a)Indicate the missing posting reference and amount in the control account, and the missing ending balance in the subsidiary ledger.
(b)Indicate the amounts in the control account that were dual-posted (i.e., posted to the control account and the subsidiary accounts).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tresh Products uses both special journals and a general journal as described in this chapter. Tresh also posts customers’ accounts in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger. The postings for the most recent month are included in the subsidiary T-accounts below.
|
Estes
|
Gehrke
|
|
340
|
250
|
|
150
|
150
|
|
200
|
290
|
|
Truong
|
Weiser
|
|
0
|
145
|
|
120
|
120
|
|
145
|
190
|
|
150
|
Instructions
Determine the correct amount of the end-of-month posting from the sales journal to the Accounts Receivable control account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kozma Company”s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.
|
101 Cash
|
401 Sales Revenue
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
120 Inventory
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
301 Owner”s Capital
|
|
On April 1, the accounts receivable ledger of Kozma Company showed the following balances: Morrow $1,550, Rose $1,200, Jennings Co. $2,900, and Dent $2,200. The April transactions involving the receipt of cash were as follows.
|
1
|
The owner, T. Kozma, invested additional cash in the business $7,200.
|
|
4
|
Received check for payment of account from Dent less 2% cash discount.
|
|
5
|
Received check for $920 in payment of invoice no. 307 from Jennings Co.
|
|
8
|
Made cash sales of merchandise totaling $7,245. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,347.
|
|
10
|
Received check for $600 in payment of invoice no. 309 from Morrow.
|
|
11
|
Received cash refund from a supplier for damaged merchandise $740.
|
|
23
|
Received check for $1,000 in payment of invoice no. 310 from Jennings Co.
|
|
29
|
Received check for payment of account from Rose.
|
Instructions
(a)Journalize the transactions above in a six-column cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable Cr., Sales Revenue Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Inventory Cr. Foot and cross-foot the journal.
(b)Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Receivable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the April transactions to these accounts.
(c)Prove the agreement of the control account and subsidiary account balances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The chart of accounts of LR Company includes the following selected accounts.
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
401 Sales Revenue
|
|
120 Inventory
|
412 Sales Returns and Allowances
|
|
126 Supplies
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
157 Equipment
|
610 Advertising Expense
|
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
|
In July, the following selected transactions were completed. All purchases and sales were on account. The cost of all merchandise sold was 70% of the sales price.
|
July
|
1
|
Purchased merchandise from Eby Company $8,000.
|
|
2
|
Received freight bill from Shaw Shipping on Eby purchase $400.
|
|
3
|
Made sales to Fort Company $1,300 and to Hefner Bros. $1,500.
|
|
5
|
Purchased merchandise from Getz Company $3,200.
|
|
8
|
Received credit on merchandise returned to Getz Company $300.
|
|
13
|
Purchased store supplies from Dayne Supply $720.
|
|
15
|
Purchased merchandise from Eby Company $3,600 and from Bosco Company $4,300.
|
|
16
|
Made sales to Aybar Company $3,450 and to Hefner Bros. $1,870.
|
|
18
|
Received bill for advertising from Welton Advertisements $600.
|
|
21
|
Sales were made to Fort Company $310 and to Duncan Company $2,800.
|
|
22
|
Granted allowance to Fort Company for merchandise damaged in shipment $40.
|
|
24
|
Purchased merchandise from Getz Company $3,000.
|
|
26
|
Purchased equipment from Dayne Supply $900.
|
|
28
|
Received freight bill from Shaw Shipping on Getz purchase of July 24, $380.
|
|
30
|
Sales were made to Aybar Company $5,600.
|
Instructions
(a)Journalize the transactions above in a purchases journal, a sales journal, and a general journal. The purchases journal should have the following column headings: Date, Account Credited (Debited), Ref., Accounts Payable Cr., Inventory Dr., and Other Accounts Dr.
(b)Post to both the general and subsidiary ledger accounts. (Assume that all accounts have zero beginning balances.)
(c)Prove the agreement of the control and subsidiary accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected accounts from the chart of accounts of Mercer Company are shown below.
|
101 Cash
|
401 Sales Revenue
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
412 Sales Returns and Allowances
|
|
120 Inventory
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
126 Supplies
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
157 Equipment
|
726 Salaries and Wages Expense
|
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
|
The cost of all merchandise sold was 60% of the sales price. During January, Mercer completed the following transactions.
|
3
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Gallagher Co. $9,000.
|
|
4
|
Purchased supplies for cash $80.
|
|
4
|
Sold merchandise on account to Wheeler $5,250, invoice no. 371, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
5
|
Returned $300 worth of damaged goods purchased on account from Gallagher Co. on January 3.
|
|
6
|
Made cash sales for the week totaling $3,150.
|
|
8
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Phegley Co. $4,500.
|
|
9
|
Sold merchandise on account to Linton Corp. $5,400, invoice no. 372, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
11
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Cora Co. $3,700.
|
|
13
|
Paid in full Gallagher Co. on account less a 2% discount.
|
|
13
|
Made cash sales for the week totaling $6,260.
|
|
15
|
Received payment from Linton Corp. for invoice no. 372.
|
|
15
|
Paid semi-monthly salaries of $14,300 to employees.
|
|
17
|
Received payment from Wheeler for invoice no. 371.
|
|
17
|
Sold merchandise on account to Delaney Co. $1,200, invoice no. 373, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
19
|
Purchased equipment on account from Dozier Corp. $5,500.
|
|
20
|
Cash sales for the week totaled $3,200.
|
|
20
|
Paid in full Phegley Co. on account less a 2% discount.
|
|
23
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Gallagher Co. $7,800.
|
|
24
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Atchison Corp. $5,100.
|
|
27
|
Made cash sales for the week totaling $4,230.
|
|
30
|
Received payment from Delaney Co. for invoice no. 373.
|
|
31
|
Paid semi-monthly salaries of $13,200 to employees.
|
|
31
|
Sold merchandise on account to Wheeler $9,330, invoice no. 374, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
Mercer Company uses the following journals.
- Sales journal.
- Single-column purchases journal.
- Cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable Cr., Sales Revenue Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Inventory Cr.
- Cash payments journal with columns for Other Accounts Dr., Accounts Payable Dr., Inventory Cr., and Cash Cr.
- General journal.
Instructions
Using the selected accounts provided:
(a)Record the January transactions in the appropriate journal noted.
(b)Foot and cross-foot all special journals.
(c)Show how postings would be made by placing ledger account numbers and check-marks as needed in the journals. (Actual posting to ledger accounts is not required.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are the purchases and cash payments journals for Fornelli Co. for its first month of operations.
|
PURCHASES JOURNAL
|
|
P1
|
|
Date
|
Account Credited
|
|
Inventory Dr. Accounts Payable Cr.
|
|
4-Jul
|
N. Alvarado F.
|
|
6,800
|
|
5
|
Rees
|
|
8,100
|
|
11
|
J.Gallup
|
|
5,920
|
|
13
|
C. Werly
|
|
15,300
|
|
20
|
M. Mangus
|
|
7,900
|
|
|
|
44,020
|
|
CASH PAYMENTS JOURNAL CP1
|
|
Date
|
Account Debited
|
|
Other Accounts Dr.
|
Accounts Payable Dr.
|
Inventory Cr.
|
Cash Cr.
|
|
July 4
|
Supplies
|
|
600
|
|
|
600
|
|
10
|
P. Rees
|
|
|
8,100
|
81
|
8,019
|
|
11
|
Prepaid Rent
|
|
6,000
|
|
|
6,000
|
|
15
|
N. Alvarado
|
|
|
6,800
|
|
6,800
|
|
19
|
Owner”s Drawings
|
|
2,500
|
|
|
2,500
|
|
21
|
C. Werly
|
|
|
15,300
|
153
|
15,147
|
|
|
|
|
9,100
|
30,200
|
234
|
39,066
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
=
|
|
In addition, the following transactions have not been journalized for July. The cost of all merchandise sold was 65% of the sales price.
|
July
|
1
|
The founder, N. Fornelli, invests $80,000 in cash.
|
|
6
|
Sell merchandise on account to Dow Co. $6,200 terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
7
|
Make cash sales totaling $8,000.
|
|
8
|
Sell merchandise on account to S. Goebel $4,600, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
10
|
Sell merchandise on account to W. Leiss $4,900, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
13
|
Receive payment in full from S. Goebel.
|
|
16
|
Receive payment in full from W. Leiss.
|
|
20
|
Receive payment in full from Dow Co.
|
|
21
|
Sell merchandise on account to H. Kenney $5,000, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
29
|
Returned damaged goods to N. Alvarado and received cash refund of $420.
|
Instructions
(a)Open the following accounts in the general ledger.
|
101 Cash
|
306 Owner”s Drawings
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
401 Sales Revenue
|
|
120 Inventory
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
126 Supplies
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
131 Prepaid Rent
|
631 Supplies Expense
|
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
729 Rent Expense
|
|
301 Owner”s Capital
|
|
(b)Journalize the transactions that have not been journalized in the sales journal and the cash receipts journal.
(c)Post to the accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers. Follow the sequence of transactions as shown in the problem.
(d)Post the individual entries and totals to the general ledger.
(e)Prepare a trial balance at July 31, 2014.
(f)Determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.
(g)The following adjustments at the end of July are necessary.
(1)A count of supplies indicates that $140 is still on hand.
(2)Recognize rent expense for July, $500.
Prepare the necessary entries in the general journal. Post the entries to the general ledger.
(h)Prepare an adjusted trial balance at July 31, 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The post-closing trial balance for Horner Co. is shown below.
|
HORNER CO. Post-Closing Trial Balance December 31, 2014
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 41,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
15,000
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
45,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
23,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
6,450
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$1,500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
43,000
|
|
Owner”s Capital
|
|
86,450
|
|
|
$130,950
|
$130,950
|
The subsidiary ledgers contain the following information: (1) accounts receivable—B. Hannigan $2,500, I. Kirk $7,500, and T. Hodges $5,000; (2) accounts payable—T. Igawa $12,000, D. Danford $18,000, and K. Thayer $13,000. The cost of all merchandise sold was 60% of the sales price.
The transactions for January 2015 are as follows.
|
3
|
Sell merchandise to M. Ziesmer $8,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
5
|
Purchase merchandise from E. Pheatt $2,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
7
|
Receive a check from T. Hodges $3,500.
|
|
11
|
Pay freight on merchandise purchased $300.
|
|
12
|
Pay rent of $1,000 for January.
|
|
13
|
Receive payment in full from M. Ziesmer.
|
|
14
|
Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers. Issued credit of $300 to B. Hannigan for returned merchandise.
|
|
15
|
Send K. Thayer a check for $12,870 in full payment of account, discount $130.
|
|
17
|
Purchase merchandise from G. Roland $1,600, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
18
|
Pay sales salaries of $2,800 and office salaries $2,000.
|
|
20
|
Give D. Danford a 60-day note for $18,000 in full payment of account payable.
|
|
23
|
Total cash sales amount to $9,100.
|
|
24
|
Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers. Sell merchandise on account to I. Kirk $7,400, terms 1/10, n/30.
|
|
27
|
Send E. Pheatt a check for $950.
|
|
29
|
Receive payment on a note of $40,000 from B. Stout.
|
|
30
|
Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers. Return merchandise of $300 to G Roland for credit.
|
Instructions
(a)Open general and subsidiary ledger accounts for the following.
|
101 Cash
|
301 Owner”s Capital
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
401 Sales Revenue
|
|
115 Notes Receivable
|
412 Sales Returns and Allowances
|
|
120 Inventory
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
157 Equipment
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
158 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
726 Salaries and Wages Expense
|
|
200 Notes Payable
|
729 Rent Expense
|
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
|
(b)Record the January transactions in a sales journal, a single-column purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash payments journal, and a general journal.
(c)Post the appropriate amounts to the general ledger.
(d)Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2015.
(e)Determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with controlling accounts in the general ledger.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Belt Company”s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.
|
101 Cash
|
401 Sales Revenue
|
|
112 Accounts Receivable
|
414 Sales Discounts
|
|
120 Inventory
|
505 Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
301 Owner”s Capital
|
|
On June 1, the accounts receivable ledger of Belt Company showed the following balances: Suppan & Son $3,000, Guthrie Co. $2,800, Quentin Bros. $2,400, and Hinshaw Co. $2,000. The June transactions involving the receipt of cash were as follows.
|
June
|
1
|
The owner, Jim Belt, invested additional cash in the business $15,000.
|
|
3
|
Received check in full from Hinshaw Co. less 2% cash discount.
|
|
6
|
Received check in full from Guthrie Co. less 2% cash discount.
|
|
7
|
Made cash sales of merchandise totaling $8,700. The cost of the merchandise sold was $5,000.
|
|
9
|
Received check in full from Suppan & Son less 2% cash discount.
|
|
11
|
Received cash refund from a supplier for damaged merchandise $450.
|
|
15
|
Made cash sales of merchandise totaling $6,500. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,000.
|
|
20
|
Received check in full from Quentin Bros. $2,400.
|
Instructions
(a)Journalize the transactions above in a six-column cash receipts journal with columns for Cash Dr., Sales Discounts Dr., Accounts Receivable Cr., Sales Revenue Cr., Other Accounts Cr., and Cost of Goods Sold Dr./Inventory Cr. Foot and cross-foot the journal.
(b)Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Receivable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the June transactions to these accounts.
(c)Prove the agreement of the control account and subsidiary account balances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Schellhammer Company”s chart of accounts includes the following selected accounts.
|
101 Cash
|
157 Equipment
|
|
120 Inventory
|
201 Accounts Payable
|
|
130 Prepaid Insurance
|
306 Owner”s Drawings
|
On November 1, the accounts payable ledger of Schellhammer Company showed the following balances: S. Gentry $4,000, D. Montero $2,100, R. Trumbo $800, and W. Olivo $1,800. The November transactions involving the payment of cash were as follows.
|
1
|
Purchased merchandise, check no. 11, $950.
|
|
3
|
Purchased store equipment, check no. 12, $1,400.
|
|
5
|
Paid W. Olivo balance due of $1,800, less 1% discount, check no. 13, $1,782.
|
|
11
|
Purchased merchandise, check no. 14, $1,700.
|
|
15
|
Paid R. Trumbo balance due of $800, less 3% discount, check no. 15, $776.
|
|
16
|
M. Richey, the owner, withdrew $400 cash for own use, check no. 16.
|
|
19
|
Paid D. Montero in full for invoice no. 1245, $2,100 less 2% discount, check no. 17, $2,058.
|
|
25
|
Paid premium due on one-year insurance policy, check no. 18, $2,400.
|
|
30
|
Paid S. Gentry in full for invoice no. 832, $2,700, check no. 19.
|
Instructions
(a)Journalize the transactions above in a four-column cash payments journal with columns for Other Accounts Dr., Accounts Payable Dr., Inventory Cr., and Cash Cr. Foot and cross-foot the journal.
(b)Insert the beginning balances in the Accounts Payable control and subsidiary accounts, and post the November transactions to these accounts.
(c)Prove the agreement of the control account and the subsidiary account balances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A TV Company finds that in 2009, the cost to manufacture 200 TV sets was Rs. 6,16,000, which it sold at Rs. 4,000 each. Cost was made up of:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
2,00,000
|
|
Direct wages
|
3,00,000
|
|
Factory expenses
|
60,000
|
|
Office expenses
|
56,000
|
For 2010, it estimates that
- Each T.V. will require materials of the value of Rs. 1,000 and wages Rs. 1,500.
- Absorb factory expenses on the basis of direct wages.
- Absorb office expenses on the basis of works cost. Prepare a statement showing the profit it should make per unit if it enhances the price of a TV by Rs. 80. (Bharathidasan University. Adapted)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a cost sheet showing cost of production and profit from the following data:
|
|
Opening
|
Closing
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stock of raw materials
|
75,000
|
78,750
|
|
Work-in-progress
|
24,600
|
27,300
|
|
Finished goods
|
52,080
|
47,250
|
|
|
|
|
|
Purchases for the year
|
|
65,700
|
|
Sales
|
|
2,16,930
|
|
Direct wages
|
|
51,450
|
|
Works expenses
|
|
25,020
|
|
Office expenses
|
|
20,610
|
|
Selling and distribution expenses
|
|
12,630
|
|
Sale of scrap
|
|
990
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following particulars of a manufacturing firm, prepare a statement showing (a) cost of materials used, (b) works cost, (c) cost of production, (d) percentage of works overhead to productive wages and (e) percentage of general overhead to works cost.
|
|
|
|
Stock of materials on 1 January 2009
|
40,000
|
|
Purchase of materials in January 2009
|
11,00,000
|
|
Stock of finished goods on 1 January 2009
|
50,000
|
|
Productive wages
|
5,00,000
|
|
Finished goods sold
|
24,00,000
|
|
Works overhead
|
1,50,000
|
|
Office and general expenses
|
1,00,000
|
|
Stock of material on 31 December 2009
|
1,40,000
|
|
Stock of finished goods on 31 December 2009
|
60,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a balance sheet and an income statement
The following information is based on accounting data for 2011 and 2012 for PetroLim, a petrochemicals company based in Malaysia. It reports its results in thousands of Malaysian Ringgits.
|
31 December
|
|
Statement of financial position items
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Cash
|
177,178
|
108,140
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
36,838
|
16,976
|
|
Advances to suppliers
|
40,772
|
25,328
|
|
Inventories
|
176,934
|
152,076
|
|
Other current assets
|
40,734
|
26,914
|
|
Property, plant and equipment (net)
|
495,606
|
463,180
|
|
Oil and gas properties
|
652,656
|
540,992
|
|
Intangible assets
|
40,044
|
32,254
|
|
Other noncurrent assets
|
327,422
|
264,428
|
|
Accounts payable
|
208,920
|
155,872
|
|
Advances from customers
|
24,866
|
23,180
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
169,522
|
181,878
|
|
Long-term debt
|
70,610
|
60,802
|
|
Other noncurrent liabilities
|
84,124
|
73,366
|
|
Common shares
|
889,054
|
708,680
|
|
Retained earnings
|
541,088
|
426,510
|
|
Income statement items
|
2012
|
|
Net operating revenues
|
1,670,074
|
|
Interest and other revenues
|
6,196
|
|
Cost of sales
|
974,224
|
|
Selling expenses
|
82,690
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
98,648
|
|
Other operating expenses
|
129,320
|
|
Interest expense
|
5,738
|
|
Income taxes
|
98,662
|
Required
(a) Prepare an income statement for PetroLim for the year ending 31 December 2012.
(b) Prepare statements of financial position for PetroLim as of 31 December 2011 and 31 December 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
JanMar Fabrics: preparing the balance sheet and income statement The adjusted, postclosing trial balance of JanMar Fabrics on 30 June 2012 appears on the next page.
JanMar Fabrics adjusted, postclosing trial balance June 30, 2012
|
Cash
|
$221,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
136,250
|
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
340,750
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
1,050,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
$420,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
165,500
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
25,000
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
6,250
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
750,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
383,250
|
|
$1,750,000
|
$1,750,000
|
The firm made the following transactions during July:
1. Sold merchandise on account for a total selling price of $425 000.
2. Purchased merchandise inventory on account from various suppliers for $231 500.
3. Paid rent for the month of July of $58 750.
4. Paid salaries to employees during July of $103 000.
5. Collected accounts receivable of $170 750.
6. Paid accounts payable of $194 750.
7. Paid miscellaneous expenses of $16 000.
Adjusting entries required at the end of July relate to the following:
8. The company paid the premium on a one-year insurance policy on 1 March 2012, with coverage beginning on that date. This is the only insurance policy in force on 30 June 2012.
9. The firm depreciates its equipment over a 10-year life. The equipment is not expected to have any residual value.
10. Employees earned salaries of $8000 during the last three days of July but were not paid. These are the only unpaid salaries at the end of July.
11. The note payable is a 90-day, 12% note issued on 30 June 2012.
12. Merchandise inventory on hand on 31 July 2012 was $389 750.
Required
Using a trial balance and T-accounts, prepare an income statement for the month of July 2012, and prepare a balance sheet dated 31 July 2012. Cross-reference entries in the T-accounts using the numbers of the transactions shown above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue recognition at and after time of sale Suite Novotel is an all-suites hotel chain owned and operated by the Accor Group. Most of the hotels in this chain are found in France, Spain, and Germany.
On the company website, customers are offered a nonrefundable special rate at €160 per night, or a refundable rate at €225 per night. In either case, the entire amount is charged to the customer’s account at the time of booking. For the refundable room, if the reservation is cancelled prior to 16.00 on the date of arrival, a full refund of the amount charged is made. If the cancellation occurs after 16.00 the customer forfeits one day at the reserved rate (€225).
Required
Determine the appropriate journal entries for each of the following transactions:
(a) On 6 March a customer makes a nonrefundable reservation for three nights beginning 24 March. The customer arrives as scheduled and checks out on 27 March.
(b) On 6 March a customer makes a reservation identical to the one in part (a). On 21 March, the customer cancels the reservation.
(c) On 6 March a customer makes a refundable reservation for three nights beginning 24 March. The customer arrives as scheduled and checks out on 27 March.
(d) On 6 March, a customer makes a reservation identical to the one in part (c). On 21 March the customer cancels the reservation.
(e) On 6 March, a customer makes a reservation identical to the one in part (c). On 24 March, at 19.30, the customer cancels the reservation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The percentage-of-completion method
On 1 April 2011, Roller Construction entered into a fixed-price contract to construct an office building for €18 million. Roller uses the percentage-of-completion method. Information related to the contract appears below.
|
December 31, 2011
|
December 31, 2012
|
|
Percentage completed
|
20%
|
60%
|
|
Estimated total cost
|
€ 13,500,000
|
€ 14,400,000
|
|
Profit recognized to date
|
€ 900,000
|
€ 2,160,000
|
Required
(a) Calculate the revenues and expenses recognized for both 2011 and 2012.
(b) What impact did the €900 000 increase in estimated total cost in 2012 have on revenue recognition in that year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entries for gift cards
Subway is a global food retailer with stores located throughout the world. Suppose a customer at one of its Paris stores purchases a sandwich for €5.00, a brownie for €2.00 and a soft drink for €1.50. The customer pays with cash.
Required
(a) What journal entry will Subway record for this transaction? (Ignore expenses.)
(b) Suppose that in addition to the above items, the customer buys a Subway gift card for €50.00. What journal entry would Subway record for this transaction?
(c) Now suppose that the customer buys the same items listed above, but uses a previously purchased gift card to pay for the purchases. Also assume that there is a sufficient balance on the card to cover the entire cost. What journal entry would Subway make now to record the transaction?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The percentage-of-completion method
On 1 September 2009, Tan Construction Company contracted to build a shopping complex on the east coast of Singapore. The total contract price was $90 million. As required by Singapore’s Financial Reporting Standards (which are based on IFRS), Tan Construction uses the percentage-of-completion method in accounting for long-term contracts. The Company uses an input-based (i.e., cost-based) approach to determine the percentage of completion.
The schedule of expected and actual cash collections and contract costs is follows:
|
Year
|
Cash collections from customer
|
Estimated and actual cost incurred
|
|
2009
|
$18.0 million
|
$6.0 million
|
|
2010
|
22.5 million
|
18.0 million
|
|
2011
|
22.5 million
|
24.0 million
|
|
2012
|
27.0 million
|
12.0 million
|
|
$90.0 million
|
$60.0 million
|
|
Required
(a) Calculate the amount of revenue, expense, and net income for each of the four years.
(b) Show the journal entries that Tan Construction will make in 2009, 2010, 2011, and 2012 for this contract. Tan accumulates contract costs in a Construction in Progress account. The costs involve a mix of cash payments, credits to various other asset accounts, and credits to liability accounts. But for the sake of simplicity, assume that all costs are credited to Accounts Payable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kiwi Builders, Ltd.
In May 2001, Kiwi Builders, Ltd. was employed by the government of Hamilton, New Zealand, to erect a municipal office building on the outskirts of the city. The contract called for work to begin a few weeks later. Kiwi took on the role of general contractor. Most of the work would be done by subcontractors.
Under the terms of the contract, Kiwi Builders was to receive $24 million in cash payments to be paid as follows: 25% when the work was 30% complete, another 25% when the work was 60% complete, and the remaining 50% when the work was fully completed. The contract stipulated that completion percentage estimates had to be certified by an independent engineering consultant before progress payments would be made.
In preparing its bid, the company estimated that the total cost to complete the project would be $21.6 million, assuming no cost overruns. Hence, the company expected a profit of $2.4 million.
During the first year of the contract, the company incurred costs of $6.48 million. In late June 2002, the engineering consulting firm of C. McMillan & Associates determined that the project was at least 30% complete, and on 30 June the first progress payment was made.
In the following year, the company incurred additional costs of $7.02 million. In late June 2003 the engineers certified that at least 60% of the project had been completed, and the second progress payment was made at the end of the month.
In their report, the engineers noted that the company might be facing significant cost overruns. The directors of Kiwi Builders responded by saying that anticipated efficiency improvements in the final phases of construction would offset any prior cost overruns. Subsequent results suggest that some, but not all, of the cost overruns were recovered.
By the end of May 2004, Kiwi’s work was done. Actual costs incurred during the fiscal year ending 30 June 2004 were $8.4 million. The firm received certification for the fully completed building, and the final cash payment was made.
Required
(a) Ignoring any other sources of revenues and expenses, determine the level of profits to be reported by Kiwi Builders, Ltd. for the years ended 30 June 2002, 2003, and 2004, using the following revenue recognition methods:
(1) Percentage-of-completion. (Note that Kiwi uses an output-based approach.)
(2) Completed contract.
(3) Cost recovery.
(4) Cash basis.
(b) Kiwi experienced cost overruns in the second year of the project. In hindsight, the overruns proved modest. But assume that the magnitude of the problem was severe enough so that by the end of fiscal year 2003 it was apparent that Kiwi would suffer a loss on the project of approximately $700 000. What impact would such information have had on the accounting for the project under the percentage-of-completion method?
(c) Which set of results from part (a) best reflects the economic performance of Kiwi during the three-year period, and what is the basis for your assessment?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue recognition at Starbucks Corporation
Introduction
On 2 February 2005, Starbucks Corporation’s stock price plummeted 8.2% after the company released its latest revenue numbers (for the company’s stock graph). In a press statement, the specialty coffee company said sales rose 23% to $452 million from $368 million for the four-week period ended 30 January 2005. Moreover, consolidated net revenues for the quarter were $2 billion, a 24% increase from $1.6 billion a year earlier. Same-store sales, however, rose a disappointing 7%. Starbucks’ financial statements are shown in. Background
In 1971, Starbucks Coffee, Tea and Spice opened its first location in Seattle’s Pike Place Market. In 1982, Howard Schultz joined the company as director of retail operations and marketing. Inspired by the popularity of espresso bars in Italy, he developed and launched a plan to bring the coffeehouse concept to the United States. In 1987, Schultz and other investors acquired the company’s assets and renamed it Starbucks Corporation. The company went public in 1992 on the NASDAQ listed under the ticker symbol SBUX.
Starbucks’ business consisted of purchasing, roasting, and selling high-quality whole bean coffees and coffee drinks, primarily through company-operated retail stores. The company also sold non coffee beverages, a variety of complementary food items, value cards, coffee-related accessories and equipment, and a line of compact discs (CDs). In addition, Starbucks sold coffee and tea products through its equity investees and other channels.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Network Associates (McAfee): a case of “channel stuffing”
Network Associates (hereafter, NA, later renamed McAfee) designed computer hardware and software to combat viruses, improve network security, and manage network operations.
Like many other high-tech companies of that era, NA rode a wave of high stock market valuation in the late 1990s. The company achieved high revenue growth through 1998, some of it organic, some via acquisitions.
However, in early 1999 the stock price took a big hit. After peaking at a split-adjusted $335.39 per share in December 1998, the first four months of 1999 saw significant declines: −21% in January; −10% in February; −35% in March; and −57% in April. The closing price at the end of April was $67.08, or an 80% drop in just four months.
In its prerelease of 1998 earnings (made in January 1999 for the purpose of providing guidance to the analyst community), management gave no indication of sales declines on the horizon. On the contrary, they stated that they were on track to meet analysts’ expectations for the year. Yet three months later they reversed their previous announcement. In April 1999 several shareholder lawsuits against the company and its senior management were filed.
Management’s explanation for the reduced forecasts of future sales blamed a shift in customer preferences, as explained in this 7 April 1999 article from Dow Jones Business Service:
“Our sales cycle is more complex,” said Network Associates’ Chairman and Chief Executive Officer William Larson. Only a year or so ago, corporations would buy security software by picking a so-called firewall, encryption software and then cobbling their purchases together as a security umbrella. Today, companies are seeking integrated suites of security products, taking longer periods of time to evaluate the product and paying more attention to price.
Network Associates has begun integrating offerings from its many acquisitions into a suite. But the move toward a broader, enterprise-wide sales posture has meant longer evaluation cycles. “Be careful what you ask for, you just might get it,” Larson said of its enterprise focus.
Yet at the time management was making these claims to the investing community, they were actually dealing with the effects of several quarters of channel stuffing. Inventory was backing up at the distributor level, and distributors could not pay off the amounts owed to NA.
On 26 December 2000 the CEO (Larson) resigned without explanation, as did the CFO and President. The company’s share price fell by 68% that month, which followed a loss of 32% in November.
Eventually, the SEC filed a complaint in the US federal court system which sought monetary penalties from the company. Among other charges, the Commission claimed that the company:
- created a subsidiary to buy back inventory it had previously sold to distributors, in order to avoid characterizing the transaction as a return of merchandise;
- secretly paid distributors significant amounts so that funds could be cycled back to the company and be portrayed as “payments”;
- used other unrelated reserve accounts to draw upon (i.e., debit) when transferring cash to the distributors as mentioned above;
- timed sales with a significant customer (Ingram Micro) with a fiscal quarter date that often followed McAfee’s by several days – McAfee would pass the inventory along at the end of its quarter as a “sale,” yet Ingram would return it after McAfee’s new quarter started but before Ingram’s current quarter ended;
- sold inventory to distributors on consignment, where the distributor only paid for the receivable when the product was passed along to an end customer; and
- conducted sham sales of its accounts receivable by transferring them to a financial institution for up-front cash, yet guaranteeing the institution that the receivables would be paid (thus McAfee retained the risk of collection).
NA, now called McAfee, settled these claims, without admitting or denying the allegations, in early 2006, by paying a fine of $50 million.
Before the settlement, the company recorded a series of accounting restatements related to the above issues, most notably in June 2002 and October 2003. Those two restatements focused on the year 1998, and resulted in a reduction in revenues in that year of $562 million as well as a reduction in net income of $356 million. Overall, cumulative restatements during the early 2000s reduced revenue by $622 million and net income by $353 million over the period 1998 to 2000.
Required
(a) Describe in one or two sentences the concept of “channel stuffing.”
(b) Can a company stuff its distribution channels forever? If not, how does the practice come to an end?
(c) After McAfee restated their accounts, what was the “true” number for 1998 sales?
(d) What indicators can you find in that might indicate channel stuffing?
(e) Not all of the allegations made by the SEC are easily detected from the analysis of financial statements. Which ones might be more difficult to detect?
(f) What is the pattern of operating cash flows that is likely to occur when a company stuffs its channel? In NA’s (McAfee’s) case, where was it getting the cash that enabled it to carry out the strategy?
(g) What sort of forces do you suppose pressure managers into opting for a strategy of channel stuffing?
Selected financial information and ratios from 1996 to 2001
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The books of a manufacturing company present the following data for the month of June 2009:
Direct labour cost Rs. 17,500 being 175% of the works overhead; cost of goods sold excluding administration expenses Rs. 56,000. Inventory accounts showed the following opening and closing balances.
|
|
June 1
|
June 30
|
|
Raw materials
|
Rs. 8,000
|
Rs. 10,600
|
|
Work-in-progress
|
Rs. 10,500
|
Rs. 14,500
|
|
Finished goods Other data:
|
Rs. 17,600
|
Rs. 19,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
|
Rs. 3,500
|
|
General and administration expenses
|
|
Rs. 2,500
|
|
Sales for the month
|
|
Rs. 75,000
|
You are required to (i) compute the value of materials purchased and (ii) prepare a statement of cost showing the various elements of cost and (c) profit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Model : Quotation)
The following data, relating to a factory for the year 2009 are available:
|
|
|
|
Materials consumed
|
Rs. 2,00,000
|
|
Direct wages
|
Rs. 1,50,000
|
|
Factory expenses
|
Rs. 90,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
Rs. 88,000
|
Based on the above data, find out the cost of a job to be done in January 2010.
|
Materials required
|
Rs. 20,000
|
|
Wages for sale
|
Rs. 15,000
|
What price will be quoted for the job, if a profit at 20% on selling price is required?
(Madras University)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Model: Cost of raw materials purchased)
Compute the cost of raw materials purchased from the data given below:
|
Opening stock of raw materials
|
Rs. 10,000
|
|
Closing stock of raw materials
|
Rs. 15,000
|
|
Expenses on purchases
|
Rs. 5,000
|
|
Direct wages
|
Rs. 50,000
|
|
Prime cost
|
Rs. 1,00,000
|
(Delhi University)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare cost sheet of a machine and calculate the price with which the company should quote for the manufacture of a machine requiring materials at Rs. 1,250, productive wages Rs. 750 and factory overhead Rs. 150 so that the price may yield a profit of 20% on selling price. You are given the accounts of the company manufacturing the type machines referred to the above for the 6 months ending 31st December, as further details:
|
Materials used
|
Rs. 1,50,000
|
|
Productive wages
|
Rs. 2,40,000
|
|
Factory overhead
|
Rs. 24,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
Rs. 17,640
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
All expenses incurred in receiving and storing the material form part of the cost of materials. When the direct material that is used in the manufacture of finished goods is translated into financial terms, the resultant is direct material cost.
Direct material cost can be easily identified with a cost unit.
Direct material cost is the price per unit paid to the supplier with respect to items purchased from the supplier. It comprises of:
- Purchase of item
- Local taxes and duties
- Inward freight
- Cash discount
- Volume discount
- Trade discount
- Rebates, duty drawback, modvat and subsidies
- Packing expenses, delivery
- Joint purchase cost
- Extra/spare parts
- Cost of containers (in case of returnable containers, the difference between the charge for returnable containers and the sum refunded on return of containers) is taken as expense
- Provisional pricing of materials
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Direct material cost and issue price of materials to jobs.
X Ltd purchased two kinds of raw materials for the manufacture of its product. From the following information given in the supplier’s bill, you are required to calculate (a) direct material cost and (b) issue price of materials:
|
|
|
|
Raw material X: 250 Nos of Rs. 5 each
|
1,250
|
|
Raw material Y: 500 Nos of Rs. 2 each
|
1,000
|
|
Insurance
|
45
|
|
Central excise duty: Raw material X:
|
80
|
|
Raw material Y:
|
120
|
|
Packing, storage and delivery charges
|
150
|
|
Sales tax
|
270
|
|
Freight
|
300
|
The purchaser paid Octroi duty at Rs. 2 per unit. During the checking of incoming materials at the buyer’s factory, it was found that 5 units of raw material X and 10 units of raw material Y were in broken condition. It was found from past experience that 20% of materials deteriorate in storage.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: EOQ and quantity discounts
JP Ltd manufacturers of a special product, follows the policy of EOQ for one of its components. The component’s details are as follows:
|
|
|
|
Purchase price per component
|
200
|
|
Cost of an order
|
100
|
|
Annual cost of carrying unit in inventory
|
10% of purchase price
|
|
Total cost of inventory and ordering per annum
|
4,000
|
The company has been offered a discount of 2% on the price of the component provided the lot size is 2,000 components at a time.
- Compute the EOQ
- Advise whether the quantity discount offer can be accepted [Assume that the inventory carrying cost does not vary according to discount policy.]
- Would your advice differ if the company is offered 5% discount on a single order?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A firm is able to obtain quantity discounts on its orders of material as follows:
|
Price per kg
|
|
|
kg
|
|
8.00
|
less than 250
|
|
7.90
|
250 and less than 500
|
|
7.80
|
500 and less than 1,000
|
|
7.60
|
1,000 and less than 2,000
|
|
7.50
|
2,000 and above
|
The annual demand for the material is 2,000 kg. Stock holding costs are 20% of material cost per annum. The delivery cost per order is Rs. 8.
You are required to calculate the best quantity to order.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose you are an accounts payable clerk for a small home improvements contractor. This morning one of the site supervisors submitted an invoice requesting immediate payment to a new vendor for items he claims were delivered directly to a work site. The supervisor attached a note to the invoice asking that the check be returned to him upon issuance so that he could personally deliver it to the vendor. This would ensure the timeliness of future deliveries. He claims that unless the payment is made immediately, there will be delivery delays on items needed to complete this job, as well as delays on items for another contract in progress. Although you are suspicious of this unusual request, you are tempted to accommodate it. You know that timely completion and collection on these contracts is critical to the company”s production scheduling and cash management. Moreover, the company president is on vacation and therefore not available to grant special authorization for this payment. Speculate on the type of frau that could be in process here. What (if anything) could you do to ascertain the propriety of the transaction and still make the payment today?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kludney Incorporated has the following processes related to purchasing: When it is determined that an item should be ordered, the purchasing department prepares a three-copy purchase order. The first copy is mailed to the vendor, the second copy is filed by PO number in the purchasing department, and the third copy is forwarded to inventory control. Inventory control updates the inventory ledger with the quantities that were ordered and files the purchase order copy by date.
When ordered items arrive at the receiving dock, the packing slip is inspected and a two-copy receiving report is prepared. The first copy is forwarded to the purchasing department, where it is filed with the purchase order. The second copy is filed in the receiving department by date. The packing slip is forwarded to the accounts payable department.
Vendors mail invoices directly to the accounts payable department. The accounts payable department reviews the invoice and related packing slip, prepares a cash disbursement voucher, updates the accounts payable ledger, and files the invoice by date. The cash disbursement voucher is forwarded to the cash disbursements department. The packing slip is returned to the receiving department. The cash disbursements department prepares a twocopy check, mails the first copy to the vendor, and forwards the second copy to the general ledger department. The cash disbursement voucher is forwarded to the accounts payable department where it is filed with the invoice.
The general ledger department updates the general ledger accounts, using the second copy of the check, and then forwards the check copy to cash disbursements to be filed by check number.
Required:
- Draw a document flowchart of the purchase processes of Kludney.
- Identify any weaknesses in internal controls within the purchase processes and indicate the improvements you would suggest.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following journal entry is passed when
|
Journal Entry
|
|
|
|
|
Date
|
Particulars
|
Debit (US$)
|
Credit (US$)
|
|
1-Oct-X1 Account
|
CFD Funding Cost
|
60.00
|
|
|
|
To CFD Margin Account
|
|
60.00
|
|
|
(Being the funding cost to carry over the long position of CFD in respect to shares bought.)
|
|
|
a. The buyer of the CFD contract is financed with the leverage amount
b. The interest is paid towards the overnight open position
c. The seller of the CFD contract is financed with the leverage amount
d. The interest for the overnight position is received
e. The buyer of the CFD contract pays the margin amount
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jounta Enterprises is a wholesaler that purchases consumer merchandise from many different suppliers. Jounta then sells this merchandise to many different retail chain stores. The following paragraphs describe the expenditures processes at Jounta:
Warehouse employees constantly monitor the level of each merchandise item by assessing how many remaining boxes of items are on warehouse shelves. When a warehouse worker sees the need to order a particular product, he fills out a postcard-size order requisition form with the product name and item number. The number is Jounta”s item number.
When the purchasing department receives a requisition from the warehouse employee, a buyer looks up the last purchase of that item and completes a purchase order to buy the item from that vendor. The manager of the purchasing department approves the purchase order before it is mailed to the vendor. One copy of the purchase order is mailed to the vendor, one copy is filed in the purchasing department, one copy is forwarded to the receiving department, and one copy is forwarded to the accounts payable department.
When the receiving department receives an order, it compares the packing slip with the purchase order. If no purchase order exists, the item is returned to the vendor. A receiving report is prepared for the number of items indicated on the packing slip. One copy of the receiving report is filed in the receiving department, one copy is forwarded to the purchasing department, and one copy is forwarded to the accounts payable department. Items received are then transported to the warehouse.
When the accounts payable department receives an invoice from the vendor, an employee in the accounts payable department compares the purchase order, receiving report, and invoice. If the three documents match correctly, a cash disbursement voucher is prepared. If it does not match, the employee contacts the vendor to try to reconcile the differences. The cash disbursement voucher is reviewed by the manager of the accounts payable department. If it appears correct to her, she writes a check and forwards the check to the treasurer to be signed and mailed to the vendor.
Required:
- List any strengths and weaknesses in the internal control procedures of Jounta Enterprises.
- Draw a document flowchart of the expenditure processes.
- Describe any benefits that Jounta may receive by installing a newer, IT system to process purchases, goods received, accounts payable, and checks. Be specific as to how IT systems could benefit each of the processes described.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Crandolf Metals, Inc., is a manufacturer of aluminum cans for the beverage industry. Crandolf purchases aluminum and other raw materials from several vendors. The purchasing process at Crandolf occurs as follows:
When inventory of any raw material seems low, a purchasing agent examines the records to determine the vendor who supplied the last purchase of that raw material. The purchasing agent prepares a three-copy purchase order and mails the top copy to the vendor. One copy is filed in the purchasing department, and one copy is forwarded to the inventory control department (inventory record keeping). Inventory control personnel update the inventory subsidiary ledger and file the purchase order by number in the inventory control files.
When the goods arrive at the receiving dock, a receiving report is prepared from information on the packing slip. One copy of the receiving report is filed in the receiving department, and one copy is forwarded to purchasing so that the purchasing department is informed of the receipt of goods.
The vendor mails an invoice for the raw materials directly to the accounts payable department. When the invoice is received, accounts payable personnel prepare a cash disbursement voucher to approve payment. The voucher is forwarded to the cash disbursements department. The accounts payable department also updates the accounts payable subsidiary ledger and files the invoice by invoice number.
Upon receiving the cash disbursement voucher, an employee in the cash disbursements department prepares a two-copy check. The top copy of the check is mailed to the vendor, and the second copy is forwarded to the general ledger department. The cash disbursement voucher is stamped “paid” and returned to the accounts payable department. The voucher is filed with the invoice in the accounts payable department.
The general ledger department records the check in the general ledger and returns the check copy to the cash disbursements department, where it is filed.
Required:
- Draw two process maps to reflect the business processes at Crandolf. One process map should depict the purchasing processes, and the second process map should depict the cash disbursements processes.
- Draw two document flowcharts to reflect the records and reports used by these processes at Crandolf. One flowchart should depict the purchasing processes, and the second flowchart should depict the cash disbursements processes.
- Describe any weaknesses in these processes or internal controls. As you identify weaknesses, also describe your suggested improvements.
- Draw two new process maps that include your suggested improvements. One process map should depict the purchasing processes, and the second process map should depict the cash disbursement processes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of the Components of Total Cost
An analysis of the total cost of production and cost of sales is carried out by preparing “Cost sheet”. A Cost sheet is an important document prepared by the costing department. Cost sheet is prepared to analyse the components of total cost, thereby determining (i) prime cost, (ii) works cost, (iii) cost of production, (iv) cost of sales and (v) profit. All aspects discussed are presented in the format or specimen of a cost sheet which is shown inTable 1.6:
Specimen of Cost Sheet
COST SHEET
For the period ended….
|
Particulars
|
Amount (Rs.)
|
|
1. Direct Material
|
–
|
|
2. Direct Labour
|
–
|
|
*13. Direct Expenses
|
–
|
|
4. PRIME COST (Add 1 + 2 + 3)
|
××
|
|
5. Add: Factory overhead
|
–
|
|
6. WORKS COST (or) FACTORY COST {Add 4 + 5}
|
××
|
|
*27. Add: Administration overhead
|
–
|
|
8. COST OF PRODUCTION (6 + 7)
|
××
|
|
9. Add: Selling and distribution overhead
|
–
|
|
10. TOTAL COST (or) COST OF SALES
|
××
|
|
11. PROFIT
|
–
|
|
12. SALES
|
××
|
Cost Sheet Depicting Components of Total Cost
You are required to calculate (i) prime cost, (ii) works cost, (iii) total cost of production and (iv) cost of sales, from the following particulars:
|
|
|
|
Raw materials consumed
|
30,000
|
|
Wages paid to labourers
|
12,000
|
|
Chargeable expenses—Direct
|
1,000
|
|
Wages of foreman
|
2.000
|
|
Wages of store keeper
|
1,000
|
|
Electricity : Factory
|
2,500
|
|
Office
|
500
|
|
Rent : Factory
|
1,500
|
|
Office
|
500
|
|
Depreciation: Plant and machinery
|
600
|
|
Office furniture
|
200
|
|
Consumable stores
|
1,000
|
|
Manager’s salary
|
3,000
|
|
Office printing and stationery
|
500
|
|
Telephone expenses
|
500
|
|
Salesmen’s salary and commission
|
1,500
|
|
Travelling expenses
|
300
|
|
Carriage outward
|
100
|
|
Advertising
|
300
|
|
Warehouse charges
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of the Components of Total Cost
An analysis of the total cost of production and cost of sales is carried out by preparing “Cost sheet”. A Cost sheet is an important document prepared by the costing department. Cost sheet is prepared to analyse the components of total cost, thereby determining (i) prime cost, (ii) works cost, (iii) cost of production, (iv) cost of sales and (v) profit. All aspects discussed are presented in the format or specimen of a cost sheet which is shown inTable 1.6:
Specimen of Cost Sheet
COST SHEET
For the period ended….
|
Particulars
|
Amount (Rs.)
|
|
1. Direct Material
|
–
|
|
2. Direct Labour
|
–
|
|
*13. Direct Expenses
|
–
|
|
4. PRIME COST (Add 1 + 2 + 3)
|
××
|
|
5. Add: Factory overhead
|
–
|
|
6. WORKS COST (or) FACTORY COST {Add 4 + 5}
|
××
|
|
*27. Add: Administration overhead
|
–
|
|
8. COST OF PRODUCTION (6 + 7)
|
××
|
|
9. Add: Selling and distribution overhead
|
–
|
|
10. TOTAL COST (or) COST OF SALES
|
××
|
|
11. PROFIT
|
–
|
|
12. SALES
|
××
|
Cost Sheet Depicting Components of Total Cost
The following inventory data relate to XL Ltd:
|
|
Inventories
|
|
Beginning (Rs.)
|
Ending (Rs.)
|
|
Raw materials
|
72,000
|
80,000
|
|
Work-in-progress
|
75,000
|
90,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
1,20,000
|
1,00,000
|
|
Additional Information
|
(Rs.)
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
7,15,000
|
|
Total goods processed during the period
|
6,75,000
|
|
Factory overheads
|
1,21,000
|
|
Direct materials used
|
1,64,000
|
You are required to determine:
- Raw material purchased
- Direct labour cost incurred
- Cost of Goods sold.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of the Components of Total Cost
An analysis of the total cost of production and cost of sales is carried out by preparing “Cost sheet”. A Cost sheet is an important document prepared by the costing department. Cost sheet is prepared to analyse the components of total cost, thereby determining (i) prime cost, (ii) works cost, (iii) cost of production, (iv) cost of sales and (v) profit. All aspects discussed are presented in the format or specimen of a cost sheet which is shown inTable 1.6:
Specimen of Cost Sheet
COST SHEET
For the period ended….
|
Particulars
|
Amount (Rs.)
|
|
1. Direct Material
|
–
|
|
2. Direct Labour
|
–
|
|
*13. Direct Expenses
|
–
|
|
4. PRIME COST (Add 1 + 2 + 3)
|
××
|
|
5. Add: Factory overhead
|
–
|
|
6. WORKS COST (or) FACTORY COST {Add 4 + 5}
|
××
|
|
*27. Add: Administration overhead
|
–
|
|
8. COST OF PRODUCTION (6 + 7)
|
××
|
|
9. Add: Selling and distribution overhead
|
–
|
|
10. TOTAL COST (or) COST OF SALES
|
××
|
|
11. PROFIT
|
–
|
|
12. SALES
|
××
|
Cost Sheet Depicting Components of Total Cost
- ABC Co Ltd. is engaged in the manufacture of product “P”. Its records reveal the following data for 31 March 2010:
- Direct Wages: Rs. 20,000
- Factory overhead: 125% of direct wages
|
|
31 March 2009 Rs.
|
31 March 2010 Rs.
|
|
Raw Materials
|
10,000
|
12,000
|
|
Work-in-progress
|
15,000
|
17,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
30,000
|
25,000
|
|
Administration overhead
|
|
5,000
|
|
Purchases
|
|
70,000
|
|
Selling overhead
|
|
7,000
|
|
Sales for the year
|
|
1,50,000
|
- Prepare a cost statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of the Components of Total Cost
An analysis of the total cost of production and cost of sales is carried out by preparing “Cost sheet”. A Cost sheet is an important document prepared by the costing department. Cost sheet is prepared to analyse the components of total cost, thereby determining (i) prime cost, (ii) works cost, (iii) cost of production, (iv) cost of sales and (v) profit. All aspects discussed are presented in the format or specimen of a cost sheet which is shown inTable 1.6:
Specimen of Cost Sheet
COST SHEET
For the period ended….
|
Particulars
|
Amount (Rs.)
|
|
1. Direct Material
|
–
|
|
2. Direct Labour
|
–
|
|
*13. Direct Expenses
|
–
|
|
4. PRIME COST (Add 1 + 2 + 3)
|
××
|
|
5. Add: Factory overhead
|
–
|
|
6. WORKS COST (or) FACTORY COST {Add 4 + 5}
|
××
|
|
*27. Add: Administration overhead
|
–
|
|
8. COST OF PRODUCTION (6 + 7)
|
××
|
|
9. Add: Selling and distribution overhead
|
–
|
|
10. TOTAL COST (or) COST OF SALES
|
××
|
|
11. PROFIT
|
–
|
|
12. SALES
|
××
|
Cost Sheet Depicting Components of Total Cost
The books and records of Good Luck Manufacturing Co. present the following data for the month of January 2010:
Direct labour cost: Rs. 32,000 (160% of factory overhead)
Cost of goods sold: Rs. 1,12,000
Inventory accounts showed these opening and closing balances:
|
|
January 1
|
January 31
|
|
|
|
|
|
Raw material
|
16,000
|
17,200
|
|
Work-in-progress
|
16,000
|
24,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
28,000
|
36,000
|
Other data:
|
Selling expenses
|
6,800
|
|
General and administration expenses
|
5,200
|
|
Sales for the month
|
1,50,000
|
You are required to prepare a statement showing cost of goods manufactured and sold and profit earned.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ascertain the amount of production overhead:
|
|
|
|
Office stationery
|
12,000
|
|
Factory lighting
|
20,000
|
|
Works manager’s salary
|
60,000
|
|
Indirect materials
|
12,000
|
|
Audit fees
|
10,000
|
|
Foreman’s salary
|
25,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following information, calculate the cost of direct materials consumed:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials purchased
|
80,000
|
|
Cost of material sold (Due to unsuitability)
|
1,000
|
|
Material returned to suppliers (Defective materials)
|
2,000
|
|
Sale of direct material scrap
|
1,000
|
|
Closing stock of materials
|
10,000
|
|
Opening stock of materials
|
8,000
|
|
Octroi and custom duties (on materials purchased)
|
6,000
|
|
Carriage inwards
|
2,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following are the estimated costs for producing 1000 units:
|
|
|
|
Raw materials
|
10,000
|
|
Wages
|
8,000
|
|
Direct expenses
|
2,000
|
|
Machine hours needed
|
2,000 hours
|
Machine hours rateRs. 2
Fixed overheads @10% on works cost.
Calculate the cost per unit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
[Model: Cost sheet: Simple]
|
|
|
|
Stock of raw materials as on 1st January
|
25,000
|
|
Stock of raw materials as on 31st January
|
26,200
|
|
Purchase of raw materials
|
21,900
|
|
Carriage on purchases
|
1,100
|
|
Sale of finished goods
|
72,300
|
|
Direct wages
|
17,200
|
|
Non-productive wages
|
800
|
|
Direct expenses
|
1,200
|
|
Factory overheads
|
8,300
|
|
Administrative overheads
|
3,200
|
|
Selling overheads
|
4,200
|
(Madras B.A. Corp and B.Com)
|
Prime cost :
|
Rs. 40,200
|
|
Works cost :
|
Rs. 49,300
|
|
Cost of production:
|
Rs. 52,500
|
|
Cost of sales :
|
Rs. 56,700
|
|
Profit:
|
Rs. 15,600]
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a factory two types of radios are manufactured viz. Orient and Usha models. From the following particulars, prepare a statement showing cost and profit per radio sold. There is no opening or closing stock.
|
|
Orient
|
Usha
|
|
|
|
|
|
Material
|
27,300
|
1,08,680
|
|
Labour
|
15,600
|
62,920
|
Works overhead is charged at 80% on labour and office overhead is taken at 15% on works cost. The selling price of both radios is Rs. 1,000. 78 Orient radios and 286 Usha radios were sold.
(Madras University 2000)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following data are extracted from the books of Pavan Kishore and Co. for the year 2009.
|
|
|
|
Opening stock of raw materials
|
25,000
|
|
Closing stock of raw materials
|
40,000
|
|
Purchase of raw materials
|
85,000
|
|
Carriage inwards
|
5,000
|
|
Wages direct
|
75,000
|
|
Wages indirect
|
10,000
|
|
Other direct charges
|
15,000
|
|
Rent and rates: Factory
|
5,000
|
|
Office
|
500
|
|
Indirect consumption of material
|
500
|
|
Depreciation – Plant
|
1,500
|
|
Depreciation – Office furniture
|
100
|
|
Salary – Office
|
2,500
|
|
Salary – Salesmen
|
2,000
|
|
Other office expenses
|
900
|
|
Other factory expenses
|
5,700
|
|
Managing director’s remuneration
|
12,000
|
|
Other selling expenses
|
1,000
|
|
Travelling expenses
|
1,100
|
|
Carriage outwards
|
1,000
|
|
Sales
|
2,50,000
|
|
Advance income tax paid
|
15,000
|
|
Advertisement
|
2,000
|
Managing director’s remuneration is allocated as Rs. 4,000 to the factory, Rs. 2,000 to the office and Rs. 6,000 to the selling department.
From the above information compute:
- Prime cost
- Works cost
- Cost of Production
- Cost of sales and
- Net Profit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a factory, two types of fans are produced namely Popular and Proxy. Ascertain the cost and profit per unit sold from the following particulars:
|
|
Popular
|
Proxy
|
|
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
8,200
|
9,450
|
|
Labour
|
4,450
|
4,900
|
Works overhead is 60% of labour and office overhead is 20% on works cost. The selling expense per fan sold is Re 1. The selling price of Popular fan is Rs. 275 and Proxy fan is Rs. 400.
40 units of popular and 50 units of Proxy are sold. There is no opening and closing stock.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data relate to the manufacture of a product during the month of April:
|
|
|
|
Raw materials consumed
|
80,000
|
|
Direct wages
|
48,000
|
|
Machine hours worked
|
8,000 hours
|
|
Machine hour rate
|
Rs. 4.
|
|
Office overhead 10% on Works cost
|
|
|
Selling overhead
|
Rs. 1.50 per unit
|
|
Units produced
|
4,000 units
|
Units sold 3,600 units @ Rs. 50 each
Prepare a cost sheet and show
- Cost per unit and
- Profit for the period.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following extracts of costing information related to commodity ‘A’ for the half year ending 31-12-2009:
|
|
|
|
Purchase of raw materials
|
1,20,000
|
|
Work overheads
|
48,000
|
|
Direct wages
|
1,00,000
|
|
Carriage on Purchases
|
1,440
|
|
Stock as on 1st July 2009:
|
|
|
Raw materials
|
20,000
|
|
Finished Products (1,000 tons)
|
16,000
|
|
Work-in-progress
|
4,800
|
|
Stock as on 31st December 2009:
|
|
|
Raw materials
|
22,240
|
|
Finished Products (2,000 tons)
|
32,000
|
|
Work-in-progress
|
16,000
|
|
Sales – Finished Products
|
3,00,000
|
Selling and distribution overheads are Re 1. per ton sold. 16,000 tons of commodity were produced during the period You are to ascertain (a) cost of raw materials used (b) cost of output for the period (c) cost of sales (d) net profit for the period and (e) net profit per ton of the commodity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are required to prepare a statement showing cost of sales and profit earned from the following particulars:
|
|
1 January 2009
|
30 June 2009
|
|
|
|
|
|
Raw materials
|
8,000
|
8,600
|
|
Work-in-progress
|
8,000
|
12,000
|
|
Finished Goods
|
14,000
|
18,000
|
Direct labour cost Rs. 16,000 (160% of factory overhead); Cost of goods sold Rs. 56,000; Administration expenses Rs. 2,600; Selling expenses 5% of sales; Sales of the month Rs. 75,000
(Model: Valuation of closing stock and profit)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data relating to the manufacture of a standard product during the month of September, prepare a statement showing the cost and profit unit.
|
|
|
|
Raw materials used
|
40,000
|
|
Direct wages
|
24,000
|
|
Man hours worked
|
9,500 hours
|
|
Man hour rate
|
Rs. 4 per hour
|
|
Office overheads
|
20% on works cost
|
|
Selling overheads
|
Re 1. per unit
|
|
Units produced
|
20,000 units
|
|
Units sold
|
18,000 @ Rs. 10 per unit
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ping and Pong are assigned to perform the audit of Paddle Company. During the audit, it was discovered that the amount of sales reported on Paddle”s income statement was understated because one week”s purchasing transactions were not recorded due to a computer glitch. Ping claims that this problem represents a violation of the management assertion regarding existence, because the reported account balance was not real. Pong argues that the completeness assertion was violated, because relevant data was omitted from the records. Which auditor is correct? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given is a list of audit standard-setting bodies (shown on the left) and a description of their purpose (shown on the right). Match each standard-setting body with its purpose.
|
I.PCA0B
|
a. Established by the AICPA to issue SASs
|
|
II.ASB
|
b. Issues ISASs to provide guidelines for IT audiles
|
|
III.IAASB
|
c. Established by the Sarbanes—Oxley Act of 2002 to establish audit guidelines for public companies and their auditors
|
|
IV. ISACA
|
d. Issues ISM to promote uniformity of worldwide auditing practices
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In order to preserve auditor independence, the Sarbanes–Oxley Act of 2002 restricts the types of non-audit services that auditors can perform for their public-company audit clients. The list includes nine types of services that are prohibited because they are deemed to impair an auditor”s independence. Included in the list are the following:
o Financial information systems design and implementation
o Internal audit outsourcing
Describe how an auditor”s independence could be impaired if she performed IT design and implementation functions for her audit client. Likewise, how could an auditor”s involvement with internal audit outsourcing impair his or her independence with respect to auditing the same company?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cam Draker was auditing the financial statements of Palitt Wholesale Industries when she was presented with a curious situation. A member of Palitt”s top management team approached her with an anonymous note that had been retrieved from the company”s suggestion box. The note accused unnamed employees in Palitt”s IT department of altering the accounts payable database by entering bogus transactions involving fictitious vendors. Payments made to this fictitious vendor were being intercepted and cashed by the fraudster.
Required:
- What tests of controls would be effective in helping Draker determine whether Palitt”s vendor database was susceptible to fraud?
- What computer-assisted audit technique would be effective in helping Draker determine whether Palitt”s vendor database had actually been falsified?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cyrus Pannor is an auditor for a large CPA firm. Pannor was recently assigned to perform a financial statement audit of Kupp Die Besonderheit, Inc., a brewery and distributor of German specialty foods. Pannor”s firm is auditing Kupp for the first time. The audit is nearly complete, but it has required more time than expected. The auditors who performed the planning and testing phases have now been assigned to another client engagement, so Pannor was called in to carry out the completion/reporting phase.
In discussing the details of the audit engagement with the original audit team, Pannor learned that the original team expected that an unqualified audit opinion would be issued. This expectation was based on the extent of audit evidence accumulated, which led to the belief that the financial statements were fairly presented in accordance with GAAP.
Henrik Hofmann, Kupp”s CFO, is unhappy about the change in audit personnel. He is threatening to refuse to furnish a letter of representation.
Required:
- Would it be appropriate for Pannor to reopen the audit testing phases in order to expand procedures, in light of the lack of representative evidence from management? Why, or why not?
- Will Pannor”s firm still be able to issue an unqualified audit report if it does not receive the representation letter? Research the standard wording to be included in an unqualified audit report, as well as the typical wording included in a client representation letter. Base your answer on your findings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
To ensure that all credit sales transactions of an entity are recorded, which of the following controls would be most effective?
- On a monthly basis, the accounting department supervisor reconciles the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger to the accounts receivable control account.
- The supervisor of the accounting department investigates any account balance differences reported by customers.
- The supervisor of the billing department sends copies of approved sales orders to the credit department for comparison of authorized credit limits and current customer balances.
- The supervisor of the billing department matches prenumbered shipping documents with entries recorded in the sales journal.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In 1956, Nicolai Rizzoli opened a pizza restaurant that he named Rizzoli”s in St. Louis, Missouri. Over the years, he opened both company and franchise locations and grew the business to include over 40 restaurants that serve the three states around the St. Louis area. In 1997, Rizzoli introduced a centralized phone ordering system with one phone number for customers to use. This meant that the customer did not need to look up the phone number of a local restaurant and call that restaurant to order. Rather, customers call one number, and the employees taking the order can determine the closest Rizzoli”s location and process the order. This system also centralized the pricing, ordering, and inventory systems for Rizzoli”s. In 2009, Rizzoli”s began offering online pizza orders through its website. Rizzoli”s advertises this Web ordering as more convenient for the customer. For example, its ads suggest that a customer can examine the entire menu on the website prior to ordering, something that is not possible with phone orders.
While there are many customer advantages of Web ordering, there are also many advantages to the company. From an accounting and internal control perspective, describe the advantages of Rizzoli”s system and any risks that it reduces.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chris Horgrave is the owner of CH”s Instant Replay, a consignment shop for used sporting goods. Chris accepts consigned goods and offers them for sale to the general public. Chris rents business space, including a retail store where the consigned goods are displayed and sold, with adjoining office space where an Internet site is maintained and other administrative functions are performed. The Internet site includes photos and descriptions of items available for sale worldwide. If the goods sell, Chris”s consignment fee is 40 percent of the sale price, and 60 percent is remitted to the consignor. Shipping costs on electronic orders are paid by the customers.
Required:
Identify internal control considerations for the following:
- The e-commerce portion of the business
- The retail portion of the business, assuming that the accounting systems are mostly manual and handled by Chris and his wife
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify an internal control procedure that would reduce each of the risks that follow in a manual system. Also, describe how (or if) an IT system could reduce these risks:
- Revenues may be recorded before the related shipment occurs.
- Employees responsible for shipping and accounts receivable may collude to steal goods and cover up the theft by recording fictitious sales.
- Credit memos may be issued at full price, when the goods were originally sold at a discount.
- Sales invoices may contain mathematical errors.
- Amounts collected on accounts receivable may be applied to the wrong customer.
- Duplicate credit memos may be issued for a single sales return.
- Sales invoices may not be prepared for all shipments.
- Shipments may contain the wrong goods.
- All sales transactions may not be included in the general ledger.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following list presents various internal control strengths or risks that may be found in a company”s revenues and cash collection processes:
Credit is authorized by the credit manager.
Checks paid in excess of $5000 require the signatures of two authorized members of management.
A cash receipts journal is prepared by the treasurer”s department.
Collections received by check are received by the company receptionist, who has no additional record-keeping responsibilities.
Collections received by check are immediately forwarded unopened to the accounting department.
A bank reconciliation is prepared on a monthly basis by the treasurer”s department.
Security cameras are placed in the shipping dock.
Receiving reports are prepared on preprinted, numbered forms.
The billing department verifies the amount of customer sales invoices by referring to the authorized price list.
Entries in the shipping log are reconciled with the sales journal on a monthly basis.
Payments to vendors are made promptly upon receipt of goods or services.
Cash collections are deposited in the bank account on a weekly basis.
Customer returns must be approved by a designated manager before a credit memo is prepared.
Account statements are sent to customers on a monthly basis.
Purchase returns are presented to the sales department for preparation of a receiving report.
Required: In the space provided, indicate whether each of these items represents a strength (S) or risk (R) related to internal controls in the revenues and cash collection processes. Alternatively, indicate whether the item is not applicable (N/A), meaning that it either has no impact on the strength of internal controls or does not pertain to the revenues and cash collection processes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are ten internal control failures related to the revenues and cash collection processes:
A customer ordered 12 boxes of your product (total of 144 items) for express shipment. Your data entry clerk inadvertently entered 12 individual items.
You enter sales and accounts receivable data in batches at the end of each week. Several problems have resulted recently as a result of invoices being recorded to the wrong customer account.
In an effort to boost sales, you obtain some of the stock of unissued shipping reports and create a dozen fictitious shipments. You submit these documents to the billing department for invoicing.
Checks are received by the mail room and then forwarded to the accounts receivable department for recording. The accounts receivable clerk holds the checks until the proper customer account has been identified and reconciled.
Several shipping reports have been misplaced en route to the billing department from the shipping department.
Several sales transactions were not invoiced within the same month as the related shipment.
A sales clerk entered a nonexistent date in the computer system. The system rejected the data and the sales were not recorded.
Upon entering sales orders in your new computer system, a sales clerk mistakenly omitted customer numbers from the entries.
A computer programmer altered the electronic credit authorization function for a customer company owned by the programmer”s cousin.
Customer orders were lost in the mail en route from the sales office to the accounting department (located at the company”s headquarters).
Required:
From the list that follows, select one internal control would be most effective in the prevention of each listed failure. Indicate the letter of the control next to each failure. Letters should not be used more than once, and some letters may not be used at all.
- Preformatted data entry screens
- Prenumbered documents
- Programmed edit checks
- 100 percent check for matching of customer orders and sales orders
- 100 percent check for matching of sales orders, pick list, and packing slips
- 100 percent check for matching of sales orders and invoices
- 100 percent check for matching of deposit slip and customer check
- Prompt data entry immediately upon receipt of customer order
- Customer verification
- Independent authorization for shipments
- Independent authorization for billing
- Reasonableness check
- Hash totals
- Data backup procedures
- Program change controls
- Sequence verification
- Periodic confirmation of customer account balances
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brathert Company is a small company with four people working in the revenue processes. One of the four employees supervises the other three. Some tasks that must be accomplished within the revenue processes are the following:
- Accounts receivable record keeping
- Approving credit of customers
- Authorizing customer returns
- Authorizing new customers
- Billing customers
- Cash receipts journal posting
- Entering orders received
- Inventory record keeping
- Maintaining custody of cash
- Maintaining custody of inventory
- Reconciling records to the bank statement
Required:
From the preceding list, assign all the duties to each of four employees: supervisor, employee 1, employee 2, and employee 3. No employee should have more than three tasks, no two employees should have any of the same tasks, and there should be a proper separation of duties to achieve appropriate internal control. List the four people, the duties you assign to each employee, and a description of why those assignments achieve proper separation of duties.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sound Redux Company is a regional retail chain that sells used CDs. The company has eight stores throughout the Philadelphia region. At each store, customers can bring in used CDs to sell to Sound Redux or to trade for used CDs already in stock. Also, customers can buy used CDs from the large selection on racks in the stores. Sound Redux also carries older LP records for collectors.
When a used CD or LP record arrives at a Sound Redux store, it is checked for damage, labeled with a bar code, and entered into the extensive inventory. A customer buying a used CD or record takes it to the cash register, where it is scanned through a bar code reader and the customer”s cash, check, or credit card payment is processed.
Sound Redux has decided to establish a website and to begin selling used CDs and records on its website. The company believes there is a niche market for collectors of CDs or records that it can reach via the Web.
Required:
- Describe any differences in the sales processes of the online sales in comparison with in-store sales processes.
- Describe any data collected about customers in the in-store sales.
- Describe any data collected about customers in the online sales process.
- Describe any data you believe Sound Redux should collect from online sales to help improve customer service or profitability.
- Describe any data you believe Sound Redux should collect from online sales to help improve customer service or profitability.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At Kornsen Industries, the revenue processes are conducted by five employees. The five employees are the sales clerk, warehouse clerk, accountant 1, accountant 2, and the collection clerk. A description of their duties is as follows:
a. The sales clerk receives customer orders by phone. She prepares a fourcopy sales order form. She files one copy, one copy goes to the warehouse clerk, one copy goes to accountant 1, and one copy is mailed to the customer.
b. After receiving a sales order, the warehouse clerk prepares a packing slip, takes the proper items from the warehouse, and ships them with the packing slip enclosed. The sales order is stamped with the ship date, and the shipping log is updated. The sales order is filed by customer number.
c. After receiving the sales order from the sales clerk, accountant 1 reviews the customer records and either approves or disapproves customer credit. If he approves the customer”s credit, he stamps the sales order “approved” and forwards it to accountant 2. Accountant 1 prepares a three-copy invoice. One copy is mailed to the customer, one copy is forwarded to accountant 2, and one copy goes to the collection clerk.
d. Accountant 2 matches the approved sales order to the invoice and files these by customer number.
e. After receiving a copy of the invoice, the collection clerk posts the sale to the sales journal and the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger. Daily totals from the sales journal are sent to accountant 1, and she posts these sales summaries to the general ledger.
f. A mail clerk forwards customer checks to the collection clerk. The collection clerk stamps the check “For Deposit Only” and records it in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger. The check is also recorded in the cash receipts journal by the collection clerk. The collection clerk deposits checks in the bank account weekly. A weekly summary of cash receipts is forwarded to accountant 2, and she records these summaries in the general ledger.
Required:
g. Draw two process maps to reflect the sales processes and collection processes at Kornsen. The student website has a document flowchart in an Excel file for your reference.
h. Describe any weaknesses in these processes or internal controls. As you identify weaknesses, also describe your suggested improvement.
i. Draw two new process maps that include your suggested improvements. One process map should depict the sales processes, and the second process map should depict the cash collection processes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brigston, Inc., has five departments that handle all sales, billing, and collection processes. The five departments are sales, billing, accounts receivable, warehouse, and general ledger. These processes occur as follows:
- A customer mails a purchase order to Brigston, and it is forwarded to the sales department.
- A sales clerk in the sales department prepares a four-copy sales order. Two copies are forwarded to billing, one copy to the warehouse, and one copy to general ledger. The sales clerk posts the sale to the sales journal.
- Upon receiving the sales order, the warehouse picks goods from the warehouse, updates the inventory subsidiary ledger, and ships the goods to customers. The copy of the sales order is given to the common carrier to accompany the shipment.
- Upon receiving the sales order, the billing department looks up prices in the price list and adds these prices to the sales order. One copy is sent to the customer as the invoice. The second copy is forwarded to accounts receivable.
- Upon receiving the sales order from billing, the accounts receivable temporarily stores the sales order until the customer mails a check and remittance advice to accounts receivable. The accounts receivable department matches the check to an open sales order, posts to the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger and the cash receipts journal, and deposits checks in the bank daily.
- Upon receiving the sales order from the sales department, the general journal and general ledger are updated.
Required:
- Draw two process maps to reflect the business processes at Brigston. One process map should depict the sales processes, and the second process map should depict the cash collection processes.
- Describe any weaknesses in these processes or internal controls. As you identify weaknesses, also describe your suggested improvement.
- Draw two new process maps that include your suggested improvements. One process map should depict the sales processes, and the second process map should depict the cash collection processes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Art”s Artist World is a retailer of arts and craft supplies in the suburban Chicago area. It operates a single retail store and also has extensive catalog sales on account to area schools, churches, and other community organizations. Retail customers pay for supplies with cash, check, or credit card at the time of the sale. Occasionally, a credit customer may come into the store and purchase supplies on account. In such cases, the sales clerk is required to have the sale approved by the manager. The manager will authorize the sale if he or she recognizes the customer. The sales clerk must complete a charge slip for each sale on account.
At the end of each shift, the sales clerk prepares a summary of cash collections. This report is forwarded to the accounting department. The charge slips are forwarded to the accounts receivable department at this time.
The supervisor in the accounts receivable department verifies the information on the charge slip. Prices are matched with an approved price list. If errors are found, they are manually noted on the charge slip. A sales invoice is then prepared by the accounts receivable supervisor. The accounts receivable clerk mails the invoice to the customer.
The accounts receivable supervisor enters invoices in the computer system each afternoon. At this point, the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger is created and details of the sale are forwarded to the accounting department. At month”s end, the accounts receivable supervisor prints a monthly report of the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger and list of past-due accounts. These reports are filed and referred to in cases of customer complaints or payment problems.
A cashier supervises the sales clerks and performs the basic cash collection functions. The cashier opens the mail each day and stamps the check “For Deposit Only,” with the company”s endorsement and bank account number. Checks are compared with any supporting remittance advice received with the check, and a daily listing of mail collections is prepared. Two daily deposits are prepared: one for the mail collections and another for cash register collections. A duplicate copy of all deposit slips is maintained by the cashier for use in the preparation of the monthly bank reconciliation.
In the accounting department, a staff accountant receives documentation of cash collections from sales clerks and the cashier. The staff accountant uses the information to prepare the journal entry for posting to the general ledger. When all of the collections have been entered, the remittance information is transmitted electronically to the accounts receivable supervisor for purposes of updating the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger for the day”s collections.
Monthly account statements are prepared by the staff accountant and mailed to all customers. If a customer”s account remains unpaid for six months, the staff accountant will notify the accounts receivable supervisor to write off the account as uncollectible. At this time, the credit manager is also notified of the account status so that additional credit will not be granted to this customer.
Required:
From the facts of this scenario, describe the internal control risks associated with Art”s internal controls over the revenues and cash collection processes. Prepare a business memo, addressed to Art Dusing, the company”s owner/operator, describing your recommendations for correcting each of these problems.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gorko LLC is in the process of updating its revenues and receivables systems with the implementation of new accounting software. Jarrett Howstill, Inc., is an independent information technology consultant who is assisting Gorko with the project. Jarrett has developed the following checklist containing internal control points that the company should consider in this new implementation:
o Is the sales department separate from the credit office and the IT department?
o Are all collections from customers received in the form of checks?
o Is it appropriate to program the system for general authorization of certain sales, within given limits?
o Are product quantities monitored regularly?
o Will all data entry clerks and accounting personnel have their own PCs with log-in IDs and password protection?
o Will different system access levels for different users be incorporated?
o Will customer orders be received via the Internet?
o Has the company identified an off-site alternative computer processing location?
o Does the project budget include line items for an upgraded, uninterrupted power source and firewall?
o Will the system be thoroughly tested prior to implementation?
o Will appropriate file backup procedures be established?
o Will business continuity plans be prepared?
o Will an off-site data storage exist?
o Will intrusion detection systems be incorporated?
Required:
Describe the control purpose of each of the points presented.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify an internal control procedure that would reduce the following risks in a manual system:
- The purchasing department may not be notified when goods need to be purchased.
- Accounts payable may not be updated for items received.
- Purchase orders may be prepared on the basis of unauthorized requisitions.
- Receiving clerks may steal purchased goods.
- Payments may be made for items not received.
- Amounts paid may be applied to the wrong vendor account.
- Payments may be made for items previously returned.
- Receiving clerks may accept delivery of goods in excess of quantities ordered.
- Duplicate payments may be issued for a single purchase transaction.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following list presents statements regarding the expenditures processes. Each statement is separate and should be considered to be from a separate company. Determine whether each statement is an internal control strength or weakness; then describe why it is a strength or weakness. If it is an internal control weakness, provide a method or methods to improve the internal control.
- A purchasing agent updates the inventory subsidiary ledger when an order is placed.
- An employee in accounts payable maintains the accounts payable subsidiary ledger.
- Purchasing agents purchase items only if they have received an approved purchase requisition.
- The receiving dock employee counts and inspects goods and prepares a receiving document that is forwarded to accounts payable.
- The receiving dock employee compares the packing list with the goods received and if they match, forwards the packing list to accounts payable.
- An employee in accounts payable matches an invoice to a receiving report before approving a payment of the invoice.
- A check is prepared in the accounts payable department when the invoice is received.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Volpner Manufacturing Company operates two plants that manufacture shelves and display units for retail stores. To manufacture these items, the purchasing agents purchase raw materials such as steel, aluminum, plastic, lexan, and miscellaneous screws, rubber end caps, bolts, and nuts. Two purchasing agents work at the first, and original, plant location. They do all the purchasing for both plants, which are located in Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Each purchasing agent has a PC that is connected to a company network consisting of a server at the first plant and PCs in both plants. The company has always used mailed purchase orders to purchase items, but they are now considering the installation of an internet EDI system to place purchases.
Required:
Describe the IT controls that Volpner should include when it implements an internet EDI system. For each control you suggest, describe the intended purpose of the control.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The next question deals with a different type range option, called a range accrual option. Range accrual options can be used to take a view on volatility directly. When a trader is short volatility, the trader expects the actual volatility to be less than the implied volatility. Yet, within the bounds of classical volatility analysis, if this view is expressed using a vanilla option, it may require dynamic hedging, otherwise expensive straddles and must be bought. Small shops may not be able to allocate the necessary resources for such dynamic hedging activities.Instead, range accrual options can be used. Here, the seller of the option receives a payout that depends on how many days the underlying price has remained within a range during the life of the option. First read the following comments then answer the questions.The Ontario Teachers’ Pension Plan Board, with CAD72 billion (USD48.42 billion) under management, is looking at ramping up its use of equity derivatives as it tests programs for range accrual options and options overwriting on equity portfolios.The equity derivatives group is looking to step up its use now because it has recently been awarded additional staff as a result of notching up solid returns, said a portfolio manager for Canadian equity derivatives…. With a staff of four, two more than previously, the group has time to explore more sophisticated derivatives strategies, a trader explained. Ontario Teachers’ is one of thebiggest and most sophisticated end users in Canada and is seen as an industry leader among pension funds, according to market officials.A long position in a range accrual option on a single stock would entail setting a range for the value of the stock. For every day during the life of the option that the stock trades within the range, Ontario Teachers would receive a payout. It is, hence, similar to a short vol position, but the range accrual options do not require dynamic hedging, and losses are capped at the initial premium outlay. (Based on an article in Derivatives Week).
(a) How is a range accrual option similar to a strangle or straddle position?
(b) Is the position taken with this option static? Is it dynamic?
(c) In what sense does the range accrual option accomplish what dynamic hedging strategies accomplish?
(d) How would you synthetically create a range accrual option for other “vanilla” exotics?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose you are given the following data. The risk-free interest rate is 4%. The stock price follows:
dSt= fSt+ sStdWt
The percentage annual volatility is 18% a year. The stock pays no dividends and the current stock price is 100.Using these data, you are asked to calculate the current value of a European call option on the stock. The option has a strike price of 100 and a maturity of 200 days.
(a) Determine an appropriate time interval ? such that the binomial tree has five steps.
(b) What would be the implied u and d?
(c) What is the implied “up” probability?
(d) Determine the binomial tree for the stock price St.
(e) Determine the tree for the call premium Ct.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose the stock discussed in the previous exercise pays dividends. Assume all parameters are the same. Consider three forms of dividends paid by the firm:
(a) The stock pays a continuous, known stream of dividends at a rate of 4% per time.
(b) The stock pays 5% of the value of the stock at the third node. No other dividends are paid.
(c) The stock pays a $5 dividend at the third node.In each case, determine the tree for the ex-dividend stock price. For the first two cases, determine the premium of the call.In what way(s) will the third type of dividend payment complicate the binomial tree?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
We use binomial trees to value American-style options on the British pound. Assume that the British pound is currently worth $1.40. Volatility is 20%. The current British risk-free rate is 6% and the U.S. risk-free rate is 3%. The put option has a strike price of $1.50. It expires in 200 days.
(a) The first issue to be settled is the role of U.S. and British interest rates. This option is being purchased in the United States, so the relevant risk-free rate is 3%. But British pounds can be used to earn the British risk-free rate. So this variable can be treated as a continuous rate of dividends. Or we can say that interest rate differentials are supposed to equal the expected appreciation of the currency.Taking this into account, determine a ? such that the binomial tree has five periods.
(b) Determine the implied u and d and the relevant probabilities.
(c) Determine the tree for the exchange rate.
(d) Determine the tree for a European put with the same characteristics.
(e) Determine the price of an American-style put with the previously stated properties.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Barrier options belong to one of four main categories. They can be up-and-out, down-and-out, up-and-in, or down-and-in. In each case, there is a specified “barrier,” and when the underlying asset price down or up-crosses this barrier, the option either expires automatically (the “out” case) or comes into life automatically (the “in” case).Consider a European-style up-and-out call written on a stock with a current price of 100 and a volatility of 30%. The stock pays no dividends and follows a geometric price process. The risk-free interest rate is 6% and the option matures in 200 days. The strike price is 110. Finally, the barrier is 120. If the before-maturity stock price exceeds 120, the option automatically expires.
(a) Determine the relevant u and d and the corresponding probability.
(b) Value a call with the same characteristics but without the barrier property.
(c) Value the up-and-out call.
(d) Which option is cheaper?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are given the following quotes for liquid FRAs paid in arrears. Assume that all time intervals are measured in months of 30 days.
|
Term
|
Bid/Ask
|
|
3 × 6
|
4.5-1.6
|
|
6 × 9
|
4.7-1.8
|
|
9 ×12
|
5.0-5.1
|
|
12 × 15
|
5.5-5.7
|
|
15 × 18
|
6.1-6.3
|
You also know that the current 3-month Libor rate is 4%.
(a) Calculate the discount bond prices B(t0, ti), where ti =6,9,12,15, and 18 months.
(b) Calculate the yield curve for maturities 0 to 18 months.
(c) Calculate the swap curve for the same maturities.
(d) Are the two curves different?
(e) Calculate the par yield curve.
(f) Calculate the zero-coupon yield curve.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are given the following quotes for liquid swap rates. Assume that all time intervals are measured in years.
|
Term
|
Bid/Ask
|
|
2
|
6.2-6.5
|
|
3
|
6.4-6.7
|
|
4
|
7.0-7.3
|
|
5
|
7.5-7.8
|
|
6
|
8.1-8.4
|
You know that the current 12-month Libor rate is 5%.
(a) Calculate the FRA rates for the next five years, starting with a 1 × 2 FRA.
(b) Calculate the discount bond prices B(t0, ti), where ti = 1, …, 6 years.
(c) Calculate the yield curve for maturities of 0 to 18 months.
(d) Calculate the par yield curve.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Read the quote carefully and describe how you would take this position using volatility swaps. Be precise about the parameters of these swaps.
(a) How would you price this position? What does pricing mean in this context anyway? Which price are we trying to determine and write in the contract?
(b) In particular, do you need the correlations between the two markets?
(c) Do you need to know the smile before you sell the position?
(d) Discuss the risks involved in this volatility position.
Volatility Swaps
A bank is recommending a trade in which investors can take advantage of the wide differential between Nasdaq 100 and S&P500 longer-dated implied volatilities.
Two-year implied volatility on the Nasdaq 100 was last week near all-time highs, at around 45.7%, but the tumult in tech stocks over the last several years is largely played out, said [a] global head of equity derivatives strategy in New York. The tech stock boom appears to be over, as does the most eye-popping part of the downturn, he added. While there will be selling pressure on tech companies over the next several quarters, a dramatic sell-offsimilar to what the market has seen over the last six months is unlikely.
The bank recommends entering a volatility swap on the differential between the Nasdaq and the S&P, where the investor receives a payout if the realized volatility in two years is less than about 21%, the approximate differential last week between the at-the-money forward two-year implied volatilities on the indices. The investor profits here if, in two years, the realized two-year volatility for the Nasdaq has fallen relative to the equivalent volatility on the S&P.
It might make sense just to sell Nasdaq vol, said [the trader], but it’s better to put on a relative value trade with the Nasdaq and S&P to help reduce the volatility beta in the Nasdaq position. In other words, if there is a total market meltdown, tech stocks and the market as a whole will see higher implied voles. But volatility on the S&P500, which represents stocks in a broader array of sectors, is likely to increase substantially, while volatility on the Nasdaq is already close to all-time highs. A relative value trade where the investor takes a view on the differential between the realized volatility in two years time on the two indices allows the investor to profit from a fall in Nasdaq volatility relative to the S&P.
The two-year sector is a good place to look at this differential, said [the trader]. Two years is enough time for the current market turmoil, particularly in the technology sector, to play itself out, and the differential between two-year implied voles, at about 22% last week, is near all-time high levels. Since 1990, the realized volatility differential has tended to be closer to 10.7% over long periods of time.
[The trader] noted that there are other means of putting on this trade, such as selling two-year at-the-money forward straddles on Nasdaq volatility andbuying two-year at-the-money forward straddles on S&P vol. (Derivatives Week, October 30, 2000)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following reading deals with another example of how spread positions on volatility can be taken. Yet, of interest here are further aspects of volatility positions. In fact, the episode is an example of the use of knock-in and knock-out options in volatility positions.
(a) Suppose the investor sells short-dated (one-month) volatility and buys six-month volatility. In what sense is this a naked volatility position? What are the risks? Explain using volatility swaps as an underlying instrument.
(b) Explain how a one-month break-out clause can hedge this situation.
(c) How would the straddles gain value when the additional premium is triggered?
(d) What are the risks, if any, of the position with break-out clauses?
(e) Is this a pure volatility position?
Sterling volatility is peaking ahead of the introduction of the euro next year. A bank suggests the following strategy to take advantage of the highly inverted volatility curve. Sterling will not join the euro in January and the market expects reduced sterling positions. This view has pushed up one-month ster-ling/Deutsche mark vols to levels of 12.6% early last week. In contrast, six-month vols are languishing at under 9.2%. This suggests selling short-dated vol and buying six-month vols. Customers can buya six-month straddle with a one-month break-out clause added to replicate a short volatilityposition in the one-month maturity. This way they don’t have a naked volatility position. (Based on an article in Derivatives Week.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are given two risky bonds with the following specifications:Bond A
(a) Par: 100
(b) Currency: USD
(c) Coupon: 10
(d) Maturity: 4 years
(e) Callable after 3 years
(f) Credit: AA–
Bond B
(a) Par: 100
(b) Currency: DEM
(c) Coupon: Libor + 78 bp
(d) Maturity: 5 years
(e) Credit: AAA
You will be asked to transform Bond A into Bond B by acquiring some proper derivative contracts. Use cash flow diagrams and be precise.
• Show how you would use a currency swap to switch into the right currency.
• Show how you would use an interest rate swap to switch to the needed interest rate.
• Is there a need for using a swaption contract? Can the same be accomplished using forward caps and floors?
• Finally, show two ways of using credit derivatives to switch to the desired credit quality.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following reading, which deals with collateralized debt obligations (CDOs).Despite the deluge of downgrades in the collateralized debt obligation (CDO) market, banks are not focusing on the effect of interest rate swaps on arbitrage cashflow CDOs, Fitch Ratings said in a report released last week.Ineffective interest rate hedging strategies inflicted the hardest blows to the performance of high-yield bond CDOs completed during 1997–1999, the report noted.This combination of events caused some CDOs to become significantly over-hedged and out-of-the-money on their swap positions at the same time, the report found. For its report, Fitch used a random sample of 18 cash-flow deals that recently experienced downgrades.While half the CDOs benefited from falling rates, half did not. All nine of the over-hedged CDOs were high-yield bond transactions that closed before 1999.With the benefit of hindsight, a balanced guaranteed or customized swap would have mitigated the over-hedged CDO’s risks. Plain vanilla swaps, which were economically advantageous during 1997–1999, ended up costing money in the long run because the notional balance of the swap is set at the deal’s closing date and does not change over time, the report said. CDOs tend to use a plain vanilla swap instead of a customized swap because they are cheaper. (IFR Issue, 1433, May 2002)
(a) Show the cash flows generated by a simple CDO on a graph. Suppose you are short the CDO.
(b) What are your risks and how would you hedge them?
(c) Show the cash flows of the CDO together with a hedge obtained using a plain vanilla swap.
(d) As time passes, default rates increase and interest rates decline, what happens to the CDO and to the hedge?
(e) What does the reading refer to with buying a customized swap?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) Consider the following quote from Reuters:The poor correlation between CDS and cash in Swedish utility Attentat (VTT.XE) is an anomaly and investors can benefit by setting up negative basis trades, says ING. 5-yr CDS for instance has tightened by approx. 5 bp since mid-May while the Attentat 2010 is actually approx. 1 bp wider over the same period.Buy the 2010 bond and CDS protection at approx midas +27 bp. (MO)
i. Display this position on a graph with cash flows exactly marked.
ii. Explain the logic of this position.
iii. Explain the numbers involved. In particular, suppose you have 100 to invest in such a position, what would be the costs and expected returns?
iv. What other parameters may have caused such a discrepancy?
(b) Explain the logic behind the two following strategies using cash flow diagrams.Sell DG Hyp 4.25% 2008s at 6.5 bp under swaps and buy Landesbank Baden-Wuerttemberg 3.5% 2009s at swaps-4.2 bp, HVB says.The LBBW deal is grandfathered and will continue to enjoy state guarantees; HVB expects spreads to tighten further in the near future.Also, WestLB mortgage Pfandbriefe trade too tight. Sell the WestLB 3% 2009s at 5.4 bp under swaps and buy the zero risk weighted Land Berlin 2.75% 2010s at 2.7bp under. (TMA)
(c) The following quote deals with implied forward rates in the credit sector. Using proper diagrams explain what the trade is.Implied forward CDS levels look high because shorter-dated CDS are currently too cheap to 5-year, says BNP Paribas. Using the iTraxx Main curveas reference gives a theoretical 3-year forward curve that shows 6-month and 1-year CDS both at 60 bp.“In 3-years time, we find that 6-month and 1-year CDS are very unlikely to be trading above 60 bp.”Take advantage through the 3-5-10-year barbell, buying iTraxx 3-year at 20.75 bp for EUR20M, selling iTraxx 5-year at 38 bp for EUR25M, and buying iTraxx 10-year at 61.25 bp for EUR7M.The trade has a yearly carry of EUR32,000 for a short nominal exposure of EUR2M.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE STUDY: Credit-Linked Notes
Overall, this case study deals with credit default swaps, synthetic corporate bonds, and, more interestingly, credit-linked notes.
The case study highlights two issues.
a. Cash flows and the risks associated with these instruments, and the reasons why these instruments are issued.
b. The arbitrage opportunity that was created as a result of some of the recent issuance activity in credit-linked notes.
Focus on these aspects when answering the questions that follow the readings.
Reading
Default swap quotes in key corporates have collapsed, as a rush to offset huge synthetic credit-linked notes has coincided with a shortage of bonds in the secondary market, and with a change in sentiment about the global credit outlook. The scramble to cover short derivatives positions has resulted in windfall arbitrage opportunities for dealers who chanced to be flat, and for their favored customers.
At least E5bn, and possibly as much as E15bn, equivalent of credit-linked note issuance has been seen in the last month. The resulting offsetting of short-credit default swap positions has caused a sharp widening in the negative basis between default swaps and the asset swap value of the underlying debt in the secondary bond market.
Dealers with access to corporate bonds have been able to buy default swaps at levels as much as 20 bp under the asset swap value of the debt, and to create synthetic packages for their clients where, in effect, the only risk is to the counterparty on the swap. Credit derivatives dealers who chanced to be flat have been turning huge profits by proprietary dealing—and from sales of these packages to their favored insurance company customers.
Deutsche Bank, Merrill Lynch, Bear Stearns, and Citigroup have been among the most aggressive sellers of default swaps in recent weeks, according to dealers at rival houses, and their crossing of bid/offer spreads has driven the negative default-swap basis to bonds ever wider.
A E2.25bn credit-linked note issued by Deutsche Bank is typical of the deals that have been fuelling this movement. The deal, Deutsche Bank Repon 2001–2014, offered exposure to 150 separate corporate credits, 51% from the US and 49% from Europe. Because DB had the deal rated, the terms of the issue spread across trading desks in London and New York, and rival dealers pulled back their bids on default swaps in the relevant corporates.
Other banks were selling similar unrated (and therefore, private) credit-linked notes at the same time, which led to a scramble to offset swap positions. Faced with a shortage of bonds in the secondary market, and repo rates at 0% for some corporate issues, dealers were forced to hit whatever bid was available in the default swap market, pushing the negative basis for many investment grade five-year default swaps from an 8bp–16bp negative basis to a 12 bp–20bp basis last week.
This produced wild diversity between default swaps for corporates that had seen their debt used for credit-linked notes, and similar companies that had not. Lufthansa five-year default swaps were offered at 29 bp late last week, while British Airways offers in the same maturity were no lower than 50 bp, for example.
Many default swaps were also very low on an absolute basis. Single A-rated French pharmaceuticals company Aventis was quoted at 16 bp/20 bp for a five-year default swap at the close of dealing on Friday, for example. Other corporate default swaps were also at extremely tightlevels, with Rolls-Royce offered as low as 27 bp in the five-year, Volkswagen at 26 bp, BMW offered at least as low as 26b, and Unilever at 21 bp.
Run for the door
The movement was not limited to European credits. Offsetting of default swaps led to the sale of negative-basis packages in US names including Sears, Bank of America, and Philip Morris, with Bank of America trading at levels below 40 bp in the five-year, or less than half its trade point when fears about US bank credit quality were at their height earlier this year.
General market sentiment that the worst of the current downturn in credit quality has passed has amplified the effect of the default swap selling. Investors are happy to hold corporate bonds, which has left dealers struggling to buy paper to cover their positions as an alternative to selling default swaps.
“Everyone tried to run for the door at the same time” said one head dealer, describing trading in recent weeks. He predicted that the wide negative basis between swaps and bonds will be a trading feature for some time. Dealers worry that the banks which are selling default swaps most aggressively are doing so because they are lining up still more synthetic credit-linked notes. As long as they can maintain a margin between the notes and the level at which they can offset their exposure, they will keep hitting swap bids.
This collision of default swap-offset needs, a bond shortage, and improved credit sentiment is working in favor of corporate treasurers. WorldCom managed to sell the biggest deal yet from a US corporate last week, and saw spread talk on what proved to be a US$ 11.83bn equivalent deal tighten ahead of pricing. An issue of this size would normally prompt a sharp widening in default swaps on the relevant corporate, but WorldCom saw its five-year mid quotes fall from 150 bp two weeks ago to below 140 bp last week.
The decline in default swap quotes, and widening basis-to-asset swap levels for bonds, has been restricted to Europe and the US so far. If sentiment about the credit quality of Asian corporates improves there could be note issuance and spread movement. The dealers who have been struggling to cover their positions in the supposedly liquid US and European bond-and-swap markets may be reluctant to try the same approach in Asia, however.
With the prospect of more issuance of credit-linked notes on US and European corporates, and maintenance of the wide negative swap-to-bond basis, dealers who are allowed to run proprietary positions—and their insurance company clients—should reap further windfall arbitrage profits. The traders forced to offset deals issued by their structured note departments face further weeks of anxious hedging, however. (IFR, May 12, 2001)
Questions
(a) What is a credit-linked note (CLN)? Why would investors buy credit-linked notes instead of, say, corporate bonds? Analyze the risks and the cash flows generated by these two instruments to see in what sense CLNs are preferable.
(b) Suppose you issue a CLN. How would you hedge your position? Mention at least two ways of doing this. By the way, why do you need to hedge your position? Be specific.
(c) As a continuation of the previous question, why is whether or not the investors sell their corporate bonds important in this situation?
(d) Now we come to the arbitrage issue. What is the basis of the arbitrage argument mentioned in this reading? Be specific and explain in detail. Show your reasoning using cash flow diagrams.
(e) What does a 0% repo rate for some corporate paper mean? Why is the rate zero?
(f) Finally, why would this create an opportunity for corporate treasurers?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Private Educational Institution
In the appendix to the chapter, partial financial statements are presented.
Required:
- What is the institution”s largest source of unrestricted revenue? What is the largest source of total revenue?
- What is the largest asset on the statement of financial position? What is the largest expense on the statement of operations? Are these to be expected? Explain why.
- Net assets include three items. What are they and what do you think each represents?
- What is the largest adjustment on the statement of cash flows in adjusting the change in net assets to cash provided by operating activities (also is it positive or negative)? Do you think this adjustment is common for a private university? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Donated Services
During 2012 volunteer pinstripers donated their services to General Hospital at no cost. The staff at General Hospital was in control of the pinstripers” duties. If regular employees had provided the services rendered by the volunteers, their salaries would have totaled $6,000.
While working for the hospital, the pinstripers received complimentary meals from the cafeteria, which normally would have cost $500.
Required:
Prepare the journal entry necessary in the General Fund to record the donated services on the books of General Hospital.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
University Loan Fund
The following events relate to Grearson University Loan Fund:
- $100,000 is received from an estate to establish a faculty and student loan fund. Annual interest rates range from 8% for students to 10% for faculty.
- Loans to students totaled $60,000, and $40,000 was disbursed to faculty members (of the total loans made, 10% are estimated to be uncollectible).
- Grearson wrote off a $1,000 student loan as uncollectible.
- The loans were repaid.
Required:
Prepare the journal entries necessary to record these transactions and indicate the fund(s) in which the transactions are recorded.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
U.S. Taxation of Foreign-Source Income Using the structure for calculating U.S. corporate taxes For foreign sourced income shown in Exhibit 17.3, assume a foreign subsidiary has $2,7501000 in income earing, U.S. and foreign corporate tax rates are 35% and 30%. Respectively, And foreign withholding taxes on dividends paid to foreign residents in the United States are 15%.
a. What is the total tax payment, foreign and domestic combined, on this income?
b. What is the effective tax rate paid on this income by the U.S.-based company?
c. what would be the total tax payment and effective tax rate if the foreign corporate tax rate was 45% and there were no withholding taxes on dividends?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ZNZ Petroleum ZNZ Petroleum is a U.S.-based multinational petroleum and petrochemical exploitation, production, and distribution company. ZNZ’s subsidiary in Zaire, a new promising area of petroleum exploration is expecting a major “find” in the next two-year period. The tax planning staff in-the corporate headquarters in Shreveport, Louisiana, wish to estimate tax liabilities and effective tax burdens this prospective income three years our. The Zaire currency, the New Zaire (ZRN), is currently trading at ZRN100,000/USD. Although the government claims it is pegged TO the dollar, the stability of the currency is highly questionable. Given that inflation in Zaire has been rising now averaging 20% per year compared to the U.S.’s 3% Per year’„ the tax planning staff would prefer to assume that the currency is likely to weaken over tin…period. In addition to the obvious problems With the Ness, Zaire. the government of Zaire, requires all petroleum companies operating there to TWA over’ all hard-currency earnings to the government. Since oil is sold on world markets in U.S. (dollars, the Zaire an subsidiary’s income actually begins M dollars and is then converted to local currency for tax purposes. ‘Mien the subsidiary declares a dividend to the parent company, it will have to apply to the government to obtain hard-currency. U.S. dollars, for payment to the parent.) ZNZ has estimated the all-in-cost of production per barrel. as well as the estimated barrels produced, for the years 2001-2002. The forecast oil price, which is a company. wide forecast from the corporate headquarters, is used for projecting revenues.
|
ZN2—Za ire
|
2000
|
2001
|
2002
|
|
Expected price per barrel(U.S$)
|
18.50
|
$19.50
|
S19.00
|
|
Estimated all in -cost per barrel ( US$)
|
7.50
|
6.25
|
4.50
|
|
Barrel of all produced(expected)
|
1,000,000
|
I0,000,000
|
15,000,000
|
The current Zaire corporate income. tax rate is 50%. In addition, the Zaire tax authorities impose a 20% wit withholding tax cm dividends and interest remitted to foreign resident investors, Zaire has no current set or -bilateral tax treaties, applying the Same rates to all foreign investors regardless of country of origin. The parent company plans to repatriate 50% of net income as dividends annually. Complete the following basic income statement in order to answer the following questions.
|
ZNZ—Zaire
|
2000
|
2001
|
2002
|
|
Expected revenues (USS)
|
|
Expected revenues (ZRN)
|
|
Less all-in-costs. production (ZRN)
|
|
Earnings before tax
|
|
1ess Zaire corporate income taxes
|
|
Net income of subsidiary
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
Distributions as divided to parent
|
a. Calculate the expected exchange rate for the 2000 through 2002 period.
b. Calculate the net income available for distribution by the Zaire subsidiary for the years 2000 through 2002, in b, out Zaire and U.S. dollars (assuming-both a fixed and a depreciating Zaire dollar exchange rate)
C. What is the amount of the dividend that is expected to be remitted to the LIS parent each year, after both income and withholding taxes, in U.S. dollars?
d After gross tip For U.S. tax liability purposes, what is the total dividend after-tax (all Zaire and U.S. taxes) expected each year?
c. What is the effective tax rate on this foreign-sourced income per year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gamboa’s Tax Averaging Gamboa, Incorporated is a relatively new U.S based retailer of specialry fruits and vegetables. The firm is vertically integrated with fruit and vegetable-sourcing subsidiaries: in central America, and distribution outlets throughout the southeastern and northeastern regions of the United States. Gamboa’s two Central American subsidiaries are in Min and Costa Rica .Maria Gamboa, the daughter of the firm’s thunder, is being groomed to take over The firm’s financial management in the near future. Like many firms its size, Gamboa has not possessed a very high degree of sophistication in financial management because of time and cost considerations. Maria, however, has recent finished her MBA and is now attempting to put some specialized knowledge of U.S, taxation practices to work TO save Gamboa money. Her first concern is tax averaging for foreign tax: liabilities arising from the two Central American subsidiaries. Costa Rican operations are slightly more profitable than Belize, which is particularly good since Costa RNA is a relatively low-tax Country Costa Rican corporate taxes are a fiat 30%, and there are no withholding taxes imposed on dividends paid by foreign firms with operations there, Belize has a higher corporate income tax rate, 40%, and imposes a 10% withholding tax on all dividends distributed to foreign investors. The current U.S. corporate income tax rate is 35%,
|
|
Belize
|
Costa Rica
|
|
Earnings before taxes
|
S1,000,000
|
$1,500‘000
|
|
Corporate income tax rate
|
40%
|
30%
|
|
Dividend withholding tax rate
|
10%
|
0%
|
a. If Maria Gamboa assume a 50% payout rate from each subsidiary, what are: the additional taxes due on foreign sourced income from Belize and ( nt RR.I individually? How much in additional U.S, taxes would be due if Maria averaged the tax credits/liabilities of the two units?
b. Keeping the payout rate from the Belize subsidiary at 50%, how should Maria change tin’ payout rate of the Costa Rican subsidiary in order to most efficiently manage her total foreign tax bill?
c |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tannell Johnson is an accounting software consultant at Fipps and Associates Consulting. Fipps is a value-added reseller of accounting software for midsize companies, which normally have revenue between 50 million and 500 million dollars. One of Johnson”s responsibilities is to solicit new client companies and to meet with their management to recommend the best accounting software system for them. Midmarket accounting software typically offers several modules that the client may choose from. For example, not all clients would need an e-business module for their accounting software. Since part of Johnson”s compensation is a percentage of software sales and consulting revenue that he generates, what are the ethical conflicts he faces when soliciting new clients and recommending software and software modules?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE STUDY: Convexity of Long Bonds, Swaps, and Arbitrage
The yield of a long bond tells you how much you can earn from this bond. Correct? Wrong. You can earn more.
The reason is that long bonds and swaps have convexity. If there are two instruments, one linear and the other nonlinear, and if these are a function of the same risk factors, we can form a portfolio that is delta-neutral and that guarantees some positive return.
This is a complex and confusing notion and the purpose of this case study is to clarify this notion a bit.
At first, the case seems simple. Take a look at the following single reading provided on an arbitrage position taken by market professionals and answer the questions that follow.
The more sophisticated traders in the swaps market—or at least those who have been willing to work alongside their in-house quants—have until recently been playing a game of one-upmanship to the detriment of their more naive interbank counterparties. By taking into account the convexity effect on long-dated swaps, they have been able to profit from the ignorance of their counterparties who saw no reason to change their own valuation methods.
More specifically, several months ago several leading Wall Street US dollar swaps houses— reportedly JP Morgan and Goldman Sachs among them—realized that there was more value than met the eye when pricing Libor-in-arrears swaps. According to London traders, they began to arbitrage the difference between their own valuation models and those of “swap traders who still relied on naive, traditional methods” and transacting deals where they would receive Libor in arrears and pay Libor at the start of the period, typically for notional amounts of US$100m and over.
Depending on the length of the swap and the Libor reset intervals, they realized that they could extract up to an additional 8bp-10bp from the transaction, irrespective of the shape of the yield curve. The counterparty, on the other hand, would see money “seep away over the life of the swap, even if it thought it was fully hedged,” said a trader.
The added value is only significant on long-dated swaps—typically between five and 10 years—and in particular those based on 12-month Libor rather than the more traditional six-month Libor basis. This value is due to the convexity effect more commonly associated with the relationship between yields and the price of fixed income instruments.
It therefore pays to be long convexity, and when applied to Libor-in-arrears structures proved to be profitable earlier this year. The first deals were transacted in New York and were restricted to the US dollar market, but in early May several other players were alerted to what was going on in the market and decided to apply the same concept in London. One trader expressed surprise at the lack of communication between dealers at different banks, a fact which allowed the arbitrage to continue both between banks directly and through swaps brokers.
Also, “none of the US banks active in the market was involved in trying to exploit the same opportunities in other currencies,” he said, adding “you could play the same game in sterling— convexity applies to all currencies.”
In fact, there was one day in May when the sterling market was flooded with these transactions, and it “lasted for several days” according to a sterling swaps dealer, “until everyone moved their prices out,” effectively putting a damper on further opportunities as well as making it difficult to unwind positions.
Further, successful structures depend on cap volatility as the extra value is captured by selling caps against the Libor-in-arrears being received, in addition to delta hedging the swap. In this way value can be extracted from yield curves irrespective of the slope.
“In some cap markets such as the yen, volatility isn’t high enough to make the deal work,” said one dealer. Most of the recent interbank activity has taken place in US dollars, sterling, and Australian dollars.
As banks have become aware of the arbitrage, opportunities have become rarer, at least in the interbank market. But as one dealer remarked, “the reason this [structure] works is because swap traders think they know how to value Libor-in-arrears swaps in the old way, and they stick to those methods.”
“Paying Libor in arrears without taking the convexity effect into account,” he added, “is like selling an option for free, but opportunities will still exist where traders stick to the old pricing method.”
Many large swap players last week declined to comment, suggesting that the market is still alive, although BZW in London, which has been active in the market, did say that it saw such opportunities as a chance to pass on added value to its own customers. (IFR, issue 1092 July29, 1995.)
Questions
1. First the preliminaries. Explain what is meant by convexity of long-dated bonds.
2. What is meant by the convexity of long-dated interest rate swaps?
3. Explain the notion of convexity using a graph.
4. If bonds are convex, which fixed income instrument is not convex?
5. Describe the cash flows of FRAs. When are FRAs settled in the market?
6. What is the convexity adjustment for FRAs?
7. What is a cap? What volatility do you buy or sell using caps?
8. Now the real issue. Explain the position taken by “knowledgeable” professionals.
9. In particular, is this a position on the direction of rates or something else? In fact, can you explain why the professionals had to hedge their position using caps or floors?
10. Do they have to hedge using caps only? Can floors do as well? Explain your answer graphically.
11. Is this a true arbitrage? Are there any risks?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider this reading carefully and then answer the questions that follow.A bank suggested risk reversals to investors that want to hedge their Danish krone assets, before Denmark’s Sept. 28 referendum on whether to join the Economic and Monetary Union. A currency options trader in New York said the strategy would protect customers against the Danish krone weakening should the Danes vote against joining the EMU. Danish public reports show that sentiment against joining the EMU has been picking up steam over the past few weeks, although the “Yes” vote is still slightly ahead. [He] noted that if the Danes vote for joining the EMU, the local currency would likely strengthen, but not significantly.Six- to 12-month risk reversals last Monday were 0.25%/0.45% in favor of euro calls. [He] said a risk-reversal strategy would be zero cost if a customer bought a euro call struck at DKK7.52 and sold a euro put at DKK7.44 last Monday when the Danish krone spot was at DKK7.45 to the euro. The options are European-style and the tenor is six months.Last Monday, six- and 12-month euro/Danish krone volatility was at 1.55%/1.95%, up from 0.6%/0.9% for the whole year until April 10, 2000, owing to growing bias among Danes against joining the EMU. On the week of April 10, volatility spiked as a couple of banks bought six-month and nine-month, at-the-money vol. (Based on Derivatives Week, April 24, 2000.)
(a) Plot the zero-cost risk reversal strategy on a diagram. Show the DKK7.44 and DKK7.52 put and call explicitly.
(b) Note that the spot rate is at DKK7.45. But, this is not the midpoint between the two strikes. How can this strategy have zero cost then?
(c) What would this last point suggest about the implied volatilities of the two options?
(d) What does the statement “Last Monday, six- and 12-month euro/Danish krone volatility was at 1.55%/1.95%,” mean?
(e) What does at-the-money vol mean? (See the last sentence.) Is there out-of-the-money vol, then?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following questions deal with range binaries. These are another example of exotic options. Read the following carefully and then answer the questions at the end.Investors are looking to purchase range options. The product is like a straightforward range binary in that the holder pays an upfront premium to receive a fixed pay-off as long as spot maintains a certain range. In contrast to the regular range binary, however, the barriers only come into existence after a setperiod of time. That is, if spot breaches the range before the barriers become active, the structure is not terminated.This way, the buyer will have a short Vega position on high implied volatility levels. (Based on an article in Derivatives Week).
(a) Display the payoff diagram of a range-binary option.
(b) Why would FX markets find this option especially useful?
(c) When do you think these options will be more useful?
(d) What are the risks of a short position in range binaries?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Double no-touch options is another name for range binaries. Read the following carefully, and then answer the questions at the end.Fluctuating U.S. dollar/yen volatility is prompting option traders managing their books to capture high volatilities through range binary structures while hedging with butterfly trades. Popular trades include one-year double no touch options with barriers of JPY126 and JPY102. Should the currency pair stay within that range, traders could benefit from a USD1 million payout on premiums of 15-20%.On the back of those trades, there was buying of butterfly structures to hedge short vol positions. Traders were seen buying out-of-the-money dollar put/yen calls struck at JPY102 and an out-of-the-money dollar call/yen put struck at JPY126. (Based on an article in Derivatives Week).
(a) Display the payoff diagram of the structure mentioned in the first paragraph.
(b) When do you think these options will be more useful?
(c) What is the role of butterfly structures in this case?
(d) What are the risks of a short position in range binaries?
(e) How much money did such a position make or lose “last Tuesday”?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify the Interfund Activity
The following events take place:
- The Special Revenue Fund transfers $8,000 to the Internal Service Fund as a temporary loan.
- The Internal Service Fund bills the Special Revenue Fund $20,000 for services performed.
- Interest payments in the amount of $14,000 that are the responsibility of the Debt Service Fund are paid by the General Fund.
- The unexpended balance of the Capital Projects Fund, which is $65,000, is transferred to the General Fund.
- Current expendable revenues of the Trust Fund in the amount of $35,000 are transferred to the Special Revenue Fund.
- The General Fund transfers $100,000 to start an Internal Service Fund.
Required:
- Identify the interfund activity as a loan, services provided and used, interfund transfer, or interfund reimbursement and prepare entries in general journal form to record the transactions on the records of the funds involved.
- Why is it important to distinguish residual equity transfers from operating transfers?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal Entries
The following events take place:
- Hector Madras died and left 100 acres of undeveloped land to the city for a future park. He acquired the land at $100 an acre, but at the date of his death the land was appraised at $8,000 an acre.
- The city authorized the transfer of $100,000 of general revenues and the issuance of $1,000,000 in general obligation bonds to construct improvements on the donated land. The bonds were sold at par.
- The improvements were completed at a cost of $1,100,000, and the operation of the park was turned over to the City Parks Department.
Required:
Prepare entries in general journal form to record these transactions in the proper fund(s). Designate the fund in which each transaction is recorded. If the transaction did not result in a journal entry to a government fund, record the journal entry needed to reflect the information in the government-wide Statement of Net Assets.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple Choice
Select the best answer for each of the following:
- The City of Apache should use a Capital Projects Fund to account for
(a) Structures and improvements constructed with the proceeds of a special assessment.
(b) Special Revenue funds set aside to acquire land for city parks.
(c) Construction in progress on the city-owned electric utility plant, financed by an issue of revenue bonds.
(d) Assets to be used to retire bonds issued to finance an addition to the City Hall.
- Activities of a central print shop offering printing services at cost to various city departments should be accounted for in
(a) The General Fund.
(b) An Internal Service Fund.
(c) A Special Revenue Fund.
(d) An Agency Fund.
- Adams County collects property taxes for the benefit of the state government and the local school districts and periodically remits collections to these units. These activities should be accounted for in
(a) An Agency Fund.
(b) The General Fund.
(c) An Internal Service Fund.
(d) A Special Revenue Fund.
- In order to provide for the retirement of general obligation bonds, the City of Globe invests a portion of its receipts from general property taxes in marketable securities. This investment activity should be accounted for in
(a) A Capital Projects Fund.
(b) A Debt Service Fund.
(c) A Trust Fund.
(d) The General Fund.
- The transactions of a municipal police retirement system should be recorded in
(a) The General Fund.
(b) A Special Revenue Fund.
(c) A Trust Fund.
(d) An Internal Service Fund.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple Choice
Select the best answer for each of the following:
- The activities of a municipal golf course that receives three-fourths of its total revenue from a special tax levy should be accounted for in
(a) An Enterprise Fund.
(b) The General Fund.
(c) A Trust Fund.
(d) A Special Revenue Fund.
- Equipment in general governmental service that had been constructed 10 years before with resources of a Capital Projects Fund was sold. The receipts were accounted for as unrestricted revenue. Entries are necessary in the
(a) General Fund and Capital Projects Fund.
(b) General Fund.
(c) General Fund, Capital Projects Fund, and Enterprise Fund.
(d) General Fund, Capital Projects Fund, and Debt Service Fund.
- An account for expenditures does not appear in which fund?
(a) Capital Projects.
(b) Enterprise.
(c) General.
(d) Special Revenue.
- Part of the general obligation bond proceeds from a new issuance was used to pay for the cost of a new City Hall as soon as construction was completed. The remainder of the proceeds was transferred to repay the debt. Entries are needed to record these transactions in the
(a) General Fund and Proprietary Fund.
(b) General Fund, Agency Fund, and Debt Service Fund.
(c) Trust Fund and Debt Service Fund.
(d) Debt Service Fund, Capital Projects Fund.
- Cash secured from property tax revenue was transferred for the eventual payment of principal and interest on general obligation bonds. The bonds had been issued when land was acquired several years ago for a city park. Upon the transfer, an entry would be made in which of the following?
(a) Debt Service Fund.
(b) Enterprise Fund.
(c) Agency Fund.
(d) General Fund.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple Choice
Select the best answer for each of the following:
- Premiums received on general obligation bonds are generally transferred to what fund or group of accounts?
(a) Debt Service.
(b) General.
(c) Special Revenue.
- Of the items listed below, those most likely to have parallel accounting procedures, account titles, and financial statements are
(a) Special Revenue Funds and Internal Service Funds.
(b) Internal Service Funds and Debt Service Funds.
(c) The General Fund and Special Revenue Funds.
- Recreational facilities run by a governmental unit and financed on a user-charge basis would be accounted for in which fund?
(a) General.
(b) Trust.
(c) Enterprise.
(d) Capital Projects.
- Taylor City should record depreciation as an expense in its
(a) Enterprise Fund and Internal Service Fund.
(b) Internal Service Fund and the General Fund.
(c) General Fund and Enterprise Fund.
(d) Enterprise Fund and Capital Projects Fund.
- A performance budget relates a governmental unit”s expenditures to
(a) Objects of Expenditure.
(b) Expenditures of the preceding fiscal year.
(c) Individual months within the fiscal year.
(d) Activities and programs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify the Fund
Write the name of the fund(s) in which each of the following transactions or events would be recorded.
- Bonds, the proceeds of which were to be used for the construction of a new City Hall, were issued.
- A sum of money was appropriated, to be advanced from monies on hand, to finance the establishment of a City Garage for servicing city-owned transportation equipment.
- A contribution was received from a private source. The use of the income earned on the investment of this sum of money was specifically designated by the donor.
- Proceeds received from a bond issue were used for the purchase of the privately owned water utility in the city.
- Property taxes designated to be set aside for the eventual retirement of the City Hall building bonds were collected.
- Real estate and personal property taxes, which had not been assessed or levied for any specific purpose, were collected.
- Payment was made to the contractor for progress made in the construction of the new City Hall.
- Interest was paid on the bonds issued for the purchase of the water utility.
- Bonds, the proceeds of which are to be used to pay for the improvement of streets in the residential district, were issued. The debt is to be serviced by assessments on the property benefited. The government is obligated to the bondholders to assure the timely payment of principal and interest on the debt.
- Salaries of personnel in the office of the mayor were paid.
- Interest was paid on the City Hall building bonds.
- Installment payments were received from the property owners assessed for the street improvement project.
- Interest was paid on bonds issued for the payment of the improvement of streets in the residential district.
- Interest was received on the investment of moneys set aside for the retirement of the City Hall building bonds.
- Sums of money were received from employees by payroll deductions to be used for the purchase of United States government bonds for those employees individually.
- City motor vehicle license fees, to be used for general street expenditures, were collected.
- Materials to be used for the general repair of the streets were purchased.
- The City Garage was reimbursed for services on the equipment of the fire and police departments.
- Excess funds were transferred from the water utility to the General Fund.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capital Projects Fund—Journal Entries
On June 1, 2012, the City of Cape May authorized the construction of a police station at an expected cost of $250,000. Financing will be provided through transfers from a Special Revenue Fund.
The following transactions occurred during the fiscal year beginning June 1, 2012, relating to the Capital Project Fund.
- The $250,000 receivable from the Special Revenue Fund was recorded.
- The Special Revenue Fund transferred $125,000 to the Capital Project Fund to begin construction on the police station.
- The Capital Project Fund invested the transfer of monies in a six-month certificate, at 5%.
- A contract in the amount of $250,000 was let to the lowest bidder.
- Architect and legal fees in the amount of $3,125 were approved for payment. There was no encumbrance for these expenditures.
- Contract billings in the amount of $250,000 were approved for payment on the completion of the police station and the encumbrance was removed.
- The six-month certificate was redeemed at maturity with interest revenue.
- The Special Revenue Fund transferred the final amount of $125,000 to the Capital Projects Fund.
- All liabilities except for the retention of 5% of the contract price were paid.
- All requirements and obligations were completed; the final payment of the contract price was made and all nominal accounts were closed.
Required:
Prepare the journal entries necessary in the Capital Projects Fund to record the transactions and events described above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining Amounts to Report for Long-Term Liabilities
On January 1, 2012, Metropolis City issued a 7%, 5-year, $100,000 general obligation bond for $96,007. The bond pays interest annually (on December 31) and was issued to yield 8%. The bond was issued in the capital projects fund, and the proceeds are to be used to build a giant ball that will drop twenty stories on New Year”s Eve. No construction has occurred. A debt service fund was created to meet the interest and principal payments. The city prepares financial statements on December 31 of each year.
Required:
Determine how the above information will be reflected on each of the following statements for the year 2012.
- The governmental funds” statement of revenue, expenditures, and changes in fund balances. List the governmental fund and then list the dollar amount within the appropriate heading on the statement (such as Revenues, Expenditures, or Other Financing Sources (Uses)).
- The government-wide statement of net assets.
- The government-wide statement of activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Debt Service Fund
On January 1, 2012, the City of Cape May authorized and issued $200,000 of 5%, three-year term bonds. Interest is payable annually on December 31. A debt service fund is established to accumulate the necessary resources to pay the annual interest on the bonds and to redeem the bonds when they mature. The required annual addition for principal and interest will be transferred annually to the debt service fund from the general fund. It is assumed that amounts received by the debt service fund for the payment of principal can be invested at an annual return of 8%.
Required:
- Prepare a schedule to calculate the annual required additions and annual required earnings to repay the principal on the bonds assuming that the first installment for principal and interest is transferred to the debt service fund from the general fund on December 30, 2012.
- Prepare the entries to be recorded by the debt service fund as follows:
(1) The 2013 budget entry.
(2) The entry to record the annual transfer from the general fund.
(3) The entry to record the annual payment of interest.
(4) The entry to record $4,929 in interest income for 2013.
(5) The entry(s) to close the accounts at the end of 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capital Projects Fund and Related Funds
The Town of Green River authorized a municipal building to be constructed at a cost of $175,000. The construction will be financed from the proceeds from the issue of $175,000 of 6% bonds. Any difference between the par value of the bonds and the proceeds from their sale is transferred to the Debt Service Fund.
Transactions and events relating to this project include the following:
- The proceeds from the sale of the bonds were received and included a premium on the bond issue in the amount of $15,000. The premium was transferred to Debt Service Fund.
- Encumbrances were recorded on signing of the construction contract in the amount of $175,000.
- Contract billings in the amount of $85,000 were approved for payment.
- Contract billings were paid in the amount of $85,000.
- All nominal accounts were closed and construction in progress was recorded in the appropriate account group in anticipation of the preparation of financial statements.
- Encumbrances that were closed in anticipation of the preparation of financial statements are reestablished in the Capital Projects Fund.
- Contract billings in the amount of $90,000 were approved on the completion of the municipal building.
- Contract billings of $90,000 less a retention of 5% were paid.
- The building was accepted, all construction liabilities were paid, and the building was recorded as an asset in the appropriate account group.
Required:
Prepare the journal entries relating to the Capital Projects Fund and the Debt Service Fund for the transactions and events described above. Clearly identify the fund in which each entry is recorded.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Special Assessment Debt
The City of Dayville has undertaken a sidewalk construction project. The project is being financed by the proceeds from the issue on July 1, 2012, of $500,000 of 7% special assessment debt. One quarter of the principal plus interest is payable on June 30 of each year beginning June 30, 2013. Property owners are assessed to provide the funds to pay the principal and interest on the debt.
The following transactions occurred during the period July 1, 2012, through June 30, 2013.
- The bonds for the construction of the sidewalks were issued at par value.
- The sidewalks were completed at a cost of $500,000.
- Property owners were assessed and billed for the first installment of principal and interest on the special assessment debt.
- Assessments for the first installment of principal and interest on the special assessment debt were collected and the June 30, 2013, payment of principal and interest on the special assessment debt was made.
Required:
Prepare all journal entries for the above transactions that are necessary in the funds of the City of Dayville assuming that.
- The City of Dayville has made a commitment to the holders of the special assessment debt to assure the timely and full payment of principal and interest on the appropriate due dates.
- The City of Dayville has not obligated itself in any manner on the special assessment debt that was issued for the construction of the sidewalks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Internal Service Fund
The administrators of the City of Lyons have obtained approval from the City Council to centralize the computer facility as of January 1, 2012. An internal service fund is created to account for the activities of the computer facility. The City Council has approved a contribution of $25,000 from the General Fund for use as working capital and an advance from the Electric Utility Fund of $355,000 for the purchase of equipment and facilities. The $355,000 advance will be repaid by the internal service fund in 20 equal annual installments.
The following transactions relate to the establishment and operation of the Internal Service Fund.
|
January 1
|
The computer facility received the contribution from the General Fund and the advance from the Electric Utility Fund.
|
|
January 4
|
Land and a building were purchased for $175,000 of which $25,000 was assigned to land. Hardware was purchased for $125,000 and equipment to protect the hardware was purchased for $55,000.
|
|
April 10
|
The computer facility billed the Electric Utility Fund for service provided. The service cost $200,000 and was billed at a mark-up of 25% on cost. (Direct costs of providing computer services are accumulated in the “Computer Service” account. When services are billed to departments, this account is credited and the “Cost of Service” account is debited for the cost of services billed.)
|
|
April 29
|
Administrative expenses totaling $10,000 were approved for payment.
|
|
May 1
|
Payment of $37,750 was received from the Electric Utility in partial payment of the April 10 billing.
|
|
May 1
|
The administrative expense was paid.
|
|
December 2
|
The first of 20 equal annual installments to the Electric Utility Fund was paid.
|
|
December 30
|
Depreciation expense was recorded for the year as administration expense. The building was estimated to have a remaining useful life of 25 years; the hardware was estimated to have a useful life of 5 years; the equipment to protect the hardware was estimated to have a useful life of 10 years.
|
|
December 31
|
The nominal accounts of the internal service fund were closed through a closing account, “Excess of Billings to Departments over Costs,” which in turn was closed to unrestricted net assets.
|
Required:
Prepare the journal entries necessary in the Internal Service Fund to record the transactions and events described above. The chart of accounts presented below may be used as an aid. The closing account, “Excess of Billings to Departments over Costs,” is similar to the “Income Summary” account of a corporation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal Entries—Identify the Fund
The following activities and transactions are typical of those that may affect the various funds used by a typical municipal government.
Required:
Prepare journal entries to record each transaction and identify the fund in which each entry is recorded.
- The Greenville City Council passed a resolution approving a general operating budget of $5,000,000 for the fiscal year 2012. Total revenues are estimated at $4,900,000.
- The Greenville City Council Passed an ordinance providing a property tax levy of $6.25 per $100 of assessed valuation for the fiscal year 2012. Total property valuation in Greenville City is $204,800,000. Property is assessed at 25% of current property valuation. Property tax bills are mailed to property owners. An estimated 3% will be uncollectible.
- Reed City sold a general obligation term bond issue for $1,000,000 at 105 to a major brokerage firm. The stated interest rate is 5%. Proceeds are to be used for construction of a new Central Law Enforcement Building. (Note:Entries are required in the Capital Project Fund).
- The premium on bond sale in (C) above is transferred to the Debt Service Fund.
- At the end of fiscal year 2012, the Greenville City Council approves the write-off of $52,550 of uncollected 2011 taxes because of inability to locate the property owners. The tax bills have been referred to the legal department for further action.
- The Reed City Central Law Enforcement Building [(C) above] is completed. Contracts and expenses total $989,000, and all have been paid and recorded in the Capital Project Fund. Prepare entries to close this project and record the completion of the project in all other funds or account groups affected. Any balance in the Capital Project Fund is to be applied to payment of interest and principal of the bond issue.
- On May 1, 2012, Hopi City supervised the issue of 6% serial bonds at par to finance street curbing in an area recently incorporated in the city limits. The face amount of the bonds is $600,000; interest is payable annually, and bonds are to be retired in equal amounts over five years from collections from assessments against property owners. The City acts as a collection agent and has given assurances to the debt holders that it will guarantee payment of principal and interest even though it is not obligated to do so.
(1) Record the issuance of the bonds on May 1, 2012.
(2) Record the payment to bondholders on May 1, 2013.
- The curbing project in (G) above was completed on November 30 at a total of $590,000. Record summary entries for expenditure transactions May 1–November 30, 2012, and on completion of the project.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal Entries—Identify the Fund
The following transactions take place.
- Bond proceeds of $1,000,000 were received to be used in constructing a firehouse. An equal amount is contributed from general revenues.
- $800,000 of serial bonds matured. Interest of $120,000 was paid on these and other serial bonds outstanding.
- $8,000 was received as insurance proceeds from the accidental destruction of a four-year-old police car costing $24,000.
- $120,000 in expendable funds was transferred from the City Parks Endowment Fund to the City Parks Special Revenue Fund.
- Equipment purchased from general revenues at a cost of $200,000 was sold for $40,000.
- The City Water Company (an enterprise fund) issued a bill for $800 for water provided to the street department”s street cleaner.
- The City Water Company transferred $400,000 in excess funds to the General Fund.
- A central motor pool was established by a contribution of $120,000 from the General Fund, a long-term loan of $80,000 from the City Parks Special Revenue Fund, and general obligation bond issue proceeds of $200,000.
- The Motor Pool Fund billed the General Fund $10,000 and the City Parks Fund $4,000 for the use of motor vehicles.
- Special Assessment Bonds in the amount of $400,000 were retired. The city has indicated a willingness to guarantee the payment of principal even though it was not obligated to do so.
- Customers” deposits of $8,000 for water meters were received by the City Water Company during the year. The monies are to be held in trust until the customers request that their services be disconnected and the final bills are collected.
- It is determined that the Service Fund will require an annual contribution of $60,000 and earnings of $6,000 in the current year to accumulate the amounts necessary to retire general obligation term bonds.
Required:
Prepare entries in general journal form to record these transactions in the proper fund(s). Designate the fund in which each entry is recorded.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reporting Information about Long-term Liabilities
On January 1, 2004, the city of Nashvegas issued an 8% annual, 10-year, $10,000 bond for $11,472 (an effective yield of 6%). The bonds become due on December 31, 2013. On June 30, 2012, the city of Nashvegas issued an 8% annual, 10-year, $10,000 bond to yield 10% (the proceeds are $8,771).
Required:
- Assuming that both bonds are general obligation bonds, prepare the schedule of long-term liabilities at December 31, 2012.
- Determine the amount of interest reported on the government-wide statement of activities for the year ending December 31, 2012.
- Determine the amount of long-term liabilities reported on the government-wide statement of net assets at December 31, 2012.
- Determine the total amount of interest expenditures included in the governmental statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in net assets for the year ending December 31, 2012.
- Determine the amount of debt (if any) reported on the governmental funds balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are given the following default-free long bond:
Face value: 100
Issuing price: 100
Currency: USD
Maturity: 30 years
Coupon: 6%
No implicit calls or puts. Further, in this market there are no bid-ask spreads and no trading commissions. Finally, the yield curve is flat and moves only parallel to itself.There is, however, a futures contract on the 1-year Libor rate. The price of the contract is determined as
Vt= 100(1-ft)
where ftis the “forward rate” on 1-year Libor.
(a) Show that if the yield of the 30-year bond is yt, then at all times we have
yt= ft
(b) Plot the pricing functions for Vtand the bond.
(c) Suppose the current yield y0is at 7%. Put together a zero-cost portfolio that is delta-neutral toward movements of the yield curve.
(d) Consider the following yield movements over 1-year periods:
9%7%9%7%9%7%
What are the convexity gains during this period? (e) What other costs are there?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of Changes in Partners” Capital and Liquidation
Mark Malone, Pete Patton, and Sally Spencer formed a partnership on January 1, 2008. Their original capital investments (all cash) were $140,000, $160,000, and $100,000, respectively. During the first year of operations, Mark withdrew $30,000, and the partnership reported a net income of $60,000. The partnership agreement stipulates that all income and losses are to be divided in the ratio of the original capital investments.
At the beginning of the second year, the partners decided to liquidate the business because of a disagreement. The assets and liabilities on January 2, 2009, were as follows: Cash, $37,000; Accounts Receivable, $129,000; Inventory, $188,000; Land, $85,000; Building (net), $180,000; Furniture and Fixtures (net), $30,000; Accounts Payable, $74,000; and Mortgage Payable, $145,000. The inventory was sold for three-quarters of its book value, the furniture and fixtures brought in $10,000, and $92,000 of the accounts receivable were collected. The remaining receivables were uncollectible. After the losses were allocated according to the partnership agreement and the accounts payable were paid in full, Pete accepted the land and building at book value and assumed the mortgage payable at book value as partial settlement of his capital interest. The cash balance was then distributed to the partners.
Required:
- Prepare a statement of changes in partners” capital for the year ended December 31, 2008.
- Prepare the journal entries to close the Drawing and Income Summary accounts for 2008.
- Prepare a schedule of partnership liquidation.
- Prepare the journal entries to record the liquidation activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Incorporation of a Partnership
Jan and Sue have engaged successfully as partners in their law firm for a number of years. Soon after their state”s incorporation laws are changed to allow professionals to incorporate, the partners decide to organize a corporation to take over the business of the partnership.
The after-closing trial balance for the partnership is as follows:
After-Closing Tr ial Balance December 31, 2008
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
Accounts Receivable
|
$15,000
32,400
|
|
|
Allowances for Uncollectibles
|
|
$ 2,000
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
800
|
|
|
Office Equipment
|
30,200
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
12,600
|
|
Jan, Loan (outstanding since 2000, at 5%)
|
|
6,400
|
|
Jan, Capital (50%)
|
|
29,400
|
|
Sue, Capital (50%)
|
|
28,000
|
|
|
$78400
|
378.400
|
Figures shown parenthetically reflect agreed profit- and loss-sharing ratios.
The partners have hired you as an accountant to adjust the recorded assets and liabilities to their market values and to close the partners” capital accounts to the new corporate capitalstock. The corporation is to retain the partnership”s books, and the assets of the partnership should be taken over by the corporation in the following amounts:
|
Cash
|
$I&000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
32,400
|
|
Allowance for uncollectibles
|
2.900
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
800
|
|
Office equipment
|
16.000
|
Jan”s loan is to be transferred to her capital account in the amount of $6,600.
Required:
- Prepare the necessary journal entries to express the agreement described.
- Prepare the entries to record the issuance of shares to Jan and Sue, assuming the issuance of 400 shares (par value $100) of stock to Jan and Sue.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion Case with Ethical Issue
Alan Norwood is currently a senior associate with the law firm of Butler, Starns, and Madden (BSM). His compensation currently includes a salary of $155,000, and benefits valued at $5,000. BSM is considered among the strongest of local firms, with assets of $10 million (cash $2,000,000, and accounts receivables $8,000,000), liabilities of $7.5 million, and 11 partners.
Alan anticipates admission to the partnership on July 1 of this year. The senior managing partner, Jane Butler, has had preliminary discussions with Alan in which the senior partner proposed the following:
- A 5% interest in BSM capital and profits in recognition of Alan”s commitment to the firm and in exchange for a capital investment by Alan of $150,000. This 5% interest would be acquired from the other partners.
- Alan”s compensation will consist of a monthly withdrawal of $18,000 and benefits valued at $5,000 annually. Monthly withdrawals approximate firm profits, but any unpaid profits will be distributed as a bonus to Alan after the end of each partnership year.
On March 1, only one month prior to Alan”s final negotiation meeting for entry into the partnership, Mary, one of the junior associates, discreetly informed Alan that the firm was drawing up documents for Hugh Starns” retirement. Hugh has a 5% interest in the firm”s capital and profits with a book value of $125,000. The partners have agreed upon a $75,000 cash settlement of the interest held by Mr. Starns. (Of the other 10 partners, numbers 1 through 9 hold 10% interests, and number 10 holds a 5% interest).
Required:
- Assume Mr. Starns retires with his $75,000 settlement, and Alan is admitted to the partnership as proposed.
(1) Prepare journal entries to record the retirement and admission.
(2) Discuss the factors Alan needs to consider in evaluating whether he has improved his annual compensation from the firm. Although this is not a tax course, include a discussion of the various tax issues.
(3) Should Alan be concerned regarding the impending retirement and settlement of Mr. Starns” capital account assuming Alan is confident that he will be able to match the revenue-generating ability of Mr. Starns?
- Assume instead that Alan is so disturbed by the impending departure of Mr. Starns that he decides to join Mary, the junior associate, in leaving the firm to form their own law partnership. Both Alan and Mary feel confident that during their tenures at BSM theyhave developed such good working relationships with their clients that the majority of their clients will follow them to the new firm.
(1) Should Alan and Mary have any hesitation in quietly recruiting BSM clients to “follow them” to the new law firm?
(2) Can the partners of BSM prevent such recruiting of clients based on the claim that these clients are BSM “property”?
- Assume instead that the firm encounters difficulties from which it is unable to recover, and in April, the decision is made to liquidate the firm. It is discovered that Mr. Starns has (in violation of the partnership agreement) taken draws which reduced firm cash and his capital account by $130,000. However, BSM owes Mr. Starns $10,000 for a separate loan made to the firm some 10 years ago. As of May 1, the firm had unallocated profits of $25,000, and cash had also increased by $25,000.
(1) Assuming that the provisions of UPA Section 40(b) are adhered to strictly, prepare entries to record the distributions. Assume that Mr. Starns is insolvent.
(2) If the other 10 partners are aware that Starns” capital account will take on a debit balance, can they rightfully hold repayment of the balance due to Starns for the $10,000 loan contingent on his reimbursement of his capital account”s debit balance? Does this violate UPA Section 40(b)? On what basis can the partners justify their action (if challenged)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Ethics
At State College, where football has long reigned as king and fans are near fanatical in their attendance, the frenzy for football tickets has recently reached an all-time high.
With requests for home game tickets at an unprecedented level, prices on everything from parking passes to hotel rooms to home rentals have soared beyond belief. Parking passes were going for $500 on eBay, and hotel rates have doubled—and in some cases nearly tripled—reaching as high as $650 per night at some hotels.
- What are the moral or ethical issues in charging what people will pay for rooms and tickets to attend a State College football game?
- Why not let the economic forces of supply and demand determine prices in our capitalistic system?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balances
In the appendix to this chapter, the Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balances for the General Fund for the City of Atlanta is reported.
- How is the format used on the Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balances for the general fund different from the format on Income Statements used by for-profit organizations? Which items appear on the government fund”s statements that do not appear on Income Statements used by for-profit companies?
- What is the largest expenditure of the General Fund on the Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balances?
- What is the largest source of revenue for the General Fund on the Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balances?
- Evaluate the performance of the General Fund using the Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
General Fund Journal Entries
Several independent financial activities of a governmental unit are given below.
- Revenue from the sale of licenses and permits for the first two months totaled $15,000.
- Land that had been donated previously was sold for $100,000.
- An order was placed for the purchase of a new fire engine at a price of $130,000.
- Bonds with a face value of $500,000 were issued at par value to finance a new park.
- A $250,000 grant was received from the federal government to help improve the local schools.
- The new fire engine was received and accepted. The approved price, however, was $140,000 rather than $130,000.
Required:
Prepare the journal entries needed to account for each transaction in the General Fund.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
General Fund Journal Entries
Listed are typical financial activities of a local governmental unit.
- The legislative unit approved the budget for the general operating fund. Estimated revenues are $4,000,000, and appropriations for expenditures are $3,800,000.
- Statements of property tax assessments totaling $3,000,000 were mailed to property owners. It is estimated that 4% of the assessed taxes will be uncollectible.
- Notification was received from the state that this unit”s share of sales tax revenues from the fourth quarter of the previous year will be $500,000.
- The manager signed a contract to purchase equipment costing $250,000.
- The equipment ordered above was received and paid for.
- Employees were paid their biweekly wages of $36,000.
- Property taxes in the amount of $2,050,000 were collected.
Required:
Prepare the necessary journal entries to record the transactions listed above in the records of the General Fund.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for Supplies
In 2012, Bay City purchased supplies valued at $350,000. At the end of the year, $65,000 of the supplies were still in the inventory. No supplies were on hand at the beginning of the year. The city uses the purchases method to account for supplies.
Required:
- Prepare the journal entry necessary to report the supplies as an asset in the balance sheet of Bay City.
- What amount of expenditures for supplies will be shown in the statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal Entries
During 2012, the City of Greenfield engaged in the following financial activities:
- The City Council approved the budget for the general operating fund. The budget shows estimated revenues of $1,900,000 and appropriations for expenditures of $1,850,000.
- Property tax assessments for 2012 were compiled and statements mailed to property owners. Assessments total $955,000. Past collection experience indicates that approximately 5% of assessed property taxes are delinquent or uncollectible during the year of billing.
- A low bid of $15,000 was accepted for a new vehicle for the fire chief. A purchase order was issued providing for additional costs for painting and ancillary equipment (negotiated after the bid) prior to delivery. The estimate of additional costs is $1,400.
- Additional purchase orders placed during the year amount to $140,000.
- City employees are issued paychecks for the month of April. The total payroll amounts to $90,000.
- The City received a statement from the State Treasurer that the City”s portion of the state sales tax for the first half-year is $375,000.
- Vouchers for expenditures totaling $135,000 are approved for payment. Encumbrances against these vouchers were recorded at a total of $137,000.
- The vehicle for the fire chief was delivered and accepted. The invoice in the amount of $16,200 was approved for payment.
- Property tax collections for the month of June amounted to $450,000.
- The City Treasurer issued checks in payment of the vouchers totaling $135,000 and for the invoice for the fire chief”s vehicle.
- A purchase order previously issued for an electric typewriter (estimated price $650) was canceled when the vendor indicated a three-month delay in delivery.
Required:
Prepare journal entries to record and account for the foregoing transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
General Fund Journal Entries
The following events relate typical activities in a municipality that affect the General Fund.
- The Meadville City Council passed an ordinance approving a general operating budget of $580,000 for fiscal year 2012. The city”s only source of revenue is from property taxes. For 2001, these revenues are estimated at $565,000.
- A property tax levy of $1 per $100 assessed valuation (total assessed valuation equals $60,000,000) is billed to property owners. Taxes are due in the current fiscal year. Experience indicates that 3% of taxes billed will be uncollectible.
- A motorcycle for the Department of Public Safety is ordered by the purchasing department on the basis of a low bid of $4,200.
- The motorcycle in (3) above is received and the invoice is approved for payment. Extra accessories not included in the bid price amount to $425.
- Salaries and wages in the amount of $20,000 are paid by check to city employees for the two-week period ending on May 15.
- The property division sold used typewriters and other office equipment at a public auction. Total receipts were $8,225.
- Property taxes in the amount of $540,000 were collected.
Required:
Prepare the necessary journal entries to record each event in the accounts of the General Fund.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal Entries, Closing Entries, and Trial Balance
The general ledger trial balance of the General Fund of the City of Bedford on January 1, 2012, shows the following:
|
|
Dr
|
Cr
|
|
Cash
|
$100,000
|
|
|
Taxes Receivable
|
75,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Taxes
|
|
$ 35,000
|
|
Unreserved Fund Balance
|
|
110,000
|
|
Reserve for Encumbrances-2011
|
|
30,000
|
|
Total
|
$175,000
|
$175,000
|
A summary of activities and transactions for the General Fund during 2012 is presented here:
- The City Council adopted a budget for the General Fund with estimated revenues of $1,560,000 and authorization for appropriated expenditures of $1,400,000. The budget authorized the transfer of $50,000 from the Water Fund to the General Fund for operating expenses as a payment in lieu of taxes. Cash for the payment of interest due for the year on the $1,000,000, 8% bond issue for the Civic Center is approved for transfer from the General Fund to the Debt Service Fund.
- The annual property tax levy of 10% on assessed valuation ($11,000,000) is billed to property owners. Two percent is estimated to be uncollectible.
- Goods and services amounting to $1,150,000 were ordered during the year.
- Invoices for all goods ordered in 2011 amounting to $29,000 were approved for payment.
- Funds for bond interest on Civic Center bonds were transferred to the Debt Service Fund.
- Invoices for goods and services received during the year totaling $1,155,000 were recorded. These were encumbered previously [see (3) above].
- Transfer of funds from the Water Company was received in lieu of taxes.
- Taxes were collected from property owners in the amount of $1,050,000.
- Past-due tax bills of $17,000 were charged off as uncollectible.
- Checks in payment of invoices for goods and services ordered in 2011 and 2012 were issued [see items (4) and (6) above].
- Revenues received from miscellaneous sources, other than property taxes, of $455,000 were recorded.
- Purchase order for two trash collection vehicle systems complete with residence trash containers for automatic pickup of trash was issued. Bid price per system was $120,000.
Required:
- Prepare journal entries to record the summary transactions. You may find it necessary or convenient to post journal entries to ledger t-accounts before the preparation of the required trial balances.
- Prepare a preclosing trial balance.
- Prepare closing entries.
- Prepare a postclosing trial balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing Unreserved Fund Balance and Closing Entries
The following account balances, among others, were included in the preclosing trial balance of the General Fund of the City of Madison on December 31, 2013.
|
Appropriations
|
$3,488,000
|
|
Cash
|
270,000
|
|
Due to Other Funds
|
100,000
|
|
Due from Other Funds
|
250,000
|
|
Encumbrances
|
382,000
|
|
Estimated Revenue
|
3,720,000
|
|
Expenditures
|
3,020,000
|
|
Expenditures -2012
|
296,000
|
|
Reserve for Encumbrances
|
382,000
|
|
Reserve for Encumbrances-2012
|
310,000
|
|
Revenue
|
3,656,000
|
|
Taxes Receivable
|
600,000
|
|
Transfers from Other Funds
|
300,000
|
|
Transfers to Other Funds
|
520,000
|
|
Unreserved Fund Balance
|
422,000
|
|
Vouchers Payable
|
400,000
|
Required:
- Prepare the necessary closing entries on December 31, 2013.
- Calculate the amount of both the unreserved fund balance and the total fund balance in the balance sheet (1) on December 31, 2012 and (2) on December 31, 2013.
- Prepare a schedule reconciling the December 31, 2012, total fund balance with the December 31, 2013, total fund balance by reference to actual inflows and outflows of financial resources.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Entries, Balance Sheet, Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balance
The trial balance for the General Fund of the City of Monte Vista as of December 31, 2012, is presented here:
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$300,000
|
|
|
Supplies Inventory
|
75,000
|
|
|
Unreserved Fund Balance
|
|
$300,000
|
|
Reserve for Supplies Inventory
|
|
75.000
|
|
|
$375,000
|
$375,000
|
Transactions of the General Fund for the year ended December 31, 2013, are summarized as follows:
- The City Council adopted the following budget for 2013:
- Property taxes of $1,500,000 were levied, of which it is estimated that $30,000 will not be collected.
- Purchase orders in the amount of $1,400,000 were placed with suppliers and other vendors.
- Property taxes in the amount of $1,450,000 were collected.
- Cash was received from the Trust Fund in the amount of $50,000.
- Invoices in the amount of $1,380,000 were approved for payment. The amount originally encumbered for these invoices was $1,360,000. The invoices included $25,000 net of trade-in allowance for the purchase of a new minicomputer and $400,000 for supplies. The City received a trade-in-allowance of $4,000 on its old minicomputer, which had been purchased three years earlier for $16,000. At the time the old minicomputer was purchased, it was estimated that it would have a useful life of four years. The new minicomputer is expected to last at least six years. The City of Monte Vista uses the purchase method to account for supplies inventory.
- Licenses and fees in the amount of $48,000 were collected.
- Vouchers in the amount of $1,300,000 were paid.
- Cash in the amount of $80,000 was transferred to the Debt Service Fund.
- Supplies on hand at the end of the year amount to $100,000.
Required:
- Prepare entries in general journal form to record the transactions of the General Fund for the year ended December 31, 2013.
- Prepare a preclosing trial balance for the General Fund as of December 31, 2013.
- Prepare the necessary closing entries for the General Fund for the year ended December 31, 2013.
- Prepare a balance sheet and a statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance for the General Fund for the year ended December 31, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance Sheet, Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balance
City of Fairfield The General Fund Adjusted Trial Balance December 31, 2012
|
|
Debit
|
Credii
|
|
Cash
Property Tax Receivable
|
$430,000
45,000
|
|
|
Estimated Uncollectible Taxes
|
|
$ 20,000
|
|
Due from Trust Fund
|
50,000
|
|
|
Vouchers Payable
|
|
60,000
|
|
Reserve for Encumbrances
|
|
30,000
|
|
Unreserved Fund Balance
|
|
415,000
|
|
|
S525.000
|
$525,000
|
The trial balance for the General Fund of the City of Fairfield as of December 31, 2012, is presented here:
Transactions for the year ended December 31, 2013, are summarized as follows:
- The City Council adopted a budget for the year with estimated revenue of $735,000 and appropriations of $700,000.
- Property taxes in the amount of $590,000 were levied for the current year. It is estimated that $24,000 of the taxes levied will prove to be uncollectible.
- Proceeds from the sale of equipment in the amount of $35,000 were received by the General Fund. The equipment was purchased 10 years ago with resources of the General Fund at a cost of $150,000. On the date of purchase, it was estimated that the equipment had a useful life of 15 years.
- Licenses and fees in the amount of $110,000 were collected.
- The total amount of encumbrances against fund resources for the year was $642,500.
- Vouchers in the amount of $455,000 were authorized for payment. This was $15,000 less than the amount originally encumbered for these purchases.
- An invoice in the amount of $28,000 was received for goods ordered in 2012. The invoice was approved for payment.
- Property taxes in the amount of $570,000 were collected.
- Vouchers in the amount of $475,000 were paid.
- Fifty thousand dollars was transferred to the General Fund from the Trust Fund.
- The City Council authorized the write-off of $30,000 in uncollected property taxes.
Required:
- Prepare entries in general journal form to record the transactions for the year ended December 31, 2013.
- Prepare a preclosing trial balance for the General Fund as of December 31, 2013.
- Prepare the necessary closing entries for the year ended December 31, 2013.
- Prepare a balance sheet and a statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance for the General Fund for the year ended December 31, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Complete Accounting Cycle—General Fund
The January 1, 2012, trial balance, the calendar-year 2012 budget, and the 2012 transactions of the City of Roseburg are presented here:
City of Roseburg Trial Balance January 1, 2012
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$155,450
|
|
|
Certificates of Deposit
|
200,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
28,675
|
|
|
Supplied Inventory
|
37,600
|
|
|
Due from Federal Government
|
58,000
|
|
|
Property Taxes Receivable
|
75,600
|
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Taxes
|
|
$ 32,150
|
|
Vouchers Payable
|
|
181,000
|
|
Unreserved Fund Balance
|
|
226,075
|
|
Reserve for Inventory
|
|
37,600
|
|
Reserve for Encumbrances
|
|
78,500
|
|
|
$555225
|
$555.325
|
City of Roseburg Budget for General Fund Calendar Year 2012
|
Estimated Revenue
|
|
|
City vehicle and retail license fees
|
$ 252,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
1,448,000
|
|
City sales tax
|
327,000
|
|
Collections for trash service
|
153,000
|
|
Sale of city-owned property
|
88,000
|
|
Total estimated revenue
|
2.268.000
|
|
Appropriations
|
|
|
General government
|
261,000
|
|
Public safety and security
|
875,000
|
|
Health and welfare
|
434,000
|
|
Recreation and parks
|
126,000
|
|
Street maintenance
|
367,000
|
|
Sanitation
|
162,000
|
|
Total appropriations
|
2,225,000
|
|
Excess of Revenues over Appropriations
|
43,000
|
|
Transfer from Water and Sewer Fund
|
118,000
|
|
Less Payments (transfers) to Debt Service Funds
|
(55,000)
|
|
Excess of Revenue and Fund Transfers to
|
|
|
General Fund over Appropriations and Fund Transfers out of General Fund
|
$ 106,000
|
Transactions of the City of Roseburg that affected the General Fund during the year are summarized below:
- The City Council approved the budget and it was recorded.
- Orders for goods and services were issued for a total of $1,202,000 during the year.
- Goods and services were delivered against all orders placed with a total invoice amount of $1,165,600. Of this, $80,000 was for orders placed in the prior year.
- The City accepted a low bid of $78,000 for a new street sweeper for the sanitation department. A purchase order was issued.
- The City received $92,500 from the sale of an old street sweeper and one obsolete fire engine at public auction. The street sweeper cost $60,000 7 years ago, at which time it was estimated to have a useful life of 10 years. The fire engine cost $200,000 8 years ago, at which time it was estimated to have a useful life of 12 years.
- Property tax statements were issued. The tax levy was 8% of the assessed valuation of $18,500,000. An estimated 2% of the tax levy will be uncollectible.
- Payment was received from the federal government. This was a grant to be used for upgrading sanitation department equipment.
- The amount of $55,000 was transferred to the Debt Service Fund for the payment of interest on the outstanding bond issue.
- The city billed residents for trash service. Total billings amounted to $155,675.
- Property taxes totaling $1,438,455 were collected, of which $34,200 was past-due collections from the prior year; $18,250 of past-due taxes was charged off as uncollectible.
- Wages paid to employees during the year amounted to $998,765.
- City retail establishments remitted a total of $333,650 in sales tax collections for the year.
- Other cash receipts during the year were:
|
Vehicle license fees and parking fines
|
|
|
$ 98,682
|
|
Retail license fees
|
130,000
|
|
For trash services (including $28,675 due at end of prior year)
|
148,720
|
|
Transfer from Water and Sewer Fund
|
118,000
|
- Cash purchases of printed forms and other office supplies for the year amounted to $57,680.
- The street sweeper was delivered and an invoice for $78,000 plus freight charges of $1,280 was received. The invoice was approved for payment and a check issued.
- Checks were issued in payment of outstanding vouchers totaling $1,207,100.
- End-of-year activities: (adjustments)
Supplies Inventory 12/31/12: $38,250
Accrued interest on CDs at 5%
The city uses the purchases method to account for supplies expenditures.
Required:
- Enter the opening trial balance data in t-accounts.
- Prepare journal entries for the year”s transactions. Do not include entries for year-end adjustments. Post entries to t-accounts.
- Prepare a preclosing trial balance.
- Prepare journal entries to adjust the Supplies Inventory and record the interest on the CDs.
- Prepare journal entries to close the revenue, expenditures, and encumbrance accounts.
- Prepare a comparative balance sheet for 2011–2012.
- Prepare a statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance for 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reconstructing Journal Entries
The following summary of transactions was taken from the accounts of the Madras School District General Fund before the books were closed for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2013:
|
|
Postdosing Balances June 30, 2012
|
Preclosing Balances June 30, 2013
|
|
Cash
|
$400,000
|
$ 700,000
|
|
Property tax receivable
|
150,000
|
170,000
|
|
Estimated uncollectible taxes
|
(40,000)
|
(70,000)
|
|
Estimated revenue
|
|
3,000,000
|
|
Expenditures
|
|
2,842,000
|
|
Expenditures—prior year
|
|
|
|
Encumbrances
|
|
91,000
|
|
|
$510,000
|
$6,733,000
|
|
Vouchers payable
|
$ 80,000
|
$ 408,000
|
|
Due to other funds
|
210,000
|
142,000
|
|
Reserve for encumbrances
|
60,000
|
91,000
|
|
Unreserved fund balance
|
160,000
|
182,000
|
|
Revenue from taxes
|
|
2,800,000
|
|
Miscellaneous revenue
|
|
130,000
|
|
Appropriations
|
|
2,980,000
|
|
|
$510.000
|
$6.733.000
|
Additional Information:
- Property taxes in the amount of $2,870,000 were assessed for the year. Taxes collected during the year totaled $2,810,000.
- An analysis of the transactions in the vouchers payable account for the year ended June 30, 2013, follows:
|
|
Debit (Credit)
|
|
Current expenditures
|
$(2,700,000)
|
|
Expenditures for prior year
|
(58,000)
|
|
Vouchers for payment to other funds
|
(210,000)
|
|
Cash payments during year
|
2.640,000
|
|
Net change
|
$ (328,000)
|
- During the year the General Fund was billed $142,000 for services performed on its behalf by other city funds.
- On May 2, 2013, commitment documents were issued for the purchase of new textbooks at a cost of $91,000.
Required:
On the basis of the data presented, reconstruct the original detailed journal entries that were required to record all transactions for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2013, including the recording of the current year”s budget. Do not prepare closing entries at June 30, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Describe some of the major reconciling items between a government fund and the government-wide financial statements.
Business Ethics
GASB 45 requires that the expected future costs of retiree health costs be recognized in the current period. Prior to this, governments used a pay-as-you-go plan in which only the current year”s actual payments affected the financial statements.
Suppose you are working for a government prior to the issuance of GASB 45. As part of the collective bargaining agreement, the government offers employees increased health benefits.
- Prior to the issuance of GASB 45, what would be the impact on the government”s financial statements?
- Under GASB 45, what are the financial statement implications?
- Why might the current governmental leaders agree to offer such a benefit?
- What are the ethical issues involved in this decision?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Type of Government Fund
Part A: The following departments of activities are recorded in the City of Atlanta”s Comprehensive Annual Financial Report in the appendix to this chapter. Indicate the type of fund that most likely would be used for each department by placing a G for governmental, P for proprietary, or F for fiduciary by each department.
- ________Department of Aviation (Airport Authority)
- ________Police and Fire Departments
- ________Water and Wastewater System
- ________Agency Funds
- ________Sanitation
- ________Public Works
- ________Pension and Retirement Trust Funds
- ________Internal Service (e.g., Information Technology)
- ________Payment of General Obligation Debt
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of Net Assets
Examine the financial statements for the City of Atlanta in the appendix to this chapter.
- The balance in unrestricted net assets can be positive or negative. A negative balance would indicate that the government owes more than it owns. What is the balance in unrestricted net assets for the governmental activities?
- Does the balance in the unrestricted net assets indicate that the city has cash available to spend? Examine the amount of cash and cash equivalents on the statement of net assets. Does the city have enough cash to spend? If not, what would the city need to do to have cash available?
- Net assets are considered restricted if their use is constrained for a specific purpose. What is the largest purpose listed for restricted net assets?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify the Fund
The following transactions take place:
- A commitment was made to transfer general revenues to the entity in charge of providing transportation for all government agencies.
- Construction bonds were issued at a premium. The premium is to be included in funds accumulated to retire the debt.
- Police salaries were paid.
- Interest and principal were paid on general obligation serial bonds.
Required:
Indicate the name of the fund(s) in which each of the transactions or events should be recorded.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Zurich Financial Services Group (2008)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
|
Note 3
|
Summary of significant accounting policies [extract]
|
|
b)
|
Insurance contracts and investment contracts with discretionary participating features [extract]
|
Reinsurance [extract]
Reinsurance assets are assessed for impairment on a regular basis for any events that may trigger impairment. Triggering events may include legal disputes with third parties, changes in capital and surplus levels, change in credit ratings of a counterparty and historic experience regarding collectability from specific reinsurers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Zurich Financial Services Group (2008)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
Note 4 Critical accounting estimates and judgements [extract]
f) Deferred policy acquisition costs [extract]
Deferred policy acquisition costs generally consist of commissions, underwriting expenses and policy issuance costs. The amount of acquisition costs to be deferred is dependent on judgements as to which issuance costs are directly related to and vary with the acquisition. The related asset is amortized over the premium earning pattern for non-life and certain life products. For most life products, amortization is based on the estimated future profitability of the contract throughout its life. The estimation of profitability considers both historical and future experience as regards assumptions, such as lapse rates or investment income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aviva plc (2008)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
|
Note 2
|
Presentation changes [extract]
|
|
(b) (i)
|
Restatement for the change in accounting policy for latent reserves [extract]
|
As part of the Company’s aim to continuously improve the relevance and reliability of its financial reporting, Aviva undertook a review of the Group’s general insurance reserving in 2008.
As part of this review, the Group concluded that estimating our latent claim provisions on an undiscounted basis, and discounting back to current values, represented an improvement to the existing estimation technique. This approach is in line with best practice for long-term liabilities and moves the measurement of latent claims onto a more economic basis, consistent with our internal model for economic capital and the measurement model being proposed for both IFRS Phase II and Solvency II. This approach also improves consistency with the reporting of other long-tail classes of business which are already discounted, namely certain London Market latent claims and our Dutch Permanent health and Injury Business.
The discount rate that has been applied is based on the relevant swap curve in the relevant currency at the reporting date, having due regard to the duration of the expected settlement of the claims. The discount rate is set at the start of the accounting period with any change in rates between the start and end of the accounting period being reflected below operating profit as an economic assumption change. The range of discount rates used is shown in note 38c and depends on the duration of the claim and the reporting date. We estimate that latent claims will be payable for around the next 35 to 40 years with an average duration of 15 years.
The application of discounting to our latent claims represents a change in accounting policy and has been applied retrospectively. The cumulative impact of discounting in our opening reserves as at 1 January 2007 is to reduce insurance liabilities by 214 million and reinsurance assets by 61 million, and to increase retained earnings by 153 million. These have been treated as prior year adjustments in these financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Old Mutual plc (2008)
Accounting policies [extract]
(d) Insurance and investment contracts [extract]
(v) Insurance contract provisions [extract]
Insurance contract provisions for African businesses have been computed using a gross premium valuation method. Provisions in respect of African business have been made in accordance with the Financial Soundness Valuation basis as set out in the guidelines issued by the Actuarial Society of South Africa in Professional Guidance Note (PGN) 104 (2001). Under this guideline provisions are valued using realistic expectations of future experience, with margins for prudence and deferral of profit emergence.
Provisions for investment contracts with a discretionary participating feature are also computed using the gross premium valuation method in accordance with the Financial Soundness Valuation basis. Surplus allocated to policyholders but not yet distributed (i.e. bonus smoothing reserve) related to these contracts is included as a provision.
For the US business, the insurance contract provisions are calculated using the net premium method, based on assumptions as to investment yields, mortality, withdrawals and policyholder dividends. For the term life products, the assumptions are set at the time the contracts are issued, whereas the assumptions are updated annually, based on the experience for the annuity products.
Universal life and deferred annuity reserves are computed on the retrospective deposit method, which produces reserves equal to the cash value of the contracts.
Reserves on immediate annuities and guaranteed payments are computed on the prospective deposit method, which produces reserves equal to the present value of future benefit payments.
For other territories, the valuation bases adopted are in accordance with local actuarial practices and methodologies.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AXA Group (2008)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
1.13.2 Insurance contracts and investment contracts with discretionary participating features[extract]
Some guaranteed benefits such as Guaranteed Minimum Death or Income Benefits (GMDB or GMIB), or certain guarantees on return proposed by reinsurance treaties, are covered by a risk management program using derivative instruments. In order to minimize the accounting mismatch between liabilities and hedging derivatives, AXA has chosen to use the option allowed under IFRS 4.24 to re-measure its provisions: this revaluation is carried out at each accounts closing based on guarantee level projections and takes into account interest rates and other market assumptions. The liabilities revaluation impact in the current period is recognized through income, symmetrically with the impact of the change in value of hedging derivatives. This change in accounting principles was adopted on first time application of IFRS on January 1, 2004 for contracts portfolios covered by the risk management program at that date. Any additional contracts portfolios covered by the risk management program after that date are valued on the same terms as those applied on the date the program was first applied.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Old Mutual plc (2008)
Accounting policies [extract]
(d) Insurance and investment contracts [extract]
(v) Insurance contract provisions [extract]
The group applies shadow accounting in relation to certain insurance contract provisions in the South Africa long-term business, and DAC and PVIF assets in the United States long-term business, in respect of owner occupied properties or available-for-sale financial assets, in order for recognised unrealised gains or losses on those assets to affect the measurement of the insurance contract provisions, DAC or PVIF assets in the same way that the recognised gains or losses do.
In respect of the South Africa long-term business, shadow accounting is applied to insurance contract provisions where the underlying measurement of the policyholder liability depends directly on the value of owner-occupied property and the unrealised gains and losses on such property, which are recognised in equity. The shadow accounting adjustment to insurance contract provisions is recognised in equity to the extent that the unrealised gains or losses on owner-occupied property backing insurance contract provisions are also directly recognised in equity.
In respect of the United States long-term business, shadow accounting adjustments are made to the amortisation of DAC and PVIF assets in respect of unrealised gains and losses on available-for-sale financial assets to the extent that those unrealised gains and losses would impact the calculation of DAC or PVIF amortisation were they recognised in income. The shadow DAC and PVIF amortisation charge is recognised in equity in line with the unrealised gains and losses on the relevant financial assets until such time as those assets are sold or otherwise disposed of, at which point the accumulated amortisation recognised in equity is recycled to the income statement in the same way as the unrealised gains or losses on those financial assets.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AXA Group (2007)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements of AXA Group [extract]
Note 1.12.2 Insurance contracts and investment contracts with discretionary participating features [extract]
Following the adoption of UK Financial Reporting standard FRS27, reserves relating to with-profit contracts and the FFA were subject to a change in accounting policies in 2006, that was applied retrospectively, consistently with what other UK insurance companies applied. Reserves were adjusted on a “realistic” basis, and related deferred acquisition costs and unearned revenues reserves were cancelled. These adjustments had no impact on net income or shareholders equity. The presentational impact of applying this standard is detailed in note 14. This change in accounting principles only applied to the Group’s UK with-profit contracts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business combination under IFRS 4
Insurance entity A purchases an insurance business owned by Entity B for 10 million. Under A’s existing accounting policies for insurance contracts the carrying value of the insurance contract liabilities held by B is 8 million. Entity A estimates the fair value of the insurance contract liabilities to be 6 million. The fair value of other net assets acquired, including intangible assets, after recognising any additional deferred tax, is 13 million. The tax rate is 25%.
This gives rise to the following journal entry to record the acquisition of B in A’s consolidated financial statements:
|
m
|
m
|
|
Cash
|
|
10.0
|
|
Present value of in-force (PVIF) business intangible (8m less 6m)
|
2.0
|
|
|
Carrying value of insurance liabilities (A’s existing accounting policies)
|
|
8.0
|
|
Goodwill
|
3.5
|
|
|
Other net assets acquired
|
13.0
|
|
|
Deferred taxation on PVIF
|
|
0.5
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assicurazioni Generali S.p.A. (2008)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
|
Part D
|
Summary of significant accounting policies [extract]
|
|
Note 1.2.1
|
Insurance contracts acquired in a business combination or portfolio transfer [extract]
|
In case of acquisition of non-life insurance contracts in a business combination or portfolio transfer, the group recognises an intangible asset, i.e. the value of the acquired contractual relationships (Value of Business Acquired).
The VOBA is the present value of the pre-tax future profit arising from the contracts in force at the purchase date, taking into account the probability of renewals of the one year contracts. The related deferred taxes are accounted for as liabilities in the consolidated balance sheet.
The VOBA is amortized over the effective life of the contracts acquired, by using an amortization pattern reflecting the expected future profit recognition. Assumptions used in the development of the VOBA amortization pattern are consistent with the ones applied in its initial measurement. The amortization pattern is reviewed on a yearly basis to assess its reliability and to verify the consistency with the assumptions used in the valuation of the corresponding insurance provisions.
The difference between the fair value of the insurance contracts acquired in a business combination or a portfolio transfer, and the insurance liabilities measured in accordance with the acquirer’s accounting policies for the insurance contracts that it issues is recognised as intangible asset and amortized over the period in which the acquirer recognises the corresponding profits.
The Generali Group applies this accounting treatment to the insurance liabilities assumed in the acquisition of insurance portfolios. Therefore, the assumed insurance liabilities are recognized in the balance sheet according to the acquirer’s accounting policies for the insurance contracts that it issues. The intangible assets are not in the scope of IAS 38 and IAS 36.
The future VOBA recoverable amount is tested on yearly basis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allianz SE (2008)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
2. Summary of significant accounting policies [extract]
Reinsurance contracts
The Allianz Group’s consolidated financial statements reflect the effects of ceded and assumed reinsurance contracts. Assumed reinsurance refers to the acceptance of certain insurance risks by Allianz that other companies have underwritten. Ceded reinsurance refers to the transfer of insurance risk, along with the respective premiums, to one or more reinsurers who will share in the risks. When the reinsurance contracts do not transfer significant insurance risk according to SFAS 113, deposit accounting is applied as required under SOP 98-7.
Assumed reinsurance premiums, commissions and claim settlements, as well as the reinsurance element of technical provisions are accounted for in accordance with the conditions of the reinsurance contracts and with consideration of the original contracts for which the reinsurance was concluded.
Premiums ceded for reinsurance and reinsurance recoveries on benefits and claims incurred are deducted from premiums earned and insurance and investment contract benefits. Assets and liabilities related to reinsurance are reported on a gross basis. Amounts ceded to reinsurers from reserves for insurance and investment contracts are estimated in a manner consistent with the claim liability associated with the reinsured risks. Revenues and expenses related to reinsurance agreements are recognised in a manner consistent with the underlying risk of the business reinsured.
To the extent that the assuming reinsurers are unable to meet their obligations, the Group remains liable to its policyholders for the portion reinsured. Consequently, allowances are made for receivables on reinsurance contracts which are deemed uncollectible.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Old Mutual plc (2008)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
23 Long term and general business policyholder liabilities [extract]
(v) Assumptions [extract]
Various assumption changes have been made which have resulted in a net increase in the value of insurance contract provisions of 11 million (2007: 22 million) on the Published basis. The reserve for investment guarantees which have been calculated on a market-consistent basis was increased by 27 million (including a discretionary margin), as a result of the reduction in swap yields and increases in volatilities. Lower economic assumptions also led to an increase in underlying policyholder liabilities of 8 million. The basis for terminations and alterations was strengthened leading to an increase in liabilities of 35 million. Lower expense and mortality assumptions reduced liabilities by 39 million and 13 million respectively. Methodology changes and error corrections reduced liabilities by 6 million.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AMP Limited (2008)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
19. Life insurance contracts [extract]
(h) Life insurance risk
The life insurance activities of AMP Life involve a number of non-financial risks concerned with the pricing, acceptance and management of the mortality, morbidity and longevity risks accepted from policyholders, often in conjunction with the provision of wealth management products. Financial risks involved in AMP Life are covered in Note 20.
The design of products carrying insurance risk is managed to ensure that policy wording and promotional materials are clear, unambiguous and do not leave AMP Life open to claims from causes that were not anticipated. Product prices are set through a process of financial analysis, including review of previous AMP Life and industry experience and specific product design features. The variability inherent in insurance risk is managed by having a large portfolio of individual risks, underwriting and the use of reinsurance.
Underwriting is managed through a dedicated underwriting department, with formal underwriting limits and appropriate training and development of underwriting staff. Individual policies carrying insurance risk are underwritten on their merits and are generally not issued without having been examined and underwritten individually. Individual policies which are transferred from a group scheme are generally issued without underwriting. Group risk insurance policies meeting certain criteria are underwritten on the merits of the employee group as a whole.
Claims are managed through a dedicated claims management team, with formal claims acceptance limits and appropriate training and development of staff to ensure payment of all genuine claims. Claims experience is assessed regularly and appropriate actuarial reserves are established to reflect up-to-date experience and any anticipated future events. This includes reserves for claims incurred but not yet reported.
AMP Life reinsures (cedes) to specialist reinsurance companies a proportion of its portfolio or certain types of insurance risk. This serves primarily to:
– reduce the net liability on large individual risks
– obtain greater diversification of insurance risks
– provide protection against large losses.
The specialist reinsurance companies are regulated by APRA or industry regulators in other jurisdictions and have strong credit ratings from A+ to AAA.
This extract from Beazley Group illustrates the disclosure of non-life insurance and reinsurance risk policies and processes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Legal & General Group plc (2008)
Notes to the financial statements [extract]
50. Risk management and control [extract]
Long term insurance risks [extract]
Protection business (individual and group)
The Group offers protection products which provide mortality or morbidity benefits. They may include health, disability, critical illness and accident benefits; these additional benefits are commonly provided as supplements to main life policies but can also be sold separately. The benefit amounts would usually be specified in the policy terms. Some sickness benefits cover the policyholder’s mortgage repayments and are linked to the prevailing mortgage interest rates. In addition to these benefits, some contracts may guarantee premium rates, provide guaranteed insurability benefits and offer policyholders conversion options.
Life savings business
A range of contracts are offered in a variety of different forms to meet customers’ long term savings objectives. Policyholders may choose to include a number of protection benefits within their savings contracts. Typically, any guarantees under the contract would only apply on maturity or earlier death. On certain older contracts there may be provisions guaranteeing surrender benefits. Savings contracts may or may not guarantee policyholders an investment return. Where the return is guaranteed, the Group may be exposed to interest rate risk with respect to the backing assets.
Pensions (individual and corporate)
These are long term savings contracts through which policyholders accumulate pension benefits. Some older contracts contain a basic guaranteed benefit expressed as an amount of pension payable or a guaranteed annuity option, which exposes the Group to interest rate and longevity risk. These guarantees become more costly during periods when interest rates are low or when annuitant mortality improves faster than expected. The ultimate cost will also depend on the take-up rate of any option and the final form of annuity selected by the policyholder.
Other options provided by these contracts include an open market option on maturity, early retirement and late retirement. The Group would generally have discretion over the terms on which these options are offered.
Annuities
Deferred and immediate annuity contracts are offered. Immediate annuities provide a regular income stream to the policyholder, purchased with a lump sum investment, where the income stream starts immediately after the purchase. The income stream from a deferred annuity is delayed until a specified future date. Bulk annuities are also offered, where the Group manages the assets and accepts the liabilities of a company pension scheme or a life fund.
Non-participating deferred annuities written by the Group do not contain guaranteed cash options.
Annuity products provide guaranteed income for a specified time, usually the life of the policyholder, in exchange for a lump sum capital payment. No surrender value is available under any of these products. The primary risks to the Group from annuity products are therefore mortality improvements and investment performance.
There is a block of immediate and deferred annuities within the UK non profit business with benefits linked to changes in the RPI, but with contractual maximum or minimum increases. In particular, most of these annuities have a provision that the annuity will not reduce if RPI falls. The total of such annuities in payment at 31 December 2008 was 226m (2007: 162m). Thus, 1% negative inflation, which was reversed in the following year, would result in a guarantee cost of approximately 2m (2007: 2m). Negative inflation sustained over a longer period would give rise to significantly greater guarantee costs. Some of these guarantee costs have been partially matched through the purchase of negative inflation hedges and limited price indexation bonds.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Contract containing a guaranteed annuity option
An insurer issues a contract under which the policyholder pays a fixed monthly premium for thirty years. At maturity, the policyholder can elect to take either (a) a lump sum equal to the accumulated investment value or (b) a lifetime annuity at a rate guaranteed at inception (i.e. when the contract started). This is an example of a contract containing a guaranteed annuity option.
For policyholders electing to receive the annuity, the insurer could suffer a significant loss if interest rates decline substantially or if the policyholder lives much longer than the average. The insurer is exposed to both market risk and significant insurance risk (mortality risk) and the transfer of insurance risk occurs at inception of the contract because the insurer fixed the price for mortality risk at that date. Therefore, the contract is an insurance contract from inception. Moreover, the embedded guaranteed annuity option itself meets the definition of an insurance contract, and so separation is not required. [IFRS 4.IG67].
Example 53.36: Contract containing minimum guaranteed death benefits
An insurer issues a contract under which the policyholder pays a monthly premium for 30 years. Most of the premiums are invested in a mutual fund. The rest is used to buy life cover and to cover expenses. On maturity or surrender, the insurer pays the value of the mutual fund units at that date. On death before final maturity, the insurer pays the greater of (a) the current unit value and (b) a fixed amount. This is an example of a contract containing minimum guaranteed death benefits. It is an insurance contract because the insurer is exposed to significant insurance risk as the fixed amount payable on death before maturity could be greater than the unit value.
It could be viewed as a hybrid contract comprising (a) a mutual fund investment and (b) an embedded life insurance contract that pays a death benefit equal to the fixed amount less the current unit value (but zero if the current unit value is more than the fixed amount).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aviva plc (2008)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
Note 40 Financial guarantees and options [extract]
(iii) Ireland
Guaranteed annuity options
Products with similar GAO’s to those offered in the UK have been issued in Ireland. The current net of reinsurance provision for such options is 180 million (2007: 160 million). This has been calculated on a deterministic basis, making conservative assumptions for the factors which influence the cost of the guarantee, principally annuitant mortality option take-up and long-term interest rates.
These GAOs are “in the money” at current interest rates but the exposure to interest rates under these contracts has been hedged through the use of reinsurance, using derivatives (swaptions). The swaptions effectively guarantee that an interest rate of 5% will be available at the vesting date of these benefits so there is reduced exposure to a further decrease in interest rates.
“No MVR” guarantees
Certain unitised with-profit policies containing “no MVR” guarantees, similar to those in the UK, have been sold in Ireland.
These guarantees are currently “in-the-money” by 16 million (2007: “out-of-the-money” by 53 million). This has been calculated on a deterministic basis as the excess of the current policy surrender value over the discounted value (excluding terminal bonus) of the guarantees. The value of these guarantees is sensitive to the performance of investments held in the with-profit fund. Amounts payable under these guarantees are determined by the bonuses declared on these policies. It is estimated that the guarantees would be “in-the-money” by 16 million (2007: “out-of-the-money” by46 million) if yields were to increase by 1% per annum and by 16 million (2007: “out-of-the-money” by 29 million) if equity markets were to decline by 10% from year end 2008 levels. There is no sensitivity to either interest rates or equity markets since there is no longer any exposure to equity in those funds and a matching strategy has been implemented for bonds.
Return of premium guarantee
Until 2005, Hibernian Life wrote two tranches of linked bonds with a return of premium guarantee, or a price floor guarantee, after five or six years. The provision for these over and above unit and sterling reserves, at the end of 2008 is 18 million (2007: 0.1 million).
It is estimated that the provision would increase by 4 million (2007: 1 million) if equity markets were to decline by 10% from year end 2008 levels. However, the provision increase would be broadly off-set by an increase in the value of the hedging assets that were set up on sale of these policies. We would not expect any significant impact on this provision as a result of interest rate movements. It is estimated that the provision would increase by 2 million if property values were to decline by 10% form year end 2008 levels. This would be offset by an increase in the value of the hedging assets by 1 million, the difference reflecting the fact that only the second tranche was hedged for property exposure.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE STUDY: Japanese Loans and Forwards
You are given the Reuters news item below. Read it carefully. Then answer the following questions.
1. Show how Japanese banks were able to create the dollar-denominated loans synthetically using cash flow diagrams.
2. How does this behavior of Japanese banks affect the balance sheet of the Western counterparties?
3. What are nostro accounts? Why are they needed? Why are the Western banks not willing to hold the yens in their nostro accounts?
4. What do the Western banks gain if they do that?
5. Show, using an “appropriate” formula, that the negative interest rates can be more than compensated by the extra points on the forward rates. (Use the decompositions given in the text.)
NEW YORK, (Reuters) – Japanese banks are increasingly borrowing dollar funds via the foreign exchange markets rather than in the traditional international loan markets, pushing some Japanese interest rates into negative territory, according to bank officials.
The rush to fund in the currency markets has helped create the recent anomaly in short-term interest rates. For the first time in years, yields on Japanese Treasury bills and some bank deposits are negative, in effect requiring the lender of yen to pay the borrower.
Japanese financial institutions are having difficulty getting loans denominated in U.S. dollars, experts said. They said international banks are weary of expanding credit lines to Japanese banks, whose balance sheets remain burdened by bad loans.
“The Japanese banks are still having trouble funding in dollars,” said a fixed-income strategist at Merrill Lynch & Co.
So Japan’s banks are turning to foreign exchange transactions to obtain dollars. The predominant mechanism for borrowing dollars is through a trade combining a spot and forward in dollar/yen.
Japanese banks typically borrow in yen, which they have no problem getting. With a three-month loan, for instance, the Japanese bank would then sell the yen for dollars in the spot market to, say, a British or American bank. The Japanese bank simultaneously enters into a three-month forward selling the dollars and getting back yen to pay off the yen loan at the stipulated forward rate. In effect, the Japanese bank has obtained a three-month dollar loan.
Under normal circumstances, the dealer providing the transaction to the Japanese bank should not make anything but the bid-offer spread.
But so great has been the demand from Japanese banks that dealers are earning anywhere from seven to 10 basis points from the spot-forward trade.
The problem is that the transaction saddles British and American banks with yen for three months. Normally, international banks would place the yen in deposits with Japanese banks and earn the three-month interest rate.
But most Western banks are already bumping against credit limits for their banks on exposure to troubled Japanese banks. Holding the yen on their own books in what are called NOSTRO accounts requires holding capital against them for regulatory purposes.
So Western banks have been dumping yen holdings at any cost—to the point of driving interest rates on Japanese Treasury bills into negative terms. Also, large western banks such as Barclays Plc and J.P. Morgan are offering negative interest rates on yen deposits—in effect saying no to new yen-denominated deposits.
Western bankers said they can afford to pay up to hold Japanese Treasury bills—in effect earning negative yield—because their earnings from the spot-forward trade more than compensate them for their losses on holding Japanese paper with negative yield.
Japanese six-month T-bills offer a negative yield of around 0.002 percent, dealers said. Among banks offering a negative interest rate on yen deposits was Barclays Bank Plsc, which offered a negative 0.02 percent interest rate on a three-month deposit.
The Bank of Japan, the central bank, has been encouraging government-lending institutions to make dollar loans to Japanese corporations to overcome the problem, said [a market professional]. (Reuters, November 9, 1998).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Select the best answer for each of the following items. Questions 1 and 2 are based on the following condensed balance sheet for the partnership of Caine, Davis, and Jones.
|
Cash
|
$ 90,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$220,000
|
|
Other Assets
|
820,000
|
Jones, Loan
|
90,000
|
|
Caine, Receivable
|
40,000
|
Caine, Capital
|
300,000
|
|
|
|
Davis, Capital
|
200,000
|
|
|
|
Jones, Capital
|
190,000
|
|
Total
|
-$95CM:100
|
Total
|
$950,000
|
The partners share income and loss in the ratio of 5:3:2, respectively.
- Assume that the assets and liabilities are fairly valued in the balance sheet and the partnership decides to admit Kuman as a new partner with a one-fourth capital interest. No goodwill or bonus is to be recorded. How much should Kuman invest in cash or other assets?
(a) $172,500.
(b) $175,000.
(c) $230,000.
(d) $233,333.
- Assume that instead of admitting a new partner, the partners decide to liquidate the partnership. If the other assets are sold for $600,000, how much of the available cash should be distributed to Caine?
(a) $170,000.
(b) $150,000.
(c) $190,000.
(d) $300,000.
- A, B, C, and Dare partners sharing profits and losses equally. The partnership is insolvent and is to be liquidated. The status of the partnership and each partner is as follows:
|
|
Partnership Capital Balance
|
Personal Assets
(Exclusive of Partnership Interest)
|
Personal Liabilities
(Exclusive of
Partnership Interest)
|
|
A
|
$15,000 Credit
|
$100,000
|
$90,000
|
|
B
|
10,000 Credit
|
30,000
|
60,000
|
|
C
|
20,000 Debit
|
80,000
|
5,000
|
|
D
|
30,000 Debit
|
1,000
|
28,000
|
Assuming the Uniform Partnership Act applies, the partnership creditors
(a) Must first seek recovery against C because he is personally solvent and he has a negative capital balance.
(b) Will not be paid in full regardless of how they proceed legally because the partnership assets are less than the claims of the partnership creditors.
(c) Will have to share B”s interest in the partnership on a pro-rata basis with B”s personal creditors.
(d) Have first claim to the partnership assets before any partner”s personal creditors have rights to the partnership assets.
- If a partner with a debit capital balance during liquidation is insolvent, the following results:
(a) The partner must borrow money to invest in the partnership.
(b) The partnership will give the partner cash to the extent of the partners” debit balance.
(c) The partner”s debit balance will be allocated to the other partners.
(d) None of the above.
- If a partnership is undergoing a transformation to a corporation, which of the following is a result?
(a) Assets and liabilities are adjusted to fair value.
(b) The net assets are distributed to the partners in their profit and loss ratio.
(c) The partners receive stock in the new corporation.
(d) Both (a) and (c) are correct.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Installment Liquidation
Nelson, Parker, and Rice are partners who share profits 4:3:3, respectively. Parker decides that it would be more profitable for him to operate as a sole proprietor. Nelson and Rice are in agreement that life would be more rewarding if Parker were to enter into direct competition with them. Nelson and Rice make repeated attempts to acquire Parker”s interest in the partnership. Unable to reach an agreement, the partners mutually agree that their association should be dissolved. A condensed balance sheet before realization of assets shows the following balances:
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities and Capital
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 5,000
|
Liabilities
|
$20,000
|
|
Other Assets
|
60,000
|
Nelson, Capital
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
Parker, Capital
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
Rice, Capital
|
18,000
|
|
Total
|
$65,000
|
Total
|
$65,000
|
Asset realization is accomplished in four stages as follows:
|
Stage
|
Sales Price
|
Book Value
|
|
1
|
$16,000
|
$12,000
|
|
2
|
12,000
|
10,000
|
|
3
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
|
4
|
2,000
|
18,000
|
The partners prefer that cash be distributed as soon as it is available.
Required:
Prepare a summary in columnar form of the partnership realization and liquidation. You should prepare supporting schedules of safe payments before each cash distribution.
PROBLEM 16-3Installment Liquidation
Hann, Murphey, and Ryan have operated a retail furniture store for the past 30 years. Their business has been unprofitable for several years, since several large discount furniture stores opened in their sales territory. The partners recognize that they will be unable to compete with the larger chain stores and decide that since all the partners are near retirement, they should liquidate their business before it is necessary to declare bankruptcy.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The partners share profits in the ratio of 5:3:2, respectively.
Rather than selling all the assets in a forced liquidation and incurring selling expenses, the partners agree that some of the noncash assets may be withdrawn in partial settlement of their capital interest. The partners agree that if the market value of a withdrawn asset is less than book value, the difference should be allocated to all partners in their loss ratio. If market value is greater than book value, the asset is to be adjusted to its market value before recording the withdrawal. All the partners are personally solvent and can make additional cash investment in the partnership up to $20,000 each. The following is a schedule of transactions that occurred during 2008 in the liquidation process.
|
March 15, 2008
|
During liquidation sale, noncash assets with a book value of $90,000 were sold for $80,000.
|
|
March 16, 2008
|
Sold accounts receivable with a book value of $30,000 to a factory for $26,000.
|
|
March 16, 2008
|
Paid all recorded partnership creditors.
|
|
March 18, 2008
|
Distributed all but $1,000 of available cash to partners.
|
|
March 19, 2008
|
Murphey withdrew from inventory furniture with a book value of $10,000 and a market value of $13,000 to satisfy part of his capital interest.
|
|
March 21, 2008
|
Sold remainder of inventory with a book value of $50,000 to a discount furniture store for $30,000 cash.
|
|
March 25, 2008
|
Assigned for $12,000 cash the remaining term of the lease on the warehouse. The lease was accounted for as an operating lease.
|
|
March 25, 2008
|
Distributed all available cash to partners.
|
|
April 1, 2008
|
Hann agreed to accept two vehicles with a book value of $10,000 and a market value of $8,000 in partial settlement of his capital interest.
|
|
April 5, 2008
|
All remaining assets were sold for $4,000.
|
|
April 6, 2008
|
Received additional cash from partners with debit capital balances.
|
|
April 6, 2008
|
Distributed available cash to partners.
|
Required:
Prepare a schedule of partnership realization and liquidation in accordance with the sequence of the foregoing events. Compute a safe payment to support your cash distribution to partners.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Advance Cash Distribution Plan
Part A
Baker, Strong, and Weak have called on you to assist them in winding up the affairs of their partnership. You are able to gather the following information.
- The trial balance of the partnership at June 30, 2008, is as follows.
|
|
Debit
|
Gra
|
|
Cash
|
$6,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
22,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
14,000
|
|
|
Plant and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
|
|
Baker, Advance
|
12,000
|
|
|
Weak, Advance
|
7,500
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$ 17,000
|
|
Baker, Capital
|
|
67,000
|
|
Strong, Capital
|
|
45,000
|
|
Weak, Capital
|
|
31,500
|
|
Total
|
$160,500
|
$160,500
|
- The partners share profits and losses as follows: Baker, 40%; Strong, 40%; and Weak, 20%.
- The partners are considering an offer of $100,000 for the accounts receivable, inventory, and plant and equipment as of June 30. The $100,000 would be paid to the partners in installments, the number and amounts of which are to be negotiated.
Required:
Prepare an advance cash distribution plan as of June 30, 2008. Prepare a schedule to show how the potential cash ($106,000) would be distributed as it becomes available.
Part B
Assume the facts in Part A except that the partners liquidate in stages instead of accepting the offer of $100,000. Cash is distributed to the partners at the end of each month.
A summary of the liquidation transactions follows.
July
$16,500—collected on accounts receivable; balance is uncollectible.
$10,000—received for the entire inventory.
$ 1,000—liquidation expenses paid.
$ 8,000—cash retained in the business at the end of the month.
August
$ 1,500—liquidation expenses paid.
As part payment of his capital interest, Weak accepted a piece of special equipment that he developed that had a book value of $4,000. The partners agreed that a value of $10,000 should be placed on the machine for liquidation purposes.
$ 2,500—cash retained in the business at the end of the month.
September
$75,000—received on sale of remaining plant and equipment.
$ 1,000—liquidation expenses paid.
No cash retained in the business.
Required:
Prepare a schedule of cash payments as of September 30, 2008, showing how the cash was actually distributed. Use the advance cash distribution plan developed in Part A where appropriate.
(AICPA adapted)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Significant insurance risk
Entity A issues a unit-linked contract that pays benefits linked to the fair value of a pool of assets. The benefit is 100% of the unit value on surrender or maturity and 101% of the unit value on death.
In this situation the implementation guidance states that if the insurance component (the additional death benefit of 1%) is not unbundled then the whole contract is an investment contract. The insurance component in this arrangement is insignificant in relation to the whole contract and so would not meet the definition of a insurance contract in IFRS 4. [IFRS 4.IG2 E1.3].
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Liverpool Victoria Friendly Society (2008)
Notes to the accounts [extract]
|
Note 1
|
Accounting policies [extract]
|
|
b.
|
Product classification [extract]
|
Insurance contracts are those contracts that transfer significant insurance risk. Such contracts may also transfer financial risk. As a general guideline, the Group defines as significant insurance risk the possibility of having to pay benefits on the occurrence of an insured event that are at least 10% more than the benefits payable if the insured event did not occur.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deferred annuity with policyholder election
Entity A issues a deferred annuity contract whereby the policyholder will receive, or can elect to receive, a life-contingent annuity at rates prevailing when the annuity begins.
This is not an insurance contract at inception if the insurer can reprice the mortality risk without constraints. However, it will become an insurance contract when the annuity rate is fixed (unless the contingent amount is insignificant in all scenarios that have commercial substance). [IFRS 4.IG2 E1.7].
In practice, in the accumulation phase of an annuity, there are other guaranteed benefits such as premium refunds that might still make this an insurance contract prior to the date when the annuity rate is fixed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Contract with insurance and financial risk
Entity A issues a catastrophe bond to Entity B under which principal, interest payments or both are reduced significantly if a specified triggering event occurs and the triggering event includes a condition that B has suffered a loss.
The contract is an insurance contract because the triggering event includes a condition that B has suffered a loss, and contains an insurance component (with the issuer as policyholder and the holder as the insurer) and a deposit component. A discussion of the separation of these two components is set out at Section 5 below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reinsurance contract with ‘original loss warranty’ clause
Entity A agrees to provide reinsurance cover to airline insurer B for $1m against losses suffered. The claims are subject to an original loss warranty of $50m meaning that only losses suffered by B up to $1m from events exceeding a cost of $50m in total can be recovered under the contract. This is an insurance contract as B can only recover its own losses arising from those events.
If the contract allowed B to claim up to $1m every time there was an event with a cost exceeding $50m regardless of whether B had suffered a loss from that event then this would not be an insurance contract because there would be no insurable interest in this arrangement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Insurance of non-insurance risks
Entity A agrees to compensate Entity B for losses on a series of contracts issued by B that do not transfer significant insurance risk. These could be investment contracts or, for example, a contract to provide services.
The contract is an insurance contract if it transfers significant insurance risk from B to A, even if some or all of the underlying individual contracts do not transfer significant insurance risk to B. The contract is a reinsurance contract if any of the contracts issued by B are insurance contracts. Otherwise, the contract is a direct insurance contract. [IFRS 4.IG2 E1.29].
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Guarantee fund established by contract
A guarantee fund is established by contract. The contract requires all participants to pay contributions to the fund so that it can meet obligations incurred by participants (and, perhaps, others). Participants would typically be from a single industry, e.g. insurance, banking or travel.
The contract that establishes the guarantee fund is an insurance contract. [IFRS 4.IG2 E1.13].
This example contrasts with Example 53.15 below where a guarantee fund has been established by law and not by contract.
Example 53.10: Insurance contract issued to employees related to a defined contribution pension plan
An insurance contract is issued by an insurer to its employees as a result of a defined contribution pension plan. The contractual benefits for employee service in the current and prior periods are not contingent on future service. The insurer also issues similar contracts on the same terms to third parties.
This is an insurance contract. However, if the insurer pays part or all of its employee’s premiums, the payment by an insurer is an employee benefit within the scope of IAS 19 and is not accounted for under IFRS 4 because the insurer is the employer and would be paying its own insurance premiums. [IFRS 4.IG2 E1.22].
Defined benefit pension liabilities are outside the scope of IFRS 4 as discussed at 2.2.3.B above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Guarantee fund established by law
Guarantee funds established by law exist in many jurisdictions. Typically they require insurers to contribute funds into a pool in order to pay policyholder claims in the event of insurer insolvencies. They may be funded by periodic (usually annual) levies or by levies only when an insolvency arises. The basis of the funding requirement varies although typically most are based on an insurer’s premium income.
The commitment of participants to contribute to the fund is not established by contract so there is no insurance contract. Obligations to guarantee funds are within the scope of IAS 37.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Insurance policy issued to defined benefit pension plan
Entity A issues an insurance contract to either (a) a defined benefit pension plan, covering the employees of A, and/or (b) the employees of another entity consolidated within the same group financial statements as A.
This contract will generally be eliminated on consolidation from the group financial statements which will include:
(a) the full amount of the pension obligation under IAS 19 with no deduction for the plan’s right under the contract;
(b) no liability to policyholders under the contract; and
(c) the assets backing the contract.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Market value adjustment without death or maturity benefits
A contract permits the issuer to deduct an MVA from surrender payments to reflect current market prices for the underlying assets. The contract does not permit a MVA for death and maturity benefits. The amount payable on death or maturity is the amount originally invested plus interest.
The policyholder obtains an additional benefit because no MVA is applied on death or maturity. However, that benefit does not transfer insurance risk from the policyholder because it is certain that the policyholder will live or die and the amount payable on death or maturity is adjusted for the time value of money. Therefore, the contract is an investment contract because there is no significant insurance risk. This contract combines the two features discussed in Examples 53.11 and 53.12 at 3.9.1 above. When considered separately, these two features transfer insurance risk. However, when combined, they do not transfer insurance risk. Therefore, it is not appropriate to separate this contract into two insurance components.
If the amount payable on death were not adjusted in full for the time value of money, or were adjusted in some other way, the contract might transfer insurance risk.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Policyholder option to surrender contract for cash surrender value
An insurance contract gives the policyholder the option to surrender the contract for a cash surrender value specified in a schedule i.e. not indexed and does not accumulate interest.
Fair value measurement is not required (but not prohibited) because the surrender option is for a fixed amount even though that fixed amount may differ from the carrying amount of the insurance liability. The surrender value may be viewed as a deposit component, but IFRS 4 does not require an insurer to unbundle a contract if it recognises all its obligations arising under the deposit component (see Section 5 below).
If this was an investment contract measured at amortised cost then fair value measurement of the option would be required if the surrender value was not approximately equal to the amortised cost at each exercise date. [IFRS 4.IG4 E2.12].
The relief from applying IAS 39 to certain surrender options discussed above does not apply to put options or cash surrender options embedded in an insurance contract if the surrender value varies in response to the change in a financial variable (such as an equity or commodity price or index) or a non-financial variable that is not specific to a party to the contract. Furthermore, the requirement to separate and fair value the embedded derivative also applies if the holder’s ability to exercise the put option or cash surrender option is triggered by a change in such a variable, for example a put option that can be exercised if a stock market index reaches a specified level. [IFRS 4.8]. This is illustrated by the following example.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Persistency bonus
An insurance contract gives policyholders a persistency bonus paid at maturity in cash (or as a period-certain maturity).
The embedded derivative (the option to receive the persistency bonus) is not an insurance contract because, as discussed at 3.7 above, insurance risk does not include lapse or persistency risk. Therefore, measurement of the option at its fair value is required. [IFRS 4.IG4 E2.17].
If the persistency bonus was paid at maturity as an enhanced life-contingent annuity then the embedded derivative would be an insurance contract and separate accounting would not be required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Unitised with-profits policy
Premiums paid by the policyholder are used to purchase units in a ‘with-profits’ fund at the current unit price. The insurer guarantees that each unit added to the fund will have a minimum value which is the bid price of the unit. This is the guaranteed amount. In addition, the insurer may add two types of bonus to the with-profits units. These are a regular bonus, which may be added daily as a permanent increase to the guaranteed amount, and a final bonus that may be added on top of those guaranteed amounts when the with-profits units are cashed in. Levels of regular and final bonuses are adjusted twice per year. Both regular and final bonuses are discretionary amounts and are generally set based on expected future returns generated by the funds.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DPF policy with minimum interest rates
An insurance contract provides that the insurer must annually credit each policyholder’s ‘account’ with a minimum interest rate (3%). This is the guaranteed amount. The insurer then has discretion with regard to whether and what amount of the remaining undistributed realised investment returns from the assets backing the participating policies are distributed to policyholders in addition to the minimum. The contract states that the insurer’s shareholders are only entitled to share up to 10% in the underlying investment results associated with the participating policies. As that entitlement is up to 10%, the insurer can decide to credit the policyholders with more than the minimum sharing rate of 90%. Once any additional interest above the minimum interest rate of 3% is credited to the policyholder it becomes a guaranteed liability.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DPF recognition
A minimum of 90% of an investment surplus on a participating contract may be distributed to policyholders although any distribution is entirely at the discretion of the insurer. However, IFRS 4 is silent as to whether the 10% of the surplus which does not belong to policyholders is part of the DPF if it has not been distributed and consequentially there is diversity in practice among insurers about whether the undistributed DPF liability includes the amount attributable to shareholders. Some insurers recognise the 90% as a liability and the 10% as a component of equity whereas others recognise the entire 100% as a liability until it is distributed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AMP Limited (2008)
Notes to the financial statements [extract]
Note 1 Summary of significant accounting policies [extract]
Allocation of operating profit and unvested policyholder benefits
The operating profit arising from discretionary participating contracts is allocated between shareholders and participating policyholders by applying the MoS principles in accordance with the Life Insurance Act 1995 (Life Act).
Once profit is allocated to participating policyholders it can only be distributed to these policyholders. Any distribution of this profit to shareholders is only allowed for overseas business with specific approval of the regulators.
Profit allocated to participating policyholders is recognised in the Income statement as an increase in policy liabilities. Both the element of this profit that has not yet been allocated to specific policyholders (i.e. unvested) and that which has been allocated to specific policyholders by way of bonus distributions (i.e. vested) are included within life insurance contract liabilities.
Bonus distributions to participating policyholders are merely a change in the nature of the liability from unvested to vested and, as such, do not alter the amount of profit attributable to shareholders.
The principles of allocation of the profit arising from discretionary participating business determined under the Life Act and MoS are as follows:
(i) Investment income (net of tax and investment expenses) on retained earnings in respect of discretionary participating business is allocated between policyholders and shareholders in proportion to the balances of policyholders’ and shareholders retained earnings, being 80:20.
(ii) Other MoS profits arising from discretionary participating business (excluding the additional tax attributable to shareholders in respect of Australian superannuation business) are allocated 80% to policyholders and 20% to shareholders, with the following exceptions:
– The profit arising from New Zealand corporate superannuation business is apportioned such that shareholders are allocated 15% of the profit allocated to policyholders.
– The profit arising in respect of Preservation Superannuation Account business is allocated 92.5% to policyholders and 7.5% to shareholders.
(iii) Additional tax on taxable income to shareholders in respect of Australian superannuation business is allocated to shareholders only.
(iv) All profits arising from non-participating business, including net investment returns on shareholder capital and retained earnings in life statutory funds (excluding retained earnings dealt with in (i) above) are allocated to shareholders.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AXA Group (2008)
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements of AXA Group [extract]
1.18. Revenue Recognition [extract]
1.18.1. Gross written premiums
Gross written premiums correspond to the amount of premiums written by insurance and reinsurance companies on business incepted in the year with respect to both insurance contracts and investment contracts with discretionary participating features, net of cancellations and gross of reinsurance ceded. For reinsurance, premiums are recorded on the basis of declarations made by the ceding company, and may include estimates of gross written premiums.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prudential plc (2008)
Note on the Group financial statements [extract]
A3 Critical accounting policies, estimates and judgements[extract]
Insurance contract accounting
With the exception of certain contracts described in note D1, the Group’s life assurance contracts are classified as insurance contracts and investment contracts with discretionary participating features. As permitted by IFRS 4, assets and liabilities of these contracts (see below) are accounted for under previously applied GAAP. Accordingly, except as described below, the modified statutory basis (MSB) of reporting as set out in the revised Statement of Recommended Practice (SORP) issued by the Association of British Insurers (ABI) in November 2003 has been applied.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Norwich Union Insurance Limited (2007)
Accounting policies [extract]
(Z) Equalisation provision
Equalisation provisions are established in accordance with UK company law. These provisions are in addition to the provisions required to meet the anticipated ultimate cost of settlement of outstanding claims at the balance sheet date. Under IFRS, the provisions are not reported in the balance sheet as no liability exists but are presented within retained earnings, net of attributable tax relief.
Notes to the financial statements [extract]
24. Retained earnings [extract]
In accordance with accounting policy Z, retained earnings include 50 million (2006 48 million) relating to equalisation provisions, net of attributable tax relief, which are not distributable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allianz SE (2008)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
Note 2 Summary of significant accounting policies [extract]
Reserves for insurance and investment contracts and financial liabilities for unit-linked contracts [extract]
Liability adequacy tests are performed for each insurance portfolio on the basis of estimates of future claims, costs, premiums earned and proportionate investment income. For short duration contracts, a premium deficiency is recognised if the sum of expected claim costs and claim adjustment expenses, expected dividends to policyholders, unamortized acquisition costs, and maintenance expenses exceeds related unearned premiums while considering anticipated investment income. For long duration contracts, if actual experience regarding investment yields, mortality, morbidity, terminations or expense indicate that existing contract liabilities, along with the present value of future gross premiums, will not be sufficient to cover the present value of future benefits and to recover deferred policy acquisition costs, then a premium deficiency is recognised.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Asset measured at amortised cost
An entity has a financial asset, accounted for at amortised cost, carried at 98. It transfers the asset to a third party in return for consideration of 95. The asset is subject to a call option whereby the entity can compel the transferee to sell the asset back to the entity for 102. The amortised cost of the asset on the option exercise date will be 100. The option is considered to be neither deeply in the money nor deeply out of the money. IAS 39 (IFRS 9) therefore requires the entity to continue to recognise the asset to the extent of its continuing involvement (Figure 50.1, Box 9 – see also 4.2.3 above).
The initial carrying amount of the associated liability is 95. This is then accreted to 100 (i.e. the amortised cost of the asset on exercise date – not the 102 exercise price) through profit or loss using the effective interest method. Because the transferred asset is measured at amortised cost, the associated liability must also be accounted for at amortised cost, and not at fair value through profit or loss (see 5.3.4 above). This will give rise to the accounting entries:
If the option is exercised, any difference between the carrying amount of the associated liability and the exercise price is recognised in profit or loss. This last requirement has the possibly counter-intuitive effect that the question of whether the entity records a profit or loss on exercise of the option is essentially a function of the difference between the liability (representing the amortised cost of the transferred asset) and the cash paid, not of whether it has in fact (i.e. in economic terms) made a gain or loss.
Thus, if the entity were to exercise its option at 102 it would apparently record the accounting entry
|
|
|
|
Liability
|
100
|
|
|
Loss
|
2
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
102
|
However, the entity would not have exercised the option unless the asset had been worth at least 102 (i.e. 2 more than its carrying amount), suggesting that the more appropriate treatment would be to add the 2 to the cost of the asset.
Likewise, if instead of the entity having a call option, the transferee had a put option at 98 which it exercised, the entity would apparently record the accounting entry:
|
|
|
|
Liability
|
100
|
|
|
Profit
|
|
2
|
|
Cash
|
|
98
|
However, the transferee would not have exercised its option unless the asset had been worth less than 98 (i.e. 2 less than its carrying amount). In this case, however, the IASB’s thinking may have been that the exercise of the transferee’s put option suggests an impairment of the asset which is required to be recognised in the financial statements (see Chapter 49 at 6). This would not necessarily be the case (e.g. where a fixed-interest asset has a fair value below cost because of movements in interest rates but is not intrinsically impaired).
If the option were to lapse unexercised, the entity would simply derecognise the transferred asset and the associated liability, i.e.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Asset measured at fair value subject to transferor’s call option
An entity has a financial asset, accounted for at fair value through profit or loss, carried at €80. It transfers the asset to a third party, subject to a call option whereby the entity can compel the transferee to sell the asset back to the entity for €95. At the date of transfer, the call option has a time value of €5.
The option is considered to be neither deeply in the money nor deeply out of the money. IAS 39 (IFRS 9) therefore requires the entity to continue to recognise the asset to the extent of its continuing involvement (Figure 50.1, Box 9 – see also 4.2.3 above), and to continue recording it at fair value. At the date of transfer, the call option is out of the money. IAS 39 (IFRS 9) therefore requires the liability to be measured at the fair value of the transferred asset less the time value of the option, i.e. €80 – €5 = €75. This has the result that the net of the carrying value of the asset (€80) and the carrying value of the liability (€75) equals the time value of the option (€5), i.e.
|
€
|
€
|
|
Date of transfer
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
75
|
|
|
Liability
|
|
75
|
A Transferred asset increases in value
Suppose that one year later the fair value of the asset is €100 and the time value of the option is now €3. The option is now in the money, so that the liability is measured at the option exercise price less the time value of the option, i.e. €95 – €3 = €92. This has the result that the net of the carrying value of the asset (€100) and the carrying value of the liability (€92) equals the fair value of the option (€8, representing €3 time value and €5 intrinsic value). The liability could have been more straightforwardly calculated as the fair value of the asset (€100) less the fair value of the option (€8) = €92. This gives rise to the following accounting entries:
|
€
|
€
|
|
During year 1
|
|
|
|
Asset (€100 – €80)
|
20
|
|
|
Liability (€92 – €75)
|
|
17
|
|
Gain (profit or loss)
|
|
3
|
The €3 gain recorded in profit or loss effectively represents the increase in the fair value of the option from €5 to €8 over the period. If the entity were able to exercise the option at this point, and did so, it would record the entry:
|
m
|
m
|
|
Liability
|
92
|
|
|
Loss (profit or loss)
|
3
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
95
|
The particular transaction results in no overall gain or loss being reflected in profit or loss (i.e. €3 gain during the year less €3 loss on exercise of option). This represents the net of the €20 gain in the fair value of the asset (€100 at the end of period less €80 at the start) and the net cash outflow of €20 (€75 in on initial transfer, €95 out on exercise of option).
B Asset decreases in value
Suppose instead that during the first year the fair value of the asset fell to €65 and the time value of the option at the end of the year was only €1. The liability would be measured at the fair value of the transferred asset less the time value of the option, i.e. €65 – €1 = €64. This would generate the accounting entries:
|
€
|
€
|
|
During year 1
|
|
|
|
Liability (€64 – €75)
|
11
|
|
|
Loss (profit or loss)
|
4
|
|
|
Asset (€65 – €80)
|
|
15
|
Again the overall loss shown in profit or loss represents the movement in the fair value of the option over the period from €5 to €1. Suppose that one year later there was no change in the fair value of the asset, and the option expired unexercised. The entity would then record the accounting entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
At end of year 2
|
|
|
|
Liability
|
64
|
|
|
Loss (profit or loss)
|
1
|
|
|
Asset (balance sheet)
|
|
65
|
This results in an overall loss for the transaction as a whole of €5 (€4 in year 1 and €1 in year 2), which represents the difference between the carrying value of the asset at the date of original transfer (€80) and the proceeds received (€75).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Asset measured at fair value subject to transferee’s put option
An entity has a financial asset, accounted for at fair value. On 1 January 2013 it transfers the asset, then carried at €98, to a third party, subject to a put option whereby the transferee can compel the entity to reacquire the asset for €100. The option is considered to be neither deeply in the money nor deeply out of the money. IAS 39 (IFRS 9) therefore requires the entity to continue to recognise the asset to the extent of its continuing involvement (Figure 50.1, Box 9 – see also 4.2.3 above), and to continue recording it at the lower of (a) fair value and (b) €100 (the exercise price of the option). Assuming that the transferee pays €106 for the asset, representing €98 fair value of the asset plus €8 time value of the option, the entity would record the accounting entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
1 January 2013
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
106
|
|
|
Liability
|
|
106
|
A Transferred asset increases in value
Suppose that at 31 December 2013, the option has a time value of €5 and the fair value of the asset is €120. IAS 39 (IFRS 9) requires the carrying value of the asset to be restricted to €100 (the exercise price of the option). The liability is measured at the exercise price plus the time value of the option,19 i.e. €100 + €5 = €105. This has the result that the net of the carrying value of the asset (€100) and the carrying value of the liability (€105) equals the fair value of the option to the transferor (–€5).
This gives the accounting entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
31 December 2013
|
|
|
|
Asset (€100 – €98)
|
2
|
|
|
Liability (€105 – €106)
|
1
|
|
|
Gain (profit or loss)
|
|
3
|
The gain of €3 effectively represents the decrease in the time value of the option (a gain from the transferor’s perspective) from €8 to €5.
If the option were then to lapse unexercised, with no further change in the fair value of the asset, the entity would record the accounting entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
On lapse of option
|
|
|
|
Liability
|
105
|
|
|
Asset
|
|
100
|
|
Gain (profit or loss)
|
|
5
|
The total gain on the transaction of €8 (€3 in Year 1 and €5 on lapse) represents the option premium of €8 (i.e. the difference between the total consideration of €106 and the carrying value of the asset of €98) received at the outset.
B Transferred asset decreases in value
Suppose instead that at 31 December 2013, the option has a time value of €5 but the fair value of the asset is €90. IAS 39 (IFRS 9) requires the carrying value of the asset to be measured at its fair value of €90. The liability is measured at the exercise price plus the time value of the option (i.e. to the transferee), i.e. €100 + €5 = €105.
This gives the accounting entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
31 December 2013
|
|
|
|
Liability (€105 – €106)
|
1
|
|
|
Loss (profit or loss)
|
7
|
|
|
Asset (€90 – €98)
|
|
8
|
This has the result that the net of the carrying value of the asset (€90) and the liability (€105), i.e. €(–15) represents the fair value of the option to the transferor (i.e. intrinsic value €(–10) [€100 exercise price versus €90 value of asset] + time value €(–5)). The €7 loss represents the increase in the fair value of the option (a loss to the transferor) from €8 at the outset to €15 at 31 December 2013.
If the transferee were able to, and did, exercise its option at that point, the entity would record the accounting entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
On exercise of option
|
|
|
|
Liability
|
105
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
100
|
|
Gain (profit or loss)
|
|
5
|
The overall €2 loss (i.e. €5 gain above and €7 loss during Year 1) represents the net cash of €8 received from the transferee (€108 in at inception less €100 out on exercise) less the €10 fall in fair value of the transferred asset (€100 at inception less €90 at exercise).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Asset measured at fair value subject to collar put and call options
An entity has a financial asset, accounted for at fair value, carried at €100. On 1 January 2013 it transfers the asset to a third party, subject to:
- a call option whereby the entity can compel the transferee to sell the asset back to the entity for €120; and
- a put option whereby the transferee can compel the entity to reacquire the asset for €80.
The options are considered to be neither deeply in the money nor deeply out of the money. IAS 39 (IFRS 9) therefore requires the entity to continue to recognise the asset to the extent of its continuing involvement (Figure 50.1, Box 9 – see also 4.2.3 above), and to continue recording it at fair value.
At the date of transfer, the time value of the put and call are €1 and €5 respectively. At the date of transfer, the call option is out of the money, so that the associated liability is calculated as the sum of the fair value of the asset and the fair value of the put option less the time value of the call option, i.e. (€100+€1) – €5 = €96. The net of this and the fair value of the asset (€100) is €4 which is the net fair value of the two options (call €5 less put €1). Assuming that the transaction is undertaken at arm’s length, the transferee would pay €96 for the asset and the entity would record the accounting entry:
A Transferred asset increases in value
Suppose that, at 31 December 2013, the fair value of the asset is €140, and the time value of the put and call are €0.5 and €2 respectively. The call option is now in the money, so that IAS 39 (IFRS 9) requires the entity to recognise a liability equal to the sum of the call exercise price and fair value of the put option less the time value of the call option, i.e. (€120 + €0.5) – €2 = €118.5. The net of this and the carrying value of the asset (€140) is €21.5 which is the net fair value of the two options (call €22 [time value €2 plus intrinsic value €20] less put €0.5 = €21.5). This gives the accounting entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
31 December 2013
|
|
|
|
Asset (€140 – €100)
|
40.0
|
|
|
Gain (profit or loss)
|
|
17.5
|
|
Liability (€118.5 – €96)
|
|
22.5
|
The gain represents the increase in fair value of the call option of €17 (€5 at outset and €22 at 31 December 2013) plus the €0.5 decrease (a gain from the transferor’s perspective) in the fair value of the put option (€1 at outset and €0.5 at 31 December 2013).
If the entity were able to, and did, exercise its call option, it would record the entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
Exercise of call option
|
|
|
|
Liability
|
118.5
|
|
|
Loss (profit or loss)
|
1.5
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
120.0
|
The overall gain of €16 on the transaction (€1.5 loss above and €17.5 profit recorded in 2013) represents the increase in fair value of the asset of €40 (€100 at outset, €140 at 31 December 2013) less the net €24 paid to the transferee (€120 paid on exercise of call less €96 received on initial transfer).
B Transferred asset decreases in value
Suppose instead that, at 31 December 2013, the fair value of the asset is €78, and the time value of the put and call are €0.5 and €2 respectively. The call option is now out of the money, so that IAS 39 (IFRS 9) requires the entity to recognise a liability equal to the sum of the fair value of the asset and the fair value of the put option (i.e. €2.5 – time value €0.5 plus intrinsic value €2 [€80 exercise price versus €78 fair value of asset]) less the time value of the call option, i.e. (€78 + €2.5) – €2 = €78.5.
The net of this and the carrying value of the asset (€78) is €(–0.5) which is the net fair value of the two options (call €2 less put €2.5 = €(–0.5)). This gives the accounting entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
31 December 2013
|
|
|
|
Liability (€78.5 – €96)
|
17.5
|
|
|
Loss (profit or loss)
|
4.5
|
|
|
Asset (€78 – €100)
|
|
22.0
|
The loss represents the decrease in the fair value of the call option of €3 (€5 at outset and €2 at 31 December 2013) plus the €1.5 increase (a decrease from the transferor’s perspective) in the fair value of the put option (€1 at outset and €2.5 at 31 December 2013).
If the transferee were able to, and did, exercise its put option, the entity would record the entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
Exercise of put option
|
|
|
|
Liability
|
78.5
|
|
|
Loss (profit or loss)
|
1.5
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
80.0
|
The overall loss of €6 on the transaction (€1.5 loss above and €4.5 loss recorded in 2013) represents the decrease in fair value of the asset of €22 (€100 at outset, €78 at 31 December 2013) offset by the net €16 received from the transferee (€96 received on initial transfer less €80 paid on exercise of put).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Continuing involvement in part only of a financial asset
An entity has a portfolio of prepayable loans whose coupon and effective interest rate is 10% and whose principal amount and amortised cost is €10 million. It enters into a transaction in which, in return for a payment of €9.115 million, the transferee obtains the right to €9 million of any collections of principal plus 9.5% interest.
The entity retains rights to €1 million of any collections of principal plus interest at 10%, plus the remaining 0.5% (‘excess spread’) on the remaining €9 million of principal. Collections from prepayments are allocated between the entity and the transferee proportionately in the ratio of 1:9, but any defaults are deducted from the entity’s interest of €1 million until that interest is exhausted.
The fair value of the loans at the date of the transaction is €10.1 million and the estimated fair value of the excess spread of 0.5 per cent is €40,000.
The entity determines that it has transferred some significant risks and rewards of ownership (for example, significant prepayment risk) but has also retained some significant risks and rewards of ownership because of its subordinated retained interest (Figure 50.1, Box 7, No) and has retained control (Figure 50.1, Box 8, Yes). It therefore applies the continuing involvement approach (Figure 50.1, Box 9).
The entity analyses the transaction as:
- a retention of a fully proportionate retained interest of €1 million, plus
- the subordination of that retained interest to provide credit enhancement to the transferee for credit losses.
The entity calculates that €9.09 million (90% of €10.1 million) of the consideration received of €9.115 million represents the consideration for a fully proportionate 90% share. The remainder of the consideration (€25,000) received represents consideration received by the entity for subordinating its retained interest to provide credit enhancement to the transferee for credit losses. In addition, the excess spread of 0.5% represents consideration received for the credit enhancement. Accordingly, the total consideration received for the credit enhancement is €65,000 (€25,000 received from transferee plus €40,000 fair value of excess spread).
The entity first calculates the gain or loss on the sale of the 90% share of cash flows. Assuming that separate fair values of the 10% part transferred and the 90% part retained are not available at the date of the transfer, the entity allocates the carrying amount of the asset pro-rata to the fair values of those parts (see 5.1.1 and 5.1.2 and 5.3.5 above). The total fair value of the portfolio is considered to be €10.1 million (see above), and the fair value of the consideration for the part disposed of €9.09 million. The carrying amount of the whole portfolio is €10 million. This implies a carrying amount for the part disposed of €10m × 9.09/10.1 = €9 million, and for the part retained €1 million. The gain on the sale of the 90% is therefore €90,000 (€9.09 million – €9 million).
In addition, IAS 39 (IFRS 9) requires the entity to recognise the continuing involvement that results from the subordination of its retained interest for credit losses. Accordingly, it recognises an asset of €1 million (the maximum amount of the cash flows it would forfeit under the subordination), and an associated liability of €1.065 million (the maximum amount of the cash flows it would forfeit under the subordination, i.e. €1 million, plus the consideration for the subordination of €65,000). It also recognises an asset for the fair value of the excess spread which forms part of the consideration for the subordination.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transfer of debt obligations with and without legal release
Scenario 1
Entity A issues bonds that have a carrying amount and fair value of $1,000,000. A pays $1,000,000 to Entity B for B to assume responsibility for paying interest and principal on the bonds to the bondholders. The bondholders are informed that B has assumed responsibility for the debt. However, A is not legally released from the obligation to pay interest and principal by the bondholders. Accordingly, if B does not make payments when due, the bondholders may seek payment from A.
Scenario 2
Entity A issues bonds that have a carrying amount and fair value of $1,000,000. A pays $1,000,000 to Entity B for B to assume responsibility for paying interest and principal on the bonds to the bondholders. The bondholders are informed that B has assumed responsibility for the debt and legally release A from any further obligation under the debt. However, A enters into a guarantee arrangement whereby, if B does not make payments when due, the bondholders may seek payment from A.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Extinguishment of debt in exchange for transfer of assets not meeting derecognition criteria
An entity has a bank loan of €1 million. The bank agrees to accept in full payment of the loan the transfer to it by the entity of a portfolio of corporate bonds with a market value of €1 million. The entity and the bank then enter into a put and call option over the bonds, the effect of which will be that the entity will repurchase the bonds in three years’ time at a price that gives the bank a lender’s return on €1 million. As discussed further at 3 above, this would have the effect that the entity is unable to derecognise the bonds.
Under the provisions of IAS 39 (IFRS 9), the entity would be able to derecognise the original bank loan, as it has been legally released from it. The provisions under discussion here have the overall result that a loan effectively continues to be recognised. Strictly, however, the analysis is that the original loan has been derecognised and a new one recognised. In effect the accounting is representing that the entity has repaid the original loan and replaced it with a new one secured on a bond portfolio.
However, as the new loan is required to be initially recognised at fair value whereas the old loan may well have been recognised at amortised cost (see Chapter 49 at 5), there may well be a gain or loss to record as the result of the different measurement bases being used – see 6.2 and 6.3 below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Partial derecognition of debt
On 1 January 2010 an entity issues 500 million €1 10-year bonds which are traded in the capital markets. Issue costs of €15 million were incurred and the carrying value of the bonds at 31 December 2013 is €490 million. On 31 December 2013 the entity makes a market purchase of 120 million bonds at their then current market price of €0.97. The entity records the following accounting entry:
|
€m
|
€m
|
|
Bonds (120/500 × €490m)
|
117.6
|
|
|
Cash (120m × €0.97)
|
|
116.4
|
|
Gain on repurchase of debt
|
|
1.2
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Disclosure of deferred day 1 profits
On 1 January 2012 Company R purchases financial assets that are not traded in an active market for €15 million which represents their fair value at initial recognition. After initial recognition, R applies a valuation technique to measure the fair value of the financial assets. This valuation technique uses inputs other than data from observable markets. At initial recognition, the same valuation technique would have resulted in an amount of €14 million, which differs from fair value by €1 million. R has only one class of such financial assets with existing differences of €5 million at 1 January 2012. The disclosure in R’s 2013 financial statements would include the following: [IFRS 7.IG14]
Accounting policies
R uses the following valuation technique to measure the fair value of financial instruments that are not traded in an active market: [insert description of technique, not included in this example]. Differences may arise between the fair value at initial recognition (which, in accordance with IFRS 13 and IAS 39 (IFRS 9), is normally the transaction price) and the amount determined at initial recognition using the valuation technique. Any such differences are [description of R’s accounting policy].
In the notes to the financial statements
As discussed in note X, [insert name of valuation technique] is used to measure the fair value of the following financial instruments that are not traded in an active market. However, in accordance with IFRS 13 and IAS 39 (IFRS 9), the fair value of an instrument at inception is normally the transaction price. If the transaction price differs from the amount determined at inception using the valuation technique, that difference is [description of R’s accounting policy].
The differences yet to be recognised in profit or loss are as follows:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Origin Energy Limited (2011)
Notes to the Financial Statements [extract]
27.Financial Instruments [extract]
(c)Financial Risk Management
Financial risk factors
The consolidated entity’s activities expose it to a variety of financial risks: market risk (including foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk and commodity price risk), credit risk and liquidity risk. The consolidated entity’s overall risk management programme focuses on the unpredictability of financial and commodity markets and seeks to minimise potential adverse effects on the consolidated entity’s financial performance. The consolidated entity uses a range of derivative financial instruments to hedge these risk exposures.
Risk management is carried out under policies approved by the Board of Directors. Financial risks are identified, evaluated and hedged in close co-operation with the consolidated entity’s operating units. The consolidated entity has written policies covering specific areas, such as foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, electricity price risk, oil price risk, credit risk, use of derivative financial instruments and non-derivative financial instruments, and the investment of excess liquidity.
(i) Market risk
Foreign exchange risk
The consolidated entity operates internationally and is exposed to foreign exchange risk arising from various currency exposures, primarily with respect to the New Zealand dollar, US dollar and Euro. Foreign exchange risk arises from future commercial transactions (including interest payments on long-term borrowings, the sale of oil, the sale and purchase of LPG and the purchase of capital equipment), recognised assets and liabilities (including foreign receivables and borrowings) and net investments in foreign operations.
To manage the foreign exchange risk arising from future commercial transactions, the consolidated entity uses forward foreign exchange contracts. To manage the foreign exchange risk arising from the future principal and interest payments required on foreign currency denominated long-term borrowings, the consolidated entity uses cross currency interest rate swaps (both fixed to fixed and fixed to floating) which convert the foreign currency denominated future principal and interest payments into the functional currency for the relevant entity for the full term of the underlying borrowings. In certain circumstances borrowings are left in the foreign currencies, or hedged from one foreign currency to another to match payments of interest and principal against expected future business cash flows in that foreign currency.
Each subsidiary designates internal derivatives as fair value hedges or cash flow hedges, as appropriate with the relevant underlying transaction. External derivative contracts are designated at the consolidated entity level as hedges of foreign exchange risk on specific assets, liabilities or future transactions on a gross basis.
The consolidated entity has certain investments in foreign operations whose net assets are exposed to foreign currency translation risk. Currency exposure arising from the net assets of the consolidated entity’s foreign operations is managed primarily through borrowings denominated in the relevant foreign currencies.
Price risk
The consolidated entity is exposed to commodity price risk from a number of commodities, including electricity, oil, gas and related commodities associated with the purchase and/or sale of these commodities. To manage its commodity price risks in respect to electricity and oil, the consolidated entity utilises a range of derivative instruments including fixed priced swaps, options and futures. The consolidated entity’s equity investments subject to price risk are all publicly traded.
The consolidated entity’s risk management policy for commodity price risk is to hedge forecast future transactions for up to 18 years into the future. The consolidated entity has a risk management policy framework that manages the exposure arising from its commodity-based activities. The policy permits the active hedging of price and volume exposure arising from the retailing, generation and portfolio management activities, within prescribed risk capacity limits. The policy prescribes the maximum risk exposures permissible over prescribed periods for each commodity within the portfolio, under defined worse case scenarios. The full portfolio is subject to ongoing testing against these limits at prescribed intervals, and reported monthly to management.
The consolidated entity is also exposed to equity securities price risk because of investments held by the consolidated entity and classified on the statement of financial position as available-for-sale and fair value through profit or loss.
(ii) Credit risk
The consolidated entity manages its exposure to credit risk via credit risk management policies which allocate credit limits based on the overall financial and competitive strength of the counterparty. Publicly available credit information from recognised providers is utilised for this purpose where available. Credit policies cover exposures generated from the sale of products and the use of derivative instruments. Derivative counterparties are limited to high-credit-quality financial institutions and other organisations in the relevant industry. The consolidated entity has Board approved policies that limit the amount of credit exposure to each financial institution and derivate counterparty. The consolidated entity also utilises ISDA agreements with all derivative counterparties in order to limit exposure to credit risk through the netting of amounts receivable from amounts payable to individual counterparties.
The carrying amounts of financial assets recognised in the statement of financial position, and disclosed in more detail in notes 6 and 9 best represents the consolidated entity’s maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date. In respect of those financial assets and the credit risk embodied within them, the consolidated entity holds no significant collateral as security and there are no other significant credit enhancements in respect of these assets. The credit quality of all financial assets that are neither past due nor impaired is appropriate and is constantly monitored in order to identify any potential adverse changes in the credit quality. There are no significant financial assets that have had renegotiated terms that would otherwise, without that renegotiation, have been past due or impaired.
(iii) Liquidity risk
Prudent liquidity risk management implies maintaining sufficient cash and marketable securities, the availability of funding through an adequate amount of committed credit facilities and the ability to close out market positions. Due to the dynamic nature of the underlying businesses, the consolidated entity aims to maintain flexibility in funding by keeping committed credit lines available. Certain of the consolidated entity’s interest-bearing liability obligations are subject to change in control provisions under the agreements with third-party lenders. As at 30 June 2011 those provisions were not triggered.
(iv) Interest rate risk (cash flow and fair value)
The consolidated entity’s income and operating cash flows are substantially independent of changes in market interest rates. The consolidated entity’s interest rate risk arises from long-term borrowings. Borrowings issued at variable rates expose the consolidated entity to cash flow interest rate risk. Borrowings issued at fixed rates expose the consolidated entity to fair value interest rate risk. The consolidated entity’s risk management policy is to manage interest rate exposures using Profit at Risk and Value at Risk methodologies using 95 per cent statistical confidence levels. Exposure limits are set to ensure that the consolidated entity is not exposed to excess risk from interest rate volatility. The consolidated entity manages its cash flow interest rate risk by using floating-to-fixed interest rate swaps. Such interest rate swaps have the economic effect of converting borrowings from floating rates to fixed rates.
Under the interest rate swaps, the consolidated entity agrees with other parties to exchange, at specified intervals (mainly quarterly), the difference between fixed contract rates and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to the agreed notional principal amounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deutsche Telekom AG (2011)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
37. Risk management, financial derivatives, and other disclosures on capital management. [extract]
Credit risks.
Deutsche Telekom is exposed to a credit risk from its operating activities and certain financing activities. With regard to financing activities, transactions are only concluded with counterparties that have at least a credit rating of BBB+/Baa1, in connection with an operational credit management system. At the level of operations, the outstanding debts are continuously monitored in each area, i.e. locally. Credit risks are taken into account through individual and collective allowances.
The solvency of the business with corporate customers, especially international carriers, is monitored separately. In terms of the overall risk exposure from the credit risk, however, the receivables from these counterparties are not so extensive as to justify extraordinary concentrations of risk.
In line with the contractual provisions, in the event of insolvency all derivatives with a positive or negative fair value that exist with the respective counterparty are offset against each other, leaving a net receivable or liability. When the netting of the positive and negative fair values of all derivatives was positive from Deutsche Telekom’s perspective, the counterparty provided Deutsche Telekom with unrestricted cash pursuant to the collateral contracts mentioned in Note 1. The credit risk was thus further reduced (for details on the fair value of the cash reported under cash and cash equivalents; please also refer to Note 36).
On the basis of these contracts, derivatives with a positive fair value and a total carrying amount of EUR 1,533 million (December 31, 2010: EUR 835 million) have a maximum credit risk of EUR 45 million (December 31, 2010: EUR 126 million) as of the reporting date. When the netting of the positive and negative fair values of all derivatives was negative from Deutsche Telekom’s perspective, Deutsche Telekom provided cash collateral to counterparties pursuant to collateral contracts. The corresponding receivables of EUR 302 million (December 31, 2010: EUR 223 million) were thus not exposed to any credit risks as of the reporting date (please also refer to Note 8). No other significant agreements reducing the maximum exposure to the credit risks of financial assets existed. The maximum exposure to credit risk of the other financial assets thus corresponds to their carrying amounts. In addition, Deutsche Telekom is exposed to a credit risk through the granting of financial guarantees. Guarantees amounting to a nominal total of EUR 100 million has been pledged as of the reporting date (December 31, 2010: EUR 115 million), which also represent the maximum exposure to credit risk.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HSBC Holdings plc (2011)
Report of the Directors [extract]
Maximum exposure to credit risk (Audited) [extract]
The table presents our maximum exposure to credit risk from balance sheet and off-balance sheet financial instruments before taking account of any collateral held or other credit enhancements (unless such enhancements meet accounting offsetting requirements). For financial assets recognised on the balance sheet, the maximum exposure to credit risk equals their carrying amount; for financial guarantees and similar contracts granted, it is the maximum amount that we would have to pay if the guarantees were called upon. For loan commitments and other credit-related commitments that are irrevocable over the life of the respective facilities, it is generally the full amount of the committed facilities.
The loans and advances offset adjustment primarily relates to customer loans and deposits and balances arising from repo and reverse repo transactions. The offset relates to balances where there is a legally enforceable right of offset in the event of counterparty default and where, as a result, there is a net exposure for credit risk management purposes. However, as there is no intention to settle these balances on a net basis under normal circumstances, they do not qualify for net presentation for accounting purposes.
While not considered as offset in the table below, other arrangements including short positions in securities and financial assets held as part of linked insurance/investment contracts where the risk is predominately borne by the policyholder, reduce our maximum exposure to credit risk. In addition, we hold collateral in respect of individual loans and advances (see page 144).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Two classes of shares Shree Ltd. offered to the public 20,000 equity shares and 25,000 preference shares of Rs20 each payable as follows:
|
Particulars
|
Equity Shares
|
Preference Shares
|
|
|
|
|
|
On Application
|
6
|
8
|
|
On Allotment
|
8
|
6
|
|
On First & Final Call
|
6
|
6
|
The public applied for 22,000 equity shares and 10,000 preference shares. Applications for preference shares were accepted in full. For equity shares, 1,000 applications were rejected outright. 16,000 shares were accepted in full and the remaining shares were allotted on pro-rata basis. All money duly received except the amount due on call on 2,500 equity shares and 1,000 preference shares. Pass necessary entries in the cash book and journal.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I: State whether the following statements are true or false
1.A company is a natural person.
2.The members of a company have a limited liability.
3.In case of public limited companies, there are no restrictions on the transfer of shares.
4.All those private companies are also to be treated as public limited companies, if 25% or more of paid-up capital is held by public companies.
5.If 50% of the paid-up capital of any company is held by Central or State Government or both, such company is said to be a government company.
6.A public company can commence business as soon as the Certificate of Incorporation is obtained.
7.In a private company, if special Articles of Association are not prepared, Table A of Company’s Act will apply.
8.A public limited company can allot shares only if the minimum subscription is subscribed for by the public.
9.Now, in India, chartered companies may be formed by adhering statutory provisions.
10.The Memorandum of Association has to be signed by at least seven members.
11.Prospectus is nothing but an invitation to the public to subscribe for shares or debentures of a company.
12.Minimum subscription is the amount that should not be less than 50% of the issue.
13.Employee’s Stock Option Scheme permits the employees of a company to subscribe for any number of shares at a privileged price at any time.
14.Authorized capital should be stated in the Memorandum of Association.
15.In general, a company will not issue its entire nominal capital at a time.
16.Capital reserve is mainly utilized for distribution of dividend.
17.Redeemable preference shares cannot be issued by a company.
18.Equity shares without voting rights can be issued by a company.
19.Preference shareholders also have a right to vote under special circumstances.
20.Shares can be issued only for cash.
21.The premium received on shares may be distributed among shareholders like other profits.
22.The companies entering the capital market can retain out of subscription up to 10% of the number of shares offered.
23.When shares are issued at a premium, over the amount of premium has to be credited to share allotment account.
24.Normally, the rate of discount must not exceed 20% of face value when shares are to be issued at discount.
25.The balance of calls-in-advance account is to be added to the amount of subscribed capital.
26.The allotment of shares should be completed within one month of the issue of the prospectus.
27.A new company cannot issue shares at a discount.
28.A public company can issue deferred shares.
29.Until the forfeited shares are re-issued, the balance on the shares forfeited account is shown in the balance sheet under “share capital”.
30.Discount on shares is to be shown on “assets”.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You and two of your former college friends, Freeman and Oxyman, formed a partnership called FOB, which builds and installs fabricated swimming pools. The business has been operating for 15 years and has become one of the top swimming pool companies in the area. Typically, you have been providing the on-site estimates for the pools, while your partners do most of the on-site construction. While visiting one of the sites, you hear a conversation between one of your partners and a customer. Your partner is explaining that the cost will increase by $10,000 because of unexpected rock removal. You are a bit surprised by this, since you had tested the area for rocks. Later, back at the office, you review the core-sample results done on that job, which did not reveal any rock. You decide to talk to the partner when he returns to the office. When the partner returns to the office, he is arguing with someone from a local bank concerning an outstanding personal loan.
- What do you see as your duty with respect to the partnership?
- What should you do? Explain your reasoning.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Simple Liquidation
The CPA Partnership operated by Cook, Parks, and Argo is being liquidated. A balance sheet prepared at this stage in their liquidation process is presented below.
|
Cash
|
$40,000
|
Liabilities
|
$25,000
|
|
Other Assets
|
50,000
|
Parks, Loan
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
Cook, Capital
|
30,000
|
|
|
|
Parks, Capital
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
Argo, Capital
|
15,000
|
|
Total
|
$90,000
|
Total
|
$90,000
|
The partners share profits and losses 30% (Cook), 50% (Parks), and 20% (Argo). The partners are all personally insolvent.
Required:
- The partners wish to distribute the $40,000 in cash. Record in journal entry form the distribution of the available cash.
- Record in journal entry form the completion of the liquidation process, assuming that the other assets of $50,000 are sold for $15,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Simple Liquidation
John, Jake, and Joe are partners with capital accounts of $90,000, $78,000, and $64,000 respectively. They share profits and losses in the ratio of 30:40:30. When the partners decide to liquidate, the business has $70,000 in cash, noncash assets totaling $260,000, and $98,000 in liabilities. The noncash assets are sold for $270,000, and the creditors are paid.
Required:
- Prepare a schedule of partnership liquidation.
- Prepare journal entries to record each of the following transactions.
(1) The sale of the noncash assets.
(2) The payment to the creditors.
(3) The distribution of cash to the partners.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Distribution Schedule
The unsuccessful partnership of the Jones Brothers is about to undergo liquidation. They have asked you to estimate the amount of cash that each brother will receive. They share profits and losses equally.
|
Cash
|
$ 22,000
|
Liabilities
|
|
$ 35,000
|
|
Noncash Assets
|
110,000
|
Doug, Capital
|
|
55,000
|
|
|
|
Dave, Capital
|
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
Dan, Capital
|
|
(8,000)
|
|
|
$132,000
|
|
|
$132,000
|
Both Doug and Dave are personally solvent, but Dan is not. They estimate that they will receive $65,000 from the sale of the noncash assets.
Required:
Prepare a schedule to estimate the amount of cash each brother will receive.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Berendsen Plc (2011)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
17. Financial risk management [extract]
17.1 Financial risk factors [extract]
c) Liquidity risk [extract]
The table below analyses the group’s financial liabilities which will be settled on a net basis into relative maturity groupings based on the remaining period at the balance sheet to the contract maturity date. The amounts disclosed in the table are contractual undiscounted cash flows using spot interest and foreign exchange rates at 31st December 2011. Balances due within 12 months equal their carrying balances as the impact of the discount is not significant.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Illustrative disclosure of sensitivity analyses
Interest rate risk
At 31 December 2013, if interest rates at that date had been 10 basis points lower with all other variables held constant, post-tax profit for the year would have been €1.7 million (2012: €2.4 million) higher, arising mainly as a result of lower interest expense on variable borrowings, and other comprehensive income would have been €2.8 million (2012: €3.2 million) higher, arising mainly as a result of an increase in the fair value of fixed rate financial assets classified as available-for-sale.
If interest rates had been 10 basis points higher, with all other variables held constant, post-tax profit would have been €1.5 million (2012: €2.1 million) lower, arising mainly as a result of higher interest expense on variable borrowings, and other comprehensive income would have been €3.0 million (2012: €3.4 million) lower, arising mainly as a result of a decrease in the fair value of fixed rate financial assets classified as available-for-sale.
Profit is more sensitive to interest rate decreases than increases because of borrowings with capped interest rates. The sensitivity is lower in 2013 than in 2012 because of a reduction in outstanding borrowings that has occurred as the entity’s debt has matured (see note X).
Foreign currency exchange rate risk
At 31 December 2013, if the euro had weakened 10 percent against the US dollar with all other variables held constant, post-tax profit for the year would have been €2.8 million (2012: €6.4 million) lower, and other comprehensive income would have been €1.2 million (2012: €1.1 million) higher.
Conversely, if the euro had strengthened 10 percent against the US dollar with all other variables held constant, post-tax profit would have been €2.8 million (2012: €6.4 million) higher, and other comprehensive income would have been €1.2 million (2012: €1.1 million) lower.
The lower foreign currency exchange rate sensitivity in profit in 2013 compared with 2012 is attributable to a reduction in foreign currency denominated debt. Equity is more sensitive in 2013 than in 2012 because of the increased use of hedges of foreign currency purchases, offset by the reduction in foreign currency debt. [IFRS 7.IG36].
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Icon records a periodic inventory of its stocks at the end of each month. The physical inventory recorded on June 30 shows a balance of 1,000 units @ $2.28 per unit. The following purchases were made during July.
|
Date
|
Units
|
Rate
|
|
July 1
|
14,000
|
$2.30 per unit
|
|
July 7
|
10,000
|
$2.32 per unit
|
|
July 9
|
20,000
|
$2.33 per unit
|
|
July 25
|
5,000
|
$2.35 per unit
|
A physical inventory recorded on July 31 discloses stock of 10,000 units.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify the definition of current maturities of long-term debt.
- Current maturities of long-term debt represent the portion of long-term debt that will be paid within the current fiscal year
- Current maturities of long-term debt represent the half of the estimated portion of debt that will be paid within one year
- Current maturities of long-term debt represent the portion of long-term debt that will be paid after one year
- Current maturities of long-term debt represent the portion of long-term debt that will be paid within two years
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Debt instrument reclassified as held-to-maturity
Company Y acquires a debt instrument that it classifies as available-for-sale. The purchase price equals the fair value of the instrument, 110. Its terms are such that it pays a fixed coupon for ten years and a principal payment of 100. Subsequently, when the fair value of the instrument is 120, a gain of 12 has been recognised in other comprehensive income, and 2 of the initial cost has been amortised to profit or loss, Y reclassifies the debt instrument as held-to-maturity.
The 120 fair value carrying amount becomes the new amortised cost of the instrument thereby giving rise to an effective premium of 20 that is amortised over the remaining term to maturity using the effective interest method. In addition, the 12 gain within equity is also amortised to profit or loss over the remaining period to maturity.
In effect, profit or loss should be broadly the same as if the instrument had not been reclassified (or had always been classified as held-to-maturity).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Liabilities at fair value through profit or loss: accounting mismatch in profit or loss
A mortgage bank provides loans to customers and funds those loans by selling bonds with matching characteristics (e.g. amount outstanding, repayment profile, term and currency) in the market. The contractual terms of the loan permit the mortgage customer to prepay its loan (i.e. satisfy its obligation to the bank) by buying the corresponding bond at fair value in the market and delivering that bond to the mortgage bank.
As a result of that contractual prepayment right, if the credit quality of the bond worsens (and, thus, the fair value of the mortgage bank’s liability decreases), the fair value of the mortgage bank’s loan asset also decreases. The change in the fair value of the asset reflects the mortgage customer’s contractual right to prepay the mortgage loan by buying the underlying bond at fair value (which, in this example, has decreased) and delivering the bond to the mortgage bank. Therefore, the effects of changes in the credit risk of the liability (the bond) will be offset in profit or loss by a corresponding change in the fair value of a financial asset (the loan).
If the effects of changes in the liability’s credit risk were presented in other comprehensive income there would be an accounting mismatch in profit or loss. Therefore, the mortgage bank is required to present all changes in fair value of the liability (including the effects of changes in the liability’s credit risk) in profit or loss.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Valuing publicly quoted shares at other than market price
Company X holds 15% of the share capital in Company Y. The shares are publicly traded in an active market, the currently quoted price is €100, and daily trading volume is 0.1% of outstanding shares. Because X believes that the fair value of the shares it owns, if sold as a block, is greater than the quoted market price, it obtains several independent estimates of the price it would obtain if it were to sell its holding. These estimates indicate that it would be able to obtain a price of €105, a 5% premium above the quoted price.
The published price quotation in an active market is the best estimate of fair value. Therefore, the published price quotation (€100) should be used. X cannot depart from the quoted market price solely because independent estimates indicate that it would obtain a higher (or lower) price by selling the holding as a block. [IAS 39.E.2.2].
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Complex stand-alone derivative – no unquoted equity underlying
Company Z acquires a complex stand-alone derivative that is based on several underlying variables, including commodity prices, interest rates, and credit indices. There is no active market or other price quotation for the derivative and no active markets for some of its underlying variables.
The presumption that the derivative’s fair value can be reliably determined cannot be overcome because it is not linked to, or required to be settled by delivery of, an unquoted equity instrument. It cannot, therefore, be carried at cost.51
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Valuing publicly quoted shares at other than market price
Company Z acquires from Company X its 15% holding in the share capital of Company Y for €105 when the quoted price in an active market is €100. It intends to hold the shares as a strategic investment and they are classified as available-for-sale.
It appears that there is no scope for overcoming the presumption that a published price quotation in an active market is the best estimate of fair value. Therefore, the shares should be recorded at €100 resulting in a loss on initial recognition of €5 per share. Moreover, because the loss arises on initial recognition, not remeasurement, of an available-for-sale asset, it appears that the loss should be recognised in profit or loss (unless it can be argued to be a transaction cost).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effective interest rate – embedded prepayment options
Bank ABC originates 1,000 ten year loans of 10,000 with 10% stated interest. Prepayments are probable and it is possible to reasonably estimate their timing and amount. ABC determines that the effective interest rate including loan origination fees received by ABC is 10.2% based on the contractual payment terms of the loans as the fees received reduce the initial carrying amount.
However, if the expected prepayments were considered, the effective interest rate would be 10.4% since the difference between the initial amount and maturity amount is amortised over a shorter period.
The effective interest rate that should be used by ABC for this portfolio is 10.4%.62
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Purchase of impaired debt
On 1 January 2006, Company D issued a debt instrument that required it to pay an annual coupon of €800 in arrears and to repay the principal of €10,000 on 31 December 2015. By 2011, D was in financial difficulties and was unable to pay the coupon due on 31 December 2011. On 1 January 2012, Company V estimated that the holder could expect to receive a single payment of €4,000 at the end of 2013 following a financial restructuring and acquired the debt instrument at an arms length price of €3,000.
It can be shown that using the contractual cash flows (including the €800 overdue) gives rise to an effective interest rate of 70.1% (the net present value of €800 now and annually thereafter until 2015 and €10,000 receivable at the end of 2015 is €3,000 when discounted at 70.1%). However, because the debt instrument has clearly incurred a credit loss, V should calculate the effective interest rate using the estimated cash flows on the instrument. In this case, the effective interest rate is 15.5% (the net present value of €4,000 receivable in two years is €3,000 when discounted at 15.5%).
All things being equal, interest income of €464 (€3,000 × 15.5%) would be recognised on the instrument during 2012 and its carrying amount at the end of the year would be €3,464 (€3,000 + €464). However if at the end of the year the cash flow expected to be generated by the instrument had increased to €4,250 (still to be received at the end of 2013), an adjustment to the asset would be made as set out at 5.2.1 above. Accordingly, its carrying amount would be increased to €3,681 (€4,250 discounted over one year at 15.5%) and a further €217 income would be recognised in profit or loss. Of course, there would need to be a substantive and supportable basis for revising the cash flow estimates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allianz SE (2011)
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]
2. Summary of significant accounting policies [extract]
Impairment of available-for-sale equity securities
If there is objective evidence that the cost may not be recovered, an available-for-sale equity security is considered to be impaired. Objective evidence that the cost may not be recovered, in addition to qualitative impairment criteria, includes a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value below cost. The Allianz Group’s policy considers a significant decline to be one in which the fair value is below the weighted average cost by more than 20%. A prolonged decline is considered to be one in which the fair value is below the weighted average cost for a period of more than nine months.
If an available-for-sale equity security is impaired, any further declines in the fair value at subsequent reporting dates are recognized as impairments. Therefore, at each reporting period, for an equity security that was determined to be impaired, additional impairments are recognized for the difference between the fair value and the original cost basis, less any previously recognized impairments. Reversals of impairments of available-for-sale equity securities are not recorded through the income statement but recycled out of other comprehensive income when sold.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Impairment – changes in amount or timing of payments
A bank is concerned that, because of financial difficulties, five customers, Companies A to E, will not be able to make all principal and interest payments due on originated loans in a timely manner. It negotiates a restructuring of the loans and expects the customers will meet their restructured obligations. The restructured terms are as follows:
- A will pay the full principal amount of the original loan five years after the original due date, but none of the interest due under the original terms;
- B will pay the full principal amount of the original loan on the original due date, but none of the interest due under the original terms;
- C will pay the full principal amount of the original loan on the original due date but with interest at a lower interest rate than the interest rate inherent in the original loan;
- D will pay the full principal amount of the original loan five years after the original due date and all interest accrued during the original loan term, but no interest for the extended term;
- E will pay the full principal amount of the original loan five years after the original due date and all interest, including interest on all outstanding amounts for both the original term of the loan and the extended term.
An impairment loss has been incurred if there is objective evidence of impairment – this is assumed to be the case here because of the customers’ financial difficulties. The amount of the impairment loss for a loan measured at amortised cost is the difference between the loan’s carrying amount and the present value of future principal and interest payments, discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate.
For A to D, the present value of the future principal and interest payments discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate will be lower than the carrying amount of the loan. Therefore an impairment loss is recognised in those cases. For E, even though the timing of payments has changed, the bank will receive interest on interest, so that the present value of the future principal and interest payments, discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate, will equal the carrying amount of the loan. Therefore, there is no impairment loss. However, this fact pattern is unlikely given Company E’s financial difficulties. [IAS 39.E.4.3].
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Impairment of short-term receivable
A construction company, K, agrees to build a new stadium for a professional football club, L. The project takes approximately six months and payment of €10 million is due six weeks after completion. On completion, K has recognised revenue and a corresponding receivable of €10 million because the effect of discounting at the current annualised rate of 5% is immaterial.
Shortly after completion, it becomes apparent that L is in financial difficulties and is unlikely to be able to settle the €10 million debt. In order to avoid formal insolvency proceedings, L attempts to restructure its financial obligations and offers to pay K €1 million per year for the next 10 years. Because it believes this arrangement appears to offer the best prospects for the recovery of its debt, K accepts.
On the face of it (and assuming no defaults on the rescheduled debt are expected), it might be argued that K need not recognise an impairment loss because it will receive all of the money owed and the debt’s original effective interest rate was 0%. However, the original receivable was, in principle, discounted – it is just that the effects of discounting were not reflected in the financial statements as they were not material. Therefore, the effect of discounting the rescheduled payments at 5% per annum (approximately €2.28 million) should be recognised as an impairment loss.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Increase in the fair value of an impaired available-for-sale debt investment
An entity purchased a debt instrument, which it designated as available-for-sale with a cost of CU 100. In year two, the fair value of the instrument decreased to CU 70 and the entity concluded that the instrument was impaired and consequently recognised an impairment loss of CU 30. In year three, the fair value of the instrument increases to CU 95.
Scenario 1 – The entity can determine that there is no longer any objective evidence of impairment. That is, the credit event triggering the impairment reverses in its entirety.
Scenario 2 – The entity cannot determine that there is no longer any objective evidence of impairment (that is, the credit event triggering the impairment did not entirely reverse) however, it can determine that the credit quality of the instrument improved compared to the situation when the instrument was impaired.
In both scenarios, the entity might have reversed a small part of the impairment loss through the application of the higher effective interest rate determined at the time the instrument was impaired. This effect is ignored in the conclusion below.
An entity can only reverse through profit or loss an increase in the fair value of an available-for-sale debt instrument that occurs subsequent to impairment if there is an actual improvement in the credit quality of the instrument. If there is no improvement in the credit quality, the entity recognises the increase in fair value in OCI. Judgement is required to determine whether the credit event triggering the impairment reversed in its entirety (i.e. there is no longer any objective evidence of impairment) or whether there is only some improvement in credit quality.
Scenario 1 – If there is no longer objective evidence of impairment, such that the event reversed in its entirety, we believe the entity has an accounting policy choice, which it must apply consistently:
The entity can recognise in profit or loss a reversal of impairment of CU 30 and recognise a loss of CU 5 in OCI or it can recognise in profit or loss a reversal of impairment of CU 25.
Scenario 2 – If there is some evidence of improvement in credit quality, but the credit event did not reverse, the entity has an accounting policy choice, which it must apply consistently:
The entity can recognise in profit or loss a reversal of impairment of CU 25. Alternatively, the entity could choose not to recognise any reversal of impairment in profit or loss, until the event reverses in its entirety. Therefore, the entity recognises an increase in fair value in OCI (of CU 25).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Decline in the fair value of an impaired available-for-sale equity investment
Company A acquired 100 shares in Company X on 1 January 2012, for their fair value of €10,000. On 31 December 2012, A’s year end, the fair value of the shares in X had fallen to €6,000 and A concluded the shares were impaired. Accordingly, in its 2012 financial statements, A recognised an impairment loss of €4,000 in profit or loss.
On 31 December 2013, the fair value of the shares in X had fallen a little further to €5,900. In its 2013 financial statements, should A automatically regard the loss of €100 as a further impairment (to be recognised in profit or loss) or should it regard it as a normal revaluation to be recognised in other comprehensive income?
The implementation guidance to the standard suggests that any further declines in the fair value of an impaired available-for-sale equity instrument should be recognised in profit or loss, although only in the context of explaining the treatment of portions of fair value movements arising from foreign currency changes. [IAS 39.E.4.9].
However, perhaps because the accounting treatment is said to be comparable to US GAAP (see 6.3.2 above), some considered that, once impaired, the asset acquired a new ‘cost base’ equal to the fair value at the date of impairment. Consequently, the €100 decline in fair value would be assessed for impairment as if the asset had been acquired on 31 December 2012 for €6,000. This approach would not necessarily result in the €100 being characterised as an impairment loss.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interaction of IAS 21 and IAS 39 or IFRS 9 – foreign currency debt investment
Company A is domiciled in the US and its functional currency and presentation currency is the US dollar. A has a UK domiciled subsidiary, B, whose functional currency is sterling. B is the owner of a debt instrument which is held for trading and is therefore carried at fair value.
In B’s financial statements for 2013, the fair value and carrying amount of the debt instrument is 100. In A’s consolidated financial statements, the asset is translated into US dollars at the spot exchange rate applicable at the end of the reporting period, say 2.0, and the carrying amount is US$200 (100 × 2.0).
At the end of 2014, the fair value of the debt instrument has increased to 110. B reports the trading asset at 110 in its balance sheet and recognises a fair value gain of 10 in profit or loss. During the year, the spot exchange rate has increased from 2.0 to 3.0 resulting in an increase in the fair value of the instrument from US$200 to US$330 (110 × 3.0). Therefore, A reports the trading asset at US$330 in its consolidated financial statements.
Since B is classified as a foreign entity, A translates B’s statement of comprehensive income ‘at the exchange rates at the dates of the transactions’. Since the fair value gain has accrued through the year, A uses the average rate of 2.5 (= [3.0 + 2.0] ÷ 2) as a practical approximation. Therefore, while the fair value of the trading asset has increased by US$130 (US$330 – US$200), A recognises only US$25 (10 × 2.5) of this increase in profit or loss. The resulting exchange difference, i.e. the remaining increase in the fair value of the debt instrument of US$105 (US$130 – US$25), is recognised in other comprehensive income until the disposal of the net investment in the foreign entity. [IAS 39.E.3.3, IFRS 9.IG E.3.3].
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Securitisation with deferred consideration
An originator wishes to securitise 90% of a particular portfolio of its credit card receivables. Outside investors agree to pay for 85% of the receivables immediately (with no further recourse to the originator in the event that less than 85% recovery is achieved), with the further 5% to be paid to the extent that the receivables are recovered. Under such an arrangement, IAS 39 (IFRS 9) would regard 85% of the portfolio at most as having been transferred (subject to the other conditions in 3.5.1 above having been met). This is entirely appropriate, since the originator clearly remains exposed to all the risks associated with recoveries in the range 85%-90% of the portfolio.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial asset transferred subject to call option neither deeply in the money nor deeply out of the money
On 1 January 2010 an entity transferred a financial asset (an equity share) to a counterparty, subject only to a call option to repurchase the asset at any time up to 31 December 2014. At 1 January 2010 the option was considered to be neither deeply in the money nor deeply out of the money. However, the asset was readily marketable and freely transferable by the transferor and was accordingly derecognised because the entity, while neither transferring nor retaining substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset, no longer controls it (see 4.2.3 above).
At 31 December 2013 the financial asset that was the subject of the transfer ceases to be listed and is therefore not readily marketable. Had this been the case at the time of the original transfer, the entity would have been regarded as retaining control of the asset, which would not have been derecognised (see 4.2.3A above). What is the accounting consequence of this change?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Derecognition of whole of financial asset in its entirety
At 1 October 2013 an entity has an available-for-sale financial asset carried at €1,400 in respect of which a cumulative gain of €200 has been recognised in equity. At that date, the asset is unconditionally sold to a third party in exchange for cash of €2,500 and a loan note issued to the third party. The loan note bears a fixed rate interest below current market rates and is repayable at €1,150 but is considered to have a fair value of €1,100. The following accounting entries are made by the entity to record the disposal:
|
€
|
€
|
|
Cash
|
2,500
|
|
|
Equity (‘recycling’ of cumulative gain on asset)
|
200
|
|
|
Gain on disposal
|
|
200
|
|
Asset
|
|
1,400
|
|
Loan note
|
|
1,100
|
Thereafter the loan note will be accreted up to its repayable amount of €1,150 over its expected life using the effective interest method (see Chapter 49 at 5).
If the asset had been of a type eligible for accounting using the amortised cost method, and had been so accounted for, and had a carrying amount of (say) €1,300 at the date of the transfer, the accounting entry would have been:
|
€
|
€
|
|
Cash
|
2,500
|
|
|
Profit on disposal
|
|
100
|
|
Asset
|
|
1,300
|
|
Loan note
|
|
1,100
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Derecognition of part of financial asset in its entirety
On 1 January 2008 an entity invested €1 million in a loan with a par value of €1 million. The loan pays interest of €75,000 on 31 December annually in arrears and is to be redeemed at par on 31 December 2017. The entity accounts for the loan at amortised cost.
On 1 January 2013 it unconditionally sells the right to receive the remaining five interest payments to a bank. The derecognition provisions of IAS 39 (IFRS 9) are applied to the interest payments as an identifiable part of the asset, leading to the conclusion that they are required to be derecognised.
The consideration received for, and the fair value of, the future interest payments (based on the net present value, as at 1 January 2013, of the payments at the current market interest rate that would be available to the borrower of 5%)18 is €324,711 (€75,000 × [1/1.05 + 1/1.052 … + 1/1.055]). By the same methodology the fair value of the principal repayment can be calculated as €783,526 (€1,000,000 × 1/1.055), giving a total fair value for the loan of €1,108,237.
In order to calculate the gain or loss on disposal, the total carrying value of the loan of €1,000,000 is allocated between the part disposed of and the part retained, based on the fair values of those parts. This allocates €292,998 (€1,000,000 × 324,711 ÷ 1,108,237) to the interest payments disposed of and €707,002 (€1,000,000 × 783,526 ÷ 1,108,237) to the retained right to the repayment of principal. This generates the accounting entry:
|
€
|
€
|
|
Cash
|
324,711
|
|
|
Loan (portion of carrying amount allocated to interest payments)
|
|
292,998
|
|
Gain on disposal
|
|
31,713
|
If the loan had instead been a quoted bond accounted for as available-for-sale, it would have already have been carried at €1,108,237, so that the basic disposal journal would simply be:
|
€
|
€
|
|
Cash
|
324,711
|
|
|
Bond (portion of carrying amount allocated to interest payments)
|
|
324,711
|
However, as the bond was accounted for as available-for-sale, it would also be necessary to recycle that portion of the cumulative revaluation gain of €108,237 that relates to the interest ‘component’ of the total carrying value from equity to the income statement. IAS 39 requires a pro-rata allocation of the cumulative gain or loss in equity based on the total fair value of the interest and principal – this would deem €31,713 (€108,237 × €324,711 ÷ 1,108,237) of the cumulative revaluation gain to relate to interest. This would give rise to the further journal, resulting in the same gain on disposal as above:
|
€
|
€
|
|
Equity
|
31,713
|
|
|
Gain on disposal (income statement)
|
|
31,713
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Servicing assets and liabilities
An entity has a portfolio of originated domestic mortgages which are accounted for at amortised cost and have a carrying amount of 10 million. The mortgages bear interest at a fixed rate of 7.5%. The average life of the mortgages in the portfolio (taking account of prepayment risk) is 12 years and the fair value of the portfolio is 11 million, representing 4.5 million in respect of future interest payments and 6.5 million in respect of the principal amounts. The entity assesses the amount that would compensate it for servicing the assets to be 0.5 million.
The entity sells the entire portfolio to a bank (on terms such that it qualifies for derecognition under IAS 39 (IFRS 9)) but continues to service the portfolio. If the entity does not retain any part of the interest payments, the selling price would be the fair value of the assets of 11 million (or very close to it). It would then assume a servicing liability of 0.5 million, giving rise to the accounting entry:
|
m
|
m
|
|
Cash
|
11.0
|
|
|
Mortgage portfolio
|
|
10.0
|
|
Servicing liability
|
|
0.5
|
|
Profit on disposal
|
|
0.5
|
Alternatively, it retains interest payments of 1% and the right to service the portfolio. The entity estimates that the fair value of the right to receive interest payments of 1% is 0.6 million. In this case, the bank would be expected to pay fair value of 10.4 million (or very close to it).
The standard states – see above – that, if (as is the case here) the entity would not give up any interest on termination or transfer of the contract, then the whole of the interest spread is an interest-only strip receivable. In order to calculate the amount of the portfolio to be derecognised, the carrying value of 10 million is pro-rated (as in Example 50.6 above) as to 9.45 million disposed of (10m × 10.4/11) and the part retained of 0.55 million (10m × 0.6/11). However, as it has allocated the full amount of the interest spread to an interest-only strip receivable, it would need to recognise a servicing liability of 0.5 million in respect of its obligations under the contract. This gives rise to the following accounting entry:
|
m
|
m
|
|
Cash
|
10.40
|
|
|
Interest-only strip receivable
|
0.55
|
|
|
Mortgage portfolio (9.45m disposed of plus 0.55m reclassified as interest-only strip receivable)
|
|
10.00
|
|
Servicing liability
|
|
0.50
|
|
Profit on disposal
|
|
0.45
|
If the entity were to retain only 0.1 million of the interest spread on termination or transfer of the servicing contract, then IAS 39 (IFRS 9) requires – see above:
- the part of the interest payments that the entity would not give up (i.e. 0.1 million) to be treated as an interest-only strip receivable; and
- the part of the interest payments that the entity would give up (i.e. 0.45 million – 0.55 million as above less 0.1 million in previous bullet) upon termination or transfer of the servicing contract to be allocated to the servicing asset or servicing liability.
This suggests that the following accounting entry would be made:
|
m
|
m
|
|
Cash
|
10.40
|
|
|
Interest-only strip receivable
|
0.10
|
|
|
Mortgage portfolio (9.45m disposed of plus 0.1m reclassified as interest-only strip receivable and 0.45m allocated to servicing liability)
|
|
10.00
|
|
Servicing liability (0.5m gross cost less interest payments that would be lost on termination or transfer – 0.45m)
|
|
0.05
|
|
Profit on disposal
|
|
0.45
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Denali Limited, a manufacturing company, had the following income statement information:
|
Revenue
|
$4,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$3,000,000
|
|
Other operating expenses
|
$500,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
$100,000
|
|
Tax expense
|
$120,000
|
Denali’s gross profit is equal to
A. $280,000.
B. $500,000.
C. $1,000,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fairplay had the following information related to the sale of its products during 2009, which was its first year of business:
|
Revenue
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Returns of goods sold
|
$100,000
|
|
Cash collected
|
$800,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$700,000
|
Under the accrual basis of accounting, how much net revenue would be reported on Fairplay’s 2009 income statement?
A. $200,000
B. $900,000
C. $1,000,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the beginning of 2009, Florida Road Construction entered into a contract to build a road for the government. Construction will take four years. The following information as of 31 December 2009 is available for the contract:
|
Total revenue according to contract
|
$10,000,000
|
|
Total expected cost
|
$8,000,000
|
|
Cost incurred during 2009
|
$1,200,000
|
Assume that the company estimates percentage complete based on costs incurred as a percentage of total estimated costs. Under the completed contract method, how much revenue will be reported in 2009?
A. None
B. $300,000
C. $1,500,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Apex Consignment sells items over the Internet for individuals on a consignment basis. Apex receives the items from the owner, lists them for sale on the Internet, and receives a 25 percent commission for any items sold. Apex collects the full amount from the buyer and pays the net amount after commission to the owner. Unsold items are returned to the owner after 90 days. During 2009, Apex had the following information:
- Total sales price of items sold during 2009 on consignment was €2,000,000.
- Total commissions retained by Apex during 2009 for these items was €500,000.
How much revenue should Apex report on its 2009 income statement?
A. €500,000
B. €2,000,000
C. €1,500,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of Inventory
- Cisco Systems is a global provider of networking equipment. In its third quarter 2001 Form 10-Q filed with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (U.S. SEC) on 1 June 2001, the company made the following disclosure:
- We recorded a provision for inventory, including purchase commitments, totaling $2.36 billion in the third quarter of fiscal 2001, of which $2.25 billion related to an additional excess inventory charge. Inventory purchases and commitments are based upon future sales forecasts. To mitigate the component supply constraints that have existed in the past, we built inventory levels for certain components with long lead times and entered into certain longer-term commitments for certain components. Due to the sudden and significant decrease in demand for our products, inventory levels exceeded our requirements based on current 12-month sales forecasts. This additional excess inventory charge was calculated based on the inventory levels in excess of 12-month demand for each specific product. We do not currently anticipate that the excess inventory subject to this provision will be used at a later date based on our current 12-month demand forecast.
- After the inventory charge, Cisco reported approximately $2 billion of inventory on the balance sheet, suggesting that the write-off amounted to approximately half of its inventory. In addition to the obvious concerns raised as to management’s poor performance in anticipating how much inventory was required, many analysts were concerned about how the write-off would affect Cisco’s future reported earnings. If this inventory is sold in a future period, a “gain” could be reported based on a lower cost basis for the inventory. In this case, management indicated that the intent was to scrap the inventory. When the company subsequently released its annual earnings, the press release stated:8
- Net sales for fiscal 2001 were $22.29 billion, compared with $18.93 billion for fiscal 2000, an increase of 18%. Pro forma net income, which excludes the effects of acquisition charges, payroll tax on stock option exercises, restructuring costs and other special charges, excess inventory charge (benefit), and net gains realized on minority investments, was $3.09 billion or $0.41 per share for fiscal 2001, compared with pro forma net income of $3.91 billion or $0.53 per share for fiscal 2000, decreases of 21% and 23%, respectively.
- Actual net loss for fiscal 2001 was $1.01 billion or $0.14 per share, compared with actual net income of $2.67 billion or $0.36 per share for fiscal 2000.
- 1. What concerns would an analyst likely have about the company’s $2.3 billion write-off of inventory? What is the significance of the company indicating its intent to scrap the written off inventory?
- 2. What concerns might an analyst have about the company’s earnings press release when the company subsequently released its annual earnings?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of Deferred Revenue
- In the notes to its 2009 financial statements, SAP Group describes its deferred income as follows:
- Deferred income consists mainly of prepayments made by our customers for support services and professional services, fees for multiple element arrangements allocated to undelivered elements, and amounts. . .for obligations to perform under acquired support contracts in connection with acquisitions.
- Apple’s deferred revenue arises from sales involving components, some delivered at the time of sale and others to be delivered in the future. In its 2009 financial statements, Apple Inc. explains that accounting for sale of some of its products is treated as two deliverables:
- The first deliverable is the hardware and software delivered at the time of sale, and the second deliverable is the right included with the purchase of iPhone and Apple TV to receive on a when-and-if-available basis future unspecified software upgrades and features relating to the product’s software. . .the Company is required to estimate a standalone selling price for the unspecified software upgrade right included with the sale of iPhone and Apple TV and recognizes that amount ratably over the 24-month estimated life of the related hardware device.
- 1. In general, in the period a transaction occurs, how would a company’s balance sheet reflect $100 of deferred revenue resulting from a sale? (Assume, for simplicity, that the company receives cash for all sales, the company’s income tax payable is 30 percent based on cash receipts, and the company pays cash for all relevant income tax obligations as they arise. Ignore any associated deferred costs.)
- 2. In general, how does deferred revenue impact a company’s financial statements in the periods following its initial recognition?
- 3. Interpret the amounts shown by SAP Group as deferred income and by Apple Inc. as deferred revenue.
- 4. Both accounts payable and deferred revenue are classified as current liabilities. Discuss the following statements:
- A. When assessing a company’s liquidity, the implication of amounts in accounts payable differs from the implication of amounts in deferred revenue.
- B. Some investors monitor amounts in deferred revenue as an indicator of future revenue growth.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ratio Analysis
- For the following ratio questions, refer to the balance sheet information for the SAP Group presented.
- 1. The current ratio for SAP Group at 31 December 2009 is closest to
- A. 1.54.
- B. 1.86.
- C. 2.33.
- 2. Which two of the following ratios decreased in 2009 relative to 2008?
- A. Cash.
- B. Quick.
- C. Current.
- D. Debt to equity.
- E. Financial leverage.
- F. Long-term debt to equity.
- 3. For the ratios listed in question 2, how are the changes interpreted?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- A company recorded the following in Year 1:
|
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
|
€300,000
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
€200,000
|
|
Loss on sale of equipment
|
€70,000
|
|
Proceeds from sale of equipment
|
€120,000
|
|
Equity in earnings of affiliate
|
€10,000
|
- On the Year 1 statement of cash flows, the company would report net cash flow from investing activitiesclosestto
- A. (€150,000).
- B. (€80,000).
- C. €200,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Based on the following information for Pinkerly Inc., a fictitious company, what are the total adjustments that the company would make to net income in order to derive operating cash flow?
|
|
Year Ended
|
|
|
|
Income statement item
|
|
12/31/2009
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
$30 million
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
|
$7 million
|
|
|
Balance sheet item
|
12/31/2008
|
12/31/2009
|
Change
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$15 million
|
$30 million
|
$15 million
|
|
Inventory
|
$16 million
|
$13 million
|
($3 million)
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$10 million
|
$20 million
|
$10 million
|
A. Add $5 million.
B. Add $21 million.
C. Subtract $9 million.
EXAMPLE 6-8 Analysis of the Cash Flow Statement
Derek Yee, CFA, is preparing to forecast cash flow for Groupe Danone (FP: BN) as an input into his valuation model. He has asked you to evaluate the historical cash flow statement of Groupe Danone, which is presented. Groupe Danone prepares its financial statements in conformity with IFRS. Note that Groupe Danone presents the most recent period on the right.
Groupe Danone Consolidated Financial Statements
|
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows Years Ended 31 December (in € millions)
|
|
2008
|
2009
|
|
Net income attributable to the Group
|
1,313
|
1,361
|
|
Net income attributable to minority interests
|
178
|
160
|
|
Net income from discontinued operations
|
(269)
|
—
|
|
Share of profits of associates
|
(62)
|
77
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
525
|
549
|
|
Dividends received from associates
|
29
|
174
|
|
Other flows with impact on cash
|
(113)
|
(157)
|
|
Other flows with no impact on cash
|
98
|
(72)
|
|
Cash flows provided by operating activities, excluding changes in net working capital
|
1,699
|
2,092
|
|
(Increase) decrease in inventories
|
3
|
37
|
|
(Increase) decrease in trade accounts receivable
|
(74)
|
(112)
|
|
Increase (decrease) in trade accounts payable
|
36
|
(127)
|
|
Changes in other accounts receivable and payable
|
90
|
110
|
|
Change in other working capital requirements
|
55
|
(92)
|
|
Cash flows provided by (used in) operating activities
|
1,754
|
2,000
|
|
Capital expenditure
|
(706)
|
(699)
|
|
Purchase of businesses and other investments, net of cash and cash equivalents acquired
|
(259)
|
(147)
|
|
Proceeds from the sale of businesses and other investments, including indebtedness of companies sold
|
329
|
1,024
|
|
(Increase) decrease in long-term loans and other long-term assets
|
67
|
36
|
|
Cash flows provided by (used in) investing activities
|
(569)
|
214
|
|
Increase in capital and additional paid-in capital
|
48
|
2,977
|
|
Purchases of treasury stock (net of disposals)
|
46
|
100
|
|
Dividends paid to Danone shareholders and to minority interests
|
(705)
|
(451)
|
|
Settlement of debt hedge financial instruments (mainly equalization payments)
|
|
(154)
|
|
Increase (decrease) in noncurrent financial liabilities
|
1,338
|
(4,154)
|
|
Increase (decrease) in current financial liabilities
|
(1,901)
|
(427)
|
|
Increase (decrease) in marketable securities
|
63
|
(60)
|
|
Cash flows provided by (used in) financing activities
|
(1,111)
|
(2,169)
|
|
Effect of exchange rate changes
|
(31)
|
8
|
|
Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
|
43
|
53
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
|
548
|
591
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period
|
591
|
644
|
|
Supplemental disclosures
|
|
|
|
Payments during the year of:
|
|
|
|
• net interest
|
433
|
272
|
|
• income tax
|
430
|
413
|
Yee would like answers to the following questions:
- What are the major sources of cash for Groupe Danone?
- What are the major uses of cash for Groupe Danone?
- What is the relationship between net income and cash flow from operating activities?
- Is cash flow from operating activities sufficient to cover capital expenditures?
- Other than capital expenditures, is cash being used or generated in investing activities?
- What types of financing cash flows does Groupe Danone have?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Andrew Potter is examining an abbreviated common-size cash flow statement for Dell Inc. (NASDAQ: DELL), a provider of technological products and services. The common-size cash flow statement was prepared by dividing each line item by total net revenue for the same year. The terminology is that used by Dell. “Change in cash from” is used instead of “cash provided by (used in).”
|
|
29-Jan-10
|
30-Jan-09
|
1-Feb-OS
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
2.71%
|
4.06%
|
4.82%
|
|
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
1.61
|
1.26
|
0.99
|
|
Stock-based compensation
|
0.59
|
0.68
|
0.54
|
|
In-process research and development charges
|
0.00
|
0.00
|
0.14
|
|
Effects of exchange rate changes on monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies
|
0.11
|
(0.19)
|
0.05
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
(0.10)
|
0.14
|
(0.50)
|
|
|
29-Jan-10
|
30-Jan-09
|
1-Feb-08
|
|
Provision for doubtful accounts-including financing receivables
|
0.81
|
0.51
|
0.31
|
|
Other
|
0.19
|
0.05
|
0.05
|
|
Changes in operating assets and liabilities, net of effects from acquisitions:
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
(1.25)
|
0.79
|
(1.78)
|
|
Financing receivables
|
(2.05)
|
(0.49)
|
(0.64)
|
|
Inventories
|
(0.35)
|
0.51
|
(0.81)
|
|
Other assets
|
(0.43)
|
(0.17)
|
(0 20)
|
|
Accounts payable
|
5.36
|
(5.10)
|
1.37
|
|
Deferred services revenue
|
0.26
|
1.09
|
1.69
|
|
Accrued and other liabilities
|
(0.08)
|
(0.02)
|
0.45
|
|
Change in cash from operating activities
|
738
|
3.10
|
6.46
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Investments: Purchases
|
(2.61)
|
(2.59)
|
(3.92)
|
|
Investments: Maturities and sales
|
2.91
|
3.82
|
6.02
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
(0.69)
|
(0.72)
|
(1.36)
|
|
Proceeds from sale of facility and land
|
0.03
|
0.07
|
0.00
|
|
Acquisition of business, net of cash received
|
(6.83)
|
(0.29)
|
(3.63)
|
|
Change in cash from investing activities
|
(7.20)
|
0.29
|
(2.88)
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Repurchase of common stock
|
0.00
|
(4.69)
|
(6.55)
|
|
Issuance of common stock under employee plans
|
0.00
|
0.13
|
0.22
|
|
Issuance of commercial paper (maturity 90 days or less), net
|
0.14
|
0.16
|
(0.16)
|
|
Proceeds from debt
|
3.89
|
2.49
|
0.11
|
|
Repayments of debt
|
(0.23)
|
(0.39)
|
(0.27)
|
|
Other
|
0.00
|
0.00
|
(0.09)
|
|
Change in cash from financing activities
|
3.80
|
(230)
|
(6.74)
|
|
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents
|
0.33
|
-0.13
|
0.25
|
Based on the information in the previous exhibit:
1. Discuss the significance of
A. depreciation and amortization.
B. capital expenditures.
2. Compare Dell’s operating cash flow as a percentage of revenue with Dell’s net profit margin.
3. Discuss Dell’s use of its positive operating cash flow.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Andrew Potter is comparing the cash-flow-generating ability of Dell Inc. with that of other computer manufacturers: Hewlett Packard (NYSE: HPQ) and Apple Inc. (NASDAQ: AAPL). He collects information from the companies’ annual reports and prepares the following table.
Cash flow from operating activities
|
As a percentage of total net revenue
|
|
|
|
|
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
DELL HPQ AAPL
|
7.38% 11.68% 23.68%
|
3.10% 1233% 29.55%
|
6.46% 9.22% 22.79%
|
|
As a percentage of ending total assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
DELL HPQ AAPL
|
11.61% 11.65% 21.39%
|
7.15% 12.87% 24.25%
|
14.33% 10.84% 21.58%
|
|
AAPL = Apple; HPQ= Hewlett Packard.
|
|
|
|
What is Potter likely to conclude about the relative cash-flow-generating ability of these companies?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst gathered the following information from a company’s 2010 financial statements (in $ millions):
|
Year Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2010
|
|
Net sales
|
245.8
|
254.6
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
168.3
|
175.9
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
73.2
|
68.3
|
|
Inventory
|
39.0
|
47.8
|
|
Accounts payable
|
20.3
|
22.9
|
Based only on the information given here, the company’s 2010 statement of cash flows in the direct format would include amounts (in $ millions) for cash received from customers and cash paid to suppliers, respectively, that areclosestto:
|
Cash Received from Customers
|
Cash Paid to Suppliers
|
|
A.
|
249.7
|
169.7
|
|
B.
|
259.5
|
174.5
|
|
C.
|
259.5
|
182.1
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst gathered the following information from a company’s 2010 financial statements (in $ millions):
|
Balances as of Year Ended 31 December
|
2009
|
2010
|
|
Retained earnings
|
120
|
145
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
38
|
43
|
|
Inventory
|
45
|
48
|
|
Accounts payable
|
36
|
29
|
In 2010, the company declared and paid cash dividends of $10 million and recorded depreciation expense in the amount of $25 million. The company considers dividends paid a financing activity. The company’s 2010 cash flow from operations (in $ millions) wasclosestto
A. 25.
B. 45.
C. 75.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Silver ago Incorporated, an international metals company, reported a loss on the sale of equipment of $2 million in 2010. In addition, the company’s income statement shows depreciation expense of $8 million and the cash flow statement shows capital expenditure of $10 million, all of which was for the purchase of new equipment. Using the following information from the comparative balance sheets, how much cash did the company receive from the equipment sale?
|
Balance Sheet Item
|
12/31/2009
|
12/31/2010
|
Change
|
|
Equipment
|
$100 million
|
$105 million
|
$5 million
|
|
Accumulated depreciation — Equipment
|
$40 million
|
$46 million
|
$6 million
|
A. $1 million
B. $2 million
C. $3 million
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jaderong Plinkett Stores reported net income of $25 million. The company has no outstanding debt. Using the following information from the comparative balance sheets (in millions), what should the company report in the financing section of the statement of cash flows in 2010?
|
Balance Shea Item
|
12/31/2009
|
12/31/2010
|
Change
|
|
Common stock
|
$100
|
$102
|
$2
|
|
Additional paid-in capital common stock
|
$100
|
$140
|
$40
|
|
Retained earnings
|
$100
|
$115
|
$15
|
|
Total stockholders” equity
|
$300
|
$357
|
$57
|
A. Issuance of common stock of $42 million; dividends paid of $10 million
B. Issuance of common stock of $38 million; dividends paid of $10 million
C. Issuance of common stock of $42 million; dividends paid of $40 million
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Based on the following information for Star Inc., what are the total net adjustments that the company would make to net income in order to derive operating cash flow?
|
|
Year Ended
|
|
|
|
Income statement item
|
|
12/31/2010
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
$20 million
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
|
$2 million
|
|
|
Balance sheet item
|
12/31/2009
|
12/31/2010
|
Change
|
|
Accounts receivabk
|
$25 million
|
$22 million
|
($3 million)
|
|
Inventory
|
$10 million
|
$14 million
|
$4 million
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$8 million
|
$13 million
|
$5 million
|
A. Add $2 million
B. Add $6 million
C. Subtract $6 million
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analyst has calculated a ratio using as the numerator the sum of operating cash flow, interest, and taxes and as the denominator the amount of interest. What is this ratio, what does it measure, and what does it indicate?
A. This ratio is an interest coverage ratio, measuring a company’s ability to meet its interest obligations and indicating a company’s solvency.
B. This ratio is an effective tax ratio, measuring the amount of a company’s operating cash flow used for taxes and indicating a company’s efficiency in tax management.
C. This ratio is an operating profitability ratio, measuring the operating cash flow generated accounting for taxes and interest and indicating a company’s liquidity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Let”s say you want to know how well Icon manages its collection of sales on credit. Assume that 95% of the net sales are credit sales and that the initial accounts receivable balance was $50,000. Using the financial statements provided, answer the following questions:
How would you analyze the given scenario?
Which ratio will you calculate?
What will be the ratio?
Net credit sales = 95% of $11,000,000 = $10,450,000
Average accounts receivable = $1,190,000 + $50,000 divided by 2 = $620,000
Accounts receivable turnover = $10,450,000 / $620,000 = 16.85
On an average, for how many days during a year are the company’s accounts receivables outstanding?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An increase in the firm’s receivable turnover ratio means that:
- The firm is collecting credit more quickly than earlier
- Cash sales have decreased
- The firm has initiated more liberal credit terms
- Inventories have increased
|
Item
|
2001
|
2002
|
|
Sales
|
$200,000
|
$180,000
|
|
Cost of good sold
|
$100,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Net income
|
$40,000
|
$36,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (Dec. 31)
|
$16,000
|
$8,000
|
|
Inventory (Dec. 31)
|
$20,000
|
$40,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Define purchase discounts.
- Cash discounts that reduce the cost of merchandise for the buyer if the buyer pays the cost within a specified time, which is less than the otherwise stipulated time of repayment
- Cash discounts that reduce the cost of merchandise for the buyer if payment is made within six months of a purchase
- Discounts that reduce the cost of merchandise for the buyer if the purchase is made on credit
- Cash discounts that reduce the cost of merchandise for the buyer if payment is to be made in instalments
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brummy Co. consists of several investment centres. Green Division has a controllable investment of $750,000 and profits are expected to be $150,000 this year. An investment opportunity is offered to Green that will yield a profit of $15,000 from an additional investment of $100,000. Brummy accepts projects if the ROI exceeds the cost of capital, which is 12%.
- Calculate Green’s ROI currently, for the additional investment and after the investment.
- How will Green and Brummy Co. view this investment opportunity?
- Calculate the effect of the new investment opportunity on Green’s residual income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Anston Industries is the manufacturing division of a large multinational. The divisional general manager is about to purchase new equipment for the manufacture of a new product. He can buy either the Compax or the Newpax equipment, each of which has the same capacity and an expected life of four years. Each type of equipment has different capital costs and expected cash flows, as follows:
|
Compax
|
Newpax
|
|
Initial capital investment
|
£6,400,000
|
£5,200,000
|
|
Net cash inflows (before tax)
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
£2,400,000
|
£2,600,000
|
|
Year 2
|
£2,400,000
|
£2,200,000
|
|
Year 3
|
£2,400,000
|
£1,500,000
|
|
Year 4
|
£2,400,000
|
£1,000,000
|
|
Net present value (@ 16% p.a.)
|
£315,634
|
£189,615
|
The equipment will be installed and paid for at the end of the current year (Year 0) and the cash flows accrue at the end of each year. There is no scrap value for either piece of equipment. In calculating divisional returns, divisional assets are valued at net book value at the beginning of each year.
The multinational expects each division to achieve a minimum return before tax of 16%. Anston is just managing to achieve that target. Anything less than a 16% return would make the divisional general manager ineligible for his profit-sharing bonus.
- Prepare accounting rate of return (ARR) and residual income (RI) calculations for the Compax and the Newpax for each year.
- Suggest which equipment is preferred under each method.
- Compare this with the NPV calculation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Serendipity is an Internet Service Provider that has a major investment in computer and telecoms equipment, which needs replacement on a regular basis. The company has recently evaluated a $5 million equipment-replacement programme, which has an expected life of five years. The proposal is supported by the data in. Serendipity – capital investment evaluation.
|
In $1000
|
Year 0
|
1
|
2,
|
3
|
4
|
5
|
6
|
|
Capital investment
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation 20% p.a.
|
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
|
Asset value end of year
|
|
4,000
|
3 000
|
2 000
|
1,000
|
0
|
|
|
Profit
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional income
|
|
1,500
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
2,500
|
2,500
|
|
|
Additional expenses
|
|
-150
|
-350
|
-500
|
-500
|
-500
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
|
-1,000
|
-1,000
|
-1,000
|
-1,000
|
-1,000
|
|
|
Profit
|
|
350
|
650
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
|
Tax @ 35%
|
|
-105
|
-195
|
-300
|
-300
|
-300
|
|
|
Profit after tax
|
|
245
|
455
|
700
|
700
|
700
|
|
|
ROI
|
|
6.1%
|
15.2%
|
35.0%
|
70.0%
|
n/a
|
|
|
Cash flow
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Capital investment
|
-5,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash receipts
|
|
1,500
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
2,500
|
2,500
|
|
|
Additional expenses
|
|
-150
|
-350
|
-500
|
-500
|
-500
|
|
|
Tax @ 35%
|
|
|
-105
|
-195
|
-300
|
-300
|
-300
|
|
Net cash flow
|
-5,000
|
1,350
|
1,545
|
1,805
|
1,700
|
1,700
|
-300
|
|
Discount rate
|
8%
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net present value
|
$1,225
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
April Co. receives payment from customers for credit sales as follows:
30% in the month of sale.
60% in the month following sale.
8% in the second month following the sale.
2% become bad debts and are never collected.
The following sales are expected:
|
January
|
£100,000
|
|
February
|
£120,000
|
|
March
|
£110,000
|
- Calculate how much will be received in March.
- What is the value of receivables at the end of March?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Creassos Co. was formed in July 2010 with €20,000 of capital. €7,500 of this was used to purchase equipment. The owner budgeted for the following:
|
|
Sales
|
Receipts from customers
|
Purchases
|
Payments to suppliers
|
Wages
|
Other expenses
|
|
July
|
20,000
|
—
|
8,000
|
5,000
|
3,000
|
2,000
|
|
Aug
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
15,000
|
10,000
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
Sept
|
40,000
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
5,000
|
3,000
|
Wages and other expenses are paid in cash. In addition to the above, depreciation is €2,400 per annum. No inventory is held by the company.
- Calculate the profit for each of the three months from July to September and in total.
- Calculate the cash balance at the end of each month.
- Prepare a Statement of Financial Position at the end of September.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Placibo Ltd has estimated the sales units and selling prices for its products for each of the next four months. This information is shown in table.
|
|
June
|
July
|
August
|
September
|
|
Forecast sales units
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
22,000
|
25,000
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$4.25
|
$4.50
|
$4.50
|
$4.75
|
Placibo’s average cost of sales is 30% of revenue. It incurs overhead costs of $55,000 per month, of which $25,000 per month is depreciation. Placibo receives payment from its customers in the month following the month of sale, and it pays its suppliers in the month following the recognition of the cost of sales in the Income Statement. Overheads are paid in the same month in which they are incurred.
a. Prepare a budgeted Income Statement for each of the three months July–September.
b. Prepare a cash forecast for each of the three months July–September.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gargantua plc has produced budget and actual information in. Gargantua budget and actual.
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
|
Sales units
|
10,000
|
11,000
|
|
Price per unit
|
£37.10
|
£36
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
|
|
Magna – per unit
|
4 kg @ £1.50/kg
|
46,500 kg – cost £67,425
|
|
Carta – per unit
|
1 kg @ £5/kg
|
11,500 kg – cost £58,650
|
|
Labour – per unit
|
2.5 hours @ £7
|
26,400 hours – cost £187,440
|
|
Fixed costs
|
£75,000
|
£68,000
|
a. Prepare a traditional budget versus actual report using the above figures.
b. Prepare a flexible budget for Gargantua.
c. Calculate all sales and cost price and efficiency variances.
d. Reconcile the original budget and actual profit figures by showing the effect of the variance analysis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eggscell Ltd has produced budget and actual information for one of its business units for the previous month. This information is shown in . Eggscell Ltd.
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
|
Analysis of labour
|
|
|
|
Number of hours
|
10,000
|
9000
|
|
Average rate per hour
|
$75
|
$80
|
a. Show how a traditional budget versus actual variance report would be presented to the manager of this business unit.
b. Use a flexed budget to present an actual versus budget comparison.
c. Explain how the use of a flexed budget provides variance information that is more meaningful to managers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Revenue from sales of vehicles, service parts and other related products is recognized when the risks and rewards of ownership of the goods are transferred to the customer, the amount of revenue can be estimated reliably and collectability is reasonably assured. Revenue is recognized net of discounts, cash sales incentives, customer bonuses and rebates granted.
- Daimler uses price discounts in response to a number of market and product factors, including pricing actions and incentives offered by competitors, the amount of excess industry production capacity, the intensity of market competition and consumer demand for the product. The Group may offer a variety of sales incentive programs at any point in time, including cash offers to dealers and consumers, lease subsidies which reduce the consumers’ monthly lease payment, or reduced financing rate programs offered to consumers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition for Long-Term Contracts: Percentage-of-Completion Method
- Stelle Technology has a contract to build a network for a customer for a total sales price of €10 million. The network will take an estimated three years to build, and total building costs are estimated to be €6 million. Stelle recognizes long-term contract revenue using the percentage-of-completion method and estimates percentage complete based on expenditure incurred as a percentage of total estimated expenditures.
- 1. At the end of Year 1, the company had spent €3 million. Total costs to complete are estimated to be another €3 million. How much revenue will Stelle recognize in Year 1?
- 2. At the end of Year 2, the company had spent an additional €2.4 million for an accumulated total of €5.4 million. Total costs to complete are estimated to be another €0.6 million. How much revenue will Stelle recognize in Year 2?
- 3. At the end of Year 3, the contract is complete. The company spent an accumulated total of €6 million. How much revenue will Stelle recognize in Year 3?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition for Long-Term Contracts: Outcome Cannot Be Reliably Measured
Kolenda Technology Group has a contract to build a network for a customer for a total sales price of $10 million. This network will take an estimated three years to build, but considerable uncertainty surrounds total building costs because new technologies are involved. In other words, the outcome cannot be reliably measured, but it is probable that the costs up to the agreed upon price will be recovered.
Assuming the following expenditures, how much revenue, expense (cost of construction), and income would the company recognize each year under IFRS and using the completed contract method under U.S. GAAP? The amounts periodically billed to the customer and received from the customer are not necessarily equivalent to the amount of revenue being recognized in the period. For simplicity, assume Kolenda pays cash for all expenditures.
1. At the end of Year 1, Kolenda has spent $3 million.
2. At the end of Year 2, Kolenda has spent a total of $5.4 million.
3. At the end of Year 3, the contract is complete. Kolenda spent a total of $6 million.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Installment and Cost Recovery Methods of Revenue Recognition
Assume the total sales price and cost of a property are $2,000,000 and $1,100,000, respectively, so that the total profit to be recognized is $900,000. The amount of cash received by the seller as a down payment is $300,000, with the remainder of the sales price to be received over a 10-year period. It has been determined that there is significant doubt about the ability and commitment of the buyer to complete all payments. How much profit will be recognized attributable to the down payment if:
1. the installment method is used?
2. the cost recovery method is used?
EXAMPLE 4-5 Gross versus Net Reporting of Revenues
Flyalot has agreements with several major airlines to obtain airline tickets at reduced rates. The company pays only for tickets it sells to customers. In the most recent period, Flyalot sold airline tickets to customers over the Internet for a total of $1.1 million. The cost of these tickets to Flyalot was $1 million. The company’s direct selling costs were $2,000. Once the customers receive their ticket, the airline is responsible for providing all services associated with the customers’ flight.
1. Demonstrate the reporting of revenues under:
A. gross reporting.
B. net reporting.
2. Determine and justify the appropriate method for reporting revenues.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition Policy for Apple
As disclosed in the excerpt from notes to the consolidated financial statements shown below (emphasis added), Apple Inc. (NasdaqGS: AAPL) uses different revenue recognition policies depending on the type of revenue producing activity, including product sales, service and support contracts, and products obtained from other companies. Note that these are only the first three paragraphs of Apple’s disclosure on revenue recognition; the entire revenue recognition portion has nine paragraphs.
Revenue Recognition
Net sales consist primarily of revenue from the sale of hardware, software, digital content and applications, peripherals, and service and support contracts. The Company recognizes revenue when persuasive evidence of an arrangement exists, delivery has occurred, the sales price is fixed or determinable, and collection is probable. Product is considered delivered to the customer once it has been shipped and title and risk of loss have been transferred. For most of the Company’s product sales, these criteria are met at the time the product is shipped. For online sales to individuals, for some sales to education customers in the U.S., and for certain other sales, the Company defers revenue until the customer receives the product because the Company legally retains a portion of the risk of loss on these sales during transit[portions omitted].
Revenue fromservice and support contractsis deferred and recognized ratably over the service coverage periods. These contracts typically include extended phone support, repair services, web-based support resources, diagnostic tools, and extend the service coverage offered under the Company’s standard limited warranty.
The Company sells software and peripheralproducts obtained from other companies. The Company generally establishes its own pricing and retains related inventory risk, is the primary obligor in sales transactions with its customers, and assumes the credit risk for amounts billed to its customers. Accordingly, the Company generally recognizes revenue for the sale of products obtained from other companies based on the gross amount billed.
1. What criteria does Apple apply to determine when to recognize revenue from product sales?
2. What principle underpins the company’s deferral of revenue from service and support contracts?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Matching of Inventory Costs with Revenues
Kahn Distribution Limited (KDL) purchases inventory items for resale. At the beginning of 2009, Kahn had no inventory on hand. During 2009, Kahn had the following transactions:
Inventory Purchases
|
First quarter
|
2,000 units at $40 per unit
|
|
Second quarter
|
1,500 units at $41 per unit
|
|
Third quarter
|
2,200 units at $43 per unit
|
|
Fourth quarter
|
1,900units at $45 per unit
|
|
Total
|
7,600 units at a total cost of $321,600
|
KDL sold 5,600 units of inventory during the year at $50 per unit, and received cash. KDL determines that there were 2,000 remaining units of inventory and specifically identifies that 1,900 were those purchased in the fourth quarter and 100 were purchased in the third quarter. What are the revenue and expense associated with these transactions during 2009 based on specific identification of inventory items as sold or remaining in inventory?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alternative Inventory Costing Methods
In Example KDL was able to specifically identify which inventory items were sold and which remained in inventory to be carried over to later periods. This is called thespecific identification methodand inventory and cost of goods sold are based on their physical flow. It is generally not feasible to specifically identify which items were sold and which remain on hand, so accounting standards permit the assignment of inventory costs to costs of goods sold and to ending inventory using cost formulas (IFRS terminology) or cost flow assumptions (U.S. GAAP). The cost formula or cost flow assumption determines which goods are assumed to be sold and which goods are assumed to remain in inventory. Both IFRS and U.S. GAAP permit the use of the first in, first out (FIFO) method, and the weighted average cost method to assign costs.
Under theFIFO method, the oldest goods purchased (or manufactured) are assumed to be sold first and the newest goods purchased (or manufactured) are assumed to remain in inventory. Cost of goods in beginning inventory and costs of the first items purchased (or manufactured) flow into cost of goods sold first, as if the earliest items purchased sold first. Ending inventory would, therefore, include the most recent purchases. It turns out that those items specifically identified as sold in Example 7 were also the first items purchased, so in this example, under FIFO, the cost of goods sold would also be $231,800, calculated as previously.
Theweighted average cost methodassigns the average cost of goods available for sale to the units sold and remaining in inventory. The assignment is based on the average cost per unit (total cost of goods available for sale/total units available for sale) and the number of units sold and the number remaining in inventory.
For KDL, the weighted average cost per unit would be
$321,600/7,600 units=$42.3158 per unit
Cost of goods sold using the weighted average cost method would be
5,600 units at $42.3158=$236,968
Ending inventory using the weighted average cost method would be
2,000 units at $42.3158=$84,632
Another method is permitted under U.S. GAAP but is not permitted under IFRS. This is the last in, first out (LIFO) method. Under theLIFO method, the newest goods purchased (or manufactured) are assumed to be sold first and the oldest goods purchased (or manufactured) are assumed to remain in inventory. Costs of the latest items purchased flow into cost of goods sold first, as if the most recent items purchased were sold first. Although this may seem contrary to common sense, it is logical in certain circumstances. For example, lumber in a lumberyard may be stacked up with the oldest lumber on the bottom. As lumber is sold, it is sold from the top of the stack, so the last lumber purchased and put in inventory is the first lumber out. Theoretically, a company should choose a method linked to the physical inventory flows.29Under the LIFO method, in the KDL example, it would be assumed that the 2,000 units remaining in ending inventory would have come from the first quarter’s purchases:30
Ending inventory 2,000 units at $40 per unit=$80,000
The remaining costs would be allocated to cost of goods sold under LIFO:
Total costs of $321,600 less $80,000 remaining in ending inventory=$241,600
Alternatively, the cost of the last 5,600 units purchased is allocated to cost of goods sold under LIFO:
1,900 units at $45 per unit+2,200 units at $43 per unit+1,500 units at $41 per unit=$241,600
An alternative way to think about expense recognition is that the company created an asset (inventory) of $321,600 as it made its purchases. At the end of the period, the value of the company’s inventory is $80,000. Therefore, the amount of the Cost of goods sold expense recognized the period should be the difference: $241,600.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sensitivity of Annual Depreciation Expense to Varying Estimates of Useful Life and Residual Value
Using the straight-line method of depreciation, annual depreciation expense is calculated as:
Cost — Residual value
Estimated useful life
Assume the cost of an asset is $10,000. If, for example, the residual value of the asset is estimated to be $0 and its useful life is estimated to be 5 years, the annual depreciation expense under the straight-line method would be ($10,000-$0)/5 years=$2,000. In contrast, holding the estimated useful life of the asset constant at 5 years but increasing the estimated residual value of the asset to $4,000 would result in annual depreciation expense of only $1,200 [calculated as ($10,000-$4,000)/5 years]. Alternatively, holding the estimated residual value at $0 but increasing the estimated useful life of the asset to 10 years would result in annual depreciation expense of only $1,000 [calculated as ($10,000-$0)/10 years]. Shows annual depreciation expense for various combinations of estimated useful life and residual value.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An Illustration of Diminishing Balance Depreciation
Assume the cost of computer equipment was $11,000, the estimated residual value is $1,000, and the estimated useful life is five years. Under the diminishing or declining balance method, the first step is to determine the straight-line rate, the rate at which the asset would be depreciated under the straight-line method. This rate is measured as 100 percent divided by the useful life or 20 percent for a five-year useful life. Under the straight-line method, 1/5 or 20 percent of the depreciable cost of the asset (here, $11,000-$1,000=$10,000) would be expensed each year for five years: The depreciation expense would be $2,000 per year.
The next step is to determine an acceleration factor that approximates the pattern of the asset’s wear. Common acceleration factors are 150 percent and 200 percent. The latter is known asdouble declining balance depreciationbecause it depreciates the asset at double the straight-line rate. Using the 200 percent acceleration factor, the diminishing balance rate would be 40 percent (20 percent × 2.0). This rate is then applied to the remaining undepreciated balance of the asset each period (known as thenet book value).
At the beginning of the first year, the net book value is $11,000. Depreciation expense for the first full year of use of the asset would be 40 percent of $11,000, or $4,400. Under this method, the residual value, if any, is generally not used in the computation of the depreciation each period (the 40 percent is applied to $11,000 rather than to $11,000 minus residual value). However, the company will stop taking depreciation when the salvage value is reached.
At the beginning of Year 2, the net book value is measured as
|
Asset cost
|
$11,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(4,400)
|
|
Net book value
|
$6,600
|
For the second full year, depreciation expense would be $6,600 × 40 percent, or $2,640. At the end of the second year (i.e., beginning of the third year), a total of $7,040 ($4,400+$2,640) of depreciation would have been recorded. So, the remaining net book value at the beginning of the third year would be
|
Asset cost
|
$11,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(7,040)
|
|
Net book value
|
$3,960
|
For the third full year, depreciation would be $3,960 × 40 percent, or $1,584. At the end of the third year, a total of $8,624 ($4,400+$2,640+$1,584) of depreciation would have been recorded. So, the remaining net book value at the beginning of the fourth year would be
|
Asset cost
|
$11,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(8,624)
|
|
Net book value
|
$2,376
|
For the fourth full year, depreciation would be $2,376 × 40 percent, or $950. At the end of the fourth year, a total of $9,574 ($4,400+$2,640+$1,584+$950) of depreciation would have been recorded. So, the remaining net book value at the beginning of the fifth year would be
|
Asset cost
|
$11,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(9,574)
|
|
Net book value
|
$1,426
|
For the fifth year, if deprecation were determined as in previous years, it would amount to $570 ($1,426 × 40 percent). However, this would result in a remaining net book value of the asset below its estimated residual value of $1,000. So, instead, only $426 would be depreciated, leaving a $1,000 net book value at the end of the fifth year.
|
Asset cost
|
$11,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(10,000)
|
|
Net book value
|
$1,000
|
Companies often use a zero or small residual value, which creates problems for diminishing balance depreciation because the asset never fully depreciates. In order to fully depreciate the asset over the initially estimated useful life when a zero or small residual value is assumed, companies often adopt a depreciation policy that combines the diminishing balance and straight-line methods. An example would be a deprecation policy of using double-declining balance depreciation and switching to the straight-line method halfway through the useful life.
Exhibit 4-9Extraordinary Gain on Debt Forgiveness
In its annual report, ForgeHouse, Inc. (OTCBB: FOHE) made the following disclosure describing an extraordinary gain on debt forgiveness:
On September 30, 2009, the Company entered into a Debt Forgiveness Agreement with Insurance Medical Group Limited (f/k/a After All Limited), Bryan Irving, and Ian Morl, pursuant to which $785,000 (plus accrued and unpaid interest and any penalties of $80,141) of the Company’s outstanding obligations in favor of Arngrove Group Holdings were forgiven and all $200,000 (plus accrued and unpaid interest and any penalties of $23,418) of the Company’s outstanding obligations in favor of After All Group, Limited, was forgiven. Gain on these two debt restructurings was a gross of $1,088,559 for the year ended December 31, 2009.
In December 2009, the Company entered into agreements with two of its vendors to reduce the amounts owed to the vendors in exchange for up-front payments. Gain on the restructure of amounts owed to the two vendors was $244,041.
These amounts are presented in the statement of operations net of income taxes of $453,084 for a net extraordinary gain on debt restructuring of $879,516.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue Recognition: A Change in Accounting Principle
Apple’s amended 10-K for the year ended 26 September 2009 explains how a change in accounting standards (the company refers to these as accounting principles) affects its financial statements. The following excerpt (emphasis added) is from the explanatory note included in the amendment.
Under the historical accounting principles, the Company was required to account for sales of both iPhone and Apple TV using subscription accounting because the Company indicated it might from time-to-time provide future unspecified software upgrades and features for those products free of charge. Undersubscription accounting, revenue and associated product cost of sales for iPhone and Apple TV were deferred at the time of sale and recognized on a straight-line basis over each product’s estimated economic life. This resulted in the deferral of significant amounts of revenue and cost of sales related to iPhone and Apple TV. Costs incurred by the Company for engineering, sales, marketing and warranty were expensed as incurred. As of September 26, 2009, based on the historical accounting principles, total accumulated deferred revenue and deferred costs associated with past iPhone and Apple TV sales were $12.1 billion and $5.2 billion, respectively.
Thenew accounting principles generally require the Company to account for the sale of both iPhone and Apple TV as two deliverables. The first deliverable is the hardware and software delivered at the time of sale, and the second deliverable is the right included with the purchase of iPhone and Apple TV to receive on a when-and-if-available basis future unspecified software upgrades and features relating to the product’s software.The new accounting principles result in the recognition of substantially all of the revenue and product costs from sales of iPhone and Apple TV at the time of sale. Additionally, the Company is required to estimate a standalone selling price for the unspecified software upgrade right included with the sale of iPhone and Apple TV and recognizes that amount ratably over the 24 month estimated life of the related hardware device. For all periods presented, the Company’s estimated selling price for the software upgrade right included with each iPhone and Apple TV sold is $25 and $10, respectively. The adoption of the new accounting principles increased the Company’s net sales by $6.4 billion, $5.0 billion and $572 million for 2009, 2008 and 2007, respectively. As of September 26, 2009, the revised total accumulated deferred revenue associated with iPhone and Apple TV sales to date was $483 million; revised accumulated deferred costs for such sales were zero.
1. Under the historical accounting principle, how would the revenue from a sale of an iPhone be reflected in Apple’s financial statements?
2. How and why did adoption of the new accounting principles affect Apple’s revenues in 2009?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Basic EPS Calculation (2)
For the year ended 31 December 2009, Angler Products had net income of $2,500,000. The company declared and paid $200,000 of dividends on preferred stock. The company also had the following common stock share information:
|
Shares outstanding on 1 January 2009
|
1,000,000
|
|
Shares issued on 1 April 2009
|
200,000
|
|
Shares repurchased (treasury shares) on 1 October 2009
|
(100,000)
|
|
Shares outstanding on 31 December 2009
|
1,100,000
|
1. What is the company’s weighted average number of shares outstanding?
2. What is the company’s basic EPS?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Other Comprehensive Income
Assume a company’s beginning shareholders equity is €200 million, its net income for the year is €20 million, its cash dividends for the year are €3 million, and there was no issuance or repurchase of common stock. The company’s actual ending shareholders equity is €227 million.
1. What amount has bypassed the net income calculation by being classified as other comprehensive income?
A. €0
B. €7 million
C. €10 million
2. Which of the following statements best describes other comprehensive income?
A. Income earned from diverse geographic and segment activities.
B. Income that increases stockholders’ equity but is not reflected as part of net income.
C. Income earned from activities that are not part of the company’s ordinary business activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Magnificent Products makes three products, each requiring two machine hours per unit to produce. The following information has been provided by the sales department in relation to each product:
|
|
Macro
|
Mezzo
|
Micro
|
|
Budgeted sales units
|
10,000
|
7,500
|
5,000
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
£12
|
£16
|
i18
|
|
Variable costs per unit
|
£6
|
£7
|
£4
|
If the company has a limited production capacity, preventing all its budgeted sales from being produced, how should Magnificent rank its products for manufacture in order to maximize profitability?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Swift Airlines has a daily return flight from London to Nice. The aircraft for the flight has a capacity of 120 passengers. Swift sells its tickets at a range of prices. Its business plan works on the basis of the following mix of ticket prices for each day’s flight:
|
Business
|
30 @ £300
|
£9,000
|
|
Economy regular
|
40 @ £200
|
£8,000
|
|
Advance purchase
|
20 @ £120
|
£2,400
|
|
7-day purchase
|
20 @ £65
|
£1,300
|
|
Stand-by
|
10 @ £30
|
£300
|
|
Revenue
|
120
|
£21,000
|
Swift’s head office accounting department has calculated its costs as follows:
|
Cost per passenger (to cover additional fuel, insurance, baggage handling etc.) assuming full load
|
£25 per passenger
|
| |
£3,000 (120 @ £25)
|
|
Flight costs (to cover aircraft lease, flight and cabin crew costs, airport and landing charges etc.)
|
£7,500 per flight
|
|
Route costs (to cover the support needed for each destination)
|
£2,000 (based on ½ of the daily cost of £4,000 (balance charged to return flight))
|
|
Business overhead
|
£3,000 (allocation of head office overhead)
|
|
Total
|
£15,500
|
This results in a budgeted profit of £5,500 per flight, assuming that all seats are sold at the budgeted price. The head office accountant for European routes has advised the route manager for Nice that while the Nice–London inbound leg is breaking even, losses are being made on the London–Nice outbound leg. If profits cannot be generated, the route may need to be closed, with the aircraft and crew being assigned to another route. The route manager for Nice has extracted recent sales figures, a typical flight having the following sales mix:
|
% of tickets sold
|
|
|
|
|
Business
|
60
|
18 @ £300
|
£5,400
|
|
Economy regular
|
70
|
28 @ £200
|
£5,600
|
|
Advance purchase
|
80
|
16 @ £120
|
£1,920
|
|
7-day purchase
|
75
|
15 @ £65
|
£975
|
|
Stand-by
|
100
|
10 @ £30
|
£300
|
|
Revenue
|
|
87
|
£14,195
|
The route manager has calculated a loss on each outbound flight of £1,305. She believes that there is a market for 48-hour ticket purchases if a new fare of £40 was introduced, as this would be £5 less than the price charged by a competitor for the same ticket. She estimates that she could sell 15 seats per flight on this basis. This would not affect either the 7-day purchase, which is used by business travellers, or stand-by fares, which are usually oversubscribed. The additional revenue of £600 (15 @ £40) would cover almost half the loss. The route manager has prepared a report for her manager asking that the new fare be approved and allowing her three months to prove that the new tickets could be sold.
Comment on the route manager’s proposal.
Case studies provide the reader with the opportunity to interpret and analyse financial information produced by an accountant for use by non-accounting managers in decision-making. There is a suggested answer for the case in Part IV, although the nature of case studies is that there is rarely a single correct answer, as different approaches to the problem can highlight different aspects of the case and a range of possible approaches are possible.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grant & McKenzie is a firm of financial advisers that needs to calculate an hourly rate to charge customers for its services.
The average salary cost for its advisers is £40,000. National Insurance is 11% and the firm pays a pension contribution of 6%. Each adviser has four weeks’ annual holiday and there are 10 days per annum when the firm closes for bank holidays and Christmas. Each adviser is expected to do chargeable work for clients of 25 hours per week, the remainder of the time being administrative work. Calculate an hourly rate (to the nearest whole £) to cover the cost of each financial adviser.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cardinal Co. needs 20,000 units of a certain part to use in one of its products. The following information is available in relation to the cost to Cardinal to make each part:
|
Raw materials
|
$4
|
|
Production labour
|
16
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
8
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
10
|
|
Total
|
$38
|
The cost to buy the part from the Oriole Co. is $36. If Cardinal buys the part from Oriole instead of making it, Cardinal would have no use for the spare capacity. Additionally, 60% of the fixed manufacturing overheads would continue regardless of what decision is made. Cardinal decides that direct labour is an avoidable cost for the purposes of this decision.
Decide whether to make or buy the 20,000 parts, by comparing the relevant costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bromide Partners provides three services: accounting, audit and tax. The total business overheads of €650,000 have been divided into two groups:
|
Partners
|
€200,000
|
|
Juniors
|
€450,000
|
Partner hours are a measure of complexity and junior hours define the duration of the work. The hours spent by each type of staff are:
|
|
Accounting
|
Audit
|
Tax
|
Total
|
|
Partner hours
|
150
|
250
|
400
|
800
|
|
Junior hours
|
1,200
|
2,800
|
1,000
|
5,000
|
Calculate the total cost of providing audit services.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bendix Ltd is considering the alternatives of either purchasing component VX-1 from an outside supplier or producing the component itself. Production costs to Bendix are estimated at:
|
Production labour
|
$200
|
|
Raw materials
|
600
|
|
Variable overheads
|
100
|
|
Fixed overheads
|
300
|
|
Total
|
$1,200
|
An outside supplier, Cosmo Ltd, has quoted a price of $1,000 for each VX-1 for an order of 100 of these components. However, if Bendix accepts the quote from Cosmo, the company will need to give three months’ notice of redundancy to staff.
- Calculate the relevant costs of the alternative choices (show your workings) and make a recommendation to management as to which choice to accept.
- How would your recommendation differ if Bendix employees were on temporary contracts with no notice period?
- Explain the significance of a stock valuation of $1,300 for the VX-1 at the end of the last accounting period.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Victory Products Ltd manufactures high-technology products for the computer industry. Victory’s accountant has produced a profit report showing the profitability of each of its three main customers for last year.
Victory Products profit report.
|
|
Franklin Industries
|
Engineering Partners
|
Zeta PLC
|
Other customers
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
1,000,000
|
1,500,000
|
2,000,000
|
1,500,000
|
6,000,000
|
|
Cost of materials
|
250,000
|
600,000
|
750,000
|
750,000
|
2,350,000
|
|
Cost of labour
|
300,000
|
200,000
|
300,000
|
75,000
|
875,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
450,000
|
700,000
|
950,000
|
675,000
|
2,775,000
|
|
Corporate overheads: allocated as 30% of sales
|
300,000
|
450,000
|
600,000
|
450,000
|
|
|
Rental
|
|
|
|
|
250,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
|
|
|
|
350,000
|
|
Non-production salaries
|
|
|
|
|
600,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
|
|
|
|
350,000
|
|
Administration
|
|
|
|
|
250,000
|
|
Operating profit
|
150,000
|
250,000
|
350,000
|
225,000
|
975,000
|
Victory is operating at almost full capacity, but wishes to improve its profitability further. The accountant has reported that, based on the above figures, Franklin Industries is the least profitable customer and has recommended that prices be increased. If this is not possible, the accountant has suggested that Victory discontinues selling to Franklin and seeks more profitable business from Engineering Partners and Zeta.
Labour is the most significant limitation on capacity. It is highly specialized and is difficult to replace. Consequently, Victory does all it can to keep its workforce even where there are seasonal downturns in business. The company charges £100 per hour for all labour, which is readily transferable between each of the customer products.
You have been asked to comment on the accountant’s recommendations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Seaford Group produces chocolate products including an exclusive range of chocolate Easter eggs, producing and selling a total of 100,000 eggs each year. The materials cost is $1.25 per egg and the labour cost is $0.70. Additional variable overhead costs are estimated at $0.20 per egg. Fixed overhead costs for Seaford Group total $150,000.
An international company has offered to produce the 100,000 Easter eggs to the same quality on behalf of Seaford for $2.50 per egg. If Seaford accepts this offer it can use its labour to produce other products and its fixed costs can be reduced by $50,000. However, there will be transportation costs that Seaford has to bear to bring the Easter eggs to its premises, amounting to $0.25 per egg.
Apply relevant cost principles to determine whether Seaford should continue to make the Easter eggs in-house or should subcontract to the international company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Call Centre Services (CCS) operates two divisions: a call centre that answers incoming customer service calls on behalf of its clients; and a telemarketing operation that makes outgoing sales calls to seek new business for its clients. In the call centre, each operator can handle on average about 6,000 calls per annum.
Although staff are allocated to one division or the other, when there is a high volume of incoming calls sales staff from the telemarketing division assist customer service staff in the call centre division. This is the result of a recruitment ‘freeze’ being in place.
The finance department has produced the information shown in Table.
|
|
Call centre
|
Telemarketing
|
Total
|
|
Number of calls Fee per call
|
70,000 E5
|
25,000 E10
|
|
|
Revenue
|
350,000
|
250,000
|
600,000
|
|
Less expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Staff costs 10 @ E15,000 p.a. 5 @ E22,000 p.a.
|
150,000
|
110,000
|
260,000
|
|
Lease costs on telecoms and IT equipment (shared 50/50)
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
40,000
|
|
Rent (shared in proportion to staffing
|
80,000
|
40,000
|
120,000
|
|
2/3, 1/3)
|
|
|
|
|
Telephone call charges
|
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
250,000
|
190,000
|
440,000
|
|
Operating profit
|
E100,000
|
E60,000
|
E160,000
|
What conclusions can you draw about the performance of the two divisions?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BCF Ltd manufactures a product known as a Grunge. Direct material and labour costs for each Grunge are €300 and €150 respectively. To produce a Grunge requires 20 hours, comprising 10 hours in machining, 7 hours in assembly and 3 hours in finishing. Information for each department is:
|
|
Machining
|
Assembly
|
Finishing
|
|
Overhead costs (E)
|
120,000
|
80,000
|
30,000
|
|
Labour hours
|
20,000
|
10,000
|
10,000
|
Calculate the cost of producing a Grunge using a departmental overhead recovery rate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Engineering Products plc produces Product GH1, which incurs costs of d150 for direct materials and £75 for direct labour. The company has estimated its production overhead and direct labour hours for a period as:
|
|
Dept A
|
Dept B
|
Dept C
|
|
Overheads
|
150,000
|
200,000
|
125,000
|
|
Direct labour hours
|
5,000
|
10,000
|
5,000
|
Product GH1 is produced using 10 hours in Dept A, 12 hours in Dept B and 5 hours in Dept C.
Calculate the total cost of each GH1 using:
- a plant-wide overhead recovery rate; and
cost centre overhead recovery rates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Haridan Co. uses activity-based costing. The company has two products, A and B. The annual production and sales of Product A are 8,000 units and of product B 6,000 units. There are three activity cost pools, with estimated total cost and expected activity as follows:
|
|
|
|
Expected activity
|
|
|
Activity cost pool
|
Estimated cost
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Total
|
|
Activity 1
|
$20,000
|
100
|
400
|
500
|
|
Activity 2
|
$37,000
|
800
|
200
|
1,000
|
|
Activity 3
|
$91,200
|
800
|
3,000
|
3,800
|
Calculate the cost per unit of Product A and Product B under activity-based costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elandem PLC produces 20,000 units of Product L and 20,000 units of Product M. Under activity-based costing, €120,000 of costs are purchasing related. If 240 purchase orders are produced each period, and the number of orders used by each product is:
|
|
Product L
|
Product M
|
|
No. of orders
|
80
|
160
|
- Calculate the per-unit activity-based cost of purchasing for Products L and M.
- Calculate the overhead recovery for purchasing costs if those costs were recovered over the number of units of the product produced.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Heated Tools Ltd uses activity-based costing. It has identified three cost pools and their drivers as follows:
|
|
Purchasing
|
Quality control
|
Despatch
|
|
Cost pool
|
$60,000
|
$40,000
|
$30,000
|
|
Driver
|
12,000
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
|
Purchase orders
|
Stores issues
|
Deliveries
|
Product Hekla uses $100 of direct materials and $75 of direct labour. In addition, each Hekla has been identified as using five purchase orders, eight stores issues and two deliveries.
Calculate the total cost of each Hekla.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Samuelson uses activity-based costing. The company manufactures two products, X and Y. The annual production and sales of Product X are 3,000 units and of Product Y 2,000 units. There are three activity cost pools, with estimated total cost and expected activity as follows:
|
|
|
|
Expected activity
|
|
|
Cost pool
|
Estimated cost
|
X
|
Y
|
Total
|
|
Activity 1
|
E12,000
|
300
|
500
|
800
|
|
Activity 2
|
E15,000
|
100
|
400
|
500
|
|
Activity 3
|
E32,000
|
400
|
1200
|
1600
|
|
Total costs
|
E59,000
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Klingon Holdings has prepared a marketing study that shows the following demand and average price for each of its services for the following period:
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
|
Volume
|
150,000
|
200,000
|
350,000
|
|
Estimated selling price per unit
|
$50
|
$35
|
$25
|
|
The variable costs for each are
|
$20
|
$17
|
$14
|
Fixed expenses have been budgeted as $6,900,000.
Using the above information:
- Calculate the contribution per unit of volume (and in total) for each service. Which is the preferred service? Why? What should the business strategy be?
- Determine the absorption (full) cost per unit for the three services using three different methods of allocating overheads.
- How do the results of these different methods compare?
- Assuming a constant mix of the services sold, calculate the breakeven point for the business.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
SmallCo is considering the following project, whose cost of capital is 12% per annum:
|
Year
|
0
|
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
|
|
£
|
|
£
|
£
|
£
|
|
Cash flows of project
|
(2,000)
|
|
1,000
|
800
|
700
|
Calculate the NPV of the project.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Goliath Hotel projects the cash flows for three alternative investment projects (in $’000) as:
|
Project
|
Year 0
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
5
|
|
A
|
—350
|
100
|
200
|
100
|
100
|
140
|
|
B
|
—350
|
40
|
100
|
210
|
260
|
160
|
|
C
|
—350
|
200
|
150
|
240
|
40
|
0
|
Depreciation is $70,000 per annum. For each project, calculate the:
- payback period;
- accounting rate of return (average);
- net present value (assuming a cost of capital of 9%); and
- comment on which (if any) project should be accepted.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Freddie plc has £5 million to invest this year. Three projects are available and all are divisible, i.e. part of a project may be accepted and the cash flow returns will be pro rata. Details of the projects are:
|
Project
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
|
Cash outlay (£1,1)
|
3.0
|
2.0
|
1.5
|
|
NPV (EN!)
|
1.7
|
1.1
|
1.0
|
What is the ranking of the projects that should be accepted?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tropic Investments is considering a project involving an initial cash outlay for an asset of €200,000. The asset is depreciated over five years at 20% p.a. (based on the value of the investment at the beginning of each year). The cash flows from the project are expected to be:
|
Inflow
|
Outflow
|
|
Year 1
|
75,000
|
30,000
|
|
Year 2
|
90,000
|
40,000
|
|
Year 3
|
100,000
|
45,000
|
|
Year 4
|
100,000
|
50,000
|
|
Year 5
|
75,000
|
40,000
|
What is the payback period? What is the accounting rate of return (each year and average)?
Assuming a cost of capital of 10% and ignoring inflation, what is the net present value of the cash flows? (Use the tables rather than a spreadsheet to answer this question.) Should the project be accepted?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the population mean, standard deviation, and skewness of each of the following two series:
|
Series #1
|
—51
|
—21
|
21
|
51
|
|
Series #2
|
—61
|
—7
|
33
|
35
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the population mean, standard deviation, and kurtosis for each of the following two series:
|
Series #1
|
—23
|
—7
|
N
|
23
|
|
Series #2
|
—17
|
—17
|
17
|
17
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Treasury announces an auction of $10 billion par value of 52-week Treasury bills. Two billion dollars of noncompetitive bids are received. The competitive bids are as follows:
|
Price per $1 of par
|
Par value ($)
|
|
0.9200
|
3 billion
|
|
0.9194
|
3 billion
|
|
0.9188
|
4 billion
|
|
0.9180
|
2 billion
|
|
0.9180
|
2 billion
|
|
0.9178
|
6 billion
|
Compute the price per dollar of par paid by noncompetitive bidders with a one-price auction. How would this price compare to the price paid by noncompetitive bidders with a discriminatory auction?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Not urgent but important are the tasks languishing in your drawer. To resolve these, follow the example of the best manager I came across in my 45-year career. He would arrive at work at 6.00 am every day. Seldom did his phone ring before 9.00 am. He used this quiet time to deal with the important but not urgent stuff. Working in the morning is more productive than at night as you will be fresher and there will be fewer people around to distract you. If you follow this approach and invest a little time up front you”ll reduce the number of urgent problems you have to deal with, as you will have eliminated their cause at source (see Question 20).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Utilizing the AICPA Professional Standards database, conduct research to answer the following questions:
a.In addition to completing the audit of Jack”s Manufacturing, Inc., for the coming year, your firm has been requested to review the interim financial statements for the first three quarters of the year. The engagement partner has requested your assistance in preparing a draft of the appropriate report for the review. Locate and print out an example of an appropriate review report.
b.You are the staff auditor for a large client that has two subsidiaries located in foreign countries. Because your firm does not have offices near these subsidiaries, your firm will be using other auditors to aid you in the audit of the parent company. The audit partner on the engagement has requested your assistance as to the type of audit report necessary in order to share responsibility with these other auditors. Identify the authoritative literature paragraph citation for a shared audit report and print out an example of the report for the partner.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Major Research Problem 1: An audit partner of a CPA firm invested in a computer side business with a member of the board of directors of a public company that sells insurance and is an audit client of that CPA firm. Identify any potential problems. Conduct preliminary research to find the relevant source at issue. Refine the problem statement. Research and locate the relevant professional authorities and determine if there is any colorable authority in the law that prohibits such a relationship. If so, try to find the interpretation of the law that the SEC may have issued. Analyze, consider alternatives, and develop the conclusion. Write a research memo on the problem.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Company B is a subsidiary of Company A, and Company “C” is a subsidiary of Company “B”. Company C is a subsidiary of company A, by virtue of Clause (c) above. If Company D is a subsidiary of Company C, Company D will be a subsidiary of Company B and consequently also of Company A, by virtual of Clause (c) above, and so on.
(d) In case of a body corporate which is incorporated outside India, a subsidiary or holding company of the body corporate under the law of such country shall be deemed to be a subsidiary or holding company within the meaning and for the purpose of this Act whether the requirements of the section are fulfilled or not.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On 1 January 2010, Pappu & Co. Ltd. was incorporated with an authorized capital of 20,00,000 divided into shares of Rs10 each. It offered to the public for subscription of 50,000 shares payable as follows:
|
On Application
|
4 per Share
|
|
On Allotment
|
3 per Share
|
|
On First Call
|
2 per Share
|
|
On Second & Final Call
|
Re 1 per Share
|
Shares were fully subscribed. Application money was received on 15 January 2010. The directors made the allotment on 15 February 2010.
Journalize the above transactions in the books of Pappu & Co. Ltd.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Good Luck Ltd. Company was incorporated on 1 January 2010 with an authorized capital of Rs5,00,000 divided into shares ofRs10 each. It offered to the public for subscription 40,000 shares payable as follows:
|
On Application
|
3 per Share
|
|
On Allotment
|
4 per Share
|
|
On First and Final Call
|
3 per Share
|
|
(1 month After Allotment)
|
|
The shares were fully subscribed by the public and the application money was duly received on 15 January 2010. The directors made the allotment on 1 February 2010.Pass the journal entries in the books of Good luck Ltd. Company, assuming that amount due have been received within 15 days of making the allotment and call.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: More than one calls Fortune Ltd. on 1 January 2010 was incorporated with an authorized capital of Rs10,00,000 divided into shares of Rs100 each. If offered to the public for subscription 9,000 shares payable as follows:
|
On Application
|
25 per Share
|
|
On Allotment
|
25 per Share
|
|
On First Call
|
25 per Share
|
|
On Second and Final Call
|
25 per Share
|
Shares were fully subscribed for by the public and all money on allotment, first call and final call were received duly. Pass necessary entries in the books of the company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Calls-in-advance Jasemine & Co. Ltd. issued to the public 1,00,000 shares of 10 each payable as:
|
On Application
|
3
|
|
On Allotment
|
3
|
|
On First & Final Call
|
4
|
All the shares were subscribed for and all money due was received. A shareholder who paid for 1,000 shares paid the call money along with allotted money. Pass the necessary journal entries in the books of Jasemine Ltd.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model: Comprehensive—Allotment of shares ‘A’ Ltd. invited applications for 50,000 shares of 10 as follows:
|
On Application
|
3
|
|
On Allotment
|
2
|
|
On First and Final Call
|
5
|
Applications were received for 1,00,000 shares. It was decided
- To refuse allotment to the applicants for 10,000 shares
- To allot 50% to Mr. P. who has applied for 20,000 shares
- To allot in full to Mr. Q. who has applied for 10,000 shares
- To allot balance of the available shares pro-rata among the other applicants
- To utilize excess application money in part payment of allotment and final call
Pass necessary journal entries in the books of ‘A’ Ltd.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Cook Co. has two divisions, Eastern and Western. The divisions have the following revenue and expenses:
|
Eastern
|
Western
|
|
€
|
€
|
|
Sales
|
550,000
|
500,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
275,000
|
200,000
|
|
Divisional fixed costs
|
180,000
|
150,000
|
|
Allocated corporate costs
|
170,000
|
135,000
|
The management of Cook is considering the closure of the Eastern division sales office. If the Eastern division were closed, the fixed costs associated with this division could be avoided but allocated corporate costs would continue.
Given this data:
- Calculate the effect on Cook Co.’s operating profit before and after the closure.
- Should the Eastern division be closed?
`
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jacobean Creek plc has provided the following data for last year:
|
Sales
|
5,000 units
|
|
Sales price
|
£80 per unit
|
|
Variable cost
|
£55 per unit
|
|
Fixed cost
|
£25,000
|
For the current year, Jacobean Creek believes that although sales volume will remain constant, the contribution margin per unit can be increased by 20% and total fixed cost can be reduced by 10%.
- Calculate the operating profit for last year and the current year.
- What is the increase in profit between the two years?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lufl demand is within Luffer’s relevant range. Variable costs are £15 per unit and fixed costs are £10,000.
|
Price (£)
|
Quantity
|
|
26
|
1,075
|
|
27
|
1,000
|
|
28
|
925
|
|
29
|
850
|
|
30
|
775
|
Calculate the level of sales that will generate the highest profit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The marketing department of Giggo Hotels has estimated the number of hotel rooms (it has 120) that could be sold at different price levels. This information is shown below:
|
Number of rooms sold
|
Price per room per night (£)
|
|
120
|
90
|
|
100
|
105
|
|
80
|
135
|
|
60
|
155
|
|
50
|
175
|
Giggo Hotels has estimated its variable costs at £25 per room per night. Calculate the occupancy rate that Giggo will need in order to maximize its profits.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data relate to activity and costs for two recent months:
|
November
|
December
|
|
Activity level in units
|
5,000
|
10,000
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Variable costs
|
10,000
|
?
|
|
Fixed costs
|
30,000
|
?
|
|
Semi-variable costs
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Total costs
|
60,000
|
75,000
|
Assuming that both activity levels are within the relevant range, calculate for December the:
- variable costs;
- fixed costs;
- semi-variable costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Maxitank makes two products. The costs of each product are:
|
Product R
|
Product S
|
|
€
|
€
|
|
Selling price
|
12
|
20
|
|
Raw materials
|
4
|
11
|
|
Production labour hours
|
2
|
4
|
|
Machine hours
|
4
|
3
|
Maxitank’s sales are limited by the machine capacity of the factory, which is the company’s bottleneck. Which of the two products should be produced first in order to maximize the throughput generated from the limited capacity?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Midlands Refrigeration estimates the costs per unit of a product as:
|
Raw materials
|
40 kg @ £2.50 per kg
|
|
Production labour
|
7 hours machining @ £12 per hour
|
|
4 hours finishing @ £7 per hour
|
Variable production overhead @ £5 per direct labour hour.
Fixed production overhead of £1,000,000 is based on a production volume of 12,500 units.
Calculate the:
- variable production cost;
- total production cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harrison Products’ capacity is 20,000 units a year. A summary of operating results for last year is:
|
Sales (12,000 units @ €100)
|
€1,200,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
588,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
612,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
245,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
€367,000
|
A foreign distributor has offered to buy a guaranteed 8,000 units at €95 per unit next year. Harrison expects its regular sales next year to be 15,000 units.
If Harrison accepts this offer and forgoes some of its expected sales to ensure that it does not exceed capacity, what would be the total operating profit next year assuming that total fixed costs increase by €100,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jasmine Gonzales, administrative director of Small Imaging Center, has been asked by the practice members to see if it is feasible to add more staff to support the practice’s mammography service, which currently has 2 analogue film or screen units and 2 technologists. She has compiled the following information:
a. What is the monthly patient volume needed per month to cover fixed and variable costs?
|
Reimbursement per screen:
|
$66.05
|
|
Equipment costs per month
|
$1,450.00
|
|
Technologist cost per mammography
|
$15.60
|
|
Technologist aide per mammography
|
$3.10
|
|
Variable cost per mammography
|
$15.00
|
|
Equipment maintenance per month per machine
|
$916.66
|
b. What is the patient volume needed per month if Small Imaging Center desires to cover its fixed and variable costs and make a $5,000 profit on this equipment to cover other costs associated with the organization?
c. If reimbursement decreases to $60 per screen, what is the patient volume needed per month to cover fixed and variable costs but not profit?
d. If a new technologist aide is hired, what is the patient volume needed per month at the original reimbursement rate to variable costs, but not profit?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
San Juan Health Department’s dental clinic projects the following costs and rates for the year 20XX.
|
Total fixed costs
|
$175,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
$48 per patient
|
|
Charges
|
$150 per patient
|
a. Using this information, determine the break-even point in patients.
b. Using this information, determine the break-even point in dollars.
c. Graph this scenario in a break-even chart using a range of 0 to 3,500 patients in 500-patient increments.
d. If the clinic decides it would like to make a profit of $5,500, what is the new break-even point in patients?
e. If the clinic decides it would like to make a profit of $5,500 at 1,770 patients, what is the new break-even point in dollars?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The North Kingstown Cancer infusion therapy division expects tremendous growth over the next year and is projecting the following cost and rate structure for the service.
|
Revenue
|
$750 per patient
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
Rent
|
$3,600 per month
|
|
Staff
|
$195,000 per month
|
|
Leases
|
$10,000 per month
|
|
Other fixed costs
|
$20,000 per month
|
|
Pharmaceuticals
|
$500 per patient
|
|
Intravenous supplies
|
$25 per patient
|
|
Other patient supplies
|
$25 per patient
|
a. What volume of patients per month will it take for the center to break even?
b. What is the break-even point in dollars?
c. Graph the above scenario using a range of 0 to 2,500 patients in 500-patient increments.
d. If the clinic needs to make a profit of $75,000 per month, what is the new break-even point in volume per month?
e. If the clinic needs to make a profit of $75,000 per month, what is the new break-even point in revenue?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
QuickCare is a health care franchise that functions as a primary family health clinic, seeing unscheduled patients twenty-four hours a day. Several months after the grand opening, a corporate office management engineering study showed that the clinic was experiencing some dips in volume in the midafternoon hours. To increase volume, efficiency, and revenues, the clinic administrator contracted with the area high schools to provide after-school physicals for the sports teams. The initial agreement was that QuickCare would charge $100 per exam, the market average. Fixed costs were $30,000 and variable costs are $25 per physical. Although this strategy proved somewhat successful, gross profit margin lagged behind the corporate expectations. To improve margin, the clinic is considering increasing the exam price to $125. QuickCare’s administrator projects that this price increase will cause the high schools to send their athletes to other providers and that volume could drop by 33 percent. Last year, QuickCare performed 1,026 examinations. The administrator feels that if the program closes down, all $30,000 in fixed costs would be saved.
a. What should QuickCare’s decision be, assuming that this price increase will decrease the number of patients seen by one-third?
b. What price would QuickCare have to charge to make up for the loss of patients?
c. Using the information from part a, should QuickCare make the same decision if 40 percent of the fixed costs are avoidable? Would it be better or worse off? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The administrator of ABC Hospital, Mr. Stevens, has just received the latest financial report, and the news is not good. The hospital has been losing money for over a year, and if things don’t improve, it may lose its AA bond rating. Stevens has met with his vice president of finance, Mr. Sanger, and has asked him to identify areas for cutting costs, beginning with services that are operating at a loss. The following information is for services provided at ABC Hospital’s ambulatory care clinic:
|
Annual volume (in patient visits)
|
5,000
|
|
Charge per visit
|
$125
|
|
Variable cost per visit
|
$30
|
|
Fixed costs
|
$500,000
|
a. Suppose that all fixed costs are avoidable. What should Sanger recommend to Stevens regarding dropping the clinic?
b. What if only $150,000 of the fixed costs were avoidable? Would this change his recommendation?
c. Are there any other considerations that should be taken into account when making this decision?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Ancome County Health Department is considering using 300 square feet of excess office space to provide a clinic for Healthchek visits. These visits are reimbursed at $67.30 under a Medicaid program. Variable costs per visit are $53.30, and providing the service requires an additional physician assistant and nurse with prorated salaries of $90,000 and $50,000, respectively. The state has mandated efforts to increase the utilization of Medicaid eligibility, so the Department of Social Services is conducting interventions to increase eligibility awareness in the community. As a result, the health department expects 10,000 Healthchek visits in the coming year. Unavoidable overhead costs for the health department are $300,000 per year and will be allocated to each program based on its proportional share of the health department’s total office space of 2,700 square feet.
a. What are the total contribution margin and total product margin for a Healthchek visit?
b. Considering the total product margin, should the health department provide the service?
c. Are there any other considerations that should be taken into account when making this decision?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Midtown Women’s Center offers bone densitometry scans in the office as a convenience to its patients. The clinic volume is expanding, and Sam Loch, the center’s administrator, is considering dropping the bone densitometry service and converting the space to an exam room to allow for more outpatient visits. The following information has been gathered to help with the decision.
|
Number of scans per year
|
425
|
|
Reimbursement for bone densitometry scan
|
$65
|
|
Bone densitometry supply cost per scan
|
$15
|
|
Part-time bone densitometry scan technician
|
$15,000
|
|
Reimbursement per office visit
|
$80
|
|
Supply cost per office visit
|
$20
|
|
Expected increase in outpatient volume if additional
|
500
|
|
exam space is available
|
|
a. What is the contribution margin for the bone densitometry service per year?
b. Should this service continue as opposed to converting it to exam room space? Why or why not?
c. How many office visits would it take to replace the income from the bone densitometry service?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sure Care Health Maintenance Organization is seeking a managed care contract with a local manufacturing plant. Sure Care estimates that the cost of providing preventative and curative care for the 300 employees and their families will be $36,000 per month. The manufacturing company offered Sure Care a premium bid of $200 per employee per month.
a. If Sure Care accepts this bid and contracts with the manufacturing firm, will Sure Care earn a profit or loss for the year? How much?
b. What premium per employee per month does Sure Care need to break even?
c. If Sure Care wants to earn $100,000 in profit for the year, what is the required premium per employee per month?
d. What concerns do you have about this analysis?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Zack Millman Clinic is seeking to provide sports-related health care services to high schools in the area. Zack Millman estimates that the cost to provide care would be $1,000 plus $12 per athlete per month on a 9-month basis. The high schools jointly offered to pay the clinic $10,000 for a 9-month contract to cover 75 athletes.
a. If the clinic accepts this bid and contracts with the high schools, will it earn a profit or loss for the year? How much?
b. What would the contract price have to be for Millman to break even?
c. If Zack Millman Clinic wants to earn $5,000 in profit for the year, and the school system preferred to pay on a per athlete per month basis, what would the price have to be?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shady Rest Nursing Home has 100 residents. The administrator is concerned about balancing the ratio of its private pay to non-private pay patients. Non-private pay sources reimburse an average of $150 per day whereas private pay residents pay on average 100 percent of full daily charges. The administrator estimates that variable cost per resident per day is $50 for supplies, food, and contracted services, and annual fixed costs are $4,562,500.
a. What is the daily contribution margin of each non-private pay resident?
b. If 25 percent of the residents are non-private pay, what will Shady Rest charge the private pay patients to break even?
c. What if non-private pay payors cover 50 percent of the residents?
d. The owner of Shady Rest Nursing Home insists that the facility earn $80,000 in annual profits. How much must the administrator raise the per day charge for the privately insured residents if 25 percent of the residents are covered by non-private pay payors?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Franklin County Hospital, a nonprofit hospital, bought and installed a new computer system last year for $65,000. The system is designed to relay information between labs and medical units. Charlene Walker, the hospital’s new computer specialist, had a meeting with Lou Campbell, vice president of finance. She began: “Lou, today I read in a journal that a new computer system has just been introduced. It costs $42,000, but I believe that by replacing our old system, we could reduce operating and maintenance costs that are now being incurred.” The following are Walker’s estimates:
|
Present System
|
New System
|
|
Purchase and installment price
|
$65,000
|
$42,000
|
|
Useful life when purchased
|
6 years
|
5 years
|
|
Computer operating costs per year
|
$30,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Computer operating and maintenance
|
$20,000
|
$18,000
|
|
costs per year
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expenses per year
|
$10,833
|
$8,400
|
|
Cost of capital
|
10%
|
10%
|
a. Based on an analysis, what advice do you recommend that Walker give Campbell?
b. At what price for the new computer system would Campbell be indifferent?
c. Is this a typical make-or-buy decision? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Franklin County Hospital, a nonprofit hospital, bought and installed a new computer system last year for $150,000. The system is designed to relay information between labs and medical units. Charlene Walker, the hospital’s new computer specialist, had a meeting with Lou Campbell, vice president of finance. She began: “Lou, today I read in a journal that a new computer system has just been introduced. It costs $100,000, but I believe that by replacing our old system, we could reduce operating and maintenance costs that are now being incurred.” The following are Walker’s estimates:
|
Present System
|
New System
|
|
Purchase and installment price
|
$150,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Useful life when purchased
|
6 years
|
5 years
|
|
Computer operating costs per year
|
$45,000
|
$30,000
|
|
Computer operating and maintenance
|
$25,000
|
$12,000
|
|
costs per year
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expenses per year
|
$10,833
|
$20,000
|
|
Cost of capital
|
10%
|
10%
|
a. Based on an analysis, what advice do you recommend that Walker give Campbell?
b. At what price for the new computer system would Campbell be indifferent?
c. Is this a typical make-or-buy decision? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lakespring Retirement Village is home to senior citizens who are fairly independent but need assistance with basic health care and occasional meals. Jill Thompson, a licensed beautician, works on salary 16 hours a week at Lakespring. Funds at the retirement village have been getting tight due to an increase in the number of Medicaid and other low-income residents. Carl Jones, Lakespring’s administrator, told Thompson that the hair salon might have to be closed. Jones is sympathetic because he knows that it will be inconvenient for many residents to get this service elsewhere, and Thompson’s charges are about all the residents can afford, but he wonders how he can keep any unit open that does not break even. Jones
|
|
Hair Cuts
|
Permanents
|
Brief Visits
|
|
Charge per resident
|
$10.00
|
$20.00
|
$5.00
|
|
Variable costs per service performed
|
$1.00
|
$4.00
|
$3.50
|
|
Cleaning/styling/setting products
|
|
|
|
|
Variable water expense
|
$0.15
|
$0.25
|
$0.25
|
|
Laundry expenses for towels, smocks, etc.
|
$0.10
|
$0.30
|
$0.30
|
is looking for a way to save the hair salon and has provided the following information:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jill is currently doing an average weekly business of 16 hair cuts, 7 permanents, and 4 brief visits, which take half an hour, an hour, and fifteen minutes, respectively. The hair salon is currently allocated rent of $250 per month and other upkeep expenses of $50 a month. Thompson is paid $12 per hour, and she earned $768 last month.
a. Prepare a monthly income statement and determine the total contribution margin and total product margin for each service line. Determine net income for the service taken as a whole.
b. How would you advise Jones: Should he close the hair salon? Why or why not?
c. Should Jones try to persuade Thompson to drop any service she now offers?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The administrator of Break-a-Leg Hospital is aware of the need to keep his costs down because he just negotiated a new capitated arrangement with a large insurance company. The following are selected planned and actual expenses for the previous month.
|
|
Planned
|
Actual
|
|
Patient days
|
24,000
|
23,000
|
|
Pharmacy
|
$100,000
|
$140,000
|
|
Miscellaneous supplies
|
$56,000
|
$67,500
|
|
Fixed overhead costs
|
$708,000
|
$780,000
|
a. Determine the total variance associated with the planned and actual expenses.
b. Calculate the amount of service-related variance.
c. Prepare a flexible expense estimate for variable costs. Compare budget, flexible budget, and actual (show related volumes).
d. Determine what variance is due to change in volume and what variance is due to change in rates.
e. Determine the volume variance and rate variance based on per unit rates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A dermatology clinic expects to contract with an HMO for an estimated 80,000 enrollees. The HMO expects 1 in 4 of its enrolled members to use the dermatology services per month. At the end of the year, the dermatology clinic’s business manager looked at her monthly figures and saw that the number of enrolled members had increased by 5 percent over the budgeted amount and that 1 in 3 of the total HMO members had used the dermatology services per month. Net monthly revenues of the dermatology clinic were budgeted at $260,000 but were actually $450,000. Monthly expenses for the clinic were budgeted at $200,000 but were actually $270,000.
a. Prepare a monthly revenue and expense variance report for the clinic.
b. Are these variances favorable or unfavorable? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mara Kelsey, the manager of the endoscopy suite, was concerned about adding more space. She contends that if the two units were combined, fewer staff would be needed, and direct costs could be reduced by $50,000 ($25,000 in each unit). She also feels that the Day-Op area is underutilized, and that 500 square feet could be used by a combined unit when excess capacity was needed. Assuming that the 500 square feet was to be allocated equally between the endoscopy and cystoscopy suites, what would the total allocated costs for each of these two services be under this scenario?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Callie Zev, the manager of the endoscopy suite, was concerned about adding more space to cystoscopy. She contends that if the two units were combined, fewer staff would be needed, and direct costs could be reduced by $40,000 ($20,000 in each unit). She also feels that the Day-Op area is underutilized and that 200 square feet could be used by a combined unit when excess capacity was needed. Assuming that the 200 square feet were to be allocated equally between the endoscopy and cystoscopy suites, what would the total allocated costs for each of these two services be under this scenario?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As a risk analyst, you are asked to look at EB Corporation, which has issued both equity and bonds. The bonds can either be downgraded, be upgraded, or have no change in rating. The stock can either outperform the market or underperform the market. You are given the following probability matrix from an analyst who had worked on the company previously, but some of the values are missing. Fill in the missing values. What is the conditional probability that the bonds are downgraded given that the equity has underperformed?
|
|
Equity
|
|
|
Outperform
|
Underperform
|
|
Bonds
|
Upgrade
|
W
|
5%
|
15%
|
|
No Change
|
45%
|
X
|
65%
|
|
Downgrade
|
Y
|
15%
|
Z
|
|
|
60%
|
40%
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table is a one-year ratings transition matrix. Given a bond”s rating now, the matrix gives the probability associated with the bond having a given rating in a year”s time. For example, a bond that starts the year with an A rating has a 90% chance of maintaining that rating and an 8% chance of migrating to a B rating. Given a B-rated bond, what is the probability that the bond defaults over one year? What is the probability that the bond defaults over two years?
|
|
To a rating of:
|
|
A
|
B
|
CD
|
|
|
From a rating of:
|
A
|
90%
|
8%
|
2%
|
0%
|
|
B
|
10%
|
80%
|
8%
|
2%
|
|
C
|
0%
|
25%
|
60%
|
15%
|
|
D
|
0%
|
0%
|
0%
|
100%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (2011)
Accounting policies [extract]
15. Financial assets [extract]
Reclassifications – held-for-trading and available-for-sale financial assets that meet the definition of loans and receivables (non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted in an active market) may be reclassified to loans and receivables if the Group has the intention and ability to hold the financial asset for the foreseeable future or until maturity. The Group typically regards the foreseeable future as twelve months from the date of reclassification. Additionally, held-for-trading financial assets that do not meet the definition of loans and receivables may, in rare circumstances, be transferred to available-for-sale financial assets or to held-to-maturity investments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying the appropriate components of an entity to which to apply the business model test
A global banking group operates two business lines, retail banking and investment banking. These businesses both operate in the same five locations by means of separate subsidiaries. Each subsidiary has its own board of directors that is responsible for carrying out the strategic objectives set by the group”s board of directors.
The financial assets held by the investment banking business are classified as at fair value through profit or loss as the group”s strategy is to actively trade these financial assets. Financial assets held by four of the five retail banking subsidiaries are considered to be held to collect their contractual cash flows. However, the fifth retail banking subsidiary, comprising approximately 10% of the group”s retail banking business, has a large portion of assets that are expected to be sold before maturity in order to maximise their yield.
For the purpose of applying IFRS 9, how many business models does this group have? In particular, could or should the fifth subsidiary”s retail banking assets be evaluated separately from (a) that subsidiary”s investment banking assets and (b) the group”s other retail banking assets?
In practice, the directors will need to exercise judgement to determine the appropriate level at which to assess its business model(s). Hence, different conclusions are possible depending on the facts and circumstances. This does not mean that the bank has an accounting policy choice but it is, rather, a matter of fact that can be observed by the way the organisation is structured and managed.
In many organisations, key management personnel determine the group”s overall strategy and then delegate authority for executing that strategy to others. The combination of the overall strategy and the effect of the delegated authority are among the factors that can be considered in determining business models.
As a result, the number of business models in this case could potentially vary from two (i.e. retail banking and investment banking) to three (i.e. investment banking, one retail banking business for the first four subsidiaries and a second retail banking business for the fifth subsidiary) or even more.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Examples of applying the business model test in practice
Scenario 1 – Switching investments within a portfolio (1)
An entity has debt investments worth €100m, comprising notes with maturities of 3 to 5 years. In practice, approximately €10m of the portfolio is sold and reinvested each year in assets with a similar maturity and risk but with a higher yield (a process known as ‘switching”). The remaining investments are typically held to near their maturity.
Analysis
In this situation the entity will first need to use judgment to determine whether it should apply the test to:
(a) two business models: (i) debt instruments to be held to near their maturity and (ii) debt instruments which are actively bought and sold. This will only be possible if these groups of assets can be separately identified; or
(b) one business model representing the overall portfolio of debt investments.
If conclusion (a) is considered more appropriate, portfolio (i) is likely to pass the business model test potentially resulting in the debt instruments being classified as amortised cost. However, it would probably need to classify the remaining debt instruments as measured at fair value through profit or loss.
Alternatively, if conclusion (b) is considered more appropriate, further judgment should be applied and the entity must determine whether the level of expected sales and repurchases is significant enough to require the whole portfolio to be measured at fair value through profit or loss. In this example, the sale and reinvestment of approximately 10% of the portfolio each year would potentially be considered ‘more than infrequent” (see 5.2 above) and/or more than ‘some” (see Scenario 1 in Example 47.2 above). However, the standard cites ‘more than infrequent” and/or more than ‘some” sales as indicators to use in assessing the business model test, not strict criteria. The overriding consideration is whether the business model remains to hold the financial assets to collect their contractual cash flows. The reason for the sales needs to be considered to assess whether it is consistent with a business model whose objective is to hold assets to collect their contractual cash flows.
Other factors to consider in making this judgment might include how the performance of the business is reported to and assessed by management. For example, if performance is measured on a fair value basis or if employees are rewarded using such measures, it is unlikely to be appropriate to account for the portfolio at amortised cost.
Although not finalised yet, it is relevant to note that in its project to improve IFRS 9 (see further details at 11 below), the IASB indicated that such a portfolio is not consistent with a business model whose objective is to hold assets to collect their contractual cash flows. Accordingly, entities are advised to follow the progress of this project in making any associated judgements.
Scenario 2 – Switching investments within a portfolio (2)
An entity has a portfolio of €100m of debt instruments. The employee responsible for managing the portfolio has been charged with optimising the long-term yield on the portfolio. Accordingly, she regularly sells the assets and reinvests the proceeds from the sales in new assets that have a similar maturity and risk profile, but generally with a higher yield.
Insignificant gains or losses are generated in the process of switching the assets in order to lock in a higher yield. This happens on a fairly regular basis and, over a period of six months, approximately 10% of the portfolio is turned over. Despite this, the overall size and composition of the portfolio remains relatively unchanged.
The employee is remunerated based on the overall yield of the portfolio (i.e. maximising the portfolio”s yield) and fair value gains/losses are not considered in her remuneration.
Management”s documented strategy and defined key performance indicators emphasise optimising long-term yield rather than generating fair value gains and accordingly, the entity”s management reporting system focuses on the yield rather than fair value of the debt instruments within the portfolio. At initial recognition, and upon subsequent sales (and reinvestment), the entity is not able to clearly identify the assets that would be switched.
Analysis
The key consideration is whether the underlying objective of the entity is to hold the assets to collect their contractual cash flows. Based on the factors mentioned above, it could be argued that the objective of the entity is not to realise fair value gains/losses because:
- insignificant gains/losses (relative to the interest earned from the portfolio) are earned/incurred in the switching process;
- the overall size and composition of the portfolio is relatively unchanged from the switching;
- the employee is remunerated based on the overall yield of the portfolio, and fair value gains/losses are not considered in her remuneration;
- management”s documented strategy and defined key performance indictors emphasise long-term yield rather than fair value gains; and
- management reporting is focused on yield rather than the fair value of the debt instruments within the portfolio.
However, in our view, the fact that it is not the entity”s objective to realise fair value gains/losses is not sufficient in itself to be able to conclude that measurement at amortised cost is appropriate. Such an objective is not necessarily the same as holding a portfolio of financial assets to collect their contractual cash flows. While the standard states that an infrequent number of sales and ‘some” sales would not contradict that objective, it does not provide any further guidance. Each entity will need to exercise its own judgment and consider other available information before concluding that amortised cost classification is consistent with the business model in these circumstances.
Whilst not finalised yet, it is relevant to note that the IASB in its project to improve IFRS 9 has indicated that such a portfolio would not be consistent with a business model whose objective is to hold assets to collect their contractual cash flows. Accordingly, entities are advised to follow the outcome of this project in making their own judgement.
Scenario 3 – Classification of originated loans to be partially sold or sub-participated
A bank originates loans, holds part of the portfolio to maturity and a portion is either sold in the near term or sub-participated to other banks.
Analysis
In applying IFRS 9, the bank first needs to assess whether it has one business model or two.
It is possible that the activities of lending to hold and lending to sell or sub-participate could be considered two separate business models, requiring different skills and processes. Whilst the financial assets resulting from the former would typically qualify for amortised cost measurement, those from the latter would need to be measured at fair value through profit or loss.
If it is assessed that a loan will in part be sold or sub-participated, this raises the additional issue of whether a single financial asset can be considered to fall within two separate business models. It is already common under IAS 39 – Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement – for loans to be classified in part as held for trading and in part as loans and receivables (measured at amortised cost) in similar circumstances and it is likely that this practice will continue under IFRS 9.
If the bank fails to achieve an intended disposal or sub-participation, having previously classified a portion of a loan at fair value through profit or loss because of its intention to sell, that portion of the loan will continue to be classified as measured at fair value through profit or loss.
Scenario 4 – Sale of securities held for liquidity purposes
A bank holds a liquidity ‘buffer” portfolio of high grade plain vanilla securities. These are assets that are held by the bank to fund unexpected cash outflows arising from stressed scenarios. The bank”s strategy is to always hold such a buffer, hence the overall portfolio size remains stable within pre-defined credit, currency and maturity bands.
The performance of the bank”s employees who are responsible for managing the portfolio is assessed based on the yield achieved. The fair value performance of the portfolio is not considered in determining the employees” remuneration. The employees are aware of the portfolio”s fair value such that they know how much cash can be raised if the assets ever need to be sold, but the portfolio is not managed to maximise fair value.
However, the employees churn the portfolio, regularly buying and selling, for the following reasons:
- the regulators require regular sales to prove that the assets are liquid; and
- the bank wants to maintain a presence in the market so that, in the event of liquidity difficulties, it would not be obvious that they have been forced to sell.
The churn rate is about 10% per month. The duration of the portfolio is roughly three years and it is anticipated that the gains or losses earned or incurred as the portfolio is churned could be significant.
Analysis
Even though the bank”s strategy, and the basis for the employees” performance assessment, is non-trading in nature, a portion of the portfolio is sold frequently and substantial fair value gains or losses are expected to be earned or incurred in churning the portfolio.
We would expect that if a portfolio of financial assets is to qualify for amortised cost classification, the bank should not expect to report significant fair value gains or losses from sales. In this scenario, the fair value gains and losses were already anticipated at inception, hence the assessment of the business model of being to hold the assets to collect their contractual cash flows may be inappropriate.
In addition, the churn rate of 10% per month would mean that only a small proportion of the original portfolio would still be held after eleven months, which would seem inconsistent with an objective to hold the assets to collect the contractual cash flows. Hence, the sale of 10% of the portfolio every month may be considered more than an ‘infrequent number” and/or ‘some” sales and the business model may not qualify for amortised cost classification.
The debate around liquidity portfolios and whether they meet the IFRS 9 business model test is one of those areas where no consensus has yet emerged. In addition, facts and circumstances differ from one bank to another, hence, it is a challenge to draw parallels and, as a result, diversity of application is likely to arise.
Overall, the assessment will need to make use of appropriate judgment, considering the facts and circumstances specific to the entity, in order to determine whether amortised cost represents the most appropriate method of accounting for a particular business model.
Although not finalised yet, it is relevant to note that in its project to improve IFRS 9 (see further details at 11 below), the IASB has indicated that such a portfolio would not be consistent with a business model whose objective is to hold assets to collect their contractual cash flows. Accordingly, entities are advised to follow the progress of this project in making any associated judgements.
Scenario 5 – Sale of assets in response to infrequent event
An entity sells a large proportion of financial assets that are classified as measured at amortised cost in response to a major loss, unexpected capital expenditure or a business acquisition.
Analysis
The entity needs to consider, amongst other facts and circumstances, the factors described in Scenario 1 above and, in particular, the purpose for which the assets were originally acquired.
If a business model is initially assessed as qualifying for amortised cost measurement and if assets are subsequently sold infrequently for reasons that were not previously anticipated, we believe that the business model may possibly still qualify for amortised cost accounting.
However, if assets are held to fund capital expenditure or an acquisition that is expected to take place, it would normally be necessary for the maturities of the financial assets to reflect the expected holding period if they are to be recorded at amortised cost. For example, if an acquisition is expected to take place in six months time, then the assets that will be used to fund the acquisition should normally have a maturity of approximately six months or less, not several years, if they are to be accounted for at amortised cost.
Scenario 6 – Change in the way a portfolio is managed
An entity determines that the objective for a portfolio meets the business model test to be classified at amortised cost. Subsequently, the entity changes the way it manages the assets so that more than an infrequent number of sales is made.
Analysis
Although more than an infrequent number of sales is now occurring, it is unlikely to be a significant enough change in the entity”s business model to trigger reclassification of the portfolio. This is because IFRS 9 requires assets to be reclassified only if there is a change in the business model that is significant to the entity”s operations (see 9 below). In other words, there are no tainting provisions similar to that of the held to maturity measurement category under IAS 39.
It is likely that the entity will now be considered to have two business models, the first representing the assets held when the business model changed and the second being any new assets acquired. Financial assets in the first portfolio will remain classified as measured at amortised cost and new financial assets acquired will be classified as measured at fair value through profit or loss.
Scenario 7 – Portfolio of assets held to match the duration of a bank”s liabilities
A bank allocates investments into maturity bands to match the expected duration of its time deposit accounts. The invested assets have a similar maturity profile and amount to the corresponding deposits. The ratio of assets to deposits for each maturity band has pre-determined minimum and maximum levels. For example, if the ratio exceeds the maximum level because of an unexpected withdrawal of deposits, the bank will sell some assets to reduce the ratio. The choice of assets to be sold would be based on those that would generate the highest profit or incur the lowest loss.
Meanwhile, new assets will be acquired when necessary (i.e. when the ratio of assets to deposits falls below the pre-determined minimum level). The expected repayment profile of the deposits would be updated on a quarterly basis, based on changes in customer behaviour. Under IAS 39, these assets were classified as available-for-sale and there has been no history of active trading.
Analysis
The question here is whether adjusting the asset/deposit ratio by selling assets to correspond with a change in the expected repayment profile of the deposits would mean that the business model is inconsistent with the objective of holding assets to collect the contractual cash flows.
In these circumstances, an analogy can be drawn to paragraph B4.1.3(b) of IFRS 9 (see 5.2 above) which states that an insurer may adjust its investment portfolio by selling a financial asset to reflect a change in the expected duration (i.e. expected timing of payouts) of its liabilities. However, the guidance clarifies that if more than an infrequent number of sales are made out of the portfolio, the entity would need to assess how such sales are consistent with an objective of holding assets to collect the contractual cash flows.
If the bank had a good track record of forecasting its deposit repayments, we would expect such sales to be infrequent. If numerous sales happen every year, it might be difficult to rationalise such practice with an objective of holding to collect the contractual cash flows. Due consideration will also need to be given to the magnitude of sales, the reasons for the sales and whether or not significant fair value gains and losses are anticipated at inception before an appropriate conclusion could be reached.
Scenario 8 – Loans reclassified from trading under IAS 39
At the date of initial application of IFRS 9, a bank holds a portfolio of loans that it intends to sell as soon as possible, but is currently unable to do so due to illiquidity in the market. The bank had taken advantage of the October 2008 amendments to IAS 39 and because it had the intention and ability to hold the assets for the foreseeable future had reclassified this portfolio from trading to loans and receivables.
Analysis
An entity applying IFRS 9 for the first time should apply the business model test at the date of initial application (see 10.2.2 below).
Given management”s intention to sell the assets as soon as possible, the presumption would be that the portfolio should be classified as at fair value through profit or loss. It does not matter that the bank may have to hold the portfolio for the foreseeable future due to the market”s illiquidity. The standard is clear that the entity”s objective should be to hold the assets to collect the contractual cash flows to qualify for amortised cost classification.
Scenario 9 – Loans held within a business intended for disposal
An international bank has a variety of businesses each of which is managed separately. Before the date of initial application of IFRS 9, the bank makes a strategic decision to dispose of its auto finance business, which originates loans to collect their contractual cash flows. The bank intends to dispose of the entire business, including personnel, IT systems and buildings, and not merely a portfolio of loans.
Analysis
There is no ‘right” answer in respect of these facts and circumstances. Arguments can be articulated to support either classification of the loans at amortised cost or at fair value through profit or loss.
Proponents of amortised cost classification would argue that at the date of initial application, even though the bank intends to sell the business at some point in the future, the loans are still held within a business model whose objective is to hold them to collect their contractual cash flows. That objective continues regardless of whether the bank intends or is able to sell the business. In addition, some of the loans may be fully collected even before the business is sold. Therefore, based on facts and circumstances at the date of initial application, the loans are considered to be held within a business model whose objective is to hold them to collect their contractual cash flows.
On the other hand, proponents of fair value through profit or loss classification would argue that on the date of initial application, the expectation is that the bank will dispose the loans rather than hold them to collect their contractual cash flows. Therefore, from the bank”s perspective, the loans are no longer held within a business model whose objective is to hold assets to collect their contractual cash flows.
Due to the mixed views and the fact that this is a prevailing issue in the marketplace as a result of regulator and government initiatives to require banks to dispose of non-core business activities or selected businesses due to concerns around the lack of competition, this is an area where further guidance from the IASB or Interpretations Committee would be welcome.
When applying IFRS 9 for the first time, in our opinion the two views set out above are acceptable. If the decision to dispose the business is made subsequent to the adoption of IFRS 9, it is unlikely that the financial assets would need to be reclassified from amortised cost to fair value through profit or loss because of the high threshold in IFRS 9 for triggering reclassification (see 9 below).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Applying the contractual characteristics test to specific instruments
Instrument A – Unleveraged inflation-linked bond
Instrument A is a bond with a stated maturity date. Payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding are linked to an inflation index of the currency in which the instrument is issued (for example a euro denominated bond indexed to consumer price inflation in France). The inflation link is not leveraged and the principal is protected.
Analysis
The contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding. Linking payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding to an unleveraged inflation index resets the time value of money to a current level. In other words, the interest rate on the instrument reflects ‘real” interest. Thus, the interest amounts are consideration for the time value of money on the principal amount outstanding. Logically, this analysis would also apply if the principal was not protected, i.e. the principal would reduce in times of deflation, which is commonly the case in inflation-linked bonds.
However, if the interest payments were indexed to another variable such as the debtor”s performance (e.g. the debtor”s net income) or an equity index, the contractual cash flows would not be payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding. That is because the interest payments would not be consideration for the time value of money and for credit risk associated with the principal amount outstanding. Rather, there is variability in the contractual interest payments that is inconsistent with market interest rates.
Instrument B – The borrower may periodically select the interest rate
Instrument B is a variable interest rate instrument with a stated maturity date that permits the borrower to choose the market interest rate on an ongoing basis. For example, at each interest rate reset date, the borrower can choose to pay three-month LIBOR for a three-month term or one-month LIBOR for a one-month term.
Analysis
The contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding as long as the interest paid over the life of the instrument reflects consideration for the time value of money and for the credit risk associated with the instrument. The fact that the LIBOR interest rate is reset during the life of the instrument does not in itself disqualify the instrument.
The same analysis would apply if the borrower is able to choose between the lender”s published one-month variable interest rate and the lender”s published three-month variable interest rate.
However, if the borrower is able to choose to pay one-month LIBOR or other one-month variable rate for three months and that one-month rate is not reset each month, the contractual cash flows are not payments of principal and interest.
Instrument C – Constant maturity bond
Instrument C is a constant maturity bond with a five-year term that pays a variable rate that is reset periodically but always reflects a five-year maturity.
Analysis
An instrument that has a contractual interest rate that is based on a term that exceeds the instrument”s remaining life, does not have contractual cash flows that are payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding. This is because the interest payable in each period is disconnected from the term of the instrument (except, in this case, at origination).
There are a number of instruments across various jurisdictions where the coupon rate is periodically reset to a reference rate that is not connected to the period to which it is applied. In fact they are sometimes seen as very conventional features in some retail mortgages and other loans. However, based on this example, it appears that such instruments might not qualify for amortised cost classification under IFRS 9. This is an issue the IASB has recently proposed to clarify as part of its project to make limited improvements to IFRS 9 (see discussion at 11.4.1 below).
Instrument D – Bond with capped interest rate
Instrument D is a bond with a stated maturity date that pays a variable market interest rate. That variable interest rate is capped.
Analysis
The contractual cash flows of both:
(a) an instrument that has a fixed interest rate; and
(b) an instrument that has a variable interest rate
are payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding as long as the interest reflects consideration for the time value of money and for the credit risk associated with the instrument during its term.
Therefore, an instrument that is a combination of (a) and (b), such as a bond with an interest rate cap, can have cash flows that are solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding. Such a feature may reduce cash flow variability by setting a limit on a variable interest rate (e.g. an interest rate cap or floor) or increase the cash flow variability because a fixed rate becomes variable.
Instrument E – Full recourse collateralised loan
Instrument E is a full recourse loan that is secured by collateral.
Analysis
The fact that a full recourse loan is collateralised does not in itself affect the analysis of whether the contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding.
Most non-recourse loans will be collateralised to some extent. The classification of non-recourse loans is considered at 6.3 below.
Instrument F – Convertible debt
Instrument F is a bond that is convertible into equity instruments of the issuer.
Analysis
The holder would analyse the convertible bond in its entirety. The contractual cash flows are not payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding because the interest rate does not reflect only consideration for the time value of money and the credit risk. The return is also linked to the value of the equity of the issuer.
Instrument G – Inverse floater
Instrument G is a loan that pays an inverse floating interest rate (i.e. the interest rate has an inverse relationship to market interest rates).
Analysis
The contractual cash flows are not solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding.
The interest amounts are not consideration for the time value of money on the principal amount outstanding.
Instrument H – Perpetual instrument with potentially deferrable coupons
Instrument H is a perpetual instrument but the issuer may call the instrument at any point and pay the holder the par amount plus accrued interest due.
It pays a market interest rate but payment of interest cannot be made unless the issuer is able to remain solvent immediately afterwards.
Deferred interest does not accrue additional interest.
Analysis
The contractual cash flows are not payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding. That is because the issuer may be required to defer interest payments and additional interest does not accrue on those deferred interest amounts. As a result, interest amounts are not consideration for the time value of money on the principal amount outstanding.
If interest accrued on the deferred amounts, the contractual cash flows could be payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding.
The fact that Instrument H is perpetual does not in itself mean that the contractual cash flows are not payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding. In effect, a perpetual instrument has continuous (multiple) extension options. Such options may result in contractual cash flows that are payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding if interest payments are mandatory and must be paid in perpetuity.
Also, the fact that Instrument H is callable does not mean that the contractual cash flows are not payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding unless it is callable at an amount that does not substantially reflect payment of outstanding principal and interest on that principal. Even if the callable amount includes an amount that compensates the holder for the early termination of the instrument, the contractual cash flows could be payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding.
The following examples set out how one might interpret the requirements of IFRS 9 in other circumstances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Further examples of applying the contractual characteristics test
Instrument I – Auction Rate Securities (ARS)
ARSs have long-term maturity dates but their interest rate resets more frequently based on the outcome of an auction. As a result of the auction process, the interest rates are short-term and the instruments are treated like short-term investments.
In the event that an auction fails (i.e. there are insufficient buyers of the bond to establish a new rate), the rate resets to a penalty rate. The penalty rate is established at inception and does not necessarily reflect the market rate when the auction fails. It is often intended to compensate the holder for the instrument”s lack of liquidity as demonstrated by the auction failure. The auction process for many such securities failed during the financial crisis.
Analysis
The classification at initial recognition should be based on the contractual terms over the life of the instrument. Although the presumption on acquisition may have been that the auctions were not expected to fail, the potential penalty rate should still be taken into account in the assessment of the instrument”s characteristics at initial recognition. If the penalty rate could be considered to compensate the holder for the longer-term credit risk of the instrument following the auction failure as a result of a reduction in market liquidity, it may be possible that the penalty rate reflects interest. However, as such instruments usually have multiple issues with different penalty rates, each different case would need to be carefully evaluated before a conclusion could be reached.
Instrument J – Extendible deposits
A company makes a deposit with a bank whose term can be extended at the discretion of the bank. For example, the extendible deposit may have a fixed term of five years and pay a fixed interest rate of 5%. At the end of five years, the bank has the option to extend the deposit at the same rate for an additional five years. If the market rate increases to, say, 6% at the end of five years, the bank would be likely to extend the term for another five years because the initial fixed rate (i.e. 5%) is lower than the current market rate.
Analysis
An extension option will not normally result in a financial asset failing the contractual characteristics test if the ability to exercise the option is not contingent on future events. Consequently, we believe that this asset will pass the characteristics test.
Instrument K – Fixed rate bond prepayable by the issuer at fair value
A company acquires a bond which requires the issuer to pay a fixed rate of interest and repay the principal on a fixed date. However, the issuer has the right to prepay (or call) the bond before maturity although the amount the issuer must pay is the fair value of the bond at the time of prepayment, i.e. the fair value of the contractual interest and principal payments that remain outstanding at the point of exercise. For example, if the bond has a term of five years and the call option was exercised at the end of the second year, the fair value would be calculated by discounting the principal and interest payments due over the remaining three years by the current market interest rate for a three-year bond with similar characteristics.
Analysis
The exercise price represents the fair value of unpaid amounts of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding at the date of exercise, albeit discounted at the current market interest rate rather than the original market interest rate.
The fact that the exercise price is the fair value could be interpreted as providing reasonable additional compensation to the holder for early termination in a scenario, although this holds true only where the market rate has fallen since the issue of the bond. If interest rates rise, the holder will not receive additional compensation for early termination and will receive less than the principal amount. In these circumstances, due to the negative compensation, the bond holder would not be receiving principal and interest and the bond would appear to fail the contractual characteristics test.
In cases where the prepayment amount is set so that there is a ‘floor” equal to the par amount, i.e. the prepayment amount received by the holder cannot be less than the par amount of the bond, the prepayment amount could possibly be regarded as representing unpaid amounts of principal and interest.
Instrument L – Units in money-market and debt funds
A company invests in redeemable units of an open-ended money-market or debt fund. The price at which new entrants invest or leavers exit is based on the proportionate share of the fair value of the fund”s assets.
Analysis
Such investments are unlikely to pass the contractual characteristics test. This is because the return on the company”s investment is based on changes in fair value of the fund”s underlying assets and would therefore not normally represent payments of principal and interest.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Trade date and settlement date accounting – exchange of non-cash financial assets
On 29 December 2013 (trade date), an entity enters into a contract to sell Note Receivable A, which is carried at amortised cost, in exchange for Bond B, which will be classified as held for trading and measured at fair value. Both assets have a fair value of €1,010 on 29 December, while the amortised cost of Note Receivable A is €1,000. The entity uses settlement date accounting for loans and receivables and trade date accounting for assets held for trading.
On 31 December 2013 (financial year-end), the fair value of Note Receivable A is €1,012 and the fair value of Bond B is €1,009. On 4 January 2014 (settlement date), the fair value of Note Receivable A is €1,013 and the fair value of Bond B is €1,007.
The simultaneous recognition, between 29 December and 4 January, of both the asset being bought and the asset being given in consideration may seem counter-intuitive. However, it is no different from the accounting treatment of any purchase of goods for credit which results, in the period between delivery of, and payment for, the goods, in the simultaneous recognition of the liability to pay the supplier and the cash that will be used to do so.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interest-free loan to supplier
Company A lends €1,000 to Company B for five years and classifies the resulting asset within loans and receivables. The loan carries no interest and, instead, A expects (or possibly contracts) to receive other future economic benefits, such as a right to receive goods or services at favourable prices or an implicit right to exert influence over the activities of B.
On initial recognition, the market rate of interest for a similar five year loan with payment of interest at maturity is 10% per year. The initial fair value of the loan is the present value of the future payment of €1,000, discounted using the market rate of interest for a similar loan of 10% for five years. This equates to €621.
Rationally, A would also expect to obtain other future economic benefits that have a fair value of €379 (the difference between the total consideration given of €1,000 and the loan” initial fair value of €621). The difference is not a financial asset, since it is paid to obtain expected (or possibly contracted) future economic benefits other than the right to receive payment on the loan asset. A recognises that amount as an expense unless it qualifies for recognition as an asset, for example under IAS 38 – Intangible Assets (see Chapter 19).2
What this approach is trying to do is isolate a ‘pure’ financial instrument from the remainder of an arrangement. In practice, however, identifying the financial instrument component of an arrangement like this is not always so simple. Often the financial and non-financial elements of an arrangement are interlinked, making separation more difficult. This problem is illustrated in the following example.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interest-free loan to employee
As part of their remuneration package, employees of Company F may borrow up to €1,000 from F on interest-free terms. These loans are repayable only in the event that employment ceases (which may be at the option either of the employee or of F, subject to relatively short contractual notice periods and perhaps certain statutory requirements). F determines that the average service life of an employee is five years and the market rate of interest for a five year loan with payment of interest at maturity is 10% per year. Accordingly, when an employee joins and borrows €1,000, as in Example 48.4 above, F may calculate that the initial fair value of the loan is €621.
However, if this approach is adopted, the question arises as to what the ‘spare’ €379 represents. There is often a high degree of scepticism expressed at the recognition of prepaid employment costs as it is often questionable whether such costs can ever be recovered. However, in this case, it is clear that the €379 will be recoverable in the event that the employee leaves, so this is clearly one alternative.
The €379 may also be seen as representing the value of a contract whereby F has the choice of receiving cash (repayment of the loan, say in the event that F was to terminate the employee” service contract) or employment services. In a similar way to the oil-linked bond considered in Chapter 43 at 2.2.5 this element might also be considered a financial instrument. Because it is also a financial instrument, there appears to be no reason why this part of the contract should be accounted for separately from the remainder of the financial instrument (unless it is considered an embedded derivative).
One could also view F” ability to terminate the employment contract and force settlement of the loan at face value as an embedded call option that is not closely related to the host instrument because the strike price, €1,000, is significantly different from the loan” amortised cost, initially €621 (see Chapter 44 at 5.1.3). This would be another form of financial instrument, in this case a derivative, although it is again hard to see why this should be accounted for separately.
Finally, notwithstanding its expected life based on average service lives, there is an argument to be made that the fair value of the loan is approximately €1,000 if F can demand payment of €1,000 within a short space of time (albeit by terminating the employment contract), suggesting there is no (significant) spare debit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bayer AG (2011)
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements of the Bayer Group [extracts]
4 Basic principles, methods and critical accounting estimates [extracts]
Financial assets [extracts]
Financial assets comprise loans and receivables, acquired equity and debt instruments, cash and cash equivalents, and derivatives with positive fair values. […]
Financial assets are initially recognized at fair value plus transaction costs. … Interest-free or low-interest receivables are initially reflected at the present value of the expected future cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Off-market loan with origination fee
Bank J lends $1,000 to Company K. The loan carries interest at 5% and is repayable in full in five years’ time, even though the market rate for similar loans is 8%. To compensate J for the below market rate of interest, K pays J an origination fee of $120. There are no other directly related payments by either party.
The loan is recorded at its fair value of $880 (net present value of $50 interest payable annually for five years and $1,000 principal repaid after five years, all discounted at 8%). This equals the net amount of cash exchanged ($1,000 loan less $120 origination fee) and hence no gain or loss is recognised on initial recognition of the loan. [Extrapolated from example in IAS 39.AG65; IFRS 9.B5.1.2].
Again, applying the requirements of IAS 39 (IFRS 9) to the simple fact pattern provided by the IASB is a relatively straightforward exercise. In practice, however, it may be more difficult to identify those fees that are required by IAS 39 (IFRS 9) to be treated as part of the financial instrument and those that should be dealt with in another way, for example under IAS 18 – Revenue. Particularly, it may be difficult to determine the extent to which fees associated with a financial instrument that is not quoted in an active market represents compensation for off-market terms or for the genuine provision of services.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction costs – initial measurement
Company A acquires an equity security that will be classified as available-for-sale. The security has a fair value of 100 and this is the amount A is required to pay. In addition, A also pays a purchase commission of 2. If the asset was to be sold, a sales commission of 3 would be payable.
The initial measurement of the asset is 102, i.e. the sum of its initial fair value and the purchase commission. The commission payable on sale is not considered for this purpose. [IAS 39.AG67, IFRS 9.B5.2.2]. If A had a reporting date immediately after the purchase of this security it would measure the security at 100 and recognise a loss of 2 in other comprehensive income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bid-ask spread – initial measurement
As in Example 48.8 above, Company A acquires an equity security which will be classified as available-for-sale. In this case A purchases the asset in an active market where no explicit transaction costs are charged, but separate bid and offer prices are quoted. On acquisition the security has an asking price of 102, which is the amount A is required to pay, and a bid price of 97, which is what A would receive were it to sell the asset.
The fair value of a quoted asset is deemed to be its bid price (see Chapter 49 for further fair value discussion) and this suggests that A should initially measure the asset at 97. This would result in an immediate loss of 5, the difference between the initial fair value of the asset and the cash paid. What is more, this loss would be recognised in profit or loss as it does not arise on remeasurement of the asset.
However, what the standard appears to be saying is that the 5 ‘loss’ (i.e. the bid-ask spread) is deemed to be a transaction cost and, therefore, should be included in the initial measurement of the asset. The asset would then be initially measured at 102 (which happens to be what was paid for it) with no immediate loss recognised in profit or loss. If A had a reporting date immediately after the purchase of this security it would measure the security at 97 and recognise a loss of 5 in other comprehensive income.
If, instead, the security had been classified at fair value through profit or loss, the accounting treatment on initial recognition would have been significantly different. For such assets, transaction costs are recognised in profit or loss and A would have recorded a 5 loss in profit or loss.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Available-for-sale asset – determination of interest
A company acquires a zero coupon bond at the end of 2013 for 760, its fair value, which matures at the beginning of 2017 at 1,000. It is classified as an available-for-sale asset and, accordingly, associated fair value gains and losses are recognised in other comprehensive income. Its fair value at the end of 2014, 2015 and 2016 is 850, 950 and 1,000 respectively and it can be determined that the effective interest rate is 9.6% (the effective interest method is discussed in more detail at 5 below).
The financial statements would therefore include the accounting entries set out in the following table (amortised cost is memorandum information used to determine interest).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mercy Medical Mega Center, a taxpaying entity, has made the decision to purchase a new laser surgical device. The device costs $500,000 and will be depreciated on a straight-line basis over five years to a zero salvage value. Mercy Medical could borrow the full amount at a 12 percent rate for five years. The after-tax cost of debt equals 8 percent. Alternatively, it could lease the device for five years. The before-tax lease payments per year would be $90,000. The tax rate for this Mega Center is 40 percent. From a financial perspective, should Mercy lease the surgical device or borrow the money to purchase it?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carolina Ancillary Services for Hospitals (CASH), a taxpaying entity, is considering the purchase of a 64-slice computed tomographic scanner. The cost of the scanner is $2,000,000. The scanner would be depreciated over ten years on a straight-line basis to a zero salvage value. At the end of five years, the scanner could be sold for its book value, $1,000,000. The tax rate is 40 percent. The financing options include either borrowing for the full cost of the scanner and selling it at the end of year 5 or leasing one. The lease option is a five-year lease with equal before-tax lease payments of $550,000 per year. The borrowing alternative is a five-year loan covering the entire cost of the scanner at an interest rate of 6 percent. The after-tax cost of debt is 4 percent. Should CASH lease the scanner or borrow the full amount to purchase it?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tidewater Hospital, a taxpaying entity, is considering a leasing arrangement for its ambulance fleet. The fleet of ambulances costs $250,000 and will be depreciated over a ten-year life to a salvage value of $50,000. Tidewater could finance the entire fleet with equal annual debt and principal payments at a before-tax cost of debt of 9 percent and an after-tax cost of debt at 6 percent for ten years. Alternatively, it could lease the fleet for ten years. The before-tax lease payments are $45,000 per year for ten years. Tidewater”s tax rate is 40 percent. From a financial perspective, should Tidewater lease or borrow the money to buy the ambulances?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exton Hospital is considering a new replacement hospital and plans to issue long-term bonds to finance the project. Before it meets with its investment bankers, the hospital wants to estimate how much additional debt it can take on. Currently, the hospital has annual debt service payments of $2 million, and its cash flow available to meet debt service payment is $10 million per year. For its new debt issuance, the hospital plans to issue fixed-rate debt for thirty years. It also assumes that Fitch Rating Agency will assign it a BBB rating. Fitch”s median debt service coverage ratio for BBB bonds is 3.0×. The expected fixed interest rate for a thirty-year BBB rate tax-exempt bond is 5 percent. Using Fitch”s median debt service coverage ratio for a BBB-rated bond along with the prior information, how much additional debt could Exton Hospital take on?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Springfield Health System is considering developing full-service imaging centers across its service area and plans to issue long-term debt to finance these centers. Before it meets with its investment bankers, it wants to estimate how much additional debt it can take on. Currently, Springfield Health System has annual debt service payments of $5 million, and its cash flow available to meet debt service payment is $25 million per year. For its new debt issuance, it plans to issue fixed-rate debt for thirty years. It also assumes Fitch Rating Agency will assign it a BBB rating. Fitch”s median debt service coverage ratio for BBB-rated large health care systems is 2.75×. The expected fixed rate for a thirty-year BBBRATE long-term bond is 5 percent. Using Fitch”s median debt service coverage ratio for a BBB-rated bond along with the prior information, how much additional debt could Springfield take on?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Laurie Vaden is a physician with her own practice. She has developed contracts with several large employers to perform routine exams, fitness-for-duty exams, and initial screening of on-the-job injuries. She provides 100 exams per month, charging $100 per exam. Under this contract, she estimates her avoidable fixed costs attributable to the exams is $1,000 per month, and she pays a lab an average of $15 per exam. She has decided she needs to increase profit, so she is considering raising her fee to $125, even though there may be a 10 percent loss in the number of exams she does per month. Determine the current and predicted: revenues, variable costs, and total contribution margin. What do you recommend she do? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Janet Gilbert is director of labs. She has some extra capacity and has contracted with some small neighboring hospitals to run some of their lab tests. She has recently had a study conducted and has determined that her costs for these contracts are $50,000, of which $7,000 is the variable cost of supplies. The rest is non-avoidable fixed cost. She currently charges an average of $20 per test. She is thinking of lowering her price by 20 percent in hopes of raising her current volume of 10,000 tests by 15 percent. If she does so, she expects her variable cost per test will go up by 4 percent. Determine the current and predicted: revenues, variable costs, and total contribution margin and product margin. What do you recommend she do? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AngloGold Ashanti Limited (2010)
Notes to the financial statements [extract]
1 Accounting policies [extract]
1.3 Summary of significant accounting policies [extract]
Inventories [extract]
Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value after appropriate allowances for redundant and slow moving items. Cost is determined on the following bases:
…
- heap leach pad materials are measured on an average total production cost basis. The cost of materials on the leach pad from which gold is expected to be recovered in a period longer than 12 months is classified as a non-current asset.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Norsk Hydro ASA (2010)
NOTE 26 – Investments in jointly controlled entities [extract]
Aluminium Norf GmbH (Alunorf) is the world’s largest rolling mill and is located in Germany. Alunorf is jointly owned by Hydro and Hindalco Industries (50 percent each). Through a tolling arrangement each partner supplies Alunorf with raw material which is transformed to flat rolled coils and delivered to the partners. Sales from Alunorf to Hydro amounted to NOK 1,423 million in 2010 and NOK 1,378 million in 2009. The tolling fee is based on cost recovery, in which each partner bears its share of cost. Hydro’s capital and financing commitments are regulated in the Joint Venture agreement. Alunorf has investment commitments amounting to NOK 235 million as of 31 December 2010. Hydro’s financing commitment based on its interest is NOK 109 million as of 31 December 2010. Alunorf is part of Rolled Products.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rainfall contract – derivative financial instrument or insurance contract?
Company E has contracted to lease a stall at an open-air event from which it plans to sell goods to people attending the event. The event will be held at a village approximately 100 km from Capital City.
Because E is concerned that poor weather may deter people from attending the event, it enters into a contract with Financial Institution K, the terms of which are that, in return for a premium paid by E on inception of the contract, K will pay a fixed amount of money to E if, during the day of the event, it rains for more than three hours at the meteorological station in the centre of Capital City.
The non-financial variable in the contract, i.e. rainfall at the meteorological station, is not specific to E. Particularly, E will only suffer loss as a result of rainfall at the village, not at Capital City. Also, because the potential payment to be received is for a fixed amount, it might not be possible to demonstrate that E has suffered a loss for which it has been compensated. Therefore, E should account for the contract as a financial instrument under IAS 39 (IFRS 9).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Diageo plc (2007)
Notes to the company financial statements [extracts]
1. New accounting policies [extracts]
The company has adopted the amendment … in respect of financial guarantee contracts and credit insurance in these financial statements. Where the company enters into financial guarantee contracts to guarantee the indebtedness of other companies within its group, the company considers these to be insurance arrangements, and accounts for them as such. In this respect, the company treats the guarantee contract as a contingent liability until such time as it becomes probable that the company will be required to make a payment under the guarantee. As a result, adoption of the amendment … has not affected profit after taxation or shareholders funds.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying classes of loan commitment
A banking group has two main operating subsidiaries, one in country A and the other in country B. Although they share common functions (e.g. information systems) the two subsidiaries’ operations are clearly distinct.
Both subsidiaries originate similar loans under loan commitments. In country A there is an active and liquid market for the assets resulting from loan commitments issued in that country. The subsidiary operating in that country has a past practice of disposing of such assets in this market shortly after origination. There is no such market in country B.
The fact that one subsidiary has a past practice of settling its loan commitments net (as the term is used in the standard) would not normally mean that the loan commitments issued in country B are required to be classified as at fair value through profit or loss.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining whether a copper forward is within the scope of IAS 39 (IFRS 9)
Company XYZ enters into a fixed-price forward contract to purchase 1,000 kg of copper in accordance with its expected usage requirements. The contract permits XYZ to take physical delivery of the copper at the end of twelve months, or to pay or receive a net settlement in cash, based on the change in fair value of copper.
The contract is a derivative instrument because there is no initial net investment, the contract is based on the price of copper, and it is to be settled at a future date. However, if XYZ intends to settle the contract by taking delivery and has no history for similar contracts of settling net in cash, or of taking delivery of the copper and selling it within a short period after delivery for the purpose of generating a profit from short-term fluctuations in price or dealer”s margin, the contract is accounted for as an executory contract rather than as a derivative.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining whether a put option on an office building is within the scope of IAS 39 (IFRS 9)
Company XYZ owns an office building. It enters into a put option with an investor, which expires in five years and permits it to put the building to the investor for 150 million. The current value of the building is 175 million. The option, if exercised, may be settled through physical delivery or net cash, at XYZ”s option.
XYZ”s accounting depends on its intention and past practice for settlement. Although the contract meets the definition of a derivative, XYZ does not account for it as a derivative if it intends to settle the contract by delivering the building in the event of exercise and there is no past practice of settling net.
The investor, however, cannot conclude that the option was entered into to meet its expected purchase, sale, or usage requirements – the contract may be settled net and is a written option. Regardless of past practices, its intention does not affect whether settlement is by delivery or in cash. Accordingly, the investor accounts for the contract as a derivative. As noted in Chapter 44 at 2 and in Chapter 46 at 2, this will involve remeasuring the derivative to its fair value each reporting period with any associated gains and losses recognised in profit or loss.
However, if the contract were a forward contract rather than an option, it required physical delivery and the investor had no past practice of settling net (either in cash or by way of taking delivery and subsequently selling within a short period), the contract would not be accounted for as a derivative. [IAS 39.A.2].
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial instrument with non-financial obligation that must be settled if, and only if, the entity fails to redeem the instrument
The reporting entity borrows €1 million from its bank for five years on terms that, at the end of five years, the entity must deliver its head office building to the bank but may instead repay the loan at €1 million plus rolled-up interest at market rates.
Q
Change of control
X plc is owned by:
- two wealthy individuals A and B, who own, respectively, 48% and 42% of X”s equity, together with
- a number of private individuals with small shareholdings totalling 10% of the equity.
In practical terms, if A and B agree that B will sell his shares to A, thus giving A a 90% controlling stake in the entity, it makes very little difference whether this is achieved by a private sale treaty between A and B or a general meeting of the company (at which A and B would be able to cast 90% of available votes in favour of the transaction).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HSBC Holdings plc (2009)
Interim Management Statement Q1 2009 [extract]
Accounting impact of HSBC”s Rights Issue [extract]
On 2 March 2009, HSBC announced a 5 for 12 Rights Issue of 5,060 million new ordinary shares at 254 pence per share, which was authorised by the shareholders in a general meeting on 19 March 2009. The offer period commenced on 20 March 2009, and closed for acceptance on 3 April 2009. Under IFRSs, the offer of rights is treated as a derivative because substantially all of the issue was denominated in currencies other than the Company”s functional currency of US dollars, and accordingly HSBC was not able to demonstrate that it was issuing a fixed number of shares for a fixed amount of US dollars, which is the criterion under IFRSs for HSBC to account for the offer of rights in shareholders” equity. The derivative liability was measured at inception of the offer as the difference between the share price at that date and the rights price, with a corresponding debit to shareholders” equity. The revaluation of this derivative liability over the offer period, arising from an increase in the share price, has resulted in the recognition of a loss in the income statement of US$4.7 billion. The derivative liability expired on acceptance of the offer, and the closing balance was credited to shareholders” equity. Accordingly, there is no overall impact on the Group”s shareholders” equity, capital position or distributable reserves.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Convertible bond issued by a subsidiary with a functional currency different to that of the parent
Suppose, as above, that a UK entity with a functional currency of the pound sterling (GBP) has a US trading subsidiary with a functional currency of the US dollar (USD). The US subsidiary issues a bond convertible, at the holder”s option, into equity of the UK parent.
If the parent”s functional currency (GBP) is the reference currency, the accounting treatment of the holder”s conversion right in the consolidated financial statements will be as follows:
- if the fixed stated principal of the bond is denominated in GBP: equity (stated principal of bond is fixed by reference to GBP); but
- if the fixed stated principal of the bond is denominated in a currency other than GBP: derivative (stated principal of bond is variable by reference to GBP).
If, however, the subsidiary”s functional currency (USD) is the reference currency, a converse analysis applies, and the accounting treatment of the holder”s conversion right in the consolidated financial statements will be as follows:
- if the fixed stated principal of the bond is denominated in USD: equity (stated principal of bond is fixed by reference to USD); but
- if the fixed stated principal of the bond is denominated in a currency other than USD: derivative (stated principal of bond is variable by reference to USD).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Convertible bond – basic ‘split accounting’22
An entity, whose functional currency is the Euro, issues 2,000 convertible bonds. The bonds have a three-year term, and are issued at par with a face value of €1,000 per bond, giving total proceeds of €2,000,000. Interest is payable annually in arrears at a nominal annual interest rate of 6% (i.e. €120,000 per annum). Each bond is convertible at any time up to maturity into 250 ordinary shares. When the bonds are issued, the prevailing market interest rate for similar debt without conversion options is 9% per annum. The entity incurs issue costs of €100,000.
The economic components of this instrument are:
- a liability component, being a discounted fixed rate debt, perhaps with an imputed holder”s put option (due to the holder”s right to convert at any time), and
- an equity component, representing the holder”s right to convert at any time before maturity. In effect this is a written call option (from the issuer”s perspective) on American terms (i.e. it can be exercised at any time until maturity of the bond).
The practical problem with this analysis is that it is not clear what is the strike price of the holder”s options to put the debt and call for shares, specifically whether it is the €2,000,000 face value of the bonds or the discounted amount at which they are recorded until maturity. Perhaps for this reason, IAS 32 does not require the true fair values of these components to be calculated.
Instead the liability component is measured first at the net present value of the maximum potential cash payments that the issuer could be required to make. The difference between the proceeds of the bond issue and the calculated fair value of the liability is assigned to the equity component. The net present value (NPV) of the liability component is calculated as €1,848,122, using a discount rate of 9%, the market interest rate for similar bonds having no conversion rights, as shown.
|
|
|
Discount factor
|
NPV of cash flow
|
|
Year
|
Cash flow
|
(at 9%)
|
|
|
1
|
Interest
|
120,000 1/1.09
|
110,092
|
|
2
|
Interest
|
120,000 1/1.092
|
101,001
|
|
3
|
Interest and principal
|
2,120,000 1/1.093
|
1,637,029
|
|
|
|
Total liability component
|
1,848,122
|
|
|
|
Total equity component
|
151,878
|
|
|
|
(balance)
|
|
|
|
|
Total proceeds
|
2,000,000
|
It is next necessary to deal with the issue costs of €100,000. In accordance with the requirements of IAS 32 for such costs (see 8.1 below), these would be allocated to the liability and equity components on a pro rata basis. This would give the following allocation of the net issue proceeds.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of compound financial instrument into components
An entity issues a bond for €100, paying an annual cash coupon of 5% on the issue price and mandatorily convertible after five years on the following terms. If, at the date of conversion, the entity”s share price is €1.25 or higher, the holder will receive 80 shares. If the entity”s share price is €1.00 or lower, the holder will receive 100 shares. If the entity”s share price is in the range €1.00 to €1.25, the holder will receive such number of shares (between 80 and 100) as have a fair value of €100.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Convertible bond – split accounting with multiple embedded derivative features26
The proceeds received on the issue of a convertible bond, callable at par, are 60 million, which equals the nominal amount of the convertible bond. The value of a similar bond without a call or equity conversion option is 57 million. Based on an option-pricing model, it is determined that the value to the entity of the embedded call feature in a similar bond without an equity conversion option is 2 million. In this case, the value is allocated to the liability component so as to reduce the liability component to 55 million (57m – 2m) and the value allocated to the equity component is 5 million (60m – 55m). Because IAS 39 requires the embedded derivative assessment to be done before separating the equity component and the call option is at par, the option is considered to be clearly and closely related and therefore not separated from the liability host contract.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foreign currency denominated equity instrument with issuer”s redemption right
An entity with a functional currency of pounds sterling issues a euro-denominated capital instrument for €145 million (equivalent to 100 million at the date of issue). Coupons on the instrument are paid entirely at the entity’s discretion. The entity has the right, but not the obligation, in certain circumstances to redeem the instrument (in Euros) for an amount equal to the original issue proceeds.
Taken as a whole, this is an equity instrument, because it gives rise to no obligation to transfer cash or other financial assets to the holder. However, the issuer’s right to redeem, if considered in isolation is not an equity instrument, but a financial asset (a call option over own equity), since it is a derivative involving the purchase of a fixed number of equity instruments for €145 million which, although fixed in euros, is variable when translated into sterling. Suppose that the fair value of the call option, at the date of issue was 15 million.
This analysis would result in the following accounting entry on issue of the instrument
In our view, it would be inappropriate to show an increase in net assets of 115 million, when the only real transaction has been the raising of 100 million of equity for cash. In this particular case, this treatment is, in our view, not required since paragraph 28 of IAS 32 requires split accounting to be applied only where an instrument is determined to contain ‘both a liability and an equity component’. In this case, there is no liability component, since the embedded derivative that has potentially been identified is, and can only ever be, an asset; accordingly, ‘split accounting’ is not required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mandatorily convertible bond classified as equity
An entity, with a functional currency of Euro, issues 2,000 convertible bonds with a nominal value of €1,000 per bond, giving total proceeds of €2,000,000. The bonds have a three-year term, and interest is payable, at the discretion of the entity, annually in arrears at a nominal annual interest rate of 6% (i.e. €120,000 per annum). At maturity of the bond each bond converts into 250 ordinary shares. Because the conversion option meets the definition of an equity instrument and payment of interest is at the discretion of the entity, the entire instrument is classified as an equity instrument. The entity records the following accounting entry.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discharge of liability for fresh issue of equity
During 2007 an entity issued 100 million bonds due to be repaid in 2017. By 2013 the entity is in some financial difficulty and reaches an agreement with the holders of the bonds whereby they will accept equity shares in the entity in full and final settlement of all amounts due under the bonds. On the date the agreement concludes, the carrying amount of the bonds is 99 million and the fair value of the equity shares issued is 60 million.
In this situation the entity would measure the equity instruments issued at their fair value of 60 million and recognise a profit on extinguishment of 39 million [99 million – 60 million].
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Note with index-linked principal
Company A purchases a five year interest free equity-index-linked note, with an original issue price of €10, for its market price of €12. At maturity, the note requires payment of the original issue price of €10 plus a supplemental redemption amount that depends on whether a specified stock price index exceeds a predetermined level at the maturity date. If the stock index does not exceed the predetermined level, no supplemental redemption amount is paid. If it does, the supplemental redemption amount equals the product of €1.15 and the difference between the level of the stock index at maturity and original issuance divided by the level at original issuance. A has the positive intention and ability to hold the note to maturity.
The note can be classified as a held-to-maturity investment because it has a fixed payment of €10 and fixed maturity and there is the positive intention and ability to hold it to maturity. However, the equity index feature is a call option not closely related to the debt host which must be separated as an embedded derivative . The purchase price (initial fair value) of €12 is allocated between the host debt instrument and the embedded derivative – the latter will have a non-zero fair value because it is an option-based derivative. [IAS 39.B.13].
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Change of management
A company has a portfolio of financial assets that is classified as held-to-maturity. In the current period, at the direction of the board of directors, the senior management team has been replaced. The new management wishes to sell a portion of the held-to-maturity financial assets in order to carry out an expansion strategy designated and approved by the board.
Although the previous management team had been in place since the company”s formation and had never before undergone a major restructuring, the sale nevertheless calls into question the company”s intention to hold remaining held-to-maturity financial assets to maturity and the company may be prohibited from using the held-to-maturity classification if the amounts involved are not insignificant.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HSBC Holdings plc (2011)
Notes on the Financial Statements [extract]
2. Summary of significant accounting policies [extract]
(e) Reclassification of financial assets [extract]
Non-derivative financial assets (other than those designated at fair value through profit or loss upon initial recognition) may be reclassified out of the fair value through profit or loss category in the following circumstances:
- financial assets that would have met the definition of loans and receivables at initial recognition (if the financial asset had not been required to be classified as held for trading) may be reclassified out of the fair value through profit or loss category if there is the intention and ability to hold the financial asset for the foreseeable future or until maturity; and
- financial assets (except financial assets that would have met the definition of loans and receivables at initial recognition) may be reclassified out of the fair value through profit or loss category and into another category in rare circumstances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deutsche Bank AG (2011)
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]
01 Significant Accounting Policies [extract]
Financial Assets and Liabilities [extract]
Reclassification of Financial Assets [extract]
The Group may reclassify certain financial assets out of the financial assets at fair value through profit or loss classification (trading assets) and the AFS classification into the loans classification. For assets to be reclassified there must be a clear change in management intent with respect to the assets since initial recognition and the financial asset must meet the definition of a loan at the reclassification date. Additionally, there must be an intent and ability to hold the asset for the foreseeable future at the reclassification date. There is no single specific period that defines foreseeable future. Rather, it is a matter requiring management judgment. In exercising this judgment, the Group established the following minimum requirements for what constitutes foreseeable future. At the time of reclassification,
- there must be no intent to dispose of the asset through sale or securitization within one year and no internal or external requirement that would restrict the Group”s ability to hold or require sale; and
- the business plan going forward should not be to profit from short-term movements in price.
Financial assets proposed for reclassification which meet these criteria are considered based on the facts and circumstances of each financial asset under consideration. A positive management assertion is required after taking into account the ability and plausibility to execute the strategy to hold.
In addition to the above criteria the Group also requires that persuasive evidence exists to assert that the expected repayment of the asset exceeds the estimated fair value and the returns on the asset will be optimized by holding it for the foreseeable future.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BP p.l.c. (2010)
Notes on financial statements [extract]
1. Significant accounting policies [extract]
Property, plant and equipment [extract]
Expenditure on major maintenance refits or repairs comprises the cost of replacement assets or parts of assets, inspection costs and overhaul costs. Where an asset or part of an asset that was separately depreciated is replaced and it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the group, the expenditure is capitalized and the carrying amount of the replaced asset is derecognized. Inspection costs associated with major maintenance programmes are capitalized and amortized over the period to the next inspection. Overhaul costs for major maintenance programmes, and all other maintenance costs are expensed as incurred.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business segment reporting [extract]
Downstream results [extract]
2010 vs. 2009 [extract]
For the full year 2010, the refinery utilization rate based on crude throughput was 73% (77% for crude and other feedstock) compared to 78% in 2009 (83% for crude and other feedstock), reflecting essentially the shutdown of the Dunkirk refinery and a distillation unit at the Normandy refinery as well as impacts from strikes in France. In 2010, the level of scheduled turnarounds for refinery maintenance was low, with turnaround activity expected to increase notably in 2011.
2009 vs. 2008 [extract]
For the full year 2009, the refinery utilization rate based on crude throughput was 78% (83% for crude and other feedstock) compared to 88% in 2008 (91% for crude and other feedstock), reflecting the voluntary throughput reductions in the Group’s refineries. Five refineries had scheduled turnarounds for maintenance in 2009 compared to six in 2008.
Liquidity and capital resources [extract]
In the Downstream segment, about 70% of capital expenditures are related to refining activities (essentially 40% for existing units including maintenance and major turnarounds and 60% for new construction), the balance being used in marketing/retail activities and for information systems.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
GDF SUEZ (2010)
20.2 NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS [extract]
NOTE 1 SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES [extract]
1.4 Significant accounting policies [extract]
1.4.9 Leases [extract]
1.4.9.3 Accounting for arrangements that contain a lease
IFRIC 4 deals with the identification of services and take-or-pay sales or purchasing contracts that do not take the legal form of a lease but convey rights to customers/suppliers to use an asset or a group of assets in return for a payment or a series of fixed payments. Contracts meeting these criteria should be identified as either operating leases or finance leases. In the latter case, a finance receivable should be recognized to reflect the financing deemed to be granted by the Group where it is considered as acting as lessor and its customers as lessees.
The Group is concerned by this interpretation mainly with respect to:
- some energy purchase and sale contracts, particularly where the contract conveys to the purchaser of the energy an exclusive right to use a production asset;
- certain contracts with industrial customers relating to assets held by the Group.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
GDF SUEZ (2010)
5 RISK FACTORS [extract]
5.3 BUSINESS MODEL LIMITATIONS [extract]
5.3.1 SHORT- AND LONG-TERM ENERGY PURCHASES [extract]
5.3.1.1 Long-term take-or-pay gas procurement contracts with minimum volume commitments [extract]
The gas business in Europe operates largely on the basis of long-term “take-or-pay” contracts. According to these contracts, the seller agrees to serve the buyer on a long-term basis, in exchange for a commitment on the behalf of the buyer to pay for minimum quantities, whether or not they are delivered. These minimum amounts may vary only partially depending on weather contingencies. These commitments are subject to protective (force majeure) and flexibility conditions.
To guarantee availability of the quantities of gas required to supply its customers in future years, a major proportion of the Group’s contracts are “take-or-pay” contracts. Regular price revision mechanisms included in the long-term contracts guarantee competitive gas prices to the buyer on the final market. If the purchased gas loses its price competitiveness, GDF SUEZ would only be exposed to the “take-or-pay” risk on the quantities purchased prior to the next price revision.
Most long-term procurement contracts are indexed on oil products price indices. However, with the emergence of short-term gas markets, gas prices are increasingly changing independently of oil prices, which are creating a conflict between short-term and long-term gas prices. A situation where the gas price remains constantly below the price of oil indexed contracts could have a significant impact on the Group’s revenues, in particular if the Group fails to renegotiate its long-term gas procurement contracts satisfactorily against the backdrop of a prolonged mismatch between gas and oil prices.
2 PRESENTATION OF ACTIVITIES [extract]
2.1 ORGANIZATION OF ACTIVITIES AND DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS LINES [extract]
2.1.3.7 GDF SUEZ Gas Supplies [extract]
Gas purchases [extract]
GDF SUEZ Gas Supplies brings to the Group one of the largest and most diversified contract portfolios in Europe and its flexibility is a real competitive edge in the natural gas market in Europe.
It consists largely of long term contracts with a term of some 20 years. As of December 31, 2010, the average residual term of these long-term contracts (weighted by volume) was 14.9 years. This portfolio is balanced through purchases in short-term markets through Gaselys. Through this, [GDF SUEZ] adjusts its supply to the group’s needs by optimizing its purchasing costs. Close cooperation between the GDF SUEZ Gas Supplies and Gaselys allows that the portfolio can be finely balanced from day to day.
According to market practice, the long-term purchase contracts include take-or-pay clauses, according to which the buyer agrees to pay for minimum gas volumes each year, whether or not delivery occurs (except in the event of supplier default or force majeure). Most contracts also stipulate flexibility clauses. These are compensation mechanisms that allow volumes already paid for but not taken to be carried over to a subsequent period (make-up) or limited volumes to be deducted from the take-or-pay obligation, when the volumes taken over the course of previous years exceeds the minimum volumes applicable to these years (carry forward).
The price of natural gas under these contracts is indexed to the market price of energy products with which gas is directly or indirectly substitutable (mainly oil products). In addition, these contracts provide for periodic (two to four year) revisions of price and indexing formulae to account for market changes. Finally, most contracts provide for the possibility of adjusting prices (jokers’ rights) in exceptional circumstances, over and above the periodic reviews.
In certain cases, it is possible to change other contractual provisions in response to exceptional events affecting their economic balance (hardship clause). The parties are then required to negotiate in good faith and can, in the event of disagreement, revert to arbitration.
Supply contracts stipulate one or more delivery points. The delivery points of gas delivered by pipeline are spread across the entire European transport system and, in the case of LNG, are mainly sited at vessel loading docks at suppliers’ liquefaction plants.
GDF SUEZ Gas Supplies constantly seeks to match its portfolio to the market situation. This is materialized by drawing up new contracts and by price reviews. In a context marked by the decoupling of oil prices, to which the long-term contracts are indexed, from those of the gas sold in the market place, GDF SUEZ Gas Supplies started negotiations with all its main suppliers in 2009.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Royal Dutch Shell plc (2010)
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS [extract]
2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES [extract]
REVENUE RECOGNITION
Revenue from sales of oil, natural gas, chemicals and all other products is recognised at the fair value of consideration received or receivable, after deducting sales taxes, excise duties and similar levies, when the significant risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred, which is when title passes to the customer. For sales by Upstream operations, this generally occurs when product is physically transferred into a vessel, pipe or other delivery mechanism. For sales by refining operations, it is either when product is placed onboard a vessel or offloaded from the vessel, depending on the contractually agreed terms. For wholesale sales of oil products and chemicals it is either at the point of delivery or the point of receipt, depending on contractual conditions.
Revenue resulting from the production of oil and natural gas properties in which Shell has an interest with other producers is recognised on the basis of Shell’s working interest (entitlement method). Gains and losses on derivative contracts and the revenue and costs associated with other contracts that are classified as held for trading purposes are reported on a net basis in the Consolidated Statement of Income. Purchases and sales of hydrocarbons under exchange contracts that are necessary to obtain or reposition feedstock for Shell’s refinery operations are presented net in the Consolidated Statement of Income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Petroleum revenue tax133
Petroleum revenue tax (PRT) is a special tax that seeks to tax a high proportion of the economic rent (super-profits) from the exploitation of the UK’s oil and gas. PRT is a cash-based tax that is levied on a field-by-field basis: in general, the costs of developing and running a field can only be set against the profits generated by that field. Any losses, e.g. arising from unused expenditure relief, can be carried back or forward within the field indefinitely. There is also a range of reliefs, including:
- oil allowance – a PRT-free slice of production;
- supplement – a proxy for interest and other financing costs;
- Tariff Receipts Allowance (TRA) – participators owning assets, for example pipelines, relating to one field will sometimes allow participators from other fields to share the use of the asset in return for the payment of tariffs, and TRA relieves some of the tariffs received from PRT;
- exemption from PRT for gas sold to British Gas under a pre-July 1975 contract; and
- cross-field relief for research expenditure.
PRT is currently charged at 50% on profits after these allowances. For a limited period, safeguard relief then applies to ensure that PRT does not reduce the annual return in the early years of production of a field to below 15% of the historic capital expenditure on the field.
PRT was abolished on 16 March 1993 for all fields given development consent on or after that date. This was part of a package of PRT reforms which also included the reduction of the rate of PRT from 75 per cent to 50 per cent and the abolition of PRT relief for Exploration and Appraisal (E&A) expenditure.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grossing up of notional quantities withheld
Entity A is the operator of an oil field that produces 10 million barrels of oil per year. Under the production sharing contract between entity A and the national government, entity A and the government are entitled to 4,000,000 and 6,000,000 barrels of oil, respectively. The production sharing contract includes the following clause:
‘The share of the profit petroleum to which the government is entitled in any calendar year in accordance with the production sharing contract shall be deemed to include a portion representing the corporate income tax imposed upon and due by entity A, and which will be paid directly by the government on behalf of entity A to the appropriate tax authorities.’
Assuming the following facts, how should entity A account for the income tax that it is deemed to have paid in 2013:
- the normal corporate income tax rate in the country in which entity A operates is 40%;
- entity A made a net profit of USD 30 million in 2013; and
- the average oil price during the year was USD 50/barrel.
Gross presentation
Entity A’s profit after 40% corporate income tax was USD 30 million. Therefore, its profit before tax would have been USD 50 million (i.e. USD 30 million ÷ (100% – 40%)). In other words, the government is deemed to have paid corporate income tax of USD 20 million on behalf of entity A. Therefore, the government is deemed to have taken 400,000 barrels (i.e. USD 20 million ÷ USD 50/barrel) out of entity A’s share of the production. Hence, entity A’s share of production before corporate income tax was 4,400,000 barrels (i.e. 4,000,000 barrels + 400,000 barrels).
Net presentation
Under the net presentation approach, entity A ignores the corporate income tax that was deemed to have been paid by the government because it is not a transaction that entity A was party to or because the deemed transaction did not actually take place.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Notes to the Financial Statements [extract]
2 Principal Accounting Policies [extract]
d) Revenue recognition [extract]
Revenue represents the value of goods and services supplied to third parties during the year. Revenue is measured at the fair value of consideration received or receivable, and excludes any applicable sales tax.
A sale is recognised when the significant risks and rewards of ownership have passed. This is generally when title and any insurance risk has passed to the customer, and the goods have been delivered to a contractually agreed location or when any services have been provided.
Revenue from mining activities is recorded at the invoiced amounts with an adjustment for provisional pricing at each reporting date, as explained below. For copper and molybdenum concentrates, which are sold to smelters and roasting plants for further processing, the invoiced amount is the market value of the metal payable by the customer, net of deductions for tolling charges. Revenue includes revenues from the sale of by-products.
Copper and molybdenum concentrate sale agreements and copper cathode sale agreements generally provide for provisional pricing of sales at the time of shipment, with final pricing based on the monthly average London Metal Exchange (“LME”) copper price or the monthly average market molybdenum price for specified future periods. This normally ranges from 30 to 120 days after delivery to the customer. Such a provisional sale contains an embedded derivative which is required to be separated from the host contract. The host contract is the sale of metals contained in the concentrate or cathode at the provisional invoice price less tolling charges deducted, and the embedded derivative is the forward contract for which the provisional sale is subsequently adjusted. At each reporting date, the provisionally priced metal sales together with any related tolling charges are marked-to-market, with adjustments (both gains and losses) being recorded in revenue in the consolidated income statement and in trade debtors in the balance sheet. Forward prices at the period end are used for copper concentrate and cathode sales, while period-end average prices are used for molybdenum concentrate sales due to the absence of a futures market.
25 Financial Instruments and Financial Risk Management [extract]
d) Embedded derivatives – provisionally priced sales [extract]
Copper and molybdenum concentrate sale agreements and copper cathode sale agreements generally provide for provisional pricing of sales at the time or month of shipment, with final pricing being based on the monthly average London Metal Exchange copper price or monthly average molybdenum price for specified future periods. This normally ranges from 30 to 120 days after delivery to the customer.
Under IFRS, both gains and losses from the marking-to-market of open sales are recognised through adjustments to revenue in the income statement and to trade debtors in the balance sheet. The Group determines mark-to-market prices using forward prices at each period end for copper concentrate and cathode sales, and period-end monthly average prices for molybdenum concentrate sales due to the absence of a futures market for that commodity.
(i) Copper sales
i) Copper concentrate
At 31 December 2010 and 31 December 2009 copper concentrate sales at Los Pelambres had an average settlement period of approximately three months after shipment date.
At 31 December 2010 sales totalling 101,900 tonnes remained open as to price, with an average mark-to-market price of 436.7 cents per pound compared with an average provisional invoice price of 381.3 cents per pound. At 31 December 2009 sales totalling 73,700 tonnes remained open as to price, with an average mark-to-market price of 334.0 cents per pound compared with an average provisional invoice price of 295.8 cents per pound.
Tolling charges include a mark-to-market gain for copper concentrate sales open as to price at 31 December 2010 of less than US$0.1 million (2009 – mark-to-market loss of US$5.1 million).
ii) Copper cathodes
At 31 December 2010 and 31 December 2009 copper cathode sales at El Tesoro and Michilla had an average settlement period of approximately one month after shipment date.
At 31 December 2010, sales totalling 12,700 tonnes remained open as to price, with an average mark-to-market price of 437.3 cents per pound compared with an average provisional invoice price of 417.9 cents per pound. At 31 December 2009, sales totalling 10,400 tonnes remained open as to price, with an average mark-to-market price of 333.5 cents per pound compared with an average provisional invoice price of 322.9 cents per pound.
(ii) Molybdenum sales
At 31 December 2010, molybdenum concentrate sales at Los Pelambres had an average settlement period of approximately two months after shipment date. Sales totalling 1,300 tonnes remained open as to price, with an average mark-to-market price of US$16.1 per pound compared with an average provisional invoice price of US$16.0 per pound.
At 31 December 2009, molybdenum concentrate sales at Los Pelambres had an average settlement period of approximately two months after shipment date. Sales totalling 1,400 tonnes remained open as to price, with an average mark-to-market price of US$11.3 per pound compared with an average provisional invoice price of US$11.6 per pound.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Unitisation137
Entities E and F have carried out exploration programs on separate properties owned by each in a remote area near the Antarctic Circle. Both entities have discovered petroleum reserves on their properties and have begun development of the properties. Because of the high operating costs and the need to construct support facilities, such as pipelines, dock facilities, transportation systems, and warehouses, the entities decide to unitise the properties, which means that they have agreed to combine their properties into a single property. A joint operating agreement is signed and entity F is chosen as operator of the combined properties. Relevant data about each entity’s properties and costs are given as follows:
|
Party E
|
|
|
Prospecting costs incurred prior to property acquisition
|
€8,000,000
|
|
Mineral acquisition costs
|
€42,000,000
|
|
Geological and geophysical exploration costs (G&G)
|
€12,000,000
|
|
Exploratory drilling costs:
|
|
|
Successful
|
€16,000,000
|
|
Unsuccessful
|
€7,000,000
|
|
Development costs incurred
|
€23,000,000
|
|
Estimated reserves, agreed between parties (in barrels)
|
30,000,000
|
|
Party F
|
|
|
Prospecting costs incurred prior to property acquisition
|
€300000
|
|
Mineral acquisition costs
|
€31,000,000
|
|
Geological and geophysical exploration costs (G&G)
|
€17,000,000
|
|
Exploratory drilling costs
|
|
|
Successful
|
€24.000.000
|
|
Unsuccessful
|
€4,000,000
|
|
Development costs incurred
|
€36,000,000
|
|
Estimated reserves, agreed between parties (in barrels)
|
70,000,000
|
Ownership ratio in the venture is to be based on the relative quantity of agreed-upon reserves contributed by each party (30% to E and 70% to F). The parties agree that there should be an equalisation between them for the value of pre-unitisation exploration and development costs that directly benefit the unit, but not for other exploration and development costs. That is, there will be a cash settlement between the parties for the value of assets (other than mineral rights) or services that each party contributes to the unitisation. This is done so that the net value contributed by each party for the specified expenditures will equal that venturer’s share of the total value of such expenditures at the time unitisation is consummated. Thus, the party contributing a value less than that party’s share of ownership in the total value of those costs contributed by all the parties will make a cash payment to the other party so that each party’s net contribution will equal that party’s share of total value. The agreed amounts of costs to be equalised that are contributed by E and F are:
|
Expenditures made by:
|
E €
|
F €
|
Total €
|
|
Successful exploratory drilling
|
12,000,000
|
12,000,000
|
24,000,000
|
|
Development costs
|
18,000,000
|
30,000,000
|
48,000,000
|
|
Geological and geophysical exploration
|
4,000,000
|
14,000,000
|
18,000,000
|
|
Total expenditure
|
34,000,000
|
56,000,000
|
90,000,000
|
As a result of this agreement, F is obliged to pay E the net amount of €7,000,000 to equalise exploration and development costs. This is made up of the following components:
(a) €4,800,000 excess of value of exploratory drilling received by F (€16,800,000 = 70% × €24,000,000) in excess of value for successful exploratory drilling contributed (€12,000,000); plus
(b) €3,600,000 excess of value of development costs received by F in the unit (€33,600,000 = 70% × €48,000,000) in excess of the value of development costs contributed by F (€30,000,000); and less
(c) €1,400,000 excess of value of G&G costs contributed by F (€14,000,000) over the value of the share of G & G costs owned by F after unitisation (€12,600,000 = 70% × €18,000,000).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reserves contributed in a unitisation
Entities A and B enter into a unitisation agreement and contribute Licenses A and B, respectively. The table below shows the initial determination, redetermination and final determination of the reserves in each of the fields.
|
|
Initial determination
|
Redeterminationn
|
Final determination
|
|
|
mboe
|
mboe
|
mboe
|
|
License A
|
20
|
40.%
|
19
|
37.%
|
21
|
39.%
|
|
License B
|
30
|
60.%
|
32
|
63.%
|
33
|
61.%
|
|
|
50
|
100.%
|
51
|
100.%
|
54
|
100.%
|
Although Licenses A and B were unitised, ultimately Entity A will be entitled to 21 mboe and Entity B will be entitled to 33 mboe, which is exactly the same quantity that they would have been entitled to had there been no unitisation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Redetermination (2)
Assuming the same facts as in Example 41.19 above, how should Entities A and B account for the change in the decommissioning provision?
Under IFRIC 1 – Changes in Existing Decommissioning, Restoration and Similar Liabilities – the change in a decommissioning provision should be added to, or deducted from, the cost of the related asset in the current period. However, if a decrease in the liability exceeds the carrying amount of the asset, the excess should be recognised immediately in profit or loss. [IFRIC 1.5].
This would lead Entities A and B to make the following journal entries:
|
Entity A
|
$
|
$
|
|
Dr Decommissioning provision
|
24
|
|
|
Cr Decommissioning asset
|
|
24
|
|
Entity B
|
|
|
|
Dr Decommissioning asset
|
24
|
|
|
Cr Decommissioning provision
|
|
24
|
The decommission asset is adjusted in accordance with IFRIC 1 for the change in the decommissioning provision.
If Entity A had recognised a gain of $24 upon the reduction of the decommissioning liability, this would have resulted in an increase in the depreciation of the decommissioning asset from ($100 ÷ 100 mboe =) $1/barrel to ($70 ÷ 50 mboe =) $1.40/barrel. The IFRIC 1 approach avoids this although it increases the depreciation of the decommissioning asset slightly to ($56 ÷ 50mboe =) $1.12/barrel, as the decommissioning provision is also affected by the accretion of interest. Nevertheless, the approach required by IFRIC 1 is largely consistent with the treatment of a redetermination as a reimbursement of capital expenditure in Example 41.19 above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Premier Oil plc (2010)
Accounting policies [extract]
Oil and gas assets [extract]
The company applies the successful efforts method of accounting for exploration and evaluation (E&E) costs, having regard to the requirements of IFRS 6 – ‘Exploration for and Evaluation of Mineral Resources’.
(a) Exploration and evaluation assets
Under the successful efforts method of accounting, all licence acquisition, exploration and appraisal costs are initially capitalised in well, field or specific exploration cost centres as appropriate, pending determination. Expenditure incurred during the various exploration and appraisal phases is then written off unless commercial reserves have been established or the determination process has not been completed.
Pre-licence costs
Costs incurred prior to having obtained the legal rights to explore an area are expensed directly to the income statement as they are incurred.
Exploration and evaluation costs
Costs of E&E are initially capitalised as E&E assets. Payments to acquire the legal right to explore, costs of technical services and studies, seismic acquisition, exploratory drilling and testing are capitalised as intangible E&E assets.
Tangible assets used in E&E activities (such as the group’s vehicles, drilling rigs, seismic equipment and other property, plant and equipment used by the company’s exploration function) are classified as property, plant and equipment. However, to the extent that such a tangible asset is consumed in developing an intangible E&E asset, the amount reflecting that consumption is recorded as part of the cost of the intangible asset. Such intangible costs include directly attributable overhead, including the depreciation of property, plant and equipment utilised in E&E activities, together with the cost of other materials consumed during the exploration and evaluation phases.
E&E costs are not amortised prior to the conclusion of appraisal activities.
Treatment of E&E assets at conclusion of appraisal activities
Intangible E&E assets related to each exploration licence/prospect are carried forward, until the existence (or otherwise) of commercial reserves has been determined subject to certain limitations including review for indications of impairment. If commercial reserves have been discovered, the carrying value, after any impairment loss, of the relevant E&E assets, is then reclassified as development and production assets. If, however, commercial reserves have not been found, the capitalised costs are charged to expense after conclusion of appraisal activities.
(b) Development and production assets
Development and production assets are accumulated generally on a field-by-field basis and represent the cost of developing the commercial reserves discovered and bringing them into production, together with the E&E expenditures incurred in finding commercial reserves transferred from intangible E&E assets, as outlined in accounting policy (a) above.
The cost of development and production assets also includes the cost of acquisitions and purchases of such assets, directly attributable overheads, finance costs capitalised, and the cost of recognising provisions for future restoration and decommissioning.
Depreciation of producing assets
The net book values of producing assets are depreciated generally on a field-by-field basis using the unit-of-production method by reference to the ratio of production in the year and the related commercial reserves of the field, taking into account future development expenditures necessary to bring those reserves into production.
Producing assets are generally grouped with other assets that are dedicated to serving the same reserves for depreciation purposes, but are depreciated separately from producing assets that serve other reserves.
Pipelines are depreciated on a unit-of-throughput basis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cairn Energy PLC (2006)
Restatement of 2004 Results from UK GAAP to IFRS
Updated 28 February 2006 [extract]
Introduction [extract]
Cairn originally released restated IFRS results for prior periods on 8 September 2005 and its interim 2005 results under IFRS on 20 September 2005. Both sets of results were prepared on the basis of the Group’s continued application of its full cost accounting policy for oil and gas assets to both the exploration and appraisal activity phase and to those in the development and production phase. When these results were authorised for issue, the Board were aware that, owing to a lack of clarity in the authoritative literature, no consensus had been reached amongst the UK oil industry and the accounting profession on the status of full cost accounting policies under IFRS beyond the exploration and appraisal phase. As noted in the restatement document, this point was referred to the Agenda Committee of the International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (“IFRIC”) to request clarification. The Agenda Committee subsequently issued guidance that the scope of IFRS 6 “Exploration for and Evaluation of Mineral Resources” is limited to exploration and appraisal activities and that accounting policies for development and production activities are to be based on the provisions of other existing IFRS.
Following this clarification from the IFRIC Agenda Committee, Cairn has reviewed its oil and gas accounting policy for both exploration and appraisal and development/producing assets. Cairn has decided to adopt a successful efforts based accounting policy for the Group’s 2005 Annual Report and Accounts and has updated its restatement of prior periods to reflect this change in policy. The revised accounting policy is detailed in Note 1.
The key implications for Cairn’s financial statements on adopting this policy are as follows:
- Costs of unsuccessful wells initially capitalised within exploration assets are expensed in the Income Statement in the period in which they are determined unsuccessful;
- depletion of development/producing assets is now performed on a field by field basis although fields within development areas can be combined where appropriate; and
- impairment testing for development/producing assets is now performed on each cash generating unit – this is usually, but not always, the development area.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BHP Billiton Group (2010)
Notes to Financial Statements [extract]
1. Accounting policies [extract]
Exploration and evaluation expenditure [extract]
Exploration and evaluation activity involves the search for mineral and petroleum resources, the determination of technical feasibility and the assessment of commercial viability of an identified resource. Exploration and evaluation activity includes:
- researching and analysing historical exploration data
- gathering exploration data through topographical, geochemical and geophysical studies
- exploratory drilling, trenching and sampling
- determining and examining the volume and grade of the resource
- surveying transportation and infrastructure requirements
- conducting market and finance studies
Administration costs that are not directly attributable to a specific exploration area are charged to the income statement. Licence costs paid in connection with a right to explore in an existing exploration area are capitalised and amortised over the term of the permit.
Exploration and evaluation expenditure (including amortisation of capitalised licence costs) is charged to the income statement as incurred except in the following circumstances, in which case the expenditure may be capitalised:
- In respect of minerals activities:
– the exploration and evaluation activity is within an area of interest which was previously acquired in a business combination and measured at fair value on acquisition, or
– the existence of a commercially viable mineral deposit has been established.
- In respect of petroleum activities:
– the exploration and evaluation activity is within an area of interest for which it is expected that the expenditure will be recouped by future exploitation or sale; or
– exploration and evaluation activity has not reached a stage which permits a reasonable assessment of the existence of commercially recoverable reserves.
Capitalised exploration and evaluation expenditure considered to be tangible is recorded as a component of property, plant and equipment at cost less impairment charges. Otherwise, it is recorded as an intangible asset (such as licences). As the asset is not available for use, it is not depreciated. All capitalised exploration and evaluation expenditure is monitored for indications of impairment. Where a potential impairment is indicated, assessment is performed for each area of interest in conjunction with the group of operating assets (representing a cash generating unit) to which the exploration is attributed. Exploration areas at which reserves have been discovered but that require major capital expenditure before production can begin are continually evaluated to ensure that commercial quantities of reserves exist or to ensure that additional exploration work is under way or planned. To the extent that capitalised expenditure is not expected to be recovered it is charged to the income statement.
Application of critical accounting policies and estimates [extract]
Exploration and evaluation expenditure
The Group’s accounting policy for exploration and evaluation expenditure results in certain items of expenditure being capitalised for an area of interest where it is considered likely to be recoverable by future exploitation or sale or where the activities have not reached a stage which permits a reasonable assessment of the existence of reserves. This policy requires management to make certain estimates and assumptions as to future events and circumstances, in particular whether an economically viable extraction operation can be established. Any such estimates and assumptions may change as new information becomes available. If, after having capitalised the expenditure under the policy, a judgement is made that recovery of the expenditure is unlikely, the relevant capitalised amount will be written off to the income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BG Group plc (2010)
Principal accounting policies [extract]
Revenue recognition [extract]
Revenue associated with exploration and production sales (of natural gas, crude oil and petroleum products) is recorded when title passes to the customer. Revenue from the production of natural gas and oil in which BG Group has an interest with other producers is recognised based on the Group’s working interest and the terms of the relevant production sharing contracts (entitlement method). Differences between production sold and the Group’s share of production are not significant.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
StatoilHydro ASA (2010)
8.1 Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]
8.1.2 Significant accounting policies [extract]
Revenue recognition
Revenues associated with sale and transportation of crude oil, natural gas, petroleum and chemical products and other merchandise are recognised when title and risk pass to the customer, which is normally at the point of delivery of the goods based on the contractual terms of the agreements.
Revenues from the production of oil and gas properties in which Statoil has an interest with other companies are recognised on the basis of volumes lifted and sold to customers during the period (the sales method). Where Statoil has lifted and sold more than the ownership interest, an accrual is recognised for the cost of the overlift. Where Statoil has lifted and sold less than the ownership interest, costs are deferred for the underlift.
Revenue is presented net of customs, excise taxes and royalties paid in-kind on petroleum products.
Sales and purchases of physical commodities, which are not settled net, are presented on a gross basis as revenue and cost of goods sold in the statement of income. Activities related to trading and commodity-based derivative instruments are reported on a net basis, with the margin included in revenue.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Notes on financial statements [extract]
1. Significant accounting policies [extract]
Revenue [extract]
Revenue arising from the sale of goods is recognized when the significant risks and rewards of ownership have passed to the buyer and it can be reliably measured.
Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable and represents amounts receivable for goods provided in the normal course of business, net of discounts, customs duties and sales taxes.
Revenues associated with the sale of oil, natural gas, natural gas liquids, liquefied natural gas, petroleum and petrochemicals products and all other items are recognized when the title passes to the customer. Physical exchanges are reported net, as are sales and purchases made with a common counterparty, as part of an arrangement similar to a physical exchange. Similarly, where the group acts as agent on behalf of a third party to procure or market energy commodities, any associated fee income is recognized but no purchase or sale is recorded. Additionally, where forward sale and purchase contracts for oil, natural gas or power have been determined to be for trading purposes, the associated sales and purchases are reported net within sales and other operating revenues whether or not physical delivery has occurred.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gaz de France, S.A. (2010)
20.2 NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS [extract]
NOTE 1 SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES [extract]
1.4 Significant accounting policies [extract]
1.4.5 Property, plant and equipment [extract]
1.4.5.1 Initial recognition and subsequent measurement [extract]
Cushion gas
“Cushion” gas injected into underground storage facilities is essential for ensuring that reservoirs can be operated effectively, and is therefore inseparable from these reservoirs. Unlike “working” gas which is included in inventories, cushion gas is reported in property, plant and equipment. It is measured at average purchase price, plus regasification, transportation and injection costs.
1.4.10 Inventories [extract]
Gas inventories
Gas injected into underground storage facilities includes working gas which can be withdrawn without adversely affecting the operation of the reservoir, and cushion gas which is inseparable from the reservoirs and essential for their operation (see the section on property, plant and equipment).
Working gas is classified in inventory and measured at weighted average purchase cost upon entering the transportation network regardless of its source, including any regasification costs.
Group inventory outflows are valued using the weighted average unit cost method.
An impairment loss is recognized when the net realizable value of inventories is lower than their weighted average cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harmony Gold Mining Company Limited (2010)
Notes to the group financial statements [extract]
2 Accounting policies [extract]
2.10 Inventories
Inventories which include bullion on hand, gold in process, gold in lock-up, ore stockpiles and stores and materials, are measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value after appropriate allowances for redundant and slow moving items. Cost of bullion, gold in process and gold in lock-up is determined by reference to production cost, including amortisation and depreciation at the relevant stage of production.
Ore stockpiles are valued at average production cost. Stockpiles and gold in lock-up are classified as a non current asset where the stockpile exceeds current processing capacity and where a portion of static gold in lock-up is expected to be recovered more than 12 months after balance sheet date.
Stores and materials consist of consumable stores and are valued at weighted average cost.
Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less the estimated cost of completion and the estimated cost necessary to perform the sale.
Gold in process inventories represent materials that are currently in the process of being converted to a saleable product. Conversion processes vary depending on the nature of the ore and the specific mining operation, but include mill in-circuit, leach in-circuit, flotation and column cells, and carbon in-pulp inventories. In-process material is measured based on assays of the material fed to process and the projected recoveries at the respective plants. In-process inventories are valued at the average cost of the material fed to process attributable to the source material coming from the mine, stockpile or leach pad plus the in-process conversion costs, including the applicable depreciation relating to the process facility, incurred to that point in the process. Gold in process includes gold in lock-up which is generally measured from the plants onwards. Gold in lock-up is estimated as described under the section dealing with critical accounting estimates and judgements (refer to note 3). It is expected to be extracted when plants are demolished at the end of their useful lives, which is largely dependent on the estimated useful life of the operations feeding the plants. Where mechanised mining is used in underground operations, in-progress material is accounted for at the earliest stage of production when reliable estimates of quantities and costs are capable of being made. Given the varying nature of the Group’s open pit operations, gold in process represents either production in broken ore form or production from the time of placement on heap leach pads.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kazakhmys PLC (2008 and 2010)
Notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
7. IMPAIRMENT LOSSES – 2008 [extract]
(d) Kazakhmys Copper and MKM inventories
Impairment of inventories includes an amount of $73 million and $15 million in respect of Kazakhmys Copper and MKM, respectively. For Kazakhmys Copper, the impairment primarily relates to the impairment of stockpiled ore which is not going to be processed in the foreseeable future as its processing is uneconomic at current commodity price levels. Within MKM, a provision has been recognised to record inventory at the lower of cost and net realisable value. This primarily relates to finished goods held in stock at the end of the year which have been written down reflecting the fall in copper price in December.
8. IMPAIRMENT LOSSES – 2010 [extract]
(b) Kazakhmys Copper inventories
Included within the provisions against inventories is an impairment loss of $15 million relating to general slow moving inventory, and a reversal of a previous impairment against certain stockpiled ore of $18 million. In 2008, it was envisaged that the stockpiled ore would not be processed in the future as this would have been uneconomic at the prevailing commodity prices. However, during 2010 certain of these stockpiles were processed and the previous impairment reversed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
8.1 Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]
8.1.2 Significant accounting policies [extract]
Transactions with the Norwegian State [extract]
Statoil markets and sells the Norwegian State’s share of oil and gas production from the Norwegian Continental Shelf (NCS). The Norwegian State’s participation in petroleum activities is organised through the State’s direct financial interest (SDFI). All purchases and sales of the SDFI oil production are classified as purchases [net of inventory variation] and revenue, respectively. Statoil ASA sells, in its own name, but for the Norwegian State’s account and risk, the State’s production of natural gas. This sale and related expenditures refunded by the State, are presented net in Statoil’s financial statements. Sales made by Statoil subsidiaries in their own name, and related expenditure, are however presented gross in Statoil’s financial statements where the applicable subsidiary is considered the principal when selling natural gas on behalf of the Norwegian State. In accounting for these sales activities, the State’s share of profit or loss is reflected in Statoil’s Selling, general and administrative expenses as expenses or reduction of expenses, respectively.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carried interests (1)
Scenario 1
The carrying party has proposed a $10 million project, which has a very high chance of succeeding. The carried party, which is unable to fund its share of the project, agrees that the carrying party is entitled to recover its cost plus 7% interest by giving it a disproportionately high share of the production. If the production from this project is insufficient to repay the initial investment, the carried party should reimburse the carrying party out of its share of production from other fields within the same licence.
Scenario 2
The carrying party has proposed a project that may cost up to $6 million, the outcome of which is uncertain. The carried party, which is unwilling to participate in the project, agrees that the carrying party is entitled to all production from the project until it has recovered three times its initial investment.
Scenario 3
The carrying party has proposed a project that may cost up to $5 million, which has a good chance of succeeding. The carrying party has a 60% interest in the licence and the carried party holds the remaining 40%. The carried party, which is unable to fund its share of the project, agrees that the carrying party is entitled to an additional 25% of the production until the carrying party has recovered its costs plus a 20% return.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carried interests (2)
An oil and gas company is developing an oil field in the North Sea. Assume that the company did not capitalise any E&E costs in relation to the field, but that by 1 January 2013 it had capitalised $250 million of costs in relation to the construction of property, plant and equipment. To complete the development of the oil field and bring it to production a further investment in property, plant and equipment of $350 million is required in the first half of 2013.
At 1 January 2013, the oil and gas company (the carried party) enters into a purchase/sale-type carried interest arrangement with a carrying party, which will fund the entire $350 million required for the further development of the field. Upon entering into the carried interest arrangement the carried party’s entitlement to oil is expected to be reduced from 15,000,000 barrels of oil to 9,000,000 barrels of oil, i.e. its interest in the oil field and the related property, plant and equipment has been reduced to (9,000,000 ÷ 15,000,000 =) 60%. In practice, calculating the portion of the interest sold may require a considerable amount of judgement (e.g. in scenario 2 in Example 41.6 above it would not be straightforward to calculate the portion of the interest sold).
Both parties believe that the fair value of the oil field and related property, plant and equipment will be $1 billion once the remaining investment of $350 million has been made. Consequently, the fair value of the oil field and related property, plant and equipment at 1 January 2013 is ($1 billion – $350 million =) $650 million.
The fair value of the interest acquired (which comprises a portion of the oil field and a portion of the related property, plant and equipment) by the carrying party is (40% × $650 million =) $260 million. In exchange for its interest, the carrying party will pay $50 million in cash and undertakes to pay the remaining investments related to the carried party’s interest.
The carried party accounts for the transaction as follows
If the carried party had recognised a loss on the interest sold, it would need to perform an impairment test on the interest retained.
The carrying party accounts for the transaction as follows:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Star Energy Group plc (2006)
Notes to the Financial Statements [extract]
26. Contingent liabilities [extract]
In relation to a farm-out agreement farmed into during the year with Virgo Energy Limited, the Group will undertake a feasibility study and in addition contribute up to 1,000,000 towards the cost of a 3D seismic survey on the Forbes field, a licence in which it has acquired a 25% interest. In addition to this 25% interest, the Group has an option to acquire a further 25% in return for undertaking and funding a Front End Engineering & Design study for the development of the Forbes field as a gas storage facility. As at 31 December 2006, the feasibility study had not commenced and no amounts had been paid to Virgo Energy Limited.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revus Energy ASA (2007)
Accounting principles [extract]
Acquisitions and divestments [extract]
Farm-ins generally occur in the exploration or development phase and are characterised by the transferor giving up future economic benefits, in the form of reserves, in exchange for reduced future funding obligations. In the exploration phase the Group accounts for farm-ins on a historical cost basis. As such no gain or loss is recognised. In the development phase, the Group accounts for farm-ins as an acquisition at fair value when the Group is the transferee and a disposal at fair value when the Group is the transferor of a part of an oil and gas property. The fair value is determined by the costs that have been agreed as being borne by the transferee.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Definition of a business under IFRS 3
Oil and gas company C acquires a single oil exploration area where there are active exploration activities underway, oil has been found and the company is close to declaring reserves but implementation of the development plan has not yet commenced.
This may be a business under IFRS 3 as assets and processes have been acquired and a market participant is capable of producing outputs by integrating these with its own inputs and processes.
Mining company D acquires a development stage mine, including all inputs (i.e. employees, mineral reserve and property, plant and equipment) and processes (i.e. exploration and evaluation processes e.g. active drilling programmes etc.,) that are required to generate output.
This meets the definition of a business under IFRS 3 because it includes inputs and processes even though there are currently no outputs.
Oil and gas company E acquires a group of pipelines (or a fleet of oil or gas tankers) used for transporting gas on behalf of customers and the employees responsible for operational, maintenance and administrative tasks transfer to the buyer.
This meets the definition of a business under IFRS 3 because it includes inputs, processes and outputs.
Mining company F acquires a mine that was abandoned 10 years ago. There are no activities currently occurring at the mine. The company plans to perform new geological and geophysical survey to determine whether sufficient economic reserves are present.
The abandoned mine does not meet the definition of a business because there are no processes associated with the assets purchased.
Oil and gas company G acquires a producing oil field, but the seller’s on-site staff will not transfer to the buyer. Instead, oil and gas company G will enter into maintenance and oil field services contracts with different contractors.
A business need not include all of the inputs or processes that the seller used in operating that business if market participants are capable of continuing to produce outputs. If market participants can easily outsource processes to contractors then the oil field would be a business under IFRS 3.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AngloGold Ashanti Limited (2010)
Notes to the financial statements [extract]
1 Accounting Policies [extract]
1.3 Summary of significant accounting policies [extract]
Intangible assets [extract]
Acquisition and goodwill arising thereon
Where an investment in a subsidiary, joint venture or an associate is made, any excess of the consideration transferred over the fair value of the attributable Mineral Resource including value beyond proved and probable, exploration properties and net assets is recognised as goodwill. Goodwill in respect of subsidiaries is disclosed as goodwill. Goodwill relating to equity accounted joint ventures and associates is included within the carrying value of the investment and tested for impairment when indicators exist.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Asset acquisitions with a conditional purchase price
Scenario 1
Entity A agrees to buy a group of assets from Entity B for a total purchase price of $15 million. However, the purchase contract provides a formula for adjusting the purchase price upward or downward based on the report of a surveyor on the existence and quality of the assets listed in the contract.
Scenario 2
Entity C agrees to buy an exploration licence and several related assets from Entity D for a total purchase price of $35 million. However, Entity C would only be allowed to extract minerals in excess of 20 million barrels (or tonnes), upon payment of an additional consideration transferred of $12 million.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lonmin Plc (2010)
1 Statement on accounting policies [extract]
Intangible assets
Intangible assets, other than goodwill, acquired by the Group have finite useful lives and are measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment losses. Where amortisation is charged on these assets, the expense is taken to the income statement through operating costs.
Amortisation of mineral rights is provided on a units of production basis over the remaining life of mine to residual value (20 to 40 years).
All other intangible assets are amortised over their useful economic lives subject to a maximum of 20 years and are tested for impairment at each reporting date when there is an indication of a possible impairment.
Property, plant and equipment [extract]
Depreciation
Depreciation is provided on a straight-line or units of production basis as appropriate over their expected useful lives or the remaining life of mine, if shorter, to residual value. The life of mine is based on proven and probable reserves. The expected useful lives of the major categories of property, plant and equipment are as follows:
|
|
Method
|
Rate
|
|
Shafts and underground
|
Units of production
|
2.5%-5.0% per annum
|
(20-40 years)
|
|
Metallurgical
|
Straight line
|
2.5%-7.1% per annum
|
(14-40 years)
|
|
Infrastructure
|
Straight line
|
2.5%-2.9% per annum
|
(35-40 years)
|
|
Other plant and equipment
|
Straight line
|
2.5%-50.0% per annum
|
(2-40 years)
|
No depreciation is provided on surface mining land which has a continuing value and capital work in progress.Residual values and useful lives are re-assessed annually and if necessary changes are accounted for prospectively.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exclusion of capitalised costs relating to undeveloped reserves113
In an offshore oil and gas field a platform may be constructed from which 20 development wells will be drilled. The platform’s cost has been capitalised as a part of the total cost of the cost centre. If only 5 of the 20 wells have been drilled, it would be inappropriate to depreciate that portion of platform costs, as well as that portion of all other capitalised costs, that are deemed to be applicable to the 15 wells not yet drilled. Only 5/20ths of the platform costs would be subject to depreciation in the current year, while 15/20ths of the platform costs (those applicable to the 15 undrilled wells) would be withheld from the depreciable amount. The costs withheld would be transferred to the depreciable amount as the additional wells are drilled. In lieu of basing the exclusion from depreciation on the number of wells, the exclusion (and subsequent transfer to depreciable amount) could be based on the quantity of reserves developed by individual wells compared with the estimated total quantity of reserves to be developed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Royal Dutch Shell plc (2010)
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS [extract]
2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES [extract]
PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT AND INTANGIBLE ASSETS [extract]
[B] Depreciation, depletion and amortisation
Property, plant and equipment related to hydrocarbon production activities are depreciated on a unit-of-production basis over the proved developed reserves of the field concerned, except in the case of assets whose useful life differs from the lifetime of the field, in which case the straight-line method is applied. Rights and concessions are depleted on the unit-of-production basis over the total proved reserves of the relevant area. Where individually insignificant, unproved properties may be grouped and amortised based on factors such as the average concession term and past experience of recognising proved reserves.
Other property, plant and equipment are depreciated on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives, which is generally 30 years for upgraders, 20 years for refineries and chemical plants and 15 years for retail service station facilities. Major inspection costs are amortised over the estimated period before the next planned major inspection (three to five years). Property, plant and equipment held under finance leases are depreciated over the lease term.
Goodwill is not amortised. Other intangible assets are amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives which is generally five years for software and up to 40 years for other assets. Estimates of the useful lives and residual values of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets are reviewed annually and adjusted if appropriate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tullow Oil plc (2010)
Accounting policies [extract]
(k) Commercial reserves
Commercial reserves are proven and probable oil and gas reserves, which are defined as the estimated quantities of crude oil, natural gas and natural gas liquids which geological, geophysical and engineering data demonstrate with a specified degree of certainty to be recoverable in future years from known reservoirs and which are considered commercially producible. There should be a 50 per cent statistical probability that the actual quantity of recoverable reserves will be more than the amount estimated as proven and probable reserves and a 50 per cent statistical probability that it will be less.
(l) Depletion and amortisation – discovery fields [extract]
All expenditure carried within each field is amortised from the commencement of production on a unit of production basis, which is the ratio of oil and gas production in the period to the estimated quantities of commercial reserves at the end of the period plus the production in the period, generally on a field-by-field basis. Costs used in the unit of production calculation comprise the net book value of capitalised costs plus the estimated future field development costs. Changes in the estimates of commercial reserves or future field development costs are dealt with prospectively.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Physical units of production method118
If an entity produces 100 units during the current period and the estimated remaining commercial reserves at the end of the period are 1,900 units, the units available would be 2,000. The fractional part of the depreciable basis to be charged to depreciation expense would be 100/2,000. Therefore, if the depreciable basis was 5,000 monetary units, the depreciation for the period would be 250 monetary units.
In applying the physical units of production method a mining company needs to decide whether to use either the quantity of ore produced or the quantity of mineral contained in the ore as the unit of measure.119 Similarly, an oil and gas company needs to decide whether to use either the volume of hydrocarbons or the volume of hydrocarbons plus gas, water and other materials. When mining different grades of ore, a mining company’s gross margin on the subsequent sale of minerals will fluctuate far less when it uses the quantity of minerals as its unit of measure. While a large part of the wear and tear of equipment used in mining is closely related to the quantity of ore produced, the economic benefits are more closely related to the quantity of mineral contained in the ore. Therefore, both approaches are currently considered to be acceptable under IFRS.
(b) Revenue-based units of production method
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BHP Billiton Group (2010)
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS [extract]
1. Accounting policies [extract]
Exploration and evaluation expenditure [extract]
Capitalised exploration and evaluation expenditure considered to be tangible is recorded as a component of property, plant and equipment at cost less impairment charges. Otherwise, it is recorded as an intangible asset (such as licences). As the asset is not available for use, it is not depreciated. All capitalised exploration and evaluation expenditure is monitored for indications of impairment. Where a potential impairment is indicated, assessment is performed for each area of interest in conjunction with the group of operating assets (representing a cash generating unit) to which the exploration is attributed. Exploration areas at which reserves have been discovered but that require major capital expenditure before production can begin are continually evaluated to ensure that commercial quantities of reserves exist or to ensure that additional exploration work is under way or planned. To the extent that capitalised expenditure is not expected to be recovered it is charged to the income statement.
Impairment of non-current assets
Formal impairment tests are carried out annually for goodwill. Formal impairment tests for all other assets are performed when there is an indication of impairment. The Group conducts annually an internal review of asset values which is used as a source of information to assess for any indications of impairment. External factors, such as changes in expected future prices, costs and other market factors are also monitored to assess for indications of impairment. If any such indication exists an estimate of the asset’s recoverable amount is calculated, being the higher of fair value less direct costs to sell and the asset’s value in use.
If the carrying amount of the asset exceeds its recoverable amount, the asset is impaired and an impairment loss is charged to the income statement so as to reduce the carrying amount in the balance sheet to its recoverable amount.
Fair value is determined as the amount that would be obtained from the sale of the asset in an arm’s length transaction between knowledgeable and willing parties. Fair value for mineral assets is generally determined as the present value of the estimated future cash flows expected to arise from the continued use of the asset, including any expansion prospects, and its eventual disposal, using assumptions that an independent market participant may take into account. These cash flows are discounted by an appropriate discount rate to arrive at a net present value of the asset.
Value in use is determined as the present value of the estimated future cash flows expected to arise from the continued use of the asset in its present form and its eventual disposal. Value in use is determined by applying assumptions specific to the Group’s continued use and cannot take into account future development. These assumptions are different to those used in calculating fair value and consequently the value in use calculation is likely to give a different result (usually lower) to a fair value calculation.
In testing for indications of impairment and performing impairment calculations, assets are considered as collective groups and referred to as cash generating units. Cash generating units are the smallest identifiable group of assets, liabilities and associated goodwill that generate cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets.
The impairment assessments are based on a range of estimates and assumptions, including:
|
Estimates/assumptions:
|
Basis:
|
|
Future production
|
Proved and probable reserves, resource estimates and, in certain cases, expansion projects
|
|
Commodity prices
|
Forward market and contract prices, and longer-term price protocol estimates
|
|
Exchange rates
|
Current (forward) market exchange rates
|
|
Discount rates
|
Cost of capital risk-adjusted appropriate to the resource
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Single product entity [IAS 36 I.E. Example 1C]
Entity M produces a single product and owns plants A, B and C. Each plant is located in a different continent. A produces a component that is assembled in either B or C. The combined capacity of B and C is not fully utilised. M’s products are sold worldwide from either B or C. For example, B’s production can be sold in C’s continent if the products can be delivered faster from B than from C. Utilisation levels of B and C depend on the allocation of sales between the two sites.
Although there is an active market for the products assembled by B and C, cash inflows for B and C depend on the allocation of production across the two sites. It is unlikely that the future cash inflows for B and C can be determined individually. Therefore, it is likely that B and C together are the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely independent.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Notes on financial statements [extract]
Critical accounting policies – Recoverability of asset carrying values [extract]
For oil and natural gas properties, the expected future cash flows are estimated using management’s best estimate of future oil and natural gas prices and reserves volumes. Prices for oil and natural gas used for future cash flow calculations are based on market prices for the first five years and the group’s long-term planning assumptions thereafter. As at 31 December 2010, the group’s long-term planning assumptions were $75 per barrel for Brent and $6.50/mmBtu for Henry Hub (2009 $75 per barrel and $7.50/mmBtu). These long-term planning assumptions are subject to periodic review and modification. The estimated future level of production is based on assumptions about future commodity prices, production and development costs, field decline rates, current fiscal regimes and other factors.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acquisition of an entity that owns mineral reserves
Entity A acquires Entity B for €27 million at 31 October 2012. At the time it assigned the following fair values to the acquired net assets:
|
€ million
|
|
Mineral reserves (assuming reserves of 10 million barrels)
|
10
|
|
Other net assets acquired
|
5
|
|
Goodwill
|
12
|
|
Consideration transferred
|
27
|
At 30 June 2013, after conducting a drilling programme which commenced in March 2013, Entity A obtains information about the reserves (as at 30 June 2013), which when added to the production for the period (i.e. from 31 October 2012 to 30 June 2013) reveals that the mineral reserves at the date of acquisition were not 10 million barrels, as previously thought, but were only 8 million barrels.
Can Entity A revise its initial acquisition accounting to reflect the fact that the mineral reserves are only 8 million barrels, rather than 10 million?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AngloGold Ashanti Limited (2010)
Notes to the financial statements [extract]
1 Accounting policies [extract]
1.3 Summary of significant accounting policies [extract]
Inventories [extract]
Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value after appropriate allowances for redundant and slow moving items. Cost is determined on the following bases:
- by-products, which include uranium oxide and sulphuric acid, are valued on an average total production cost method. By-products are classified as a non-current asset where the by-products on hand exceed current processing capacity;
Revenue recognition [extract]
Revenue is recognised at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable to the extent that it is probable that economic benefits will flow to the group and revenue can be reliably measured. The following criteria must also be present:
- where a by-product is not regarded as significant, revenue is credited against cost of sales, when the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the products are transferred to the buyer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Anglo American plc (2010)
Notes to the financial statements [extract]
1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES [extract]
Inventory
Inventory and work in progress are measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value. The production cost of inventory includes an appropriate proportion of depreciation and production overheads. Cost is determined on the following bases:
- Raw materials and consumables are measured at cost on a first in, first out (FIFO) basis.
- Finished products are measured at raw material cost, labour cost and a proportion of manufacturing overhead expenses.
- Metal and coal stocks are included within finished products and are measured at average cost.
At precious metals operations that produce ‘joint products’, cost is allocated amongst products according to the ratio of contribution of these metals to gross sales revenues.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refurbishment costs – no legislative requirement
A furnace has a lining that needs to be replaced every five years for technical reasons. At the end of the reporting period, the lining has been in use for three years.
Under IAS 37 no provision should be recognised as there is no present obligation. The cost of replacing the lining is not recognised because, at the end of the reporting period, no obligation to replace the lining exists independently of the company’s future actions – even the intention to incur the expenditure depends on the company deciding to continue operating the furnace or to replace the lining. Instead of a provision being recognised, the depreciation of the lining takes account of its consumption, i.e. it is depreciated over five years. The re-lining costs then incurred are capitalised with the consumption of each new lining shown by depreciation over the subsequent five years.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Agennix AG (H1, 2012)
Notes to the unaudited interim condensed consolidated financial statements [extract]
1. Basis of Presentation and Accounting Policies [extract]
Going Concern
These interim condensed consolidated financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, which assumes that the Company will continue in operation for the foreseeable future and will be able to realize its assets and discharge its liabilities in the normal course of operations.
During the six month period ended June 30, 2012, the Company incurred a net loss of €23.3 million and used cash in its operations of €21.3 million. At June 30, 2012, the Company had cash, cash equivalents, other current financial assets and restricted cash of €22.7 million and current liabilities of €6.6 million. The Company has incurred recurring operating losses and has generated negative cash flows from operations since its inception and expects such results to continue for the foreseeable future.
Based on the Company’s current financial position and base-case estimates of future cash burn, management believes that Agennix will have sufficient cash to fund its current level of operations into the first quarter of 2013. This should enable the Company to obtain top-line data from the FORTIS-M Phase lll trial, now expected in August 2012. Base-case estimates of future cash burn assume reduction of cash spending in the second half of 2012 due to the wind down of the FORTIS-M trial but do not include projected changes in spending related to the outcome of the FORTIS-M Phase lll trial.
If the top-line data from the FORTIS-M trial are positive, the Company anticipates significantly increasing its spending related to talactoferrin production, as well as regulatory and pre-commercialization activities, in anticipation of a Biologics License Application (“BLA”) submission with the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) and potential commercial launch. In this positive scenario, Agennix believes that it will have sufficient cash to fund operations into the middle of the fourth quarter of 2012. In such a positive data scenario the Company anticipates raising additional funds through issuance of equity or debt in the near term to fund increased spending into 2013 and continue as a going concern and would then expect to raise additional funds through licensing agreements and/or issuance of equity during 2013.
If the FORTIS-M trial were to have negative results, the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern would be at immediate risk, as the Company’s ability to obtain additional funding would be limited. In this situation, the Company would quickly reduce costs through restructuring activities in order to preserve cash. Furthermore, the Company would evaluate other business opportunities, including mergers and acquisitions and/or partnering and/or advancing other internal development programs.
Agennix cannot accurately predict when or whether it will successfully complete the development of its product candidates or obtain additional funding.
These interim condensed consolidated financial statements do not reflect adjustments in the carrying values of the Company’s assets and liabilities, the reported income and expenses, and the current/non-current classifications in the statement of financial position that would be necessary if the going concern assumption was not appropriate. The potential adjustments, if any, could be material and would be recorded when events and circumstances occurred or when they could be estimated reliably.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Measuring interim bonus expense
An entity pays an annual performance bonus if earnings exceed 10 million, under which 5% of any earnings in excess over 10 million will be paid up to a maximum of 500,000. Earnings for the six months ended 30 June 2013 are 7 million, and the entity expects earnings for the full year ended 31 December 2013 to be 16 million.
The following table shows various accounting policies and the expense recognised thereunder in the interim financial statements for the six months ended 30 June 2013.
|
Expense ()
|
|
Method 1 – constructive obligation exists when earnings target is met
|
Nil
|
|
Method 2 – assume earnings for remainder of year will be same
|
200,000
|
|
Method 3 – proportionate recognition based on full-year estimate
|
131,250
|
|
Method 4 – one-half recognition based on full-year estimate
|
150,000
|
Method 1 is generally not appropriate, as this method attributes the entire bonus to the latter portion of the year, whereas employees provided service during the first six months to towards earning the bonus.
Likewise, Method 2 is generally not appropriate, as the expense of 200,000 [(14 million – 10 million) × 5%] assumes that the employees will continue to provide service in the latter half of the year to achieve the bonus target, but does not attribute any service to that period.
In contrast to Methods 1 and 2, Method 3 illustrates an accounting policy whereby an estimate is made of the full-year expense and attributed to the period based on the proportion of that bonus for which employees have provided service at 30 June 2013. The amount recognised is calculated as (7 million ÷ 16 million) × [5% × (16 million – 10 million)].
Similar to Method 3, Method 4 also takes the approach of recognising an expense based on the full year estimate, but allocates that full-year estimate equally to each period (which is similar to the approach used for share-based payment transactions). The amount recognised is calculated as [50% × 5% × (16 million – 10 million)].
In addition to Methods 3 and 4, which might be appropriate, depending on the facts and circumstances, an entity might determine another basis on which to recognise bonus that considers both the constructive obligation that exists as of 30 June 2013, and the services performed to date, which is also appropriate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Coca-Cola Hellenic Bottling Company S.A. (Q2, 2008)
Condensed notes to the consolidated financial statements [extract]
5. Tax
The effective tax rate for the Company differs from the 2008 Greek statutory rate of 25% as a consequence of a number of factors, the most significant of which are the non-deductibility of certain expenses and the fact that the tax rates in the countries in which the Company operates differ materially from the Greek statutory tax rate. The statutory tax rates applicable to the country operations of the Company range from 0%-31%.
The effective tax rate for the Company varies on a quarterly basis as a result of the mix of taxable profits and deductible expenses across territories and as a consequence of tax adjustments arising during the year, which do not necessarily refer to the current period’s operations.
The effective tax rate (excluding the adjustments to intangible assets) is approximately 17% for the first half of 2008 (2007: 22%). This rate is quoted before any tax credit is recognised for the current recognition of acquired and previously unrecognised accumulated tax benefits.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Enacted changes to tax rates applying after the current year
An entity reporting half-yearly operates in a jurisdiction subject to a tax rate of 30%. Legislation is enacted during the first half of the current year, which reduces the tax rate to 28% on income earned from the beginning of the entity’s next financial year. Based on a gross temporary difference of 1,000, the entity reported a deferred tax liability in its most recent annual financial statements of 300 (1,000 @ 30%). Of this temporary difference, 200 is expected to reverse in the second half of the current year and 800 in the next financial year. Assuming that no new temporary differences arise in the current period, what is the deferred tax balance at the interim reporting date?
Whilst the entity uses an effective tax rate of 30% to determine the tax expense relating to income earned in the period, it should use a rate of 28% to measure those temporary differences expected to reverse in the next financial year. Accordingly, the deferred tax liability at the half-year reporting date is 284 (200 @ 30% + 800 @ 28%).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tax loss carry forwards in excess of current year expected profits
An entity that reports half-yearly has unutilised operating losses of 75,000 for income tax purposes at the start of the current financial year for which no deferred tax asset has been recognised. At the end of its first interim period, the entity reports a profit before tax of 25,000 and expects to earn a profit of 20,000 before tax in the second half of the year. The entity reassesses the likelihood of generating sufficient profits to utilise its carried forward tax losses and determines that the IAS 12 recognition criteria for a deferred tax asset are satisfied for the full amount of 75,000. Excluding the effect of utilising losses carried forward, the estimated average annual income tax rate is the same as the enacted or substantially enacted rate of 40%.
As at the end of the current financial year the entity expects to have unutilised losses of 30,000 (75,000 carried forward less current year pre-tax profits of 45,000). Using the enacted rate of 40%, a deferred tax asset of 12,000 is recognised at year-end. How is this deferred tax asset recognised in the interim reporting periods?
Approach 1
Under the first approach, the estimate of the average annual effective tax rate includes only those carried forward losses expected to be utilised in the current financial year and a separate deferred tax asset is recognised for those carried forward losses now expected to be utilised in future annual reporting periods.
In the fact pattern above, using 45,000 of the carried forward tax losses gives an average effective annual tax rate of nil, as follows:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inmarsat plc (H1, 2011)
Interim Management Report [extract]
Operating and Financial Review [extract]
Total Group Results [extract]
Income tax expense
The tax charge for the half year ended 30 June 2011 was US$63.5m, an increase of US$18.7m, or 42%, compared with the half year ended 30 June 2010. The increase in the tax charge is largely driven by the underlying increase in profits for the half year ended 30 June 2011. The change in the UK main rate of corporation tax from 28% in 2010 to 26% with effect from 1 April 2011 has given rise to a one-off tax credit of US$0.9m on the revaluation of UK deferred tax liabilities at 31 March 2011. There was also a prior year adjustment which resulted in a one off tax credit of US$2.9m.
The effective tax rate for the half year ended 30 June 2011 was 24.9% compared to 29.5% for the half year ended 30 June 2010. If the effect of the prior year adjustment is removed, the effective rate for the half year ended 30 June 2011 is 26.1% compared to 27.6% for the half year ended 30 June 2010. The decrease in the adjusted effective tax rate is predominately due to the reduction of the UK main rate of corporation tax from 28% in 2010 to 26% with effect from 1 April 2011. Although the change in tax rate became effective on 1 April 2011, this has the effect of lowering the average UK statutory tax rate for 2011, and therefore the rate upon which the half year’s tax charge is based, to 26.5%.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Coca-Cola Hellenic Bottling Company S.A. (Q2, 2011)
Selected explanatory notes to the condensed consolidated interim financial statements (unaudited) [extract]
1. Accounting policies [extract]
Basis of preparation [extract]
Operating results for the first half of 2011 are not indicative of the results that may be expected for the year ended 31 December 2011 because of business seasonality. Business seasonality results from higher unit sales of the Group’s products in the warmer months of the year. The Group’s methods of accounting for fixed costs such as depreciation and interest expense are not significantly affected by business seasonality.
Costs that are incurred unevenly during the financial year are anticipated or deferred in the interim report only if it would also be appropriate to anticipate or defer such costs at the end of the financial year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A levy is triggered in full as soon as the entity generates revenues in a specific market7
An entity with calendar year end generates revenues in a specific market in 2013. The amount of the levy is determined by reference to revenues generated by the entity in the market in 2012. The entity generated revenues in the market in 2012 and starts to generate revenues in the market in 2013 on 3 January 2013.
In this example, the liability is recognised in full on 3 January 2013 because the obligating event, as identified by the legislation, is the first generation of revenues in 2013. The generation of revenues in 2012 is necessary, but not sufficient, to create a present obligation to pay a levy. Before 3 January 2013, the entity has no obligation. In other words, the activity that triggers the payment of the levy as identified by the legislation is the first generation of revenues at a point in time in 2013. The generation of revenues in 2012 is not the activity that triggers the payment of the levy. The amount of revenues generated in 2012 only affects the measurement of the liability.
In the interim financial report, because the liability is recognised in full on 3 January 2013, the expense is recognised in full in the first interim period of 2013. The expense should not be deferred until subsequent interim periods and shall not be anticipated in previous interim periods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mondi Limited (2011)
Notes to the combined and consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2011 [extract]
1 Accounting policies [extract]
Agriculture
Owned forestry assets
Owned forestry assets are measured at fair value, calculated by applying the expected selling price, less costs to harvest and deliver, to the estimated volume of timber on hand at each reporting date. The estimated volume of timber on hand is determined based on the maturity profile of the area under afforestation, the species, the geographic location and other environmental considerations and excludes future growth. The product of these is then adjusted to present value by applying a market related pre tax discount rate.
Changes in fair value are recognised in the combined and consolidated income statement within ‘other net operating expenses’.
At point of felling, the carrying value of forestry assets is transferred to inventory.
Directly attributable costs incurred during the year of biological growth and investments in standing timber are capitalised and presented within cash flows from investing activities in the combined and consolidated statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sappi Limited (2011)
Notes to the group annual financial statements
for the year ended 30 September 2011 [extract]
2 Accounting Policies [extract]
2.3 Critical accounting policies and estimates [extract]
2.3.6 Plantations [extract]
Plantations are stated at fair value less estimated cost to sell at the harvesting stage.
In arriving at plantation fair values, the key assumptions are estimated prices less cost of delivery, discount rates, and volume and growth estimations. All changes in fair value are recognised in the period in which they arise.
The impact of changes in estimate prices, discount rates and, volume and growth assumptions may have on the calculated fair value and other key financial information on plantations is disclosed in note 10.
- Estimated prices less cost of delivery
The group uses a 12 quarter rolling historical average price to estimate the fair value of all immature timber and mature timber that is to be felled in more than 12 months from the reporting date. 12 quarters is considered a reasonable period of time after taking the length of the growth cycle of the plantations into account. Expected future price trends and recent market transactions involving comparable plantations are also considered in estimating fair value.
Mature timber that is expected to be felled within 12 months from the end of the reporting period are valued using unadjusted current market prices. Such timber is expected to be used in the short term and consequently, current market prices are considered an appropriate reflection of fair value.
The fair value is derived by using the prices as explained above reduced by the estimated cost of delivery. Cost of delivery includes all costs associated with getting the harvested agricultural produce to the market, including harvesting, loading, transport and allocated fixed overheads.
The discount rate used is the applicable pre-tax weighted average cost of capital of the business unit.
- Volume and growth estimations and cost assumptions
The group focuses on good husbandry techniques which include ensuring that the rotation of plantations is met with adequate planting activities for future harvesting. The age threshold used for quantifying immature timber is dependent on the rotation period of the specific timber genus which varies between 8 and 18 years. In the Southern African region, softwood less than eight years and hardwood less than five years is classified as immature timber.
Trees are generally felled at the optimum age when ready for intended use. At the time the tree is felled it is taken out of plantations and accounted for under inventory and reported as depletion cost (fellings).
Depletion costs include the fair value of timber felled, which is determined on the average method, plus amounts written off against standing timber to cover loss or damage caused by fire, disease and stunted growth. These costs are accounted for on a cost per metric ton allocation method multiplied by unadjusted current market prices. Tons are calculated using the projected growth to rotation age and are extrapolated to current age on a straight-line basis.
The group has projected growth estimation over a period of 8 to 18 years per rotation. In deriving this estimate, the group established a long-term sample plot network which is representative of the species and sites on which trees are grown and the measured data from these permanent sample plots were used as input into the group’s growth estimation. Periodic adjustments are made to existing models for new genetic material.
The group directly manages plantations established on land that is either owned or leased from third parties. Indirectly managed plantations represent plantations established on land held by independent commercial farmers where Sappi provides technical advice on the growing and tendering of trees. The associated costs for managing the plantations are recognised as silviculture costs in cost of sales (see note 4).
10 Plantations [extract]
Sappi manages the establishment, maintenance and harvesting of its plantations on a compartmentalised basis. These plantations are comprised of pulpwood and sawlogs and are managed in such a way so as to ensure that the optimum fibre balance is supplied to its paper and pulping operations in Southern Africa.
As Sappi manages its plantations on a rotational basis, the respective increases by means of growth are negated by depletions over the rotation period for the group’s own production or sales. Estimated volume changes on a rotational basis amount to approximately 5 million tons per annum.
We own plantations on land that we own, as well as on land that we lease. We disclose both of these as directly managed plantations. With regard to indirectly managed plantations, Sappi has several different types of agreements with many independent farmers. The terms of the agreements depend on the type and specific needs of the farmer and the areas planted ranging in duration from one to more than 20 years. In certain circumstances, we provide loans to farmers that are disclosed as accounts receivable in the group balance sheets (these loans are considered, individually and in aggregate, immaterial to the group). If Sappi provides seedlings, silviculture and/or technical assistance, the costs are expensed when incurred by the group.
The group is exposed to financial risks arising from climatic changes, disease and other natural risks such as fire, flooding and storms and human-induced losses arising from strikes, civil commotion and malicious damage. These risks are covered by an appropriate level of insurance as determined by management. The plantations have an integrated management system that is certified to ISO 9001, ISO 14001, OHSAS 18001 and FSC standards.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Supplementary information on oil and natural gas [extract]
Standardized measure of discounted future net cash flows and changes therein relating to proved oil and gas reserves [extract]
The following tables set out the standardized measures of discounted future net cash flows, and changes therein, relating to crude oil and natural gas production from the group’s estimated proved reserves. This information is prepared in compliance with FASB Oil and Gas Disclosures requirements.
Future net cash flows have been prepared on the basis of certain assumptions which may or may not be realized. These include the timing of future production, the estimation of crude oil and natural gas reserves and the application of average crude oil and natural gas prices and exchange rates from the previous 12 months. Furthermore, both proved reserves estimates and production forecasts are subject to revision as further technical information becomes available and economic conditions change. BP cautions against relying on the information presented because of the highly arbitrary nature of the assumptions on which it is based and its lack of comparability with the historical cost information presented in the financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Appendix 2 – Supplemental oil and gas information (unaudited) [extract]
Standardized measure of discounted future net cash flow
The standardized measure of discounted future net cash flows relating to proved oil and gas reserve quantities was developed as follows:
- Estimates of proved reserves and the corresponding production profiles are based on existing technical and economic conditions;
- The estimated future cash flows are determined based on prices used in estimating the Group’s proved oil and gas reserves;
- The future cash flows incorporate estimated production costs (including production taxes), future development costs and asset retirement costs. All cost estimates are based on year-end technical and economic conditions;
- Future income taxes are computed by applying the year-end statutory tax rate to future net cash flows after consideration of permanent differences and future income tax credits; and
- Future net cash flows are discounted at a standard discount rate of 10 percent.
These principles applied are those required by ASC 932 and do not reflect the expectations of real revenues from these reserves, nor their present value; hence, they do not constitute criteria for investment decisions. An estimate of the fair value of reserves should also take into account, among other things, the recovery of reserves not presently classified as proved, anticipated future changes in prices and costs and a discount factor more representative of the time value of money and the risks inherent in reserves estimates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Notes on financial statements[extract]
6. Principal accounting policies[extract]
Exploration and evaluation expenditure
Exploration and evaluation expenditure relates to costs incurred on the exploration and evaluation of potential mineral reserves and resources and includes costs such as exploratory drilling and sample testing and the costs of pre-feasibility studies. Exploration and evaluation expenditure for each area of interest, other than that acquired from the purchase of another mining company, is carried forward as an asset provided that one of the following conditions is met:
– such costs are expected to be recouped in full through successful development and exploration of the area of interest or alternatively, by its sale; or
– exploration and evaluation activities in the area of interest have not yet reached a stage that permits a reasonable assessment of the existence or otherwise of economically recoverable reserves, and active and significant operations in relation to the area are continuing, or planned for the future.
Purchased exploration and evaluation assets are recognised as assets at their cost of acquisition or at fair value if purchased as part of a business combination.
An impairment review is performed, either individually or at the cash-generating unit level, when there are indicators that the carrying amount of the assets may exceed their recoverable amounts. To the extent that this occurs, the excess is fully provided against, in the financial year in which this is determined. Exploration and evaluation assets are reassessed on a regular basis and these costs are carried forward provided that at least one of the conditions outlined above is met.
Expenditure is transferred to mine development assets or capital work in progress once the work completed to date supports the future development of the property and such development receives appropriate approvals.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Notes on financial statements[extract]
1. Significant accounting policies[extract]
Oil and natural gas exploration, appraisal and development expenditure
Oil and natural gas exploration, appraisal and development expenditure is accounted for using the principles of the successful efforts method of accounting.
Licence and property acquisition costs
Exploration licence and leasehold property acquisition costs are capitalized within intangible assets and are reviewed at each reporting date to confirm that there is no indication that the carrying amount exceeds the recoverable amount. This review includes confirming that exploration drilling is still under way or firmly planned or that it has been determined, or work is under way to determine, that the discovery is economically viable based on a range of technical and commercial considerations and sufficient progress is being made on establishing development plans and timing. If no future activity is planned, the remaining balance of the licence and property acquisition costs is written off. Lower value licences are pooled and amortized on a straight-line basis over the estimated period of exploration. Upon recognition of proved reserves and internal approval for development, the relevant expenditure is transferred to property, plant and equipment.
Exploration and appraisal expenditure
Geological and geophysical exploration costs are charged against income as incurred. Costs directly associated with an exploration well are initially capitalized as an intangible asset until the drilling of the well is complete and the results have been evaluated. These costs include employee remuneration, materials and fuel used, rig costs and payments made to contractors. If potentially commercial quantities of hydrocarbons are not found, the exploration expenditure is written off as a dry hole. If hydrocarbons are found and, subject to further appraisal activity, are likely to be capable of commercial development, the costs continue to be carried as an asset.
Costs directly associated with appraisal activity, undertaken to determine the size, characteristics and commercial potential of a reservoir following the initial discovery of hydrocarbons, including the costs of appraisal wells where hydrocarbons were not found, are initially capitalized as an intangible asset.
All such carried costs are subject to technical, commercial and management review at least once a year to confirm the continued intent to develop or otherwise extract value from the discovery. When this is no longer the case, the costs are written off. When proved reserves of oil and natural gas are determined and development is approved by management, the relevant expenditure is transferred to property, plant and equipment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reversal of impairment losses on E&E assets
Entity A’s exploration activity in a specific area does not discover oil and/or gas reserves. Therefore, A recognises an impairment of the cash-generating unit and derecognises the related E&E assets.
Entity B’s exploration activity in a specific area leads to the discovery of a significant quantity of reserves, but these are located in a complex reservoir. Therefore, at present the costs of extraction of the discovered reserves do not justify the construction of the required infrastructure. Nevertheless, B’s management believes that the surrounding area has strong potential to yield other discoveries on other geological structures and it is considered possible that the required infrastructure will be constructed in the future, although at this stage management has no plans to undertake further exploration activity. Entity B recognises an impairment of the E&E assets, but since it expects future economic benefits the related E&E assets are not derecognised.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Unit of account – dry well
An oil and gas company concludes, based on a number of exploration wells, that oil and gas reserves are present. However, it needs to drill a number of delineation wells to determine the amount of reserves present in the field. The first delineation well that is drilled is a dry hole, i.e. no reserves are found.
There are two ways of looking at the cost of drilling the dry hole:
- the dry hole provides important information about the extent of the oil and gas reserves present in the oil field and should therefore be capitalised as part of the oil field; or
- the dry hole will not produce oil in the future and in the absence of future economic benefits the costs should be expensed immediately.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued
For the year ended 31 December 2008 [extract]
36 Financial risk management[extract]
(a) Foreign currency risk[extract]
1 Minera Santa Cruz, one of the Group’s subsidiaries which is the legal owner of the San José mine, had debts denominated in US dollars. As Minera Santa Cruz’s functional currency was the peso during 2007, the translation of this loan into Pesos created a loss. Following the commencement of operations the Group was required to change the functional currency in Minera Santa Cruz to US dollars and as a result, these loans were no longer being exposed to foreign currency risk.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Notes to the financial statements
Year ended 28 February 2010[extract]
1a. Basis of preparation – Change in functional currency
Previously, the directors considered the functional currency of the Company to be Sterling. In light of developments within the Company’s operations and the nature of its funding, the directors have reassessed the functional currency of the Company and concluded that the currency of the primary economic environment in which Angel Mining operates is now the US dollar. The date of change from Sterling to US dollars has been taken as 1 March 2009. The key factors influencing this decision include the following:
(i) During the year, the Company acquired the Nalunaq license and mining assets. This will be the first producing mine for the Company. The consideration for these assets was paid in US dollars;
(ii) During the year, the Company sourced plant, machinery and employees with technical skills on a global basis. A significant proportion of these costs were based in US dollars. In prior years, the Company’s costs had been incurred primarily in Sterling;
(iii) The Company’s primary form of finance during the period was the long term and short term debt facilities provided by FBC. These facilities are all based in US dollars. During prior periods, the Company had been more heavily dependent upon equity finance which was denominated in Sterling;
(iv) The vast majority of the forms of finance which the Company has been pursuing and is likely to pursue going forward are US dollar based;
(v) Commencing during the year, one of the largest consumables used by the Company in its operations in Greenland was diesel fuel. Although the Company pays for its diesel in Danish Kroner, the price of diesel is determined globally and priced in US dollars; and
(vi) The resources that the Company is working to exploit are global commodities which are always priced in US dollars. When the Company begins producing, all its revenues will be dollar based.
The change in the Company’s functional currency has been accounted for prospectively from 1 March 2009 in accordance with IAS 21. This change constituted a prospective change in accounting policy. The financial statements for 2009 have been prepared using Sterling as the functional currency and US dollars as the presentational currency.
The change in the presentational currency from Sterling to US dollar is and therefore is applied retrospectively in accordance with IAS 8 ‘Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors’ and therefore require comparative information to be restated and consequently, a third balance sheet is required to be presented in the financial statements.
The impact of this change in presentational currency for 2009, is as follows:
(i) The assets and liabilities for both the Group and the Company at 28 February 2009 have been translated using the closing rate for the same date of $1.426/;
(ii) The consolidated income statement for 2009 has been translated using the average rate for the year ended 28 February 2009 of $1.771/ on the basis that this average rate approximates the exchange rates on the dates of transactions; and
The resulting gain on retranslation from average to closing rate has been recognised in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Risk factors[extract]
Other risks [extract]
Legal aspects of exploration and production activities
TOTAL’s exploration and production activities are conducted in many different countries and are therefore subject to an extremely broad range of regulations. These cover virtually all aspects of exploration and production activities, including matters such as leasehold rights, production rates, royalties, environmental protection, exports, taxes and foreign exchange rates. The terms of the concessions, licenses, permits and contracts governing the Group’s ownership of oil and gas interests vary from country to country. These concessions, licenses, permits and contracts are generally granted by or entered into with a government entity or a state-owned company and are sometimes entered into with private owners. These arrangements usually take the form of concessions or production sharing agreements.
The oil concession agreement remains the traditional model for agreements entered into with States: the oil company owns the assets and the facilities and is entitled to the entire production. In exchange, the operating risks, costs and investments are the oil company’s responsibility and it agrees to remit to the relevant State, usually the owner of the subsoil resources, a production-based royalty, income tax, and possibly other taxes that may apply under local tax legislation.
The production sharing contract (PSC) involves a more complex legal framework than the concession agreement: it defines the terms and conditions of production sharing and sets the rules governing the cooperation between the company or consortium in possession of the license and the host State, which is generally represented by a state-owned company. The latter can thus be involved in operating decisions, cost accounting and production allocation.
The consortium agrees to undertake and finance all exploration, development and production activities at its own risk. In exchange, it is entitled to a portion of the production, known as “cost oil”, the sale of which should cover all of these expenses (investments and operating costs). The balance of production, known as “profit oil”, is then shared in varying proportions, between the company or consortium, on the one hand, and with the State or the state-owned company, on the other hand.
In some instances, concession agreements and PSCs coexist, sometimes in the same country. Even though other contractual structures still exist, TOTAL’s license portfolio is comprised mainly of concession agreements. In all countries, the authorities of the host State, often assisted by international accounting firms, perform joint venture and PSC cost audits and ensure the observance of contractual obligations.
In some countries, TOTAL has also signed contracts called “risked service contracts” which are similar to production sharing contracts. However, the profit oil is replaced by risked monetary remuneration, agreed by contract, which depends notably on the field performance. Thus, the remuneration under the Iraqi contract is based on an amount calculated per barrel produced.
Hydrocarbon exploration and production activities are subject to public authorities (permits), which can be different for each of these activities. These permits are granted for limited periods of time and include an obligation to return a large portion, in case of failure the entire portion, of the permit area at the end of the exploration period.
TOTAL is required to pay tax on income generated from its oil and gas production and sales activities under its concessions, production sharing contracts and risked service contracts, as provided for by local regulations. In addition, depending on the country, TOTAL’s production and sale activities may be subject to a range of other taxes, fees and withholdings, including special petroleum taxes and fees. The taxes imposed on oil and gas production and sale activities may be substantially higher than those imposed on other businesses.
The legal framework of TOTAL’s exploration and production activities, established through concessions, licenses, permits and contracts granted by or entered into with a government entity, a state-owned company or, sometimes, private owners, is subject to certain risks which in certain cases can diminish or challenge the protections offered by this legal framework.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Production sharing contract
An oil and gas company (contractor) entered into a PSC that includes the following terms:
- the oil and gas company pays for all exploration costs;
- the government is entitled to:
- 15% royalty on the production;
- severance tax of USD 2.50 per barrel;
- USD 5 million production bonus when average production first exceeds 25,000 barrels per day; and
- 10% of the profit oil;
- operating expenses are recoverable before exploration costs;
- development costs are recoverable after exploration costs;
- cost recovery oil is capped at 45% of the annual production; and
- the national oil company (NOC) and the contractor have a 51% and 49% working interest, respectively.
How should the production be allocated between parties, assuming the following for 2013?
- annual production in 2013 is 10 million barrels;
- recoverable operating costs in 2013 are USD 25 million;
- the average oil price in 2013 is USD 100/barrel;
- during 2013 average production exceeded 25,000 barrels per day for the first time;
- unrecovered exploration costs at the beginning of 2013 were USD 180 million; and
- unrecovered development costs at the beginning of 2013 were USD 275 million.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash flows from derivatives not qualifying for hedge accounting
Company A has the euro as its functional currency. On 1 January 2011, it sells goods to a US customer for which it charges US$1,000,000. The spot exchange rate on this date is 1:1 and it recognises revenue of €1,000,000. Payment is due to be received on 30 June 2011. A enters into a forward contract to exchange US$1,000,000 for €1,095,000 on 30 June 2011. It does not designate it as a hedge because the effects of movements on the contract and those of retranslating the receivable will already offset in profit or loss. On 30 June 2011 the exchange rate is such that A receives the equivalent of €1,200,000 from its customer and pays €105,000 on the forward contract.
Taken literally, IAS 7 would suggest that the receipt from the customer of €1,200,000 is classified as an operating cash inflow; but, because the forward contract is not held for dealing or trading purposes and is not accounted for as a hedge of an identifiable position, the €105,000 cash outflow on the forward contract cannot be classified under operating activities. As such, the €105,000 would have to appear in investing or possibly financing cash flows. However, had the entity elected to apply hedge accounting, the standard would require the €105,000 to be included in operating cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
VTech Holdings Limited (2012)
Principal Accounting Policies [extract]
O Cash And Cash Equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand, demand deposits with banks and other financial institutions, short-term highly liquid investments that are readily convertible into known amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value and which have a maturity of three months or less at acquisition. Bank overdrafts that are repayable on demand and form an integral part of the Group”s cash management are also included as a component of cash and cash equivalents for the purpose of statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deutsche Lufthansa AG (2011)
Consolidated cash flow statement [extract]
The cash flow statement shows how cash and cash equivalents have changed over the reporting period at the Lufthansa Group. In accordance with IAS 7 cash flows are divided into cash flows from operating activities, from investing activities and from financing activities. The cash and cash equivalents shown in the cash flow statement correspond to the balance sheet item cash and cash equivalents. The amount of liquidity in the broader sense is reached by adding short-term securities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hunting plc (2010)
Notes to the Financial Statements [extract]
25. Cash and Cash Equivalents [extract]
30. Financial Risk Factors [extract]
(b) Interest rate risk [extract]
The Group needs to ensure that sufficient liquid funds are available to support its working capital and capital expenditure requirements and to fund acquisitions. During the year, cash was, therefore, invested by the treasury function in AAA rated, instant access Money Market Funds and in fixed-rate bank deposits, with terms of between overnight and four months. As the funds were invested for short periods of time, the interest yield on these was relatively low. However, the preservation of the Group”s net cash took priority over earning high interest yields.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
British Energy Group plc (Q3, 2006)
Notes to the financial statements [extract]
1. Basis of Preparation [extract]
In preparing the interim financial statements for the period ended 31 December 2006, the Board of Directors have used the principal accounting policies as set out in the Group’s Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 March 2006. The Group has chosen not to adopt IAS 34 – Interim Financial Statements, in preparing these interim financial statements, and therefore this information is not wholly compliant with International Financial Reporting Standards. The preparation of interim financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of policies and reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BP p.l.c. (Group results; Second quarter and half year 2010)
Notes [extract]
9. Inventory valuation [extract]
A provision of $46 million was held at 31 December 2009 to write inventories down to their net realizable value. The net movement in the provision during the second quarter 2010 was an increase of $350 million (first quarter 2010 was a decrease of $22 million and second quarter 2009 was an increase of $92 million). The net movement in the provision in the half year 2010 was an increase of $328 million, compared with a decrease of $1,071 million for the half year 2009.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Roche Group (Half-Year Report, 2010)
Notes to the Roche Group Interim Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]
Note 10. Intangible assets [extract]
Impairment of intangible assets [extract]
In the Pharmaceuticals operating segment a net impairment charge of 102 million Swiss francs was recorded. An impairment charge of 71 million Swiss francs was recorded, which relates to a decision to stop development of one compound with an alliance partner. The assets concerned, which were not yet being amortised, were fully written down by these charges. A further charge of 47 million Swiss francs was recorded, resulting from a portfolio prioritisation decision on a project acquired as part of a previous business combination. The asset concerned, which was not yet being amortised, was written down to its recoverable value of 95 million Swiss francs. A reversal of previously recorded impairment loss of 16 million Swiss francs was recorded, which follows from the latest clinical data assessment of the project concerned.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statoil (Financial statements and review – 4th quarter 2009)
FINANCIAL REVIEW [extract]
Fourth quarter [extract]
In the fourth quarter of 2009, impairment losses net of reversals (NOK 1.3 billion), other accruals (NOK 0.1 billion) and lower fair value of derivatives (NOK 0.2 billion), negatively impacted net operating income, while overlift (NOK 0.1 billion), higher values of products in operational storage (NOK 0.6 billion) and reversals of restructuring costs related to the NCS(NOK 0.3 billion) had a positive impact on net operating income. Adjusted for these items and the effects of eliminations (NOK 0.3 billion), adjusted earnings were 34.4 billion in the fourth quarter of 2009.
In the fourth quarter of 2008, lower fair value of derivatives (NOK 2.1 billion), impairment charges net of reversals (NOK 1.3 billion), underlift (NOK 1.3 billion), lower values of products in operational storage (NOK 3.6 billion), loss on sale of assets (NOK 0.8 billion) and other accruals (NOK 0.3 billion) all had a negative impact on net operating income. Reversal of restructuring cost accrual (NOK 1.6 billion) had a positive impact on net operating income for the fourth quarter of 2008. Adjusted for these items and the effects of eliminations (NOK 2.2 billion), adjusted earnings were NOK 43.4 billion in the fourth quarter 2008.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
UBS AG (Q1, 2009)
Notes to the Financial Statements [extract]
Note 1. Basis of accounting [extract]
Restatements made to the financial statements 2008 [extract]
UBS has restated its 2008 financial statements to correct identified accounting errors related to the 2008 financial statements, predominately to the fourth quarter 2008 financial statements. These errors are not material to the annual or quarterly 2008 financial statements, but related corrections would have been material to first quarter 2009 financial statements. The restatement comprises three items in excess of CHF 100 million as follows:
– The fair value of auction rate securities purchase commitments at 31 December 2008, which are recognized as negative replacement values on UBS’s balance sheet, was increased by CHF 112 million, resulting in a corresponding charge to net trading income.
– For certain assets reclassified from “held-for-trading” to “loans and receivables” in fourth quarter 2008, recognition of interest income based on the effective interest rate method was reduced by CHF 180 million. Other assets were reduced accordingly as of 31 December 2008.
– The partial disposals of an investment in a consolidated investment fund in 2008 gave rise to the realization of the related foreign currency translation loss deferred in shareholders equity. This adjustment reduced other income for the year 2008 by CHF 192 million but did not have a net impact on UBS’s equity.
In addition to the above mentioned items, a number of misstatements individually below CHF 65 million were adjusted. The aggregate net effect of these items on net profit attributable to UBS shareholders was an increase of net profit attributable to shareholders of CHF 79 million. The total net impact of all restated items on the 2008 results was a reduction of net profit and net profit attributable to UBS shareholders of CHF 405 million, a reduction of equity and equity attributable to UBS shareholders of CHF 269 million, and a reduction of basic and diluted earnings per share by CHF 0.15 and CHF 0.14 respectively. There was no effect on income tax expense. Periods prior to 2008 were not affected by the restatement. 2008 quarterly net profits attributable to UBS shareholders were reduced by the following amounts: CHF 82 million in Q1, CHF 37 million in Q2, CHF 13 million in Q3, and CHF 273 million in Q4.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Develica Deutschland Limited (Interim Report 2009)
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements for the period 1 April 2009 to 30 September 2009 [extract]
2 Basis of preparation [extract]
(c) Fundamental accounting concept [extract]
The current economic climate has resulted in a global trend of declining property values, which results in the Group being exposed to increased risks against covenant breaches set out in the Group’s debt facilities.
The 30 September 2009 portfolio valuation indicates that the Loan-to-Value (“LTV”) ratio of the loans classified as current liabilities in the consolidated balance sheet would, if tested by the debt providers as set out in the facilities agreement, exceed their respective LTV covenants.
Loan interest and amortisation continues to be well serviced through strong rental income. Due to tenant related difficulties, there is one loan facility of €51.5m in which the Interest Cover Ratio (“ICR”) covenant is not being met. The Group is currently in ongoing discussions with the relevant debt provider to remedy the breach. ICR covenants continue to be met on the remaining facilities.
Excluding the amended Citibank International PLC (“Citi”) facilities, the Group’s borrowing arrangements include covenants that require maintenance of LTV ratios ranging between 85% and 95% with a weighted average of 90.9%.
As reported in the Annual Report, the Group has been notified of two LTV breaches during the six month period relating to €116.1m of the Group’s loan facilities. In each case, the lender has requested a valuation entitled under the rights of the respective loan facility agreements. The Group continues to have positive discussions with the lender to seek to remedy these breaches. No further notifications of breach have been served on the Company by its other lenders although we continue in discussion with these lenders regarding the remaining loan facilities.
The strong cash flow generated from a diverse range of quality tenants enables the Group to service these financing obligations. The Group has entered into hedging instruments across the entire portfolio which fix the ongoing interest obligations and also reduce the ongoing debt exposure.
In all cases where an actual or potential breach of any loan has/could arise, the Company has engaged in discussions with the Company’s debt providers to work together in reaching a satisfactory conclusion for all parties. The Company has already reached a successful agreement on amending five facilities through Citi and the Directors are hopeful that, through maintaining close links and dialogue with the remaining debt providers, it will be able to implement similar arrangements across the entire portfolio. In the event that a breach occurs resulting in an event of default, and the Group is unable to reach a resolution with the relevant debt provider, then the only recourse available to the debt provider are the assets secured against the given loan at the subsidiary level and not the Group’s assets.
As the debt facilities and related interest swaps are ring-fenced and the Company has sufficient cash and other resources, the Directors do not consider that the risk of breaching LTV covenants will impact the ability of the Group to continue to trade as a going concern. Accordingly the financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deutsche Bank AG (Interim Report as of June 30, 2010)
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]
Other Financial Information (unaudited) [extract]
Related Party Transactions [extract]
Transactions with related parties are made in the ordinary course of business and on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing for comparable transactions with other parties.
Transactions with Key Management Personnel
Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of Deutsche Bank Group, directly or indirectly. The Group considers the members of the Management Board as currently mandated and the Supervisory Board to constitute key management personnel for purposes of IAS 24. Among the Group’s transactions with key management personnel as of June 30, 2010 were loans and commitments of €9 million and deposits of €19 million. As of December 31, 2009, there were loans and commitments of €9 million and deposits of €21 million among the Group’s transactions with key management personnel. In addition, the Group provides banking services, such as payment and account services as well as investment advice, to key management personnel and their close family members.
Transactions with Subsidiaries, Joint Ventures and Associates
Transactions between Deutsche Bank AG and its subsidiaries meet the definition of related party transactions. If these transactions are eliminated on consolidation, they are not disclosed as related party transactions. Transactions between the Group and its associated companies and joint ventures also qualify as related party transactions and are disclosed as follows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Roche Holding Ltd (Half-Year Report 2008)
Notes to the Roche Group Interim Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]
1. Accounting policies [extract]
Basis of preparation of financial statements [extract]
The Interim Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with the accounting policies set out in the Annual Financial Statements, except for accounting policy changes made after the date of the Annual Financial Statements. The presentation of the Interim Financial Statements is consistent with the Annual Financial Statements, except where noted below. Where necessary, comparative information has been reclassified or expanded from the previously reported Interim Financial Statements to take into account any presentational changes made in the Annual Financial Statements or in these Interim Financial Statements.
Changes in accounting policies [extract]
In 2007 the Group early adopted IFRS 8 ‘Operating Segments’ and IAS 23 (revised) ‘Borrowing Costs’ which are required to be implemented from 1 January 2009 at the latest. In 2008 the Group has early adopted the revised versions of IFRS 3 ‘Business Combinations’ and IAS 27 ‘Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements’ that were published in early 2008 and which are required to be implemented from 1 January 2010 at the latest. The Group has also adopted IFRIC interpretation 14 which relates to IAS 19 ‘Employee benefits’. The Group is currently assessing the potential impacts of the other new and revised standards that will be effective from 1 January 2009, notably the revisions to IFRS 2 ‘Share-based Payment’.
IFRS 3 (revised): ‘Business combinations’. Amongst other matters, the revised standard requires that directly attributable transaction costs are expensed in the current period, rather than being included in the cost of acquisition as previously. The revised standard also requires that contingent consideration arrangements should be included in acquisition accounting at fair value and expands the disclosure requirements for business combinations. The Group has applied the revised standard prospectively for all business combinations since 1 January 2008 and transaction costs totalling 42 million Swiss francs have been expensed in 2008 that would have been included in the cost of acquisition under the previous accounting policy. Business combinations in 2007 and prior periods have not been restated. Had the new accounting policy been applied in 2007, the Group would have expensed an additional 5 million Swiss francs of transaction costs in the interim period of 2007 (15 million Swiss francs in the full year 2007) and goodwill would have been reduced by these amounts in the respective periods. This change has a negative impact of 0.05 Swiss francs on earnings per share and non-voting equity security (basic and diluted) in 2008, and would have had a negative impact of 0.01 Swiss francs in the interim period of 2007 (0.02 Swiss francs in the full year 2007) if the revised standard had been applied retrospectively.
IAS 27 (revised): ‘Consolidated and separate financial statements’. Amongst other matters, the revised standard requires that changes in ownership interests in subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions if they occur after control has already been obtained and if they do not result in a loss of control. Additionally the revised standard renames ‘minority interests’ as ‘non-controlling interests’. The Group has applied the revised standard retrospectively. There were no transactions in 2007 that required restatement.
IFRIC interpretation 14 to IAS 19: ‘Employee benefits’. The interpretation adds to the existing requirements of IAS 19 regarding the interaction between the limits on recognition of assets from defined benefit postemployment plans and any minimum funding requirement of such plans. Some of the Group’s plans do have a minimum funding requirement and the application of this interpretation results in an increase in the assets recorded on the Group’s balance sheet and a corresponding increase in the Group’s equity. The Group has applied the revised standard retrospectively and the impacts on the previously published balance sheet and statement of recognised income and expense are shown in the tables below. The application of the interpretation has no impact on net income and earnings per share.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lancashire Holdings Limited (six months ended 30 June 2012)
Risk and other disclosures [extract]
Seasonality of interim operations [extract]
The Group underwrites worldwide short-tail insurance and reinsurance contracts that transfer insurance risk, including risks exposed to both natural and man-made catastrophes. The Group’s exposure in connection with insurance contracts is, in the event of insured losses, whether premiums will be sufficient to cover the loss payments and expenses. Insurance and reinsurance markets are cyclical and premium rates and terms and conditions vary by line of business depending on market conditions and the stage of the cycle. Market conditions are impacted by capacity and recent loss events, amongst other factors. The Group’s underwriters assess likely losses using their experience and knowledge of past loss experience, industry trends and current circumstances. This allows them to estimate the premium sufficient to meet likely losses and expenses.
The Group bears exposure to large losses arising from non-seasonal natural catastrophes, such as earthquakes, and also from risk losses throughout the year and from war, terrorism and political risk losses. On certain lines of business the Group’s most significant exposures to catastrophe losses is greater during the second half of the fiscal year. There is therefore potential for significantly greater volatility in earnings during that period. This is broadly in line with the most active period of the North American windstorm season which is typically June to November. The Group is also exposed to Japanese and European windstorm seasons which are typically June to November and November to March, respectively. The majority of the premiums for these lines of business are written during the first half of the fiscal year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Electrolux (Q2, 2009)
Interim report January – June 2009 [extract]
Financial Position [extract]
Net borrowings [extract]
Net borrowings amounted to SEK 2,197m (5,217). The net debt/equity ratio was 0.13 (0.36). The equity/assets ratio was 27.1% (23.8).
During the first half of 2009, SEK 1,632 of new long-term borrowings were raised. Long-term borrowings as of June 30, 2009, excluding long-term borrowings with maturities within 12 months, amounted to SEK 10,702m with average maturities of 4.3 years, compared to SEK 9,963m and 4.7 years by the end of 2008.
During 2009 and 2010, long-term borrowings in the amount of approximately SEK 1,500m will mature. Liquid funds as of June 30, 2009, excluding a committed unused revolving credit facility of EUR 500m, amounted to SEK 12,886m.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vodafone Group PLC (Half-Year Report, 2008)
Notes to the Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]
11 Other matters [extract]
Events after the balance sheet date [extract]
On 29 October 2008, the Group announced it had agreed to acquire an additional 4.8% stake in Polkomtel S.A. for cash consideration of €176 million (141 million) plus accrued interest at closing. The acquisition will increase Vodafone’s stake in Polkomtel from 19.6% to 24.4% and is expected to close in the fourth quarter of the 2008 calendar year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Daimler AG (Q2, 2009)
Notes to the Unaudited Interim Consolidated Financial Statements [extract]
11. Segment reporting
Segment information. At the beginning of 2009, the Group adjusted the presentation of its segment reporting. The business activities of Mercedes-Benz Vans and Daimler Buses, which were previously reported as part of Vans, Buses, Other, are presented separately. The other business activities of the Group which previously also formed part of Vans, Buses, Other and which primarily include the equity method investment in EADS are included in the column “Reconciliation” together with corporate items and eliminations of intersegment transactions. Prior-year figures have been adjusted accordingly. The Group’s proportionate share in the results of Chrysler Holding as well as other Chrysler-related gains and losses (see Notes 2 and 4) are included in the reconciliation of total segments’ EBIT to Group EBIT.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BMW AG (Q1, 2012)
Notes to the Group Financial Statement to 31 March 2012 [extract]
Accounting Principles and Policies [extract]
1 Basis of preparation [extract]
The Group Financial Statements of BMW AG at 31 December 2011 were drawn up in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs), as applicable in the EU. The Interim Group Financial Statements (Interim Report) at 31 March 2012, which have been prepared in accordance with International Accounting Standard (IAS) 34 (Interim Financial Reporting), have been drawn up using, in all material respects, the same accounting methods as those utilised in the 2011 Group Financial Statements. The BMW Group applies the option, available under IAS 34.8, of publishing condensed group financial statements. All Interpretations issued by the International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) which are mandatory at 31 March 2012, have also been applied. The Interim Report also complies with German Accounting Standard No. 16 (GAS 16) – Interim Financial Reporting – issued by the German Accounting Standards Committee e.V. (GASC).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BHP Billiton Group (six months ended 31 December 2011)
Notes to the Half-Year Financial Statements [extract]
1 Accounting policies [extract]
This general purpose financial report for the half year ended 31 December 2011 is unaudited and has been prepared in accordance with IAS 34 ‘Interim Financial Reporting’ as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”), IAS 34 ‘Interim Financial Reporting’ as adopted by the EU, AASB 134 ‘Interim Financial Reporting’ as issued by the Australian Accounting Standards Board (“AASB”) and the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the Financial Services Authority in the United Kingdom and the Australian Corporations Act 2001 as applicable to interim financial reporting.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Disclosing comparatives in interim financial statements when the preceding financial year covers a longer period
An entity’s financial year-end is 31 December and it issues quarterly interim financial statements. It was incorporated on 1 July 2011 and prepared its first set of financial statements for a period of eighteen months to 31 December 2012. In this period, the entity prepared interim financial statements under IAS 34 for each of the three month periods ended 30 September 2011, 31 December 2011, 31 March 2012, 30 June 2012, 30 September 2012 and 31 December 2012. Each interim report contained information for the three month period and the year-to-date, which started on 1 July 2011.
In the next year, a twelve month annual reporting period, the entity is preparing its interim financial report for the three months ending 30 June 2013. Accordingly, it presents statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, changes in equity and cash flows for the three month period from 1 April 2013 to 30 June 2013 and for the year-to-date (from 1 January 2013 to 30 June 2013). Under IAS 34, the entity is also required to present comparative statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, cash flows, and changes in equity for the comparable interim periods in the preceding financial year. However, in its interim report for the three months ended 30 June 2012, the entity presented information for the three month period from 1 April 2012 to 30 June 2012 as well as for the year-to-date, from 1 July 2011 to 30 June 2012, a period of twelve months.
To be comparable to the current period, the year-to-date comparative statements should cover same period in the preceding year as the current year, which in this case would be from 1 January 2011 to 30 June 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deutsche Bank AG (H1, 2007)
Basis of Preparation [extract]
The consolidated interim financial statements were prepared in accordance with IFRS issued and effective at December 31, 2006, which were unchanged at 30 June 2007. The segment information presented in this Report is based on IFRS 8, “Operating Segments,” with a reconciliation to IAS 14, “Segment Reporting”. IFRS 8, whilst approved by the IASB, has yet to be endorsed by the EU. On this basis, the Group presents the accounting policies that are expected to be adopted when the Group prepares its first annual financial statements under IFRS.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ‘Balanced Scorecard’ approach aims to provide information to management to assist strategic policy formulation and achievement. It emphasises the need to provide the user with a set of information which addresses all relevant areas of performance in an objective and unbiased fashion.
Requirements
(i) Discuss in general terms the main types of information which would be required by a manager to implement this approach to measuring performance;
and
(ii) comment on three specific examples of performance measures which could be used in a company in a service industry, for example a firm of consultants.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Design and discussion of key performance indicators for DIY outlets and regional companies
Duit plc has recently acquired Ucando Ltd which is a regional builders’ merchants/DIY company with three outlets all within a radius of 40 miles. Duit plc is building up its national coverage of outlets. Duit plc has set up regional companies each with its own board of directors responsible to the main board situated in London.
It is expected that eventually each regional company will have between 10 and 20 outlets under its control. A regional company will take over control of the three Ucando Ltd outlets. Each outlet will have its own manager, and new ones have just been appointed to the three Ucando Ltd outlets.
The outlets’ managers will be allowed to hire and fire whatever staff they need and the introduction of a head count budget is being considered by Head Office. Each outlet manager is responsible for his own sales policy, pricing, store layout, advertising, the general running of the outlet and the purchasing of goods for resale, subject to the recommendations below. Duit plc’s policy is that all outlet managers have to apply to the regional board for all items of capital expenditure greater than f500;. while the regional board can sanction up to f100 000 per capital expenditure project.
The outlets will vary in size of operations, and this will determine the number of trade sales representatives employed per outlet. There will be a minimum of one trade sales representative per outlet under the direction of the outlet manager. Each manager and representative will be entitled to a company car.
Outlet sales are made to both retail and trade on either cash or credit terms. Debtor and cash control Is the responsibility of regional office. Cash received is banked locally, and immediately credited to the Head Office account. Credit sales invoices are raised by the outlet with a copy sent to regional office. Within each outlet it is possible to identify the sales origin, e.g. timber yard, saw mill, building supplies, kitchen furniture, etc.
Timber for resale is supplied to an outlet on request from stocks held at regional office or direct from the ports where Duit (Timber Importers) Ltd has further stocks. Duit Kitchens Ltd provides kitchen furniture that the outlets sell. Duit plc also has a small factory making windows, doors and frames which are sold through the outlets. When purchasing other products for resale, the outlet is requested to use suppliers with which Head Office has negotiated discount buying arrangements. All invoices for outlet purchases and overheads are passed by the respective outlet manager before being paid by regional office. In existing Duit outlets a perpetual inventory system is used, with a complete physical check once a year.
Information concerning last year’s actual results for one of Ucando Ltd’s outlets situated at Birport is given below:
Birport DIY outlet
Trading and profit and loss account
for year to 31 March
(£)
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Sales (1)
|
|
1543000
|
|
Less Cost of sales
|
|
1095530
|
|
Prime gross margin (29%)
|
|
447470
|
|
Less:
|
|
|
|
Wages (2)
|
87400
|
|
|
Salaries (3)
|
45000
|
|
|
Depreciation:
|
|
|
|
equipment (4)
|
9100
|
|
|
buildings
|
3500
|
|
|
vehicles (3 cars)
|
6500
|
|
|
Vehicle running expenses
|
6170
|
|
|
Leasing of delivery lorry
|
6510
|
|
|
Lorry running expenses
|
3100
|
|
|
Energy costs
|
9350
|
|
|
Telephone/stationery
|
9180
|
|
|
Travel and entertaining
|
3490
|
|
|
Commission on sales
|
7770
|
|
|
Bad debts written off
|
9440
|
|
|
Advertising
|
25160
|
|
|
Repairs
|
6000
|
|
|
Rates, insurance
|
13420
|
|
|
Sundry expenses
|
10580
|
|
|
Delivery expenses
|
7 400
|
269070
|
|
|
Net profit £178400
|
Net profit £178400
|
|
|
(11.56%)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Position at 31 March
|
|
|
|
(£)
|
|
|
Debtors
|
100900
|
|
|
Stock
|
512000
|
|
Notes:
(1) Sales can be identified by till code—cash/ credit, trade/retail, timber, kitchen furniture, frames, heavy building supplies, light building supplies, sawmill etc.
(2) Workforce distributed as follows: timber yard (3), sawmill (1), sales (7), general duties (1), administration (3).
(3) Paid to sales representatives (2), assistant manager, manager.
(4) Equipment used in sales area, sawmill, yard.
Requirements:
(a) Describe a cost centre, a profit centre and an investment centre and discuss the problems of and benefits from using them for management accounting purposes.
(b) Suggest key performance indicators which can be used either individually or jointly by each member of the management team for the regional outlet network, i.e. those in the regional office, the outlets and their departments, in a responsibility reporting system for their evaluation purposes.
(c) Justify the key performance indicators that you have suggested in (b) incorporating, where appropriate, reference to whether the individuals or entities are being treated as cost, profit or investment centres.
(d) Design a pro forma monthly report without which can be used by both the outlet manager for his management and control needs and by the regional board to evaluate the outlet. The report can include two or more sections if you wish. Provide a brief explanation for the format chosen.
Note: The manufacturing companies and the importing company report direct to the main board.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HARDHAT LTD
Stan Brignall, Aston Business School, Aston University
Hardhat Limited’s Budget Committee, which has members drawn from all the major functions in the business, is meeting to consider the projected income statement for 2000/2001, which is composed of the ten months’ actuals to the end of January 2001 and estimates for the last two months of the financial year:
Hardhat Ltd: Projected Income Statement 2000/2001
|
|
(£000s)
|
(£000s)
|
|
Sales (100 000 units)
|
10000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
6000
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
4000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
1500
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
1000
|
|
|
|
|
2500
|
|
Net profit before tax
|
|
£1500
|
After some discussion of information principally supplied by the Finance Director, John Perks, the Committee agrees the following changes for the 2001/2002 budget:
30% increase in number of units sold
20% increase in unit cost of materials
5% increase in direct labour cost per unit
10% increase in variable indirect cost per unit
5% increase in indirect fixed costs
8% increase in selling expenses, arising solely from increased volume
6% increase in administrative expenses, reflecting anticipated higher salary and other costs rather than any effects of the expected increased sales volume.
The increase in sales volume is meant to be a significant step towards an ambitious target market share which was included in the latest review of Hardhat’s strategic plan at the insistence of the marketing manager, Keith Boskin. Despite the change in volume, inventory quantities are expected to change little next year because of planned efficiency gains in the supply and handling of materials and despatch of finished goods.
The composition of the production cost of a unit of finished product in 2000/2001 for materials, direct labour and production overhead was in the ratio of 3 : 2 : 1 respectively. In 2000/2001 £40 000 of the production overhead was fixed. No changes in production methods or credit policies are anticipated for 2001/2002.
The managing director, Steve Hartley, has set a target profit before tax for 2001/2002 of £2 000 000, and the Budget Committee are now debating what this might imply for the unit selling price, on the basis of the information they have assembled so far. The consensus appears to be that the profit target is very tough, but that presumably this is what Steve and the Chairman, Lord Haretop, believe the City expects.
Keith Boskin is worried that the imposition of the short-term target profit will jeopardize the staged attainment of his long-run market share. ‘I’m concerned that, in order to meet the profit (target imposed by Steve Hartley) we’ll have to drastically put up our, price. If that happens we might hit the profit, but it’ll ruin my plans for damaging the prospects of Farfetched Co., who have been trying to take market share from us for some while now via heavy marketing expenditure — I think they’re getting desperate because our cost structure and product quality are better than theirs! If we can just keep squeezing them for another year or two we might force them out of the market, or get them to agree to a takeover on reasonable terms. Then we’d effectively have the market to ourselves.’ Dick Whittington, Keith’s deputy, asked ‘rather than putting up the price, could we work out how many units we’d have to sell at the old price to meet the profit target? Then we could check to see whether it would be within the plant’s capacity.’
Mark Catchall, the production manager, intervened at this point, saying ‘we can make up to 150 000 units a year with the present plant, but could we sustain that capacity output for long? I doubt it. We might have to invest in extra capacity, which is a whole new ball game. Besides, I don’t really believe we can sell an extra 30 000 units next year, never mind 50 000 units, especially at an enhanced price. I suspect we will only manage to sell an extra 20 000 units at best, and perhaps only 10 000: what would that do for our profits, John?’ John replied that he didn’t know, but would investigate the various suggestions and come back to the next meeting in a week’s time with some .
As he walked back to his office, John privately mused that perhaps the MD and Chairman wanted to boost short-term profits to make it easier to raise the finance to take over Farfetched Co., in which case it wouldn’t hurt to give some thought as to the best source of finance for such a deal.
Required
Write a report to the Board of Hardhat Ltd setting-out the financial effects of the various proposals and make recommendations as to what price Hardhat should charge next year and in the longer run.
Your report and presentation should cover:
(a) the sales price needed to earn the target profit, using the information compiled by the budget committee;
(b) the number of units that would have to be sold at the old price to meet the target profit, and whether this seems feasible;
(c) what the profit would be if the sales price calculated in (a) were adopted, but sales volume only rose by 10%, or at best 20%;
(d) any other factors you think should be taken into account when making decisions about the price to be charged next year, such as any change in risk involved in the cost—volume—profit structure you propose; the link between short- and long-run prices; and the interactions between acquisitions policy, financing decisions and pricing decisions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LYNCH PRINTERS
© Peter Clarke, University College Dublin
Dermot Lynch is the owner and managing director of a small printing business which carries his name. The company undertakes each printing job according to special instructions received from the customer. The type of printing orders include cards, invitations, small books and even occasional trade magazines. The nature of the printing business virtually ensures that there is no closing stock of finished goods on hand at the end of any accounting period. Work is done according to customer orders received or not at all. Sales and purchase invoices were paid on delivery so that the working capital investment in the company was virtually negligible.
According to the financial results for 20×1, the accounting year just ended, Lynch Printers had returned a net loss for the first time in its history. The loss was not of alarming proportions but Lynch wondered what had gone wrong and what he could do about it. Logic suggested that his problems were due to either low prices or excessive costs but this pii771ed Lynch since each job was priced to include all costs to which a satisfactory profit margin was added. Moreover costs did not appear to have increased compared with previous years.
Lynch Printers has developed over the years a good reputation in the trade for quality work and reliability of delivery. Lynch passionately believed that these two factors were crucial in determining the success of his business. Quotation price was very much of secondary importance. Over the years his customers had continually insisted on good quality work and adherence to agreed delivery dates. For guarantees on these two issues the customer was willing to pay any price within reasonable bounds.
Lynch Printers use a system recommended by his trade association to quote a price for each printing job. When the customer specifies the type of work required, Lynch establishes an estimated cost for the job which includes direct and indirect expenses. A fixed percentage (10%) is added to total cost for profit and the final is given to the customer as a quotation. The quotation price as far as Lynch is concerned, is ‘not negotiable’. Thus there are no special prices for any jobs. It’s a take it or leave it situation as far as Lynch is concerned. If accepted by the customer it becomes a fixed price so that any cost overruns are absorbed by the printers and are not passed on to customers. This quotation system has been in operation for several years and Lynch prided himself on his estimating ability. Moreover it was a rare occurrence for a customer not to accept the quoted price. Admittedly, the absence of other printing firms in the locality meant that potential customers were placed at a slight disadvantage when dealing with Lynch.
The production process in Lynch Printers was relatively simple. Initially Lynch consulted his production manager about the feasibility of the order including the size and styles of type to be used. Once agreement was reached and the order confirmed by the customer Lynch issued a production order, which included printing instructions, and the material was sent to the composing room, where it was set in type. A galley proof was printed and sent to the copy editor who checked it against the original material. Any errors were marked on the proof which was then sent to the customer for approval. When returned by the customer the appropriate corrections were made and the order was then sent to the pressroom for production. Copies were then printed, bound and packaged for delivery to the customer.
The direct expenses of the business consisted of the cost of paper used and actual labour hours worked on each printing job. All other expenses were classified as overhead. Lynch Printers currently employ six individuals in the production process. They work a maximum of 35 hours per week, 48 weeks per year with four weeks holiday entitlements. The annual average cost of this typesetting and printing labour is €18,200 inclusive of employer’s pension and social welfare contributions. Because of space limitations no more than six typesetters may be employed at any one time. The company has recently introduced the practice of ‘flexitime’ which has improved work practices enormously and has eliminated the necessity for overtime. For example if an employee takes Monday morning off he will work late some other evening, at no additional cost, to make up lost time.
For quotation purposes the total number of labour hours required in typesetting and printing for each job is estimated by Lynch and is priced at actual cost of labour work to be performed. To this computed labour cost a predetermined percentage is added to cover and delivery costs.
The other direct cost is that of paper. It is fairly easy to estimate the amount of paper required for each job since the customer specifies the size of the paper required, e.g. A4 size. In addition the quality of paper to be used is agreed in advance with the customer. Lynch personally discusses such requirements with each customer and offers advice. They normally accept his recommendation and are ultimately more than pleased with the completed product. To the estimated cost of paper used is added a predetermined percentage to cover ‘consumables’ such as ink and other minor costs incidental to the production process.
The predetermined percentages to recover both production overhead and consumables are always set equivalent to the actual percentage relationships between corresponding costs incurred during the previous financial year. In effect last year’s actual cost performance becomes the budget for the following year. While this basis may compound any inefficiencies within the production process it has the advantage of considerably simplifying the accounting calculations. A summary of the actual results for 20×1 which formed the basis for 20×2 estimates is provided in Exhibit 1.
Comparing the 20×1 profit performance with the loss incurred in 20×2, Lynch was even more puzzled especially since there were no cost increases over the two years. He knew, however, that in 20×2 business had fallen — measured in terms of chargeable labour hours. In 20×1, 90% of the labour hours worked were charged to specific jobs. However, in 20×2 only 75% of hours worked represented chargeable hours. Even though the volume of trade had dropped no one had been laid off since good typesetters and printers were difficult to recruit and volume might improve in following years.
The actual general production overheads including administration and delivery costs amounted to €72 240 in 20×2. Lynch was not surprised that they were the same as the previous year since they were predominantly fixed in nature. The cost of paper consumed during 20×2 amounted to €19 000. At least it was less than last year, Lynch consoled himself, as was the €3500 incurred on consumables.
As always it was necessary to obtain reliable data on what had actually happened during the year in order to analyse the situation, Lynch thought to himself. Once obtained, he could begin to draw conclusions and implications. Even at this preliminary stage Lynch
anticipated that this whole basis of pricing policy might be in need of revision for 20×3.
Requirement
(1) What were the recovery rates used in 20×2 for both consumables and production overhead? Use these rates and other actual data to calculate actual sales for 20×2.
(2) What was the amount of the loss for 20×2? Explain how the loss has arisen. Comment critically on Lynch’s pricing system.
(3) Prepare a statement comparing actual performance in 20×2 from budget. What information content do these variances have? Justify your choice of budget .
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HIGH STREET REPRODUCTION FURNITURE LTD
Jayne Ducker, Antony Head, Rona O’Brien (Sheffield Hallam University) and Sue Richardson (University of Bradford Management Centre)
Introduction
High Street Reproduction Furniture is a small, but rather exclusive, producer of reproduction bedroom furniture. Turnover last year was just over £1 million and the business continues to provide a steady profit margin. It is a private limited company owned by John Carpenter and his wife Eleanor and it has been trading for 25 years. John, who is a fully qualified cabinet maker, started in the trade immediately after leaving school. He has little formal training in management, but has much hands-on experience gained from running his business.
Past and recent history of the company
The company originally operated from small, cold and draughty premises in the back streets of Sheffield and in the early years its only employee was Fred. Because of the cold working conditions, John always wore a ‘flat’ cap (a woven cap with a peak, traditionally worn by the men of Yorkshire) whilst he worked alongside Fred, a habit that seems to have stuck and has become somewhat of a trademark for John. According to John, ‘In those days I had to think on my feet and we tended to exist from one job to the next, on a wing and a prayer you might say?’ As a consequence of this, whenever John has a major problem at work which needs resolving, he tends to put his cap on to help him think things through. The employees always know the ‘chips are down’ when they see John walking about in his cap.
The business grew steadily in the early years and about ten years ago John was able to move from the original site to a high street location in Sheffield, which provides a small showroom area, a workshop, staff room and storage. However, the product range has remained fairly constant and consists of three pieces of bedroom furniture, namely, a wardrobe, a chest of drawers and a dressing table. These are sold directly to customers either as separate items or as a bedroom suite.
The furniture is hand-made to a very high standard, authentically reproducing the Baxendale style which was popular in the late nineteenth century. This requires a high degree of skill in the construction and finishing stages of the production process. Although most of John’s time these days is spent in managing the business, he still keeps a watchful eye on activities and likes to help out if the men are over-stretched.
The furniture is made from mahogany supplied by Sheffield Timber Company, which imports high quality seasoned timber from South America. Although John could buy mahogany more cheaply elsewhere, he has dealt with this company for a long time and has confidence that the quality will be consistently good. The grain and colour of the wood is extremely important and, because the fronts of the furniture must match in grain and colour for each piece or suite of furniture, the company expects to have a high level of off-cuts and waste.
The unique finish to the furniture is produced through a highly-skilled hand-waxing process, using beeswax mixed to a special recipe created especially for High Street Reproduction Furniture by Charlesworth Specialist Waxes, who make and supply this recipe exclusively to the company. Mahogany and beeswax are the two main materials used to make the finished products.
Twelve people are now employed full time in the production process: ten are highly skilled cabinet makers and two are young apprentices. All the cabinet makers have been with the company for a long time and Fred is now the workshop supervisor. Fred is a bit set in his ways but, according to John, ‘He does a damned good job and he is a very good craftsman.’
Careful delivery of the furniture to the customer is very important and John is proud of the fact that the company receives very few complaints of furniture damaged in transit. The company sub-contracts this part of its activities to a well established company in the city of Sheffield. This company has always been reliable and has provided a high class service to customers carefully protecting the furniture in transit, setting the piece in its position for the customer and asking them to check it over. If the customer is not satisfied with the furniture, then it is returned to the workshop immediately. Of course, High Street Reproduction Furniture pay a premium price for this service, but it has proved of benefit to both the company and the customer, since problems can be resolved immediately.
The specialised nature of the production process and the specialised delivery service results in high product costs. However, John has found that the company’s products attract the type of customer who is willing to pay a premium price.
In the past year the company has invested £100 000 in the refurbishment of the offices and showroom and in the extension of the workshop and storage area to meet increasing demand for the company’s products. This was funded by a five year loan from the company’s bank. John believes that the increase in demand is mainly due to the showing of a television documentary of Sheffield which featured High Street Reproduction Furniture. The company appeared in a very favourable light as part of the new face of Sheffield emerging from the aftermath of the shrinking steel industry and the programme was given prime-time national coverage. In order to capitalise upon this free publicity, John also launched a national advertising campaign, using the documentary as a marketing ploy. However, the increased demand is putting pressure on the workforce and the lead time (the time between the customer ordering the furniture and the expected delivery date) is increasing.
Iris has been responsible for the paperwork ever since John started the business. Initially she worked part time whilst her children were young but has worked full time for the last five years. She has had the help of Cecil, who is a qualified accountant, for the last twelve months. Cecil spends two days each month on the company premises, assisting with costings and accounts.
Although, according to John, ‘Iris has always done a great job of sorting us out’, John feels that the company is getting too busy for her to cope. He has asked Cecil’s advice and Cecil has suggested that it is probably time to employ a full time management accountant, even though this will mean a reduction in his own services for the company.
Two months ago
John took Cecil’s advice and contacted Sheffield Hallam University to advertise the post on the undergraduate careers board. He felt that the post would suit a new graduate and that he could offer a fair salary whilst not placing too large a burden on the company’s overheads. A number of students expressed an interest and John interviewed three of these. He selected Mary, who is due to start with the company as soon as her final exams are completed.
Last week
Mary arrived at High Street Reproduction Furniture and settled in nicely. Wisely, John involved his in the selection process and the two seem to be getting on well together.
John received a profit statement from Cecil for the previous six months’ trading which itemised the performance of the company’s three products. This is attached as Exhibit 1. John was appalled to see that the dressing tables had made a loss. He has called a meeting for next week with Mary, Iris and Fred to discuss the situation. It could not be before then, as John had important appointments for the rest of the week. First, he had to visit the beeswax suppliers who are located in the Scottish Highlands, in order to renegotiate a contract for beeswax for the coming year; second, Sheffield Timber had telephoned and asked for an urgent meeting.
John warned Mary, Iris and Fred that at next week’s meeting he also wishes to discuss another matter with them. This concerns a potential new venture for the company. Much to his amazement, knowledge of the company has reached the American market through the screening of the television programme. One particular company has approached John with an enquiry for fifty chests for export to America. High Street Reproduction Furniture has never supplied bulk orders before and this customer Cecil’s Profit is only willing to pay 70 per cent of the normal selling price.
He has briefly discussed the problems with Mary who, being keen and enthusiastic in her first job, wishes to anticipate John’s information needs before the meeting takes place. She has been working overtime (after Iris has left for the day) to produce the information which is attached in Exhibit 2. She hopes to impress John at the meeting by being well prepared, but has only managed to obtain the raw data by the date of the meeting.
The meeting
It is obvious to everyone (except Mary) that John is worried. He makes a strange sight in his cleanly cut business suit and his flat cap! Mary is puzzled but she dares not to comment.
The first item on the agenda is the loss-making situation of the dressing tables. John comments, ‘I am appalled to find that the dressing tables are making a loss of £30 000. I can’t understand it as it has never happened before. It looks as though we shall have to stop making them and concentrate on the other products, unless any of you can offer an alternative solution’.
Iris says that, given Cecil’s , she has to agree with John about the dressing tables. Fred comments that he hasn’t had time to look at the as he has been ‘snowed under’ with work. Mary decides to keep her data to herself at this stage and offers to go away and `work on some numbers’.
The second item is the potential new venture. John passes copies of the American enquiry to all those present. ‘I intimated to you all last week that we might discuss this today. Do you have any views on whether we should accept it or not?’
Iris and Fred have discussed this item before the meeting. Fred tells John that the order is totally impossible, given that the workshop is getting very overstretched, and his agrees with him, adding, ‘How on earth do they expect us to make a profit at only 70 per cent of the normal selling price?’ Mary interrupts at this stage, having gained a little more confidence, and suggests to John that the enquiry might be worth looking into. She promises to provide further information by the end of the week. John decides that they should meet again on Friday, when Mary will have more information for them and hopefully Fred will have had time to give the issues greater consideration.
As they leave the meeting, Fred comments to Iris, ‘There’s something else worrying him besides what he’s telling us. I wonder what it can be?’
Question 1
Mary has decided to restate Cecil’s original profit statement by using the additional information she has collected and by employing a marginal costing approach.
Required:
(a) Prepare a new profit statement for Mary which clearly identifies both the contribution made by each product over the last six months and the overall profit.
(b) Prepare a profit statement which shows the potential situation if John stops production of the dressing tables and demand for the other products remains the same as that of the past six months. Assume that supplies of mahogany are unlimited.
(c) What other issues should John consider before making the decision to stop producing dressing tables?
(d) Prepare a statement which identifies the contribution which the dressing tables would have made in the last six months, had the mirror section not been sub-contracted out. Suggest other issues which might affect John’s decision to make the mirror sections in house once again.
Question 2
Utilising theoretical models and illustrating your answer with reference to the case study materials, discuss the decision situation regarding the American enquiry. Your discussion should also be supported by financial information which Mary would be likely to produce.
Question 3
Mary has suggested to John that the company would benefit from a management information system to aid him in planning and controlling the activities of the business and to assist in organisational decision making. Join is not sure what Mary means.
Required:
(a) Illustrate the types of planning and controlling activities that are likely to take place at High Street Reproduction Furniture Limited.
(b) Describe the types of information which might be useful.
(c) Suggest the likely sources of this information.
Question 4
At the urgent meeting last week, the Sheffield Timber Company informed John that supplies of mahogany from South America were in jeopardy. There had been a serious forest fire and much of the seasoned stock ready for export at the premises of the South American exporter had been wiped out. Sheffield Timber envisaged that there would be no more supplies of the type used by High Street Reproduction Furniture for the next six months. After that date, it seems that supplies can be restored to normal.
Required:
(a) Provide a production schedule which would maximise profits on the stocks of mahogany held by High Street Reproduction Furniture Limited and identify the forecast profit based on this production schedule.
You should assume that forecast demand from the normal customer base will be 10 per cent higher than the last six months’ and that the decision on the American enquiry is still unresolved. You should also assume that the mirror section of the dressing table will have to be produced by High Street Reproduction Furniture, since the current supplier does not hold any stock of the mahogany.
(b) Identify other issues which John would need to take account of, if this production schedule is undertaken.
(c) Compare the predicted profit in (a) above with the profit which John might have expected in the second half of the year, if the predicted demand for all three products had been met, the American contract had not been taken on and the mirror section of the dressing table had been produced by High Street Reproduction Furniture Limited. Comment on your findings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AIRPORT COMPLEX
Peter Nordgaard and Carsten Rohde, Copenhagen Business School
Background
Airport Complex was founded in Northern Europe in the late 1940s, and at the time it primarily served as a domestic airport. During the 1970s, flights to foreign destinations became an ever more vital activity for the airport. Today, the airport functions as a hub for a large portion of Nordic air traffic. The fact that the airport is a hub means that a great deal (approximately 35-40 per cent) of the airport’s passengers only touch down at the airport to catch another plane to a new destination. The airport remained state property until the mid-1990s when the airport was transformed into a private company, though the state held on to a substantial ownership share. Naturally, this generated an increased focus on the airport’s financial performance, which, however, boosted healthy profit margins. This also constituted the background for the continued extension of the airport, which today has placed itself as an airport entering the medium-size class of Nordic airports. The profit margins of the airport (see Exhibit 1) have suffered a decline over the past few years due to a combination of deteriorating income as a result of a fall in domestic traffic and costs that have not decreased correspondingly. At the same time, tax-free sales were abolished in 1999. This has contributed heavily to the decline in revenue.
Investors have consequently requested that the airport commit itself more to a focus on the overall profitability measured against the invested capital. Accordingly, the management has now decided that the efficiency of the airport should be subject to assessment. An airport is characterized by the fact that almost all costs are capacity costs. This is partly due to significant investment in buildings, runways and technology, but also to the large staff which handles the administration, operation and maintenance of the airport. The management suspects that the costs are not sufficiently adjusted to the income. In particular, the management finds it difficult to get an overview of how the various business areas utilize the airport’s resources and services and thus contribute to the bottomline of the airport.
Business areas
The revenue of Airport Complex derives from five different areas; take-off duties from air traffic, passenger fees, rental income from property, licensing income from the airport’s shopping centre and sundry income related to provision of services in the airport. Each of the five business areas is briefly outlined in the following discussion.
Take-off duties
Every time an aircraft departs from the airport, the airline pays a take-off duty. The duty is calculated on the basis of the type and weight of the aircraft. The income is related to the airline’s use of the airport’s control of the air space, runways, technical equipment such as runway lights, meteorological equipment, facilities on the gate for cleaning the aircraft, changing the air in the aircraft, fuelling, deicing, etc. After the aircraft has landed, it is guided to a gate. If the pilot does not know the airport, airport personnel will guide the aircraft to its gate. There are two types of gates: gates served by a building, i.e. the gate is connected to one of the airport’s terminals allowing passengers to leave the aircraft and enter the terminal directly, and remote gates where the aircraft is parked somewhere else in the airport area from where passengers are subsequently transported by buses to one of the airport terminals. Airlines are in broad consent that building-served gates service passengers far better than remote gates. Still, prices for building-served and remote gates are currently not differentiated, though the management has discussed this question. In addition to the take-off duties, a stopover duty is also payable depending on how long the aircraft stays in the gate. The first hour, however, is free.
Passenger fees
Take-off and stopover duties are complemented by a passenger fee per passenger on the aircraft. These three sources of income are collectively referred to as traffic income. Passenger fees depend solely on the number of passengers. The passengers’ points of departure and final destination are thus not relevant to the calculation of the fee. In principle, passenger fees relate to the passengers’ use of the airport area and services. This covers for instance buildings, transport to the terminal, service information, luggage -handling and passenger areas in the airport. A differentiation on the prices for domestic passengers and those travelling to destinations abroad was previously in force, but EU competition rules have now put an end to this differentiation. It has been discussed whether there should be different passenger fees for passengers who merely touch down at the airport, but never leave the aircraft (transit passengers) as opposed to passengers who only land at the airport in order to get on a new plane (transfer passengers), as these passengers do not use the airport’s landside areas. Every year, the relation between take-off duties and passenger duties is also discussed, as there are occasional imbalances in the case of small aircraft with many passengers and large aircraft with few passengers.
Rental income
Parts of the airport buildings are let out to airlines, travel agencies and shops. This revenue is collectively referred to as rental income. Prices are fixed as per square metre and vary with the use of the rented premises and its location within the airport area. Besides yielding a reasonable profit margin, rental income must in principle cover wear and tear, maintenance, use of common facilities such as toilets, lifts, etc.
Services
In connection with renting of buildings, supplementary services such as cleaning, security guard surveillance of rooms and shops, access to canteens and to the airport’s computer network are also offered. This income is collectively referred to as income from provision of services and is of course related to the airport’s costs in connection with these services. In recent years, this income has seen a rapid increase as a result of the airport seizing ever more opportunities for expanding the range of its services offered to the airport’s customers.
Licensing income
Finally, the airport generates income from licensing agreements entered into with shops and agencies that rent premises in the airport. In addition to rent for the premises, a duty is payable for running a shop within the airport’s area. The licensing agreements are based on the payment of a certain share of the turnover of shops and agencies to the airport. This income is collectively referred to as licensing income. In return, the airport takes on costs for decoration and marketing of the shopping centre such as signs, brochures, campaigns and information staff. Campaigns are budgeted separately, though there is no connection between the budgeting of campaigns and that of licensing agreements. The revenue of Airport Complex is shown in Exhibit 2.
Organization
The organization of Airport Complex is a result of a continuous development of the company. Originally, everything was collected under the traffic department, as there were no other business activities. As other commercial activities and letting out of premises were developed, the business area was isolated. Immediately after this separation, the need for a distinct building department was recognized, and the new department was established. In connection with the transfer from a state enterprise to a private undertaking, the administrative activities were collected under their own organizational area. 1 shows the organization plan of Airport Complex.
Financial management
The accounting department handles the company’s financial control. The book keeping department takes care of the day-to-day invoicing and bookkeeping of the company’s transactions and of the company’s financial accounting and tax accounting. The budget department is in charge of the co-ordination of budgets, whereas part budgets are prepared in the individual departments, which subsequently report their budget to the budget department. The budgets are entered into the airport’s financial control system, which at the same time ensures that the individual department is only able to view its own budgets. Subsequently, the total budget is subject to approval first by the management and then by the board. The exact budgeting is of course very different from one department to the other, depending on the functions of each department and the people responsible for the budget of the department. Nevertheless, some general comments can be made on the airport’s budget procedure. Staff budgets are normally prepared on the basis of a combination of price and amount per staff category. The remaining costs are predominantly provided for in the budget as a fixed amount. Depreciation is not allocated to the individual departments, but is estimated as a total amount by the budget department. The budget for traffic income is based on a forecast of the number of different types of aircraft. For each type of plane, the average weight and the average number of passengers are calculated and subsequently multiplied by the current take-off and passenger fees and the number of planes of that type. Rental income is estimated on the basis of the number of square metres relative to the average rent per square metre. Different prices per square metre are used depending on the type of building, use and location. The buildings may typically be divided into terminal buildings, office buildings, workshops, hangars, and warehouses. The income from provision of services is estimated on the basis of expected sales measured as an amount, and finally, the licensing income is estimated as expected turnover per shop type multiplied by the licence percentage.
Outline of departments
Strategic development
The department is situated in the administrative office building. It was established three years ago with the task of supporting the management and the board in their work with strategic development of the airport. The department employs 4-5 people who make analyses of the operation of the airport and perform benchmarking analysis of the company compared to other airports. The department typically works on 3-4 projects at a time. Examples of projects are:
- the profitability of future extension projects;
- analyses of traffic statistics and forecasts of future traffic development;
- strategies for the information structure in the airport, including the future extension of the network and the number of services implemented in the network.
Traffic department
The traffic department has the overall responsibility for the development of the airport’s traffic activities. The department handles traffic-related security and co-ordination with the aviation authorities, which are in charge of the actual control of the airspace, i.e. permission to take off and land. The traffic department is also the most wage consuming department since a major part of the airport staff is employed here.
Technical departments
The complicated technical structure of the airport such as traffic and passenger co-ordination systems, bridges from airport buildings to the aircraft, runway lights, etc. is handled by the technical department. The department has three sub-departments: elec-tricity, HVAC, and buses and service. The department takes care of these same functions for the rest of the airport.
Electricity department
The electricity department employs 125 employees on an annual basis. The department is divided between five area managers, each responsible for specific parts of the airport. However, the department seeks to maintain a certain degree of job rotation to ensure that the employees acquire a high level of knowledge within all job functions in the department. Apart from vehicles, the department is responsible for a great deal of technical equipment, cranes, lifts, etc. The tasks in the department vary from mounting and repairing of control and ‘marking equipment in connection with the runways, to maintenance of the airport’s technical equipment and more ordinary electricity work in connection with the airport buildings. Work in connection with the airport buildings is co-ordinated by the building department, apart from work in connection with the airport’s rented property, which is co-ordinated by the rental department. The electricity department is naturally also involved in the implementation of the airport’s network, which is performed on the basis of requirements from the IT department.
HVAC department
The HVAC department employs approximately 150 people annually, and the department is divided on the basis of geographical areas in the airport. The division is as follows: airside undeveloped areas, airside developed areas, terminals, and finally, other landside buildings.
Each area has its own head of department. Like the electricity department, the HVAC
department has at its disposal a large amount of technical equipment used in its daily work.
The major part of the tasks of the department is co-ordinated with the building department.
Bus and service department
The bus and-service department is responsible for transporting the passengers to the terminals and for servicing the runways and other outdoor areas. The service primarily consists of maintenance of the green areas of the airport and of snow removal, and the service department employs 25 people. The bus department employs approximately 50 chauffeurs who are responsible mainly for transporting the passengers to and from the aircraft, but who sometimes also function as guides for aircraft whose pilots do not know the airport.
Marketing department
The marketing department is in charge of conducting negotiations with both airlines that
already use the airport and airlines that wish to use the airport in the future. This applies to passenger traffic as well as freight traffic. The department employs six people on average.
Security department
Traditionally, airports are always associated with large security risks. Therefore, security is an important work area. The security department is thus responsible for monitoring the security in the airport. The main tasks of the security department are outdoor area surveillance, indoor security check of passengers and screening of luggage, and security service in connection with the airport’s own premises and rented premises. This includes security checking of all passengers and screening of luggage. If the airport uses external artisans in connection with the activities of the building department or the technical department, these will be constantly monitored by a security guard. Furthermore, the security personnel are responsible for security surveillance of rented premises.
On an annual basis, the area surveillance function employs 30 people who always work together in teams of two. Each team has at its disposal a cross-country vehicle, which enables them to turn out quickly to any place in the airport. They communicate with the central security function on a current basis via the internal communication system, which also includes GPS surveillance of all vehicles. The system has just recently been fully implemented and is controlled by the IT department. Apart from a meeting room in the terminal building, the department has at its disposal three smaller buildings located in opposite parts of the airport. There are always three teams working at the same time and their activities are co-ordinated by the central security service, which is manned by the security manager in charge and an assistant. The indoor security check function is manned in relation to the expected number of passengers during the day and employs approximately 70 people on an annual basis. The airport is divided into a landside and an airside area. The airside area can only be accessed through the security lock with a valid ticket and after screening of hand luggage and scanning of the passenger. The landside area, on the other hand, is accessible to everybody. There are three security locks in the airport that are manned according to the expected passenger flow during the day. Each lock is manned by three security employees who are in constant radio contact with the security manager in charge. Apart from this, two to three security employees are constantly patrolling the airside of the airport as well as the landside terminal areas. Moreover, both the indoor and the outdoor security personnel also function as security service in connection with the rented premises in the airport. The most cost-intensive item in the security department is therefore staff costs and staff-related costs such as uniforms and security courses. Furthermore, the department has at its disposal considerable assets such as cars, and security equipment such as scanners, X-ray equipment, etc.
Business department
The main activities in the business department are renting of areas as well as buildings and licensing agreements with retailers, restaurants, car hire firms, etc. The eight employees in the rental department administer the rental agreements and are responsible for finding suitable premises for this purpose. Extensions, renovation and maintenance of the rented premises are co-ordinated with the technical department and the building department.
The 12 employees in the licensing department draw up agreements on how to carry on business in the airport areas, including agreements on the turnover-related fees to be paid for this. The promotion of the shopping centre is planned and carried out by the business department. The extension of the shopping centre is co-ordinated with the project department.
Administrative department
This department handles the overall day-to-day administration in connection with in-voicing, bookkeeping and cash. Furthermore, the IT department, which is part of the administrative department, is responsible for the airport’s network which is used by the airport’s own departments as well as other users of the airport. This applies to both networks for administrative use, for traffic monitoring and for signboards in the airport. Moreover, access to the airport’s network and support in this connection are let out. The administrative department employs 120 people on an annual basis of which approximately half are employed in the IT department.
Building department
The project department is responsible for the continuous extension of the airport, i.e. the strategic planning in collaboration with the management as well as the actual project management. Approximately 20 people are employed on an annual basis to perform these tasks. The operative part is placed with the maintenance department, which is responsible for the continuous maintenance of both the airport area and the buildings, and which employs approximately 80 people. Exemptions are HVAC and technical appliances, which are the responsibility of the technical department under the traffic unit.
Requirements
1. Comment on the financial management of Airport Complex.
2. Discuss the problems and opportunities connected with assessing the profitability of the different services offered by the airport to the airlines and their customers. You are, among other things, asked to consider whether you would recommend the use of Full Cost, Activity Based Costing or Contribution Margin Concept to the company and state the reasons for your recommendation.
3. Draw up a reasoned suggestion for how an assessment of the productivity of selected departments can be organized, including an indication of the financial and non-financial measures that can be used.
4. Discuss the methods used by Airport Complex for budgeting revenue and costs and give reasoned suggestions for improvements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements required to be approved by shareholders
The management of an entity completes draft financial statements for the year to 31 December 2012 on 28 February 2013. On 17 March 2013, the board of directors reviews the financial statements and authorises them for issue. The entity announces its profit and certain other financial information on 18 March 2013. The financial statements are made available to shareholders and others on 1 April 2013. The shareholders approve the financial statements at their annual meeting on 11 May 2013 and the approved financial statements are filed with a regulatory body on 13 May 2013.
The financial statements are authorised for issue on 17 March 2013 (date of board authorisation for issue).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements required to be approved by supervisory board
On 17 March 2013, the management of an entity authorises for issue to its supervisory board financial statements for the year to 31 December 2012. The supervisory board consists solely of non-executives and may include representatives of employees and other outside interests. The supervisory board approves the financial statements on 25 March 2013. The financial statements are available to shareholders and others on 1 April 2013. The shareholders approve the financial statements at their annual meeting on 11 May 2013 and the financial statements are filed with a regulatory body on 13 May 2013.
The financial statements are authorised for issue on 17 March 2013 (date of management authorisation for issue to the supervisory board).
An uncommon, but possible, situation that may occur is that the financial statements are changed after they are authorised for issue to the supervisory board. The following example illustrates such a situation.
Example 36.3: Financial statements required to be approved by supervisory board – changes are made by supervisory board
Same facts as in Example 36.2 above, except that the supervisory board reviews the financial statements on 25 March 2013 and proposes changes to certain note disclosures. The management of the entity incorporates the suggested changes and re-authorises those financial statements for issue to the supervisory board on 27 March 2013. The supervisory board then approves the financial statements on 30 March 2013.
The financial statements are authorised for issue on 27 March 2013 (date of management re-authorisation for issue to the supervisory board).
A fourth example illustrates when the entity releases preliminary information, but not complete financial statements, before the date of the authorisation for issue.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Release of financial information before date of authorisation for issue
The management of an entity completes the primary financial statements (e.g. balance sheet, statement of comprehensive income, cash flow statement) for the year to 31 December 2012 on 21 January 2013, but has not yet completed the explanatory notes. On 26 January 2013, the board of directors (which includes management and non-executives) reviews the primary financial statements and authorises them for public media release. The entity announces its profit and certain other financial information on 28 January 2013. On 11 February 2013, management issues the financial statements (with full explanatory notes) to the board of directors, which approves the financial statements for filing on 18 February 2013. The entity files the financial statements with a regulatory body on 21 February 2013.
The financial statements are authorised for issue on 18 February 2013 (date the board of directors, approves the financial statements for filing).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bayer AG (2011)
COMBINED MANAGEMENT REPORT [extract]
7. Corporate Governance Report [extract]
7.1 Declaration on Corporate Governance [extract]
SUPERVISORY BOARD: OVERSIGHT AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS
The role of the 20-member Supervisory Board is to oversee and advise the Board of Management. Under the German Codetermination Act, half the members of the Supervisory Board are elected by the stockholders, and half by the company’s employees. The Supervisory Board is directly involved in decisions on matters of fundamental importance to the company, regularly conferring with the Board of Management on the company’s strategic alignment and the implementation status of the business strategy.
The Chairman of the Supervisory Board coordinates its work and presides over the meetings. Through regular discussions with the Board of Management, the Supervisory Board is kept constantly informed of business policy, corporate planning and strategy. The Supervisory Board approves the annual budget and financial framework. It also approves the financial statements of Bayer AG and the consolidated financial statements of the Bayer Group, along with the combined management report, taking into account the reports by the auditor.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reed Elsevier (2007)
Notes to the combined financial statements [extract]
36. Post balance sheet events [extract]
On 18 January 2008, Reed Elsevier PLC paid a special distribution of 82.0p per ordinary share and Reed Elsevier NV paid a special distribution of €1.767 per ordinary share, from the net proceeds of the disposal of Harcourt Education. The aggregate special distribution, announced on 12 December 2007, of 2,013m was recognised when paid in January 2008.
The special distributions were accompanied by a consolidation of the ordinary share capital of Reed Elsevier PLC and Reed Elsevier NV on the basis of 58 new ordinary shares for every 67 existing ordinary shares, being the ratio of the aggregate special distribution to the combined market capitalisation of Reed Elsevier PLC and Reed Elsevier NV (excluding the 5.8% indirect equity interest in Reed Elsevier NV held by Reed Elsevier PLC) as at the date of the announcement of the special distributions.
On 30 January 2008 the sale of Harcourt Assessment and the remaining Harcourt International businesses, first announced in May 2007, completed following receipt of regulatory clearance in the United States. Proceeds received on disposal were 330m.
On 20 February 2008, Reed Elsevier approved a plan to divest Reed Business Information. In the year to 31 December 2007, Reed Business Information reported revenues of 906m, operating profits of 89m and adjusted operating profits of 119m. On 20 February 2008, Reed Elsevier entered into a definitive merger agreement with ChoicePoint, Inc to acquire the company for cash. Taking into account ChoicePoint’s estimated net debt of $0.6bn, the total value of the transaction is $4.1bn. The ChoicePoint board will convene a meeting of ChoicePoint shareholders to approve the merger and is unanimous in its recommendation of the merger. The merger is subject to customary regulatory approvals and is expected to be completed later in the year. The transaction will be financed initially through committed new bank facilities, to be later refinanced through the issuance of term debt.
ChoicePoint provides unique information and analytics to support underwriting decisions within the property and casualty insurance sector; screening and authentication services for employment, real estate leasing and customer enrolment; and public information solutions primarily to banking, professional services and government customers. In 2007 ChoicePoint reported revenues of 491m, operating income (before goodwill and asset write downs) of 112m and earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation of 144m.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Northern Rock (2007)
Notes to the accounts [extract]
45. Events after the balance sheet date [extract]
On 10 January 2008, the Company sold its Lifetime mortgage portfolio to JP Morgan at a premium of 2.25% to the balance sheet value. Proceeds of the sale amounted to approximately 2.2bn and were used to reduce the level of the Bank of England facility.
On 22 February 2008 the entire share capital of the Company was transferred to the Treasury Solicitor in accordance with The Northern Rock plc Transfer Order 2008 taking Northern Rock into a period of temporary public ownership. Details of the impact of temporary public ownership are given throughout the Annual Report and Accounts as it affects the Company’s operations and financial disclosures.
On 29 March 2008 the Bank of England and HM Treasury agreed to extend the existing on demand loan facilities as set out in note 28 above to 30 April 2008. On 29 March 2008 the Bank of England and HM Treasury confirmed that they intend to make arrangements to provide an additional committed secured revolving loan reserve facility to the Company in addition to the existing facilities as set out in note 28 above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Imperial Innovations (2008)
Notes to the Financial Statements [extract]
31. Post Balance Sheet Events [extract]
Since the year end and as at 7 October 2008, the latest practical date prior to the approval of the accounts, the value of the Group’s most significant asset Ceres Power Holdings plc (CWR.L) has reduced by 2.9 million (32%). This has had the effects of reducing investments by 2.9 million and of reducing the provision for liabilities and charges by 1.4m million since the year end. This is a non-adjusted post balance sheet event since it does not relate to conditions existing at the balance sheet date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
GlaxoSmithKline (2007)
Notes to the financial statements [extract]
40. Post balance sheet events [extract]
On 25th January 2008, the FDA issued a not approvable letter in respect of Merck’s NDA seeking approval for over-the-counter Mevacor. This triggered repayment to GSK of the upfront fee GSK had paid to Merck in 2007 for the US OTC rights.
On 18th February 2008, GSK’s long-term Standard and Poor’s debt rating was revised from AA with negative outlook to A+ stable. Standard and Poor’s also revised GSK’s short-term rating for paper issued under the Group’s commercial paper programme from A-1+ to A-1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Close members of the family holding investments
Mr X is the spouse of Mrs X. Mr X has an investment in Entity A and Mrs X has an investment in Entity B.
For Entity A”s financial statements, if Mr X controls or jointly controls Entity A, Entity B is related to Entity A when Mrs X has control, joint control or significant influence over Entity B.
For Entity B”s financial statements, if Mr X controls or jointly controls Entity A, Entity A is related to Entity B when Mrs X has control, joint control or significant influence over Entity B.
If Mr X has significant influence (but not control or joint control) over Entity A and Mrs X has significant influence (but not control or joint control) over Entity B, Entities A and B are not related to each other (see 2.3 below).
If Mr X is a member of the key management personnel of Entity A and Mrs X is a member of the key management personnel of Entity B, Entities A and B are not related to each other. See 2.3 below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Associates of the reporting entity”s group that are related parties
In Parent”s separate financial statements, Associates 1, 2 and 3 are related parties. For Parent”s consolidated financial statements, Associates 1, 2 and 3 are related to the group.
For Subsidiary A”s financial statements, Associates 1, 2 and 3 are related parties. For Subsidiary B”s consolidated or separate financial statements, Associates 1, 2 and 3 are related parties. For Subsidiary C”s financial statements, Associates 1, 2 and 3 are related parties.
For the financial statements of Associates 1, 2 and 3, Parent and Subsidiaries A, B and C are related parties. Associates 1, 2 and 3 are not related to each other.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Persons who control an entity and are a member of the key management personnel of another entity
Mrs X has a 100% investment in Entity A and is a member of the key management personnel of Entity S. Entity M has a 100% investment in Entity S.
For Entity S”s financial statements, Entity A is related to Entity S because Mrs X controls Entity A and is a member of the key management personnel of Entity S.
For Entity S”s financial statements, Entity A is also related to Entity S if Mrs X is a member of the key management personnel of Entity M and not of Entity S.
This outcome would be the same if Mrs X has joint control over Entity A (if Mrs X only had significant influence over Entity A and not control or joint control then Entities A and S would not be related parties).
For Entity A”s financial statements, Entity S is related to Entity A because Mrs X controls A and is a member of Entity S”s key management personnel. This outcome would be the same if Mrs X has joint control over Entity A and will also be the same if Mrs X is a member of the key management personnel of Entity M and not Entity S (see 2.2.8 below).
For Entity M”s consolidated financial statements, Entity A is a related party of the Group if Mrs X is a member of the key management personnel of the Group. If Mrs X is only a member of the key management personnel of Entity S and not the Group then Entity A is not a related party in the separate or consolidated financial statements of Entity M.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BP p.l.c. (2011)
Notes on financial statements [extract]
42 Remuneration of directors and senior management [extract]
Remuneration of directors and senior management
Senior management, in addition to executive and non-executive directors, includes other senior managers who are members of the executive management team.
Short-term employee benefits
In addition to fees paid to the non-executive chairman and non-executive directors, these amounts comprise, for executive directors and senior managers, salary and benefits earned during the year, plus cash bonuses awarded for the year. Deferred annual bonus awards, to be settled in shares, are included in share-based payments. Short-term employee benefits includes compensation for loss of office of $9 million (2010 $3 million and 2009 $6 million).
Post-retirement benefits
The amounts represent the estimated cost to the group of providing defined benefit pensions and other post-retirement benefits to senior management in respect of the current year of service measured in accordance with IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits’.
Share-based payments
This is the cost to the group of senior management”s participation in share-based payment plans, as measured by the fair value of options and shares granted accounted for in accordance with IFRS 2 ‘Share-based Payments’. The main plans in which senior management have participated are the EDIP, DAB and RSP. For details of these plans refer to Note 40.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (2011)
Notes on the consolidated accounts [extract]
41. Related parties [extract]
UK Government
On 1 December 2008, the UK Government through HM Treasury became the ultimate controlling party of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc. The UK Government”s shareholding is managed by UK Financial Investments Limited, a company wholly owned by the UK Government. As a result, the UK Government and UK Government controlled bodies became related parties of the Group.
The Group enters into transactions with many of these bodies on an arm”s length basis. The principal transactions during 2011, 2010 and 2009 were: the Asset Protection Scheme, Bank of England facilities and the issue of debt guaranteed by the UK Government discussed below. In addition, the redemption of non-cumulative sterling preference shares and the placing and open offer in April 2009 was underwritten by HM Treasury and, in December 2009, B shares were issued to HM Treasury and a contingent capital agreement concluded with HM Treasury (see Note 27). Other transactions include the payment of: taxes principally UK corporation tax (page 338) and value added tax; national insurance contributions; local authority rates; and regulatory fees and levies (including the bank levy (page 329) and FSCS levies (page 401)); together with banking transactions such as loans and deposits undertaken in the normal course of banker-customer relationships.
….
Government credit and asset-backed securities guarantee schemes
These schemes guarantee eligible debt issued by qualifying institutions for a fee. The fee, payable to HM Treasury is based on a per annum rate of 25 (asset-backed securities guarantee scheme) and 50 (credit guarantee scheme) basis points plus 100% of the institution”s median five-year credit default swap spread during the twelve months to 1 July 2008. The asset-backed securities scheme closed to new issuance on 31 December 2009 and the credit guarantee scheme on 28 February 2010.
At 31 December 2011, the Group had issued debt guaranteed by the Government totalling 21.3 billion (2010 – 41.5 billion; 2009 – 51.5 billion).
The following are other illustrations of the type of disclosure required for transactions with government-related entities based on examples in the standard:
Example 37.10: Individually significant transaction carried out on non-market terms
On 15 January 2010 the company sold a 10 hectare piece of land to an entity controlled by Government G for €5,000,000. On 31 December 2010 a plot of land in a similar location, of similar size and with similar characteristics, was sold for €3,000,000. There had not been any appreciation or depreciation of the land in the intervening period. See Note X for disclosure of government assistance as required by IAS 20.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Collectively significant transactions
The company”s significant transactions with Government G and other entities controlled, jointly controlled or significantly influenced by Government G are a large portion of its sales of goods and purchases of raw materials [alternatively – about 50% of its sales of goods and services and about 35% of its purchases of raw materials].
The company also benefits from guarantees by Government G of the company”s bank borrowing. See Note X of the financial statements for disclosure of government assistance as required by IAS 20.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The production director of a company is concerned with the problem of measuring the efficiency of process managers. In the production department there are six processes and all products processed pass through a combination of these processes. One specific area of investigation is the measurement of output values which involves the use of transfer prices.
You have been asked by the production director to tabulate the advantages and disadvantages of using each of the following systems of transfer pricing as related to process costing:
(a) absorption cost;
(b) marginal cost;
(c) cost plus profit;
(d) standard cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion of transfer price where there is an external market for the intermediate product
Fabri Division is part of the Multo Group. Fabri Division produces a single product for which it has an external market which utilizes 70% of its production capacity. Gini Division, which is also part of the Multo Group requires units of the product available from Fabri Division which it
will then convert and sell to an external customer. Gini Division’s requirements are equal to 50% of Fabri Division’s production capacity. Gini Division has a potential source of supply from outside the Multo Group. It is not yets knownif this source is willing to supply on the basis of (i) only supplying all of Gini Division’s requirements or (ii) supplying any part of Gini Division’s requirements as requested.
(a) Discuss the transfer pricing method by which Fabri Division should offer to transfer its product to Gini Division in order that group profit maximization is likely to follow.
You may illustrate your answer with of your choice.
(b) Explain ways in which (i) the degree of divisional autonomy allowed and (ii) the divisional performance measure in use by Multo Group may affect the transfer pricing policy of Fabri Division.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) Spiro Division is part of a vertically integrated group of divisions allocated in one country. All divisions sell externally and also transfer goods to other divisions within the group. Spiro Division performance is measured using profit before tax as a performance measure.
(i) Prepare an outline statement which shows the costs and revenue elements which should be included in the calculation of divisional profit before tax.
(ii) The degree of autonomy which is allowed to divisions may affect the absolute value of profit reported.
Discuss the statement in relation to Spiro Division.
(b) Discuss the pricing basis on which divisions should offer to transfer goods in order that corporate profit maximising decisions should take place.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) The transfer pricing method used for the transfer of an intermediate product between two divisions in a group has been agreed at standard cost plus 30% profit markup. The transfer price may be altered after taking into consideration the planning and operational variance analysis at the transferor division.
Discuss the acceptability of this transfer pricing method to the transferor and transferee divisions.
(b) Division A has an external market for product
X which fully utilises its production capacity.
Explain the circumstances in which division A should be willing to transfer product X to division B of the same group at a price which is less than the existing market price.
(c) An intermediate product which is converted in divisions L, M and N of a group is available in limited quantities from other divisions within the group and from an external source. The total available quantity of the intermediate product is insufficient to satisfy demand.
Explain the procedure which should lead to a transfer pricing and deployment policy resulting in group profit maximisation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P plc is a multinational conglomerate company with manufacturing divisions, trading in numerous countries across various continents. Trade takes place between a number of the divisions in different countries, with partly-completed products being transferred between them. Where a transfer takes place between divisions trading in different countries, it is the policy of the Board of P plc to determine centrally the appropriate transfer price without reference to the divisional managers concerned. The Board of P plc justifies this policy to divisional managers on the grounds that its objective is to maximise the conglomerate’s post-tax profits and that the global position can be monitored effectively only from the Head Office.
Requirements:
(a) Explain and critically appraise the possible reasoning behind P plc’s policy of centrally determining transfer prices for goods traded between divisions operating in different countries.
(b) Discuss the ethical implications of P plc’s policy of imposing transfer prices on its over-seas divisions in order to maximise post-tax profits.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparison of divisional and group profits using different transfer prices
B Limited, producing a range of minerals, is organized into two trading groups: one handles wholesale business and the other sales to retailers.
One of its products is a moulding clay. The wholesale group extracts the clay and sells it to external wholesale customers as well as to the retail group. The production capacity is 2000 tonnes per month but at present sales are limited to 1000 tonnes wholesale and 600 tonnes retail.
The transfer price was agreed at £200 per tonne in line with the external wholesale trade price at 1 July, which was the beginning of the budget year. As from 1 December, however, competitive pressure has forced the wholesale trade price down to £180 per tonne. The members of the retail group contend that the transfer price to them should be the same as for outside customers. The wholesale group refute the argument on the basis that the original budget established the price for the whole budget year.
The retail group produces 100 bags of refined clay from each tonne of moulding clay which it sells at £4 a bag. It would sell a further 40 000 bags if the retail trade price were reduced to £3.20 a bag.
Other data relevant to the operation are:
|
|
Wholesale
|
Retail
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Variable cost per tonne
|
70
|
60
|
|
Fixed cost per month
|
100000
|
40000
|
You are required to
- prepare estimated profit statements for the month of December for each group and for B Limited as a whole based on transfer prices of £200 per tonne and of £180 per tonne when producing at:
(i) 80% capacity
(ii) 100% capacity utilizing the extra sales to supply the retail trade;
(b) comment on the results achieved under (a) and the effect of the change in the transfer price;
(c) propose an alternative transfer price for the retail sales which would provide greater incentive for increasing sales, detailing any problems that might be encountered.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating the effects of a transfer pricing system on divisional and company profits
Division A of a large divisionalized organization manufactures a single standardized product. Some of the output is sold externally whilst the remainder is transferred to Division B where it is a subassembly in the manufacture of that division’s product. The unit costs of Division A’s product are as follows:
|
|
(£)
|
|
Direct material
|
4
|
|
Direct labour
|
2
|
|
Direct expense
|
2
|
|
Variable manufacturing overheads
|
2
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overheads
|
4
|
|
Selling and packing expense – variable
|
1
|
|
|
15
|
Annually 10 000 units of the product are sold externally at the standard price of £30.
In addition to the external sales, 5000 units are transferred annually to Division B at an internal transfer charge of £29 per unit. This transfer price is obtained by deducting variable selling and packing expense from the external price since this expense is not incurred for internal transfers.
Division B incorporates the transferred-in goods into a more advanced product.-The unit costs of this product are as follows:
|
|
(£)
|
|
Transferred-in item (from Division A)
|
29
|
|
Direct material and components
|
23
|
|
Direct labour
|
3
|
|
Variable overheads
|
12
|
|
Fixed overheads
|
12
|
|
Selling and packing expense-
|
1
|
|
variable
|
80
|
Division B’s manager disagrees with the basis used to set the transfer price. He argues that the transfers should be made at variable cost plus an agreed (minimal) mark-up since he claims that his division is taking output that Division A would be unable to sell at the price of £30.
Partly because of this disagreement, a study of the relationship between selling price and demand has recently been made for each division by the company’s sales director. The resulting report contains the following table:
Customer demand at various selling prices:
|
Division A
|
|
|
|
|
Selling price
|
£20
|
£30
|
£40
|
|
Demand
|
15000
|
10000
|
5000
|
|
Division B
|
|
|
|
|
Selling price
|
£80
|
£90
|
£100
|
|
Demand
|
7200
|
5000
|
2800
|
The manager of Division B claims that this study supports his case. He suggests that a transfer price of £12 would give Division A a reasonable contribution to its fixed overheads while allowing Division B to earn a reasonable profit. He also believes that it would lead to an increase of output and an improvement in the overall level of company profits.
You are required:
(a) to calculate the effect that the transfer pricing system has had on the company’s profits, and
(b) to establish the likely effect on profits of adopting the suggestion by the manager of Division B of a transfer price of £12.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Resolving a transfer price convict
Alton division (A) and Birmingham division (B) are two manufacturing divisions of Conglom plc. Both of these divisions make a single standardized product; A makes product I and B makes product J. Every unit of J requires one unit of I. The required input of I is normally purchased from division A but sometimes it is purchased from an outside source.
The following table gives details of selling price and cost for each product:
|
|
Product I
|
Product J
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Established selling price
|
30
|
50
|
|
Variable costs
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
8
|
5
|
|
Transfers from A
|
|
30
|
|
Direct labour
|
5
|
3
|
|
Variable overhead
|
2
|
2
|
|
|
15
|
40
|
|
Divisional fixed cost (per annum)
|
£500000
|
£225000
|
|
Annual outside demand with current selling prices (units)
|
100000
|
25000
|
|
Capacity of plant (units)
|
130000
|
30000
|
|
Investment in division
|
£6625000
|
£1250000
|
Division B is currently achieving a rate of return well below the target set by the central office. Its manager blames this situation on the high transfer price of product I. Division A charges division B for the transfers of I at the outside supply price of £30. The manager of division A claims that this is appropriate since this is the price ‘determined by market forces’. The manager of B has consistently argued that intra group transfers should be charged at a lower price based on the costs of the producing division plus a ‘reasonable’ mark-up.
The board of Conglom plc is concerned about B’s low rate of return and the divisional manager has been asked to submit proposals for improving the situation. The board has now received a report from B’s manager in which he asks the board to intervene to reduce the transfer price charged for product I. The manager of B also informs the board that he is considering the possibility of opening a branch office in rented premises in a nearby town, which should enlarge the market for product J by 5000 units per year at the existing price. He estimates that the branch office establishment costs would be £50 000 per annum.
You have been asked to write a report advising the board on the response that it should make to the plans and proposals put forward by the manager of division B. Incorporate in your report a calculation of the rates of return currently being earned on the capital employed by each division and the changes to these that should follow from an implementation of any proposals that you would recommend.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calton Ltd make and sell a single product. The existing product unit specifications are as follows:
|
Direct material X:
|
8 sq. metres at £4 per sq. metre
|
|
Machine time:
|
0.6 running hours
|
|
Machine cost per gross hour:
|
£40
|
|
Selling price:
|
£100
|
|
|
|
Calton Ltd require to fulfil orders for 5000 product units per period. There are no stocks of product units at the beginning or end of the period under review. The stock level of material X remains unchanged throughout the period.
The following additional information affects the costs and revenues:
1. 5% of incoming material from suppliers is scrapped due to poor receipt and storage organization.
2. 4% of material X input to the machine process is wasted due to processing problems.
3. Inspection and storage of material X costs £0.10 pence per sq. metre purchased.
4. Inspection during the production cycle, calibration checks on inspection equipment, vendor rating and other checks cost £25 000 per period.
5. Production quantity is increased to allow for the downgrading of 12.5% of product units at the final inspection stage. Downgraded units are sold as ‘second quality’ units at a discount of 30% on the standard selling price.
6. Production quantity is increased to allow for returns from customers which are replaced free of charge. Returns are due to specification failure and account for 5% of units initially delivered to customers. Replacement units incur a delivery cost of £8 per unit. 80% of the returns from customers are rectified using 0.2 hours of machine running time per unit and are re-sold as ‘third quality’ products at a discount of 50% on the standard selling price. The remaining returned units are sold as scrap for £5 per unit.
7. Product liability and other claims by customers is estimated at 3% of sales revenue from standard product sales.
8. Machine idle time is 20% of gross machine hours used (i.e. running hours = 80% of gross hours).
9. Sundry costs of administration, selling and distribution total £60 000 per period.
10. Calton Ltd is aware of the problem of excess costs and currently spends £20 000 per period in efforts to prevent a number of such problems from occurring.
Calton Ltd is planning a quality management programme which will increase its excess cost prevention expenditure from £20 000 to £60 000 per period. It is estimated that this will have the following impact:
1.A reduction in stores losses of material X to 3% of incoming material.
2. A reduction in the downgrading of product units at inspection to 7.5% of units inspected.
3. A reduction in material X losses in process to 2.5% of input to the machine process.
4. A reduction in returns of products from customers to 2.5% of units delivered.
5. A reduction in machine idle time to 12.5% of gross hours used.
6. A reduction in product liability and other claims to 1% of sales revenue from standard product sales.
7. A reduction in inspection, calibration, vendor rating and other checks by 40% of the existing .
8. A reduction in sundry administration, selling and distribution costs by 10% of the existing .
9. A reduction in machine running time required per product unit to 0.5 hours.
Required:
(a) Prepare summaries showing the calculation of (i) total production units (pre-inspection), (ii) purchases of material X (sq. metres), (iii) gross machine hours. In each case the are required for the situation both before and after the implementation of the additional quality management programme, in order that the orders for 5000 product units may be fulfilled.
(b) Prepare profit and loss accounts for Calton Ltd for the period showing the profit earned both before and after the implementation of the additional quality management programme
(c) Comment on the relevance of a quality management programme and explain the meaning of the terms internal failure costs, external failure costs, appraisal costs and prevention costs giving examples for each, taken where possible from the information in the question.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
New techniques are often described as contributing to cost reduction, but when cost reduction is necessary it is not obvious that such new approaches are used in preference to more established approaches. Three examples are:
|
new technique
|
compared with
|
established approach
|
|
(a)
|
benchmarking
|
interfirm comparison
|
|
(b)
|
activity based budgeting
|
zero base budgeting
|
|
(c)
|
target costing
|
continuous cost improvement
|
You are required, for two of the three newer techniques mentioned above:
- to explain its objectives
- to explain its workings
- to differentiate it from the related approach identified
- to explain how it would contribute to a cost reduction programme.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kaplan (`Relevance Regained’, Management Accounting, September 1988) states the view that the ‘time-honoured traditions of cost accounting’ are ‘irrelevant, misleading and wrong’. Variance analysis, product costing and operational control are cited as examples of areas where information provided by management accountants along traditional lines could well fail to meet today’s needs of management in industry.
You are required to
(a) state what you consider to be the main requirements for effective operational control and product costing in modem industry;
(b) identify which ‘traditional cost accounting’ methods in the areas quoted in (a) may be considered to be failing to supply the appropriate information to management, and explain why;
(c) recommend changes to the ‘traditional cost accounting’ methods and information which would serve to meet the problems identified in (b).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC is still at a relatively early stage of its development and its implications for process control may in the final analysis be more finportant than its product costing implications. It is a good time for every organisation to consider whether or not ABC is appropriate to its particular circumstances.
J Ines & F Mitchell, Activity Based Costing, A Review with Case Studies, 1990.
You are required:
(a) to contrast the feature of organisations which would benefit from ABC with those which would not;
(b) to explain in what ways ABC may be used to manage costs, and the limitations of these approaches;
(c) to explain and to discuss the use of target costing to control product costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company is proposing the introduction of an activity-based costing (ABC) system as a basis for much of its management accounting information.
(a) Briefly describe how ABC is different from a traditional absorption approach to costing and explain why it was developed.
(b) Discuss the advantages and limitations of this `approach based on activities’ for management accounting information in the context of
(i) preparing plans and budgets
(ii) monitoring and controlling operations
(iii) decision-making, for example, product deletion decisions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Japanese companies that have used just-in-time (JIT) for five or more years are reporting close to a 30% increase in labour productivity, a 60% reduction in inventories, a 90% reduction in quality rejection rates, and a 15% reduction in necessary plant space. However, implementing a just-in-time system does not occur overnight. It took Toyota over twenty years to develop its system and realize significant benefits from it.’ Source: Sumer C. Aggrawal, Harvard Business Review (9/85)
Requirements:
(a) Explain how the benefits claimed for JIT in the above quotation are achieved and why it takes so long to achieve those benefits.
(b) Explain how management information systems in general (and management accounting systems in particular) should be developed in order to facilitate and make best use of JIT.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Within a diversified group, one division, which operates many similar branches in a service industry, has used internal benchmarking and regards it as very useful.
Group central management is now considering the wider use of benchmarking.
Requirement:
(a) Explain the aims, operation, and limitations of internal benchmarking, and explain how external benchmarking differs in these respects.
(b) A multinational group wishes to internally benchmark the production of identical components made in several plants in different countries. Investments have been made with some plants in installing new Advanced Manufacturing Technology (AMT) and supporting this with manufacturing management systems such as Just in Time (HT) and Total Quality Management (TQM). Preliminary comparisons suggest that the standard cost in plants using new technology is no lower than that in plants using older technology.
Requirement:
Explain possible reasons for the similar standard costs in plants with differing technology. Recommend appropriate benchmarking measures, recognising that total standard costs may not provide the most useful measurement of performance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are Financial Controller of a medium-sized engineering business. This business was family-owned and managed for many years but has recently been acquired by a large group to become its Engineering Division.
The first meeting of the management board with the newly appointed Divisional Managing Director has not gone well.
- He commented on the results of the division:
- Sales and profits were well below budget for the month and cumulatively for the year, and the forecast for the rest of the year suggested no improvement.
- Working capital was well over budget.
Even if budget were achieved the return on capital employed was well below group standards.
He proposed a Total Quality Management (TQM) programme to change attitudes and improve results.
The initial responses of the managers to these comments were:
- The Production Director said there was a limit to what was possible with obsolete machines and facilities and only a very short-term order book.
- The Sales Director commented that it was impossible to get volume business when deliveries and quality were unreliable and designs out of date.
- The Technical Director said that there was little point in considering product improvements when the factory could not be bothered to update designs and the sales executives were reluctant to discuss new ideas with new potential customers.
You have been asked to prepare reports for the next management board meeting to enable a more constructive discussion.
You are required:
(a) to explain the critical success factors for the implementation of a programme of Total Quality Management. Emphasize the factors that are crucial in changing attitudes from those quoted;
(b) to explain how you would measure quality cost, and how the establishment of a system of measuring quality costs would contribute to a TQM programme.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Feedback control theory and product quality measurement
companies have introduced detailed ‘quality cost’ measurement schemes.
In others, the philosophy has been that no measurement procedures should be devoted especially to the measurement of quality costs: quality cost schemes designed to measure performance in this area are considered to add to administrative burdens; in reality ‘quality’ should be the expected achievement of the required product specification.
(i) set out a classification of quality costs which would be useful for reporting purposes. Give examples of actual costs which would be represented in each classification;
(ii) discuss the reality of the differences of philosophy expressed in the opening statement. Do they represent fundamental differences or may they be reconciled?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Traditional and activity-based budget statements and life-cycle costing
The budget for the Production, Planning and Development Department of Obba plc, is currently prepared as part of a traditional budgetary planning and control system. The analysis of costs by expense type for the period ended 30 November 2000 where this system is in use is as follows:
|
Expense type
|
Budget %
|
Actual %
|
|
Salaries
|
60
|
63
|
|
Supplies
|
6
|
5
|
|
Travel cost
|
12
|
12
|
|
Technology cost
|
10
|
7
|
|
Occupancy cost
|
12
|
13
|
The total budget and actual costs for the department for the period ended 30 November 2000 are El 000 000 and El 060 000 respectively.
The company now feels that an Activity Based Budgeting approach should be used. A number of activities have been identified for the Production, Planning and Development Department. An investigation has indicated that total budget and actual costs should be attributed to the activities on the following basis:
|
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
|
|
%
|
%
|
|
Activities
|
|
|
|
1. Routing/scheduling — new
|
20
|
16
|
|
products
|
|
|
|
2. Routing/scheduling — existing
|
40
|
34
|
|
products
|
|
|
|
3. Remedial re-routing/scheduling
|
5
|
12
|
|
4. Special studies — specific orders
|
10
|
8
|
|
5. Training
|
10
|
15
|
|
6. Management & administration
|
15
|
15
|
Required:
(a) (i) Prepare two budget control statements for the Production Planning and Development Department for the period ended 30 November 2000 which compare budget with actual cost and show variances using
1. a traditional expense based analysis and
2. an activity based analysis.
(ii) Identify and comment on four advantages claimed for the use of Activity Based Budgeting over traditional budgeting using the Production Planning and Development example to illustrate your answer.
(iii) Comment on the use of the information provided in the activity based statement which you prepared in (i) in activity based performance measurement and suggest additional information which would assist in such performance measurement.
(b) Other activities have been identified and the budget quantified for the three months ended 31 March 2001 as follows:
|
|
Cost Driver
|
Units of
|
|
|
Activities
|
Unit basis Cost Driver
|
Cost
|
Activities
|
|
|
|
|
(£000)
|
|
Product
|
design hours
|
8 000
|
2000
|
|
design
|
|
|
|
|
Purchasing purchase orders
|
4 000
|
200
|
|
|
Production machine hours
|
12 000
|
1500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Packing
|
volume (cu.m.)
|
20 000
|
400
|
|
Distribution weight (kg)
|
120 000
|
600
|
|
New product NPD is included in the above budget. The following additional information applies to NPD:
(i) Estimated total output over the product life cycle: 5000 units (4 years life cycle).
(ii) Product design requirement: 400 design hours
(iii) Output in quarter ended 31 March 2001: 250 units
(iv) Equivalent batch size per purchase order: 50 units
(v) Other product unit data: production time 0.75 machine hours: volume 0.4 cu. metres; weight 3 kg.
Required:
Prepare a unit overhead cost for product NPD using an activity based approach which includes an appropriate share of life cycle costs using the information provided in (b) above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BS Ltd provides consultancy services to small and medium sized businesses. Three types of consultants are employed offering administrative, data processing and marketing advice respectively. The consultants work partly on the client’s premises and partly in BS Ltd premises, where chargeable development work in relation to each client contract will be undertaken. Consultants spend some time negotiating with potential clients attempting to secure contracts from them. BS Ltd has recently implemented a policy change which allows for a number of follow-up (remedial) hours at the client’s premises after completion of the contract in order to eliminate any problems which have arisen in the initial stages of operation of the system. Contract negotiation and remedial work hours are not charged directly to each client. BS Ltd carries out consultancy for new systems and also to offer advice on existing systems which a client may have introduced before BS Ltd became involved. BS Ltd has a policy of retaining its consultancy staff at a level of 60 consultants on an ongoing basis.
Additional information for the year ended 30 April is as follows:
(i) BS Ltd invoices clients £75 per chargeable consultant hour.
(ii) Consultant salaries are budgeted at an average per consultant of £30 000 per annum. Actual salaries include a bonus for hours in excess of budget paid for at the budgeted average rate per hour.
(iii) Sundry operating costs (other than consultant salaries) were budgeted at £3 500 000. Actual was £4100 000.
(iv) BS Ltd capital employed (start year) was £6 500 000.
(v) Table 1 shows an analysis of sundry budgeted and actual quantitative data.
Required:
(a) (i) Prepare an analysis of actual consultancy hours for the year ended 30 April which shows the increase or decrease from the standard/allowed non-chargeable hours. This increase or decrease should be analysed to show the extent to which it may be shown to be attributable to a change from standard in:
1. standard chargeable hours; 2. remedial advice hours; 3. contract negotiation
hours; 4. other non-chargeable hours.
(ii) Calculate the total value of each of 1 to 4 in (a) above in terms of chargeable client income per hour.
(b) BS Ltd measure business performance in a number of ways. For each of the undernoted measures, comment on the performance of BS Ltd using quantitative data from the question and your answer to (a) to assist in illustrating your answer:
(i) Financial performance
(ii) Competitive performance
(iii) Quality of service
(iv) Flexibility
(v) Resource utilisation
(vi) Innovation.
Table 1: BS Ltd Sundry statistics for year ended 30 April
|
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
|
Number of consultants:
|
|
|
|
Administration
|
30
|
23
|
|
Data processing
|
12
|
20
|
|
Marketing
|
18
|
17
|
|
Consultants hours analysis:
|
|
|
|
contract negotiation hours
|
4800
|
9240
|
|
remedial advice hours
|
2400
|
7920
|
|
other non-chargeable hours
|
12000
|
22440
|
|
general development work hours (chargeable)
|
12000
|
6600
|
|
customer premises contract hours
|
88800
|
85800
|
|
Gross hours
|
120000
|
132000
|
|
Chargeable hours analysis:
|
|
|
|
new systems
|
70%
|
60%
|
|
existing systems advice
|
30%
|
40%
|
|
Number of clients enquiries received:
|
|
|
|
new systems
|
450
|
600
|
|
existing systems advice
|
400
|
360
|
|
Number of client contracts worked on:
|
|
|
|
new systems
|
180
|
210
|
|
existing systems advice
|
300
|
288
|
|
Number of client complaints
|
5
|
20
|
|
Contracts requiring remedial advice
|
48
|
75
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Thomas Sheridan, writing in Management Accounting in February 1989, pointed out that Japanese companies have a different approach to cost information with ‘the emphasis — based on physical measures’, and ‘the use of non-financial indices, particularly at shop floor level’. He argues that their approach is much more relevant to modern conditions than traditional cost and management accounting practices.
You are required
(a) to explain what is meant by ‘physical measures’ and ‘non-financial indices’;
(b) to give three examples of non-financial indices that might be prepared, with a brief note of what information each index would provide.
(c) What existing cost and management accounting practices do you consider inappropriate in modern conditions?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budget use and performance reporting A new private hospital of 100 beds was opened to receive patients on 2 January though many senior staff members including the supervisor of the laundry department had been in situ for some time previously. The first three months were expected to be a settling-in period; the hospital facilities being used to full capacity only in the second and subsequent quarters.
In May the supervisor of the laundry department received her first quarterly performance report from the hospital administrator, together with an explanatory memorandum. Copies of both documents are set out below.
The supervisor had never seen the original budget, nor had she been informed that there would be a quarterly performance report. She knew she was responsible for her department and had made every endeavour to run it as efficiently as possible. It had been made clear to her that there would be a slow build up in the number of patients accepted by the hospital and so she would need only 3 members of staff, but she had had to take on a fourth during the quarter due to the extra work. This extra hiring had been anticipated for May, not late February.
Rockingham Private Patients Hospital Ltd
MEMORANDUM 30 April
To: All Department Heads/Supervisors
From: Hospital Administrator
Attached is the Quarterly Performance Report for your department. The hospital has adopted a responsibility accounting system so you will be receiving one of these reports quarterly. Responsibility accounting means that you are accountable for ensuring that the expenses of running your department are kept in line with the budget. Each report compares the actual expenses of running your department for the quarter with our budget for the same period. The difference between the actual and forecast will be highlighted so that you can identify the important variations from budget and take corrective action to get back on budget. Any variation in excess of 5% from budget should be investigated and an explanatory memo sent to me giving reasons for the variations and the proposed corrective actions.
Performance report — laundry department
3 Months to 31 March
|
|
|
|
Variation
|
|
|
|
|
|
(Over)/
|
%
|
|
|
Actual
|
Budget
|
Under
|
Variation
|
|
Patient days
|
8000
|
6500
|
(1500)
|
(23)
|
|
Weight of
|
|
|
|
|
|
laundry processed (kg)
|
101170
|
81250
|
(19920)
|
(24.5)
|
|
Department expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Wages
|
|
4125
|
3450
|
(675)
|
|
Supervisor salary
|
1490
|
1495
|
5
|
—
|
|
Washing materials
|
920
|
770
|
(150)
|
(19.5)
|
|
Heating and power
|
560
|
510
|
(50)
|
(10)
|
|
Equipment depreciation
|
250
|
250
|
|
|
|
Allocated administration costs
|
2460
|
2000
|
(460)
|
(23)
|
|
Equipment maintenance
|
10
|
45
|
35
|
78
|
|
|
9815
|
8520
|
(1295)
|
(15)
|
Comment: We need to have a discussion about the overexpenditure of the department.
You are required to:
(a) discuss in detail the various possible effects on the behaviour of the laundry supervisor of the way that her budget was prepared and the form and content of the performance report, having in mind the published research findings in this area,
(b) re-draft, giving explanations, the performance report and supporting memorandum in a way which, in your opinion, would make them more effective management tools.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alpha manufacturing company produces a single product, which is known as sigma. The product requires a single operation, and the standard cost for this operation is presented in the following standard cost card:
|
Standard cost card for product sigma
|
(£)
|
|
Direct materials:
|
|
|
2kg of A at £10 per kg
|
20.00
|
|
1 kg of B at £15 per kg
|
15.00
|
|
Direct labour (3 hours at £9 per hour)
|
27.00
|
|
Variable overhead (3 hours at £2 per direct labour hour)
|
6.00
|
|
Total standard variable cost
|
68.00
|
|
Standard contribution margin
|
20.00
|
|
Standard selling price
|
88.00
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data relate to actual output, costs and variances for the four-weekly accounting period number 4 of a company that makes only one product. Opening and closing work in progress were the same.
|
|
(£000)
|
|
Actual production of product XY
|
18000 units
|
|
Actual costs incurred:
|
|
|
Direct materials purchased and used (150 000 kg)
|
210
|
|
Direct wages for 32 000 hours
|
136
|
|
Variable production overhead
|
38
|
|
|
(£000)
|
|
Variances:
|
|
|
Direct materials price
|
15 F
|
|
Direct materials usage
|
9A
|
|
Direct labour rate
|
8A
|
|
Direct labour efficiency
|
16 F
|
|
Variable production overhead expenditure
|
6A
|
|
Variable production overhead efficiency
|
4F
|
Variable production overhead varies with labour hours worked. A standard marginal costing system is operated.
You are required to:
(a) present a standard product cost sheet for one unit of product XY,
(b) describe briefly three types of standard that can be used for a standard costing system, stating which is usually preferred in practice and why.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
T plc uses a standard costing system, which is material stock account being maintained at standard costs. _The following details have been extracted from the standard cost card in respect of direct materials:
8 kg at £0.80/kg = £6.40 per unit
Budgeted production in April was 850 units.
The following details relate to actual materials purchased and issued to production during April, when actual production was 870 units:
|
Materials purchased
|
8200 kg costing £6888
|
|
Materials issued to production
|
7150 kg
|
Which of the following correctly states the material price and usage variance to be reported?
|
|
Price
|
Usage
|
|
A
|
£286 (A)
|
£152 (A)
|
|
B
|
£286 (A)
|
£280 (A)
|
|
C
|
£286 (A)
|
£294 (A)
|
|
D
|
£328 (A)
|
£152 (A)
|
|
E
|
£328 (A)
|
£280 (A)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PQ Limited operates a standard costing system for its only product. The standard cost card is as follows:
|
Direct material (4 kg at £2/kg)
|
£8.00
|
|
Direct labour (4 hours at £4/hour)
|
£16.00
|
|
Variable overhead (4 hours at £3/hour)
|
£12.00
|
|
Fixed overhead (4 hours at £5/hour)
|
£20.00
|
Fixed overheads are absorbed on the basis of labour hours. Fixed overhead costs are budgeted at £12 000 per annum, arising at a constant rate during the year.
Activity in period 3 is budgeted to be 10% of total activity for the year. Actual production during period 3 was 500 units, with actual fixed overhead costs incurred being £9800 and actual hours worked being 1970.
The fixed overhead expenditure variance for period 3 was:
|
A
|
£2200 (F)
|
|
B
|
£200 (F)
|
|
C
|
£50 (F)
|
|
D
|
£200 (A)
|
|
E
|
£2200 (A)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information relates to R plc for October:
Bought 7800 kg of material R at a total cost of £16380
Stocks of material R increased by 440 kg
Stocks of material R are valued using standard purchase price
Material price variance was £1170 adverse
The standard price per kg for material R is:
|
A
|
£1.95
|
|
B
|
£2.10
|
|
C
|
£2.23
|
|
D
|
£2.25
|
|
E
|
£2.38
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P Limited has the following data relating to its budgeted sales for October:
|
Budgeted sales
|
£100 000
|
|
Budgeted selling price per unit
|
£8.00
|
|
Budgeted contribution per unit
|
£4.00
|
|
Budgeted profit per unit
|
£2.50
|
During October actual sales were 11 000 units for a sales revenue of £99 000.
P Limited uses an absorption costing system. The sales variances reported for October were:
|
|
Price
|
Volume
|
|
A
|
£11000 F
|
£3 750 A
|
|
B
|
£11 000 F
|
£6 000 A
|
|
C
|
£11 000 A
|
£6 000 A
|
|
D
|
£12500 F
|
£12000 A
|
|
E
|
£12500 A
|
£12000 A
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computation of labour and material variances and reconciliation statements
Malton Ltd operates a standard marginal costing system. As the recently appointed management accountant to Malton’s Eastern division, you have responsibility for the preparation of that division’s monthly cost reports. The standard cost report uses variances to reconcile the actual marginal cost of production to its standard cost.
The Eastern division is managed by Richard Hill. The division only makes one product, the Beta. Budgeted Beta production for May was 8000 units, although actual production was 9500 units.
In order to prepare the standard cost report for May, you have asked a member of your staff to obtain standard and actual cost details for the month of May. This information is reproduced below:
|
|
|
Unit standard cost
|
|
Actual details for May
|
|
|
Quantity
|
Unit
|
Cost per
|
|
Quantity
|
Total
|
|
|
|
price
|
Beta (£)
|
|
|
cost (£)
|
|
Material
|
8 litres
|
£20
|
160
|
Material
|
78000 litres
|
1599000
|
|
Labour
|
4 hours
|
£6
|
24
|
Labour
|
39000 hours
|
249600
|
|
|
|
|
184
|
|
|
1848600
|
Task 1
(a) Calculate the following:
(i) the material price variance;
(ii) the material usage variance;
(iii) the labour rate variance;
(iv) the labour efficiency variance (some-times called the utilization variance);
(b) Prepare a standard costing statement reconciling the actual marginal’ cost of production with the standard marginal cost of production. After Richard Hill has received, your standard costing statement, you visit him to discuss the variances and their implications. Richard, however, raises a number of queries with you. He makes the following points:
- An index measuring material prices stood at 247.2 for May but at 240.0 when the standard for the material price was set.
- The Eastern division is budgeted to run at its normal capacity of 8000 units of production per month, but during May it had to manufacture an additional 1500 Betas to meet a special order agreed at short notice by Melton’s sales director.
- Because of the short notice, the normal supplier of the raw material was unable to meet the extra demand and so additional materials had to be acquired from another supplier at a price per litre of £22.
- This extra material was not up to the normal specification, resulting in 20% of the special purchase being scrapped prior to being issued to production.
- The work force could only produce the special order on time by working overtime on the 1500 Betas at a 50% premium.
Task 2
(a) Calculate the amounts within the material price variance, the material usage variance and the labour rate variance which arise from producing the special order.
(b) (i) Estimate the revised standard price for materials based on the change in the material price index.
(ii) For the 8000 units of normal production, use your answer in (b) (i) to estimate how much of the price variance calculated in Task 1 is caused by the general change in prices.
(c) Using your answers to parts (a) and (b) of this task, prepare a revised standard costing statement. The revised statement should subdivide the variances prepared in Task 1 into those elements controllable by Richard Hill and those elements caused by factors outside his divisional control.
(d) Write a brief note to Richard Hill justifying your treatment of the elements you believe are outside his control and suggesting what action should be taken by the company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reconciliation of standard and actual cost for a variable costing system
Data
You are employed as the assistant management accountant in the group accountant’s office of Hampstead plc. Hampstead recently acquired Finchley Ltd, a small company making a specialist (c) product called the Alpha. Standard marginal costing is used by all the companies within the group and, from. 1 August, Finchley Ltd will also be required to use standard marginal costing in its management reports. Part of your job is to manage the implementation of standard marginal costing at Finchley Ltd.
John Wade, the managing director of Finchley, is not clear how the change will help him as a manager. He has always found Finchley’s existing absorption costing system sufficient. By way of example, he shows you a summary of its management accounts for the three months to 31 May. These are reproduced below.
Statement of budgeted and actual cost of Alpha Production —3 months ended
31 May
|
Alpha
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Production
|
Actual
|
|
Budget
|
|
Variance
|
|
(units)
|
|
10 000
|
|
12 000
|
|
|
|
Inputs
|
(£)
|
Inputs
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Materials
|
32 000 metres
|
377 600
|
36 000 metres
|
432 000
|
54400
|
|
Labour
|
70 000 hours
|
422 800
|
72 000 hours
|
450 000
|
27200
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
|
330 000
|
|
396 000
|
66000
|
|
absorbed
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
unabsorbed
|
|
75 000
|
|
0
|
(75000)
|
|
|
|
1205400
|
|
1278000
|
72600
|
John Wade is not convinced that standard marginal costing will help him to manage Finchley. ‘My current system tells me all I need to know,’ he said. `As you can see, we are £72 600 below budget which is really excellent given that we lost production as a result of a serious machine breakdown.’
To help John Wade understand the benefits of standard marginal costing, you agree to prepare a statement for the three months ended 31 May reconciling the standard cost of production to the actual cost of production.
Tas k1
(a) Use the budget data to determine:
(i)the standard marginal cost per Alpha; and
(ii) the standard cost of actual Alpha production for the three months to 31 May.
(b) Calculate the following variances:
(i) material price variance;
(ii) material usage variance;
(iii) labour rate variance;
(iv) labour efficiency variance;
(v) fixed overhead expenditure variance. Write a short memo to John Wade. Your memo should:
(i) include a statement reconciling the actual cost of production to the standard cost of production;
(ii) give two reasons why your variances might differ from those in his original management accounting statement despite using the same basic data; briefly discuss one further reason why your reconciliation statement provides improved management information.
Data
On receiving your memo, John Wade informs you that:
- the machine breakdown resulted in the workforce having to be paid for 12 000 hours even though no production took place;
- an index of material prices stood at 466.70 when the budget was prepared but at 420.03 when the material was purchased.
Task 2
Using this new information, prepare a revised statement reconciling the standard cost of production to the actual cost of production. Your statement should subdivide:
- both the labour variances into those parts arising from the machine breakdown and those parts arising from normal production; and
- the material price variance into that part due to the change in the index and that part arising for other reasons.
Data
Barnet Ltd is another small company owned by Hampstead plc. Barnet operates a job costing system making a specialist, expensive piece of hospital equipment.
Existing system
Currently, employees are assigned to individual jobs and materials are requisitioned from stores as needed. The standard and actual costs of labour and material are recorded for each job. These job costs are totalled to produce the marginal cost of production. Fixed production costs — including the cost of storekeeping and inspection of deliveries and finished equipment — are then added to determine the standard and actual cost of production. Any costs of remedial work are included in the materials and labour for each job.
Proposed system
Carol Johnson, the chief executive of Barnet, has recently been to a seminar on modern manufacturing techniques. As a result, she is considering introducing Just-in-Time stock deliveries and Total Quality Management. Barnet would offer suppliers a long-term contract at a fixed price but suppliers would have to guarantee the quality of their materials.
In addition, she proposes that the workforce is organised as a single team with flexible work practices. This would mean employees helping each other as necessary, with no employee being allocated a particular job. If a job was delayed, the workforce would work overtime without payment in order for the job to be completed on time. In exchange, employees would be guaranteed a fixed weekly wage and time off when production was slack to make up for any overtime incurred.
Cost of quality
Carol has asked to meet you to discuss the implications of her proposals on the existing accounting system. She is particularly concerned to monitor the cost of quality. This is defined as the total of all costs incurred in preventing defects plus those costs involved in remedying defects once they have occurred. It is a single measuring all the explicit costs of quality — that is, those costs collected within the accounting system.
Task 3
In preparation for the meeting, produce brief notes. Your notes should:
(a) identify four general headings (or classifications) which make up the cost of quality;
(b) give one example of a type of cost likely to be found within each category;
(c) assuming Carol Johnson’s proposals are accepted, state, with reasons, whether or not:
(i) a standard marginal costing system would still be of help to the managers;
(ii) it would still be meaningful to collect costs by each individual-job;
(d) identify one cost saving in Carol Johnson’s proposals which would not be recorded in the existing costing system.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variance analysis and reconciliation of budgeted and actual profit
The Perseus Co. Ltd, a medium-sized company, produces a single produce in its one overseas factory. For control purposes, a standard costing system was recently introduced and is now in operation.
The standards set for the month of May were as follows:
|
Production and sales
|
|
|
Selling price (per unit)
|
£140
|
|
Materials
|
|
|
Material 007
|
6 kilos per unit at
|
|
|
£12.25 per kilo
|
|
Material XL90
|
3 kilos per unit at
|
|
|
£3.20 per kilo
|
|
Labour
|
4.5 hours per unit at
|
|
|
£8.40 per hour
|
Overheads (all fixed) at £86 400 per month are not absorbed into the product costs.
The actual data for the month of May, are as follows:
Produced 15 400 units, which were sold at £138.25 each.
Materials
Used 98 560 kilos of material 007 at a total cost of £1 256 640
Used 42 350 kilos of material XL90 at a total cost of £132 979
Labour
Paid an actual rate of £8.65 per hour to the labour force. The total amount paid out amounted to £612 766
Overheads (all fixed) £96 840
Required:
(a) Prepare a standard costing profit statement, and a profit statement based on actual for the month of May.
(b) Prepare a statement of the variances which reconcile the actual with the standard profit or loss .
(c) Explain briefly the possible reasons for inter-relationships between material variances and labour variances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculation of actual input data working back from variances
The following profit reconciliation statement has been prepared by the management accountant of ABC Limited for March:
|
|
|
|
(£)
|
|
Budgeted profit
|
|
|
30000
|
|
Sales volume profit variance
|
|
|
5250A
|
|
Selling price variance
|
|
|
6375F
|
|
|
|
|
31125
|
|
Cost variances:
|
A
|
F
|
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
|
Material:
|
|
|
|
|
Price
|
1985
|
|
|
|
usage
|
|
|
400
|
|
Labour:
|
|
|
|
|
Rate
|
|
|
9800
|
|
Efficiency
|
|
4000
|
|
|
Variable overhead:
|
|
|
|
|
Expenditure
|
|
|
1000
|
|
Efficiency
|
|
1500
|
|
|
Fixed overhead:
|
|
|
|
|
Expenditure
|
|
|
500
|
|
Volume
|
24500
|
|
|
|
|
31985
|
11700
|
|
|
|
|
|
20285A
|
|
Actual profit
|
|
|
10840
|
The standard cost card for the company’s only product is as follows:
|
|
|
(£)
|
|
Materials
|
5 litres at £0.20
|
1.00
|
|
Labour
|
4 hours at £4.00
|
16.00
|
|
Variable overhead
|
4 hours at £1.50
|
6.00
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
4 hours at £3.50
|
14.00
|
|
|
|
37.00
|
|
Standard profit
|
|
3.00
|
|
Standard selling price
|
|
40.00
|
The following information is also available:
1. There was no change in the level of finished goods stock during the month.
2. Budgeted production and sales volumes for March were equal.
3. Stocks of materials, which are valued at standard price, decreased by 800 litres during the month.
4. The actual labour rate was £0.28 lower than the standard hourly rate.
Required:
(a) Calculate the following:
(i) the actual production/sales volume;
(ii) the actual number of hours worked;
(iii) the actual quantity of materials purchased;
(iv) the actual variable overhead cost incurred;
(v) the actual fixed overhead cost incurred.
(b) ABC Limited uses a standard costing system whereas other organizations use a system of budgetary control. Explain the reasons why a system of budgetary control is often preferred to the use of standard costing in non- manufacturing environments.s
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculation of labour variances and actual material inputs working backwards from variances
A company manufactures two components in one of its factories. Material A is one of several materials used in the manufacture of both components.
The standard direct labour hours per unit of production and budgeted production quantities for a 13 week period were:
|
|
Standard
|
Budgeted
|
|
|
direct labour
|
production
|
|
|
hours
|
quantities
|
|
Component X
|
0.40 hours
|
36 000 units
|
|
Component Y
|
0.56 hours
|
22 000 units
|
The standard wage rate for all direct workers was £5.00 per hour. Throughout the 13-week period 53 direct workers were employed, working a standard 40-hour week.
The following actual information for the 13-week period is available:
Production:
Component X, 35 000 units
Component Y, 25 000 units
Direct wages paid, £138 500
Material A purchases, 47 000 kilos costing £85110
Material A price variance, £430 F
Material A usage (component X), 33 426 kilos
Material A usage variance (component X), £320.32 A
Required:
(a) Calculate the direct labour variances for the period;
(b) Calculate the standard purchase price for material A for the period and the standard usage of material A per unit of production of component X.
(c) Describe the steps, and information, required to establish the material purchase quantity budget for material A for a period.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of an operating control statement and the calculation of labour, material and overhead variances
The following statement has been produced for presentation to the general manager of Department X.
Month ended 31 October
|
|
Original
|
Actual
|
|
|
|
budget
|
result
|
Variance
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Sales
|
600000
|
550000
|
(50000)
|
|
Direct materials
|
150000
|
130000
|
20000
|
|
Direct labour
|
200000
|
189000
|
11000
|
|
Production overhead:
|
|
|
|
|
Variable with direct labour
|
50000
|
46000
|
4000
|
|
Fixed
|
25000
|
29000
|
(4000)
|
|
Variable selling overhead
|
75000
|
72000
|
3000
|
|
Fixed selling overhead
|
50000
|
46000
|
4000
|
|
Total costs
|
550000
|
512000
|
38000
|
|
Profit
|
50000
|
38000
|
(12000)
|
|
Direct labour hours
|
50000
|
47500
|
|
|
Sales and production units
|
5000
|
4500
|
|
The general manager says that this type of statement does not provide much relevant information for him. He also thought that the profit for the month would be well up to budget and was surprised to see a large adverse profit variance.
You are required to
(a) re-draft the above statement in a form which would be more relevant for the general manager;
(b) calculate all sales, material, labour and overhead variances and reconcile to the statement produced in (a);
(c) produce a short report explaining the principles upon which your re-drafted statement is based and what information it provides.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The CP division of R plc has budgeted a net profit before tax of £3 million per annum over the period of the foreseeable future, based on a net capital employed of £10 million.
Plant replacement anticipated over this period is expected to be approximately equal to the annual depreciation each year. These compare well with the organization’s required rate of return of 20% before tax.
CP’s management is currently considering a substantial expansion of its manufacturing capacity to cope with the forecast demands of a new customer. The customer is prepared to offer a five-year contract providing CP with annual sales of £2 million.
In order to meet this contract, a total additional capital outlay of £2 million is envisaged, being £1.5 million of new fixed assets plus £0.5 million working capital. A five-year plant life is expected.
Operating costs on the contract are estimated to be £1.35 million per annum, excluding depreciation.
This is considered to be low-risk venture as the contract would be firm for five years and the manufacturing processes are well understood within CP.
You are required
(a) to calculate the impact of accepting the contract on the CP divisional Return on Capital Employed (ROCE) and Residual Income (RI), indicating whether it would be attractive to CP’s management;
(b) to explain the basis of the calculations in the statements you have produced and discuss the suitability of each method in directing divisional management toward the achievement of corporate goals
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A large organisation, with a well-developed cost centre system, is considering the introduction of profit centres and/or investment centres throughout the organization, where appropriate. As management accountant, you will be providing technical advice and assistance for the proposed scheme.
You are required:
(a) to describe the main characteristics and objectives of profit centres and investment centres;
(b) to explain what conditions are necessary for the successful introduction of such centres;
(c) to describe the main behavioural and control consequences which may arise if such centres are introduced;
(d) to compare two performance appraisal measures that might be used if investment centres are introduced.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A long-established, highly centralized company has grown to the extent that its chief executive, despite having a good supporting team, is finding difficulty in keeping up with the many decisions of importance in the company.
Consideration is therefore being given to reorganizing the company into profit centres. These would be product divisions, headed by a divisional managing director, who would be responsible for all the division’s activities relating to its products.
You are required to explain, in outline:
(a) the types of decision areas that should be transferred to the new divisional managing diretors if such a reorganization is to achieve its objectives;
(b) the types of decision areas that might reasonably be retained at company head office;
(c) the management accounting problems that might be expected to arise in introducing effective profit centre control.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) Explain the meaning of each of the under-noted measures which may be used for divisional performance measurement and investment decision-making. Discuss the advantages and problems associated with the use of each.
(i) Return on capital employed.
(ii) Residual income.
(iii) Discounted future earnings.
(b) Comment on the reasons..why the measures listed in (a) above may give conflicting investment decision responses when applied to the same set of data. Use the following to illustrate the conflicting responses which may arise:
Additional investment of £60 000 for a 6 year life with nil residual value.
Average net profit per year: £9000 (after depreciation).
Cost of capital: 14%.
Existing capital employed: £300 000 with
ROCE of 20%.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculation of NPV and ROI and a discussion as to whether goal congruence exists plus a further discussion relating to resolving the conflict between decision-making and performance evaluation models
J plc’s business is organized into divisions. For operating purposes, each division is regarded as an investment centre, with divisional managers enjoying substantial autonomy in their selection of investment projects. Divisional managers are rewarded via a remuneration package which is linked to a Return on Investment (ROI) performance measure. The ROI calculation is based on the net book value of assets at the beginning of the year. Although there is a high degree of autonomy in investment selection, approval to go ahead has to be obtained from group management at the head office in order to release the finance.
Division X is currently investigating three independent investment proposals. If they appear acceptable, it wishes to assign each a priority in the event that funds may not be available to cover all three. Group finance staff assess the cost of capital to the company at 15%.
The details of the three proposals are:
|
|
Project
|
Project
|
Project
|
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
|
|
(£000)
|
(£000)
|
(£000)
|
|
Initial cash outlay on fixed assets
|
60
|
60
|
60
|
|
Net cash inflow in year 1
|
21
|
25
|
10
|
|
Net cash inflow in year 2
|
21
|
20
|
20
|
|
Net cash inflow in year 3
|
21
|
20
|
30
|
|
Net cash inflow in year 4
|
21
|
15
|
40
|
Ignore tax and residual values.
Depreciation is straight-line over asset life, which is four years in each case.
You are required
(a) to give an appraisal of the three investment proposals from a divisional and from a company point of view;
(b) to explain any divergence between these two points of view and to demonstrate techniques by which the views of both the division and the company can be brought into line.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Appropriate performance measures for different goals
The executive directors and the seven divisional managers of Kant Ltd spent a long weekend at a country house debating the company’s goals. They concluded that Kant had multiple goals, and that the performance of senior managers should be assessed in terms of all of them.
The goals identified were:
(i) to generate a reasonable financial return for shareholders;
(ii) to maintain a high market share;
(iii) to increase productivity annually;
(iv) to offer an up-to-date product range of high quality and proven reliability;
(v) to be known as responsible employers;
(vi) to acknowledge social responsibilities;
(vii) to grow and survive autonomously.
The finance director was asked to prepare a follow-up paper, setting-out some of the implications of these ideas. He has asked you, as his personal assistant, to prepare comments on certain issues for his consideration.
You are required to set out briefly, with reasons:
(a) suitable measures of performance for each of the stated goals for which you consider this to be possible.
(b) an outline of your view as to whether any of the stated goals can be considered to be sufficiently general to incorporate all of the others.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Oslo division and the Bergen division are divisions within the Baltic Group. One of the products manufactured by the Oslo division is an intermediate product for which there is no external market. This intermediate
product is transferred to the Bergen division where it is converted into a final
product for sale on the external market. One unit of the intermediate product is used
in the production of the final product. The expected units of the final product which
the Bergen division estimates it can sell at various selling prices are as follows:
|
Net selling price
|
Quantity sold
|
|
(£)
|
Units
|
|
100
|
1000
|
|
90
|
2000
|
|
80
|
3000
|
|
70
|
4000
|
|
60
|
5000
|
|
50
|
6000
|
The costs of each division are as follows:
|
|
Oslo
|
Bergen
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
11
|
7
|
|
Fixed costs attributable to the products
|
60000
|
90000
|
You are required to write a report for Mr Ragwort about the proposed methods of measuring divisional performance, to comply with the terms of his instruction
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculation of payback, NPV and ARR for mutually exclusive projects
Your company is considering investing in its own transport fleet. The present position is that carriage is contracted to an outside organization. The life of the transport fleet would be five years, after which time the vehicles would have to be disposed of.
The cost to your company of using the outside organization for its carriage needs is £250 000 for this year. This cost, it is projected, will rise 10% per annum over the life of the project. The initial cost of the transport fleet would be £750 000 and it is estimated that the following costs would be incurred over the next five years:
|
|
Drivers’
|
Repairs &
|
Other
|
|
|
Costs
|
Maintenance
|
Costs
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Year 1
|
33000
|
8000
|
130000
|
|
Year 2
|
35000
|
13000
|
135000
|
|
Year 3
|
36000
|
15000
|
140000
|
|
Year 4
|
38000
|
16000
|
136000
|
|
Year 5
|
40000
|
18000
|
142000
|
Other costs include depreciation. It is projected that the fleet would be sold for £150 000 at the end of year 5. It has been agreed to depreciate the fleet on a straight line basis.
To raise funds for the project your company is proposing to raise a long-term loan at 12% interest rate per annum
You are told that there is an alternative project that could be invested in using the funds raised, which has the following projected results:
Payback = 3 years
Accounting rate of return = 30%
Net present value = £140 000.
As funds are limited, investment can only be made in one project.
Note: The transport fleet would be purchased at the beginning of the project and all other expenditure would be incurred at the end of each relevant year.
Required:
(a) Prepare a table showing the net cash savings to be made by the firm over the life of the transport fleet project.
(b) Calculate the following for the transport fleet project:
(i) Payback period
(ii) Accounting rate of return
(iii) Net present value
(c) Write a short report to the Investment Manager in your company outlining whether investment should be committed to the transport fleet or the alternative project outlined. Clearly state the reasons for your decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
NPV and payback calculations
You are employed as the assistant accountant in your company and you are currently working on an appraisal of a project to purchase a new machine. The machine will cost £55 000 and will have a useful life of three years. You have already estimated the cash flows from the project and their taxation effect, and the results of your estimates can be summarized as follows:
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
Year 3
|
|
Post-tax cash inflow
|
£18000
|
£29000
|
£31000
|
Your company uses a post-tax cost of capital of 8% to appraise all projects of this type.
Task 1
(a) Calculate the net present value of the proposal to purchase the machine. Ignore the effects of inflation and assume that all cash flows occur at the end of the year.
(b) Calculate the payback period for the investment in the machine.
Task 2
The marketing director has asked you to let her know as soon as you have completed your appraisal of the project. She has asked you to provide her with some explanation of your calculations and of how taxation affects the proposal.
Prepare a memorandum to the marketing director which answers her queries. Your memorandum should contain the following:
(a) your recommendation concerning the proposal;
(b) an explanation of the meaning of the net present value and the payback period;
(c) an explanation of the effects of taxation on the cash flows arising from capital expenditure.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Present value of purchasing or renting machinery
The Portsmere Hospital operates its own laundry. Last year the laundry processed 120 000 kilograms of washing and this year the total is forecast to grow to 132 000 kilograms. Tffis growth in laundry processed is forecast to continue at the same percentage rate for the next seven years. Because of this, the hospital must immediately replace its existing laundry equipment. Currently, it is considering two options, the purchase of machine A or the rental of machine B. Information on both options is given below:
|
Machine A — purchase
|
|
|
Annual capacity (kilograms)
|
180 000
|
|
Material cost per kilogram
|
£2.00
|
|
Labour cost per kilogram
|
£3.00
|
|
Fixed costs per annum
|
£20 000
|
|
Life of machine
|
3 years
|
|
Capital cost
|
£60 000
|
|
Depreciation per annum
|
£20 000
|
|
Machine B — rent
|
|
|
Annual capacity (kilograms)
|
170 000
|
|
Material cost per kilogram
|
£1.80
|
|
Labour cost per kilogram
|
£3.40
|
|
Fixed costs per annum
|
£18 000
|
|
Rental per annum
|
£20 000
|
|
Rental agreement
|
3 years
|
|
Depreciation per annum
|
nil
|
Other information:
1. The hospital is able to call on an outside laundry if there is either a breakdown or any other reason why the washing cannot be undertaken in-house. The charge would be £10 per kilogram of washing.
2. Machine A, if purchased, would have to be paid for immediately. All other cash flows can be assumed to occur at the end of the year.
3. Machine A will have no residual value at any time.
4. The existing laundry equipment could be sold for £10 000 cash.
5. The fixed costs are a direct cost of operating the laundry.
6. The hospital’s discount rate for projects of this nature is 15%.
Task 1
You are an accounting_ technician employed by the Portsmere Hospital and you are asked to write a brief report to its chief executive. Your report should:
(a) evaluate the two options for operating the laundry, using discounted cash flow techniques;
(b) recommend the preferred option and identify one possible non-financial benefit;
(c) justify your treatment of the £10 000 cash value of the existing equipment;
(d) explain what is meant by discounted cashflow.
Note:
Inflation can be ignored.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluation of mutually exclusive projects using alternative appraisal methods
Stadler is an ambitious young executive who has recently been appointed to the position of financial director of Paradis plc, a small listed company. Stadler regards this appointment as a temporary one, enabling him to gain experience before moving to a larger organization. His intention is to leave Paradis plc in three years time, with its share price standing high. As a consequence, he is particularly concerned that the reported profits of Paradis plc should be as high as possible in his third and final year with the company.
Paradis plc has recently raised £350 000 from a rights issue, and the directors are considering three ways of using these funds. Three projects (A, B and C) are being considered, each involving the immediate purchase of equipment costing £350 000. One project only can be undertaken, and the equipment for each project will have a useful life equal to that of the project, with no scrap value. Stadler favours project C because it is _expected to show the highest accounting profit in the third year. However, he does not wish to reveal his real reasons for favouring project C, and so, in his report to the chairman, he rearmmends project C because it shows the highest internal rate of return. The following summary is taken from his report:
|
|
|
|
|
Net cash flows (£000)
|
|
|
|
Internal Rate
|
|
Project
|
|
|
|
Years
|
|
|
|
|
of return
|
|
|
0
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
5
|
6
|
7
|
8
|
(%)
|
|
A
|
—350
|
100
|
110
|
104
|
112
|
138
|
160
|
180
|
—
|
27.5
|
|
B
|
—350
|
40
|
100
|
210
|
260
|
160
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
26.4
|
|
C
|
—350
|
200
|
150
|
240
|
40
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
33.0
|
The chairman of the company is accustomed to projects being appraised in terms of payback and accounting rate of return, and he is consequently suspicious of the use of internal rate of return as a method of project selection. Accordingly, the chairman has asked for an independent report on the choice of project. The company’s cost of capital is 20% and a policy of straight-line depreciation is used to write off the cost of equipment in the financial statements.
Requirements:
(a) Calculate the payback period for each project.
(b) Calculate the accounting rate of return for each project.
(c) Prepare a report for the chairman with supporting calculations indicating which project should be preferred by the ordinary shareholders of Paradis plc.
(d) Discuss the assumptions about the reactions of the stock market that are implicit in Stadler’s choice of project C.
Note: ignore taxation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computation of NPV and tax payable
Sound Equipment Ltd was formed five years ago to manufacture parts for hi-fi equipment. Most of its customers were individuals wanting to assemble their own systems. Recently, however, the company has embarked on a policy of expansion and has been approached by JBZ plc, a multinational manufacturer of consumer electronics. JBZ has offered Sound Equipment Ltd a contract to build an amplifier for its latest consumer product. If accepted, the contract will increase Sound Equipment’s turnover by 20%.
JBZ’s offer is a fixed price contract over three years, although it is possible for Sound Equipment to apply for subsequent contracts. The contract will involve Sound Equipment purchasing a specialist machine for £150 000. Although the machine has a 10-year life, it would be written off over the three years of the initial contract as it can only be used in the manufacture of the amplifier for JBZ.
The production director of Sound Equipment has already prepared a financial appraisal of the proposal. This is reproduced below. With a capital cost of £150 000 and total profits of £60 300, the production director has calculated the return on capital employed as 40.2%. As this is greater than Sound Equipment’s cost of capital of 18%, the production director is recommending that the board accepts the contract.
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
Year 3
|
Total
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
|
Turnover
|
180000
|
180000
|
180000
|
540000
|
|
Materials
|
60000
|
60000
|
60000
|
180000
|
|
Labour
|
40000
|
40000
|
40000
|
120000
|
|
Depreciation
|
50000
|
50000
|
50000
|
150000
|
|
Pre-tax profit
|
30000
|
30000
|
30000
|
90000
|
|
Corporation tax at 33%
|
9900
|
9900
|
9900
|
29700
|
|
After-tax profit
|
20100
|
20100
|
20100
|
60300
|
You are employed as the assistant accountant to Sound Equipment Ltd and report to John Green, the financial director, who asks you to carry out a full financial appraisal of the proposed contract. He feels that the production director’s presentation is inappropriate. He provides you with the following additional information:
- Sound Equipment pays corporation tax at the rate of 33%;
- the machine will qualify for a 25% writing-down allowance on the reducing balance;
- the machine will have no further use other than in manufacturing the amplifier for JBZ;
- on ending the contract with JBZ, any out-standing capital allowances can be claimed as a balancing allowance;
- the company’s cost of capital is 18%;
- the cost of materials and labour is forecast to increase by 5% per annum for years 2 and 3.
John Green reminds you that Sound Equipment operates a just-in-time stock policy and that production will be delivered immediately to JBZ, who will, under the terms of the contract, immediately pay for the deliveries. He also reminds you that suppliers are paid immediately on receipt of goods and that employees are also paid immediately.
Write a report to the financial director. Your report should:
(a) use the net present value technique to identify whether or not the initial three-year contract is worthwhile;
(b) explain your approach to taxation in your appraisal;
(c) identify one other factor to be considered before making a final decision.
Notes:
For the purpose of this task, you may assume the following:
- the machine would be purchased at the beginning of the accounting year;
- there is a one-year delay in paying corporation tax;
- all cashflows other than the purchase of the machine occur at the end of each year;
- Sound Equipment has no other assets on which to claim capital allowances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
NPV calculation and taxation
Data
Tilsley Ltd manufactures motor vehicle components. It is considering introducing a new product. Helen Foster, the production director, has already prepared the following projections for this proposal:
|
|
|
Year
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
|
|
(£000)
|
(£000)
|
(£000)
|
(£000)
|
|
Sales
|
8750
|
12250
|
13300
|
14350
|
|
Direct materials
|
1340
|
1875
|
2250
|
2625
|
|
Direct labour
|
2675
|
3750
|
4500
|
5250
|
|
Direct overheads
|
185
|
250
|
250
|
250
|
|
Depreciation
|
2500
|
2500
|
2500
|
2500
|
|
Interest
|
1012
|
1012
|
1012
|
1012
|
|
Profit before tax
|
1038
|
2863
|
2788
|
2713
|
|
Corporation tax @ 30%
|
311
|
859
|
836
|
814
|
|
Profit after tax
|
727
|
2004
|
1952
|
1899
|
Helen Foster has recommended to the board that the project is not worthwhile because the cumulative after tax profit over the four years is less than the capital cost of the project.
As an assistant accountant at the company you have been asked by Philip Knowles, the chief accountant, to carry out a full financial appraisal of the proposal. He does not agree with Helen
Foster’s analysis, and provides you with the following information:
- the initial capital investment and working capital will be incurred at the beginning of the first year. All other receipts and payments will occur at the end of each year.
- the equipment will cost 10 million;
- additional working capital of £1 million;
- this additional working capital will be recovered in full as cash at the end of the four-year period;
- the equipment will qualify for a 25% per annum reducing balance writing down allowance;
- any outstanding capital allowances at the end of the project can be claimed as a balancing
- allowance;
- at the end of the four-year period the equipment will be scrapped, with no expected residual value;
- the additional working capital required does not qualify for capital allowances, nor is it an allowable expense in calculating taxable profit;
- Tilsley Ltd pays corporation tax at 30% of chargeable profits;
- there is a one-year delay in paying tax;
- the company’s cost of capital is 17%.
Task
Write a report to Philip Knowles. Your report should:
(a) evaluate the project using net present value techniques;
(b) recommend whether the project is worth-while;
(c) explain how you have treated taxation in your appraisal;
(d) give three reasons why your analysis is different from that produced by Helen Foster, the production director.
Notes:
Risk and inflation can be ignored.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
R Limited manufactures three products A, B and C.
You are required:
(a) Using the information given below, to prepare budgets for the month of January for
(i) sales in quantity and value, including total value;
(ii) production quantities;
(iii) material usage in quantities;
(iv) material purchases in quantity and value, including total value;
(b) To explain the term `principal budget factor’ and state what it was assumed to be in (a).
|
|
Product
|
Quantity
|
Price each .
|
|
|
|
(units)
|
(£)
|
|
Sales:
|
A
|
1000
|
100
|
|
|
B
|
2000
|
120
|
|
|
C
|
1500
|
140
|
|
Materials used in the company’s products:
|
|
|
|
|
Material
|
M1
|
M2
|
M3
|
|
Unit cost
|
£4
|
£6
|
£9
|
|
Quantities used in:
|
M1
|
M2
|
M3
|
|
|
(units)
|
(units)
|
(units)
|
|
Product A
|
4
|
2
|
—
|
|
Product B
|
3
|
3
|
2
|
|
Product C
|
2
|
1
|
1
|
|
Finished stocks:
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Product C
|
|
(units)
|
(units)
|
(units)
|
|
|
Quantities
|
|
|
|
|
1st January
|
1000
|
1500
|
500
|
|
31st January
|
1100
|
1650
|
550
|
|
Material stocks:
|
M1
|
M2
|
M3
|
|
|
(units)
|
(units)
|
(units)
|
|
1st January
|
26000
|
20000
|
12000
|
|
31st January
|
31200
|
24000
|
14400
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are the management accountant of a group of companies and your managing director has asked you to explore the possibilities of introducing a zero-base budgeting system experimentally in one of the operating companies in place of its existing orthodox system. You are required to prepare notes for a paper for submission to the board that sets out:
(a) how zero-base .budgeting would work within the company chosen;
(b) what advantages it might offer over the existing system;
(c) what problems might be faced in introducing a zero-base budgeting scheme;
(d) the features you would look for in selecting the operating company for the introduction in order to obtain the most beneficial results from the experiment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a)corporate planning and budgeting are complementary, rather than the former super-seding the latter.’
Compare the aims and main features of corporate planning’ and ‘budgeting’ systems.
(b) The aims of zero-base budgeting have been described recently in the following terms: `Zero-base budgeting is a general management tool that can provide a systematic way to evaluate all operations and programmes; a means of establishing a working structure to recognise priorities and performance measures for current and future plans; in essence, a methodology for the continual redirection of resources into the highest priority programmes, and to explicitly identify tradeoffs among long-term growth, current operations, and profit needs.’
Explain how a system of zero-base budgeting works, and to assess its likely success in attaining the aims set out above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of functional budgets
D Limited is preparing its annual budgets for the year to 31 December 2001. It manufactures and sells one product, which has a selling price of £150. The marketing director believes that the price can be increased to £160 with effect from 1 July 2001 and that at this price the sales volume for each quarter of 2001 will be as follows:
|
|
Sales volume
|
|
Quarter 1
|
40000
|
|
Quarter 2
|
50000
|
|
Quarter 3
|
30000
|
|
Quarter 4
|
45000
|
Sales for each quarter of 2002 are expected to be 40 000 units.
Each unit of the finished product which is manufactured requires four units of component R and three units of component T, together with a body shell S. These items are purchased from an outside supplier. Currently prices are:
|
Component R
|
£8.00 each
|
|
Component T
|
£5.00 each
|
|
Shell S
|
£30.00 each
|
The components are expected to increase in price by 10% with effect from 1 April 2001; no change is expected in the price of the shell.
Assembly of the shell and components into the finished product requires 6 labour hours: labour is currently paid £5.00 per hour. A 4% increase in wage costs is anticipated to take effect from 1 October 2001.
Variable overhead costs are expected to be £10 per unit for the whole of 2001; fixed production overhead costs are expected to be £240 000 for the year, and are absorbed on a per unit basis. Stocks on 31 December 2000 are expected to be as follows:
|
Finished units
|
9000 units
|
|
Component R
|
3000 units
|
|
Component T
|
5500 units
|
|
Shell S
|
500 units
|
Closing stocks at the end of each quarter are to be as follows:
|
Finished units
|
10% of next quarter’s sales
|
|
Component R
|
20% of next quarter’s
|
|
|
production requirements
|
|
Component T
|
15% of next quarter’s
|
|
|
production requirements
|
|
Shell S
|
10% of next quarter’s
|
|
|
production requirements
|
Requirement:
(a) Prepare the following budgets of D Limited for the year ending 31 December 2001, showing values for each quarter and the year in total:
(i) sales budget (in £s and units)
(ii) production budget (in units)
(iii) material usage budget (in units)
(iv) production cost budget (in £s).
(b) Sales are often considered to be the principal budget factor of an organisation.
Requirement:
Explain the meaning of the ‘principal budget factor’ and, assuming that it is sales, explain how sales may be forecast making appropriate reference to the use of statistical techniques and the use of microcomputers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of functional budgets
Data
Wilmslow Ltd makes two products, the Alpha and the Beta. Both products use the same material and labour but in different amounts. The company divides its year into four quarters, each of twelve weeks. Each week consists of five days and each day comprises 7 hours.
You are employed as the management accountant to Wilmslow Ltd.and you originally prepared a budget for quarter 3, the twelve weeks to 17 September. The basic data for that budget is reproduced below.
Original budgetary data: quarter 3
12 weeks to 17 September
|
Product
|
Alpha
|
Beta
|
|
Estimated demand
|
1800 units
|
2100 units
|
|
Material per unit
|
8 kilograms
|
12 kilograms
|
|
Labour per unit
|
3 hours
|
6 hours
|
Since the budget was prepared, three developments have taken place.
1. The company has begun to use linear regression and seasonal variations to forecast sales demand. Because of this, the estimated demand for quarter 3 has been revised to 2000 Alphas and 2400 Betas.
2. As a result of the revised sales forecasting, you have developed more precise estimates of sales and closing stock levels.
- The sales volume of both the Alpha and Beta in quarter 4 (the twelve weeks ending 10 December) will be 20% more than in the revised budget for quarter 3 as a result of seasonal variations.
- The closing stock of finished Alphas at the end of quarter 3 should represent 5 days sales for quarter 4.
- The closing stock of finished Betas at the end of quarter 3 should represent 10 days sales for quarter 4,
- Production in quarter 4 of both Alpha and Beta is planned to be 20% more than in the revised budget for quarter 3. The closing stock of materials at the ‘end of quarter 3 should be sufficient for 20 days production in quarter 4.
3. New equipment has been installed. The workforce is not familiar with the equipment. Because of this, for quarter 3, they will only be working at 80% of the efficiency assumed in the original budgetary data.
Other data from your original budget which has not changed is reproduced below:
- 50 production employees work a 35 hour week and are each paid £210 per week;
- overtime is paid for at £9 per hour;
- the cost of material is £10 per kilogram;
- opening stocks at the beginning of quarter
3 are as follows:
|
|
500 units
|
|
|
600 units
|
|
|
12 000 kilograms
|
- there will not be any work in progress at any time.
Task 1
The production director of Wilmslow Ltd wants to schedule production for quarter 3 (the twelve weeks ending 17 September) and asks you to use the revised information to prepare the following:
(a) the revised production budget for Alphas and Betas;
(b) the material purchases budget in kilograms;
(c) a statement showing the cost of the material purchases;
(d) the labour budget in hours;
(e) a statement showing the cost of labour.
Data
Margaret Brown is the financial director of Wilm-slow Ltd. She is not convinced that the use of linear regression, even when adjusted for seasonal variations, is the best way of forecasting sales volumes for Wilmslow Ltd.
The quality of sales forecasting is an agenda item for the next meeting of the Board of Directors and she asks for your advice.
Task 2
Write a brief memo to Margaret Brown. Your memo should:
(a) identify two limitations of the use of linear regression as a forecasting technique;
(b) suggest two other ways of sales forecasting.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of cash budgets
The following data and estimates are available for ABC Limited for June, July and August.
|
|
June
|
July
|
August
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Sales
|
45000
|
50000
|
60000
|
|
Wages
|
12000
|
13000
|
14500
|
|
Overheads
|
8500
|
9500
|
9000
|
The following information is available regarding direct materials:
|
|
June
|
July
|
August
|
September
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Opening stock
|
5000
|
3500
|
6000
|
4000
|
|
Material usage
|
8000
|
9000
|
10000
|
|
Notes:
1. 10% of sales are for cash, the balance is received the following month. The amount received in June for May’s sales is £29 500.
2. Wages are paid in the month they are incurred.
3. Overheads include £1500 per month for depreciation. Overheads are settled the month following. £6500 is to be paid in June for May’s overheads.
4. Purchases of direct materials are paid for in the month purchased.
5. The opening cash balance in June is £11 750.
6. A tax bill of £25 000 is to be paid in July.
Required:
(a) Calculate the amount of direct material purchases in each of the months of June, July and August.
(b) Prepare cash budgets for June, July and August.
(c) Describe briefly the advantages of preparing cash budgets.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of cash budgets
The management of Beck plc have been informed that the union representing the direct production workers at one of their factories, where a standard product is produced, intends to call a strike. The accountant has been asked to advise the management of the effect the strike will have on cash flow.
The following data has been made available:
|
|
Week 1
|
Week 2
|
Week 3
|
|
Budgeted sales
|
400 units
|
500 units
|
400 units
|
|
Budgeted
|
600 units
|
400 units
|
Nil
|
|
Production
|
|
|
|
The strike will commence at the beginning of week 3 and it should be assumed that it will continue for at least four weeks. Sales at 400 units per week will continue to be made during the period of the strike until stocks of finished goods are exhausted. Production will stop at the end of week 2. The current stock level of finished goods is 600 units. Stocks of work in progress are not carried.
The selling price of the product is £60 and the budgeted manufacturing cost is made up as follows:
|
|
(£)
|
|
Direct materials
|
15
|
|
Direct wages
|
7
|
|
Variable overheads
|
8
|
|
Fixed overheads
|
18
|
|
Total
|
£48
|
Direct wages are regarded as a variable cost. The company operates a full absorption costing system and the fixed overhead absorption rate is based upon a budgeted fixed overhead of £9000 per week. Included in the total fixed overheads is £700 per week for depreciation of equipment. During the period of the strike direct wages and variable overheads would not be incurred and the cash expended on fixed overheads would be reduced by £1500 per week.
The current stock of raw materials are worth £7500; it is intended that these stocks should increase to £11 000 by the end of week 1 and then remain at this level during the period of the strike. All direct materials are paid for one week after they have been received. Direct wages are paid one week in arrears. It should be assumed that all relevant overheads are paid for immediately the expense is incurred. All sales are on credit, 70% of the sales value is received in cash from the debtors at the end of the first week after the sales have been made and the balance at the end of the second week.
The current amount outstanding to material suppliers is £8000 and direct wage accruals amount to £3200. Both of these will be paid in week 1. The current balance owing from debtors is £31 200, of which £24 000 will be received during week 1 and the remainder during week 2. The current balance of cash at bank and in hand is £1000.
Required:
(a) (i) Prepare a cash budget for weeks 1 to 6 showing the balance of cash at the end of each week together with a suitable analysis of the receipts and payments during each week.
(ii) Comment upon any matters arising from the cash budget which you consider should be brought to management’s attention.
(b) Explain why the reported profit for a period does not normally represent the amount of cash generated in that period.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Victoria Hospital is located in a holiday resort that attracts visitors to such an extent that the population of the area is trebled for the summer months of June, July and August. From past experience, this influx of visitors doubles the activity of the hospital during these months. The annual budget for the hospital’s laundry department is broken down into four quarters, namely April—June, July—September, October—December and January—March, by dividing the annual budgeted by four. The budgeting work has been done for the current year by the secretary of the hospital using the previous year’s and adding 3% for inflation. It is realized by the Hospital Authority that management information for control purposes needs to be improved, and you have been recruited to help to introduce a system of responsibility accounting.
You are required, from the information given, to:
(a) comment on the way in which the quarterly budgets have been prepared and to suggest improvements that could be introduced when preparing the budgets for 2001/2002;
(b) state what information you would like to flow from the actual against budget comparison (note that calculated are not required);
(c) state the amendments that would be needed to the current practice of budgeting and reporting to enable the report shown below to be used as a measure of the efficiency of the laundry manager.
Victoria Hospital — Laundry department
Report for quarter ended 30 September 2000
|
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
|
Patients days
|
9000
|
12000
|
|
Weight processed (kgs)
|
180000
|
240000
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
|
Wages
|
8800
|
12320
|
|
Overtime premium
|
1400
|
2100
|
|
Detergents and other supplies
|
1800
|
2700
|
|
Water, water softening and heating
|
2000
|
2500
|
|
Maintenance
|
1000
|
1500
|
|
Depreciation of plant
|
2000
|
2000
|
|
Manager’s salary
|
1250
|
1500
|
|
Overhead, apportioned:
|
|
|
|
for occupancy
|
4000
|
4250
|
|
for administration
|
5000
|
5750
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
One common approach to organisational control theory is to look at the model of a cybernetic system. This is often illustrated by a diagram of a thermostat mechanism.
You are required:
(a) to explain the limitations of the simple feed-back control this model illustrates, as an explanation of the working of organisational control systems;
Note: A diagram is not required.
(b) to explain
(i) the required conditions (pre-requisites) for the existence of control in an organisation, which are often derived from this approach to control theory;
(ii) the difficulties of applying control in a not-for-profit organisation (NPO).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In his study of ‘The Impact of Budgets on People’, published in 1952, C. Argyris reported inter alia the following comment by a financial controller on the practice of participation in the setting of budgets in his company:
`We bring in the supervisors of budget areas, we tell them that we want their frank opinion, but most of them just sit there and nod their heads. We know they’re not coming out with exactly how they feel. I guess budgets scare them.’
You are required to suggest reasons why managers may be reluctant to participate fully in setting budgets, and to suggest also unwanted side effects which may arise from the imposition of budgets by senior management.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
`The major reason for introducing budgetary control and standard costing systems is to influence human behaviour and to motivate the managers to achieve the goals of the organization. However, the accounting literature provides many illustrations of accounting control systems that fail to give sufficient attention to influencing human behaviour towards the achievement of organization goals.’
You are required:
(a) To identify and discuss four situations where accounting control systems might not motivate desirable behaviour.
(b) To briefly discuss the improvements you would suggest in order to ensure that some of the dysfunctional behavioural consequences of accounting control systems are avoided.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Flexible budgets and the motivational role of budgets
Club Atlantic is an all-weather holiday complex providing holidays throughout the year. The fee charged to guests is fully inclusive of accommodation and all meals. However, because the holiday industry is so competitive, Club Atlantic is only able to generate profits by maintaining strict financial control of all activities.
The club’s restaurant is one area where there is a constant need to monitor costs. Susan Green is the manager of the restaurant. At the beginning of each year she is given an annual budget which is then broken down into months. Each month she receives a statement monitoring actual costs against the annual budget and highlighting any variances. The statement for the month ended 31 October is reproduced below along with a list of assumptions:
|
|
Club Atlantic Restaurant Performance
|
|
|
|
Statement Month to 31 October
|
|
|
|
|
|
Variance
|
|
|
|
|
(over)/
|
|
|
Actual
|
Budget
|
Under
|
|
Number of guest days
|
11160
|
|
9600
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Food
|
20500
|
|
20160
|
|
Cleaning materials
|
2232
|
1920
|
(312)
|
|
Heat, light and power
|
2050
|
2400
|
350
|
|
Catering wages
|
8400
|
7200
|
(1200)
|
|
Rent rates, insurance
|
|
|
|
|
and depreciation
|
1860
|
1800
|
(60)
|
|
|
35042
|
33480
|
(1562)
|
Assumptions:
(a) The budget has been calculated on the basis of a 30-day calendar month with the cost of rents, insurance and depreciation being an apportionment of the fixed annual charge.
(b) The budgeted catering wages assume that:
(i) there is one member of the catering staff for every forty guests staying at the complex;
(ii) the daily cost of a member of the catering staff is £30.
(c) All other budgeted costs are variable costs based on the number of guest days.
Task 1
Using the data above, prepare a revised performance statement using flexible budgeting. Your statement should show both the revised budget and the revised variances. Club Atlantic uses the existing budgets and performance statements to motivate its managers as well as for financial control. If managers keep expenses below budget they receive a bonus in addition to their salaries. A colleague of Susan is Brian Hilton. Brian is in charge of the swimming pool and golf course, both of which have high levels of fixed costs. Each month he manages to keep expenses below budget and in return enjoys regular bonuses. Under the current reporting system, Susan Green only rarely receives a bonus.
At a recent meeting with Club Atlantic’s directors Susan Green expressed concern that the performance statement was not a valid reflection of her management of the restaurant. You are currently employed by Hall and Co., the club’s auditors, and the directors of Club Atlantic have asked you to advise them whether there is any justification for Susan Green’s concern.
At the meeting with the Club’s directors, you were asked the following questions:
(a) Do budgets motivate managers to achieve objectives?
(b) Does motivating managers lead to improved performance?
(c) Does the current method of reporting performance motivate Susan Green and Brian Hilton to be more efficient?
Task 2
Write a brief letter to the directors of Club Atlantic addressing their question and justifying your answers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Responsibility centre performance reports
Data
Jim Smith has recently been appointed as the Head Teacher of Mayfield School in Midshire. The age of the pupils ranges from 11 years to 18 years. For many years, Midshire County Council was responsible for preparing and reporting on the school budget. From June, however, these responsibilities passed to the Head Teacher of Mayfield School.
You have recently accepted a part-time appointment as the accountant to Mayfield School, although your previous accounting experience has been gained in commercial organisations. Jim Smith is hoping that you will be able to apply that experience to improving the financial reporting procedures at Mayfield School.
The last budget statement prepared by Midshire County Council is reproduced below. It covers the ten months to the end of May and all refer to cash payments made.
Midshire County Council Mayfield School
Statement of school expenditure against budget: 10 months ending May
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
Expenditure
|
Budget
|
Under/over
|
budget
|
|
|
to date
|
to date
|
spend
|
year
|
|
Teachers — full-time
|
1680250
|
1682500
|
2250 Cr
|
2019000
|
|
Teachers — part-time
|
35238
|
34600
|
638
|
41520
|
|
Other employee expenses
|
5792
|
150000
|
9208 Cr
|
18000
|
|
Administrative staff
|
69137
|
68450
|
687
|
82140
|
|
Caretaker and cleaning
|
492567
|
57205
|
7938 Cr
|
68646
|
|
Resources (books, etc.)
|
120673
|
100000
|
20673 458
|
120000
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
458
|
0
|
7000 Cr
|
0
|
|
Lighting and heating
|
59720
|
66720
|
3971
|
80064
|
|
Rates
|
23826
|
19855
|
15279 Cr
|
23826
|
|
Fixed assets:
|
84721
|
100000
|
1945
|
120000
|
|
furniture and
|
|
|
|
|
|
equipment
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stationery, postage
|
1945
|
0
|
2 700
|
0
|
|
and phone
|
|
|
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expenses
|
9450
|
6750
|
2250 Cr
|
8100
|
|
Total
|
214077
|
2151080
|
10603
|
258196
|
Task 1
Write a memo to Jim Smith. Your memo should:
(a) identify four weaknesses of the existing statement as a management report;
(b) include an improved outline statement format showing revised column headings and a more meaningful classification of costs which will help Jim Smith to manage his school effectively ( are not required);
(c) give two advantages of your proposed format over the existing format.
Data
The income of Mayfield School is based on the number of pupils at the school. Jim Smith provides you with the following breakdown of student numbers.
Mayfield School:
Student numbers as at 31 May
|
School
|
Age
|
Current
|
|
year
|
range
|
number of pupils
|
|
1
|
11-12
|
300
|
|
2
|
12-13
|
350
|
|
3
|
13-14
|
325
|
|
4
|
14-15
|
360
|
|
5
|
15-16
|
380
|
|
6
|
16-17
|
240
|
|
7
|
17-18
|
220
|
|
Total number of students
|
|
2175
|
Jim also provides you with the following information relating to existing pupils:
- pupils move up one school-year at the end of July;
- for those pupils entering year 6, there is an option to leave the school. As a result only 80% of the current school-year 5 pupils go on to enter school-year 6;
- of those currently in school-year 6 only 95% continue into school-year 7;
- pupils currently in school-year 7 leave to go on to higher education or employment;
- the annual income per pupil is £1200 in years 1 to 5 and £1500 in years 6 to 7.
The new year 1 pupils come from the final year at four junior schools. Not all pupils, however, elect to go to Mayfield School. Jim has investigated this matter and derived accurate estimates of the proportion of final year pupils at each of the four junior schools who go on to attend Mayfield School.
The number of pupils in the final year at each of the four junior schools is given below along with Jim’s estimate of the proportion likely to choose Mayfield School.
|
|
Number
|
Proportion
|
|
Junior
|
in final year
|
choosing
|
|
School
|
at 31 May
|
Mayfield School
|
|
Ranmoor
|
60
|
0.9
|
|
Hallamshire
|
120
|
0.8
|
|
Broomhill
|
140
|
0.9
|
|
Endcliffe
|
80
|
0.5
|
Task 2
(a) Forecast the number of pupils and the income of Mayfield School for the next year from August to July
(b) Assuming expenditure next year is 5% more than the current annual budgeted expenditure, calculate the budgeted surplus or deficit of Mayfield School for next year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recommendations for improvements to a performance report and a review of the management control system
Your firm has been consulted by the managing director of Inzone plc, which owns a chain of retail stores. Each store has departinents selling furniture, tableware and kitchenware. Departmental managers are responsible to a store manager, who is in turn responsible to head office (HO).
All goods for sale are ordered centrally and stores, sell at prices fixed by HO. Store managers (aided by departmental managers) order stocks from HO and stores are charged interest based on
– month-end stock levels. HO appoints all permanent -staff and sets all pay levels. Store managers can engage or dismiss temporary workers, and are responsible for store running expenses.
The introduction to Inzone plc’s management accounting manual states:
`Budgeting starts three months before the budget year, with product sales projections which are developed by HO buyers in consultation with each store’s departmental managers. Expense budgets, adjusted for expected inflation, are then prepared by HO for each store. Inzone plc’s accounting year is divided into 13 four-weekly control periods, and the budgeted sales and expenses are assigned to periods with due regard to seasonal factors. The budgets are completed one month before the year begins on 1st January.
`All HO expenses are recharged to stores in order to give the clearest indication of the “bottom line” profit of each store. These HO costs are mainly buying expenses, which are recharged to stores according to their square footage.
`Store reports comparing actual results with budgets are on the desks of HO and store management one week after the end of each control period. Significant variations in performance are then investigated, and appropriate action taken.’
Ms Lewis is manager of an Inzone plc store. She is eligible for a bonus equal to 5% of the amount by which her store’s ‘bottom-line’ profit exceeds the year’s budget. However, Ms Lewis sees no chance of a bonus this year, because major roadworks near the store are disrupting trade. Her store report for the four weeks ending 21 June is as follows:
Actual Budget
(£)
|
|
Actual Budget
|
Actual Budget
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Sales
|
98850
|
110000
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods
|
|
|
|
(including stock losses)
|
63100
|
70200
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
5300
|
5500
|
|
Rent
|
11000
|
11000
|
|
Depreciation of store fittings
|
500
|
500
|
|
Distribution costs
|
4220
|
4500
|
|
Other store running expenses
|
1970
|
2000
|
|
Interest charge on stocks
|
3410
|
3500
|
|
Store’s share of HO costs
|
2050
|
2000
|
|
Store profit
|
7300
|
10800
|
|
|
98850
|
110000
|
|
Stocks held at end of period
|
341000
|
350000
|
|
Store fittings at written down value
|
58000
|
58000
|
Requirements:
(a) Make recommendations for the improvement of Inzone plc’s store report, briefly justifying each recommendation.
(b) Prepare a report for the managing director of Inzone plc reviewing the company’s responsibility delegation, identifying the major strengths and weaknesses of Inzone plc’s management control system, and recommending any changes you consider appropriate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AB p.l.c. makes two products, Alpha and Beta. The company made a £500 000 profit last year and proposes an identical plan for the coming year. The relevant data for last year are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1: Actuals for last year
|
|
Product
|
Product
|
|
|
Alpha
|
Beta
|
|
Actual production and sales (units)
|
20000
|
40000
|
|
Total costs per unit
|
£20
|
£40
|
|
Selling prices per unit (25% on cost)
|
£25
|
£50
|
|
Machining time per unit (hours)
|
2
|
1
|
|
Potential demand at above selling prices (units)
|
30000
|
50000
|
Fixed costs were £480 000 for the year, absorbed on machining hours which were fully utilized for the production achieved.
A new Managing Director has been appointed and he is somewhat sceptical about the plan being proposed. Furthermore, he thinks that additional machining capacity should be installed to remove any production bottlenecks and wonders whether a more flexible pricing policy should be adopted.
Table 2 summarizes the changes in costs involved for the extra capacity and gives price/demand data, supplied by the Marketing Department, applicable to the conditions expected in the next period.
Table 2:
Costs
Extra machining capacity would increase fixed costs by 10% in total. Variable costs and machining times per unit would remain unchanged.
|
|
Product
|
Product
|
|
Price/demand data
|
Alpha
|
Beta
|
|
Price range (per unit)
|
£20-30
|
£45-55
|
|
Expected demand (000 units)
|
45-15
|
70-30
|
You are required to
(a) calculate the plan to maximize profits for the coming year based on the data and selling prices in Table 1;
(b) comment on the pricing system for the existing plan used in Table 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculation of cost-plus selling price and an evaluation of pricing decisions
A firm manufactures two products EXE and WYE in departments dedicated exclusively to them. There are also three service departments, stores, maintenance and administration. No stocks are held as the products deteriorate rapidly.
Direct costs of the products, which are variable in the context of the whole business, are identified to each department. The step-wise apportionment of service department costs to the manufacturing departments is based on estimates of the usage of the service provided. These are expressed as percentages and assumed to be reliable over the current capacity range. The general factory over-heads of £3.6m, which are fixed, are apportioned based on floor space occupied. The company establishes product costs based on budgeted volume and marks up these costs by 25% in order to set target selling prices.
Extracts from the budgets for the forthcoming year are provided below:
|
|
Annual volume
|
|
|
(units)
|
|
|
EXE
|
WYE
|
|
Max capacity
|
200000
|
100000
|
|
Budget
|
150000
|
70000
|
|
|
EXE
|
WYE Stores
|
Maintenance
|
Admin
|
|
Costs (£m)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Material
|
1.8
|
0.7
|
0.1
|
0.1
|
|
|
Other variable
|
0.8
|
0.5
|
0.1
|
0.2
|
0.2
|
|
Departmental usage (%)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
50
|
25
|
25
|
|
|
|
Administration
|
40
|
30
|
20
|
10
|
|
|
Stores
|
60
|
40
|
|
|
|
|
Floor space (sq m)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
640
|
480
|
240
|
80
|
160
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Required:
Workings may be £000 with unit prices to the nearest penny.
(a) Calculate the budgeted selling price of one unit of EXE and WYE based on the usual mark up.
(b) Discuss how the company may respond to each of the following independent events, which represent additional business opportunities.
(i) an enquiry from an overseas customer for 3000 units only of WYE where a price of £35 per unit is offered an enquiry for 50 000 units of WYE to be supplied in full at regular intervals during the forthcoming year at a price which is equivalent to full cost plus 10% In both cases support your discussion with calculations and comment on any assumptions or matters on which you would seek clarification.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost-plus and relevant cost information for pricing decisions
Josun plc manufactures cereal based foods, including various breakfast cereals under private brand labels. In March the company had been approached by Cohin plc, a large national supermarket chain, to tender for the manufacture and supply of a crunchy style breakfast cereal made from oats, nuts, raisins, etc. The tender required Josun to quote prices for a 1.5 kg packet at three different weekly volumes: 50 000, 60 000 and 70 000. Josun plc had, at present, excess capacity on some of its machines and could make a maximum of 80 000 packets of cereal a week.
Josun’s management accountant is asked to prepare a costing for the Cohin tender. The company prepares its tender prices on the basis of full cost plus 15% of cost as a profit margin. The full cost is made up of five elements: raw materials per packet of £0.30p; operating wages £0.12p per packet; manufacturing overheads costed at 200% of operating wages; administration and other corporate overheads at 100% of operating wages; and packaging and transport costing £0.10p per packet. The sales manager has suggested that as an incentive to Cohin, the profit margin be cut on the 60 000 and 70 000 tenders by 2% and 1% to 144% and 14% respectively. The manufacturing and administration overheads are forecast as fixed at £12 500 per week, unless output drops to 50 000 units or below per week, when a saving of £1000 per week can be made. If no contract is undertaken then all the manufacturing and administration overheads will be saved except for £600 per week. If the tender is accepted’ the volume produced and sold will be determined by the sales achieved by Cohin.
A week before the Cohin tender is to be presented for negotiation, Josun – receives an enquiry from Stamford plc, a rival supermarket chain, to produce, weekly, 60 000 packets of a similar type of breakfast cereal of slightly superior quality at a price of £1.20 per 1.5 kg packet, the quality and mix of the cereal constituents being laid down by Stamford. This product will fill a gap in Stamford’s private label range of cereals. The estimated variable costs for this contract. would be: raw materials £0.40p per packet, operating labour £0.15p per packet and packaging and transport £0.12p per packet. None of the 80 000 weekly capacity could be used for another product if either of these contracts were taken up.
You are required to:
(a) compute the three selling prices per packet for the Cohin tender using Josun’s normal pricing method;
(b)advise Josun, giving your financial reasons, on the relative merits of the two contracts;
(c)discuss the merits of full-cost pricing as a method of arriving at selling prices;
(d)make recommendations to Josun as to the method it might use to derive its selling prices in future;
(e) calculate the expected value of each tender given the following information and recommend which potential customer should receive the greater sales effort. It is estimated that there is a 70% chance of Stamford signing the contract for the weekly production of 60 000 packets, while there is a 20% chance of Cohin not accepting the tender. It is also estimated that the probabilities of Cohin achieving weekly sales volumes of 50 000, 60 000 or 70 000 are 0.3, 0.5 and 0.2 respectively. The two sets of negotiations are completely inde-pendent of each other;
(f) provide, with reasons, for each of the two contracts under negotiation, a minimum and a recommended price that Josun could ask for the extra quantity that could be produced under each contract and which would ensure the full utilization of Josun’s weekly capacity of 80 000 packets.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manager is considering whether to make product A or product B, but only one can be produced. The estimated sales demand for each product is uncertain. A detailed investigation of the possible sales demand for each product gives the following probability distribution of -the profits for each product.
|
Product A probability distribution
|
|
|
(1)
|
(2)
|
(3)
|
|
Estimated
|
Weighted
|
|
|
Outcome
|
probability
|
(col. 1 amount x col. 2)
|
|
|
|
(£)
|
|
Profits of £6000
|
0.10
|
600
|
|
Profits of £7000
|
0.20
|
1400
|
|
Profits of £8000
|
0.40
|
3200
|
|
Profits of £9000
|
0.20
|
1800
|
|
Profits of £10 000
|
0.10
|
1000
|
|
|
1.00
|
|
|
|
Expected value
|
8000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Product B probability distribution
|
|
|
(1)
|
(2)
|
(3)
|
|
Estimated
|
Weighted
|
|
|
Outcome
|
probability
|
(col. 1 amount x col. 2)
|
|
|
|
(£)
|
|
Profits of £4000
|
0.05
|
200
|
|
Profits of £6000
|
0.10
|
600
|
|
Profits of £8000
|
0.40
|
3200
|
|
Profits of £10 000
|
0.25
|
2500
|
|
Profits of £12 000
|
0.20
|
2400
|
|
|
1.00
|
|
|
|
Expected value
|
8900
|
Which product should the company make?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company is considering whether to develop and market a new product. Development costs are estimated to be £180 000, and there is a 0.75 probability that the development effort will be successful and a 0.25 probability that the development effort will be unsuccessful. If the development is successful,
the product will be marketed, and it is estimated that:
1. if the product is very successful profits will be £540 000;
2. if the product is moderately successful profits will be £100 000;
3. if the product is a failure, there will be a loss of £400 000.
Each of the above profit and loss calculations is after taking into account the development costs of £180 000. The estimated probabilities of each of the above events are as follows:
|
1.
|
Very successful
|
0.4
|
|
2.
|
Moderately successful
|
0.3
|
|
3.
|
Failure
|
0.3
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Boston Company must choose between one of two machines —machine A has low fixed costs and high unit variable costs whereas machine B has high fixed costs and low unit variable costs. Consequently, machine A is most suited to low-level demand whereas machine B
is suited to high-level demand. For simplicity assume that there are only two possible
demand levels — low and high — and the estimated probability of each of these events
is 0.5. The estimated profits for each demand level are as follows:
|
|
Low demand
|
High demand
|
Expected value
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Machine A
|
100000
|
160
|
000
|
|
Machine B
|
10000
|
200000
|
105000
|
There is a possibility of employing a firm of market consultants who would be able to provide a perfect prediction of the actual demand. What is the maximum amount the company should be prepared to pay the consultants for the additional information?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Siteraze Ltd is a company which engages in site clearance and site preparation work. Information concerning its operations is as follows:
(i) It is company policy to hire all plant and machinery required for the implementation of all orders obtained, rather than to purchase its own plant and machinery.
(ii) Siteraze Ltd will enter into an advance hire agreement contract for the coming year at one of three levels — high, medium or low, which correspond to the requirements of a high, medium or low level of orders obtained.
(iii) The level of orders obtained will not be known when the advance hire agreement contract is entered into. A set of probabilities have been estimated by management as to the likelihood of the orders being at a high, medium or low level.
(iv) Where the advance hire agreement entered into is lower than that required for the level of orders actually obtained, a premium rate must be paid to obtain the additional plant and machinery required.
(v) No refund is obtainable where the advance hire agreement for plant and machinery is at a level in excess of that required to satisfy the site clearance and preparation orders actually obtained.
A summary of the information relating to the above points is as follows:
|
|
|
|
Plant and machinery hire costs
|
|
Level of
|
|
|
Advance
|
Conversion
|
|
orders
|
Turnover
|
Probability
|
hire
|
premium
|
|
|
(£000)
|
|
(£000)
|
(£000)
|
|
High
|
15000
|
0.25
|
2300
|
|
|
Medium
|
8 500
|
0.45
|
1500
|
|
|
Low
|
4 000
|
0.30
|
1000
|
|
|
Low to medium
|
|
|
|
850
|
|
Medium to
|
|
|
|
|
|
high
|
|
|
|
1300
|
|
Low to high
|
|
|
|
2150
|
Variable cost (as percentage of turnover) 70%
Required: Using the information given above:
(a) Prepare a summary which shows the forecast net margin earned by Siteraze Ltd for the coming year for each possible outcome.
(b) On the basis of maximizing expected value, advise Siteraze whether the advance contract for the hire of plant and machinery should be at the low, medium or high level.
(c) Explain how the risk preferences of the management members responsible for the choice of advance plant and machinery hire contract may alter the decision reached in (b) above.
(d) Siteraze Ltd are considering employing a market research consultant who will be able to say with certainty in advance of the placing of the plant and machinery hire contract, which level of site clearance and preparation orders will be obtained. On the basis of expected value, determine the maximum sum which Siteraze Ltd should be willing to pay the consultant for this information.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP analysis and uncertainty
(a) The accountant of Laburnum Ltd is preparing documents for a forthcoming meeting of the budget committee. Currently, variable cost is 40% of selling price and total fixed costs are £40 000 per year.
The company uses an historical cost accounting system. There is concern that the level of costs may rise during the ensuing year and the chairman of the budget committee has expressed interest in a probabilistic approach to an investigation of the effect that this will have on historic cost profits. The accountant is attempting to prepare the documents in a way which will be most helpful to the committee members. He has obtained the following estimates from his colleagues:
|
|
Average inflation
|
|
|
|
rate over ensuing year
|
Probability
|
|
Pessimistic
|
10%
|
0.4
|
|
Most likely
|
5%
|
0.5
|
|
Optimistic
|
1%
|
0.1
|
|
|
|
1.0
|
|
|
Demand at current
|
|
|
|
selling prices
|
Probability
|
|
Pessimistic
|
£50 000
|
0.3
|
|
Most likely
|
£75 000
|
0.6
|
|
Optimistic
|
£100 000
|
0.1
|
|
|
|
1.0
|
The demand are given in terms of sales value at the current level of selling prices but it is considered that the company could adjust its selling prices in line with the inflation rate without affecting customer demand in real terms.
Some of the company’s fixed costs are contractually fixed and some are apportionments of past costs; of the total fixed costs, an estimated 85% will remain constant irrespective of the inflation rate.
You are required to analyse the foregoing information in a way which you consider will assist management with its budgeting problem. Although you should assume that the directors of Laburnum Ltd are solely interested in the effect of inflation on historic cost profits, you should comment on the validity of the accountant’s intended approach. As part of your analysis you are required to calculate:
the probability of at least breaking even, and
the probability of achieving a profit of at least £20 000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pricing decision and the calculation of expected profit and margin of safety
E Ltd manufactures a hedge-trimming device which has been sold at £16 per unit for a number of years. The selling price is to be reviewed and the following information is available on costs and likely demand.
The standard variable cost of manufacture is £10 per unit and an analysis of the cost variances for the past 20 months show the following pattern which the production manager expects to continue in the future.
Adverse variances of +10% of standard variable cost occurred in ten of the months.
Nil variances occurred in six of the months. Favourable variances of 5% of standard variable cost occurred in four of the months.
Monthly data
Fixed costs have been £4 per unit on an average sales level of 20 000 units but these costs are expected to rise in the future and the following estimates have been made for the total fixed cost:
|
|
(£)
|
|
Optimistic estimate (Probability 0.3)
|
82 000
|
|
Most likely estimate (Probability 0.5)
|
85 000
|
|
Pessimistic estimate (Probability 0.2)
|
90 000
|
The demand estimates at the two new selling prices being considered are as follows:
|
If the selling
|
|
|
|
price/unit is
|
£17
|
£18
|
|
demand would be:
|
|
|
|
Optimistic estimate
|
21 000 units
|
19 000 units
|
|
(Probability 0.2)
|
|
|
|
Most likely estimate
|
19000 units
|
17500 units
|
|
(Probability 0.5)
|
|
|
|
Pessimistic estimate
|
16500 units
|
15500 units
|
|
(Probability 0.3)
|
|
|
It can be assumed that all estimates and probabilities are independent.
You are required to
(a) advise management, based only on the information given above, whether they should alter the selling price and, if so, the price you would recommend;
(b) calculate the expected profit at the price you recommend and the resulting margin of safety, expressed as a percentage of expected sales;
(c) criticise the method of analysis you have used to deal with the probabilities given in the question;
(d) describe briefly how computer assistance might improve the analysis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Output decision based on expected values
A ticket agent has an arrangement with a concert hall that holds pop concerts on 60 nights a year whereby he receives discounts as follows per concert:
|
|
He receives a
|
|
For purchase of:
|
discount of:
|
|
200 tickets
|
20%
|
|
300 tickets
|
25%
|
|
400 tickets
|
30%
|
|
500 tickets or more
|
40%
|
Purchases must be in full hundreds. The average price per ticket is £3.
He must decide in advance each year the number of tickets he will purchase. If he has any tickets unsold by the afternoon of the concert he must return them to the box office. If the box office sells any of these he receives 60% of their price.
His sales records over a few years show that for a concert with extremely popular artistes he can be confident of selling 500 tickets, for one with lesser known artistes 350 tickets, and for one with relatively unknown artistes 200 tickets.
His records also show that 10% of tickets he returns are sold by the box office.
His administration costs incurred in selling tickets are the same per concert irrespective of the popularity of the artistes.
There are two possible scenarios in which his sales records can be viewed:
Scenario 1: that, on average, he can expect concerts with lesser known artistes
Scenario 2: that the frequency of concerts will be:
|
|
(%)
|
|
with popular artistes
|
45
|
|
with lesser known artistes
|
30
|
|
with unknown artistes
|
25
|
|
|
100
|
You are required to calculate:
A. separately for each of Scenarios 1 and 2:
(a) the expected demand for tickets per concert;
(b) (i) the level of his purchases of tickets per concert that will give him the largest profit over a long period of time;
(ii) the profit per concert that this level
of purchases of tickets will yield;
B. for Scenario 2 only: the maximum sum per annum that the ticket agent should pay to a pop concert specialist for 100% correct predictions as to the likely success of each concert.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pricing decision based on competitor’s response
In the market for one of its products, MD and its two major competitors (CN and KL) together account for 95% of total sales.
The quality of MD’s products is viewed by customers as being somewhat better than that of its competitors and therefore at similar prices it has an advantage.
During the past year, however, when MD raised its price to £1.2 per litre, competitors kept their prices at f1.0 per litre and MD’s sales declined even though the total market grew in volume.
MD is now considering whether to retain or reduce its price for the coming year. Its expectations about its likely volume at various prices charged by itself and its competitors are as follows:
|
|
|
|
|
|
MID
|
CN
|
KL
|
MD’s expected sales
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
million litres
|
|
1.2
|
1.2
|
1.2
|
2.7
|
|
1.2
|
1.2
|
1.1
|
2.3
|
|
1.2
|
1.2
|
1.0
|
2.2
|
|
1.2
|
1.1
|
1.1
|
2.4
|
|
1.2
|
1.1
|
1.0
|
2.2
|
|
1.2
|
1.1
|
1.0
|
2.1
|
|
1.1
|
1.1
|
1.1
|
2.8
|
|
1.1
|
1.0
|
1.0
|
2.4
|
|
1.1
|
1.0
|
1.0
|
2.3
|
|
1.0
|
1.0
|
1.0
|
2.9
|
Experience has shown that CN tends to react to MD’s price level and KL tends to react to CN’s price level. MD therefore assesses the following
8.6 Expected value, maxim in and regret probabilities:
|
If MD’s price
|
there is a
|
that CN’s price
|
|
per litre is
|
probability of
|
per litre will be
|
|
1.2
|
0.2
|
1.2
|
|
|
0.4
|
1.1
|
|
|
0.4
|
1.0
|
|
|
1.0
|
|
|
1.1
|
0.3
|
1.1
|
|
|
0.7
|
1.0
|
|
|
1.0
|
|
|
1.0
|
1.0
|
1.0
|
|
If CN’s price
|
there is a
|
that ICUs price
|
|
per litre is
|
probability of
|
per litre will be
|
|
(£)
|
|
(£)
|
|
1.2
|
0.1
|
1.2
|
|
|
0.6
|
1.1
|
|
|
0.3
|
1.0
|
|
|
1.0
|
|
|
1.1
|
0.3
|
1.1
|
|
|
0.7
|
1.0
|
|
|
1.0
|
|
|
1.0
|
1.0
|
1.0
|
Costs per litre of the product are as follows:
|
Direct wages
|
£0.24
|
|
Direct materials
|
£0.12
|
|
DepartMental expenses:
|
|
|
Indirect wages,
|
16 2/3 % of
|
|
maintenance
|
direct wages
|
|
and supplies
|
|
|
Supervision and depreciation
|
£540 000 per annum
|
|
General works expenses (allocated)
|
16 2/3 % of prime cost
|
|
Selling and administration
|
50% of manufacturing cost
|
|
expenses (allocated)
|
|
You are required to state whether, on the basis of the data given above, it would be most advantageous for MD to fix its price per litre for the coming year at £1.2, £1.1 or £1.0.
Support your answer with relevant calculations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Decision tree, expected value and maximin criterion
(a) The Alternative Sustenance Company is considering introducing a new franchised product, Wholefood Waffles.
Existing ovens now used for making some of the present ‘Half-Baked’ range of products could be used instead for baking the Whole-food Waffles. However, new special batch mixing equipment would be needed. This cannot be purchased, but can be hired from the franchiser in three alternative specifications, for batch sizes of 200, 300 and 600 units respectively. The annual cost of hiring the mixing equipment would be £5000, £15 000 and -£21 500 respectively.
The ‘Half-Baked’ product which would be dropped from the range currently earns a contribution of £90 000 per annum, which it is confidently expected could be continued if the product were retained in the range.
The company’s marketing manager considers that, at the market price for Wholefood Waffles of £0.40 per unit, it is equally probable that the demand for this product would be 600 000 or 1 000 000 units per annum.
The company’s production manager has estimated the variable costs per unit of making Wholefood Waffles and the probabilities of those costs being incurred, as follows:
|
Batch size:
|
200 units
|
300 units
|
600 units
|
600 units
|
|
Cost per
|
Probability
|
Probability
|
Probability
|
Probability
|
|
unit (pence)
|
if annual
|
if annual
|
if annual
|
if annual
|
|
|
sales are
|
sales are
|
sales are
|
sales are
|
|
|
either
|
either
|
600 000
|
1 000 000
|
|
|
600 000
|
600 000
|
units
|
|
|
|
or 1 000 000
|
or 1 000 000
|
|
|
|
|
units
|
units
|
|
|
|
£0.20
|
0.1
|
0.2
|
0.3
|
0.5
|
|
£0.25
|
0.1
|
0.5
|
0.1
|
0.2
|
|
£0.30
|
0.8
|
0.3
|
0.6
|
0.3
|
You are required:
(i) to draw a decision tree setting out the problem faced by the company,
(ii) to show in each of the following three independent situations which size of mixing machine, if any, the company should hire:
(1) to satisfy a `maximin’ (or ‘minimax’ criterion),
(2) to maximize the expected value of contribution per annum,
(3) to minimize the probability of earning an annual contribution of less than £100 000.
(b) You are required to outline briefly the strengths and limitations of the methods of analysis which you have used in part (a) above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Bothnia Company is evaluating two projects with an expected life of three years and an investment outlay of £1 million. The estimated net cash inflows for each project are as follows:
|
|
Project A
|
Project B
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Year 1
|
300000
|
600000
|
|
Year 2
|
1000000
|
600000
|
|
Year 3
|
400000
|
600000
|
The opportunity cost of capital for both projects is 10%. You are required to calculate the net present value for each project.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cash flows and NPV calculations for two projects are as follows:
|
|
Project A
|
Project B
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Initial cost
|
|
50000
|
|
50000
|
|
Net cash inflows
|
|
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
10000
|
|
10000
|
|
|
Year 2
|
20000
|
|
10000
|
|
|
Year 3
|
20000
|
|
10000
|
|
|
Year 4
|
20000
|
|
20000
|
|
|
Year 5
|
10000
|
|
30000
|
|
|
Year 6
|
|
|
30000
|
|
|
Year 7
|
|
80000
|
30000
|
140000
|
|
NPV at a 10% cost capital
|
|
10500
|
|
39460
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cash flows and NPV calculation for project C are as follows:
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Initial cost
|
|
50 000
|
|
Net cash inflows
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
10 000
|
|
|
Year 2
|
20 000
|
|
|
Year 3
|
20 000
|
|
|
Year 4
|
3 500
|
|
|
Year 5
|
3 500
|
|
|
Year 6
|
3 500
|
|
|
Year 7
|
3 500
|
64 000
|
|
NPV (at 10% cost of capital)
|
|
(— 1036)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Sentosa Company operates in Ruratania where investments in plant and machinery are eligible for 25% annual writing-down allowances on the written-down value using the reducing balance method of depreciation. The corporate tax rate is 35%. The company is considering whether to purchase some machinery which will cost £1 million and which is expected to result in additional net cash inflows and profits of £500 000 per annum for four years. It is anticipated that the machinery will be sold at the end of year 4 for its written-down value for taxation purposes. Assume a one year lag in the payment of taxes. Calculate the net present value.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company is preparing its capital budget for the year. A question has arisen as to whether or not to replace a machine with a new and more efficient machine. An analysis of the situation reveals the following based on operations at a normal level of activity.
|
|
Old machine
|
New machine
|
|
Cost new
|
£40 000
|
£80 000
|
|
Book value
|
£30 000
|
|
|
Estimated physical life remaining
|
10 years
|
10 years
|
|
Depreciation per year
|
£4000
|
£8000
|
|
Labour cost per year
|
£15000
|
£5000
|
|
Material cost per year
|
£350000
|
£345000
|
|
Power per year
|
£2000
|
£4500
|
|
Maintenance per year
|
£5000
|
£7500
|
The expected scrap value of both the new and the old machine in 10 years’ time is estimated to be zero. The old machine could be sold now for £20 000.
The cost of capital and the investment cut-off rate for the company is 10%. Advise thecompany.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data is supplied relating to two investment projects, only one of which may be selected:
|
|
Project A
|
Project B
|
|
Initial capital expenditure
|
50000
|
50000
|
|
Profit (loss) year 1
|
25000
|
10000
|
|
2
|
20000
|
10000
|
|
3
|
15000
|
14000
|
|
4
|
10000
|
26000
|
|
Estimated resale value end of year 4
|
10000
|
10000
|
Notes:
(1) Profit is calculated after deducting straight-line depreciation
(2) The cost of capital is 10%.
Required:
(a) Calculate for each project:
(i) average annual rate of return on average capital invested;
(ii) payback period;
(iii) net present value.
(b) Briefly discuss the relative merits of the three methods of evaluation mentioned in (a) above.
(c) Explain which project you would recommend for acceptance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Payback, accounting rate of return and NPV calculations plus a discussion of qualitative factors
The following information relates to three possible capital expenditure projects. Because of capital rationing only one project can be accepted.
|
|
|
Project
|
|
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
|
Initial Cost
|
£200000
|
£230000
|
£180000
|
|
Expected Life
|
5 years’
|
5 years
|
4 years
|
|
Scrap value expected
|
£10000
|
£15000
|
£8000
|
|
Expected Cash
|
(£)
|
(E)
|
(E)
|
|
Inflows
|
|
|
|
|
End Year 1
|
80000
|
100000
|
55000
|
|
2
|
70000
|
70000
|
65000
|
|
3
|
65000
|
50000
|
95000
|
|
4
|
60000
|
50000
|
100000
|
|
5
|
55000
|
50000
|
|
The company estimates its cost of capital is 18%. Calculate
(a) The pay back period for each project.
(b) The Accounting Rate of Return for each project.
(c) The Net present value of each project.
(d) Which project should be accepted — give reasons.
(e) Explain the factors management would need to consider: in addition to the financial factors before making a final decision on a project.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion of alternative investment appraisal techniques and the calculation of payback and NPV for two mutually exclusive projects
(a) Explain why Net Present Value is considered technically superior to Payback and Accounting Rate of Return as an investment appraisal technique even though the latter are said to be easier to understand by management. Highlight the strengths of the Net Present Value method and the weaknesses of the other two (c)
methods.
(b) Your company has the option to invest in projects T and R but finance is only available to invest in one of them.
You are given the following projected data:
|
Project
|
T
|
R
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Initial Cost
|
70000
|
60000
|
|
Profits: Year 1
|
15000
|
20000
|
|
Year 2
|
18000
|
25000
|
|
Year 3
|
20000
|
(50000)
|
|
Year 4
|
32000
|
10000
|
|
Year 5
|
18000
|
3000
|
|
Year 6
|
|
2000
|
You are told:
(1) All cash flows take place at the end of the year apart from the original investment in the project which takes place at the beginning of the project.
(2) Project T machinery is to be disposed of at the end of year 5 with a scrap value of £10 000.
(3) Project R machinery is to be disposed of at the end of year 3 with a nil scrap value and replaced with new project machinery that will cost £75 000.
(4) The cost of this additional machinery has been deducted in arriving at the profit projections for R for year 3. It is projected that it will last for three years and have a nil scrap value.
(5) The company’s policy is to depreciate its assets on a straight line basis.
(6) The discount rate to be used by the company is 14%.
Required:
(i) If investment wag’ to be made in project R determine whether the machinery should be replaced at the end of year 3.
(ii) Calculate for projects T and R, taking into consideration your decision in (i) above:
(a) Payback period
(b) Net present value and advise which project should be invested in, stating your reasons.
(c) Explain what the discount rate of 14% represents and state two ways how it might have been arrived at.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data are to be used for sub-questions (i) and (ii) below:
|
Budgeted labour hours
|
8 500
|
|
Budgeted overheads
|
£148 750
|
|
Actual labour hours
|
7 928
|
|
Actual overheads
|
£146 200
|
(i) Based on the data given above, what is the labour hour overhead absorption rate?
A £17.50 per hour
B £17.20 per hour
C £18.44 per hour
D £18.76 per hour Based on the data given above, what is the amount of overhead under/over-absorbed?
A £2550 under-absorbed
B £2529 over-absorbed
C £2550 over-absorbed
D £7460 under-absorbed
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A firm makes special assemblies to customers’ orders and uses job costing. The data for a period are:
|
|
Job no.
|
Job no.
|
Job no.
|
|
|
AA10
|
BB15
|
CC20
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Opening WIP
|
26800
|
42790
|
—
|
|
Material added in period
|
17275
|
—
|
18500
|
|
Labour for period
|
14500
|
3500
|
24600
|
The budgeted overheads for the period were £126 000.
(i) What overhead should be added to job number CC20 for the period?
A £24 600
B £65157
C £72 761
D £126 000
(ii) Job no. BB15 was completed and delivered during the period and the firm wishe§ to earn 331% profit on sales.
What is the selling price of job number BB15?
A £69435
B £75 521
C £84 963
D £138870
(iii) What was the approximate value of closing work in progress at the end of the period?
A £58 575
B £101675
C £147 965
D £217 323
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overhead analysis and calculation of product costs
A furniture-making business manufactures quality furniture to customers’ orders. It has three production departments and two service departments. Budgeted overhead costs for the coming year are as follows:
|
|
Total (L)
|
|
Rent and Rates
|
12800
|
|
Machine insurance
|
6000
|
|
Telephone charges
|
3200
|
|
Depreciation
|
18000
|
|
Production Supervisor’s salaries
|
24000
|
|
Heating & Lighting
|
6400
|
|
|
70400
|
The three production departments — A, B and C, and the two service departments — X and Y, are housed in the new premises, the details of which, together with other statistics and information, are given below.
|
|
|
Departments
|
|
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
X
|
Y
|
|
Floor area occupied (sq.metres)
|
3000
|
1800
|
600
|
600
|
400
|
|
Machine value (£000)
|
24
|
10
|
8
|
4
|
2
|
|
Direct labour hrs budgeted
|
3200
|
1800
|
1000
|
|
|
|
Labour rates per hour
|
£3.80
|
£3.50
|
£3.40
|
£3.00
|
£3.00
|
|
Allocated Overheads:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specific to each department (£000)
|
2.8
|
1.7
|
L2
|
0.8
|
0.6
|
|
Service Department X’s costs apportioned
|
50%
|
25%
|
25%
|
|
|
|
Service Department Y’s costs apportioned
|
20%
|
30%
|
50%
|
|
|
Required:
Prepare a statement showing the overhead cost budgeted for each department, showing the basis of apportionment use-a-Al so calculate suitable overhead absorption rates.
Two pieces of furniture are to be manufactured for customers. Direct costs are as follows:
|
|
Job 123
|
Job 124
|
|
Direct Material
|
£154
|
£108
|
|
Direct Labour
|
20 hours Dept A
|
16 hours Dept A
|
|
|
12 hours Dept B
|
10 hours Dept B
|
|
|
10 hours Dept C
|
14 hours Dept C
|
Calculate the total costs of each job.
(c) If the firm quotes prices to customers that reflect a required profit of 25% on selling Trice, calculate the quoted selling price for each job.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overhead analysis sheet and calculation of overhead rates
Dunstan Ltd manufactures tents and sleeping bags in three separate production departments. The principal manufacturing processes consist of cutting material in the pattern cutting room, and sewing the material in either the tent or the sleeping bag departments. For the year to 31 July cost centre expenses and other relevant information are budgeted as follows:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Raw
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cutting
|
|
Sleeping
|
Material
|
Can-
|
Main-
|
|
|
Total
|
room
|
Tents
|
bags
|
stores
|
teen
|
tenance
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
wages
|
147200
|
6400
|
19500
|
20100
|
41200
|
15000
|
45000
|
|
Consumable materials
|
54600
|
5300
|
4100
|
2300
|
|
18700
|
24200
|
|
Plant depreciation
|
84200
|
31200
|
17500
|
24600
|
2500
|
3400
|
5000
|
|
Power
|
31700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Heat and light
|
13800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rent and rates
|
14400
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Building insurance
|
13500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Floor area (sq. ft)
|
30000
|
8000
|
10000
|
7000
|
1500
|
2500
|
1000
|
|
Estimated power usage (%)
|
|
17
|
38
|
|
3
|
8
|
2
|
|
Direct labour (hours)
|
112000
|
7000
|
48000
|
57000
|
|
|
|
|
Machine usage (hours)
|
87000
|
2000
|
40000
|
4500
|
|
|
|
|
Value of raw material
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
issues (%)
|
100
|
62.5
|
12.5
|
12.5
|
|
|
12.5
|
Requirements:
(a) Prepare in columnar form a statement calculating the overhead absorption rates for each machine hour and each direct labour hour for each of the three production units. You should use bases of apportionment and absorption which you consider most appropriate, and the bases used should be clearly indicated in your statement.
(b) `The use of pre-determined overhead absorption rates based on budgets is preferable to the use of absorption rates calculated from historical data available after the end of a financial period.’
Discuss this statement insofar as it relates to the financial management of a business.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculation of overhead absorption rates and under/over-recovery of overheads
BEC Limited operates an absorption costing system. Its budget for the year ended 31 December shows that it expects its production overhead expenditure to be as follows:
|
|
Fixed
|
Variable
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Machining department
|
600 000
|
480 000
|
|
Hand finishing department
|
360 000
|
400 000
|
During the year it expects to make 200 000 units of its product. This is expected to take 80 000 machine hours in the machining department and 120 000 labour hours in the hand finishing department.
The costs and activity are expected to arise evenly throughout the year, and the budget has been used as the basis of calculating the company’s absorption rates.
During March the monthly profit statement reported
(i) that the actual hours worked in each department were
|
Machining
|
6000 hours
|
|
Hand finishing
|
9600 hours
|
(ii) that the actual overhead costs incurred were
|
|
Fixed
|
Variable
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Machining
|
48500
|
36000
|
|
Hand finishing
|
33600
|
33500
|
(iii) that the actual production was 15 000 units.
Required:
(a) Calculate appropriate predetermined absorption rates for the year ended 31 December
(i) Calculate the under/over absorption of overhead for each department of the company for March;
(ii) Comment on the problems of using predetermined absorption rates based on the arbitrary apportionment of over-head costs, with regard to comparisons of actual/target performance;
(c) State the reasons why absorption costing is used by companies.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculation of under/over recovery of overheads
A company produces several products which pass through the two production departments in its factory. These two departments are concerned with filling and sealing operations. There are two service departments, maintenance and canteen, in the factory.
Predetermined overhead absorption rates, based on direct labour hours, are established for the two production departments. The budgeted expenditure for these departments for the period just ended, including the apportionment of service department overheads, was £110 040 for filling, and £53 300 for sealing. Budgeted direct labour hours were 13 100 for filling and 10 250 for sealing.
Service department overheads are apportioned as follows:
|
Maintenance — Filling
|
70% –
|
|
Maintenance — Sealing
|
27%
|
|
Maintenance — Canteen
|
3%
|
|
Canteen — Filling
|
60%
|
|
— Sealing
|
32%
|
|
— Maintenance
|
8%
|
During the period just ended, actual overhead costs and activity were as follows:
|
|
Direct
|
labour
|
|
|
(£)
|
Hours
|
|
Filling
|
74260
|
12820
|
|
Sealing
|
38115
|
10075
|
|
Maintenance
|
25050
|
|
|
Canteen
|
24375
|
|
Required:
(a) Calculate the overheads absorbed in the period and the extent of the under/over absorption in each of the two production departments.
(b) State, and critically assess, the objectives of overhead apportionment and absorption.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product cost calculation and costs for decision-making
Shown below is next year’s budget for an engineering company manufacturing two different products in two production departments, namely a machine shop and an assembly department. A stores department is responsible for storing and issuing materials.
|
Product
|
X
|
Y
|
|
Sales and production
|
4 000
|
5 000
|
|
volume
|
units
|
units
|
|
Material costs, per
|
£16
|
£10
|
|
unit
|
|
|
|
Direct labour:
|
Hours
|
Hours
|
|
|
per unit
|
per unit
|
|
Machine shop
|
10
|
12
|
|
(£5 per hour)
|
|
|
|
Assembly department
|
8
|
10
|
|
(£4 per hour)
|
|
|
|
Machining:
|
|
|
|
Machine shop
|
8
|
14
|
|
Assembly department
|
1
|
|
|
|
Machine
|
Assembly
|
Stores
|
|
|
shop
|
department
|
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
£
|
|
Production overhead:
|
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
561000
|
254200
|
|
|
Fixed
|
588000
|
392000
|
42000
|
|
|
1149000
|
646200
|
42000
|
|
Number of employees
|
40
|
60
|
4
|
|
Floor area (M2)
|
6000
|
6000
|
2000
|
|
Material usage
|
£80000
|
£60000
|
|
Maximum practical capacity is 140 000 machine hours for the machine shop and additional capacity for the assembly department is easily obtainable. Machine hour capacity cannot be increased over the next year. Fixed overheads are common and unavoidable to all alternatives and will remain unchanged irrespective of the level of production tapacity.,
Overheads are charged to production on the basis of budgeted activity, and selling prices are determined on a cost-plus basis by adding 20 per cent to total cost.
(a) You are required to establish an appropriate overhead absorption rate for each production department and calculate the selling price for each unit using the company’s cost-plus pricing method. You must clearly state and briefly justify the methods of overhead absorption used.
(b) In addition to the above data, two special orders have been received, outside the normal run of business, and not provided for in the budget. They are as follows:
(i) an order for 1000 units of product X from Regan plc offering to pay £200 per unit for them;
(ii) a contract to supply 500 units per month of product X from Thatcher plc for 12 months at a price per unit of £220.
You are required to set out the considerations which the management of the engineering company should take into account when deciding whether to accept each of these orders, and advise the company as far as you are able on the basis of the information given.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information relates to the purchasing activity in a division of the Etna Company for the next year:
|
(1) Resources supplied
|
|
|
10 full-time staff at £30 000 per year
|
|
|
(including employment costs)
|
= £300 000 annual activity cost
|
|
Cost driver
|
= Number of purchase orders processed
|
|
|
|
|
Quantity of cost driver supplied per year:
|
|
|
(Each member of staff can process 1500 orders per year)
|
= 15 000 purchase orders
|
|
Estimated cost driver rate
|
= £20 per purchase order
|
|
|
(£300 000/15 000 orders)
|
|
(2) Resources used
|
|
|
Estimated number of purchase orders to be
|
|
|
processed during the year
|
= 13 000
|
|
Estimated cost of resources used assigned
|
|
|
to parts and materials
|
= £260 000 (13 000 x £20)
|
|
(3) Cost of unused capacity
|
|
|
Resources supplied (15 000) — Resources
|
|
|
used (13 000) at £20 per order
|
= £40 000 (2000 x £20)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information provides details of the costs, volume and cost drivers for a particular period in respect of ABC plc, a hypothetical company:
|
|
Product X
|
Product Y
|
Product Z
|
Total
|
|
1. Production and sales (units)
|
30000
|
20000
|
8000
|
|
|
2. Raw material usage (units)
|
5
|
5
|
11
|
|
|
3. Direct material cost
|
£25
|
£20
|
£11
|
£1238000
|
|
4. Direct labour hours
|
|
2
|
1
|
88000
|
|
5. Machine hours
|
13
|
1
|
2
|
76000
|
|
6. Direct labour cost
|
£8
|
£12
|
£6
|
|
|
7. Number of production runs
|
3
|
7
|
_ 20′
|
30
|
|
8. Number of deliveries
|
9
|
3
|
20
|
32
|
|
9. Number of receipts (2 x 7)a
|
15
|
35
|
220
|
270
|
|
10. Number of production orders
|
15
|
10
|
25
|
50
|
|
11. Overhead costs:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Set-up
|
30000
|
|
|
|
|
Machines
|
760000
|
|
|
|
|
Receiving
|
435000
|
|
|
|
|
Packing
|
250000
|
|
|
|
|
Engineering
|
373000
|
|
|
|
|
|
£1848000
|
|
|
|
The company operates a just-in-time inventory policy, and receives each component once per production run.
In the past the company has allocated overheads to products on the basis of direct labour hours.
However, the majority of overheads are more closely related to machine hours than direct labour hours.
The company has recently redesigned its cost system by recovering overheads using two volume-related bases: machine hours and a materials handling overhead rate for recovering overheads of the receiving department. Both the current and the previous cost system reported low profit margins for product X, which is the company’s highest-selling product. The management accountant has recently attended a conference on activity-based costing, and the overhead costs for the last period have been analysed by the major activities in order to compute activity-based costs.
From the above information you are required to:
(a) Compute the product costs using a traditional volume-related costing system based on the assumptions that:
(i) all overheads are recovered on the basis of direct labour hours (i.e. the company’s past product costing system);
(ii) the overheads of the receiving department are recovered by a materials handling overhead rate and the remaining overheads are recovered using a machine hour rate (i.e. the company’s current costing system).
(b) Compute product costs using an activity-based costing system.
(c) Briefly explain the differences between the product cost computations in (a) and (b).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
`It is now fairly widely accepted that conventional cost accounting distorts management’s view of business through unrepresentative overhead allocation and inappropriate product costing.
This is because the traditional approach usually absorbs overhead costs across products and orders solely on the basis of the direct labour involved in their manufacture. And as direct labour as a proportion of total manufacturing cost continues to fall, this leads to more and more distortion and misrepresentation of the impact of particular products on total overhead costs.’
(From an article in The Financial Times) You are required to discuss the above and to suggest what approaches are being adopted by management accountants to overcome such criticism.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Large service organisations, such as banks and hospitals, used to be noted for their lack of standard costing systems, and their relatively unsophisticated budgeting and control systems compared with large manufacturing organisations. But this is changing and many large service organisations are now revising their use of management accounting techniques.
Requirements:
(a) Explain which features of large-scale service organisations encourage the application of activity-based approaches to the analysis of cost information.
(b) Explain which features of service organisations may create problems for the application of activity-based costing.
(c) Explain the uses for activity-based cost information in service industries.
(d) Many large service organisations were at one time state-owned, but have been privatised. Examples in some countries include electricity supply and telecommunications. They are often regulated. Similar systems of regulation of prices by an independent authority exist in many countries, and are designed to act as a surrogate for market competition in industries where it is difficult to ensure a genuinely competitive market.
Explain which aspects of cost information and systems in service organisations would particularly interest a regulator, and why these features would be of interest.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following activity volumes are associated with the product line for the period as a whole. Total activities for the period:
|
|
|
Number of
|
|
|
|
Number of
|
movements
|
Number of
|
|
|
set-ups
|
of materials
|
inspections
|
|
Product X
|
75
|
12
|
150
|
|
Product Y
|
115
|
21
|
180
|
|
Product Z
|
480
|
87
|
670
|
|
|
670
|
120
|
1000
|
You are required
(b) to calculate the cost per unit for each product using ABC principles;
(c) to comment on the reasons for any differences in the costs in your answers to (a) and (b).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of conventional costing and ABC profit statements
The following budgeted information relates to Bruin plc for the forthcoming period:
|
|
Products
|
|
|
XYI
|
YZT
|
ABW
|
|
|
(000)
|
(000)
|
(000)
|
|
Sales and production (units)
|
50
|
40
|
30
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Selling price (per unit)
|
45
|
95
|
73
|
|
Prime cost (per unit)
|
32
|
84
|
65
|
|
|
Hours
|
Hours
|
Hours
|
|
Machine department (machine hours per unit)
|
2
|
5
|
4
|
|
Assembly department (direct labour hours per unit)
|
7
|
3
|
2
|
Overheads allocated and apportioned to production departments (including service cost centre costs) were to be recovered in product costs as follows:
Machine department at £1.20 per machine hour
Assembly department at £0.825 per direct labour hour
You ascertain that the above overheads could be re-analysed into ‘cost pools’ as follows:
|
|
|
|
Quantity
|
|
|
|
|
for the
|
|
Cost pool
|
£000
|
Cost driver
|
period
|
|
Machining
|
357
|
Machine hours
|
420 000
|
|
services
|
|
|
|
|
Assembly
|
318
|
Direct labour
|
530 000
|
|
services
|
|
Hours
|
|
|
Set-up costs
|
26
|
Set-ups
|
520
|
|
Order processing
|
156
|
Customer orders
|
32 000
|
|
Purchasing
|
84
|
Suppliers’ orders
|
11 200
|
|
|
941
|
|
|
You have also been provided with the following estimates for the period:
|
|
|
Products
|
|
|
|
XYI
|
YZT
|
ABW
|
|
Number of set-ups
|
120
|
200
|
200
|
|
Customer orders
|
8000
|
8000
|
16 000
|
|
Suppliers’ orders
|
3000
|
4000
|
4200
|
Required:
(a) Prepare and present profit statements using:
(i) conventional absorption costing;
(ii) activity-based costing;
(b) Comment on why activity-based costing is considered to present a fairer valuation of the product cost per unit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Kalahari Company has received a request for a price quotation from one of its regular customers for an order of 500 units with the following characteristics:
|
Direct labour per unit produced
|
2 hours
|
|
Direct materials per unit produced
|
£22
|
|
Machine hours per unit produced
|
1 hour
|
|
Number of component and material purchases
|
6
|
|
Number of production runs for the components prior to assembly
|
4
|
|
Average set-up time per production run
|
3 hours
|
|
Number of deliveries
|
1
|
|
Number of customer visits
|
2
|
|
Engineering design and support
|
50 hours
|
|
Customer support
|
50 hours
|
Details of the activities required for the order are as follows:
|
Activity
|
Activity cost driver rate
|
|
Direct labour processing and assembly activities
|
10 per labour hour
|
|
Machine processing
|
£30 per machine hour
|
|
Purchasing and receiving materials and
|
|
|
components
|
£100 per purchase order
|
|
Scheduling production
|
£250 per production run
|
|
Setting-up machines
|
£120 per set-up hour
|
|
Packaging and delivering orders to customers
|
£400 per delivery
|
|
Invoicing and accounts administration
|
£120 per customer orde
|
|
Marketing and order negotiation
|
r £300 per customer visit
|
|
Customer support activities including after
|
|
|
sales service
|
£50 per customer service hour
|
|
Engineering design and support
|
£80 per engineering hour
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Auckland Company is launching a new product. Sales volume will be dependent on the selling price and customer acceptance but because the product differs substantially from other products within the same product category it has not been possible to obtain any meaningful estimates of price/demand relationships. The best estimate is that demand is likely to range between 100 000 and 200 000 units provided that the selling price is less than £100. Based on this information the company has produced the following cost estimates and selling prices required to generate a target profit contribution of £2 million from the product.
|
Sales volume (000’s)
|
100
|
120
|
140
|
160
|
180
|
200
|
|
Total cost (£000’s)
|
10 000
|
10 800
|
11 200
|
11 600
|
12 600
|
13 000
|
|
Required profit contribution (£000’s)
|
2 000
|
2 000
|
2 000
|
2 000
|
2 000
|
2 000
|
|
Required sales revenues (£000’s)
|
12 000
|
12 800
|
13 200
|
13 600
|
14 600
|
15 000
|
|
Required selling price to achieve
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
target profit contribution (£)
|
120.00
|
106.67
|
94.29
|
85.00
|
81.11
|
75.00
|
|
Unit cost (£)
|
100.00
|
90.00
|
80.00
|
72.50
|
70.00
|
65.00
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume now an alternative scenario for the product in Case A. The same cost schedule applies but the £2 million minimum contribution no longer applies. In addition, Auckland now undertakes market research. Based on this research, and comparisons with similar product types and their current selling prices and sales volumes, estimates of sales demand at different selling prices have been made. These estimates, together with the estimates of total costs obtained in Case A are shown below:
|
Potential selling price
|
£100
|
£90
|
£80
|
£70
|
£60
|
|
Estimated sales volume at the potential selling price (000’s)
|
120
|
140
|
180
|
190
|
200
|
|
Estimated total sales revenue (£000’s)
|
12000
|
12600
|
14400
|
13300
|
12000
|
|
Estimated total cost (£000’s)
|
10800
|
11200
|
12600
|
12800
|
13000
|
|
Estimated profit (loss) contribution
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(£000s)
|
1200
|
1400
|
1800
|
500
|
(1000)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Darwin Company has recently adopted customer profitability analysis. It has undertaken a customer profitability review for the past 12 months. Details of the activities and the cost driver rates relating to those expenses that can be attributed to customers are as follows:
|
Activity
|
Cost driver rate
|
|
Sales order processing
|
£300 per sales order
|
|
Sales visits
|
£200 per sales visit
|
|
Normal delivery costs
|
£1 per delivery kilometre travelled
|
|
Special (urgent) deliveries
|
£500 per special delivery
|
|
Credit collection costs
|
10% per annum on average payment time
|
Details relating to four of the firm’s customers are as follows:
|
Customer
|
A
|
B
|
Y
|
Z
|
|
Number of sales orders
|
200
|
100
|
50
|
30
|
|
Number of sales visits
|
20
|
10
|
5
|
5
|
|
Kilometres per delivery
|
300
|
200
|
100
|
50
|
|
Number of deliveries
|
100
|
50
|
25
|
25
|
|
Total delivery kilometres
|
30 000
|
10 000
|
2 500
|
1250
|
|
Special (urgent deliveries)
|
20
|
5
|
0
|
0
|
|
Average collection period
|
90
|
30
|
10
|
10
|
|
(days)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Annual sales
|
£1 million
|
£1 million
|
£0.5 million
|
£2 million
|
|
Annual operating profit
|
£90 000
|
£120 000
|
£70 000
|
£200 000
|
|
contribution
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wright is a builder. His business will have spare capacity over the coming six months and he has been investigating two projects.
Project A
Wright is tendering for a school extension contract. Normally he prices a contract by adding 100% to direct costs, to cover overheads and profit. He calculates direct costs as the actual cost of materials valued on a first-in-first-out basis, plus the estimated wages of direct labour. But for this contract he has prepared more detailed information.
Four types of material will be needed:
|
|
Quantity (units):
|
|
Price per unit:
|
|
|
|
|
Purchase
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
price of
|
Current
|
Current
|
|
|
Needed for
|
Already
|
units
|
purchase
|
resale
|
|
Material
|
contract
|
in stock
|
in stock
|
price
|
price
|
|
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
z
|
1100
|
100
|
7.00
|
10.00
|
8.00
|
|
Y
|
150
|
200
|
40.00
|
44.00
|
38.00
|
|
X
|
600
|
300
|
35.00
|
33.00
|
25.00
|
|
w
|
200
|
400
|
20.00
|
21.00
|
10.00
|
Z and Y are in regular use. Neither X nor W is currently used; X has no foreseeable use in the business, but We could be used on other jobs in place of material currently costing £16 per unit.
The contract will last for six months and requires two craftsmen, whose basic annual wage cost is £16 000 each. To complete the contract in time it will also be necessary to pay them a bonus of £700 each. Without the contract they would be retained at their normal pay rates, doing work which will otherwise be done by temporary workers engaged for the contract period at a total cost of £11 800.
Three casual labourers would also be employed specifically for the, contract at a cost of £4000 each.
The contract will require two types of equipment: general-purpose equipment already owned by Wright, which will be retained at the end of the contract, and specialized equipment to be purchased second-hand, which will be sold at the end of the contract.
The general-purpose equipment cost £21 000 two years ago and is being depreciated on a straight-line basis over a seven-year life (with assumed zero scrap value). Equivalent new equipment can be purchased currently for £49 000. Second-hand prices for comparable general-purpose equipment, and those for the relevant specialized equipment, are shown below.
|
|
General-purpose
|
Specialized
|
|
|
equipment
|
equipment
|
|
|
Purchase
|
Resale
|
Purchase
|
Resale
|
|
|
price
|
price
|
price
|
price
|
|
|
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
(£)
|
|
Current
|
20 000
|
17 200
|
9000
|
7400
|
|
After 6 months:
|
|
|
|
|
|
if used for
|
15 000
|
12 600
|
7000
|
5800
|
|
6 months if not used
|
19 000
|
16 400
|
8000
|
6500
|
The contract will require the use of a yard on which Wright has a four-year lease at a fixed rental of £2000 per year. If Wright does not get the contract the yard will probably remain empty. The contract will also incur administrative expenses estimated at £5000.
Project B
If Wright does not get the contract he will buy a building plot for £20 000 and build a house. Building costs will depend on weather conditions:
|
Weather condition
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
|
Probability
|
0.4
|
0.4
|
0.2
|
|
Building costs
|
£60000
|
£80 000
|
£95 000
|
|
(excluding land)
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
`In providing information to the product manager, the accountant must recognize that decision-making is essentially a process of choosing between competing alternatives, each with its own combination of income and costs; and that the relevant concepts to employ are future incremental costs and revenues and opportunity cost, not full cost which includes past or sunk costs.’ (Sizer) Descriptive studies of pricing decisions taken in practice have, on the other hand, suggested that the inclusion of overhead and joint cost allocations in unit product costs is widespread in connection with the provision of information for this class of decision. Furthermore, these costs are essentially historic costs.
You are required to:
(a) explain the reasoning underlying the above quotation;
(b) suggest reasons why overhead and joint cost allocation is nevertheless widely used in practice in connection with information for pricing decisions;
(c) set out your own views as to the balance of these arguments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion of pricing strategies
A producer of high quality executive motor cars has developed a new model which it knows to be very advanced both technically and in style by comparison with the competition in its market segment.
The company’s reputation for high quality is well-established and its servicing network in its major markets is excellent. However, its record in timely delivery has not been so good in previous years, though this has been improving consider-ably.
In the past few years it has introduced annual variations/improvements in its major models. When it launched a major new vehicle some six years ago the recommended retail price was so low in relation to the excellent specification of the car that a tremendous demand built up quickly and a two-year queue for the car developed within six months. Within three months a second-hand model had been sold at an auction for nearly 50% more than the list price and even after a year of production a sizeable premium above list price was being obtained.
The company considers that, in relation to the competition, the proposed new model will be as attractive as was its predecessor six years ago. Control of costs is very good so that accurate cost data for the new model are to hand. For the previous model, the company assessed the long-term targeted annual production level and calculated its prices on that basis. In the first year, production was 30% of that total.
For the present model the company expects that the relationship between first-year production and longer-term annual production will also be about 30%, though the absolute levels in both cases are expected to be higher than previously. –
The senior management committee, of which you are a member, has been asked to recommend the pricing approach that the company should adopt for the new model.
You are required
(a) to list the major pricing approaches available in this situation and discuss in some detail the relative merits and disadvantages to the company of each approach in the context of the new model;
(b) to recommend which approach you would propose, giving your reasons;
(c) to outline briefly in which ways, if any, your answers to (a) and (b) above would differ if, instead of a high quality executive car, you were pricing a new family model of car with some unusual features that the company might introduce.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 3: Capstone Research Project(Caterpillar “CAT”)
Due Week 10 and worth 440 points
Project Parameters:
You have been selected as the consultant to develop a business plan for Durango Manufacturing Company, which is a start-up, medium-sized public manufacturing company. The CEO has a background in manufacturing and is well versed in supply chain management. However, the CEO has limited experience in financial management and creating value for the various stakeholder groups. Your business plan must include a five (5) year strategy to increase revenues by 10% and a recommendation for creating an organizational structure to comply with SOX mandates for strong corporate governance over the internal controls. Your business plan must also include prescriptions for creating an ethical environment. Your recommendation must be approved by the Board of Directors before the company can begin its operations.
Based on your knowledge of accounting and financial, prepare a ten to twelve (10-12) page report in which you:
1. As the consultant, create an argument that you will present to the CEO that suggests accounting and financial management knowledge and skills will be essential to the company’s success and stability over the next five (5) years. Provide support for your argument.
2. Suggest to the CEO how the company’s stakeholders (investors, lenders, and employees) will use financial statement information and ratio calculations to make key determinations related to the financial condition and operational efficiency of the company. Provide support for your rationale.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
e the information below to prepare the bank reconciliation for Collier Cleaners for the month of September.
· The bank statement indicated bank service charges of $63.
· Outstanding checks as of September 30 amounted to $1,405.
· Deposits in transit as of September 30 amounted to $2,769.
· The ending balance per the September bank statement is $40,753.
· Collier Cleaners bookkeeper mistakenly recorded a $1,610 cash disbursement as $1,160 for Office Supplies on check #2402.
· The bank mistakenly recorded a deposit of $2,800 as $280 on February 17.
· The bank made an EFT payment on behalf of the company for Insurance for $3,200.
· Bank collected rent of $3,000 and a note, for $16,450, including interest of $450.
· The ending cash balance per the books for September before any adjustments was 28,900
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Choose any company (your choice) and do the following SIX (6) items:
1. First of all discuss how the REA approach to database design will overcome problems with traditional approaches for your company of choice.
2. Identify the Resources, Events and Agents entity types in your company.
3. Discuss the economic duality that occurs in your company.
4. Develop three (3) individual REA diagrams.
5. Develop one (1) Enterprise-Wide REA model (i.e. View Integration).
6. Discuss the competitive advantages of using the REA approach in your company. This will be done by doing a value chain analysis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Introduction:
HIH Insurance was founded by Ray Williams and Michael Payne in 1968 as “M W Payne Underwriting Agency Pty Ltd”. In 1971, it was acquired by the British company called CE Health PLC. In 1980, Ray Williams was appointed to the board of CE Health PLC. It transferred its business operations to “CE Health International Holdings” in 1989. CE Health International Holdings begin to float on the Australian Stock Exchange in 1992. CE Health International Holdings acquired CIC Insurance group in 1995 and CIC Holdings increased its share in CE Health International Holdings to 50%. CIC Holding was purchased by Winterhur Swiss Insurance Company (Winterhur Swiss). CE Health International Holdings changed its name to HIH Winterhur in May 1996. Winterhur Swiss sold its 51% share in HIH to the public and HIH was renamed as HIH Insurance Ltd.
The collapse of HIH had a more far-reaching adverse effect upon the society. The victims include the stockholders, the general creditors, the policy holder and the entities whose interests are implicitly associated with the condition of the insurance policy. On March 15, 2001 HIH group got the provisional liquidation position. The HIH collapse became the biggest financial collapse in Australia’s corporate history with the estimated deficiency amounted to be between $3.6 billion and $5.3 billion. According to the auditing point of view, the HIH case is characterized by the continuous financial downfall, the debateable corporate governance model setting and practice, and manifest high risk areas. The Andersen Accounting Firm, being the main auditor and external advisor failed to serve the watch-dog function as per the interest of the stakeholder.
When McGrath was appointed as a provisional liquidator, he estimated that HIH had lost over $800 million over the six months period to 31st December 2000. He also attributed that HIH company failures to false reports, fraud, reckless management, greed, rapid expansion, extensive and complex reinsurance arrangements, under-pricing, reserve problems, unsupervised delegation of authority, incompetence, and self–dealing. HIH liquidators estimated that the company collapsed with losses totalling up to $5.3 billion.
Accounting Irregularities:
- Manipulation of Stock Market:
After an investigation by Australian Securities & Investment Commission (ASIC), criminal charges were laid against a former HIH director Rodney Adler, for his involvement in stock manipulation. Pacific Eagle Equities Pty Ltd, an Adler controlled company purchased 1,873,661 HIH shares on 15 June 2000, 951,339 HIH shares on 16 June 2000 and 425,000 HIH shares on 19 June 2000 (ASIC, 2002) with HIH funds after Adler convinced Ray Williams to transfer $10 million from HIH to Pacific Eagle Equities.
- Misleading and False Information:
Adler made an effort to persuade investors to purchase HIH shares by telling a finance journalist in an interview on 20 June 2000 that he had purchased 1,873,661 HIH shares on 15 June 2000 and 951,339 HIH shares on 16 June 2000 for himself (ASIC, 2002). Adler also told the journalist that the share price for HIH was undervalued and presented an opportunity for a quick profit (Elias, 2005).
- Acting Dishonestly:
Business Thinking System, a company in which Adler had an interest was in financial trouble in October 2000. Adler told Williams that the company had raised $2.5 million, which in truth it had not, so that Adler was able to seek $2 million investment from HIH. Adler also tried to convince the board that he was prepared to invest $500,000 if HIH invested $2 million in BTS. The HIH board discussed and approved the $2 million investment in BTS in a meeting on November 2000. Adler attended the meeting but failed to disclose his financial interest in the business and neither did he disclose his knowledge of its financial affairs.
- Failed Corporate Governance:
According to the agency theory, the major reason for corporation bankruptcy mainly consists of the agency cost problem arising from the agency conflict between the proprietors, managers and the debtors within the organization. On the basis of the financial theory, the equilibrium between the debtors and the stock holders can be maintained on dynamic basis, because the impairment of the interest of debtor will also reduce the company’s value and may also cause damage to the stockholders’ own interest. For the purpose of maintaining the equilibrium, the corporate governance is key element of critical importance.
HIH’s board of directors was composed of 5 non-executive directors and 2 executive directors. The non-executive directors were actively involved into the function of board of directors by taking a position in the relevant audit committee and remuneration committee etc. Such kind of structure of board of directors made the corporate governance of HIH to have a flaw.
As a direct or indirect result, the practice of corporate governance of HIH presents some odd features, such as dearth of clearly defined and recorded policies or guidelines, lack of independent critical analysis to the management’s proposal and failure to recognize and resolve the conflicts of interest.
- Conflict of Interest:
Among five non-executive directors, two directors were former partners of Arthur Andersen accounting firm, the major auditor and advisor of HIH. In the past, Arthur Anderson had earned $7 million from other non-auditing services and $8 million from auditing HIH financial statements. HIH had paid an amount of $1.7 million to Andersons for auditing services, with $1.631 million for the provision of other non-auditing services in 2000. The non-auditing services are regarded as major detracting source from the independence of the auditor and related director. Justin Gardener, member of audit committee, used to be the auditor of FAI in 1980’s and FAI was sold to HIH in 1998. This acquisition was regarded as one of the main reason for the failure of HIH Company as HIH has to pay huge cost for acquiring FAI.
The misjudgement and undue diligence for investigation of the financial perspective of FAI contributed the flawed transaction. A controlled entity paid an insurance premium to insure directors and officers of the parent entity and its controlled entities against its liability. The contract covered the directors including the non-executive directors. Due to the confidentiality in the contract, the company did not disclose the amount of insurance premium payable and a summary of the nature of liabilities covered by the insurance contract. Due to lack of independence, the non-executive directors failed to fulfil their due function in corporate governance system of HIH and tend to indulge the managers to run the company at their own discretion.
- In adequate Risk Management:
The risk management plays a vital role in the operation of the company according to the nature of the company. Although the board had set an investment committee to analyse the risk of investment and set investment guidelines on currency and property dealings, the fact of three major investment failure mentioned above provides ample evidence that the risk management of HIH had not been well shaped and performed. The directors were negligent in terms of analysing the strategy for investment decisions and determining the risk in relation to the investment with adequate appropriate information sources.
- Lack of Independent information resources:
The accounting system plays a vital role in the function of the corporate governance systems. For the company as large as HIH, it is not feasible and economical to collect and process the information necessary for the non-executive directors by themselves to fulfil their duties. Hence the non-executive directors have no choice but to depend on the accounting system organized and directed by the management. Therefore, it represents an inherent risk of the corporate governance system. In order to mitigate potential effect brought by the defect, the company seeks help from such below institutional arrangements.
- A finance director is included into the board so that the non-executive directors can be more properly and directly informed of the accounting information.
- To ensure that the audit committee functions independently and effectively so that the non-executive directors can have faith in the audited accounting information.
HIH seemed to have fallen short of the above requirement. First of all, there was no finance director included in the board and Ray Williams (CEO), handled the management and accounting information provision. Secondly, because of the defect in the independence of the non-executive directors who were responsible in composing the audit committee, the function effect of the audit committee deserved to be doubted.
- Lack of Professional Scepticism:
HIH failure is undoubtedly the failure of the auditing committee. Between 1998 and 2001, Andersen accounting firm had employed client-risk assessment mechanism that had referred HIH as a maximum risk client. The internal operations manual required the firm to apply risk management procedures and plan. Because of the fact of any extreme material misstatement, Andersen’s policy required a rigorous review of the consulting report. However, the firm failed to involve any expert assistance in considering the risk assessment. It relied upon HIH’s internal business audit processes without conducting any evaluation or testing the operations, procedures and policies of the internal audit function even though the audit team had identified potential flaws in HIH’s internal audit division.
- Other Accounting Issues:
The firm also failed to handle numbers of accounting inconsistencies. These were pointed out by the Royal Commission as:
- Accounting for future income tax benefits
- Deferred Acquisition Costs
- Deferred information technology costs and
- Goodwill
When a company incurs a tax loss, the company’s ability to realise the related future income tax benefits in subsequent periods will come into questioning. As per the commission’s view, the auditor failed to generate sufficient evidence to believe that HIH would continue to operate profitably in the future.
Andersen did not fulfil its duty to research with respect to the recoverability of deferred acquisition cost instead of relying on professional judgement. Many other questions were raised about Andersen’s accounting for goodwill, whether the future benefits will eventuate or goodwill can be measured reliably. Goodwill represented a massive 50% of HIH’s shareholder funds in June 2000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Trois-Rivieres Manufacturing has 10,000 bonds (face value of $1,000 each) with a 10 percent coupon maturing in 8 years. It’s preferreds (100,000 shares) pay a 7.5 percent dividend and it has 600,000 common shares outstanding.Retained earningsare reported at $4,500,000.
During the past five years, Trois-Rivieres Manufacturing has enjoyed a steady growth, with common stockdividendsgrowing from $0.80 to $1.23 (just recently paid). The common share price currently trades at $15. If the new shares were issued at $15, they would require flotation expenses of 7 percent of proceeds.
The preferred shares currently trade at $26.50, and any new issue would require flotation expenses of 5 percent of price to investors.
The bonds currently pay interest semiannually and are trading at a price that yields a nominal 12 percent annual rate (12.36 effective annual rate). Flotation costs of new debt would be 4 percent of proceeds.
Trois-Rivieres tax rate is 38 percent, and equity financing would require a new share issue.
Calculate the weighted average cost of capital of Trois-Rivieres Manufacturing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Island Capital has the following capital structure:
The existing bonds have a coupon rate of 8 percent with 18 years left to maturity, but current yields on these bonds are 11 percent. Flotation costs are $25 per $1,000 bond would be expected on a new issue.
The existing perpetuals have a $25 par value and an annual dividend rate of 9 percent. New perpetuals could be issued at $50 par value with an 8 percent yield. Flotation costs would be 3 percent. There are 4 million common shares outstanding that currently trade at $18 per share and expect to pay a dividend next year of $1.75 that will continue to grow at 7 percent per annum for the foreseeable future. New shares could be issue at $17.50 and would require flotation expenses of 5 percent of proceeds.
Island’s tax rate is 39 percent, and it is expected that internally generated funds will be sufficient to fund capital projects in the near future.
a. Compute Island Capital’s current cost of capital with market value weightings.
b. How would the cost of capital calculation change if new shares are required to fund the equity component of the capital structure?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fredonia Inc. had a bad year in 2013. For the first time in its history, it operated at a loss. The company’s income statement showed the following results from selling 76,100 units of product: Net sales $ 1,491,560 ; total costs and expenses $ 1,758,600 ; and net loss $ 267,040 . Costs and expenses consisted of the following.
|
|
Total |
|
Variable |
|
Fixed |
| Cost of goods sold |
|
$ 1,208,200 |
|
$ 784,100 |
|
$ 424,100 |
| Selling expenses |
|
419,300 |
|
74,000 |
|
345,300 |
| Administrative expenses |
|
131,100 |
|
52,000 |
|
79,100 |
|
|
$ 1,758,600 |
|
$ 910,100 |
|
$ 848,500 |
Management is considering the following independent alternatives for 2014.
| 1. |
|
Increase unit selling price 29 % with no change in costs and expenses. |
| 2. |
|
Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $ 200,000 to total salaries of $ 37,500 plus a 5% commission on net sales. |
| 3. |
|
Purchase new high-tech factory machinery that will change the proportion between variable and fixed cost of goods sold to 50:50. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume the following facts:2008 Taxable income (modified) $7,000 2009 Net operating loss ($12,000)2010 Taxable income (modified) $12,000 2011 Taxable income (modified) $24,0002012 Net operating loss ($18,000) 2013 Net operating loss ($20,000)
Also assume:1. that the taxpayer has consistently elected to carry back the net operating losses as incurred.2. there was no taxable income in tax years prior to 2008.
Required:a. To what years can the 2009, 2012 and 2013 net operating losses be carried back?b. After applying the net operating losses for 2009, 2012 and 2013 to prior years (if and where permitted), what amount, if any, is available as a net operating loss to be carried forward to future years?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Memo Report:
500 words
due on 7 of june 11am
i attached file call “Marking Rubric”,marks are given according to the sheet by the lecture.